QSS-37 Series LP7500/LP7600/LP7700/LP7900 Service Manual

Distributed by: minilablaser.
com
QSS-37 series
LP7500/LP7600/LP7700/LP7900
Service Manual
Issued in November, 2007
– for service personnel only –

Distributed by: minilablaser.com
CHAPTER DESCRIPTION
1.Cautions for work
2.Replacement and adjustment of parts
3.Mode
4.Troubleshooting
5.Operation sequence
6.Electrical parts
7.Setup for service personnel
8.Appendix
Notes to service personnel

Be sure to read this manual carefully to gain a thorough understanding of the correct procedures before servicing this product.
The printer processor uses tapping truss head screws, spike truss head screws and Washer head screws (for ground). When
attaching the screws once removed, make sure they are on their original positions. These screws are used for the place where
grounding is required.
Tapping truss head screw
Spike truss head screw (green)
Washer head screw (for ground)
SCREW
System program:
• QSS-3701/3702(S)/3703/3704/3705: Ver.5
• 7500/7600/7700/7900: Ver.2
! It is prohibited to show, provide, lend or transfer this manual to others except the service personnel.
! The contents of this manual are subject to change without notice.
! Illustrations in this manual may vary depending on the model or manufacturing lot.
Explanation of manual
Description for each specification
This manual contains the maintenance procedure for all the specifications.
The procedure for each specification may differ.
Symbols used when procedures vary
The specification mark is mentioned for the procedure.
Specification Mark
Normal specification [N]
F specification [F]
(CP49E/CP49LR)
EC Specification [EC]
SM specification [SM]
J specification [J]
There is no specification mark for the procedure which is same for all the specifications.
About the chapters
" 1. Cautions for work

Contains information on how to achieve safety in service operations. Be sure to read precautions thoroughly and
carefully.
" 2. Replacement and adjustment of parts
Describes how to remove or replace component parts and units, and how to adjust each part in replacement.
" 3. Mode
Shows the service personnel mode transition.
" 4. Troubleshooting
This chapter explains the corrective action for trouble.
" 5. Operation sequence
Describes the operation sequence.
" 6. Electrical parts
Describes the PCBs used.
" 7. Setup for service personnel
Describes the setup procedures for service personnel.
" 8. Appendix
Describes the wiring diagram.
Symbols used in this manual
This section explains the definitions of the symbols used in this manual.
This is called the alert symbol.

Text following this symbol contains particularly important information concerning safety. Be sure to heed this information.
This symbol is used in conjunction with the words DANGER, WARNING and CAUTION, according to the possible
degree of injury to people or damage to physical property.
The Important symbol indicates supplementary explanations, operations or procedures that require caution and instructions
that must be followed.
ii
The pointing finger symbol indicates the manual or section where you can find additional information.
The Note symbol indicates useful information on functions and instructions.
Abbreviations for processing solutions used in this manual
The names of the processing solutions in this manual are indicated as shown below. Some types of processing solutions may
have other names.
Processing solutions Abbreviations
Color Developer CD
Bleach Fixer BF
Stabilizer STB
iii
This page is intentionally blank.
iv
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Notes to service personnel
Explanation of manual ............................................................................................................................ii
Description for each specification ...................................................................................................ii
About the chapters ..........................................................................................................................ii
Symbols used in this manual ..........................................................................................................ii
Abbreviations for processing solutions used in this manual ........................................................... iii
1. Cautions for work

Description of warnings (signal words) .................................................................................. 10010
Description of warnings (signal words) ................................................................................................................10010
Location of warning labels ...................................................................................................... 10020
Location of warning labels ...................................................................................................................................10020
For safe operation .................................................................................................................. 10030
For safe operation .................................................................................................................................................10030
Prevention of static electricity when replacing and maintaining the electrical parts ...........................................10040
Laser Precautions ..................................................................................................................................................10050
2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

System list .............................................................................................................................. 20005
System list .............................................................................................................................................................20005
Removing covers ................................................................................................................... 20010
Removing covers (Printer section) .......................................................................................................................20010
Removing each cover (Processor section) [print sorter unit (6-inch type, 17/14 orders)] [F] ..............................20020
Removing each cover (Processor section) [print sorter unit (6-inch type, 17/14 orders)] [N] [SM] ....................20020
Removing each cover (Processor section) [print sorter unit (6-inch type, 17/14 orders)] [J] ..............................20020
Removing each cover (Processor section) [print sorter unit (10-inch type)] .................................................... 20020-5
Adjusting belt tension ............................................................................................................. 20110
Adjusting the belt tension (printer section) ..........................................................................................................20110
Adjusting the belt tension (processor section) (QSS-3701/3702/3703/LP7500/LP7600) ....................................20120
Adjusting the belt tension (processor section) (QSS-3704/3705/LP7700/LP7900) ......................................... 20120-5
Adjusting the belt tension (colorimeter) ...............................................................................................................20125
Magazine section ................................................................................................................... 22000
Checking the paper magazine ...............................................................................................................................22000
Adjusting the zigzagging of the paper magazine deck .........................................................................................22100
Paper supply unit ................................................................................................................... 25610
Removing the paper supply unit ...........................................................................................................................25610
Removal and the right angle adjustment of the cutter unit ...................................................................................25620
Adjusting the timing of the paper supply pressure change sensor ........................................................................25630
Adjusting the paper hold timing of the paper hold motor ....................................................................................25640
Adjusting the CVP imprint pressure .....................................................................................................................25650
Removing paper supply unit A .............................................................................................................................25660
Paper supply unit A2 .............................................................................................................. 25710
Removing paper supply unit A2 ...........................................................................................................................25710
v
Exposure advance unit ........................................................................................................... 25810

Removing the exposure advance unit ...................................................................................................................25810
Replacing the pressure guide in the exposure advance unit .................................................................................25820
Banding adjustment for the exposure advance unit ..............................................................................................25830
Banding shooting ..................................................................................................................................................25910
Paper advance unit 1 ............................................................................................................. 26510
Removing paper advance unit 1 ...........................................................................................................................26510
Paper advance unit 2 ............................................................................................................. 26550
Removing paper advance unit 2 ...........................................................................................................................26550
Removing the paper advance pressure change motors (right and left) and adjusting the pressure timing for the arm(s)
26560
Adjusting the arm position ....................................................................................................................................26570
Processor loading unit ............................................................................................................ 26610
Removing the processor loading unit ...................................................................................................................26610
Laser unit ............................................................................................................................... 26710
Replacing and adjusting the position of the laser unit ..........................................................................................26710
Zigzag adjustment .................................................................................................................. 26810
Adjusting the zigzagging of the paper advance section ........................................................................................26810
How to adjust the zigzagging in paper supply unit A2 .........................................................................................26820
Drive section .......................................................................................................................... 27230
Adjusting backlash of the dryer rack (QSS-3701/3702/3703/LP7500/LP7600) ..................................................27230
Adjusting the position of the dryer rack ...............................................................................................................27260
Adjusting the drive motor belt tension .................................................................................................................27270
Adjusting backlash of dryer rack (lower) (QSS-3704/3705/LP7700/LP7900) ....................................................27320
Adjusting backlash of dryer rack (upper) (QSS-3704/3705/LP7700/LP7900) ....................................................27330
Order sorter section ............................................................................................................... 27410
Adjusting the stop position of the print receiving tray [Print sorter unit (6-inch type, 17/14 orders)] .................27410
Adjusting the stop position of the print receiving tray [Print sorter unit (10-inch type)] ................................. 27410-5
Removing the print conveyor unit ........................................................................................................................27420
Replacing the print receiving tray [Print sorter unit (6-inch type, 17/14 orders)] ................................................27430
Replacing the paper tray [Print sorter unit (10-inch type)] ............................................................................... 27430-5
Removing the print sorter unit [print sorter unit (6-inch type, 17/14 orders)] .....................................................27440
Removing the print sorter unit [print sorter unit (10-inch type)] ...................................................................... 27440-5
Adjusting the stop position of the paper guide [Print sorter unit (10-inch type)] ............................................. 27450-5
Colorimeter Section ................................................................................................................ 27460
Replacing the colorimeter and the calibration plate .............................................................................................27460
Adjusting the height of the colorimeter ................................................................................................................27470
F replenishment unit [F] ......................................................................................................... 27500
Removing F replenishment unit (QSS-3701/3702/3703/LP7500/LP7600) [F] ....................................................27500
Removing F replenishment unit (QSS-3704/3705/LP7700/LP7900) [F] ......................................................... 27501-5
Removing the replenishment cartridge installation section [F] ............................................................................27510
Replacing the replenishment cartridge opening motor [F] ...................................................................................27520
Replacing the replenishment solution level sensor [F] .........................................................................................27530
Output check for the cartridge flushing valve and replenishment cartridge cleaning pump [F] ..........................27540
Position of the replenishment solution collection hoses [F] .................................................................................27550
vi
Tablet replenishment section ................................................................................................. 27610

Removing the tablet replenishment unit [J] ..........................................................................................................27610
Replacing the module [J] ......................................................................................................................................27620
Replacing the drum drive motor [J] ......................................................................................................................27630
Replacing the elevator motor [J] ...........................................................................................................................27640
Adjusting the tension of the elevator chain [J] .....................................................................................................27650
Adjusting the position of the elevator upper sensor [J] ........................................................................................27660
Adjusting the position of the elevator middle sensor [J] ......................................................................................27670
Adjusting the position of the elevator lower sensor [J] ........................................................................................27680
Cleaning method of the drum of module [J] .........................................................................................................27690
Replacing the STB tablet conveyor motor [J] ......................................................................................................27700
Replenishment package unit .................................................................................................. 27810
Replacing the replenisher pump and the water supply pump [SM] ......................................................................27810
Replacing the probe [SM] .....................................................................................................................................27820
Adjusting the sensitivity of the replenisher solution sensor [SM] ........................................................................27830
3. Mode
Password ............................................................................................................................... 30500
Password ...............................................................................................................................................................30500
Mode structure table .............................................................................................................. 31000
Mode structure table .............................................................................................................................................31000
Maintenance ........................................................................................................................... 31100
Status Display .......................................................................................................................................................31100
Debug Mode (Saving the Logdata) .......................................................................................................................31110
Setup ...................................................................................................................................... 32510
Paper Specification Registration/Setup ................................................................................................................32510
NCE Mode ............................................................................................................................................................32513
Brightness of the Edge ..........................................................................................................................................32514
Exposure Adjustment ............................................................................................................................................32515
Sample images for evaluating image quality (Sample 1/Sample 2) .....................................................................32517
Magazine Registration/Setup ................................................................................................................................32520
Data Initialization .................................................................................................................................................32550
Processor Settings ................................................................................................................. 33001
Print Sensor Adjustment .......................................................................................................................................33001
Standard Replenishment Amount Setting[F] ........................................................................................................33002
Pump Output Amount Setting[F] ..........................................................................................................................33003
Pump Output Amount Setting [N] [SM] ..............................................................................................................33003
Auto Cleaning Water Output Amount Setting[F] .................................................................................................33004
Total Replenishment Amount Display[F] ............................................................................................................33030
Total Replenishment Amount Display [N] ...........................................................................................................33040
Total Replenishment Amount Display [SM] ........................................................................................................33040
Correction Setting [SM] .......................................................................................................................................33060
Counter [J] ............................................................................................................................................................33070
vii
Processor Standard Setting ................................................................................................... 33500

Thermosensor Calibration ....................................................................................................................................33500
Cleaning Water Amount Setting[F] ......................................................................................................................33501
Cleaning Water Amount Setting [N] [SM] [J] .....................................................................................................33501
Drive Motor Revolution Count Setting ................................................................................................................33502
Display Processor Working Information[F] .........................................................................................................33503
Processor Set Up Mode[F] ....................................................................................................................................33504
Dryer Section Setting (Auto Setup) ......................................................................................................................33505
Refilling Water Amount Setting [N] ....................................................................................................................33510
Refilling Water Amount Setting [SM] .................................................................................................................33510
Basic Kit Setting [J] ..............................................................................................................................................33520
Kit Correction [J] ..................................................................................................................................................33530
Refilling Water Amount Setting [J] ......................................................................................................................33540
Pump Output Amount Setting [J] .........................................................................................................................33550
Operation Check [J] ..............................................................................................................................................33560
Manual Kit Change [J] ..........................................................................................................................................33570
Dryer Lane Select Operation Setting ....................................................................................................................33590
Maintenance ........................................................................................................................... 35100
Colorimeter Unit Adjustment ...............................................................................................................................35100
Input Check (Printer) ............................................................................................................................................35210
Input Check (Processor) [F] ..................................................................................................................................35220
Input Check (Processor) [N] .................................................................................................................................35220
Input Check (Processor) [SM] ..............................................................................................................................35220
Input Check (Processor) [J] ..................................................................................................................................35220
Output Check (Printer) .........................................................................................................................................35310
Output Check (Processor) [F] ...............................................................................................................................35320
Output Check (Processor) [N] ..............................................................................................................................35320
Output Check (Processor) [SM] ...........................................................................................................................35320
Output Check (Processor) [J] ................................................................................................................................35320
Reading and Writing Data ....................................................................................................................................35400
System Version Check ..........................................................................................................................................35500
System upgrade for each control PCB (CPU) ......................................................................................................35600
Operation Information ..........................................................................................................................................35700
Machine Specification ..........................................................................................................................................35800
Self-diagnostic ........................................................................................................................ 35920
Image Path Check .................................................................................................................................................35920
Printer I/F Main PCB Self-Diagnostic ..................................................................................................................35930
ARCNET Self-Diagnostic (details of modes) ......................................................................................................35940
ARCNET Self-Diagnostic (diagnosis) .................................................................................................................35941
ARCNET Self-Diagnostic (results) ......................................................................................................................35942
Laser Self-Diagnostic (details of modes) .............................................................................................................35950
Laser Self-Diagnostic (diagnosis AUTO) ............................................................................................................35951
Laser Self-Diagnostic (diagnosis MANUAL) ......................................................................................................35952
Laser Self-Diagnostic (starting/exiting) ...............................................................................................................35953
Network Self-Diagnostic ......................................................................................................................................35955
viii
Printer Mechanical Adjustment .............................................................................................. 36000

Paper sensor adjustment .......................................................................................................................................36000
Paper Guide Width Correction .............................................................................................................................36005
Paper Advance Unit Correction ............................................................................................................................36010
Exposure Magnification Correction .....................................................................................................................36020
Exposure Position Adjustment .............................................................................................................................36030
Exposure Magnification Fine Adjustment ............................................................................................................36040
Paper Advance Length Correction ........................................................................................................................36050
Arm Unit 1 Zigzagging Correction .......................................................................................................................36060
Paper Guide Width Correction (for each Paper Width) ........................................................................................36065
Exposure Center Correction .................................................................................................................................36070
Exposure Advance Adjustment ............................................................................................................................36080
Paper pressure operation correction ......................................................................................................................36090
White Border Width Correction ...........................................................................................................................36100
Software ................................................................................................................................. 38000
Installing the system program ...............................................................................................................................38000
4. Troubleshooting
Error and attention message regulation ................................................................................... 4001
Classification of errors and attention messages ......................................................................................................4001
Suffix number .........................................................................................................................................................4002
Diagnosis appendix for the failures: Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring ............ 4202
Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring (printer section) ........................................................................4202
Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring (processor) ...............................................................................4203
Diagnosis appendix: Symptoms result from blowout of fuse .................................................... 4252
Symptoms result from blowout of fuse (printer section/processor section) ...........................................................4252
Diagnosis appendix: Check the connection of the PC and printer ........................................... 4260
Checking the connection between the PC and printer ............................................................................................4260
Diagnosis appendix: Diagnosis flowchart ................................................................................. 4302
Laser temperature control status of Status Display does not change from Temperature control started to Temperature
control completed. [LASER] ..................................................................................................................................4302
Diagnosis appendix: [F] ............................................................................................................ 4600
Replenishment cartridge installation section troubleshooting flow ........................................................................4600
Recovery procedure 1 from the replenishment error ..............................................................................................4610
Taking countermeasures after the errors No.05916 to No.05921 occurs ...............................................................4630
ix
Attention message: Processor ............................................................................................... 40500

No. 00500[N] Add water to the Refilling Water Tank. ......................................................................................40500
No. 00501[N] The replenisher switch is turned on. ............................................................................................40500
No. 00502[N] Add replenishment solution to the replenishment tank. ..............................................................40500
No. 00503[N] [SM] Empty the Effluent Tank. ...................................................................................................40500
No. 00505 Remove the prints from the Print Sorter Unit. ..................................................................................40500
No. 00506 Close the Dryer Cover. .....................................................................................................................40500
No. 00507 Close the Processor Top Cover. ........................................................................................................40500
No. 00508 Paper remains in the processor. Are you sure you want to turn the drive off? .................................40500
No. 00510 Attach the Print Conveyor Unit. .......................................................................................................40500
No. 00515 Set the Rack Stopper. ........................................................................................................................40500
No. 00520 Sensors may be dirty. ........................................................................................................................40500
No. 00521 Remove the prints from the sorter tray (large) .................................................................................40500
Attention message: Tablet Replenishment ............................................................................ 40600
No. 00600[J] The Tablet Cartridge is empty. CD ..............................................................................................40600
No. 00601[J] The Tablet Cartridge is empty.BF ................................................................................................40600
No. 00602[J] The Tablet Cartridge is empty. STB .............................................................................................40600
No. 00603[J] Add water to the Water Supply Tank. ..........................................................................................40600
No. 00604[J] Add water to the SW/DW Tank. ..................................................................................................40600
No. 00605[J] Attach the Tablet Cartridge. CD ...................................................................................................40600
No. 00606[J] Attach the Tablet Cartridge.BF ....................................................................................................40600
No. 00607[J] Attach the Tablet Cartridge. STB .................................................................................................40600
No. 00608[J] Attach the Tablet Replenishment Unit. ........................................................................................40600
No. 00609[J] The Tablet kit is empty. ................................................................................................................40600
No. 00610[J] Empty the Effluent Tank.### .......................................................................................................40600
Attention message: SM replenishment .................................................................................. 40700
No. 00700[SM] Replace the Replenishment Package with a new one.P-# ........................................................40700
No. 00701[SM] Attach the Replenishment Package.P-# ....................................................................................40700
No. 00702[SM] Add water to the Water Supply Tank. ......................................................................................40700
No. 00703[SM] Would you like to initialize the remaining amount of the Replenishment Package? ...............40700
No. 00704[SM] Press the [YES: Execute] to initialize the remaining amount of the Replenishment Package. 40700
No. 00705[SM] Replace the Replenishment Package with a new one.P-# ........................................................40700
Attention message: F replenishment ...................................................................................... 40900
No. 00902[F] Install the replenisher cartridge. ...................................................................................................40900
No. 00903[F] Close the replenisher section door. ..............................................................................................40900
No. 00905[F] Install the new replenisher cartridge. ...........................................................................................40900
No. 00906[F] It is ready to replace the replenisher cartridge. ............................................................................40900
No. 00907[F] Collect the waste solution. ...........................................................................................................40900
No. 00908[F] Open operation was not completed correctly. Replenishment solution preparation will resume. .......
40900
No. 00909[F] Replenishment tank is empty. Cannot start the operation. ..........................................................40900
No. 00910[F] Preparing the replenishment solution. One moment please . . . .................................................40900
No. 00912[F] Replenishment solution was created. Initialize replenishment data and restart replenishment. .40900
No. 00913[F] Mixing Replenisher cannot be started. .........................................................................................40900
No. 00914[F] PSR is running out. ......................................................................................................................40900
No. 00916[F] PSR is empty. ...............................................................................................................................40900
No. 00918[F] Replenish PSR. ............................................................................................................................40900
x
Attention message: Printer ..................................................................................................... 41000

No. 01026 Close the Printer Top Cover. ............................................................................................................41000
No. 01029 The measurement failed. Measure it again. ......................................................................................41000
No. 01047 Close printer door. ............................................................................................................................41000
No. 01074 Sensors may be dirty. ........................................................................................................................41000
No. 01000-01132 Attention messages not explained in the Service Manual .....................................................41000
Attention message: Scanner/ Film Carrier ............................................................................. 41300
Attention message: Disk/Media .............................................................................................. 41500
No. 01501-01549 See the EZ Controller Troubleshooting Manual for Corrective action of Attention message. .......
41500
Attention message: Colorimeter ............................................................................................. 41550
No. 01552 The paper in the Colorimeter is too short. It cannot be measured. ...................................................41550
No. 01555 The calibration plate data is out of range. .........................................................................................41550
No. 01556 The Colorimeter Unit is not set. ........................................................................................................41550
Attention message: NMC/Printers in common ....................................................................... 41620
No. 01750 Communication with the printer failed. The printer may not be active, or the LAN cable may not be
connected. .............................................................................................................................................................41620
No. 01751 There was a time difference of more than 2 minutes between the clocks of printer and PC. The printer
clock was adjusted to match the PC clock. ...........................................................................................................41620
No. 01753 Printer is not ready. Start the printer. ..............................................................................................41620
No. 01754 Profile data registered to the printer is not compatible with that of the application. ........................41620
No. 01756 Printer profile versions are inconsistent. ...........................................................................................41620
No. 01757 Execute the startup checks. ...............................................................................................................41620
No. 01758 Maintenance is proceeding. Close the Maintenance screen. ..........................................................41620
No. 01759 Adjusting the temperature. One moment please. ............................................................................41620
No. 01760 Installation is proceeding. One moment please. .............................................................................41620
No. 01761 Printer is offline. Confirm that the circuit breaker of the printer is ON and that the printer is connected
correctly. ...............................................................................................................................................................41620
41620
Attention message: Software upgrade ................................................................................... 41800
No. 01801 Execute software upgrade. ................................................................................................................41800
No. 01804 The printer version is incorrect. Upgrade the printer software. .......................................................41800
No. 01805 The printer program is corrupted. Run the recovery software. .......................................................41800
Attention message: External system ...................................................................................... 41821
No. 1821 For corrective action of the attention message, see the d-Storage/ CD-R external writing system Service
Manual. .................................................................................................................................................................41821
Attention message: Main ........................................................................................................ 41900
No. 01920 Capacity Booster Key was not detected. Confirm the connection status. .......................................41900
Attention message: Edit ......................................................................................................... 43370
43370
Attention message: External system ...................................................................................... 44200
No. 4200-4231 For corrective action of the attention message, see the d-Storage/ CD-R external writing system
Service Manual. ....................................................................................................................................................44200
Attention message: Bravo II ................................................................................................... 44350
No. 4350-4358 See the Bravo II Service Manual for Corrective action of Attention message. ........................44350
xi
Error message: Processor 1 .................................................................................................. 45500

No. 05500 The processing solution temperature is above the safety range. P1 .................................................45500
No. 05501 The processing solution temperature is above the safety range. P2 .................................................45500
No. 05502 The processing solution temperature is above the safety range. PS .................................................45500
No. 05503 The dryer temperature is above the safety range. .............................................................................45500
No. 05504 The processing solution temperature is below the processing range. P1 ..........................................45500
No. 05507 The dryer temperature is below the processing range. .....................................................................45500
No. 05508 The processing solution level is too low. ..........................................................................................45500
No. 05509 The circulation amount has decreased. .............................................................................................45500
No. 05510 Processor A/D conversion error. .......................................................................................................45500
No. 05511 The circulation pump has stopped. CD .............................................................................................45500
No. 05512 The circulation pump has stopped. CD2 ...........................................................................................45500
No. 05513 The circulation pump has stopped. BF .............................................................................................45500
No. 05514 The circulation pump has stopped. BF2 ...........................................................................................45500
No. 05515 The circulation pump has stopped. STB1 .........................................................................................45500
No. 05519 Thermosensor error. P1 .....................................................................................................................45500
No. 05522 Dryer Thermosensor error. ...............................................................................................................45500
No. 05524 Refilling water operation error. CD-W .............................................................................................45500
No. 05525 Refilling water operation error. BF-W .............................................................................................45500
No. 05526 Refilling water operation error. STB1-W .........................................................................................45500
Error: Processor 2 .................................................................................................................. 45530
No. 05530 The Processor Top Cover is open. ....................................................................................................45530
No. 05531 The dryer cover is open. ...................................................................................................................45530
No. 05532 The Processing Solution Safety Thermostat has activated. ..............................................................45530
No. 05533 The Dryer Safety Thermostat has activated. .....................................................................................45530
No. 05534 Print Sorter Unit operation error. ......................................................................................................45530
No. 05535 Paper has jammed in the processor section. .....................................................................................45530
No. 05537 The Rack Stopper is not set. .............................................................................................................45530
No. 05538 Backup data error. Processor ...........................................................................................................45530
No. 05539 Print Conveyor Unit was removed. ...................................................................................................45530
No. 05545 Print Sensor (Left) error. ...................................................................................................................45530
No. 05547 Print Sensor (Right) error. ................................................................................................................45530
No. 05548 Dryer Lane Select Sensor error. ........................................................................................................45530
No. 05553 Print sensor (center) error .................................................................................................................45530
No. 05549 Drive Motor Revolution Count Auto Adjustment error. ..................................................................45530
No. 05550 Drive Motor has stopped. ..................................................................................................................45530
No. 05551 Paper Guide operation error. .............................................................................................................45530
No. 05552 Dryer Lane Select Guide operation error. .........................................................................................45530
xii
Error message: Tablet replenishment .................................................................................... 45600

No. 05600[J] Tablet Drum operation error. CD .................................................................................................45600
No. 05601[J] Tablet Drum operation error. BF ..................................................................................................45600
No. 05602[J] Tablet Drum operation error. STB ...............................................................................................45600
No. 05603[J] A tablet has jammed. ....................................................................................................................45600
No. 05604[J] A tablet has jammed. BF ..............................................................................................................45600
No. 05605[J] A tablet has jammed. ....................................................................................................................45600
No. 05609[J] Printing cannot continue without replenishment. CD ..................................................................45600
No. 05610[J] Printing cannot continue without replenishment. BF ...................................................................45600
No. 05611[J] Printing cannot continue without replenishment. STB .................................................................45600
No. 05612[J] Tablet Replenishment Elevator operation error. ...........................................................................45600
No. 05613[J] The processing solution level is too low. STB1 .........................................................................45600
Error message: SM replenishment ......................................................................................... 45700
No. 05700[SM] Replenishment pump operation error. CD-A ...........................................................................45700
No. 05701[SM] Replenishment pump operation error. CD-B ...........................................................................45700
No. 05702[SM] Replenishment pump operation error. CD-C ...........................................................................45700
No. 05703[SM] Replenishment pump operation error. CD-W ..........................................................................45700
No. 05704[SM] Replenishment pump operation error. BF-A ............................................................................45700
No. 05705[SM] Replenishment pump operation error. BF-B ............................................................................45700
No. 05706[SM] Replenishment pump operation error. STB ..............................................................................45700
No. 05708[SM] Replenishment Package solution remaining error. ...................................................................45700
No. 05709[SM] Replenishment Package solution remaining error. ...................................................................45700
No. 05710[SM] Refilling water operation error. CD-W ....................................................................................45700
No. 05711[SM] Refilling water operation error. BF-W .....................................................................................45700
No. 05712[SM] Refilling water operation error. STB1-W .................................................................................45700
xiii
Error message: F replenishment ............................................................................................ 45900

No. 05900[F] Replenisher cartridge open motor operation error. ......................................................................45900
No. 05901[F] Replenishment solution level sensor error. P1R ..........................................................................45900
No. 05902[F] Replenishment solution level sensor error. P2RA .......................................................................45900
No. 05903[F] Replenishment solution level sensor error. P2RB .......................................................................45900
No. 05904[F] Replenishment solution level sensor error. PSR ..........................................................................45900
No. 05905[F] P1R replenishment solution output amount/replenishment solution level management is abnormal. ..
45900
No. 05906[F] P2RA replenishment solution output amount/replenishment solution level management is abnormal.
45900
45900
No. 05908[F] Failed to open the replenisher cartridge. ......................................................................................45900
No. 05909[F] Cartridge cleaning valve/Agitation solenoid valve is abnormal. P1R .........................................45900
No. 05910[F] Cartridge cleaning valve cleaning valve is abnormal. P2RA ......................................................45900
No. 05911[F] Cartridge cleaning valve cleaning valve is abnormal. P2RB .......................................................45900
No. 05912[F] Predetermined process amount was exceeded. ............................................................................45900
No. 05913[F] An error occurred in the replenisher section. ...............................................................................45900
No. 05914[F] Temperature and humidity sensor error. ......................................................................................45900
No. 05916[F] Solution level of the processing tank goes below the processable level. P1 ...............................45900
No. 05917[F] Solution level of the processing tank goes below the processable level. P2 ...............................45900
No. 05918[F] Solution level of the processing tank goes below the processable level. PS1 .............................45900
No. 05922[F] Replenisher section door is open. ................................................................................................45900
No. 05923[F] Solution remains in the replenishment tank. ................................................................................45900
Error message: Printer 1 ........................................................................................................ 46000
No. 06012 Paper did not load. Paper Magazine A ............................................................................................46000
No. 06013 Paper did not load. Paper Magazine B .............................................................................................46000
No. 06014 Paper did not rewind. Paper Magazine A ........................................................................................46000
No. 06015 Paper did not rewind. Paper Magazine B ........................................................................................46000
No. 06016 Paper Cutter operation error. ............................................................................................................46000
No. 06049 Pressure Guide operation error. ........................................................................................................46000
No. 06069 The printer top cover is open. ...........................................................................................................46000
No. 06073 Synchronous Sensor error. ................................................................................................................46000
No. 06075 G Laser control error. ........................................................................................................................46000
No. 06076 Polygon Mirror control error. ...........................................................................................................46000
No. 06077 Interlock error. ..................................................................................................................................46000
No. 06081 Backup data error. Printer ................................................................................................................46000
No. 06082 Setup error. ........................................................................................................................................46000
No. 06087 Laser Control PCB system error. ......................................................................................................46000
xiv

No. 06101 Paper Hold Motor operation error. ...................................................................................................46100
No. 06104 Printer Door is open. .........................................................................................................................46100
No. 06106 G Laser light source status error. ......................................................................................................46100
No. 06107 R Laser temperature is out of range. .................................................................................................46100
No. 06112 Could not load the paper. Paper Magazine C ..................................................................................46100
No. 06113 Paper did not rewind. Paper Magazine C ........................................................................................46100
No. 06134 Paper Supply Pressure Change Motor operation error. ....................................................................46100
No. 06135 Arm Unit 1 operation error. ..............................................................................................................46100
No. 06136 Exposure Advance Pressure Change Motor 1 operation error. ........................................................46100
No. 06138 Paper Advance Arm Motor (Left) operation error. ...........................................................................46100
No. 06139 Paper Advance Arm Motor (Right) operation error. ........................................................................46100
No. 06140 Lane Select Motor (Left) operation error. ........................................................................................46100
No. 06141 Lane Select Motor (Right) operation error. ......................................................................................46100
No. 06142 Paper Advance Pressure Change Motor (Left) operation error. .......................................................46100
No. 06143 Paper Advance Pressure Change Motor (Right) operation error. .....................................................46100
No. 06148 Paper End Sensor A error. ................................................................................................................46100
No. 06149 Paper End Sensor B error. .................................................................................................................46100
No. 06150 Paper End Sensor C error. .................................................................................................................46100
No. 06151 Paper Loading Sensor error. .............................................................................................................46100
No. 06152 Zigzagging Correction Sensor (Left) error. ......................................................................................46100
No. 06153 Zigzagging Correction Sensor (Right) error. ....................................................................................46100
No. 06155 Exposure Start Sensor error. .............................................................................................................46100
No. 06157 Paper Sensor 1 error. .........................................................................................................................46100
No. 06158 Paper Sensor 2 (Left) error. ..............................................................................................................46100
No. 06159 Paper Sensor 2 (Center) error. ..........................................................................................................46100
No. 06160 Paper Sensor 2 (Right) error. ............................................................................................................46100
No. 06173 Printer Door 3 is open. It may be adversely affect print quality. .....................................................46100
No. 06177 Laser Unit temperature is out of range. ............................................................................................46100
No. 06179 B/G Laser Output Unit error. ............................................................................................................46100
No. 06187 Setup calculation error. .....................................................................................................................46100
No. 06194 Laser Control PCB control error. ......................................................................................................46100
No. 06195 Paper did not load. Paper Magazine A2 ..........................................................................................46100
No. 06196 Paper did not rewind. Paper Magazine A2 ......................................................................................46100
No. 06197 Paper End Sensor A2 error. ..............................................................................................................46100
No. 06198 Laser Unit EE-PROM control error. .................................................................................................46100
No. 06199 Pressure Release Motor A2 operation error. .....................................................................................46100
No. 06200 Width Change Motor A2 operation error. ........................................................................................46100
No. 06202 Paper did not rewind. Paper Magazine A ........................................................................................46100
xv

No. 06203 Setup error. ........................................................................................................................................46200
No. 06204 Setup error. ........................................................................................................................................46200
No. 06205 Setup error. ........................................................................................................................................46200
No. 06208 Paper has jammed in the Paper Supply Unit. ....................................................................................46200
No. 06209 Paper has jammed in the Exposure Advance Unit. ...........................................................................46200
No. 06210 Paper remains in the Paper Supply Unit. ..........................................................................................46200
No. 06211 Paper remains in the Exposure Advance Unit. .................................................................................46200
No. 06220 B Laser temperature is out of range. .................................................................................................46200
No. 06221 Paper has jammed in the Paper Advance Unit. .................................................................................46200
No. 06222 Paper has jammed in the Processor loading unit. .............................................................................46200
No. 06223 Paper remains in the Paper Advance Unit. .......................................................................................46200
No. 06224 Paper remains in the Processor loading unit. ....................................................................................46200
No. 06228 Paper did not load. Paper Magazine B .............................................................................................46200
No. 06229 Could not load the paper. Paper Magazine C ..................................................................................46200
No. 06230 Paper did not load. Paper Magazine A2 ..........................................................................................46200
No. 06234 Paper Loading Sensor error. .............................................................................................................46200
No. 06235 Exposure Start Sensor error. .............................................................................................................46200
Error message: Scanner/ Film Carrier ................................................................................... 46300
Error message: Colorimeter ................................................................................................... 46550
No. 06551 Paper has jammed in the Colorimeter Unit. ......................................................................................46550
No. 06554 Calibration Plate advance error. ........................................................................................................46550
No. 06555 Set the Colorimeter Unit. ..................................................................................................................46550
Error message: NMC/Software upgrade/Image Processing .................................................. 46620
No. 06621-06833 For corrective actions, see EZ Controller Service Manual ....................................................46620
No. 06680 Network communication error. .........................................................................................................46620
No. 06681 Network communication error. .........................................................................................................46620
Error message: Main .............................................................................................................. 46900
No. 06901 ARCNET communication error. .......................................................................................................46900
No. 06903 Serial communication error. .............................................................................................................46900
No. 06909 CPU was reset. Abort the process. ...................................................................................................46900
No. 06921 PCB error. .........................................................................................................................................46900
No. 06931 Backup data error. Printer I/F Main PCB ........................................................................................46900
Error message: Edit ............................................................................................................... 49000
Error message: Bravo I/CD-R external writing system (directly connecting to Rimage) ........ 49350
No. 9350-9381 For corrective action of the error message, see the Bravo II Service Manual and the d-Storage/ CD-R
external writing system Service Manual. ..............................................................................................................49350
Attention message: Main controller/ Setting module .............................................................. 49450
No. 10000-15302 Refer to the Troubleshooting Manual for Corrective action of Attention message. .............49450
xvi
5. Operation sequence
Starting up/Closing down Operation ...................................................................................... 50500
Startup sequence ...................................................................................................................................................50500
ARCNET communication ....................................................................................................... 50520
ARCNET communication flow ............................................................................................................................50520
Data flow ................................................................................................................................ 50700
Data flow in printing .............................................................................................................................................50700
Data flow ..............................................................................................................................................................50710
Paper path diagram ................................................................................................................ 55000
Paper path diagram ...............................................................................................................................................55000
Paper advance operation ....................................................................................................... 55100
Paper loading operation (the paper advance length is 113.5 mm or less) ............................................................55100
Paper loading operation (the paper advance length is between 113.6 mm and 165.5 mm) .................................55110
Paper loading operation (the paper advance length is 165.6 mm or more) ..........................................................55120
Paper supply unit operation (the paper advance length is 165.5 mm or less) ......................................................55200
Paper supply unit operation (the paper advance length is between 165.6 mm and 392.5 mm) ...........................55210
Paper supply unit operation (the paper advance length is between 395.6 mm and 466.5 mm) ...........................55220
Paper supply unit operation (the paper advance length is 466.6 mm or more) ....................................................55230
Exposure advance operation .................................................................................................................................55300
Paper advance unit 1 operation (the paper width is 254.0 mm or less) ................................................................55400
Paper advance unit 1 operation (the paper width is between 254.1 mm and 457.0 mm) .....................................55410
Paper advance unit 1 operation (the paper width is between 457.1 mm and 528.0 mm) .....................................55420
Paper advance unit 1 operation (the paper advance length is 528.1 mm or more) ...............................................55430
Paper advance unit 2 operation (the paper width of 152.0 mm or less and the advance length of 178.0 mm or less) ...
55500
Paper advance unit 2 operation (the paper with the width is 152.0 or less and the advance length between 178.1 to
305.0 mm) .............................................................................................................................................................55510
Paper advance unit 2 operation (the paper with the width is 152.0 or less and the advance length of 305.1 mm or
more) .....................................................................................................................................................................55520
Paper advance unit 2 operation (the paper width is 165.0 mm or more) ..............................................................55530
Paper rewind operation .........................................................................................................................................55600
Paper splice detection operation ...........................................................................................................................55700
Paper end operation ..............................................................................................................................................55800
Fogged paper operation ........................................................................................................................................55900
Processor paper advance operation ...................................................................................... 56100
Paper advance operation of the processor (normal prints) ...................................................................................56100
Paper advance operation of the processor (setup prints) ......................................................................................56110
Print conveyor unit operation ................................................................................................. 56200
Print conveyor unit operation ...............................................................................................................................56200
Print sorter unit operation ....................................................................................................... 56300
Print sorter unit operation [print sorter unit (6-inch type, 17/14 orders)] .............................................................56300
Print sorter unit operation [print sorter unit (10-inch type)] ............................................................................. 56300-5
Colorimeter unit operation ...................................................................................................... 56600
The calibration operation of the colorimeter ........................................................................................................56600
Automatic color measurement operation for setup prints .....................................................................................56610
Judgment operation of setup print ........................................................................................................................56620
xvii
Replenishment operation sequence [F] ................................................................................. 57010

Replenishment operation sequence [F] .................................................................................................................57010
Replenishment operation sequence [F] .................................................................................................................57020
6. Electrical parts
Compatibility of PCBs and electrical parts ............................................................................. 60100
Compatibility of PCBs and electrical parts ..........................................................................................................60100
Position of electrical parts (printer section) ............................................................................ 63000
Printer section (positions of PCBs) .......................................................................................................................63000
Printer section (positions of electrical parts) ........................................................................................................63050
Paper magazine mounts A, A2, B, and C (positions of electrical parts) ..............................................................63051
Paper supply unit A2 (positions of electrical parts) ..............................................................................................63055
Paper supply unit (positions of electrical parts) ...................................................................................................63060
Exposure advance unit (positions of electrical parts) ...........................................................................................63070
Laser unit (position and description of electrical parts) .......................................................................................63080
Paper advance unit 1 (positions of electrical parts) ..............................................................................................63090
Paper advance unit 2 (positions of electrical parts) ..............................................................................................63100
Processor loading unit (positions of electrical parts) ............................................................................................63110
Position of PCBs (processor section) ..................................................................................... 63200
Processor section (PCB positions) (QSS-3701/3702/3703/LP7500/LP7600) [F][N][SM][J] ..............................63200
Processor section (PCB positions) (QSS-3701/3702/3703) [SM] .................................................................63200
Processor section (PCB positions) (QSS-3701/3702/3703) [J] ......................................................................63200
Position of PCBs (processor section) .................................................................................. 63201-5
Processor section (PCB positions) (QSS-3704/3705/LP7700/LP7900) [F][N][SM] ....................................... 63201-5
Processor section (PCB positions) (QSS-3704) [SM] ................................................................................ 63201-5
Positions of PCBs and electrical parts (dryer section, conveyor and order classification section) ..
63260
Dryer section (positions of electrical parts) (QSS-3701/3702/3703/LP7500/LP7600) ........................................63260
Dryer section (positions of electrical parts) (QSS-3704/3705/LP7700/LP7900) ............................................. 63270-5
Conveyor and order classification section (positions of PCBs and electrical parts) ............................................63271
Condition check of the processor condition light and Manual Sorter Switch ......................................................63275
Positions of electrical parts (Processor section) .................................................................... 63280
Processor section (positions of electrical parts) (QSS-3701/3702/3703/LP7500/LP7600) [F] ............................63280
Processor section (positions of electrical parts) (QSS-3701/3702/3703) [N] ......................................................63290
Processor section (positions of electrical parts) (QSS-3701/3702/3703) [SM] ....................................................63300
Processor section (positions of electrical parts) (QSS-3701/3702/3703) [J] ........................................................63310
Processor section (positions of electrical parts) (QSS-3704/3705/LP7700/LP7900) [F] .....................................63311
Processor section (positions of electrical parts) (QSS-3704/3705) [N] ............................................................ 63311-5
Processor section (positions of electrical parts) (QSS-3704) [SM] .................................................................. 63311-5
Processor section (List of adjustment after electrical parts replacement) [F] ......................................................63312
Control strip auto loading unit (positions of PCBs and electrical parts) ..............................................................63315
Communication unit (positions of PCBs) .............................................................................................................63316
Colorimeter unit (positions of electrical parts) ........................................................................ 63318
Colorimeter unit (positions of electrical parts) .....................................................................................................63318
Processor section (fan operation specification) ..................................................................... 63321
Processor section (fan operation specification) ....................................................................................................63321
xviii
Description of PCB (printer section) ....................................................................................... 66000

Printer control PCB (J391423) .............................................................................................................................66000
Printer I/F main PCB (J391391, J391489) ...........................................................................................................66005
Replacing the printer I/F main PCB (QSS-3701/3702/3703/3704/3705) .............................................................66006
Replacing the printer I/F main PCB (LP7500/7600/7700/7900) ..........................................................................66007
Capacity booster PCB ...........................................................................................................................................66008
Laser control PCB (J391465) ...............................................................................................................................66010
Printer I/O PCB 1 (J391483) ................................................................................................................................66020
Printer I/O PCB 2 (J391256) ................................................................................................................................66030
Printer I/O PCB 3 (J391253) ................................................................................................................................66040
Triple magazine PCB (J391257) ..........................................................................................................................66050
Quad magazine PCB (J391177) ............................................................................................................................66055
G laser driver ........................................................................................................................................................66070
G-AOM driver (Z025645) ....................................................................................................................................66080
CVP PCB (J391258) .............................................................................................................................................66090
Operation key PCB (J391400) ..............................................................................................................................66095
Power supply (printer section) ..............................................................................................................................66100
Explanation of PCBs (Processor section) .............................................................................. 66200
Processor control PCB (J391467) .........................................................................................................................66200
Processor I/O PCB 1 (J391468) ............................................................................................................................66210
Processor I/O PCB 2 (J391490) ............................................................................................................................66211
Processor relay PCB (J391466) ............................................................................................................................66220
Tablet replenishment driver PCB (J391351) [J] ...................................................................................................66500
SM I/O PCB (J391191, J391378) [SM] ...............................................................................................................66600
F replenishment I/O PCB (J391322) [F] ..............................................................................................................66800
Control strip driver PCB (J391422) ......................................................................................................................66810
Control strip communication PCB (J391404) ......................................................................................................66820
Infrared communication unit ................................................................................................................................66830
Order specifying LED PCB 1 (J490423) ..............................................................................................................66840
Drive motor driver PCB (I123279) .......................................................................................................................66870
Power supply (processor) .....................................................................................................................................67400
Cables .................................................................................................................................... 68100
Precautions in handling the cables ........................................................................................................................68100
Power ON/OFF ...................................................................................................................... 68550
When the power is not supplied (How to use the starter jumper) ........................................................................68550
7. Setup for service personnel

Setup for service personnel ................................................................................................... 70010
Setup during installation .......................................................................................................................................70010
8. Appendix
Periodically replaced parts ..................................................................................................... 80110
List of maintenance/periodically replaced parts/consumable parts ......................................................................80110
Service personnel tool list ...................................................................................................... 80310
Service personnel tool list .....................................................................................................................................80310
xix
Table of wiring diagrams ........................................................................................................ 89000

Table of wiring diagrams ......................................................................................................................................89000
xx
1000
Description of warnings (signal words) ................................................................................ 10010

Description of warnings (signal words) .............................................................................................................10010
1 Cautions for work

Location of warning labels ................................................................................................... 10020
Location of warning labels ................................................................................................................................10020
For safe operation ............................................................................................................... 10030
For safe operation ..............................................................................................................................................10030
Prevention of static electricity when replacing and maintaining the electrical parts ........................................10040
Laser Precautions ...............................................................................................................................................10050
1000 1/1
10010
Description of warnings (signal words)
• Signal words identify the level of injuries that can potentially occur.
• The signal words used in this manual and found on labels, DANGER, WARNING and CAUTION, are assigned according to the
level of potential risk.

• Warning labels are located at or near the part of the system that poses the indicated danger. Ignoring a warning may cause death or
serious injury, or system malfunction. Be sure to follow the indications in the manuals and on the warning labels.
• The warnings include a signal word, the type and extent of the danger, and information on avoiding the danger.
• Carefully read and understand the warnings included in this manual and on the warning labels before operating the system.
This indicates situations that if not immediately avoided could result in serious injury or death.
This indicates situations that if not avoided could result in serious injury or death.
This indicates situations that if not avoided could result in non-life threatening injury. It is also used to indicate situations
which may cause damage to physical property.
Example of warning label

Warning (signal word)
Symbol (warning indication)
Warning text (warning

indication)
SIGNALWORD
10010 1/1
10020
Location of warning labels
The following shows the locations, types of warning labels and the part numbers on this product. Follow the instructions on the labels
carefully in order to operate the product safely and avoid accidents. Do not peel the labels off. If a label becomes illegible or comes off
completely, contact your place of purchase for replacement label using the part number shown.
Though the system appearance of some models may be different from figures, locations of warning labels are same as shown in figures.

3701/3702/3703/LP7500/LP7600
N, SM, and J specifications
10 9 3
8 10 4 2
14 6 10
11
11
1
3 4 3 15
1 13 G088947
F specification
10 9
8 10 4 3 2
14 6 10
11
11
1
15 3
3 4 4
12
1 13
G088957
10020 1/5
10020
3704/3705/LP7700/LP7900
N, SM specifications
10 9 3
8 10 10 4 2
14 6
11

11
5
4 1
15
1 13 G090070
F specification
10 9
8 10 4 3 2
14 6 10
11
11
5
5
1
15
4
4 3
12
1 13 G090071
10020 2/5
10020
When the print sorter unit is 8-order type

10
6
6

5
3
4
G089575
Quad magazine unit (option)
1
1
G088962
1 2
A023349-01 A023200-01
3 4
A022523-01 A022531-01
10020 3/5
10020
5 6
A022509-01

7
A234392-01
8
A234350-01
9 10
A022536-01 A023202-01
11 12
A515330-01 A087463-01
10020 4/5
10020
13 14
A023358-01 A022516-01

15
A063381-01
10020 5/5
10030
For safe operation
For safe operation
For safe operation
! General precautions

• Prior to any part replacement or mechanical adjustment, be sure the main power supply is turned off.
• Since the work which uses key operations cannot turn off the circuit breaker, mechanical operation check during it
requires particular attention.
IMPORTANT
• Ground wires (green and yellow) are connected to the covers and units of the machine.
For reassembly, be sure to connect the ground wires as they were.
• Be sure to perform an operation check after replacing or adjusting any parts (or units).
! Precautions for processing solutions
• This system uses non-pharmaceutical poison and toxic processing solutions which are dangerous to drink in. Direct
contact with processing solutions may irritate eyes.
When handling processing solutions, wear safety goggles.
If a processing solution has been ingested accidentally, immediately rinse the mouth out with water, and drink one or
two cups of water. Contact a physician as soon as possible, and then vomit the solution according to the physician's
instructions.
If processing solution gets into eyes, immediately rinse them under running water for at least 15 minutes, and then
contact a physician.
• Direct contact with processing solutions may irritate the skin and may cause an allergic reaction.
When handling processing solutions, be sure to wear rubber gloves and clothing for workwear, to avoid direct contact.
If there is a possibility of direct or indirect exposure to a processing solution, wash with soap and rinse with lots of
water, after completion of work.
• Processing solution stains on your clothing may result in discoloration or fading. When handling processing solutions,
wear clothing for workwear.
10030 1/3
10030
For safe operation
! Precautions against electric shock
• If any case you have to take care of wiring for the power such as moving the system, ask a qualified professional
electrician for work. Do not forget to ground the system.

• Pay attention to avoid shocks when performing troubleshooting, wiring checking, or voltage/current measurement.
• When replacing a fuse or PCB, be sure to turn off the circuit breaker and the main power supply. Wait for 10 seconds
or more before replacement.
! Precautions for operating rotary section
• Be careful for your hands, hair, clothes, etc., not to be caught under the gear, chain, belt, roller, fan and other rotating
parts.
Do not remove covers other than those specified.
Be sure to turn off the circuit breaker and main power supply of this machine before performing any operation.
Keep away your hands from the system during operation.
If your hands are caught and you cannot move, ask someone to turn off the circuit breaker at once.
! Precautions for operating heating section
• The processing solution heater, dryer heater and motor, etc. become very hot.
If you directly touch them during operation or right after operation, you may get burnt.
When replacement of parts or maintenance is performed, make sure that the temperature is fully lowered.
After temperature fully falls, carry out the operation by turning off the circuit breaker and the main power supply.
Cooling time, such as the heater section and the motor, changes with work states. Turn off the circuit breaker and
main power supply. Then, perform the work after the temperature has become low enough.
If you have got burnt, cool the burn with running water and contact a physician as soon as possible.
10030 2/3
10030
For safe operation
! Precautions for movable units
• Hands can be caught by the opening and closing of covers and doors or by movable units.
Hold covers and doors firmly when opening or closing them.

When manually moving a unit, only hold the specified parts.
Turn off the circuit breaker and main power supply when working with or around a unit that moves automatically.
Immediately call for help to turn off the circuit breaker if your hand is caught and you cannot move.
! Precautions around cutting parts
• There is a danger of cutting your hands on cutting parts (paper cutters and the like).
Do not remove the covers from cutting parts. Keep your hands away from cutting parts.
When working near cutting parts, turn off the circuit breaker and main power supply.
• There is a danger of cutting your hands on cutting parts.

When replacing a cutting part, do not touch the edge.
10030 3/3
10040
For safe operation
Prevention of static electricity when replacing and maintaining the

electrical parts
Static electricity from your body may damage electronic components such as PCBs, if you touch them when charged.
When handling electronic parts, be sure to use static-dissipative tools as below to prevent parts from being damaged by static electricity.

In addition, use the static-dissipative tools for maintenance of the digital units or engines.
Static-dissipative tools
Description Remarks
Portable Static-Dissipative Field Service Kit Use this kit when replacing or installing/removing electronic parts from the system.
This kit consists of four items: Static-Dissipative Work Mat, Wrist Strap, Ground
Cord, and Alligator Clips.
Static-Dissipative conductive gloves Use these to prevent oil from your hands adhering when you touch a PCB.
Wrist strap Use this when checking electronic parts.
• When using the static-dissipative tools, be sure to turn off the circuit breaker of the system and the main power supply,
and wait 10 seconds or more before performing the operation.
10040 1/1
10050
For safe operation
Laser Precautions
The laser is built into the printer.

• Follow the instructions to avoid exposing your eyes to laser radiation.
• Do not perform the operation that is not described in this manual.
• Do not perform printing operations while the safety device is released.
Location of laser labels
The labels for the laser are placed on this machine.
Do not remove these labels.
2
1
4
5 3
G089038
If the quad magazine unit is installed If the triple magazine unit is installed
1 2
4 3 4 5 3
5
G089039
10050 1/3
10050
For safe operation
1 2

3 4
5 37 series LP7000 series
10050 2/3
10050
For safe operation

10050 3/3
2000
System list ........................................................................................................................... 20005

System list ..........................................................................................................................................................20005
Removing covers ................................................................................................................. 20010
Removing covers (Printer section) ....................................................................................................................20010
Removing each cover (Processor section) [print sorter unit (6-inch type, 17/14 orders)] [F] ..........................20020
Removing each cover (Processor section) [print sorter unit (6-inch type, 17/14 orders)] [N] [SM] ................20020
2 Replacement and adjustment of parts

Removing each cover (Processor section) [print sorter unit (6-inch type, 17/14 orders)] [J] ...........................20020
Removing each cover (Processor section) [print sorter unit (10-inch type)] ................................................ 20020-5
Adjusting belt tension .......................................................................................................... 20110
Adjusting the belt tension (printer section) .......................................................................................................20110
Adjusting the belt tension (processor section) (QSS-3701/3702/3703/LP7500/LP7600) .................................20120
Adjusting the belt tension (processor section) (QSS-3704/3705/LP7700/LP7900) ...................................... 20120-5
Adjusting the belt tension (colorimeter) ............................................................................................................20125
Magazine section ................................................................................................................. 22000
Checking the paper magazine ............................................................................................................................22000
Adjusting the zigzagging of the paper magazine deck ......................................................................................22100
Paper supply unit ................................................................................................................. 25610
Removing the paper supply unit ........................................................................................................................25610
Removal and the right angle adjustment of the cutter unit ................................................................................25620
Adjusting the timing of the paper supply pressure change sensor ....................................................................25630
Adjusting the paper hold timing of the paper hold motor .................................................................................25640
Adjusting the CVP imprint pressure ..................................................................................................................25650
Removing paper supply unit A ..........................................................................................................................25660
Paper supply unit A2 ........................................................................................................... 25710
Removing paper supply unit A2 ........................................................................................................................25710
Exposure advance unit ........................................................................................................ 25810
Removing the exposure advance unit ................................................................................................................25810
Replacing the pressure guide in the exposure advance unit ..............................................................................25820
Banding adjustment for the exposure advance unit ...........................................................................................25830
Banding shooting ...............................................................................................................................................25910
Paper advance unit 1 ........................................................................................................... 26510
Removing paper advance unit 1 ........................................................................................................................26510
Paper advance unit 2 ........................................................................................................... 26550
Removing paper advance unit 2 ........................................................................................................................26550
Removing the paper advance pressure change motors (right and left) and adjusting the pressure timing for the
arm(s) .................................................................................................................................................................26560
Adjusting the arm position ................................................................................................................................26570
Processor loading unit ......................................................................................................... 26610
Removing the processor loading unit ................................................................................................................26610
Laser unit ............................................................................................................................. 26710
Replacing and adjusting the position of the laser unit .......................................................................................26710
Zigzag adjustment ............................................................................................................... 26810
Adjusting the zigzagging of the paper advance section ....................................................................................26810
How to adjust the zigzagging in paper supply unit A2 ......................................................................................26820
2000 1/2
2000
Drive section ........................................................................................................................ 27230

Adjusting backlash of the dryer rack (QSS-3701/3702/3703/LP7500/LP7600) ...............................................27230
Adjusting the position of the dryer rack ............................................................................................................27260
Adjusting the drive motor belt tension ..............................................................................................................27270
Adjusting backlash of dryer rack (lower) (QSS-3704/3705/LP7700/LP7900) .................................................27320
Adjusting backlash of dryer rack (upper) (QSS-3704/3705/LP7700/LP7900) .................................................27330
Order sorter section ............................................................................................................. 27410
Adjusting the stop position of the print receiving tray [Print sorter unit (6-inch type, 17/14 orders)] .............27410
2 Replacement and adjustment of parts

Adjusting the stop position of the print receiving tray [Print sorter unit (10-inch type)] .............................. 27410-5
Removing the print conveyor unit .....................................................................................................................27420
Replacing the print receiving tray [Print sorter unit (6-inch type, 17/14 orders)] .............................................27430
Replacing the paper tray [Print sorter unit (10-inch type)] ........................................................................... 27430-5
Removing the print sorter unit [print sorter unit (6-inch type, 17/14 orders)] ..................................................27440
Removing the print sorter unit [print sorter unit (10-inch type)] .................................................................. 27440-5
Adjusting the stop position of the paper guide [Print sorter unit (10-inch type)] ......................................... 27450-5
Colorimeter Section ............................................................................................................. 27460
Replacing the colorimeter and the calibration plate ..........................................................................................27460
Adjusting the height of the colorimeter .............................................................................................................27470
F replenishment unit [F] ....................................................................................................... 27500
Removing F replenishment unit (QSS-3701/3702/3703/LP7500/LP7600) [F] ................................................27500
Removing F replenishment unit (QSS-3704/3705/LP7700/LP7900) [F] ...................................................... 27501-5
Removing the replenishment cartridge installation section [F] .........................................................................27510
Replacing the replenishment cartridge opening motor [F] ................................................................................27520
Replacing the replenishment solution level sensor [F] ......................................................................................27530
Output check for the cartridge flushing valve and replenishment cartridge cleaning pump [F] .......................27540
Position of the replenishment solution collection hoses [F] ..............................................................................27550
Tablet replenishment section ............................................................................................... 27610
Removing the tablet replenishment unit [J] .......................................................................................................27610
Replacing the module [J] ...................................................................................................................................27620
Replacing the drum drive motor [J] ...................................................................................................................27630
Replacing the elevator motor [J] .......................................................................................................................27640
Adjusting the tension of the elevator chain [J] ..................................................................................................27650
Adjusting the position of the elevator upper sensor [J] .....................................................................................27660
Adjusting the position of the elevator middle sensor [J] ...................................................................................27670
Adjusting the position of the elevator lower sensor [J] .....................................................................................27680
Cleaning method of the drum of module [J] ......................................................................................................27690
Replacing the STB tablet conveyor motor [J] ...................................................................................................27700
Replenishment package unit ............................................................................................... 27810
Replacing the replenisher pump and the water supply pump [SM] ..................................................................27810
Replacing the probe [SM] ..................................................................................................................................27820
Adjusting the sensitivity of the replenisher solution sensor [SM] .....................................................................27830
2000 2/2
20005 System list
System list
System list
NOTE
• For details about the capacity booster, see ☞ Capacity booster list.
QSS-37 series
System Illustration Printer Processor (process Remarks 1
specification)
QSS-3701 LP-2500G2 PP-1213G2F (F) *6 • *1*2*3*4

PP-1213G2 (normal
specification) *6
PP-1213G2SM (SM) *6
PP-1213G2J (J) *6
QSS-3702(S) • Capacity booster F is

installed.
• *1*2*3*4
QSS-3703 PP-1217G2F (F) *6 • Capacity booster F and G

PP-1217G2 (normal are installed.
specification) *6 • *1*2*3*4
PP-1217G2SM (SM) *6
PP-1217G2J (J) *6
F G
QSS-3704 PP-1223G2F (F) *6 • Capacity booster H is

PP-1223G2 (normal installed.
PP-1223G2SM (SM) *6
QSS-3705 PP-1229G2F (F) *6 • Capacity booster I is

PP-1229G2EC (normal installed.
*1. For 37 series, images are processed by the PC.

Equipped with Auto Setup function, Automatic Water Refilling and Auto cleaning as standard.
*2. The system program and profile can be commonly used for QSS-3701/3702/3703/3704/3705.
*3. The scanners LS-600, LS-1100 and HS-1800 can be commonly used for QSS-3701/3702/3703/3704/3705.
*4. The print sorter unit (6-inch type/14 orders) and print sorter unit (6-inch type/17orders) are supported.
*5. The print sorter unit (6-inch type/14 orders), print sorter unit (6-inch type/17orders) and print sorter unit (10-inch type) are supported.
*6. Six processing racks
*7. Eight processing racks
20005 1/2
20005
System list
Frontier series
System Illustration Printer Processor (process Remarks 1
specification)
LP7500 LP7EZ PP-7500 (F) • Capacity booster F is
installed.
• *1*2*3*4

F
LP7600 PP-7600 (F) • Capacity booster F and G

are installed.
• *1*2*3*4
F G
LP7700 PP-7700 (F) • Capacity booster H is

installed.
• *1*2*3*4
LP7900 PP-7900 (F) • Capacity booster I is

installed.
• *1*2*3*4
*1. Images are processed with the PC.

*2. Equipped with Auto Setup function, Automatic Water Refilling and Auto cleaning as standard.
*3. The print sorter unit (6-inch type/14 orders) and print sorter unit (6-inch type/17orders) are supported.
*4. The system program can be commonly used for LP7500/LP7600/LP7700/LP7900.
Capacity booster list

Capacity booster Model Details
Only capacity booster F 3702, LP7500 • It increases software process speed from film or digital
F media input to print.
• It makes the best use of the capability of the printer and
processor.
Capacity booster F and G 3703, LP7600 • It increases software process speed from film or digital
media input to print.
F G • It makes the best use of the capability of the printer and
processor.
Capacity booster H only 3704, LP7700 • It increases software process speed from film or digital
H media input to print.
• It makes the best use of the capability of the printer and
processor.
Capacity booster I only 3705, LP7900 • It makes the best use of the capability of the printer and
I processor.
20005 2/2
20010
Removing covers
Removing covers
Removing covers (Printer section)
If the triple magazine unit is not installed

4
If the triple magazine unit is installed
2
6
Remove screws with this mark.
Loosen screws with this mark.

G085317
20010 1/2
20010
Removing covers
When equipped with the quad magazine unit

5 7

8
G086486
No. Name Screw Remarks

(Q'ty)
1 Printer side cover 8 When the triple magazine unit is equipped, the number of screws for
the printer side cover is six.
2 Printer rear cover 16
3 Printer door 1 -
4 Printer door 2 -
5 Printer door 3 -
6 Printer top cover -
7 Printer door 4 -
8 Rear cover 12
20010 2/2
20020
Removing covers
Removing each cover (Processor section) [print sorter unit (6-inch type,
17/14 orders)] [F]

In this section, the location of information varies depending on the specification. See below for the description for each specification.
Reference
☞ Removing each cover (Processor section) [print sorter unit (6- ☞ Removing each cover (Processor section) [print sorter unit (6-
inch type, 17/14 orders)] [N] [SM] inch type, 17/14 orders)] [J]

QSS-3701/3702/3703/3704/3705/LP7500/LP7600/LP7700/LP7900
5 8
10
7 3
15
14
2
1
13
Dedicated cover for QSS-3704/3705/LP7700/LP7900

Replenisher section door
16
G085403
20020 1/7
20020
Removing covers
QSS-3701/3702/3703/3704/3705/LP7500/LP7600/LP7700/LP7900
12 Holder (2)
Conveyor guide

11

G085404
NOTE
• A is for QSS-3704/3705/LP7700/LP7900, and B is for QSS-3701/3702/3703/LP7500/LP7600.
• # is used and − is unused.
No. Name Screw Remarks A B
(Q'ty)
1 Processor cover 1 6 # -
4 - #
2 Sub-tank top cover - # #
3 Processor rear cover 7 # #
4 Processor door 1 2 Remove this after removing the mounting plate of the # #
processor door 1.
5 Processor cover 4 6 # #
6 Processor drive cover 4 # #
7 Conveyor damper cover 2 # #
8 Angle bracket cover - # #
9 Distribution plate cover 3 Remove this after removing processor cover 1. # -
2 - #
10 Dryer side cover 4 # #
11 Sorter cover 1 # #
12 Conveyor cover 4 Remove this after removing holder (2) and the conveyor # #
guide.
13 Power supply unit cover 2 Remove this after removing processor cover 1. # -
14 PCB cover 4 Remove this after removing the processor rear cover. # -
15 Print sorter unit lower cover 3 Remove this after removing the processor rear cover. # #
16 Replenisher section cover 2 Remove it after removing the bar of the replenisher section - #
door.
20020 2/7
20020
Removing covers
17/14 orders)] [N] [SM]

Reference
inch type, 17/14 orders)] [J] inch type, 17/14 orders)] [F]

7
6
9
8
3
11
10 2

G085342
20020 3/7
20020
Removing covers
13
Holder (2)

Conveyor guide
12

G070010

(Q'ty)
1 Processor cover 1 4
2 Sub-tank top cover -
3 Processor rear cover 2
4 Processor door 1 2 Remove this after removing the mounting plate of the processor door
1.
2.
7 Processor drive cover 4
8 Conveyor damper cover 2
9 Angle bracket cover -
10 Distribution plate cover 3 Remove this after removing processor cover 1.
11 Dryer side cover 4
12 Sorter cover 1
13 Conveyor cover 4 Remove this after removing holder (2) and the conveyor guide.
20020 4/7
20020
Removing covers
17/14 orders)] [J]

Reference
inch type, 17/14 orders)] [N] [SM] inch type, 17/14 orders)] [F]

7
6
9
8 3
10 11
5
4
G085343
20020 5/7
20020
Removing covers
13
Holder (2)

Conveyor guide
12
14

G070019

(Q'ty)
1.
2.
9 Angle bracket cover -
20020 6/7
20020
Removing covers

(Q'ty)
10 Distribution plate cover 3 Remove this after removing processor cover 1.
12 Sorter cover 1
13 Conveyor cover 4 Remove this after removing holder (2) and the conveyor guide.
14 Tablet replenishment cover 4
20020 7/7
20020-5
Removing covers
Removing each cover (Processor section) [print sorter unit (10-inch type)]
13
9

8
3
11
10
12
G085396

(Q'ty)
4 Processor door 1 1 Remove it upward after removing processor cover 1.
5 Processor door 2 1 Remove it upward after removing processor cover 1.
9 Connector cover 3
10 Distribution plate cover (*1) 4 (5) Remove this after removing processor cover 1.
20020-5 1/2
20020-5
Removing covers

(Q'ty)
12 Sorter cover 5
13 Conveyor cover 4
14 Replenisher section cover
*1. There is a special cover with five screws.
20020-5 2/2
20110
Adjusting belt tension
Adjusting the belt tension (printer section)
19
Exposure advance unit (far side) Viewed from the arrow

20
13 16 17,18
14 15 21

10
22
24
11 23
12
9
7,8
25
26 5
1
6
3
2
G085305
IMPORTANT
• All views of belts are from the side of printer doors.
No. Name Force Deflection Adjusting point Illustration

1 Paper magazine motor A belt 4.0 to 6.3 N 1.5 mm Paper magazine motor
(411 to 637 g) A
2 Paper supply motor A belt 10.7±2.1N 1.0 mm Paper supply motor A

(1086±214 g)
3 Paper supply motor B/C belt 6.3±1.3N 1.0 mm Paper supply motor B/C
(638±136 g)
4 Paper magazine motor C belt 4.0 to 6.3 N 1.5 mm Paper magazine motor
(412 to 637 g) C
20110 1/3
20110

5 Paper magazine motor B belt 4.3 to 6.4 N 2.5 mm Paper magazine motor
(411 to 657 g) B
6 Paper advance motor 1 belt 1.9±0.4N 1.0 mm Paper advance motor 1

(198±43 g)
7 Paper supply arm motor (left) 2.5±0.5N 5.0 mm Paper supply arm motor
belt (255±48 g) (left)

8 Paper supply arm motor (right) Paper supply arm motor
belt (right)
9 Exposure advance motor 1 belt 1.8 to 2.6 N 1.0 mm
(188 to 265 g)
10 Exposure advance pressure 0.9 to 1.4 N 1.0 mm Exposure advance

change motor 1 belt (90 to 140 g) pressure change motor 1


13 Exposure advance belt 10.3 to 11.3 N 1.0 mm Pulley holder

(1050 to 1150 g)
14 Exposure advance motor 2 belt 8.8 to 9.8 N 2.0 mm Exposure advance

(900 to 1000 g) motor 2

(218±50 g)
16 Pressure guide motor belt 2.9±0.6N 1.0 mm Pressure guide motor

(294±59 g)
17 Paper advance arm motor (right) 2.7±0.6N 5.0 mm Paper advance arm
belt (belt width: 10 mm) (280±60 g) motor (right)
18 Paper advance pressure change Paper advance pressure
motor (left) belt (belt width: 10 change motor (left)
mm)
17 Paper advance arm motor (right) 3.8±0.5N 8.0 mm Paper advance arm
belt (belt width: 8 mm) (383±46 g) motor (right)
18 Paper advance pressure change Paper advance pressure
motor (left) belt (belt width: 8 change motor (left)
mm)
20110 2/3
20110

19 Lane select motor (left) belt 1.8±0.3N 5.0 mm Lane select motor (left)
20 Lane select motor (right) belt (178±33 g) Lane select motor
(right)

(576±97 g)

22 Paper advance belt 2.7±0.5N 2.0 mm Tension pulley
(270±53 g)
23 Advance belt No need to adjust the belt tension.
24 Paper magazine motor A2 belt 5.4±1.2 N 1.5 mm Paper magazine motor

(546±117 g) A2
25 Paper supply motor A2 belt 6.26±1.33 N 1.0 mm Paper supply motor A2

(639±136 g)
26 Width change motor A2 belt 0.3±0.1N 1.0 mm Width change motor A2

(33±9 g)
20110 3/3
20120
Adjusting the belt tension (processor section) (QSS-

3701/3702/3703/LP7500/LP7600)

4
2
G070006

1 Sorter motor timing belt 330±10 g 2.5 mm Motor mount
(3.24±0.1 N)
2 Sorter chain*1 [Print sorter unit 10 mm Two tension plates

(6-inch type/17
orders)]
From 2.5N to
3.0N
From 250 g to
300 g
[Print sorter unit

(6-inch type/14
orders)]
From 4.0N to
4.5N
From 400 g to
450 g
3 Conveyor motor timing belt*2 - - Conveyor motor (four
screws)
4 Drive motor belt*3 From 255 to 402 1.6 mm Drive motor (four
g screws)
(2.6 to 4.1 N)
5 Dryer rack drive chain It is automatically tensed. No adjustment is needed.
*1. Remove all the print receiving trays, then adjust tension on the sorter chain belt.
*2. The procedure for adjusting the conveyor motor timing belt is shown below:
20120 1/2
20120
Adjust the timing belt so that part A is 15.4±0.9 mm by moving the conveyor motor in the direction indicated by the arrow.

G070007
*3. For details, see ☞ 27270.
20120 2/2
20120-5
Adjusting the belt tension (processor section) (QSS-

3704/3705/LP7700/LP7900)
[Print sorter unit (6-inch type, 17/14 orders)] [Print sorter unit (10-inch type)]
2 5 6
4

1
1
3 3
7 7
G085395

1 Dryer rack drive belt 4.85± 0.54N 4 mm Tension pulley
(495±55 g)
2 Sorter motor timing belt 3.23 ± 0.10N 2.5 mm Motor mount

[Print sorter unit (6-inch type, (330±10 g)
17/14 orders)]
3 Sorter chain*1 17-order 10 mm Two tension plates

[Print sorter unit (6-inch type, specification
17/14 orders)] From 2.5N to
3.0N
From 250 g to
300 g
14-order
specification
From 4.0N to
4.5N
From 400 g to
450 g
Sorter chain*1 4.4N 10±1.0 mm
(Print sorter unit (10-inch type) (440 g)
20120-5 1/2
20120-5

*2
4 Conveyor motor timing belt Conveyor motor (four
screws)

5 Sorter motor timing belt From 2.8N to 1.8 mm Motor mount
[Print sorter unit (10-inch type)] 3.1N
From 280 g to
310 g
6 Paper guide motor timing belt From 1.9N to 1.6 mm Motor mount
[Print sorter unit (10-inch type)] 2.4N
From 190 g to
240 g
7 Drive motor belt*3 From 255 to 402 1.6 mm Drive motor (four
g screws)
(2.6 to 4.1 N)
8 Dryer rack drive chain It is automatically tensed. No adjustment is needed.

*1. Remove all the print receiving trays, then adjust tension on the sorter chain belt.
For the 10-inch type print sorter unit, there are two sorter chains. Adjust so that two chains become the same tension.
*2. The procedure for adjusting the conveyor motor timing belt is shown below:
Adjust the timing belt so that part A is 15.4±0.9 mm by moving the conveyor motor in the direction indicated by the arrow.
G052513
*3. For details, see ☞ 27270.
20120-5 2/2
20125
Adjusting the belt tension (colorimeter)

1
G085256
Colorimeter
1 Paper advance motor belt 1 From 250 g to 300 g 2.0 mm Attaching position of the
(From 2.4 N to 3.0 tension pulley
N)
2 Paper advance motor belt 2 From 340 g to 400 g 2.0 mm Attaching position of the
(From 3.3 N to 4.0 calibration plate advance
N) motor
20125 1/1
22000
Magazine section
Magazine section
Checking the paper magazine
Items to confirm
Paper magazine Check that paper roll is straight.
Check that paper guides are attached securely.
Check that the reel plate is closed securely.
! Procedure

1. Check that the position of the magazine reel plate corresponds to the paper width which is in use.
Dark room type magazine
The third from the left is unused.
127 203
120
130 210
117
152 216
114 240
102 165 254
89 178 279
82.5 305
G072384
2. Put a scale in the magazine to check whether deformation of the reel plate is within 0.3 mm.
IMPORTANT
• When the deflection of paper magazine reel plate is 0.3 mm or more, check the condition of the reel plate and
nut plate. See Step 7.
0.3 mm
Reel plate Ruler
G072381
3. Place the paper magazine on the level floor.

IMPORTANT
• Place the paper magazine on the level floor to check the magazine reel plate correctly because the paper
magazine may deforms.
22000 1/3
22000
Magazine section
4. Set the paper tube onto the spindle.

Paper tube

G072371
NOTE
• Use the paper tube that corresponds to the paper width that is set to the paper magazine.
5. Set the spindle to the paper magazine.
6. Check that the deformation of the magazine reel plate is within 0.3 mm inside from the paper guide.
IMPORTANT
• Put a ruler against the reel plate and turn the spindle to check the deformation of the reel plate.
• When the deflection of paper magazine reel plate is 0.3 mm or more, check the condition of the reel plate and
nut plate. See Step 7.
Reel plate
Paper tube
Ruler
Paper guide face

0.3 mm
Ruler Inside
G072370
7. Check the condition of reel plate and nut plate.

NOTE
• Do not loosen or tighten the screws at the side with the dents since they are fixed.
22000 2/3
22000
Magazine section
Dark room type magazine

Dark room type magazine Dark room type magazine
Dents

Reel plate, nut plate
IMPORTANT
• If there is nothing wrong with the condition of reel plate and nut plate, and the reel plate's deflection is 0.3 mm
or more, replace the reel plate.
22000 3/3
22100
Magazine section
Adjusting the zigzagging of the paper magazine deck
! Procedure
IMPORTANT
• The zigzagging of the magazine deck must be adjusted for each paper magazine A, A2, B, and C.
• When adjusting the zigzagging of the magazine deck, make a test print using the maximum size of paper which has
been used.

1. Make the test prints via Test Print 1/2 for Arm Unit 1 Zigzagging Correction.
☞ 36060
2. Take the second test print as a standard. Confirm the difference of lines A and lines C of the first and
second prints.
Center line on the second Second test print
print
Center line on the First test print
first print
A
C
CA
A
C Paper advance direction
First test print Second test print

G072383
22100 1/8
22100
Magazine section
3. Compare with the following patterns, and calculate the amount of zigzagging.
The center line of the first print leans to the right. The center line of the first print leans to the left.
P5 A
P4 A
A A
P1 P2

C C
C C
P6 A
A
P3
C
C
Pattern No. Amount of zigzagging Inclination direction of the center

line
P1 A-C Right
P2 A+C
P3 C-A
P4 C-A Left
P5 A+C
P6 A-C
4. If the amount of zigzagging is not within 0.5 mm, position the magazine deck.
For each magazine
Magazine deck Reference
Magazine deck B ☞ Adjusting magazine deck B
Magazine deck C ☞ Adjusting magazine deck C
Magazine deck A ☞ Adjusting magazine deck A
Magazine deck A2 ☞ 26820
22100 2/8
22100
Magazine section
! Adjusting magazine deck B
IMPORTANT
• Measure the dimension shown below before adjusting the positioning pin for magazine deck B. It will help you to
restore after adjustment of the positioning pin.

Ruler
G072374
1. Loosen the fixing screw on the positioning pin for the magazine deck B. (Loosen two fixing screws.)
2. Adjust the positioning pin for the magazine deck B. (One adjusting screw and one nut)
If the first test print is misaligned to the right. Step 2 Adjust the positioning pin downwards. (Turn the adjusting screw to the
left.)
If the first test print is misaligned to the left. Step 2 Adjust the positioning pin upwards. (Turn the adjusting screw to the
right.)
IMPORTANT
• When tightening the fixing screws on the positioning pin, push the pin in the directions indicated by arrows 1
and 2.
• When the adjusting screw is turned 360 degree, the positioning pin moves approximately 0.7 mm.
Fixing screws
Positioning pin Nut

Adjusting screw
G072378
22100 3/8
22100
Magazine section
3. When magazine B is set on the positioning pin after the positioning pin is adjusted, check that the gap
under the magazine B is 0.5 mm.
Magazine B

Magazine deck B
G072379
4. If the gap under the magazine B is not 0.5 mm when the magazine B is set on the positioning pin,
loosen the screws on magazine deck B. (four screws)
5. Adjust the height of the magazine deck B so that the gap under magazine B is 0.5 mm when magazine
B is set on the positioning pin. (Two adjusting screws and two nuts)
6. Tighten screws on the magazine deck B. (four screws)
Loosen this screw.
Adjusting screws and nuts
Loosen these screws.
Loosen this screw.

Magazine deck B
G072380
7. Perform Arm Unit 1 Zigzagging Correction.

☞ 36060
8. When repeating the zigzagging adjustment of magazine deck B, repeat Step 1 to Step 7.
22100 4/8
22100
Magazine section
! Adjusting magazine deck C
IMPORTANT
• Measure the dimension shown below before adjusting the positioning pin for magazine deck C. It will help you to

Ruler
Measure here.
G072375
1. Loosen the fixing screw on the positioning pin for the magazine deck C. (Loosen two fixing screws.)
2. Adjust the positioning pin for the magazine deck C. (One adjusting screw and one nut)
If the first test print is misaligned to the right. Step 2 Adjust the positioning pin to the left. (Turn the adjusting screw to the
left.)
If the first test print is misaligned to the left. Step 2 Adjust the positioning pin to the right. (Turn the adjusting screw to the
right.)
IMPORTANT
and 2.
22100 5/8
22100
Magazine section
Positioning pin
Fixing screws

Counterclock
Clockwise
Nut
Adjusting Hexagonal screwdriver

G072376
3. After adjusting the positioning pin, check that positioning pin goes into the positioning hole of the
magazine smoothly when removing and attaching.
4. If the positioning pin is not smoothly inserted into the hole, loosen the screws of magazine deck C.
(three screws)
5. Adjust the position of magazine deck C so that the positioning pin goes into the hole smoothly.
6. Tighten screw(s) on magazine deck C. (three screws)
Screws
Screw Magazine deck C

G072377

☞ 36060
8. When repeating the zigzagging adjustment of magazine deck C, repeat Step 1 to Step 7.
22100 6/8
22100
Magazine section
! Adjusting magazine deck A
IMPORTANT
• Measure the dimension shown below before adjusting the positioning pin for magazine deck A. It will help you to

Ruler
Measure here.
Positioning pin
G072373
1. Loosen the fixing screw on the positioning pin for magazine deck A. (Loosen two fixing screws.)
2. Adjust the positioning pin for magazine deck A. (One adjusting screw and one nut)
If the first test print is misaligned to the right. Step 2 Adjust the positioning pin to the right. (Turn the adjusting screw to the
left.)
If the first test print is misaligned to the left. Step 2 Adjust the positioning pin to the left. (Turn the adjusting screw to the
right.)
IMPORTANT
and 2.
Fixing screws
Counterclock
Clockwise
Positioning pin
Nut
Hexagonal screwdriver
Adjusting screw
G090254
3. After adjusting the positioning pin, check that positioning pin fits the positioning hole of the magazine
smoothly when removing and attaching magazine A.
22100 7/8
22100
Magazine section
4. If the positioning pin is not smoothly inserted into the hole, loosen the screws of magazine deck A.
(three screws)
5. Adjust the position of magazine deck A so that the positioning pin fits the hole smoothly.
6. Tighten screws on magazine deck A. (three screws)

Magazine deck A
G072369

☞ 36060
8. When repeating the zigzagging adjustment of magazine deck A, repeat Step 1 to Step 7.
22100 8/8
25610
Paper supply unit
Paper supply unit
Removing the paper supply unit
! Procedure
Removing the paper supply unit

1. Pull out the paper supply unit.
2. Hold part A and lift up the paper supply unit to the direction of the arrow.
IMPORTANT

• The paper supply unit is heavy. Do not drop it and handle it carefully after removing.
Parts A
Upper rail
Paper supply
unit
Lower rail
G068526
IMPORTANT
• Set the paper supply unit on the lower rail and then set it on the upper rail.
! Adjusting the attaching position
When the original paper supply unit is reattached

1. It is not necessary to adjust.
25610 1/2
25610
Paper supply unit
When the new paper supply unit is attached

1. Perform Paper Sensor Adjustment.
☞ 36000
2. Check if the right angle adjustment of the cutter unit is completed correctly.
☞ 25620
3. Perform Paper Advance Length Correction.
☞ 36050

☞ 36060
25610 2/2
25620
Paper supply unit
Removal and the right angle adjustment of the cutter unit
! Procedure
Removing the cutter unit

2. Disconnect the connector.
J/P134 (Cut motor)

J/P135 (Cut home sensor and cut end sensor)
J/P364 (paper loading sensor)
3. Remove the cutter unit. (two screws)
Cutter unit
J/P134
J/P135 and J/P364
G068527
4. Remove the sensor holder. (two screws)
Sensor holder
Cutter unit
G068528
5. Remove the cutter cover. (two screws)

6. Remove the mounting angle bracket. (one screw)
Cutter cover
Angle bracket G068529
25620 1/3
25620
Paper supply unit
Adjusting the position of the sensor holder

1. Reattach the cutter cover. (two screws)
2. Attach the mounting angle bracket. (one screw)
3. Fix the sensor holder temporarily. (two screws)
4. Position the sensor holder so that it is 0 to 0.5 mm lower than the cutter lower blade. (two screws)
NOTE
• Usually, if the cutter lower blade is contacted and the sensor holder is attached, it becomes within the above standard
range. Finally, confirm the standard dimension of the sensor holder and cutter lower blade.

Contact
0 to 0.5
mm
Sensor holder
Cutter lower
blade
Cutter unit back face
Cutter lower blade
Cutter unit front front face
Sensor holder
G068532
The right angle adjustment of the cutter unit

1. Loosen two screws on the cutter unit positioning plate, then carry out the right angle adjustment using
the adjustment screw. (Loosen one screw and one nut.)
IMPORTANT
• Loosen two screws on the cutter unit and test the right angle adjustment for the cutter unit.
25620 2/3
25620
Paper supply unit

Adjusting
screw
Nut
Cutter unit positioning plate
G068530
IMPORTANT
• To adjust the right angle of the cutter unit, move the cutter unit positioning plate pushing onto the reference
surface of the paper supply unit.
Cutter unit positioning plate
Reference surface G068531
" Point
When checking the right angle of the cutter unit, make the print cut parts meet as shown in the figure below.
Paper First one
advance
direction
A B
Paper
emulsion
side
Second one
G052651
• If the cutting end is as shown in A, adjust the cutting angle by moving the cutter unit positioning plate in the direction
indicated by the arrow A as shown above.
• If the cutting end is as shown in B, adjust the cutting angle by moving the cutter unit positioning plate in the direction
indicated by the arrow B as shown above.
25620 3/3
25630
Paper supply unit
Adjusting the timing of the paper supply pressure change sensor
! Procedure
1. Activate the paper supply pressure change motor in the Output check to turn the paper supply
pressure change sensor to DARK.
2. Pull out the paper supply unit and check the condition of the cam.
3. Adjust the position of the detection plate of the paper supply pressure change sensor in order to set the

cam of the paper supply unit to be in the vertical position to the pressure release arm. (one set-screw)
NOTE
• The arm opens fully and the paper advance rollers release pressure.
Paper supply pressure change sensor
Detection
plate
Cam (vertical
position)
Direction A Set-screw
Paper supply unit

Cam (vertical position)
G068545
View from direction A
Paper advance rollers

Pressure release arm
Rotation direction
Cam Detection
(vertical plate
position)
G068544
25630 1/3
25630
Paper supply unit
4. Repeat steps from ☞ 1 through ☞ 3 and adjust the position of the detection plate of the paper supply
pressure change sensor in order to set the cam of the paper supply unit to be in the vertical position to
the pressure release arm.
5. Reassemble the parts.
! Checking after adjustment
1. Check the center part of the paper (around the position of 450 mm) for the banding in case printing
several gray prints with the paper advance length of 914 mm.

2. If the banding appears at the center part of the paper (around the position of 450 mm), adjust the
position of the detection plate in the direction indicated by the arrow.
IMPORTANT
• The banding disappears if you adjust the position of the detection plate in the arrow direction. However, note
that an advance failure may occur if you process paper with the paper advance length of 82.5 mm.
Detection
plate

G078434
3. Check the center part of the paper (around the position of 450 mm) for the banding in case printing
several gray prints with the paper advance length of 914 mm.
4. Check if paper is advanced properly in case of printing with paper advance length of 82.5 mm.
5. If paper jam occurs in case of printing with the paper advance length of 82.5 mm, adjust the position of
the detection plate in the direction indicated by the arrow.
Detection
plate

G078435
25630 2/3
25630
Paper supply unit
6. Repeat Checking after adjustments from ☞ 1 through ☞ 5 to adjust the position of the detection plate
of the paper supply unit so that no banding or paper jam occurs.
25630 3/3
25640
Paper supply unit
Adjusting the paper hold timing of the paper hold motor
! Procedure

2. Set a hexagonal screwdriver onto the detection plate and loosen one of two set-screws on the paper
hold motor.

Detection plate
Cam
Paper hold sensor
G070029
3. Adjust the position of the detection plate of the paper hold motor.
(1) Look and adjust from the direction indicated by arrow.
Detection plate
View from this side.

G068542
(2) Turn the detection plate with a hexagonal screwdriver clockwise to make the cam in a horizontal position.
(3) Loosen another set-screw of the paper hold motor that is loosened in step 2. (Loosen one of the two set-screws.)
25640 1/2
25640
Paper supply unit
(4) Keep the cam in a horizontal position and adjust the detection plate at the position of 2.35±0.5 mm away from the
edge of the paper hold sensor. (one set-screw)
Detection plate
Cam

Paper hold sensor
Detection plate
Cam
Center of the paper

hold sensor
2.35±0.5 mm
G068543
(5) Tighten the set-screws of the paper hold motor. (Two set-screws)
4. Operate the paper hold motor via Output check to check that the pressure pin is align with the guide
when the paper hold sensor is LIGHT.
☞ 35310
0.0 mm
Pressure
Guide pin
Paper hold motor
G068547
25640 2/2
25650
Paper supply unit
Adjusting the CVP imprint pressure
! Procedure

2. Loosen the two screws on the correction value printing unit.

Note
Overhead view of the correction value printing
unit
Correction value printing unit
G070033
3. Attach the head adjusting jig in the paper supply unit.

IMPORTANT
• The head adjusting jig is a service personnel tool. See Service personnel tool list.
• ☞ 80310
Head adjustment jig
Paper supply unit

G070034
25650 1/2
25650
Paper supply unit
4. Adjust the correction value printing unit position by turning the adjusting screw according to the
thickness of the head adjusting jig.
Correction value printing unit

Adjusting screw
G070035
5. Tighten the two screws of the correction value printing unit.

6. Make actual prints, then confirm the printing density of the CVP unit.
25650 2/2
25660
Paper supply unit
Removing paper supply unit A
! Procedure
1. Remove the paper supply unit.

☞ 25610
2. Disconnect the connector(s).
J/P321 (paper supply motor A)
3. Remove paper supply unit A in the direction indicated by arrow 1. (six screws)

IMPORTANT
• Be careful because the paper supply unit falls down in the arrow 2 direction when you remove paper supply unit
A from the paper supply unit.
J/P321
Paper supply unit A
Paper supply unit A
G068533
1. Attach paper supply unit A to the paper supply unit temporarily. (six screws)
25660 1/2
25660
Paper supply unit
2. Attach paper supply unit A pushing it in the direction indicated by the arrows 1 and 2. (six screws)
Paper supply unit A

Paper supply unit A
G068534
When the original paper supply unit A is reattached

1. Check the adjustment of Arm Unit 1 Zigzagging Correction → Paper Magazine A.
☞ 36060
When the new paper supply unit A is attached

1. Adjust Paper Advance Length Correction → Paper Magazine A.
☞ 36050
2. Check the adjustment of Arm Unit 1 Zigzagging Correction → Paper Magazine A.
☞ 36060
25660 2/2
25710
Paper supply unit A2
Removing paper supply unit A2
! Procedure
Removing paper supply unit A2

1. Pull out paper supply unit A2.
2. Remove the fixing angle bracket. (one screw)
3. Hold part A and lift up paper supply unit A2 to the direction of the arrow.

IMPORTANT
• Paper supply unit A2 is heavy. Do not drop it and handle it carefully after removing.
Upper rail
Part A
Screw
Fixing angle bracket
Lower rail Paper supply unit A2
G086491
IMPORTANT
• Set paper supply unit A2 on the lower rail and then set it on the upper rail.
When the original paper supply unit A2 is reattached

When the new paper supply unit is attached
1. Adjust zigzagging for paper supply unit A2.
☞ 26820
☞ 36000
3. Perform the paper guide width correction (for each Paper Width).
☞ 36065
25710 1/2
25710
4. Perform Paper Advance Length Correction.

☞ 36050
☞ 36060
25710 2/2
25810
Exposure advance unit
Removing the exposure advance unit
! Procedure
1. Open the printer top cover.

2. Remove paper advance unit 1.
☞ 26510
3. Open paper advance unit 2.

4. Remove the pressure guide.
5. Remove the reinforcement angle bracket from the exposure advance unit. (four screws)
Reinforcement angle bracket
Pressure guide
G085235

J/P342 (Relay connector)
7. Remove the exposure advance unit. (six screws)
The number of screws may be four depending on the system.
Reinforcement angle bracket of

the exposure advance unit
J/P385
J/P342
These screws may not be attached depending on the

system.

G090942
25810 1/2
25810
1. The exposure advance unit has positioning pin(s). No position adjustment is needed in attaching the
exposure advance unit.
! Adjustment after reattaching and setup

When the original exposure advance unit is reattached
• There is no need for adjustment.

When the new exposure advance unit is attached
☞ 36000
2. Adjust the zigzagging of the exposure advance unit.
☞ 36080
3. Perform the exposure advance adjustment.
☞ 36080
4. Check the exposure center correction.
☞ 36070
25810 2/2
25820
Replacing the pressure guide in the exposure advance unit
! Procedure

3. Remove the pressure guide from the exposure advance unit.

Pressure guide
G072366

When the original pressure guide is reattached
• There is no need for adjustment.
When a new pressure guide is attached

1. Perform the exposure advance adjustment.
☞ 36080
2. Check the exposure center correction.
☞ 36070
25820 1/1
25830
Banding adjustment for the exposure advance unit
! Procedure
IMPORTANT
• Banding adjustment for the exposure advance unit needs to be performed when the banding is found at the area 32
mm from the paper leading end or 24 to 27 mm from the paper rear end.
32 mm

Leading
end Rear end
24 to 27 mm
Pressure roller at the exit side
Pressure roller at the inlet

side
G072396
1. Make some prints of gray prints in the Print mode.

NOTE
• Any paper size is acceptable.
2. When the banding is found at the area 32 mm from the paper leading end, adjust the pressure of the
pressure roller at the exit side in the exposure advance unit. ☞ The banding at the area 32 mm from the
paper leading end
3. When the banding is found at the area 24 to 27 mm from the paper rear end, adjust the pressure of the
pressure roller at the inlet side in the exposure advance unit. ☞ The banding at the area 24 to 27 mm
from the paper rear end
4. If the banding is found at the area that is not mentioned above, perform adjustment referring the
banding shooting.
☞ 25910
25830 1/6
25830
! The banding at the area 32 mm from the paper leading end
1. Turn the cam in the exposure advance unit to release the pressure of the pressure roller at the exit side
and set the paper.
2. Make fine adjustments of the cam in the exposure advance unit so that the pressure release amount of
the pressure roller at the exit side is the thickness of about one sheet of paper. Use the paper to check
that the pressure of the pressure roller at the exit side is equable at the right and left.

Pressure roller
at the exit side
Cam G072398
IMPORTANT
• If the pressure needs to be adjusted, perform the following adjustments.
3. Remove the pressure guide from the exposure advance unit.
4. Loosen the fixing screw of the exposure advance unit exit roller. (Loosen one fixing screw.)
5. Loosen the nut on the exposure advance unit exit roller. (Loosen one nut.)
25830 2/6
25830
6. Adjust the exit roller adjusting screw so that the pressure of the pressure guide at the exit side in the
exposure advance unit is equable at the left and right. (one adjusting screw)
Pressure roller at Exit roller adjusting screw
the exit side Exit roller nut
Exit roller fixing

screw

Inlet roller
fixing screw
Pressure roller at
the inlet side
Inlet roller Inlet roller nut
adjusting screw
G072393
The direction of rotation of the adjusting screw

The pressure of the pressure The direction of
roller rotation of the
adjusting screw
The pressure at the right side is Clockwise
stronger.
The pressure at the left side is Counterclockwise
stronger.
IMPORTANT
• Adjust the zigzagging by turning the adjusting screw between 2.0 and 2.5 mm. If adjustment is performed out of
the range between 2.0 and 2.5 mm, the banding may appear on the area 32 mm from the paper leading end.
Exit roller adjusting screw
Exit roller nut
2.0 to 2.5 mm
Ruler
Inlet roller nut
Inlet roller
adjusting screw 2.0 to 2.5 mm
G072395
25830 3/6
25830
IMPORTANT
• Tighten the fixing screw of the exposure advance roller while the angle bracket of the pressure roller unit is
pressed in the direction indicated by the arrow.
Screwdriver

Pressure guide
G072394
7. Make some gray prints in Print mode to see if the banding occurs.
NOTE
8. Repeat the pressure adjustment of the pressure guide if the banding is found.
9. After completing the banding adjustment, select and execute Exposure Advance Adjustment →
F:Functions → Exposure Advance Pressure Inlet Roller Test Print (Paper Magazine A/A2/B/C).
IMPORTANT
• Print the test print with the maximum paper width which has been used.
10. After completing the banding adjustment, measure the dimensions between 0 mm-line and 254 mm-line
of right and left edges of the test print and check that the differences are within 0.2 mm.
Paper advance direction
A
Left Right
Rear end
G068467
NOTE
• There is another method to check the difference. Cut the paper at the center and put them together to check the difference.
11. If the difference of right and left measured values is 0.2 mm or more, perform the Exposure Advance
Adjustment.
See 36080 ☞ Adjusting the paper zigzagging in the exposure advance unit.
NOTE
• If the difference of right and left measured value is within 0.2 mm, the zigzagging adjustment is completed.
12. Check the Arm Unit 1 Zigzagging Correction.
☞ 36060
25830 4/6
25830
! The banding at the area 24 to 27 mm from the paper rear end
1. Turn the cam on the exposure advance unit to release the pressure of the pressure roller at the exit
side.

Pressure roller
at the exit side
Cam
G072399
2. Release the pressure of the pressure roller at the exit side and set the paper. Make fine adjustments of
the cam in the exposure advance unit so that the pressure release amount of the pressure roller at the
inlet side is the thickness of about one sheet of paper.
25830 5/6
25830
3. Use the paper to check that the pressure of the pressure roller at the inlet side is equable at the right
and left.

Pressure roller at
the inlet side
Cam
G072397
4. If the adjustment is required, perform the same adjustment as the adjustment for the exposure advance
unit exit roller.
25830 6/6
25910
Banding shooting
Test print 17 mm
32 mm

Leading end
Rear end
55 mm 55 mm
210 mm G072388
Paper path diagram
42.9 mm
Paper advance unit 1 70.5 mm
Arm
62.8 mm
Exposure advance motor 2 belt
72 mm
17 mm
Exposure position
17 mm
79 mm

G072400
25910 1/3
25910
! Banding shooting
Print condition Banding position Status Corrective action Refer to
All Around 0 to 11 mm from the The bumper rubber for the laser control Attach the bumper -
paper leading edge box is detached. rubber.
The exposure advance unit vibrates Attach the reinforcement ☞ 25810
during printing operation. angle bracket to the
exposure advance unit.
At the area 33.5 mm from the The pressure of the exit side pressure Adjust the zigzagging of ☞ 25830
paper leading end roller in the exposure advance unit is the exposure advance

uneven. unit.
• The advance belt is removed from Check the condition of ☞ 20110
the pressure guide. the advance belt of the
• The advance belt of the pressure pressure guide.
guide is damaged.
Around 17 mm from the The inlet side pressure roller release Perform the paper ☞ 36090
paper rear edge amount of the exposure advance unit is pressure operation
too small. correction.
Around 26 mm from the The inlet side pressure roller release
paper rear edge amount of the exposure advance unit is
too big.
Around 24 to 27 mm from The pressure of the inlet side pressure Adjust the zigzagging of ☞ 25830
the paper rear edge roller in the exposure advance unit is the exposure advance
uneven. unit.
Banding is generated over The belt tension of exposure advance Check exposure advance ☞ 20110
the print in a cycle (210 mm). motor 2 belt is maladjusted. motor 2 belt.
Banding is generated over
the print in a cycle (55 mm).
Whole of the print (no The screws of the exposure advance unit Tighten the screws of the ☞ 25810
repetition) are loose. exposure advance unit.
External vibration is applied to the - -
system.
All jack bolts are not effective. Check the level of the -
printer.
The strength of the floor is insufficient. - -
The banding cannot Around 55 mm from the The bumper rubber for the laser control Attach the bumper -
be found on the first paper rear edge box is detached. rubber.
and the last prints in around 45 to 48 mm from the The pressure pin of the paper supply unit Adjust the position of the ☞ 25640
the Continuous paper rear edge comes out of the guide. pressure pin of the paper
Print. The banding supply unit.
cannot be found on IMPORTANT Guide
the print when only • This banding occurs
one print is made. when a paper is being 0.0 mm
exposed while the
next paper to expose
is advanced from the
paper supply unit to
the exposure advance Pressure
pin
unit.
25910 2/3
25910
Print condition Banding position Status Corrective action Refer to

Paper with an At the center part of the Position adjustment failure of the paper Adjust the position of the See 25630
advance length of paper (around the position of supply unit cam cam of the paper supply ☞ Checking
914 mm 450 mm) unit. after
adjustment
IMPORTANT
• This banding appears
when the paper
supply unit cam
releases pressure
while the paper with

paper advance length
of 914 mm is being
exposed.
25910 3/3
26510
Paper advance unit 1
Removing paper advance unit 1
! Procedure

2. Loosen screw(s) on paper advance unit 1. (Loosen four screws.)

G068506

5. Remove paper advance unit 1 in the arrow direction.
J/P333 and J/P334

G068507
26510 1/4
26510
1. Attach paper advance unit 1.

NOTE
• Remove two of four screws of the paper advance unit 1 to attach the unit.
Remove the screws.

G085233
2. Set paper advance unit 1 to the positioning pin.

3. Tighten four screws of paper advance unit 1 temporarily.
NOTE
• Attach two screws if you removed them in step 1 of Attaching position.

G070716
26510 2/4
26510
4. Tighten the screw(s) pushing paper advance unit 1 in the direction of the arrow. (four screws)
Positioning pins

Paper advance
unit 1
Tighten these screws.

G068508
5. Check paper advance unit 1 sets on the positioning pin(s) normally in opening and closing.
! Adjustment after reattaching
If the removed paper advance unit 1 is reattached
If new paper advance unit 1 is attached
☞ 36000
26510 3/4
26510
2. Execute Test Operation for the Paper Stop Position Correction via F: Functions of Paper Advance
Unit Correction.
Confirm the dimension between the front ends of arm unit 2 and paper is from 3.0±0.5 mm.

Paper
Arm unit 2
3.0±0.5 mm
G068452
3. If an adjustment is necessary, perform Paper Advance Unit Correction.

☞ 36010
26510 4/4
26550
Removing paper advance unit 2
! Removing


4. Remove screw(s) from paper advance unit 2. (four screws)
J/P412
J/P413
J/P323
J/P322
J/P411
J/P410

G068503
5. Open paper advance unit 2 and remove it in the arrow direction.

G068504
1. Attach paper advance unit 2.
26550 1/3
26550
2. Attach the connector(s) on paper advance unit 2. (Six relay connectors)

IMPORTANT
• Perform wiring on paper advance unit 2 as shown below.
• Check that any cables are not pinched or any extra pressure is not on wiring in opening and closing paper
advance unit 2.

Wiring
G068548
3. Adjust the position of paper advance unit 2 so that the unit sets on the positioning pin(s) normally. (four
screws)
Positioning pin
Positioning pin
G068505
If the removed paper advance unit 2 is reattached

26550 2/3
26550
If new paper advance unit 2 is attached

1. Check the backlash between the gear of the processor loading unit and that of paper advance unit 2.
Gear

Screws
G084957
2. Perform Paper Advance Unit Correction.

☞ 36010
26550 3/3
26560
Removing the paper advance pressure change motors (right and left) and
adjusting the pressure timing for the arm(s)
! Procedure

☞ 26550
Removing the paper advance pressure change motors (right and left)

1. Remove the upper guide (right). (four screws, one plate)
2. Remove the upper guide (left). (four screws)
Upper guide (left)
Plate
Upper guide (right)
G068549
3. Remove the lower guides (right and left). (one screw and one nut each)
IMPORTANT
• If you remove the lower guides (right and left), adjustment will be needed.
Lower guide (left)
Lower guide (right)
G068550
26560 1/3
26560
4. Remove the paper advance pressure change motor units (right and left). (three screws each)
Paper advance pressure change motor unit (left)
Arm (left)
Arm (right)

Paper advance pressure change motor unit (right)
G069797

J/P377 [Paper advance pressure change sensor (left)]
J/P378 [Paper advance pressure change sensor (right)]
J/P337 [Paper advance pressure change motor (left)]
J/P338 [Paper advance pressure change motor (right)]
Adjusting the paper hold timing of the arm

1. Adjust the position of the detection plates of the paper advance pressure change sensors (right and
left).
(1) View the detection plate in the direction indicated by the arrow.
(2) Rotate the cam using a hexagonal screwdriver to make the cam as shown in the illustration.
(3) Loosen the set-screw of the detection plate. (Loosen two set-screws.)
26560 2/3
26560
(4) Adjust the position of the detection plate so that the detection plate is protruded by 3.6±0.5 mm from the Paper
Advance Pressure Change Sensor (Left) or Paper Advance Pressure Change Sensor (Right). (Two set-
screws)
Viewed from the arrow
Paper advance Pressure Change Sensors (Right)
Arm (right)
Paper advance pressure change motor (right) Detection plate
Cam
3.6±0.5 mm

View from this side.
Cam
Set-screws of the detection plate Detection plate Hexagonal screwdriver
Arm (left)
Paper advance Pressure Change Sensors (Left)
Paper advance pressure change motor (left)

Detection plate
Cam
3.6±0.5 mm
View from this side. Cam
Set-screws of the detection plate Detection plate Hexagonal screwdriver

G085230
2. Attach the paper advance pressure change motor units (right and left). (three screws each)
3. Attach the lower guides (right and left). (one screw and one nut each)
4. Adjust the position of the arm(s).
☞ 26570
5. Operate the Paper Advance Pressure Change Motor (Left) or the Paper Advance Pressure Change
Motor (Right) via Output check to check the pressure roller is released when the Paper Advance
Pressure Change Sensor (Left) or the Paper Advance Pressure Change Sensor (Right) is LIGHT.
☞ 35310
26560 3/3
26570
Adjusting the arm position
! Procedure

☞ 26550
2. Remove the upper guide (right). (four screws, one plate)
3. Remove the upper guide (left). (four screws)

Upper guide (left)
Plate
Upper guide (right)

G068549
Adjusting the position of the arm (right)

1. Perform adjustment so that the dimension between the lower guide of the arm unit and the rail is
53.9±0.2 mm. (one screw)
Lower guide
53.9±0.2 mm
Rail
G069798
26570 1/2
26570
Adjusting the position of the arm (left)

1. Perform adjustment so that the dimension between the lower guide of the arm unit and the rail is
53.9±0.2 mm. (one screw)
Lower guide

53.9±0.2 mm
Rail
G069799
1. Test the paper advance.
26570 2/2
26610
Processor loading unit
Removing the processor loading unit
! Procedure

☞ 26550

J/P354 and J/P395

G068397
4. Remove the processor loading unit. (four screws)

Positioning pin
Positioning pin
G085231

When the original processor loading unit is reattached
• The processor loading unit has positioning pin(s). No position adjustment is needed in attaching the processor loading unit.
When the new processor loading unit is attached

☞ 36000
26610 1/1
26710
Laser unit
Laser unit
Replacing and adjusting the position of the laser unit
! Precautions for laser unit replacement
IMPORTANT
• If you replaced the laser unit, items shown below are necessary in returning the defective unit.
Laser unit Defective laser unit

Sample print The print where the abnormal color can be checked

Backup data Backup data when the problem occurred
Make a backup copy of all the data in Reading and Writing Data.
☞ 35400
! Procedure

☞ 26550
3. Remove the processor loading unit.
☞ 26610
4. Remove the wiring cover. (Loosen two screws.)
5. Remove the PCB cover. (ten screws)
6. Remove laser control box cooling fan 1. (one screw)
7. Disconnect the ground wire. (one screw)
PCB cover
Wiring cover
Ground wire
J/P1619
Laser control box cooling fan 1
G085223

J/P1619 (Laser control box cooling fan 1)
26710 1/6
26710
Laser unit

J/P1637 (G-AOM driver)
J/P1637 (G-AOM driver)

G085234
10. Disconnect the connector(s). (one screw)

J/P1663 (G laser driver)
J/P1501, J/P1502, J/P1503, J/P1504, J/P1505, J/P1509, J/P1515, J/P1532 (laser control PCB)
J/P1525, J/P1526 (relay connector)
IMPORTANT
• The positions of the relay connector(s) may be changed.
• Remove the cable clamp(s) if it is attached to the connector(s).
J/P1501, J/P1502, J/P1503
J/P1515
J/P1525, J/P1526 (relay connector)

J/P1509
J/P1532 J/P1505
J/P1504
J/P1663
G085237
26710 2/6
26710
Laser unit
11. Remove the laser control box. (four screws)

IMPORTANT
• Remove the laser control box. Turn it over and place on the processor top cover.

Laser control box
G085238
Take care for the wiring connected to the laser control PCB and perform the operation.
• Do not lose the four vibration-proof rubbers of the laser control box.
Vibration-proof rubber
G085239
12. Remove three vibration-proof mounts and a vibration-proof angle bracket. (two screws)
IMPORTANT
• This step is required only when you replace the laser unit with new one.
26710 3/6
26710
Laser unit
Vibration-proof mounts

Vibration-proof angle bracket
G072356
13. Remove the laser unit. (four screws)
Laser unit
G068514
1. Attach the laser unit.
26710 4/6
26710
Laser unit
2. Attach the laser unit pushing the unit in the direction of the arrow (contact face). (four screws)
Contact faces

G068519
When the original laser unit is reattached

1. Perform the daily setup.
When a new laser unit is attached
1. Attach three vibration-proof mounts and a vibration-proof angle bracket to the new laser unit. (two
screws)
NOTE
• No position adjustment is required for the vibration-proof mounts and vibration-proof angle bracket.
Vibration-proof mounts
Vibration-proof angle bracket

G072356
26710 5/6
26710
Laser unit
Item Reference
Perform Exposure Magnification Correction. ☞ 36020
Perform Exposure Position Adjustment. ☞ 36030
Perform Exposure Magnification Fine Adjustment. ☞ 36040
Check the difference of the main scanning direction of the Exposure Position Adjustment again. ☞ 36030
Perform initial setup. -
Perform Paper Specification Registration/Setup and Magazine Registration/Setup. ☞ 32510
☞ 32520
Perform Letter blur check with NCE Mode. ☞ 32513

Perform Edge Brightness Correction Data Initialization.
Perform Brightness of the Edge. ☞ 32514
Perform Exposure Adjustment. ☞ 32515
Back up the data. -
26710 6/6
26810
Zigzag adjustment
Zigzag adjustment
Adjusting the zigzagging of the paper advance section
This section explains the zigzagging adjustment procedure for paper magazines A, B and C. For the adjustment procedure for paper
magazine A2, see the following.
See ☞ 26820☞ How to adjust the zigzagging in paper supply unit A2.
Items to confirm
All Check if leveling of the system is completed correctly.
Magazine deck Check that the shutter open/close arm works properly. (If the printer door is closed, the shutter

open/close arm moves 10 mm and more at the outlet section of the magazine.)
! Procedure
1. Check the condition of the paper magazine.

☞ 22000
See ☞ Adjusting the paper zigzagging in the exposure advance unit in 36080.
IMPORTANT
• When adjusting the zigzagging of the exposure advance unit, make a test print using the maximum size of
paper which is in use.
• If the exposure advance adjustment is performed for any one of magazine A, A2, B, or C, the correction is
complete.
• Measure the dimensions between 0 mm-line and 254 mm-line on right and left edges of the test print and
check that the differences are within 0.2 mm. If it is within 0.2 mm, you do not have to adjust it.
A
Left Right
Rear end
G068467
NOTE
• There is another method to check the difference. Cut the paper at the center and put them together to check the difference
between 0 mm-line and 254 mm-line.
3. Adjust the zigzagging of the magazine mount.

☞ 22100
26810 1/4
26810
Zigzag adjustment
IMPORTANT
• Take the second test print as a standard. Calculate the zigzagging amount by the difference of lines A and
lines C of the first and second prints. If the zigzagging amount is within 0.5 mm, it is not necessary to adjust.
Center line on the second Second test print
print
Center line on the First test print
first print

C
CA
A
C Paper advance
direction
First test print Second test print
G072383
26810 2/4
26810
Zigzag adjustment
The center line of the first print leans to the right. The center line of the first print leans to the left.
A A
P1 P2 P5
P4 A A

C C
C C
A
P3 P6 A
C
C
Pattern No. Amount of Inclination direction

zigzagging of the center line
P1 A-C Right
P2 A+C
P3 C-A
P4 C-A Left
P5 A+C
P6 A-C
4. When the zigzagging of the magazine mount is adjusted, perform the right angle adjustment of the
cutter unit.
See ☞ The right angle adjustment of the cutter unit in 25620.

IMPORTANT
• Only when the zigzagging of all the magazine mounts is adjusted, perform the right angle adjustment of the
cutter unit.

☞ 36060
IMPORTANT
• Perform arm unit 1 zigzagging correction for each paper magazine A, A2, B, and C.
• Make test prints via Test Print Confirmation 1/2 to check the zigzagging amounts (A - C) of two prints are
within the tolerance level in the following table.
If they are within the tolerance level, the adjustment is not necessary.
26810 3/4
26810
Zigzag adjustment
Test print Tolerance range

Test print 1 (457.0 mm) A − C is within ±0.5 mm
Line A

B
C
Line C
G078473
6. Perform the master correction of the exposure center correction.

☞ 36070
IMPORTANT
• Carry out the master correction of the exposure center correction for each paper magazine A, A2, B, and C.
• Make a test print via Test Print Confirmation with Master Value to check the misalignment of the test print.
If it is within 0.2 mm, no adjustment is required.
Left end of the paper Right end of the paper
Center line
A
G068463
NOTE
• After performing Exposure Center Correction (Master), perform Exposure Center Correction (for each Paper Magazine)
if you use other paper magazines.
26810 4/4
26820
Zigzag adjustment
How to adjust the zigzagging in paper supply unit A2
This section explains the zigzagging adjustment procedure for paper magazine A2. For the adjustment procedure for paper magazines A, B
and C, see the following.
See ☞ 26810☞ Adjusting the zigzagging of the paper advance section.
Items to confirm
All Check if leveling of the system is completed correctly.
Magazine deck Check that the shutter open/close arm works properly. (If the printer door is closed, the shutter

open/close arm moves 10 mm and more at the outlet section of the magazine.)
! Procedure
1. Check the condition of the paper magazine.

☞ 22000
See ☞ Adjusting the paper zigzagging in the exposure advance unit in 36080.
IMPORTANT
• If the exposure advance adjustment is performed for any one of magazine A, A2, B, or C, the correction is
complete.
3. Paper Guide Width Correction

Adjust the paper guide width of paper supply unit A2 so that the width is the same as the loading paper width.
1. Perform Move to 130.0 mm Width via Functions.
Bringing up the display
On the Maintenance Application display, click Maintenance. → Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment →
Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Paper Guide Width Correction
2. Open the printer door to pull out the pre-exposure advance unit.
3. Measure the dimension between outsides of the paper guides.
Paper guides Outside of paper guide
Outside of paper guide

Measured value
G086490
26820 1/10
26820
Zigzag adjustment
4. Enter the measured value into Paper Guide Width Measurement Value.
5. Perform 130.0 mm Width Operation Confirmation via Functions and confirm that the dimension between outsides of
the paper guides is 130.0 mm.
NOTE
• The acceptable value of the dimension between the paper guides is from 129.8 mm to 130.0 mm.
4. Confirming the paper center of paper supply unit A2

Confirm that magazine mount A2 and paper supply unit A2 are mutually adjusted.

• Use paper whose width is 152 or 127 mm when confirming the paper center of paper supply unit A2.
• If those types of paper is not available, use the often-used paper of which width is 254 mm or less.
1. If the correction value is entered in Paper width (152.0 mm) of Paper Guide Width Adjustment (for each Paper
Width), enter 0.0 mm.
M5398-01
2. Set the paper width to 152.0 mm via Paper Guide Width Adjustment (for each Paper Width)→F:
Functions→Guide Width Test.
Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Paper Guide Width Adjustment (for each Paper Width)
3. Turn the cam section of the pressure release motor by hand and make the advance roller into the pressure condition.
Pressure release motor
Cam
G089699
4. Remove the top cover from the quad magazine unit. (four screws)
Screws
Cover
G086496
26820 2/10
26820
Zigzag adjustment
5. Press the paper magazine while pressing the shutter lever downward.
Gently turn the knob clockwise to be advanced the paper to the advance roller.
Advance roller

Knob of paper magazine Shutter lever
G085154
6. Turn the knob of the paper supply unit A2 while supporting the paper magazine.
Confirm that paper is pulled out to the lower guide.
Because it is hard to see paper in the magazine, check it with your hand.
Knob of paper supply unit A2
Paper magazine Lower guide
G090246
7. Cut the paper between paper magazine A2 and paper supply unit A2 using the manual cutter.
Manual cutter
G085156
8. Slowly rotate the knob to rewind paper while pressing the shutter lever.
Be careful not to wind paper too much.
26820 3/10
26820
Zigzag adjustment
9. Pull out paper supply unit A2.

Nob of paper guide
G085153
10. Turn the paper guide knob to widen the inside of paper guide larger than the paper width. (Clockwise)
11. Confirm that the space between the paper guide inside and paper is the same measurement at the front and back.
NOTE
• The acceptable difference between the front and back sides is 0.5 mm or less.
Front space Back space
Paper
Inside of paper guide

G089696
IMPORTANT
• If the dimensions of front and back clearances are the same, confirmation work is complete.
Proceed to Step 5.
• If the dimensions of space are different, adjust the protruding amount of the magazine mount A2
positioning pin.
Adjusting the protruding amount of positioning pin for magazine mount A2
12. Loosen the two set-screws fixing the positioning pin.
13. Turn the positioning pin to adjust the protruding amount of the pin.
If moving the magazine mount toward you

• Turn the positioning pin counterclockwise to increase the protruding amount by one half of the difference between
the front and back spaces.
If moving the magazine mount backward

• Turn the positioning pin clockwise to decrease the protruding amount by one half of the difference between the
front and back spaces.
26820 4/10
26820
Zigzag adjustment
NOTE
• Turning the positioning pin by a screw hole (60 °) moves the unit about 0.2 mm.
Protruding amount of positioning pin
Positioning pin
Holes of the positioning pin

Set-screws
G089698
14. Tighten the two set-screws of the positioning pin.
5. Paper Guide Width Adjustment (for each Paper Width)

Before adjusting the zigzagging of paper magazine mount A2, perform Paper Guide Width Adjustment using 89 mm paper
and 305 mm paper.
NOTE
• If there is no paper whose width is 89 mm or 305 mm, use paper of which width is near 89 mm or 305 mm.
Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Paper Guide Width Adjustment (for each Paper Width)
(1) Click F: Functions, then click Guide Width Test.

The Guide Width Test display is shown.
(2) Select the paper width and surface type to use, and click OK.
The paper guide width is shortened by the correction value entered.
(3) Open printer doors 3 and 4, then pull out paper supply unit A2.
(4) Load paper to the paper guide.
Paper guides
Paper
G086288
(5) Check if there is a gap between paper and the paper guide when loading paper.
NOTE
• The standard amount of gap between the paper guide and paper is 0.2 mm.
26820 5/10
26820
Zigzag adjustment
1. Move paper as far as it will go to the right and left of the paper guide with paper loaded to the paper guide, and
check if there is a gap between the paper guide and paper.
Guide width
Paper guide

Paper
Paper width
Move paper to the right and left. Gap (0.2 mm)
G086290
2. Remove paper from the paper guide, and restore paper supply unit A2.
3. Close printer doors 3 and 4.
If there is no space (about 0.2 mm) between the paper guide and paper
1. On the Paper Guide Width Adjustment (for each Paper Width) display, enter the paper width correction value
for the paper to use.
The larger the correction value is, the wider the space is.
2. Adjust the paper guide width so that the space between the paper guide and paper becomes 0.2 mm.
3. Click Enter.
6. Adjusting zigzag of magazine mount A2
• When adjusting zigzag of paper magazine mount A2, use paper whose width is about 89 mm or 305 mm.
(1) Make test prints with paper whose width is 89 mm or 305 mm by clicking Test Print 1 in Arm Unit 1
Zigzagging Correction.
On the Maintenance Application display, click Maintenance. → Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment
→ Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Arm Unit 1 Zigzagging Correction
26820 6/10
26820
Zigzag adjustment
(2) Check the test print.

If the amount of zigzagging is not within 0.5 mm, adjust the position of paper supply unit A2.
When the center line of the first print is leaned to the right When the center line of the first print is leaned to the left
Second test print Second test print

(Center line on the second print) (Center line on the second print)
A
A

A
A
First test print First test print

(Center line on the first print) (Center line on the first print)
Turn the adjusting screw to the right. Turn the adjusting screw to the left.
(Adjust paper supply unit A2 rightward.) (Adjust paper supply unit A2 leftward.)
(3) Loosen positioning fixing screws of paper supply unit A2. (Loosen two fixing screws.)
(4) Adjust the position of paper supply unit A2. (One adjusting screw and one nut)
IMPORTANT
• Fix the screw while pressing it in the direction of arrow 1.
Adjusting screw Fixing screws
Turn the adjusting screw to the right.
Turn the adjusting screw to the left.
G085419
(5) Make a test print, and check if the zigzagging amount is within 0.5 mm.
If the amount of zigzagging is not within 0.5 mm, perform from Step 6 again.
7. Adjusting the position of the paper guide inlet
(1) Install the paper magazine in lane A2.

Any paper width is available.
(2) Select the paper width to use via Paper Guide Width Adjustment (for each Paper Width)→F:
Functions→Guide Width Test.
26820 7/10
26820
Zigzag adjustment
(3) Advance the paper.

1. Turn the cam section of the pressure release motor by hand and make the advance roller into the pressure
condition.
2. Press the shutter lever down while pressing the paper magazine to advance the paper to the advance roller
position by slowly rotating the knob clockwise.
3. Turn the knob of paper supply unit A2 while pressing the paper magazine.
• For details, see ☞ 4 Confirming the paper center of paper supply unit A2.
(4) Perform adjustment so that paper leading end comes to the center position of the paper guide. (one adjusting
screw)

Paper leading end
Paper guide inlet
Adjusting screw
G089693
(5) Insert the leading end of the manual cutter.

(6) Loosen two adjusting screws of the paper guide. Move the paper guide to the manual cutter and temporarily
tighten the adjustment screw on your side. Then, remove the manual cutter.
Manual cutter
Paper guide
Two adjusting screws
G090247
(7) Slowly move the paper guide inlet plate within 1.5 mm while visually confirming the plate, then fix it with the
adjusting screws.
NOTE
• The convex of manual cutter is 1.5 mm.
26820 8/10
26820
Zigzag adjustment
Convex part of the manual cutter
Paper guide inlet plate
Two adjusting screws

1.5 mm
Convex part of the manual cutter

G090249
(8) After adjusting the paper guide position, confirm if the manual cutter smoothly moves in and out.
(9) Reconfirm the paper center of paper supply unit A2.
• See ☞ 4 Confirming the paper center of paper supply unit A2.
8. Reconfirm the paper center of paper supply unit A2.

☞ 4 Confirming the paper center of paper supply unit A2
☞ 36060
IMPORTANT
• Make test prints via Test Print Confirmation 1/2 to check the zigzagging amounts (A - C) of two prints are
within the tolerance level in the following table.
If they are within the tolerance level, the adjustment is not necessary.
Line A
A
B
C
Line C
G078473
10. Paper Guide Width Correction (for each Paper Width)

This operation is necessary for all paper widths and surfaces used for paper magazine A2.
26820 9/10
26820
Zigzag adjustment

Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Paper Guide Width Correction (for
each Paper Width)
• See ☞ 5 Paper Guide Width Adjustment (for each Paper Width).
11. Perform Exposure Center Correction→Master of Paper Magazine A2.

☞ 36070
IMPORTANT

• Make a test print via Test Print Confirmation with Master Value to check the misalignment of the test print.
If it is within 0.2 mm, no adjustment is required.
Center line
A
G068463
NOTE
• After performing Exposure Center Correction (Master), perform Exposure Center Correction (for each Paper Magazine)
if you use other paper magazines.
26820 10/10
27230
Drive section
Drive section
Adjusting backlash of the dryer rack (QSS-3701/3702/3703/LP7500/LP7600)
This item varies depending on the model. See the references below.
Model Reference
QSS-3704/3705/LP7700/LP7900 ☞ 27320 ☞ 27330
! Procedure
IMPORTANT

• The backlash adjustment is required when you replace the dryer rack.
1. Remove the dryer rack.

2. Remove the duct. (one screw and one washer)
Duct
Dryer rack
G069806
3. Loosen one lock nut and three screws on the drive unit to let the unit move a little.
Lock nut
Adjusting bolt
Gear A
Drive unit
G069807
4. Attach the dryer racks.

5. Keep pushing the plate of the drive unit in the direction of the arrow and turn the adjusting bolt until it
contacts the plate.
IMPORTANT
• Check that the gear of the dryer rack and gear A engage.
27230 1/2
27230
Drive section
6. At the position where the adjusting bolt contacts the plate, make 1.5 counterclockwise turn and tighten
the lock nut.
Adjusting bolt
Plate of the drive unit
Gear of the dryer rack
Gear A

Plate
Screws
Lock nut
G069808
7. Remove the dryer rack. Attach the plate of the drive unit in contact with the adjusting bolt. (three screws)
8. Attach the dryer rack and the duct.
1. Make some prints to check if no paper jam or abnormal noise occurs in the dryer rack.
27230 2/2
27260
Drive section
Adjusting the position of the dryer rack
! Procedure
1. Open the dryer door and the dryer top cover.

2. Tilt the dryer rack.
3. Loosen the screws on the connector. (two screws)
Dryer door

Dryer top cover
Loosen these screws. Connector

Dryer rack
G071634
4. Adjust the connection so that the clearance of the connectors is 0.5 mm or less. (two screws)
IMPORTANT
• Pressing the connector strongly may damage the connector. If the clearance is too much great, an error may
occur.
View hole
0.5 mm or less
Connector on the dryer rack side Connector on the body side
G085266
5. Loosen the screws on the lock plate which secures the dryer rack. (two screws)
27260 1/2
27260
Drive section
6. Adjust the position of the lock plate that secures the dryer rack so that the lock works smoothly when
setting the dryer rack. (two screws)
Lock plate

G052781
7. Check the backlash between the gear of the dryer and the gear of the dryer rack.
☞ 27230
8. After the adjustment, process the prints to check.
27260 2/2
27270
Drive section
Adjusting the drive motor belt tension
! Procedure
1. Remove processor cover 4. (seven screws)

☞ 20020
2. Remove the processor drive cover. (four screws)
☞ 20020
3. Adjust the position of the drive motor to fix the drive motor belt so that it bends 1.6 mm when pressing it

by 255 to 402g (2.6 to 4.1 N). (four screws)
Drive motor belt
Drive motor
Drive motor
G085344

1. Check if the drive motor operates normally.
27270 1/1
27320
Drive section
Adjusting backlash of dryer rack (lower) (QSS-3704/3705/LP7700/LP7900)
Model Reference
QSS-3701/3702/3703/LP7500/LP7600 ☞ 27230
! Procedure
IMPORTANT

• When the dryer rack (lower) has been replaced, this adjustment is necessary.
Backlash adjustment of the dryer rack (upper) is also required.
☞ 27330
1. Remove the dryer rack (lower).

2. Loosen a adjusting bolt of the drive unit (lower), a lock nut and the screws for A, B.
Adjusting bolt (Loosen.)
Screw A (Loosen.)
Lock nut
(Loosen.)
Screw B (Loosen.) Gear adjusting plate

Drive unit (lower)
G054651
3. Attach the dryer rack (lower).
27320 1/3
27320
Drive section
4. Move the gear adjusting plate by holding the top end of the plate, make the gear of the gear adjusting
plate to contact with the drive gear of the dryer rack, and then tight screw A temporarily.
Gear adjusting plate

Dryer rack (lower) Screw A
Screw A

G085390
IMPORTANT
• Rotate the knob and check that the both gears of the gear adjusting plate and the dryer unit (lower) are
engaged.
Knob
The drive gear of the dryer rack (lower)
G054653
5. Remove the dryer rack (lower).

6. Tighten the adjusting screw until its end touches the C side of the gear adjusting plate.
NOTE
• The position of the adjusting bolt and the C side of the gear adjusting plate can be checked from the front hole.
• There is no such a hole for checking the position on some machines. In this case, adjust so that the tip of the bolt touches
the C side of the gear adjustment plate by yourself.
7. Loosen the screw A and rotate the adjusting bolt two times to the right, and tighten the lock nut.
NOTE
• The backlash between the gears can be secured about 0.5 mm by rotating the adjusting bolt two times to the right.
27320 2/3
27320
Drive section
8. Move the drive adjusting plate to the direction indicated by the arrow, and tighten two screws for A and
B section at the position where the end of the adjusting bolt touches the C side of the gear adjustment
plate.
NOTE
• The position of the adjusting bolt and the C side of the gear adjusting plate can be checked from the front hole.
Adjusting bolt C side (gear adjusting plate)
Screw A

Lock nut
Screw B Fulcrum
Gear of the gear adjusting plate Drive unit (lower)
G054667
9. Attach the dryer rack (lower).
27320 3/3
27330
Drive section
Adjusting backlash of dryer rack (upper) (QSS-3704/3705/LP7700/LP7900)
Model Reference
QSS-3701/3702/3703/LP7500/LP7600 ☞ 27230
! Procedure
IMPORTANT

• When the dryer rack (lower) has been replaced, this adjustment is necessary.
• This adjustment is not required for the dryer rack (upper) because it has already been adjusted when shipping.
1. Loosen a adjusting bolt, a lock nut and the screws for A, B, and C section (three screws) of the drive unit
(upper).
Adjusting bolt
Lock nut
Screw C (Loosen.)
Screw A (Loosen.) Screw B (Loosen.)
G085391
2. Attach the dryer rack (upper).
27330 1/3
27330
Drive section
3. Move the drive unit (upper) to the direction indicated by the arrow, and tighten the screw of A section
temporally with the drive gear of the dryer rack (upper) is pressing the gear of the drive unit (upper).
Dryer rack (upper)

The drive gear of the dryer rack (upper)
Gear of the drive unit (upper)

Lock nut

Adjusting bolt
Screw A
G085392
IMPORTANT
• Rotate the knob of the dryer rack (upper) and check that the both gears of the drive unit (upper) and the dryer
unit (upper) are engaged.
4. Remove the dryer rack (upper).
5. Tighten the adjusting bolt until its end touches the D side of the drive unit (upper).
6. Loosen the screw A and rotate the adjusting bolt 3/4 to the right, and tighten the lock nut.
NOTE
• The backlash between the gears can be secured about 0.5 mm by rotating the adjusting bolt 3/4 to the right.
27330 2/3
27330
Drive section
7. Move the drive unit (upper) to the direction indicated by the arrow, and tighten three screws for A, B and
C section at the position where the end of the adjusting bolt touches the D side of the drive unit.
Adjusting bolt
Side D

A
Fulcrum
Adjusting unit (upper)
G085393
8. Attach the dryer rack (upper).
27330 3/3
27410
Order sorter section
Adjusting the stop position of the print receiving tray [Print sorter unit (6-
inch type, 17/14 orders)]
! Procedure
1. Remove the sorter cover.

☞ 20020
2. Loosen one screw on the sensor holder. Then adjust the stop position of the print receiving tray by

moving the sensor holder up and down.
Print sorter unit
Print receiving tray
Sorter home sensor holder
G050752
3. Adjust the sorter home sensor holder position to stay the print receiving tray at the position dimension A
up from the top of receiving tray rail.
NOTE
• Dimension A=2 ± 1 mm
27410 1/2
27410

Dimension A

Top of receiving tray rail
G050751
4. Press the manual sorter switch several times to check the stop position of the print receiving tray.
If the stop position is not stable, check the timing belt tension and the chain tension of the sorter motor and adjust them
properly.
NOTE
• Tension adjustment of the sorter motor timing belt
☞ 20120
• Adjustment of the chain tension
☞ 20120
27410 2/2
27410-5
Adjusting the stop position of the print receiving tray [Print sorter unit (10-
inch type)]
! Procedure

☞ 20020-5
2. Move the sorter home sensor holder up and down to adjust the stop position of the print receiving tray.

(Loosen one screw.)
Upper side of conveyor belt
153±1 mm
Screw
Print sorter unit
G074236
" Point
Adjust the position of the sorter home sensor holder so that the distance between the hinge section of the print receiving tray
which is located at the paper receiving position and the upper side of conveyor belt on print conveyor unit is 153±1 mm.
3. Press the manual sorter switch continuously to check the stop position of the print receiving tray.
If the stop position is not stable, check and adjust the tension of the sorter motor timing belt and chain.
NOTE
• Adjusting the tension of the sorter motor timing belt
☞ 20120-5
• Adjusting the tension of the chain
☞ 20120-5
27410-5 1/1
27420
Removing the print conveyor unit
! Procedure
1. Remove the processor drive cover.

☞ 20020
2. Open the squeegee unit top cover.
3. Lift up the lever and open the dryer door.

Squeegee unit top cover
Dryer door
Lever
G085451
4. Lower conveyor stay 2 and insert the philips blade screwdriver (small) to the square hole.
IMPORTANT
• Do this not to get your hands pinched with stay 2 or the print conveyor unit after you remove the screw from
stay 2.
5. Remove the screw from stay 2 of the print conveyor unit.
Conveyor stay 2
Conveyor stay 1
Print conveyor unit
Viewed from the back

G070290
6. Remove the conveyor guide. (three nuts)

Conveyor guide
G090231
27420 1/3
27420
7. Remove holder 1 (two screws) and holder 2 (two nuts).

Holder 2

Holder 1
G085267

J/P711: Conveyor motor
J/P778: Conveyor unit sensor
IMPORTANT
• Put the connector(s) in the square hole when you attach the print conveyor unit.
9. Lift up the print conveyor unit in the direction indicated by the arrow and remove it.
Square hole
Print conveyor unit
J/P711 and J/P778
G085268
! Precautions when reattaching
1. Be careful not to get your hands pinched with stay 2 or the print conveyor unit.
Conveyor stay 2
Conveyor stay 1
Print conveyor unit
Viewed from the back

G070290
27420 2/3
27420
2. Adjust the position of the conveyor guide so that it does not contact with the roller(s) of the dryer section.
(three nuts)
Move the conveyor guide to the left or right so that
it does not touch the rollers.

Dryer door Conveyor guide
G068997
27420 3/3
27430
Replacing the print receiving tray [Print sorter unit (6-inch type, 17/14
orders)]
! Procedure
Replacing print receiving tray (1)

1. Stop the print receiving tray to be replaced at the print receiving position.
2. Push the pawl of the print receiving tray (2) in the direction indicated by arrow A, then remove the print

receiving tray (1) in the direction indicated by arrow B.
Print receiving tray (1)
A
Pawl

G050796

1. Move the print receiving tray to be replaced to the intermediate position.
2. Press the end of receiving tray (3) with your thumb, and remove receiving tray (2) in the direction
indicated by the arrow.
Print sorter unit
G052543
27430 1/3
27430

☞ 20020
2. Remove paper guide (1). (two screws)
Paper guide (1)
Print sorter unit

Tray rail
G053522
3. Remove the receiving tray rail. (one screw)

4. Remove the tray rails in numerical order by sliding them in the direction indicated by the arrow.
Print sorter unit
Tray rail
G050753
5. Insert a slotted blade screwdriver as shown below, lift the print receiving tray slightly and pull it out in the
direction indicated by the arrow.
G050390

7. Press the manual sorter switch, then check that the print receiving tray operates properly.
27430 2/3
27430
! Adjustment after replacement
1. Adjust the stop position of the print receiving tray.

☞ 27410
27430 3/3
27430-5
Replacing the paper tray [Print sorter unit (10-inch type)]
! Procedure
Replacing paper tray (1)

1. Stop the paper tray to be replaced below the print receiving position.
2. Push the pawl of the paper tray (3) in the direction indicated by arrow A, then remove the paper tray (1)
in the direction indicated by arrow B.

Paper tray (3)
Pawl Paper tray (1)
G074243

Paper tray (3)
Paper tray (2) Pawl
G074244

27430-5 1/2
27430-5
Paper tray (3)

A
Pawl
G074245

• None
27430-5 2/2
27440
Removing the print sorter unit [print sorter unit (6-inch type, 17/14 orders)]
! Procedure
1. Remove the angle bracket cover.

Angle bracket cover

Pawls
G050756

J/P713, J/P866: relay connector
3. Remove the angle bracket. (two screws)
Angle bracket
G050757
4. Remove the print sorter unit in the direction indicated by the arrow.
G050758

None
27440 1/1
27440-5
Removing the print sorter unit [print sorter unit (10-inch type)]
IMPORTANT
• Be careful not to drop the print sorter unit.
• Do not perform this work alone.
! Procedure
1. Remove the connector cover. (three screws)

J/P713: Relay connector
Grounding wire (one screw)
3. Remove the angle bracket. (two screws)
• When removing the angle bracket, support the print sorter unit not to fall.
• Since the print sorter unit is very heavy, when you remove this unit, please work carefully.
Connector cover
Angle bracket
Ground wire
J/P820 J/P713
G085439
4. Remove the print sorter unit.

1. Insert the angle bracket to the print sorter unit.

Pass the ground wire and connector from the print sorter unit through the hole on the angle bracket.
2. Fix the ground wire. (one screw)
Print sorter unit
Angle bracket
Ground wire
Hole
G081210
27440-5 1/3
27440-5
3. Place the print sorter unit on the print sorter unit mount so that the pin of the print sorter unit mount is
inserted into the attaching hole of the print sorter unit.
IMPORTANT
• Do not remove your hand supporting the print sorter unit until the pin of print sorter unit mount is certainly
inserted into the attaching hole, and the screws for attaching the angle bracket are attached.
Print sorter unit

Pin
G081211
4. Fix the angle bracket. (four screws)

Install the print sorter unit so that the side surface of the print sorter unit and the face of the pole are aligned.
Side surface of the print sorter unit

Angle bracket
Pole
G090259
5. After installing the print conveyer unit, confirm that the length between the print conveyer unit upper side
and the paper guide upper side is 9±1 mm.
Print conveyer unit upper side
9±1 mm
Paper guide upper side

G090267
27440-5 2/3
27440-5
If the length is not 9±1 mm, loosen five screws of the print sorter unit mount, and adjust the height of adjuster.

Screws
Adjustors
G090268
6. Connect the connectors and attach the connector cover. (three screws)
The connector J866 on the processor side is not used.
Connector cover
J/P820
J/P713
G081213
27440-5 3/3
27450-5
Adjusting the stop position of the paper guide [Print sorter unit (10-inch
type)]
! Procedure

(Loosen four screws.)

Sorter cover
G085461
2. Remove the cover.

(two screws)
3. Remove the sorter cover (upper).
(six screws)
Cover Sorter cover (upper)
G085462
4. Operate the paper guide via Output Check ☞ 35320 to adjust the stop position of the paper guide.
(1) When the paper guide closes (lower)
• Adjust the attaching position of the paper guide close sensor so that the paper guide is in parallel with the print
conveyor. (two screws)
27450-5 1/2
27450-5
(2) When the paper guide opens (raise)

• Adjust the attaching position of the paper guide open sensor so that the angle between the paper guide and the order
classification section is at right angle. (two screws)
Paper guide close sensor light-tight plate
Screws

Print conveyor
90°
Adjust in parallel.
Screws
Paper guide
Paper guide open sensor
G074249
(3) If the paper guide opens and closes repeatedly and the stop position is not stable, check the tension of the paper
guide motor timing belt.
☞ 20020-5
27450-5 2/2
27460
Colorimeter Section
Colorimeter Section
Replacing the colorimeter and the calibration plate
The following procedures for the colorimeter are explained here.
$ ☞ Replacing the colorimeter unit

$ ☞ Replacing the colorimeter
$ ☞ Replacing the calibration plate

IMPORTANT
• The colorimeter unit consists of the following items.
Colorimeter unit
Calibration plate
Calibration data CD
Colorimeter
G085246
• When replacing the colorimeter, replacing the calibration plate and calibration data CD is also necessary. Replace them
as one set.
• When replacing the calibration plate, replacing the calibration data CD is also necessary. Replace them as one set.
! Replacing the colorimeter unit
1. Remove the colorimeter unit cover. (four screws)

2. Remove the Colorimeter Cooling Fan. (two screws)
Colorimeter unit cover
Colorimeter Cooling Fan
G085247
27460 1/5
27460
Colorimeter Section
NOTE
• If necessary, disconnect the connectors of the Colorimeter Cooling Fan.
3. Remove the colorimeter unit top.
(four screws)
Colorimeter unit top

G085252
NOTE
• If necessary, disconnect the connectors of the colorimeter and paper sensor.
4. Remove the plate bottom.
(four screws and one knob screw)
Knob screw
Lower plate
G085250

J/P802, 804 (Relay connector)
J/P551 (paper advance motor), J/P552 (calibration plate advance motor)
27460 2/5
27460
Colorimeter Section
6. Remove the advance unit from the colorimeter unit bottom.

(four screws)
Colorimeter unit top J/P802, 804
J/P551

Colorimeter unit bottom
J/P552
G085251
! Precautions when installing colorimeter unit
1. There is no need to adjust the colorimeter unit position.

! Adjustment after replacing the colorimeter unit
1. Follow the procedures in Replacing the calibration plate.

☞ Replacing the calibration plate
2. Adjusts the colorimeter unit.
☞ 35100
! Replacing the colorimeter
1. Remove the colorimeter unit cover.

(four screws)
27460 3/5
27460
Colorimeter Section
2. Remove the Colorimeter Cooling Fan.

(two screws)

G085247
NOTE
3. Remove the fixing plate from the colorimeter.
(Loosen two mounting nuts.)
4. Remove the connector of the colorimeter and replace the colorimeter.
Connector
Fixing plate
G085249
! Adjustment after replacing the colorimeter unit
1. Adjust the height of the colorimeter.

☞ 27470
2. Follow the procedures in Replacing the calibration plate.
☞ Replacing the calibration plate
27460 4/5
27460
Colorimeter Section
! Replacing the calibration plate
1. Update the calibration plate data.

NOTE
• Register the new calibration plate data to the system.
Maintenance → Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Colorimeter Calibration
(1) Replace the calibration plate stored in the colorimeter unit with new one.

(2) Click F: Functions on the Colorimeter Calibration display, then click Updating the Calibration Plate Data.
(3) Insert the calibration data CD into the drive.
(4) Click Path Setting to configure the CD drive setting of calibration data.
(5) Click OK.
Data of colorimeter and data in the calibration data CD are shown.
(6) When Click [OK] button to register the data. is shown, click OK.
(7) When Are you sure you want to register? is shown, click OK.
(8) When After changing the Calibration Plate, perform the calibration. Would you like to perform the
calibration? is shown, click OK.
Register the data in the CD to the colorimeter.
Data is updated.
(9) When The data has been upgraded. is shown, click OK.
Confirm the registration.
(10) The screen returns to the Colorimeter Calibration display.
2. Check whether updating was performed normally.
NOTE
• Confirm that the colorimeter data and the calibration plate data are the same.
(1) Click F: Functions on the Colorimeter Calibration display, then click Confirming the Colorimeter and
Calibration Plate Data.
(2) Click Path Setting to configure the CD drive setting of calibration data.
(3) Click OK.
Data of colorimeter and data in the calibration data CD are shown.
(4) It matches the Colorimeter Data or It does not match the Colorimeter Data. is shown.
(5) Click Cancel to return to the Colorimeter Calibration display.
27460 5/5
27470
Colorimeter Section
Adjusting the height of the colorimeter
IMPORTANT
• When replacing the colorimeter of the colorimeter unit, be sure to adjust the height.
! Procedure
1. Remove the colorimeter unit cover.

(four screws)

2. Remove the Colorimeter Cooling Fan.
(two screws)
G085247
NOTE
3. Remove the colorimeter unit top.
(four screws)
G085252
27470 1/4
27470
Colorimeter Section
NOTE
• If necessary, disconnect the connectors of the colorimeter and paper sensor.
4. Loosen the lock screw on the leading end control holder of the colorimeter. (one screw)
Leading end control holder

Lock screw
G085253
5. Turn over the colorimeter unit top.

6. Turn the leading end control holder so that the height of colorimeter leading end aligns with the back
face of the colorimeter mount. Use the colorimeter height adjustment jig.
Leading end of the measurement
Colorimeter height adjustment jig
Groove of the leading end control

G085254
27470 2/4
27470
Colorimeter Section
NOTE
• Use the handle side of the colorimeter height adjustment jig to check the height of colorimeter leading end.

Use the handle side of the jig.
G072364
7. Confirm that the height of colorimeter leading end aligns with the back face of the colorimeter mount,
and then turn the leading end control holder approximately 30 degree clockwise to lower it.
NOTE
• This operation is to adjust the height of colorimeter leading end from the base of the colorimeter mount to 0 to -0.1 mm.
One revolution (360 degree) of the leading end control holder makes 1 mm movement.
IMPORTANT
• If the colorimeter leading end is out of back face of the colorimeter mount, it may damage the calibration plate
or test prints.
Turn the leading end control holder approximately 30 degree

clockwise to lower it.
Colorimeter leading end

G072365
27470 3/4
27470
Colorimeter Section
! Precautions when installing colorimeter unit
1. Tighten the lock screw on the leading end control holder of the colorimeter. (one screw)

Lock screw
G085253
27470 4/4
27500
F replenishment unit [F]
Removing F replenishment unit (QSS-3701/3702/3703/LP7500/LP7600) [F]
Model Reference
QSS-3704/3705/LP7700/LP7900 ☞ 27501-5
! Procedure
1. Remove the replenisher cartridge.

2. Remove the processor rear cover.
☞ 20020
J/P632: Replenishment cartridge opening motor
4. Remove the F replenishment unit. (eight screws)
J/P632
J/P637
F replenishment unit
G085345
When the original F replenishment unit is reattached

1. Confirm that the F replenishment unit works normally using the output check.
When the new F replenishment unit is attached
IMPORTANT
• There are two types of F replenishment unit: one has no clamp and the other has a clamp.
27500 1/2
27500
• If the F replenishment unit with no clamp is to be replaced with the F replenishment unit with a clamp, be sure to
remove the clamp.
If the clamp is not removed, the F replenishment unit is not normally installed.
F replenishment unit with no clamp F replenishment unit with a clamp
Cartridge set sensor Cartridge set sensor

Clamp
27500 2/2
27501-5
Removing F replenishment unit (QSS-3704/3705/LP7700/LP7900) [F]
Model Reference
QSS-3701/3702/3703/LP7500/LP7600 ☞ 27500
! Procedure

2. Remove processor cover 1. (four screws)
3. Remove the bar which supports the replenisher section door, then remove the replenisher section
cover. (five screws)
Loosen this screw. Loosen this screw.
Bar
G085400

J/P632: Replenishment cartridge opening motor
J/P639: Interlock Switch (Replenisher Section Door)
5. Remove the replenisher section lower part from the F replenishment unit. (four screws)
6. Remove the F replenishment unit. (four screws)
If removing the F replenishment unit with the base frame attached
F replenishment unit J/P632, J/P637
J/P639
Replenisher section
lower part of the F
replenishment unit
G085402
27501-5 1/2
27501-5
If removing the F replenishment unit only
F replenishment unit J/P632, J/P637
J/P639

Replenisher section
lower part of the F
replenishment unit
Remove these screws.
G085401
When the original F replenishment unit is reattached

When the new F replenishment unit is attached
IMPORTANT
• There are two types of F replenishment unit: one has no clamp and the other has a clamp.
• If the F replenishment unit with no clamp is to be replaced with the F replenishment unit with a clamp, be sure to
remove the clamp.
If the clamp is not removed, the F replenishment unit is not normally installed.
F replenishment unit with no clamp F replenishment unit with a clamp
Cartridge set sensor Cartridge set sensor
Clamp
27501-5 2/2
27510
Removing the replenishment cartridge installation section [F]
• Remove the replenishment cartridge setting section when replacing or checking the replenishment cartridge opening motor,
replenishment cartridge position sensor (upper) or replenishment cartridge position sensor (lower).
! Procedure
1. Remove the F replenishment unit.

☞ 27500

2. Remove the replenishment cartridge setting section. (four screws)
Replenishment cartridge setting
G085882
1. Set the cam into the square hole in the replenishment cartridge setting section to attach it.
Cam
Square hole
G085883
27510 1/1
27520
Replacing the replenishment cartridge opening motor [F]
! Procedure
1. Remove the F replenishment unit.

☞ 27500
2. Remove the replenishment cartridge setting section.
☞ 27510
3. Remove the replenishment cartridge opening motor. (three screws)

Replenishment cartridge opening
motor
G085858
4. Remove the plate (three screws) on the replenishment cartridge opening motor and gear (one screw).
Plate
Gear

motor
G085859
27520 1/2
27520
1. Install the gear of the replenishment cartridge opening motor so that the space between the outer
surface of the gear and the edge of the motor axis is 3 mm. (one screw)
Plate
Gear

3 mm
G085881
2. Install the replenishment cartridge opening motor with the cam remaining at the upper start point. (three
screws)
• If the cam is not adjusted to the upper start point during the replenishment cartridge opening motor, the F replenishment unit may not
be correctly attached to the system.

motor
Cam (upper start

point)
G085880
3. After placing the replenishment cartridge setting section and the F replenishment unit to the original
positions, confirm that the F replenishment unit works normally using the output check.
27520 2/2
27530
Replacing the replenishment solution level sensor [F]
! Procedure
1. Remove processor side cover 4.

☞ 20020
See ☞ 63280 for the locations of each replenishment solution level sensor.
J/P611, 612:P1R

J/P613, 614:P2RA
J/P615, 616:P2RB
3. Remove the rubber plug from the flange section in the direction of arrow 1.
Remove the replenishment solution level sensor wiring from the rubber plug, and remove the replenishment solution level
sensor connector in the direction of the arrow 2.
• Regarding the replenishment solution level sensor, replace # # #(upper) replenishment solution level sensor, # # #(lower)
replenishment solution level sensor and HL−F−001 as a set.
# # #(Lower) replenishment solution level sensor

Rubber plug # # #(Upper) replenishment solution level sensor
Flange section
(1) (2)
HL−F−001
G085346
NOTE
• The replenishment solution level sensors are installed in the positions shown below.
# # #(Upper) replenishment solution level sensor

P1R P2RA P2RB
12mm
18.7mm
22.4mm
77.2mm
65.9mm
65.9mm
# # #(Lower) replenishment solution level sensor
G085347
27530 1/1
27540
Output check for the cartridge flushing valve and replenishment cartridge
cleaning pump [F]
• Perform the output check for the cartridge flushing valve and replenishment cartridge cleaning pump following the procedure with
attaching a hose. Or, water may come into a replenishment tank and it may adversely affect the replenishment solution.
! Procedure

2. By the output check, move the replenishment cartridge setting part from upper point to lower point.
☞ 35320
3. Turn on Interlock Switch (Replenisher Section Door).
4. Insert a hose of 13 mm diameter into the cleaning nozzle to be checked and fix it with adhesive tape.
• The hose is a service personnel tool. See Service personnel tool list☞ 80310.
QSS-3701/3702/3703/LP7500/LP7600 QSS-3704/3705/LP7700/LP7900
Interlock Switch (Replenisher Section Door) Interlock Switch (Replenisher Section Door)
Hose
Hose
Cleaning nozzles Cleaning nozzles
G085385
5. By the output check, operate P1R Cartridge Cleaning Valve + Replenisher Cartridge Cleaning
Pump, P2RA Cartridge Cleaning Valve + Replenisher Cartridge Cleaning Pump and P2RB
Cartridge Cleaning Valve + Replenisher Cartridge Cleaning Pump, which are to be checked.
• The replenishment cartridge cleaning pump stops after operating for 10 seconds.
• The output amount of the replenisher cartridge cleaning pump is about 227 ml per 10 seconds.
6. Remove the hose. By the output check, move the replenishment cartridge setting part from lower point
to upper point.
27540 1/1
27550
Position of the replenishment solution collection hoses [F]
• Shows the position of the hoses to drain the replenishment solutions when an attention or error message is shown for the F
specification.
QSS-3701/3702/3703/LP7500/LP7600
Hoses to drain replenishment solutions

To each hose, a sticker P1R/P2RA/P2RB or PSR is attached.

Hoses to drain working solutions
G085300
QSS-3704/3705/LP7700/LP7900
Hoses to drain replenishment solutions

To each hose, a sticker P1R/P2RA/P2RB or PSR is attached.
Hoses to drain working solutions

G085378
27550 1/1
27610
Tablet replenishment section
Removing the tablet replenishment unit [J]
! Procedure
1. Remove all the tablet cartridges.

2. Remove the tablet replenishment unit section cover.
☞ 20020

J/P539, J/P541: tablet replenishment driver PCB
4. Remove the hinge that connects the tablet replenishment unit to the processor. (two screws)
NOTE
• After operating, confirm that the tablet replenishment units were properly installed.
Hinge
Tablet replenishment unit Paper processor section

G050733

6. Check the tablet sensor via Input Check.
☞ 35220
7. Check the drum operation via Output Check.
☞ 35320
27610 1/1
27620
Replacing the module [J]
! Procedure

2. Remove the tablet replenishment unit section cover. ☞ 20020
J/P571, J/P572, J/P575, J/P588: CD module

J/P576, J/P577, J/P580, J/P589: BF module
J/P581, J/P582, J/P585, J/P590: STB module
4. Replace the module. (Loosen two of the four screws.)
Module

G050711

☞ 35220
☞ 35320
27620 1/1
27630
Replacing the drum drive motor [J]
! Procedure
1. Remove the module.

☞ 27620
2. Remove the gear (32T).

Gear (32T)
G050712
3. Remove the drive gear. (two screws)
Drive gear
G050713
4. Remove the drum drive motor. (three screws)
Drum motor
G050732
5. Replace the drive motor and reassemble the parts.

NOTE
• When attaching the gear (32T), adjust the backlash by adjusting the attaching position of the gear (32T). (three screws)
Gear (32T)
G052554
27630 1/2
27630

☞ 35220
☞ 35320
27630 2/2
27640
Replacing the elevator motor [J]
! Procedure

☞ 20020

J/P540: Tablet replenishment drive PCB
4. Remove the motor mounting plate from the frame. (four screws)
5. Remove the drive gear cover. (two screws)
6. Remove the gear (12T). (one screw)
Drive gear cover
Motor mounting plate
Gear (12T)
G050734
7. Replace the elevator motor. (three screws)
Elevator motor
G050735
8. Attach the gear (12T).
27640 1/2
27640
9. Check the backlash between gear (12T) and the upper idle gear.
Gear (12T) Upper idle gear

0.2 mm
G050736

11. Check the backlash between the friction roller gear and the idle gear.
Upper idle gear
0.2 mm
Friction roller gear

G050737
12. Check the elevator operation via Output Check.

☞ 35320
27640 2/2
27650
Adjusting the tension of the elevator chain [J]
! Procedure

3. Loosen the two screws of the tension plate.

G050738
4. Adjust the tension of the elevator chain.

" Point
Adjust the position of the tension plates so that the elevator chain deflects by 9 mm when the part shown by the arrow is pulled
with the force of 200 g. (Adjust both right and left of elevator chain tensions.)
200 g
9 mm G050739
5. Raise the elevator until the upper sensor turns DARK.

6. Measure A, B and C as shown in the illustration to confirm that the bucket platform is parallel to the
tablet replenishment unit.
Tablet replenishment unit
Square holes
C
B
A
Bucket platforms
G050740
27650 1/2
27650
NOTE
• If the bucket platform is not parallel to the tablet replenishment unit, perform adjustment described below.
1. Perform the tension adjustment for the right and left elevator chains again.
2. Check that the elevator chains are meshed with right and left sprockets at the same position.
3. Replace the right and left elevator chains.
7. Check the elevator operation via Output Check.
☞ 35320
27650 2/2
27660
Adjusting the position of the elevator upper sensor [J]
! Procedure

3. Check that the stopper contacts with the upper of the slot.
" Point

If the stopper does not contact with the upper of the slot, open the tablet replenishment unit and then adjust the position of the
stopper. (Loosen two screws for each.)
Oval hole
Stopper
G050741
4. Adjust the position of the elevator upper sensor so that clearance between the lowest bottom of bucket
platform and tablet gate is 1.5 mm±0.5 mm when the elevator is stopped at the position where the
elevator upper sensor is closed via Output Check. (two screws)
Screws Elevator upper sensor
Bottom of the
1.5±0.5 mm
bucket
platform
Tablet gate
Tablet gate Bucket platform Tablet

replenishment unit
G050742
IMPORTANT
• Stopping the elevator at the elevator upper sensor position
1. Select Tablet Replenishment Section 1 on the Output Check.
27660 1/2
27660
2. When Elevator Motor (Up) is selected and Execute is clicked, the elevator lifts up and stops for 2 seconds at the
position where the elevator middle sensor is closed.
3. When two seconds passes, starts again. When detected by the elevator upper sensor, stops.
6. Check if the tablet falls from the elevator via Output Check.
☞ 35320
27660 2/2
27670
Adjusting the position of the elevator middle sensor [J]
! Procedure

☞ 20020
3. Check that the stopper contacts with the upper of the slot.

" Point
If the stopper does not contact with the upper of the slot, open the tablet replenishment unit and then adjust the position of the
stopper. (two screws for each)
Oval hole
G050741
4. Adjust the position of the elevator middle sensor so that space between the higher bottom of the bucket
platform and tablet gate is 1.5 mm±0.5 mm when the elevator is stopped at the position where the
elevator middle sensor detects dark in the Output Check. (two screws)
Screws Elevator middle sensor
Bucket platform
Bucket 1.5±0.5 mm
platform
Higher bottom of
the bucket
platform
Chute inlet Chute inlet
Tablet gate Tablet gate
G050743
27670 1/2
27670
IMPORTANT
• Stopping the elevator at the elevator middle sensor position
1. Select Tablet Replenishment Section 1 on the Output Check.
2. When Elevator Motor (Up) is selected and Execute is clicked, the elevator lifts up and stops for 2 seconds at the
position where the elevator middle sensor is closed.
3. When two seconds passes, starts again. When detected by the elevator upper sensor, stops.
6. Check if the tablet falls from the elevator via Output Check.

☞ 35320
27670 2/2
27680
Adjusting the position of the elevator lower sensor [J]
! Procedure
1. Stop the elevator at the position where the elevator lower sensor detects dark in the Output Check.
• ☞ 35320
2. Adjust the position of the elevator lower sensor so that the space between the lower bottom of the
bucket platform and the lower side of the hole of the frame is 0 to -2.0 mm. (one screw)

Lower bottom of the bucket platform
Tablet gate
Lower bottom of the bucket
0 to -2.0 mm
Hole of the tablet replenishment
Elevator lower sensor

Screw
G050744
3. Check if the tablet falls from the drum via Output Check.
• ☞ 35320
27680 1/1
27690
Cleaning method of the drum of module [J]
! Procedure
1. Remove the module.

☞ 27620
2. Remove the cartridge guide.
Cartridge guide

Cartridge guide
G050745
3. Remove the drum case. (six screws)

Drum case
G050746
4. Remove the gear (64T). (one mount ring)

Mount ring
Gear (64T)
G050747
27690 1/3
27690
5. Face the right narrow notch of the drum to you and align the center of drum unit's opening with the
center of notch, and pull out the drum to the arrow direction.
Narrow Wide

G050748
6. Clean the space between the tablet drop section and vapor proof blocks.
Vapor proof block
Space
Tablet drop section
Vapor proof block

G050749
IMPORTANT
• There is a spring in the space of vapor proof block. Be careful not to damage it when cleaning.
• After cleaning, check that there is no space when the vapor proof block is pushed in the arrow direction.
Vapor proof block
Space
Space
Springs
Vapor proof block
G050750
27690 2/3
27690
27690 3/3
27700
Replacing the STB tablet conveyor motor [J]
! Procedure
1. Remove the tablet chute and the conveyor cover.

J/P720: STB tablet conveyor motor

STB tablet conveyor motor J/P720
G050793
3. Remove the conveyor frame. (one screw)

Conveyor frame
Processor cover 1 (inside)

G050794
4. Remove processor cover 1.

☞ 20020
5. Remove the drive gear. (one screw)
27700 1/2
27700
6. Remove the STB tablet conveyor motor from processor cover 1. (two screws)
Drive gear

STB tablet conveyor motor
G050795

8. Check the operation of the STB tablet conveyor motor via Output Check.
☞ 35220
27700 2/2
27810
Replenishment package unit
Replacing the replenisher pump and the water supply pump [SM]
! Procedure
1. Pull out the replenishment package unit.

2. Remove the replenishment packages.
3. Remove the pump mount.

Arrangement of the replenisher pump and the
water supply pump
Tray units
G070020
4. Close the strainer unit valve of the pump to be replaced.

5. Attach the tube clamps to the OUT side of the hoses of the pump to be replaced.
6. Loosen the wire bands on the caps of the pump to be replaced, and then remove the hoses.
IMPORTANT
• For the replenisher pumps of CD-A, CD-B, CD-C, BF-A, BF-B and STB, do not remove the new caps from the
pumps. If they are removed, the poppet valves may come off. Then the pump output amount indicated on the
rating plate will not be determined properly.
IN
Caps
(Do not remove this.)
Poppet valves OUT
G050887
• Be careful not to let the pump rotating part come into contact with chemical or water.
7. Remove the pump as shown in the figure.
2. Push the main body backward. 3. Lift it up.
1. Push. G050874
27810 1/4
27810
8. Remove the cover from the removed pump.

Cover
Lift up the cover holding the part

indicated by the arrow.

G050875
9. Take a note of the output amount displayed on the new pump's rating plate.
Any pumps with false output measurements must be replaced.
Output amount
Rating plate
G050888
10. Unplug the connectors, and replace the pump.

J/P611, cord CD-A: CD-A replenisher pump
J/P612, cord CD-B: CD-B replenisher pump
J/P613, cord CD-C: CD-C replenisher pump
J/P617, 618: CD-W water supply pump
J/P614, cord BF-A: BF-A replenisher pump
J/P615, cord BF-B: BF-B replenisher pump
J/P616, cord STB: STB replenisher pump
J/P619: STB-W water supply pump
Cord BF-W: BF-W water supply pump
12. Enter the output amount.
Extension → Processor Settings → Pump Output Amount Setting
Setting for CD-A, CD-B, CD-C, CD-W, BF-A, BF-B and STB
Enter the output amount noted in step 9.
☞ 33003
Setting for BF-W and STB-W
Set pump output amounts, and then enter the measurement values.
1. Remove air from the replenisher pump and the water supply pump (except BF-W and STB-W).
IMPORTANT
• If air remains in the pump, output cannot be performed accurately.
• If a large amount of air remains in the pump, the chemical may undergo oxidation, and precise values may not
be obtained because air escapes during the measurement.
(1) Remove the sub-tank top cover and processor cover 1.

☞ 20020
(2) Fix the replenisher pipe and the water supply pipe in place.
Remove the replenisher pipe and the water supply pipe from the sub-tank and turn them so that the outlets face toward
you, and fix them at the position.
NOTE
• Fix the replenisher pipe and the water supply pipe at the same height as when the system is operating. When the
output amount is measured, the pipes should be secured to obtain correct values.
27810 2/4
27810
(3) Prepare a container for the replenishment solution or water to be output.

Replenisher pipe and water
supply pipe

Tape G050889
IMPORTANT
• For measurements of two or more replenishment solutions, use a different container for each solution.
If no different containers are available, clean the container before using.
(4) Press on the Pump Output Amount Setting display and select Pump Output Amount Setting.
(5) Select the pump for output.
(6) Operate the pump by pressing the Manual sorter switch.
(7) Check that no air remains in the hose. Then repeat step (5) until the replenishment solution or water comes to the
exit of the replenisher pipe or the water supply pipe.
(8) Attach the air exhaust tool to the replenisher pipe.
Replenisher pipe and water
supply pipe
Air exhaust tool
G050890
IMPORTANT
• When removing air from two or more chemicals, be sure to start from the CD-A pump.
• Before removing air from the pumps, be sure to clean the tool. If the tool is not cleaned, contamination
and chemical reaction may occur.
NOTE
• The air exhaust tool is a service tool. See the Service personnel tool list. ☞ 80310
(9) Exhaust the air from the replenisher pump and the water supply pump by pulling the cylinder of the syringe from
the air exhaust tool with one stroke.
Remove the air exhaust tool from the replenisher pipe or the water supply pipe, and discharge the air, water, or
replenishment solution.
IMPORTANT
• When the air is exhausted by using the air exhaust tool, the float of the package may be sucked
downward, and an attention message such as Replace the Replenishment Package with a new one.
may be displayed.
There may still be some replenisher solution left in the package. Remove the replenishment package
from the replenishment unit and shake it to check if the float is rising.
• If the injection syringe slips out of the air exhaust tool, replenishment solution or water may splash.
(10) After air has been exhausted by the air exhaust tool, check that no air remains in the hose.
27810 3/4
27810
2. Check the output amount.

• For the operation procedures, see Operator's Manual - Additional Operations & Setup Manual -.
IMPORTANT
• Make sure that the difference between the measured value and the output amount entered in the system is
within ±3%. If the difference is not within ±3%, check for damage or clogging of the pipes. If the pipes are fine,
there must be air remaining in the pumps. Exhaust the air, and carefully measure the output amount again.
• When the output amount for each replenishment package is measured, the remaining amount of each solution
varies.
3. Replace the replenisher pipe and the water supply pipe to their original position.

4. Mark the new pump output amounts on the label.
(The label is affixed to the inside of processor door 1.)
5. Reattach the sub-tank top cover and processor cover 1.
IMPORTANT
• If you do not clean the air exhaust tool after use, the syringe packing may be damaged.
Be sure to clean the tool before storing.
27810 4/4
27820
Replacing the probe [SM]
! Procedure
1. Pull out the replenishment package unit.

2. Remove the replenishment package.
3. Remove the protection cover of the SM I/O PCB. (one screw)
Protection cover

G050891
4. Disconnect the tray unit connectors.

J/P601: Tray unit A
J/P600: Tray unit B
5. Remove the tray units.
2. Lift it up.
Tray unit B
1. Press the lever.
Tray unit A
G050892
6. Remove the probe nut and the probe.
BF-B BF-A
Probe nut
Probe
O-ring
Probe holder
STB CD-C CD-B CD-A
G050893
7. Assemble the new probe, then tighten the probe nut securely using the probe replacing jig.
IMPORTANT
• The O-ring is attached to the new probe.
• The probe (including the O-ring) should be used properly for each solution.
27820 1/2
27820
For CD-C solution, use the whole black probe and the O-ring marked with a white dot.
For other solutions, use the probe which the resin part is brown and the O-ring marked with a green dot.
• The probe replacing jig is a service tool. See the Service personnel tool list.
☞ 80310
27820 2/2
27830
Adjusting the sensitivity of the replenisher solution sensor [SM]
! Procedure
1. Clean the LED and detection sections of the replenishment solution sensor.
Sensor arrangement
Trays

Replenishment solution sensors
G085952
2. Attach the replenishment package containing the replenishment solution.

3. Set the valve chuck, then turn the handle to ON position.
4. Remove the protection cover of the SM I/O PCB. (one screw)
5. Turn the VR of each sensor on the SM I/0 PCB counterclockwise fully.
Cover
Replenishment solution Replenishment solution

package P-1 package P-2
G085953
VR Replenishment solution sensor

Counterclockwise Decreases the amount of light.
Clockwise Increases the amount of light.
27830 1/4
27830
6. Adjust each VR depending on each LED condition which is off.

• Replenishment solution sensor sensitivity adjustment method varies depending on the part number and VR number of the
mounted SM I/O PCB.
Details about SM I/O PCB SM I/O PCB part number
Chemical VR No. LED No. J391191, J390330 J391378
CD-A VR1 LED1 ☞ Adjustment ☞ Adjustment
CD-B VR2 LED2 procedure 1 procedure 2
CD-C VR3 LED3
STB VR4 LED4

BF-A VR5 LED5
BF-B VR6 LED6 ☞ Adjustment
procedure 1
! VR adjustment procedure of SM I/O PCB

Adjustment procedure 1 Adjustment procedure 2
• J391191, J390330 (adjustment method for VR1 to VR6)
• J391378 (adjustment method for VR6) • J391378 (adjustment method for VR1 to VR5)
Adjusting procedure Adjusting procedure
1. Adjust each VR depending on each LED condition which is 1. Adjust each VR depending on each LED condition which is
off. off.
1. If turning the VR clockwise less than twice from the 1. If turning the VR clockwise less than one-half from the
leftmost position turns LED on, carry out ☞ If LED turns leftmost position turns LED on, carry out ☞ It LED turns
on by turning the VR less than twice:. on by turning the VR less than one-half:.
2. If turning VR clockwise twice or more from the left most 2. If turning clockwise the VR one-half or more from the left
position turns LED on, carry out ☞ If LED turns on by most position turns LED on, carry out ☞ If LED turns on
turning the VR twice or more:. by turning the VR one-half:.
If LED turns on by turning the VR less than twice: It LED turns on by turning the VR less than one-half:
1. If turning the VR of each replenishment solution sensor 1. If turning the VR of each replenishment solution sensor
clockwise less than twice from the leftmost position turns on clockwise less than one-half from the leftmost position turns
LED, return the VR to the leftmost position, and turn it on the LED, return the VR to the leftmost position, then turn it
clockwise three times. clockwise twice.
IMPORTANT IMPORTANT
• This includes the case when LED turns on while the • This includes the case when LED turns on while the
VR is at the leftmost position. VR is at the leftmost position.
2. Reassemble the parts as they were. 2. Reassemble the parts as they were.
27830 2/4
27830
Adjustment procedure 1 Adjustment procedure 2

• J391191, J390330 (adjustment method for VR1 to VR6)
• J391378 (adjustment method for VR6) • J391378 (adjustment method for VR1 to VR5)
If LED turns on by turning the VR twice or more: If LED turns on by turning the VR one-half:
1. While counting the rotation number of the VR of each 1. While counting the rotation number of the VR of each
replenishment solution sensor, turn the VR clockwise slowly replenishment solution sensor, turn the VR clockwise slowly
and stop it at the position when LED turns on. and stop it at the position when LED turns on.
IMPORTANT IMPORTANT
• If the VR is turned too far clockwise, turn it • If the VR is turned too far clockwise, turn it

counterclockwise to the position where the LED counterclockwise to the position where the LED
goes off. Then turn it clockwise again until the LED goes off. Then turn it clockwise again until the LED
lights up. lights up.
2. Under the condition in Step 1, turn each VR of the 2. Under the condition in Step 1, turn each VR of the
replenishment solution sensor clockwise 1 turn to the right. replenishment solution sensor clockwise half a turn to the
3. Replace the replenishment solution sensor to adjust its right.
sensitivity if total number of VR rotations of each sensor 3. Replace the replenishment solution sensor to adjust its
exceeds 11 turns in Step 1 and Step 2. sensitivity if total number of VR rotations of each sensor
NOTE exceeds 11 turns in Step 1 and Step 2.
• The maximum number of VR rotations for each NOTE
replenishment solution sensor is 13. • The maximum number of VR rotations for each
• When the float in the replenishment package blocks off replenishment solution sensor is 13.
the replenishment solution sensor, the LED goes off. • When the float in the replenishment package blocks off
the replenishment solution sensor, the LED goes off.
4. Reassemble the parts as they were.
4. Reassemble the parts as they were.
Floats Replenishment
solution
Replenishment package
Replenishment solution sensor

(detection)
Replenishment
Probe
solution
Replenishment solution sensor
(LED)
G050897
27830 3/4
27830

27830 4/4
3000
3. Mode
Password ............................................................................................................................. 30500

Password ............................................................................................................................................................30500
Mode structure table ............................................................................................................ 31000
Mode structure table ..........................................................................................................................................31000
Maintenance ........................................................................................................................ 31100
Status Display ....................................................................................................................................................31100
Debug Mode (Saving the Logdata) ...................................................................................................................31110
Setup ................................................................................................................................... 32510
Paper Specification Registration/Setup .............................................................................................................32510
3 Mode
NCE Mode .........................................................................................................................................................32513
Brightness of the Edge .......................................................................................................................................32514
Exposure Adjustment ........................................................................................................................................32515
Sample images for evaluating image quality (Sample 1/Sample 2) ..................................................................32517
Magazine Registration/Setup .............................................................................................................................32520
Data Initialization ..............................................................................................................................................32550
Processor Settings .............................................................................................................. 33001
Print Sensor Adjustment ....................................................................................................................................33001
Standard Replenishment Amount Setting[F] .....................................................................................................33002
Pump Output Amount Setting[F] ......................................................................................................................33003
Pump Output Amount Setting [N] [SM] ...........................................................................................................33003
Auto Cleaning Water Output Amount Setting[F] ..............................................................................................33004
Total Replenishment Amount Display[F] .........................................................................................................33030
Total Replenishment Amount Display [N] ........................................................................................................33040
Total Replenishment Amount Display [SM] .....................................................................................................33040
Correction Setting [SM] ....................................................................................................................................33060
Counter [J] .........................................................................................................................................................33070
Processor Standard Setting ................................................................................................. 33500
Thermosensor Calibration .................................................................................................................................33500
Cleaning Water Amount Setting[F] ...................................................................................................................33501
Cleaning Water Amount Setting [N] [SM] [J] ..................................................................................................33501
Drive Motor Revolution Count Setting .............................................................................................................33502
Display Processor Working Information[F] ......................................................................................................33503
Processor Set Up Mode[F] ................................................................................................................................33504
Dryer Section Setting (Auto Setup) ...................................................................................................................33505
Refilling Water Amount Setting [N] .................................................................................................................33510
Refilling Water Amount Setting [SM] ..............................................................................................................33510
Basic Kit Setting [J] ...........................................................................................................................................33520
Kit Correction [J] ...............................................................................................................................................33530
Refilling Water Amount Setting [J] ...................................................................................................................33540
Pump Output Amount Setting [J] ......................................................................................................................33550
Operation Check [J] ...........................................................................................................................................33560
Manual Kit Change [J] ......................................................................................................................................33570
Dryer Lane Select Operation Setting .................................................................................................................33590
3000 1/2
3000
Maintenance ........................................................................................................................ 35100

Colorimeter Unit Adjustment ............................................................................................................................35100
Input Check (Printer) .........................................................................................................................................35210
Input Check (Processor) [F] ..............................................................................................................................35220
Input Check (Processor) [N] ..............................................................................................................................35220
Input Check (Processor) [SM] ...........................................................................................................................35220
Input Check (Processor) [J] ...............................................................................................................................35220
Output Check (Printer) ......................................................................................................................................35310
Output Check (Processor) [F] ............................................................................................................................35320
Output Check (Processor) [N] ...........................................................................................................................35320
Output Check (Processor) [SM] ........................................................................................................................35320
Output Check (Processor) [J] ............................................................................................................................35320
3 Mode
Reading and Writing Data .................................................................................................................................35400
System Version Check .......................................................................................................................................35500
System upgrade for each control PCB (CPU) ...................................................................................................35600
Operation Information .......................................................................................................................................35700
Machine Specification .......................................................................................................................................35800
Self-diagnostic ..................................................................................................................... 35920
Image Path Check ..............................................................................................................................................35920
Printer I/F Main PCB Self-Diagnostic ...............................................................................................................35930
ARCNET Self-Diagnostic (details of modes) ...................................................................................................35940
ARCNET Self-Diagnostic (diagnosis) ..............................................................................................................35941
ARCNET Self-Diagnostic (results) ...................................................................................................................35942
Laser Self-Diagnostic (details of modes) ..........................................................................................................35950
Laser Self-Diagnostic (diagnosis AUTO) .........................................................................................................35951
Laser Self-Diagnostic (diagnosis MANUAL) ...................................................................................................35952
Laser Self-Diagnostic (starting/exiting) ............................................................................................................35953
Network Self-Diagnostic ...................................................................................................................................35955
Printer Mechanical Adjustment ............................................................................................ 36000
Paper sensor adjustment ....................................................................................................................................36000
Paper Guide Width Correction ..........................................................................................................................36005
Paper Advance Unit Correction .........................................................................................................................36010
Exposure Magnification Correction ..................................................................................................................36020
Exposure Position Adjustment ..........................................................................................................................36030
Exposure Magnification Fine Adjustment .........................................................................................................36040
Paper Advance Length Correction ....................................................................................................................36050
Arm Unit 1 Zigzagging Correction ...................................................................................................................36060
Paper Guide Width Correction (for each Paper Width) ....................................................................................36065
Exposure Center Correction ..............................................................................................................................36070
Exposure Advance Adjustment .........................................................................................................................36080
Paper pressure operation correction ..................................................................................................................36090
White Border Width Correction ........................................................................................................................36100
Software .............................................................................................................................. 38000
Installing the system program ............................................................................................................................38000
3000 2/2
30500
Password
Password
Password
3. Mode
M5303-00
Entering password
Item Explanation
Entering the service personnel 1. Click Maintenance to access the Maintenance display.
password 2. Hold the F1 key, and press the F9 key on the Maintenance display, then enter the service
personnel password (2260).
IMPORTANT
• Do not tell the service personnel password to users.
Deleting the password
Item Explanation
Deleting the service personnel 1. Click Maintenance to access the Maintenance display.
password 2. Hold the F1 key, and press the F9 key on the Maintenance display, then enter the number other
than the service personnel password (2260).
Deleting the owner password 1. Click Maintenance to access the Maintenance display.
2. Press the F1 key and press the F2 key to access the Password Deletion display.
3. Enter 000000 (0 for six times) on the Password Deletion display.
NOTE
• After the password is deleted, it is set to the initial value (0123).
The Password Deletion display is not shown if the password has not been registered.
The Password Deletion display is shown only when the password has been registered.
4. Click OK.
The password is deleted.
30500 1/1
31000
Mode structure table
• SP1: The service personnel password is required to display this.

• SP2: Data can be changed by entering the service personnel password.
! Maintenance Application display

Item Reference
Output Device Registration
Maintenance ☞ Maintenance display
! Maintenance display
Item Reference
3. Mode
Start Up Checks
Close Down Checks
Extension ☞ Extension display
Status Display ☞ 31100
Emulsion Number Change
Daily Setup
Help Display
Debug Mode (SP1) ☞ 31110
! Extension display
Item Reference
Extension Setup ☞ Setup
Processor Settings ☞ Processor Settings
Operator Selections ☞ Operator Selections
Function and Option Registration
Password Registration
Maintenance ☞ Maintenance
! Setup
Item Reference
Laser Setup Paper Specification Registration/Setup ☞ 32510
F Print Check →Sample 1/Sample 2 ☞ 32517
F Black Balance Adjustment
FBlack Balance Initialization
F NCE Mode ☞ 32513
FTest Print
F Edge Brightness Correction (SP1) ☞ 32514
F Edge Brightness Correction Data Initialization (SP1)
F Machine-to-machine variation correction
FMachine-to-machine variation correction value
F Exposure Adjustment (SP1) ☞ 32515
FTest Print
Magazine Registration/Setup ☞ 32520
Paper Balance Correction
Paper Temperature Correction
Data Initialization (SP1) ☞ 32550
Initial Setup (SP1)
31000 1/5
31000
! Processor Settings
Reference
☞ Processor settings [F] ☞ Processor settings [SM] ☞ Processor settings [J]
Processor settings [F]

Item Reference
Print Sensor Adjustment (SP2) ☞ 33001
Processing Solution Temperature Setting
Standard Replenishment Amount Setting (SP2) ☞ 33002
Pump Output Amount Setting ☞ 33003
Auto Cleaning Water Output Amount Setting ☞ 33004
Low Volume Process Setting
3. Mode
Total Replenishment Amount Display (SP2) ☞ 33030
Dryer Temperature Setting
Processor Standard Setting (SP1) Thermosensor Calibration ☞ 33500
Cleaning Water Amount Setting
Dryer Lane Select Operation Setting ☞ 33590
Drive Motor Revolution Count Setting ☞ 33502
Display Processor Working Information ☞ 33503
Processor Set Up Mode ☞ 33504
Dryer Section Setting (Auto Setup) ☞ 33505
Processor settings [N]

Item Reference
Standard Replenishment Amount Setting
Pump Output Amount Setting (SP1) ☞ 33003
Refilling Water Amount Setting ☞ 33510
Cleaning Water Amount Setting ☞ 33501
Processor settings [SM]

Item Reference
Standard Replenishment Amount Setting
Correction Setting (SP2) ☞ 33060
31000 2/5
31000
Item Reference
Refilling Water Amount Setting ☞ 33510
Cleaning Water Amount Setting ☞ 33501
Processor settings [J]
Item Reference
Status Display (Basic)
3. Mode
Counter (SP2) ☞ 33070
Status Display (correction)
Processor Standard Setting Thermosensor Calibration (SP1) ☞ 33500
Basic Kit Setting (SP1) ☞ 33520
Kit Correction (SP1) ☞ 33530
Refilling Water Amount Setting (SP1) ☞ 33540
Operation Check (SP1) ☞ 33560
Manual Kit Change ☞ 33570
Cleaning Water Amount Setting (SP1) ☞ 33570
Dryer Lane Select Operation Setting (SP1) ☞ 33590
Drive Motor Revolution Count Setting (SP1) ☞ 33502
Dryer Section Setting (Auto Setup) (SP1) ☞ 33505
! Operator Selections
Only the function modes which are exclusive to the service mode are explained. See the User Manuals for other modes.
Operator Selections (Printer 1)

Item Details Standard
setting
Hide some check items for the This function is to not show specified items during Startup Checks and Close Without
startup/closedown checks. Down Checks. checkmark
• %: Check items for the Startup Checks and Close Down Checks are
shown.
• &: Check items for the Startup Checks and Close Down Checks are not
shown.
Operator Selections (Processor)

setting
Drive, Dryer Manual ON Switch Processor drive and dryer operate continuously. ON
This operates no matter if the system is printing or not.
Error Occurrence Selection
Replenishment Error*1 (SP1) If it is set to OFF, the attention message is not shown even though ON
Replenishment Package Error (SP1) the replenisher tanks run out of solutions. ON
(Only for SM)
31000 3/5
31000

setting
Refilling Water Error*1 (SP1) If it is set to OFF, the attention message is not shown even though ON
the refilling water tank runs out of water.
Circulation Pump Error (SP1) If it is set to OFF, the error message is not shown even though the ON
circulation pumps stop.
Order Classification Section Error (SP1) If it is set to OFF, the attention message is not shown even though ON
the print full sensor detects paper.
*1. Not in use for F.
Setting ON/OFF for errors related to replenishing or water refilling is not available.
! Maintenance
Item Reference
3. Mode
Various Adjustment Colorimeter Calibration ☞ Replacing the
calibration plate
Colorimeter Unit Adjustment (SP1) ☞ 35100
Printer Mechanical Adjustment Paper Sensor Adjustment ☞ 36000
Paper Guide Width Correction (SP1) *1 ☞ 36005
Paper Advance Unit Correction (SP1) ☞ 36010
Exposure Magnification Correction (SP1) ☞ 36020
Exposure Position Adjustment (SP1) ☞ 36030
Exposure Magnification Fine Adjustment ☞ 36040
(SP1)
Paper Advance Length Correction (SP1) ☞ 36050
Arm Unit 1 Zigzagging Correction ☞ 36060
Paper Guide Width Adjustment (for each ☞ 36065
Paper Width)*1
Exposure Center Correction ☞ 36070
Exposure Advance Adjustment (SP1) ☞ 36080
Paper Pressure Operation Correction ☞ 36090
White Border Width Correction ☞ 36100
Process Control Strip
Input Check Printer ☞ 35210
Processor ☞ 35220
Output Check Printer ☞ 35310
Processor ☞ 35320
Reading and Writing Data Reading Data (Media -> CPU) ☞ 35400
Writing Data (CPU -> Media)
System Version Check Accessories ☞ 35500
Profile Data (SP1)
Software Upgrade ☞ 35600
Operation Information Daily Setup History ☞ 35700
Laser Operation Record (SP1)
Machine Specification (SP2) ☞ 35800
Self-diagnostic (SP1) Image Path Check ☞ 35920
Printer I/F Main PCB Self-Diagnostic ☞ 35930
• ARCNET Self-Diagnostic (details of ☞ 35940
modes)
• ARCNET Self-Diagnostic (diagnosis) ☞ 35941
• ARCNET Self-Diagnostic (results) ☞ 35942
• Laser Self-Diagnostic (details of modes) ☞ 35950
• Laser Self-Diagnostic (diagnosis: AUTO) ☞ 35951
31000 4/5
31000
Item Reference
• Laser Self-Diagnostic (diagnosis: ☞ 35952
MANUAL)
• Laser Self-Diagnostic (starting/exiting) ☞ 35953
Network Self-Diagnostic ☞ 35955
*1. Displayed only when the Quad Magazine Unit is selected in the Option Registration
3. Mode
31000 5/5
31100
Maintenance
Maintenance
Status Display
3. Mode
M5307-00
This section explains the Printer Operation Status and Laser temperature control status in Status Display. See the User Manuals for
other modes.
No. Name Status

1 Printer Operation Status The printer status is shown.
• Printer is not ready.
The maintenance display is shown.
• Off-line
The output system and operation PC are not connected, or the power supply of the output system
is off.
• Closedown
After the close down checks, the program timer is being activated.
• Installing the program. . .
The system program is being upgraded.
• Idle
Printing process can be performed.
• Printing. . .
Printing is being processed.
• The system is in the program timer mode.
The program timer is being activated when starting up the system.
2 Laser temperature • Not initialized
control status • If the power supply of the printer is turned on or off.
• If the process for starting the laser unit is not completed.
• If the process for the printer I/F main PCB is not completed.
• If the error occurs in the laser unit.
• If the output check is carried out.
• Temperature control started
• If the power supply of the printer is turned on or off.
• The temperatures are not within the processable range of the laser unit (15.0°C to 42.0°C)
• If the temperatures are not within the processable range of B or R laser (46.7°C to 47.3°C)
• If the error occurs in the laser unit.
• If the output check is carried out.
• Temperature control completed
The temperature adjustment is completed, the printing process can be performed.
31100 1/1
31110
Maintenance
Debug Mode (Saving the Logdata)

Maintenance: 2260 → Extension → Debug Mode
Debug Mode Save log data
3. Mode
! Explanation
If a problem occurs during the printer/processor operation, the operation status when the problem occurs is recorded to HDD as a
Memory data and Log data.
IMPORTANT
• If the EZ Controller is installed, save a Memory data and Log data with Alt+Y.
☞ If the EZ Controller is installed (Alt+Y)
• If the EZ Controller is not installed, save a Memory data and Log data with Save log data.
☞ If the EZ Controller is not installed (Save log data)
• If a problem occurs in the software, save the information shown below with the Logdata and memory data
Status when the problem occurred Operation performed before the problem With or without an error, its kind
occurred
Any other things you realized Paper used when the problem occurred
! If the EZ Controller is installed (Alt+Y)

Keyboard Destination Data format Output data
*1
Alt+Y QSS-37 Compresses and saves the files • Log file of the module that
• C:\NoritsuKoki\Printer\QSS-Printer\ [Serial shown in the right column as uses log output API
number folder of the output system] \Log\ LogData_YYYYMMDDhhmms • Log file of the image
[Registered date folder] s.LZH *2 processing module
• Log files of printer and
processor
• Log file of the scanner
• Watson log file
• Spec log
• Event log
• Error record file
*1
Alt+L C:NoritsukokiLogData Saves the files shown in the right • Log file of the module that
column to the uses log output API
LogData_Main_YYYYMMDD • Log file of the image
hhmmss folder*2 processing module
*1. Up to 10 log data are stored on the HDD.
31110 1/2
31110
Maintenance
If the number of log data exceeds 10, the data is deleted from the oldest one.
*2. YYYYMMDDhhmmss is the date when the data was saved.
! If the EZ Controller is not installed (Save log data)

Destination Data format Output data
Click Start LP7500/LP7600/LP7700/LP7900 Compresses and saves the files • Log file of the image
• D:\NoritsuKoki\Printer\FRONTIER-Printer\ shown in the right column as processing module
[Serial number folder of the output system] LogData_YYYYMMDDhhmms • Log files of printer and
\Log\ [Registered date folder] s.LZH *1 processor
QSS-37
• C:\NoritsuKoki\Printer\QSS-Printer\ [Serial
number folder of the output system] \Log\
[Registered date folder]
3. Mode
*1. YYYYMMDDhhmmss is the date when the data was saved.
31110 2/2
32510
Setup
Setup
Paper Specification Registration/Setup

Maintenance: 2260 → Extension → Setup → Laser Setup → Paper Specification Registration/Setup
3. Mode
M5317-00
! Functions
Functions
☞ Print Check ☞ Brightness of the Edge (SP1)
☞ Black Balance Adjustment ☞ Edge Brightness Correction Data Initialization (SP1)
☞ NCE Mode ☞ Machine-to-machine variation correction
☞ Setup Switch (SP1) ☞ Exposure Adjustment (SP1)
! Explanation
A paper type for setup is registered and setup is carried out.
! Paper Type Selection/Paper Magazine Selection

A maximum of six paper types can be registered.
! Paper Magazine Selection

Select the paper magazine used for setup of each paper type.
127 (1), etc. OK Magazines with paper specification registered

127 (1), etc. − Magazines that are registered, but do not yet have a paper specification registered
# # # (#) − Magazines that are not registered
! Paper Specification Registration/Setup

Explanation
• Perform Paper Gamma Setup 1 and Black Balance Adjustment for each paper type.
• Two test prints are output: a 22-step print for Paper Gamma Setup and a 22-step print for Black Balance Adjustment.
NOTE
• The test prints for Paper Gamma Setup 1 are printed three times at most.
32510 1/4
32510
Setup
System Exposure Light Intensity Setting/Paper Gamma Setup 1 Black Balance Adjustment
Length of unexposed part: 12 mm Length of unexposed part: 12 mm
Each step length: 12 mm Each step length: 12 mm
22-step setup print: 320 mm 22-step setup print: 320 mm
3. Mode
! Functions
• (SP1) is shown when entering the service personnel password (2260).
! Print Check
Print sample images 1 to 7 when a problem occurs. Then, the system can be checked using the sample prints.
Sample print Explanation Image

Sample 1 A print of a sample image with the CMS setting off
• For details, see ☞ 32517.
Sample 2 A print of a sample image with the CMS setting off

• For details, see ☞ 32517.
Sample 3 A print of an image with text
32510 2/4
32510
Setup
Sample print Explanation Image

*1
Sample 4 A print containing three scales of gray
Sample 5*1 A solid gray print
Sample 6*1 Prints of test charts
3. Mode
Sample 7*1
Sample 8*1
*1. (SP1) is shown when entering the service personnel password (2260).
! Black Balance Adjustment

Adjust each R,G and B color automatically so as to show the black letters as black.
The test print is a gray 22-step setup sheet.
G068486
• Functions : Black Balance Initialization
You can initialize the correction values configured for Black Balance Adjustment and NCE Mode.
IMPORTANT
• If Black Balance Adjustment is performed with the correction values of Y, M and C for NCE Mode entered,
these values will be added to the correction values for Black Balance Adjustment, and the adjustment may not
be performed correctly.
Perform Black Balance Initialization of Functions first, then perform Black Balance Adjustment.
• To perform Black Balance Initialization, select the paper type to be initialized on the Black Balance
Adjustment display, then perform Black Balance Initialization, from the Functions menu.
! NCE Mode
• After the initial setup or Paper Specification Registration/Setup, Black Balance Adjustment will be automatically carried out. To
make additional fine adjustments, use NCE Mode.
• NCE Mode can be used to lessen the blurring of color around letters on prints.
See ☞ 32513.
32510 3/4
32510
Setup
G084967
! Setup Switch (SP1)

When the setup switch is on, the high density section is calculated and Dmax is set to the most appropriate value.
When the setup switch is off, setup is performed within the range of the colorimeter specification (Dmax: 2.2 D or less).
3. Mode
IMPORTANT
• If you change the setting of the setup switch, it is necessary to carry out operations from the initial setup again.
• The setup switch is normally left on.
! Brightness of the Edge (SP1)

If prints lack uniformity, you can return the system's gray levels to the factory defaults.
See ☞ 32514.
1 2
G085142
! Edge Brightness Correction Data Initialization (SP1)

• Carry out this initialization before performing Brightness of the Edge.
! Machine-to-machine variation correction

• Corrects color difference between printers when two or more printers are connected.
For details, see the Operator's Manual - Additional Operations -.
! Exposure Adjustment (SP1)

If uneven prints as shown in the illustration below are output after the laser unit is replaced, it can be corrected.
This adjustment is effective only for the type of unevenness shown on the left below. See ☞ 32515.
Example: before performing exposure adjustment Example: after performing exposure adjustment
Exposure adjustment is effective Exposure adjustment is not effective Exposure adjustment is effective Exposure adjustment is not effective
32510 4/4
32513
Setup
NCE Mode

Maintenance → Extension → Setup → Laser Setup → Paper Specification Registration/Setup → Functions → NCE Mode
3. Mode
M5402-01
! Explanation
• After the initial setup or Paper Specification Registration/Setup, Black Balance Adjustment will be automatically carried out. To
make additional fine adjustments, use NCE Mode.
• NCE Mode can be used to lessen the blurring of color around letters on prints.
IMPORTANT
• This NCE Mode is the user mode, however, the service personnel should instruct the user basically when the user
correct in the mode. The reasons are shown below.
• When using the Edit function of this system or Adobe Photoshop (commercial software), there is a case of the blur of
color around the letters is softened when making prints with the color values of letters is B = G = R = 10 or more. So
before correcting in NCE Mode, try it.
If the blur of color is still noticeable, correct in NCE Mode.
• Use this mode only when softening the area around the letters on prints (such as black letters on white or pale
background and white letters on the black background). This does not correct the whole color in prints.
• If the correction is done too much in NCE Mode, the level of high density tends to be lower (D-MAX becomes lower).
• How blurred colors appear changes depending on various condition such as letter's fonts and size, papers that are in
use, and condition of the media correction, DSA correction and processing solutions. So this correction cannot make
same effect on all kinds of letters.
Make correction with a print which is input letters with the most usually used font and size and made with most usually
used paper.
! (Input range: -20.0 to +20.0)

Check the test print and input the correction value.
IMPORTANT
• Correct all CMY colors in the minus direction.
NOTE
• By correcting all YMC colors in the plus direction, the density of black is raised. Check if the correction does not affect on the
area around letters.
32513 1/4
32513
Setup
! F: Function
! Test print
Make a test print of characters and images.
3. Mode
G084967
NOTE
• Confirm the test print using the loupe.
! Adjusting procedure
1. Select the magazine to be corrected.

2. Carry out Test Print of Functions.
3. Check the dot position whether it is moved from the proper position.
Pattern of dot position disorder check
Test print
G084962
IMPORTANT
• If the dot position of LASER is moved, the correction cannot be done on the NCE Mode. Correct the dot
position by Exposure Magnification Correction/Exposure Position Adjustment/Exposure Magnification Fine
Adjustment.
• Exposure Magnification Correction: ☞ 36020
• Exposure Position Adjustment: ☞ 36030
• Exposure Magnification Fine Adjustment: ☞ 36040
4. Check if the white letters/black letters on the test print are not broken.
If the letters are not broken, go to Step 5.
IMPORTANT
• The cause of the broken letters is that all color density is high.
32513 2/4
32513
Setup
3. Mode
G084961
• If the letters are broken (all color density is high), check if the dots are broken on Y3, M3 and C3 in the figure.
• Another method is to confirm that the color of K3 did not change.
Pattern of dot position disorder check
High
Low
Density of dots
G084960
NOTE
• Checking Y3, M3 and C3 are easier than checking K3.
• There is another method that compare the thickness of dots of each color using the pattern of dot position disorder check.
5. Check if the color of white letters/black letters are not changed.
If the letter colors are not changed, go to Step 6.
IMPORTANT
• The cause of the color change of letters is that the density balance of each color is lost and either color is high
density.
32513 3/4
32513
Setup
3. Mode
G084961
6. From the check results at Step 4 and Step 5, decide the correction value and enter each color to
change.
• Correct all CMY colors in the minus direction.
• For example, when you want to decrease the B (blue) color, do not increase (plus direction) the Y correction value, but correct M
and C in the minus direction.
7. Click Enter.
8. Check the letters on the prints carefully and correct them if necessary.
IMPORTANT
• The test print is reference. Confirm the result with the actual print.
32513 4/4
32514
Setup
Brightness of the Edge

Maintenance: 2260 → Extension → Setup → Laser Setup → Paper Specification Registration/Setup → Functions → Brightness of the
Edge
! Explanation
! Brightness of the Edge

• If prints lack uniformity, you can return the system's gray levels to the factory defaults.
• You can perform Brightness of the Edge only with paper whose width is 305 mm.
• This adjustment is effective only for the type of unevenness shown on the left below.
Example: Before performing Brightness of the Edge Example: After performing Brightness of the Edge
3. Mode
Edge Brightness Correction is not Edge Brightness Correction is Edge Brightness Correction is not Edge Brightness Correction is
effective effective effective effective
! Brightness of the Edge
1. Confirm that Paper Specification Registration/Setup and Magazine Registration/Setup have been
completed.
2. Perform Edge Brightness Correction Data Initialization.
3. Select the paper type to be use for Brightness of the Edge.
M5308-00
32514 1/3
32514
Setup
• You can perform Brightness of the Edge only with paper whose width is 305 mm.
4. Pressing Next starts automatic test print.

5. The test print measurement display is shown.
3. Mode
M5309-02
6. The calibration display of the colorimeter is shown.
M5309-05
7. Click Execute.
8. Confirm that the printing surface of the test print is not dirty.
• If it is clean, go to the next step.
• If it is dirty, continue printing until it becomes clean.
9. Open the conveyor unit.
32514 2/3
32514
Setup
10. Adjust the paper guide to the 216 mm width, and insert the test print straight until it reaches roller 1 of
the colorimeter.
Paper guide
3. Mode
Test paper
Roller 1
G085306
• Insert the test print straight against the colorimeter.
11. Click Execute.

Measurement of the test print is started.
12. After measuring the test print, Register the correction values. is shown.
• Press the OK key to access the Paper Type Selection display in Brightness of the Edge.
• Press the Cancel key to stop the Brightness of the Edge operation.
13. On the Paper Type Selection display in Brightness of the Edge, perform Daily Setup for each paper
type to use.
14. Print an image with the same level as that of the (gray) print shipped with this system, then confirm the
print quality.
If it is in the tolerance level
• End
If it is out of the tolerance level
• Perform Edge Brightness Correction Data Initialization.
• Repeat Brightness of the Edge again.
15. Back up the data.
32514 3/3
32515
Setup
Exposure Adjustment

Maintenance: 2260 → Extension → Setup → Laser Setup → Paper Specification Registration/Setup → Functions → Exposure Adjustment
3. Mode
M5413-00
! Explanation
! Exposure Adjustment (Initial setting: both Reddish Line and Bluish Line unselected)
• If uneven prints as shown in the illustration below are output after the laser unit is replaced, it can be corrected.
Example: Before performing Exposure Adjustment Example: After performing Exposure Adjustment
Exposure Adjustment is effective. Exposure Adjustment is ineffective. Exposure Adjustment is effective. Exposure Adjustment is ineffective.
1. Confirm that Paper Specification Registration/Setup and Magazine Registration/Setup have been
completed.
2. If either or both Reddish Line or/and Bluish Line in Exposure Adjustment is/are selected, clear both,
then click OK.
3. Select the paper magazine to use for Exposure Adjustment.
4. Click Functions→Test Print.
M5413-00
32515 1/2
32515
Setup
5. Carefully check the test print and perform adjustment as necessary.
Test print
Reddish line Bluish line
3. Mode
G085337
If a reddish or bluish line is not printed on the boundary line between the white and gray areas of the test
print
1. It is not necessary to select the Reddish Line or Bluish Line.
2. This completes Exposure Adjustment.

If a reddish or bluish line is printed on the boundary line between the white and gray areas of the test
print
1. Select the Red Line or Bluish Line, and click YES: OK.
2. Click Functions→Test Print.
3. If a reddish or bluish line is printed on the boundary line between the white and gray areas of the test print, increase the
correction value. Then click YES: OK.
Exposure Adjustment (input range: from 80 to 200)
M5431-01
IMPORTANT
• Increase the correction value for Exposure Adjustment by five as a guide.
• If Exposure Adjustment is required, Exposure Position Adjustment may not be performed normally.
☞ 36030
• Making a large correction for Exposure Adjustment may cause fog on white borders of prints.
4. Perform step 2 and step 3 until a reddish or bluish line is not printed on the test print.
5. This completes Exposure Adjustment.
6. Back up the data.
32515 2/2
32517
Setup
Sample images for evaluating image quality (Sample 1/Sample 2)

Maintenance: 2260 → Extension → Setup → Laser Setup → Paper Specification Registration/Setup → Functions → Print Check →
Sample 1/Sample 2
! Explanation
• These sample prints are tools for service personnel to objectively evaluate image quality.
• Positions to check of the sample prints shown below differ depending on the paper and processing solution to use.
• We recommend that you compare sample prints made when the system condition is good such as in system installation and those
made when a problem occurs.
• Make the sample prints with paper whose width is 127 mm or more to print whole image.
3. Mode
! Explanation of images
Image Explanation
Sample 1 1. For adjusting density of gray
Print for adjusting density of gray

• Gray whose RGB values are [R:120, G:120, B:120]
1 For details, see ☞ For adjusting density of gray.
2. For easily measuring density
2 Print for easily measuring density

• Black whose RGB values are [R:0, G:0, B:0] and white whose RGB values are [R:255, G:255,
B:255]
3. For evaluating highlight details
3 Print for evaluating gradation (White)
• White whose RGB values are [R:255, G:255, B:255] and highlight gradation
For details, see ☞ For evaluating highlight details, For evaluating shadow details.
4 4. For evaluating shadow details
Print for evaluating gradation (Black)

• Shadow gradation whose RGB values are [R:0, G:0, B:0]
5 For details, see ☞ For evaluating highlight details, For evaluating shadow details.
5. For measuring printing gamma
Print for checking gamma

• Lattice pattern of black and white on black-and-white gradation
For details, see ☞ For measuring printing gamma.
32517 1/4
32517
Setup
Image Explanation
1. For measuring resolution (White)
Sample 2
Print for checking resolution of the printer (White)

1 • You can check resolution of the printer. (Black lines on a white background)
For details, see ☞ For measuring resolution (White), For measuring resolution (Black).
2. For measuring resolution (Black)
2
Print for checking resolution of the printer (Black)
• You can check resolution of the printer. (White lines on a black background)
For details, see ☞ For measuring resolution (White), For measuring resolution (Black).
3 3. For confirming exposed positions
Print for checking exposed positions
3. Mode
• You can check exposed positions.
For details, see ☞ For confirming exposed positions.
4. For confirming primary colors
Print for checking primary colors

4
• You can check the maximum density of simple colors and densities of black, gray and white.
For details, see ☞ For confirming primary colors.
! Evaluation methods
For adjusting density of gray
1. Check the color and density of gray.
• Points to be checked
• Deterioration of processing solutions such as dirt
• Setup problems such as measurement position of the colorimeter
For easily measuring density
1. Check whiteness and blackness.
• If white is not reproduced well
• If black is not reproduced well
• Deterioration of processing solution (P1)
For evaluating highlight details, For evaluating shadow details
1. Check the value of the position where the boundary line of the upper and lower parts of the sample print cannot be seen.
Upper part (white)

Slide paper on the sample print to check
the position where the boundary line of
the upper and lower parts cannot be seen.
Lower part (gradation)
G085359
32517 2/4
32517
Setup

• Problems of the colorimeter
• Incorrect paper is selected in Paper Specification Registration.
For measuring printing gamma
1. Check the position where a gray line can be seen.
3. Mode
G085353
• Incorrect paper is selected in the Paper Specification Registration/Setup mode.
2. Check whether the Black Balance Adjustment is normally performed with color development of the lattice pattern.
• Black balance is not adjusted normally.
For measuring resolution (White), For measuring resolution (Black)
1. Check the position where vertical and horizontal lines separate.
NOTE
• The width of the lines is one dot.
• # in V-# and H-# show the number of dots between the two lines.
V-1: The space between the lines is one dot.
G085361
• Exposure position problems
• Uneven advance of paper
• Exposure problems
For confirming exposed positions
1. Check the exposure position of each color.
32517 3/4
32517
Setup
G085362
• Exposure position problems
• Uneven advance of paper
• Exposure engine problems
3. Mode
For confirming primary colors
1. Confirm that each color of red, green, blue, white, gray, black, cyan, magenta and yellow is correctly exposed.
G085357
• Exposure engine problems
32517 4/4
32520
Setup
Magazine Registration/Setup

Maintenance → Extension → Setup → Laser Setup → Magazine Registration/Setup
3. Mode
M5318-00
! Explanation
The paper magazine to be used is registered and the paper gamma setup is carried out.
Setup OK The magazine is registered for setup and its paper specification is also registered.
Setup − The magazine is registered for setup and its paper specification is not registered.
Magazine Registration OK The magazine not for setup is registered and the magazine registration setup is
completed.
Magazine Registration − The magazine not for setup is registered and the magazine registration setup is not
completed.
− The magazine not for setup is not registered and the magazine registration setup is not
completed.
! Magazine Registration/Setup (Paper width: 82.5 to 305 mm) (Paper surface: 1 to 4)

You can resister and setup the paper magazine for each paper type to be used. Also setup status can be checked.
The test print is a gray 22-step setup sheet.
Length of unexposed part: 12 mm
Each step length: 12 mm
22-step setup print: 320 mm

G068485
IMPORTANT
• To carry out Magazine Registration/Setup, Paper Specification Registration/Setup of the paper type needs to be
completed.
32520 1/2
32520
Setup
NOTE
• The test prints are printed 3 times at most.
! Functions
! Paper Specification Registration/Setup

Paper Specification Registration/Setup is linked, and Paper Specification Registration/Setup can be carried out.
☞ 32510
3. Mode
32520 2/2
32550
Setup
Data Initialization

Maintenance: 2260 → Extension → Setup → Data Initialization
3. Mode
M5321-00
! Explanation
You can initialize the stored data of the printer, processor or each controller PCB.
IMPORTANT
• Before initializing the data, be sure to backup the data.
If the data has been initialized by mistake, the data can be restored by loading the backup data. ☞ 35400
• Only for F specification, the error message ☞ No. 05905[F], ☞ No. 05906[F] , or ☞ No. 05907[F] may appear in
specific condition after initializing the data.
For details, see ☞ 57020.
• For all data, the following data are all initialized.
Item Backup file name Mode or data to be Remarks

initialized
Main PrinterIF.bin Printer I/F Main PCB data Machine Specification, Option Setting, Operator
Selections, Laser Setup and others
Printer Printer.bin Printer control PCB data Mechanical Adjustment data, Operator Selections
information, Unit Setting information, Machine
Working Information, other
Processor Proc.bin Processor control PCB data Processor Adjustment data, Operator Selections
information, Unit Setting information, Various
Setting data, Timer Setting data, Twenty-Four-
Hour timer, other
Colorimeter color.bin Each data of Colorimeter Various adjustment data of Colorimeter
LASER Laser.bin Laser control PCB data Each data of Laser
Correction Data for LsrSHD_X.bin Shading data of laser engine
Brightness of the Edge of
Image Field
! Data that are not initialized

Basically, all data are initialized when initialization is performed.
Some data are not initialized, which are listed below.
Data that are not initialized

Data of total counter, daily totals counter, daily sales totals, remaining amount of paper, order number, archive number, total counter 2,
laser operation record, exposure adjustment, and serial number of colorimeter calibration plate
32550 1/2
32550
Setup
Data that are not initialized

Machine Type Registration, Language, IP Address, Subnet mask, Default gateway, Serial Number (Printer/Processor), Date of
shipment, and Communication Speed Setting of Machine Specification
3. Mode
32550 2/2
33001
Processor Settings
Processor Settings
Print Sensor Adjustment

Maintenance: 2260 → Extension → Processor Settings → Print Sensor Adjustment
3. Mode
M5431-00
NOTE
• The LED light intensity value of each sensor can be checked and set by entering the service personnel password (2260).
! Explanation
! Print Sensor Adjustment (Standard value: 150) (Input range: 0 to 255)

It is the standard value to be used for adjusting the LED light intensity of each sensor.
NOTE
• The normal range of the LED light intensity value of each sensor is from 1 to 254.
! Functions
! Print Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment

Adjust the LED light intensity of each sensor.
NOTE
• With this Print Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment function, the sensors below are adjusted.
Sensors for Sensor LED Light Intensity Value Adjustment

Print Sensor (Left) Print Sensor (Center) Print Sensor (Right)
Dryer Lane Select Sensor
! Print Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment
1. Confirm that each cover of the dryer section is closed.

2. Perform Print Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment.
NOTE
• The LED light intensity value of each sensor is not shown if the service personnel password has not been entered.
• After Print Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment is completed normally, OK is shown.
OK: When the LED light intensity of each sensor is from 1 to 254
• After Print Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment is not completed normally, − is shown.
−: When the LED light intensity of each sensor is 0 or 255 or more
33001 1/2
33001
Processor Settings
• When LED light intensity value of each sensor is 255 and Print Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment is finished
normally, the following error is shown.
☞ No. 00520 Sensors may be dirty. is shown.
3. Mode
33001 2/2
33002
Processor Settings
Standard Replenishment Amount Setting[F]
! Display
Maintenance: 2260 → Extension → Processor Settings → Standard Replenishment Amount Setting
3. Mode
M5466-00
! Explanation
NOTE
• Enter the service personnel password (2260) to set the standard replenishment amount of P1R, P2RA and P2RB.
! Standard Replenishment Amount Setting (Input range: 0.1 to 500.0 mL/m2)

The standard replenishment amount of P1R, P2RA, P2RB and PSR can be specified on the Standard Replenishment Amount Setting.
• In the replenishment package or process specification change, change the standard replenishment amount only when the instruction
for changing the standard replenishment amount arrives from the manufacturer.
• Do not change the standard replenishment amount without the instruction from the manufacturer.
! Replenishment rate by magazine (Initial value: 1.0 for P1R/P2RA/P2RB/PSR) (Input range: from 1.0 to
2.0)
The standard replenishment amount of P1R/P2RA/P2RB, PSR can be specified for each Width, Paper Surface and Magazine ID.
• If using professional paper, change Replenishment rate by magazine only when the instruction is given by the manufacturer.
• Do not change the Replenishment rate by magazine without the instruction from the manufacturer.
• Example: Basic replenishment amounts when Replenishment rate by magazine of P1R/P2RA/P2RB is set to 1.2 for a paper
magazine whose Width is 127 mm and Paper Surface is (1)
Processing Basic Replenishment rate by Basic replenishment amount after Replenishment rate
solution replenishment magazine by magazine is changed
amount
P1R 108.0mL/m2 1.2 129.6mL/m2
P2RA 108.0mL/m2 1.2 129.6mL/m2
P2RB 108.0mL/m2 1.2 129.6mL/m2
PSR 248.0mL/m2 1 248.0mL/m2
33002 1/1
33003
Processor Settings
Pump Output Amount Setting[F]

• For [N] and [SM] specifications, see ☞ Pump Output Amount Setting [N] [SM].
! Display
Maintenance: 2260 → Extension → Processor Settings → Pump Output Amount Setting
3. Mode
M5467-00
! Explanation
! Pump Output Amount Setting (Input range: 0.1 to 200.0 ml)

By Pump Output Amount Measurement via F: Functions, output amount of each replenisher pump is measured, and the measured
values are entered.
! F: Functions
! Pump Output Amount Measurement

Use this function to measure the output amount of each pump.
For the operation procedures, see Operator's Manual - Additional Operations - Measuring the pump output amount.
• Do not return the replenishment solution used for measuring the output amount to the replenishment tank because this amount is
subtracted from the total replenishment solution amounts.
! Mixing Replenisher
There are two functions in Manual Open: creating replenishment solution and resetting the remaining amount of the replenishment
solution.
• When restarting the process without draining the replenishment solution from P1R/P2RA/P2RB after taking countermeasures
against replenisher section errors, ☞ No. 00912[F] is shown if adding water to the replenishment tank and performing Mixing
Replenisher with turning on all the (upper) and (lower) replenishment solution level sensors (ON: the state of solution filled).
At this time, the remaining amount of replenishment solution is reset.
• ☞ No. 00913[F] occurs if performing Mixing Replenisher with # # # (lower) replenishment solution level sensor on (EXCEPT FOR
the case that all the (upper) and (lower) replenishment solution level sensors of P1R/P2RA/P2RB are on, which is the state of
solution filled).
• The same process can be performed as Processor Standard Setting→Processor Set Up Mode→Mixing Replenisher.
33003 1/3
33003
Processor Settings
! Initial Replenishment Operation (SP1)

You can remove the remaining air in the hose by operating P1R Replenisher Pump, P2RA Replenisher Pump and P2RB
Replenisher Pump for a specified time.
To cancel Initial Replenishment Operation, press NO: Cancel.
• Exhausting the air from PSR replenisher pump is performed when exhausting the air at Auto Cleaning.
• The same process can be performed as Processor Standard Setting→Processor Set Up Mode→Initial Replenisher Operation
(Replenisher Pump).
3. Mode
33003 2/3
33003
Processor Settings
Pump Output Amount Setting [N] [SM]
! Display
Maintenance: 2260 → Extension → Processor Settings → Pump Output Amount Setting
For [N] display For [SM] display
3. Mode
! Explanation
! Pump Output Amount Setting (input range: 0.1 to 200.0 ml)

In Pump Output Amount Setting via F: Functions, output amount of each replenisher pump is measured and compared with the set
values.
! F: Functions
• SP1: The menus marked with (SP1) in the table below are only shown when the service personnel password (2260) has been
entered.

Use this function to measure the output amount of each pump.
IMPORTANT
• When the replenisher pump is activated via the pump output amount measurement of Functions, amount remaining
is subtracted.
• Do not change the pump output amount except for when changing the pump.

After operating each replenisher pump for a specified time, the air remaining in the hose can be exhausted.
To stop the initial replenishment, press NO: Cancel.
IMPORTANT
• Be sure to carry out the initial replenishment operation at system installation.
• When the initial replenishment operation has been carried out if air in the hose cannot be removed, activate the pump
of the relevant hose to remove air using the pump output amount setting of Functions.
33003 3/3
33004
Processor Settings
Auto Cleaning Water Output Amount Setting[F]
! Display
Maintenance: 2260 → Extension → Processor Settings → Auto Cleaning Water Output Amount Setting
3. Mode
M5468-00
! Explanation
! Auto Cleaning Water Output Amount Setting (Input range: 0.1 to 200.0 ml)
Measure the output amount of Measure Auto Cleaning Water Output Amount, P1 Auto Cleaning Valve + Replenisher Cartridge
Cleaning Pump, P2 Auto Cleaning Valve + Replenisher Cartridge Cleaning Pump and PS Auto Cleaning Valve + Replenisher
Cartridge Cleaning Pump in Functions, and enter the measured values.
! Functions
! Measure Auto Cleaning Water Output Amount (Initial value:P1: 69.0 ml, P2: 70 ml, PS: 108 ml)
Use this function to measure the output amount of the cleaning water of P1/P2/PS.
• There is no problem even if the output amount difference of the cleaning water is ±20% compared with the initial value of cleaning
water of P1/P2/PS.

You can exhaust the air remaining in the hose by operating PSR Replenisher Pump, P1 Auto Cleaning Valve + Replenisher
Cartridge Cleaning Pump, P2 Auto Cleaning Valve + Replenisher Cartridge Cleaning Pump and PS Auto Cleaning Valve +
Replenisher Cartridge Cleaning Pump for a specified time.
To cancel Initial Replenishment Operation, press NO: Cancel.
• The same process can be performed as Processor Standard Setting→Processor Set Up Mode→Initial Replenisher Operation
(Replenisher Cartridge Cleaning Pump).
! Adjustment (Measure Auto Cleaning Water Output Amount)

Example: Auto Cleaning Water Output Amount Setting display
S5468-00-UM00
33004 1/5
33004
Processor Settings
1. Click Functions.
2. Click Measure Auto Cleaning Water Output Amount.

The display to select the processing solution to output is shown.
3. Select the processing solution to measure the output amount.
3. Mode
S5468-01-UM00
4. Move the colorimeter unit to the central position of the rail.
5. Spread a cloth or the like over the processor top.

When removing the hose of automatic cleaning pipe, the water in the hose comes out. Spread a cloth from the lower
processor top cover to upper processing tank to prevent water from getting into the processing tank.
6. Remove the hose of automatic cleaning pipe used for measuring the output of the processing solution
at the connection part.
(1) Remove the hose of automatic cleaning pipe from the following part.
Disconnect the hose from

this part.
G088992
(2) Remove the connection parts.

IMPORTANT
• Water comes out from the hose of automatic cleaning pipe. Be careful not to get in the water in the
processing tank to prevent the contamination.
33004 2/5
33004
Processor Settings
Connection parts
G088971
7. Connect the measurement hose to the connection part which removed the hose at the step 2.
3. Mode
Measure the output amount after removing the water inside the hose completely.
IMPORTANT
• There are two types of measurement hoses; one is for P1/P2 and the other is for PS. A label is attached on
each hose. If the hose for different processing solution is used for measuring the output, water cannot be
supplied correctly.
8. Prepare the measuring container to get water from the measurement hose.
IMPORTANT
• Water comes out. Be careful not to get in the water in the processing tank to prevent the contamination.
Measurement hose
Prepare the measuring container to get water from the outlet.
G086880
9. Measure the pump output amount.
(1) Confirm that the measuring container to get water from the measurement hose is ready.
(2) Carry out the output.
There are two types for carrying out the output.
When carrying out the output with the manual sorter switch (manual replenisher switch)
Press the manual sorter switch (manual replenisher switch).
33004 3/5
33004
Processor Settings
The time of the procedure completion is shown. Wait until the time is 0.
Manual sorter switch
G086903
When carrying out the output on the display monitor
3. Mode
Click YES: Execute.
The time of the procedure completion is shown. Wait until the time is 0.
IMPORTANT
• When the replenishment solution does not come out from the exit of the replenishment pipe, the pipe may
contain the air. In this case, repeat the procedure of output until the replenishment solution comes out, and
dispose the replenishment solution as effluent after coming out the replenishment solution and measure the
output amount again.
10. Measure the water amount discharged to the measuring container and write down the amount.
If the pump is activated once, the output is carried out at one time. The output cannot be divided in several times. Confirm the
completion of the output and measure the output amount.
11. After measuring the output amount, dispose the water discharged to the measuring container as
effluent.
IMPORTANT
• Be sure to dispose the water discharged to the measuring container as effluent and not to put it in the
processing tank.
12. Measure the output amount three times or more on a processing solution and calculate the average
amount.
The first output amount is unstable. Measure the average amount at the measured value after second output amount.
Repeat the procedure from Step 8 to Step 11 three times or more and calculate the average amount. When measuring the
output amount of other processing solution continuously, wipe the measuring container and remove the water completely.
13. Click NO: Cancel.

The screen returns to the Auto Cleaning Water Output Amount Setting display.
14. Change the output amount measured on the Auto Cleaning Water Output Amount Setting screen
to the average amount calculated on Step 12.
15. Click YES: OK.

The output amount is registered.
16. Remove the measuring hose.
33004 4/5
33004
Processor Settings
17. Reconnect the hose of automatic cleaning pipe.
IMPORTANT
• Fit the hoses in the cutouts so that they will not be pinched by the processor top cover when it is closed.
• Be sure to connect the appropriate hose for each processing solution hose. If the hose is connected to other
processing solution hose, the replenishment is carried out to the different processing solution tank.
3. Mode
Cutout
G088972
33004 5/5
33030
Processor Settings
Total Replenishment Amount Display[F]

Maintenance: 2260 → Extension → Processor Settings → Total Replenishment Amount Display
3. Mode
M5470-00
• Clear of Replenishment Lack Time is shown if you enter the service personnel password (2260).
! Explanation
! Total Replenishment Amount

Accumulated replenishment amount for each pump is shown.
! Replenishment Lack Time

Replenishment is stopped if the effluent tank is full or an error occurs. However, if paper is being processed at that moment, the system
can continue processing the paper. Based on the amount of the processed paper, the amount of the replenishment solution shortfall will
be accumulated as Replenishment Lack Time so that such shortfall during lack time will be replenished after the effluent is removed
or the error is cleared.
! Clear
Resets each data.
33030 1/1
33040
Processor Settings
Total Replenishment Amount Display [N]

• For SM, see ☞ Total Replenishment Amount Display [SM].
! Display
3. Mode
M5435-00
! Explanation
! Total Replenishment Amount

The total replenishment amount can be checked.
! Replenishment Lack Time

The replenishment stops when the waste solution tank is full or when the replenisher solution is empty. Replenishment Lack Time is
accumulated according to the paper amount which are processed after the replenishment is stopped. Carry out the replenishment after
the error is closed.
NOTE
• When the replenisher switch is turned off, the message is shown and the process stops after the replenishment lack time reaches
600 seconds.
! Clear
Clears the value which is accumulated.
NOTE
• The service personnel password (2260) is required to display the clear button.
33040 1/3
33040
Processor Settings
Total Replenishment Amount Display [SM]
! Display
3. Mode
M5463-01
! Explanation
! Total Replenishment Amount (Input range: 0.00 to 99999.99 mL)

The total replenishment amount can be checked and set.
! Remaining (Initial value: Package Capacity) (Input range: 0.00 to Package Capacity)
When the prints have been processed, the amount discharged from the replenisher pump is subtracted from the remaining amount.
When replacing the package before the replenishment package gets completely empty, it returns to the initial value. (Initial value:
Package Capacity)
! Package Capacity
The package capacity which has been set in the Package Capacity Setting via Functions is shown.
! Functions
! Package Capacity Setting

The service personnel password (2260) is required to display this.
$ Replenishment Alarm Value (Initial value: -5%) (Input range: -50 to +50%)
When the percentage of the replenishment remaining amount (internal calculated value) to the replenishment
package capacity became smaller than the Replenishment Alarm Value, 5708-5709 Replenishment Package
solution remaining error. occurs.
☞ No. 05708[SM]
$ Package Capacity Setting (Input range: 0.1 to 9999.9 mL)
Set the replenishment solution amounts for the replenishment packages.
! SM Forced Replenishment Setting

33040 2/3
33040
Processor Settings
$ SM Forced Replenishment Amount Setting (Initial value: See the table below.) (Input range: 0.0 to 999.9
mL)
3701 3703
Processing solution SM Forced Replenishment Processing solution SM Forced Replenishment
Amount Amount
CD-A 58.1 CD-A 55.3
CD-B 58.1 CD-B 55.3
CD-C 83.0 CD-C 79.0
BF-A 41.7 BF-A 41.7
BF-B 60.5 BF-B 60.5
STB 30.0 STB 30.0
This is the limit amount when carrying out forced replenishment.

When the forced replenishment amount reaches this value, each replenishment pump stops.
3. Mode
IMPORTANT
• Do not change it to any other value than the initial value of the forced replenishment amount.
$ Revolution Count
The number of pump revolution when each pump operates replenishment with the value input in Forced
Replenishment Amount Setting is shown.
33040 3/3
33060
Processor Settings
Correction Setting [SM]

Maintenance: 2260 → Extension → Processor Settings → Correction Setting
3. Mode
M5464-00
! Explanation
! Correction Setting
The amount of replenish and water supply can be increased depending on the paper process amount.
! Replenishment Correction Rate

The standard replenishment amount including the water supply amount can be changed by the same rate, without changing the value
of Standard Replenishment Amount Setting.
NOTE
• The replenishment correction rate can be changed by entering the service personnel password (2260).
! Refilling Water Level 2

It switches Refilling Water Amount according to the operating environment of the system.
• Standard: It becomes the refilling water amount set in the Refilling Water Amount Setting 2.
• Low Humidity: It becomes the refilling water amount set in the Refilling Water Amount Setting 2 (Low Humidity).
• Low Processing Amount: It becomes the refilling water amount set in the Refilling Water Amount Setting 2 (Low Processing
Amount).
See ☞ 33510 Refilling Water Amount Setting [SM].
33060 1/1
33070
Processor Settings
Counter [J]

Maintenance: 2260 → Extension → Processor Settings → Counter
3. Mode
M5446-00
NOTE
• Enter the service personnel password (2260) to configure these settings.
• The service personnel password (2260) is required to display .
! Explanation
! Replenishment Counter (Input range: 0 to 999999)

The number of tablets that have been dropped can be checked and set.
! Water supply Counter (Input range: 0.0 to 9,999.9 ml)

The total water supply amount can be checked and set.
! Reservoir Count (Input range: 0 to Drop Limit/without Replenishment Limit)

The number of insufficient tables to be replenished for the amount of paper that has been processed since last tablet replenishment can
be checked and set.
If any of the following errors occurred, the tablet replenishment is to be canceled.
(Error)
05600-05602 Tablet Drum operation error.
05603-05605 A tablet has jammed.
05609-05611 Printing cannot continue without replenishment.
05612 Tablet Replenishment Elevator operation error.
(Attention)
00600-00602 The Tablet Cartridge is empty.
00605-00607 Attach the Tablet Cartridge.
00608 Attach the Tablet Replenishment Unit.
NOTE
• To reset the reservoir count, enter 0 with the key.
! Water Supply Reservoir Amount

The insufficient water supply amount for the amount of paper that has been processed since last water supply can be checked and set.
Water supply amount is accumulated every time when printing is processed.
If any of the following errors occurred, the water supply is to be canceled.
NOTE
• Water supply reservoir amount is display only. You cannot input any value.
(Attention)
0603 Add water to the Water Supply Tank.
33070 1/2
33070
Processor Settings
0604 Add water to the SW/DW Tank.

0610 Empty the Effluent Tank.
! Kit Remains
A B C D E F G H
3. Mode
S4102-01-SM00
Symbol Explanation
A Processing solution
B The number of the remaining cartridges per kit
C The number of the cartridges per kit
D The number of remaining tablets per cartridge
E The number of tablets per cartridge
F The number of remaining tablets per kit is shown or
can be changed. (Input range: 0 to G)
G The number of tablets per kit
H Based on the remaining tablets of CD, the calculated
numbers of remaining tablets that is required for BF
and STB are shown.
NOTE
• The service personnel password (2260) is required to display "H".
! Functions
! Water Supply Reservoir Amount Reset

If Water Supply Reservoir Amount Reset is carried out, the water supply reservoir amounts for CD, BF and STB is initialized.
33070 2/2
33500
Processor Standard Setting
Thermosensor Calibration

Maintenance: 2260 → Extension → Processor Settings → Processor Standard Setting → Thermosensor Calibration
3. Mode
M5439-00
! Explanation
NOTE
! Measurement Value (Initial value: 0.0°C) (Input range: 10 to 52°C (Correction value: 0 to ±3°C)
Measure the temperature with a mercury thermometer and enter the measured values.
! Correction Value
After entering the measured temperature, the correction value, subtracting the displayed temperature from the measured temperature,
will be automatically entered.
! Displayed Temperature
The processing solution temperature measured by the thermosensor is displayed.
33500 1/1
33501
Cleaning Water Amount Setting[F]

• For [N], [SM] and [J] specifications, see ☞ Cleaning Water Amount Setting [N] [SM] [J].
Maintenance: 2260 → Extension → Processor Settings → Processor Standard Setting → Cleaning Water Amount Setting
3. Mode
M5472-00
! Explanation
• Do not change the Cleaning Water Amount Setting without the instruction from the manufacturer.
• If the processing solution specifications are changed, service personnel can change Cleaning Water Amount Setting on site.
! P1 Cleaning Water Amount ON Setting (Initial value: 0.75) (input range: from 0.01 to 10.00 seconds)
Set the operation time of P1 Auto Cleaning Valve + Replenisher Cartridge Cleaning Pump.
! P2 Cleaning Water Amount ON Setting (Initial value: 2.61) (input range: from 0.01 to 10.00 seconds)
Set the operation time of P2 Auto Cleaning Valve + Replenisher Cartridge Cleaning Pump.
! PS Cleaning Water Amount ON Setting (Initial value: 7.60) (input range: from 0.01 to 10.00 seconds)
Set the operation time of PS Auto Cleaning Valve + Replenisher Cartridge Cleaning Pump.
! Cleaning Water Amount OFF Setting (Initial value: 3.00) (input range: from 0.01 to 100.00 seconds)
Set the stop time of the replenishment cartridge cleaning pump.
! Drive Start Setting (Initial value: 10.0) (input range: from 0.1 to 100.0 seconds)
Set the time from when the replenishment cartridge cleaning pump starts discharging until the drive motor starts.
! Drive Stop Setting (Initial value: 3.0) (input range: from 0.1 to 100.0 seconds)
Set the time from when the replenishment cartridge cleaning pump completes discharging until the drive motor stops.
! Cleaning Valve ON Wait Time (Initial value: 1.00) (input range: from 0.01 to 2.00 seconds)
Set the time from when the replenishment cartridge cleaning pump turns on until P1, P2, PS automated cleaning valves open.
33501 1/2
33501
Cleaning Water Amount Setting [N] [SM] [J]

Maintenance: 2260 → Extension → Processor Settings → Processor Standard Setting → Cleaning Water Amount Setting
3. Mode
M5441-00
! Explanation
! Cleaning Water Amount ON Setting (initial value: 14.0) (input range: from 0.1 to 99.9 seconds)
Set the operation time of the cleaning pump.
! Cleaning Water Amount OFF Setting (Initial value: 3.0) (input range: 0.1 to 99.9 seconds)
Set the stop time of the cleaning pump.
! Drive Start Setting (Initial value: 10.0) (input range: 0.1 to 99.9 seconds)
Set the time when the drive motor starts operation after the cleaning pump starts the output operation.
! Drive Stop Setting (Initial value: 3.0) (input range: 0.1 to 99.9 seconds)
Set the time when the drive motor stops operation after the cleaning pump completes the output operation.
33501 2/2
33502
Drive Motor Revolution Count Setting

Maintenance: 2260 → Extension → Processor Settings → Processor Standard Setting → Drive Motor Revolution Count Setting
[F] specification [N][SM][J] specifications
3. Mode
! Explanation
Item Explanation
Drive Motor Setting Value Displays the setting count of the drive motor revolution.
Drive Motor Setting Value (Low
Speed)*1
Drive Motor Revolution Count Displays the present count of the drive motor revolution.
Drive Motor Revolution Count (Low
Speed)*1
*1. Displayed only when CP-49E or CP-49LR is selected.

Performing Drive Motor Revolution Count Auto Adjustment automatically adjusts the revolution count for normal process and that for Low
Speed process.
! Functions
! Drive Motor Revolution Count Auto Adjustment

The count of the drive motor revolution is automatically adjusted.
NOTE
• When the drive motor has been replaced and the machine type registration of the machine specification has been changed, it is
adjusted.
33502 1/1
33503
Display Processor Working Information[F]
! Display
Maintenance: 2260 → Extension → Processor Settings → Processor Standard Setting → Display Processor Working Information
3. Mode
M5473-00
! Explanation
! Replenishment Solution Preparing Counts

• You can confirm Replenishment Solution Preparing Counts.
! Pump Operation Counts

• You can confirm the operation counts of each replenishment pump in 100 times.
! Processor Drive Time

• The time period of drive motor can be confirmed.
! Clear
Clears the value which is accumulated.
33503 1/1
33504
Processor Set Up Mode[F]
! Display
Maintenance: 2260 → Extension → Processor Settings → Processor Standard Setting → Processor Set Up Mode
3. Mode
M5474-00
! Explanation
• If air in the auto cleaning pump is not exhausted during installation, the auto cleaning pump may be damaged. Be sure to perform
Processor Set Up Mode in the above order.
! Initial Replenisher Operation (Auto Cleaning Pump)
S4509-00-SM01
• At the installation, you can exhaust the air remaining in the hose by operating PSR Replenisher Pump,P1 Auto Cleaning Valve
+ Replenisher Cartridge Cleaning Pump, P2 Auto Cleaning Valve + Replenisher Cartridge Cleaning Pump and PS Auto
Cleaning Valve + Replenisher Cartridge Cleaning Pump for a specified time.
To cancel Initial Replenisher Operation (Auto Cleaning Pump), press Cancel.
• If the air in the hose cannot be exhausted even though after performing Initial Replenisher Operation (Auto Cleaning Pump),
exhaust the air by operating the pump of hose that the air remains by Measure Auto Cleaning Water Output Amount via F:
Functions from Auto Cleaning Water Output Amount Setting, or Pump Output Amount Measurement via F: Functions from
Pump Output Amount Setting.
! Mixing Replenisher
S4509-00-SM02
• There are two functions in Manual Operation: creating replenishment solution and the resetting the remaining amount of the
replenishment solution.
33504 1/2
33504
! Initial Replenisher Operation (Replenisher Pump)
S4509-00-SM03
• After operating P1R Replenisher Pump, P2RA Replenisher Pump and P2RB Replenisher Pump for a specified time, the air
remaining in the hose can be exhausted.
To cancel Initial Replenisher Operation (Replenisher Pump), press NO: Cancel.
• If air cannot be exhausted from hoses after performing Initial Replenisher Operation (Replenisher Pump), activate the
appropriate pumps and remove the air inside using Functions Pump Output Amount Measurement of Pump Output Amount
Setting.
3. Mode
33504 2/2
33505
Dryer Section Setting (Auto Setup)
! Display
Maintenance: 2260 → Extension → Processor Settings → Processor Standard Setting → Dryer Section Setting (Auto Setup)
Display Illustration
Normal prints
3. Mode
Auto Setup (Test print)
! Explanation
• The settings of Dryer Section Setting (Auto Setup) are applied to the following setups.
• Initial Setup
• Paper Specification Registration/Setup
• Daily Setup (Auto Setup inclusive)
• Magazine Registration/Setup
• Paper Setup
• Emulsion Number Change
! Temperature Setting (input range: 63 to 85°C)

For the QSS-3701/3702/3703/LP7500/LP7600, the initial value is 75°C.
For the QSS-3704/3705/LP7700/LP7900, the initial value is 80°C.
• The dryer temperature can be specified for Auto Setup.
! Print Start Setting

• Temperature at which to start setup (test print) and setup timing can be specified.
• Normally, the initial value is used in Dryer Section Setting (Auto Setup).
However, the test print does not dry in a humid environment, and the error ☞ No. 05535Paper has jammed in the processor
section. may occur. Then, change the settings.
• Dryer Section Setting (Auto Setup) is valid only when setup is performed.
The dryer temperature of normal print is adjusted in Dryer Temperature Setting.
! Dryer Temperature (Initial value: 60°C) (Input range: 60 to Temperature Setting −3 °C)
• The dryer temperature can be specified to start the Waiting Time of Print Start Setting.
33505 1/2
33505
! Waiting Time (Initial value: 90 seconds) (Input range: 90 to 999 seconds)

• The time to start advancing the Auto Setup (Test print) can be specified after the dryer temperature reached the Dryer
Temperature of Print Start Setting.
Example: Temperature Setting (70°C), Dryer Temperature (60°C), Waiting Time (90 seconds)
Example: If the dryer temperature is 30°C
Dryer temperature adjustment starts with 30°C Dryer Temperature: 60°C
Counting Waiting Time (90 seconds) After 90 seconds, printing starts.

G085949
Example: If the dryer temperature is 70°C

Dryer temperature adjustment starts with 70°C
3. Mode
Waiting Time is not necessary.
Printing immediately starts.
G085949
NOTE
• If the temperature already reaches the specified dryer temperature to start setup printing, printing immediately starts.
33505 2/2
33510
Refilling Water Amount Setting [N]

• For SM, see ☞ Refilling Water Amount Setting [SM].
! Display
Maintenance: 2260 → Extension → Processor Settings → Processor Standard Setting → Refilling Water Amount Setting
3. Mode
M5440-00
! Explanation
! Process Specification
The process specification which has been registered in the machine specification is shown.
☞ 35800
! Refilling Water Amount Setting (Initial value: See the table below.) (Input range: 0.0 to 999.9 ml)
Refilling Water Refilling Water
Amount Setting 1 Amount Setting 2
CD-W 186.0 79.5
BF-W 185.0 56.0
STB1-W 360.0 71.4
STB2-W 139.0 71.8
STB3-W 130.0 79.4
STB4-W 202.0 71.5
The output amount of automatic refilling for each refilling water pump is set.
$ Refilling Water Amount Setting 1

When refilling water with Refilling Water Level off, set the refilling water amount after Refilling Water Level is set
to on. (For automatic refilling water during start up checks and normal processing.)
$ Refilling Water Amount Setting2

Set the refilling water amount with Refilling Water Level on. (For automatic refilling during start up checks.)
33510 1/3
33510
Refilling Water Amount Setting [SM]
! Display
Display 1 Display 2
3. Mode
! Explanation
! Process Specification
The process specification which has been registered in the machine specification is shown.
☞ 35800
! Refilling Water Amount Setting (Initial value: See the table below.) (Input range: 0.0 to 999.9 ml)
Refilling Water Refilling Water Amount Setting 2
Amount Setting 1 Refilling Water Amount 2 (Low
Humidity)
Refilling Water Amount Setting 2
(Low Processing Amount)
CD 151.0 58.5
BF 197.0 35.0
STB1 350.0 71.4
STB2 118.0 71.8
STB3 127.0 79.4
STB4 184.0 50.5
The output amount of automatic refilling for each refilling water pump is set.

When refilling water with Refilling Water Level off, set the refilling water amount after Refilling Water Level is set
to on. (For automatic refilling water during start up checks and normal processing.)

Set the refilling water amount with Refilling Water Level on. This setting is valid when the Refilling Water Level 2
of Correction Setting has been set to Standard. (For automatic refilling during start up checks.)
$ Refilling Water Amount 2 (Low Humidity)

Each refilling water amount is set in selecting Low Humidity for Refilling Water Level 2 of Correction Setting
for Refilling Water Amount Setting 2 (Standard).
33510 2/3
33510
$ Refilling Water Amount Setting 2 (Low Processing Amount)

Each refilling water amount is set in selecting Low Processing Amount for Refilling Water Level 2 of Correction
Setting for Refilling Water Amount Setting 2 (Standard).
Each refilling water amount can be set according to the amount of evaporation when processing amount is low (for
each machine or time of year).
IMPORTANT
• The initial values of Refilling Water Amount 2 (Low Humidity) and Refilling Water Amount 2 (Low Processing
Amount) are the same as that of Refilling Water Amount Setting 2. Do not change them.
If it is necessary to change the settings, the setting values are specified.
3. Mode
33510 3/3
33520
Basic Kit Setting [J]

Maintenance: 2260 → Extension → Processor Settings → Processor Standard Setting → Basic Kit Setting
3. Mode
M5450-00
! Explanation
! Kit Processing Amount Setting (initial value: 388.8) (input range: 0.1 to 999.9 m2)
The paper area that can be processed per kit can be set.
! Kit Water Supply Setting (initial value: 0.01 to 327.67 L)

The water supply amount that is required per kit can be changed.
CPK-2-J2 (initial value)

PSJ-TYPE C (initial value)
CD 19.05
BF 15.55
STB 58.32
! Drop Limit/without Replenishment Limit Setting (initial value CD: 4, BF: 8, STB: 8) (input range: 0 to
Tablets Per Cartridge)
If the tablet kit is finished, Tablet Operation will be performed. (The rest of the tablets will be dropped at once.)
A limit value for the number of tablets that can be dropped at that time can be set.
If it exceeds the setting value (Drop Limit/without Replenishment Limit Setting), the attention message 609: The Tablet kit is
empty. is shown.
! Total Cartridge Count (initial value: 1 to 99)

The number of cartridges per kit can be set.
CPK-2-J2 (initial value)

PSJ-TYPE C (initial value)
CD 4
BF 10
STB 2
! Number of tablets in the cartridge (initial value CD:40, BF:40, STB:20)

The number of tablets per cartridge can be set.
33520 1/2
33520
IMPORTANT
• Even if the values of settings are changed, the changes are not to be effective until the kit ends, which are Kit
Processing Amount Setting, Kit Water Supply Amount Setting, Drop Limit/without Replenishment Limit Setting, Total
Cartridge Count, and Tablets Per Cartridge.
3. Mode
33520 2/2
33530
Kit Correction [J]

Maintenance: 2260 → Extension → Processor Settings → Processor Standard Setting → Kit Correction
3. Mode
M5451-00
! Explanation
! Auto Low Processing Correction (initial value: ON), Correction Rate (initial value: 30) (input range: 0
to 99 %), Detection (initial value: 2.02) (input range: 0.01 to 9.99 m2)
Correction Rate and Detection is to be effective only when the Auto Low Processing Correction is ON.
This function corrects the tablet drop and water supply cycle automatically while low print processing. If it is ON, and the day
continues for one week when the accumulated processing amount per day (paper processing area) is smaller than that of detected auto
low processing correction, the correction rate is to be effective from the eighth day. However, if processing in more value than the
setting is performed for more than two consecutive days, it is to return to the normal processing from the third day.
IMPORTANT
• Even if the value of Correction Rate or Detection of Auto Low Processing Correction is changed, the changes are not
to be effective until the kit ends.
! Replenishment Correction Rate Setting (Initial value: 100) (input range: 1 to 250 %)
This function corrects the tablet drop cycle. The setting of large value makes drop cycle fast and that of small value makes it slow.
! Water Supply Correction Rate Setting (Initial value: 100) (input range: 1 to 250 %)
This function corrects the water supply cycle. The setting of large value makes water supply cycle fast and that of small value makes it
slow.
33530 1/1
33540
Refilling Water Amount Setting [J]

3. Mode
M5452-00
! Explanation
! Environment Setting (Initial value: (1) 12-2 (2) 3-5 (3) 6-8 (4) 9-11 ) (Input range: 1 to 12)
A year can be divided into 4 environments and their periods can be set for the evaporation refill.
NOTE
• If any of 12 months is not set, it cannot be registered even if Enter is clicked.
Example: (1) 1-6 (2) 8-12
In this case, it cannot be registered because July is missing.
• Clicking Environment Setting Cancel initializes the value.
! Environment Correction Setting (Input range: 0 to 4)

The magnification of Evaporation Refill Amount can be set for each environment.
Magnification
No. Working Not working
0 0.0 1.0
1 0.6 0.6
2 1.0 1.0
3 1.4 1.4
4 Free setting Free setting
Magnification Condition
0.0 No refilling water
0.6 Humid condition
1.0 Standard condition
1.4 Dry condition
NOTE
• The value can be set freely for No.4. (input range: 0.0 to 9.9)
! Basic Evaporation Refill Amount (Input range: 0.0 to 99.9 ml)

The value for Evaporation Refill Amount can be set freely for both Working and Not Working.
33540 1/2
33540
IMPORTANT
• Even if the value of Basic Evaporation Refill Amount is changed, the changes are not to be effective until the kit ends.
3. Mode
33540 2/2
33550
Pump Output Amount Setting [J]

Maintenance: 2260 → Extension → Processor Settings → Processor Standard Setting → Pump Output Amount Setting
3. Mode
M5453-00
! Explanation
! Pump Output Amount Setting (Input range: 0.1 to 200 ml)

Measure the pump output amount in Pump Output Amount Measurement in Functions, and check the measured value.
! Functions

Be sure to measure the output amount when installing it.
If the output amount setting is not appropriate, the water supply or replenishment operation is not carried out properly.
! Initial Replenishment Operation

After operating each replenisher pump, water supply pump, refilling water pump for a specified time, the air remaining in the hose can
be extracted.
To cancel the initial replenishment, click Cancel.
IMPORTANT
• Be sure to carry out the initial replenishment operation at system installation.
• When the initial replenishment operation has been carried out if air in the hose cannot be removed, activate the pump
of the relevant hose to remove air using the pump output amount setting of Functions.
33550 1/1
33560
Operation Check [J]

Maintenance: 2260 → Extension → Processor Settings → Processor Standard Setting → Operation Check
3. Mode
M5454-00
! Explanation
Operation Checks of Tablet Sensor 1 and 2 can be carried out.
! Functions
! Dropping Tablet
One dropping tablet operation is carried out for the selected chemical.
Conditions of tablet sensor 1 and 2 in dropping tablet are displayed.
IMPORTANT
• The number of the dropped tablet in Dropping Tablet is not to be subtracted from the number of remaining tablets.
! Home Operation
When Either tablet sensor 1 or 2 is close, Home Operation of the drum can be carried out for the selected chemical.
IMPORTANT
• When carrying out Home Operation, be sure to remove the cartridges.
33560 1/1
33570
Manual Kit Change [J]

Maintenance → Extension → Processor Settings → Processor Standard Setting → Manual Kit Change
3. Mode
M5455-00
! Explanation
! Manual Kit Change

When carrying out Manual Kit Change, the following values are to be initialized (setting value).
• Kit Correction Amount
• Kit Water Supply Amount Setting
• Kit Remains
• Drop Limit/without Replenishment Limit
• Total Cartridge Count
• Tablets Per Cartridge
• Basic Evaporation Refill Amount
NOTE
• When setting value is changed, the new setting is to be effective from the time when the manual kit change or kit end is carried
out, or kit end error occurs.
33570 1/1
33590
Dryer Lane Select Operation Setting

Maintenance: 2260 → Extension → Processor Settings → Processor Standard Setting → Dryer Lane Select Operation Setting
Display Illustration
Dryer selection solenoid 1
3. Mode
! Explanation
! Dryer selection solenoid 1
$ Lane Select Operating Time (after Paper Front End Detected) (input range: 0.00 to 9.90 seconds)
Specify the time from when the dryer select sensor detects the paper leading edge until the Dryer selection solenoid
1 turns on.
$ Returning Operating Time (after Paper Rear End Detected) (input range: 0.00 to 9.90 seconds)
Specify the time from when the dryer select sensor finishes the detection of the paper until the Dryer selection
solenoid 1 turns off.
Model Dryer selection solenoid 2 (default value) Returning Operating Time (after Paper
Rear End Detected) (default value)
LP7500 3701/3702 5.15 seconds 8.20 seconds
LP7600 3703 4.05 seconds 6.50 seconds
! Dryer selection solenoid 2
$ Lane Select Operating Time (after Paper Front End Detected) (input range: 0.00 to 9.90 seconds)
Specify the time from when the dryer select sensor detects the paper leading edge until the Dryer selection solenoid
2 turns on.
33590 1/2
33590
$ Returning Operating Time (after Paper Rear End Detected) (input range: 0.00 to 9.90 seconds)
Specify the time from when the dryer select sensor finishes the detection of the paper until the Dryer selection
solenoid 2 turns off.
Model Dryer selection solenoid 2 (default value) Returning Operating Time (after Paper
Rear End Detected) (default value)
LP7500 3701/3702 5.80 seconds 17.0 seconds
3. Mode
33590 2/2
35100
Maintenance
Maintenance
Colorimeter Unit Adjustment

Maintenance: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Colorimeter Unit Adjustment
3. Mode
M5372-00
! Explanation
To measure each step such as test print correctly by colorimeter, correct the paper stop position and the error of feeding rollers.
NOTE
! Paper Front End Advance Length Correction (Initial value: 0.0) (Input range: -5.0 to +5.0 mm)
Corrects the feed error of the colorimeter unit roller from the paper front end to the measurement position.
! Paper Feed Error Correction (Initial value: 0.0) (Input range: -5.0 to +5.0 mm)
Corrects the feed error of the colorimeter unit roller.
! Functions
! Test Paper Advance

When a test is executed, paper is advanced for 345 mm to the paper advance unit 1 and 2.
! Paper Test Advance

Adjusts the colorimeter unit.
! Cleaning operation
Cleans the colorimeter unit advance roller using the cleaning sheet (for the colorimeter).
! Paper Front End Advance Length Correction, Advance Length Correction
1. Execute Test Paper Advance via Functions.
35100 1/3
35100
Maintenance
2. Open the printer top cover, and then remove the test paper from the paper advance unit 1 and 2.
Paper
3. Mode
G068474
3. Draw the first line on the paper at 5 mm away from the test paper edge, then the second line at 201 mm
away from the first position.
5mm
First line Second line

G085301
4. Insert test paper with the first line into the colorimeter.
Adjust the paper guide to the paper width, and insert the test print straight until it reaches roller 1 of the colorimeter.
2 Paper guide
Test paper
Roller 1
G085302
35100 2/3
35100
Maintenance
5. Execute Paper Test Advance via Functions.

6. When Prepare a sheet of paper (length: 345 mm or more) and draw a line on it 5 mm away from
the leading end. Then, draw a second line at 240 mm away from the first line. is shown, click OK.
The test paper is advanced and stops at the first line.
7. Press the Forward or Backward so that the first line aligns with the guide of the colorimeter.
Colorimeter guide
Colorimeter guide
3. Mode
First line
First line
G085303
8. Press the OK key to advance the test paper to the second line.
9. Press the Forward or Backward so that the second line aligns with the guide of the colorimeter.
10. Press the OK key to remove the test paper.
! Colorimeter cleaning
1. Execute Cleaning operation of Functions.

2. Insert the cleaning sheet (for the colorimeter) into the colorimeter.
3. Insert cleaning sheet into the colorimeter.
4. Press the OK key.
The cleaning sheet is fed to the colorimeter.
5. The cleaning sheet is ejected.
35100 3/3
35210
Maintenance
Input Check (Printer)

Maintenance → Extension → Maintenance → Input Check → Printer
! Input Check
Item Reference
Paper Supply Unit ☞ Paper Supply 1 ☞ Paper Supply 2
☞ Magazine Code B ☞ Magazine Code C
☞ Magazine Unit A ☞ Magazine Unit A2-1
☞ Magazine Unit A2-2
Exposure Advance Unit ☞ Exposure Advance Unit
Exposure Engine Section ☞ Exposure Engine Section
3. Mode
Paper Advance Section ☞ Paper Advance Section 1 ☞ Paper Advance Section 2
Others ☞ Operation of the interlock switches
! Explanation
A buzzer will sound if the sensor, limit switch or any other device that is currently selected detects DARK or ON.
IMPORTANT
• The momentary operation cannot be displayed on the input check display because there is a time lag of approx. 0.5
seconds.
! Paper Supply 1
No. Display Status
1 DARK/LIGHT Paper End Sensor B DARK Paper is detected.
2 DARK/LIGHT Paper End Sensor C DARK Paper is detected.
3 DARK/LIGHT Paper Loading Sensor DARK Paper is detected.
4 DARK/LIGHT Cut Home Sensor DARK Home position: When the cutter is opened.
5 DARK/LIGHT Cut End Sensor DARK When the cutter is closed.
6 DARK/LIGHT Paper Hold Sensor DARK When the pressure is applied on the paper.
7 DARK/LIGHT Zigzagging Correction Sensor (Left) DARK When the left arm is detected.
8 DARK/LIGHT Zigzagging Correction Sensor (Right) DARK When the right arm is detected.
9 DARK/LIGHT Paper Supply Pressure Change Sensor DARK When the pressure is applied on the paper.
10 ON/OFF Interlock Switch (Printer Top Cover) See ☞ Operation of the interlock switches.
11 ON/OFF Interlock Switch (Printer Doors 1, 4)
12 ON/OFF Interlock Switch (Printer Door 2)
13 ON/OFF Printer Door 3 Sensor
! Paper Supply 2
No. Display Status
1 ON/OFF DIP Switch 1-1 OFF Displays the dip switch status of the printer control
2 ON/OFF DIP Switch 1-2 OFF PCB. ☞ 66000
Turn off all.
3 ON/OFF DIP Switch 1-3 OFF
! Magazine Code B
No. Display Status
1 DARK/LIGHT Paper Magazine Code Sensor B1 (Right) DARK When the pin is detected.
35210 1/5
35210
Maintenance
No. Display Status

2 DARK/LIGHT Paper Magazine Code Sensor B2 DARK When the pin is detected.
7 DARK/LIGHT Paper Magazine Code Sensor B7 (Left) DARK When the pin is detected.
8 ### Attached Paper Magazine B Displays the attached paper magazine.
! Magazine Code C
No. Display Status
1 DARK/LIGHT Paper Magazine Code Sensor C1 (Lower) DARK When the pin is detected.
3. Mode
2 DARK/LIGHT Paper Magazine Code Sensor C2 DARK When the pin is detected.
7 DARK/LIGHT Paper Magazine Code Sensor C7 (Upper) DARK When the pin is detected.
8 ### Attached Paper Magazine C Displays the attached paper magazine.
! Magazine Unit A
No. Display Status
1 DARK/LIGHT Paper Magazine Code Sensor A1 (Upper) DARK When the pin is detected.
2 DARK/LIGHT Paper Magazine Code Sensor A2 DARK When the pin is detected.
7 DARK/LIGHT Paper Magazine Code Sensor A7 (Lower) DARK When the pin is detected.
8 ### Attached Paper Magazine A Displays the attached paper magazine.
9 DARK/LIGHT Paper End Sensor A DARK Paper is detected.
! Magazine Unit A2-1

No. Display Status
1 DARK/LIGHT Paper Magazine Code Sensor A21 (Upper) DARK When the pin is detected.
7 DARK/LIGHT Paper Magazine Code Sensor A27 (Lower) DARK When the pin is detected.
8 ### Attached Paper Magazine A2 Displays the attached paper magazine.
35210 2/5
35210
Maintenance
! Magazine Unit A2-2

No. Display Status
1 DARK/LIGHT Paper End Sensor A2 DARK Paper is detected.
2 DARK/LIGHT Pressure Change Sensor A2 DARK Paper is detected.
3 DARK/LIGHT Width Change Sensor A2 DARK Paper is detected.
! Exposure Advance Unit

No. Display Status
3. Mode
1 DARK/LIGHT Exposure Advance Pressure Change Sensor 1 DARK When the pressure is applied on the paper.
2 DARK/LIGHT Exposure Start Sensor DARK Paper is detected.
5 ##.#C Inner Temperature Displays the inner temperature of printer.
6 ON/OFF Interlock Switch (Printer Door 1) See ☞ Operation of the interlock switches.
7 ON/OFF Interlock Switch (Printer Doors 1, 4)*1
Turn off all.
*1. Printer door 4 is shown only when the Quad Magazine Unit has been registered to Option Registration.
! Exposure Engine Section

No. Display Status
1 ON/OFF Interlock Switch (Printer Door 1, 2) ON When the cover is closed.
2 Synchronous/ Polygon Mirror Synchronous Synchr Normal
Asynchronous onous When the polygon mirror rotates properly
Asynch Problem
ronous The polygon mirror does not normally rotate.
When entering the input check, the polygon mirror is ON.
The polygon mirror driver outputs the signal which indicates the stability of the polygon mirror rotation.
3 Synchronous/ Laser Synchronous Sensor Synchr When the polygon mirror is synchronous and
Asynchronous onous either of R/G/B laser or all lasers is/are emitting
*1
Asynch When the polygon mirror is asynchronous
ronous When the polygon mirror is synchronous and
either of R/G/B laser or all lasers is/are not
emitting
When entering the input check, the polygon mirror and R/G/B lasers are ON.
When either of R/G/B laser is not emitting, it depends on the timing of measurement and the laser light intensity whether
synchronous or asynchronous appears.
When checking for any problems in the laser output, check with the output check. ☞ 35310
35210 3/5
35210
Maintenance
No. Display Status

4 OK/No Good G Laser Light Source Status OK The laser and G laser driver are normal.
No The laser unit is deteriorated.
Good The G laser driver is not connected correctly, or is
damaged.
The laser light intensity depends on the electric current applied to the laser diode. When the laser diode is being deteriorated, add
the electric current to acquire the specified amount of output. No Good is displayed when the current value exceeds the
limitation.
5 ##.#C R Laser Thermosensor Displays the R laser temperature.
6 ##.#C Laser Unit Thermosensor Displays the temperature of the laser unit.
7 ##### Polygon Mirror Frequency 2043±7 When the polygon mirror rotates properly
- The polygon mirror does not normally rotate.
8 ON/OFF G Laser Judgment Signal 1 OFF The combination of ON/OFF identifies the laser
unit type.
3. Mode
9 ON/OFF G Laser Judgment Signal 2 OFF
For details, see ☞ Exposure Engine Section
(Details).
*1. Even though the laser unit is in normal condition, it may take five minutes or more for the Laser Synchronous Sensor to turn from
Asynchronous to Synchronous.
! Paper Advance Section 1

No. Display Status
1 DARK/LIGHT Paper Sensor 1 DARK Paper is detected.
2 DARK/LIGHT Lane Select Sensor (Left) DARK When the arm is detected.
3 DARK/LIGHT Lane Select Sensor (Right) DARK When the arm is detected.
4 DARK/LIGHT Arm Sensor (Left) DARK When the arm is detected.
5 DARK/LIGHT Arm Sensor (Right) DARK When the arm is detected.
6 DARK/LIGHT Paper Sensor 2 (Left) DARK Paper is detected.
7 DARK/LIGHT Paper Sensor 2 (Center) DARK Paper is detected.
8 DARK/LIGHT Paper Sensor 2 (Right) DARK Paper is detected.
*1
*1. Printer door 4 is shown only when the Quad Magazine Unit has been registered to Option Registration.

No. Display Status
Turn off all.
6 DARK/LIGHT Pressure Guide Sensor DARK When the paper pressure is released.
7 DARK/LIGHT Paper Advance Pressure Change Sensor (Left) DARK When the pressure is applied on the paper.
8 DARK/LIGHT Paper Advance Pressure Change Sensor (Right) DARK When the pressure is applied on the paper.
Turn off all.
35210 4/5
35210
Maintenance
! Operation of the interlock switches

If the quad magazine unit is installed
When each interlock switch Status of Input Check when each interlock switch is off
is off Interlock Switch Interlock Switch Interlock Switch Printer Door 3 Sensor
(Printer Top Cover) (Printer Doors 1, 4) (Printer Door 2)
Interlock Switch (Printer Top OFF OFF OFF ON
Cover)
Interlock Switch (Printer Door ON OFF OFF ON
1)
Interlock Switch (Printer Door ON ON OFF ON
2)
Printer Door 3 Sensor ON ON ON OFF
Interlock switch (printer door ON OFF OFF ON
3. Mode
4)
If the quad magazine unit is not installed

When each interlock switch Status of Input Check when each interlock switch is off
is off Interlock Switch Interlock Switch Interlock Switch Printer Door 3
(Printer Top Cover) (Printer Door 1) (Printer Door 2) Sensor*1
Interlock Switch (Printer Top OFF OFF OFF ON
Cover)
Interlock Switch (Printer Door ON OFF OFF ON
1)
Interlock Switch (Printer Door ON ON OFF ON
2)
Printer Door 3 Sensor*1 ON ON ON OFF
*1. Printer Door 3 Sensor is shown only when the triple magazine unit is installed.
35210 5/5
35220
Maintenance
Input Check (Processor) [F]

Maintenance → Extension → Maintenance → Input Check → Processor
For the specifications other than [F] specification, this section only gives description that differs from that for [F] specification. See below
for the description for each specification.
Reference
☞ Input Check (Processor) [N] ☞ Input Check (Processor) [SM] ☞ Input Check (Processor) [J]
! Input Check
3. Mode
Item Specification Reference
Processor Section F ☞ 1 (for each ☞ 2 (for each ☞ 3 (for each ☞ 3 (for each
specification) specification) specification) specification)
N ☞ 1 [N] ☞ 2 [N]
SM ☞ 1 [SM] ☞ 2 [SM] ☞ 3 [SM] ☞ 4 [SM]
J ☞ 1 [J] ☞ 2 [J] ☞ Tablet Replenishment Section [J]
Dryer Section Common ☞ Dryer Section (common to all specifications)
Order Classification ☞ Order Classification Section (common to all specifications)
Section
Colorimeter Unit ☞ Colorimeter Unit (common to all specifications)
! 1 (for each specification)

No. Display Status
1 ON/OFF Processing Solution Level OFF ☞ No. 05508 occurs.
2 ON/OFF Processing Solution Safety Thermostat ON Normal
2 ON/OFF Interlock Switch (Processor Top Cover) ON When the cover is closed.
3 ON/OFF P1 Processable Solution Level OFF ☞ No. 05916[F]occurs.*1
4 ON/OFF P2 Processable Solution Level ☞ No. 05917[F]occurs.*1
5 ON/OFF PS1 Processable Solution Level ☞ No. 05918[F]occurs.*1
9 ON/OFF P1 Effluent Float Switch ON When the effluent is full.
10 ON/OFF P2 + PS Effluent Float Switch ON
11 CLOSE/OPEN Starter Jumper Setting CLOSE When the jumper of the processor relay PCB is
connected
12 ON/OFF Rack Stopper Sensor ON When the rack stopper is set.
13 ON/OFF Control strip holder detection switch*2 ON When the control strip holder is detected
*1. If the processable level sensors for each processing solution are OFF, the system stops printing to prevent the time that paper is soaked from
becoming short and printing quality from degrading.
*2. It may take one minute for communicating between the processor control PCB and control strip unit.

No. Display Status
1 ON/OFF Control strip processing complete.*3 • ON: Advancing the control strip is completed.
• OFF: Advancing the control strip is not completed.
3 ### Pump Rotation Detector When an error occurs.*1
4 50/60 Power Supply Frequency (Hz) Displays the frequency.
35220 1/9
35220
Maintenance
No. Display Status

5 #.## P1 Flow Amount Displays the P1 circulation amount.*2
6 ### Drive Motor Revolution Count
*1. Displays OK if all circulation pumps are normally rotating.
When an error occurs, displays the circulation pump at which an error is occurring. (P1, P2, PS1, PS2, PS3, PS4)
If the errors occur at two or more pumps simultaneously, the error is shown in the order from P1.
*2. Displays only when the digital flowmeter is registered as options.

No. Display Status
1 ON/OFF P1R (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level OFF When the solution level is too low.
Sensor
3. Mode
2 ON/OFF P1R (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level OFF
Sensor
3 ON/OFF P2RA (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level OFF
Sensor
4 ON/OFF P2RA (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level OFF
Sensor
5 ON/OFF P2RB (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level OFF
Sensor
6 ON/OFF P2RB (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level OFF
Sensor
7 ON/OFF PSR (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level OFF
Sensor
1 ON/OFF PSR (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level OFF
Sensor
2 ON/OFF Interlock Switch (Replenisher Section Door) ON When the cover is closed.
3 DARK/LIGHT Replenisher Cartridge Set Sensor DARK When the replenish cartridge is set
4 DARK/LIGHT Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Upper) DARK When the replenish cartridge is in the upper
position
5 DARK/LIGHT Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Lower) DARK When the replenish cartridge is in the lower
position
6 #.# Environment Temperature Displays the temperature and humidity in the place where
7 #.# Environment Humidity the temperature and humidity sensor is attached.
See ☞ 63280 for the installation position of the
temperature and humid sensor.
! Dryer Section (common to all specifications)

No. Display Status
1 ON/OFF Dryer Safety Thermostat OFF When the dryer safety thermostat is turned off.
2 ON/OFF Interlock Switch (Dryer Cover) ON When the cover is closed.
3 DARK/LIGHT Print Sensor (Left) DARK Paper is detected.
4 DARK/LIGHT Print Sensor (Center) DARK Paper is detected.
5 DARK/LIGHT Print Sensor (Right) DARK Paper is detected.
6 DARK/LIGHT Dryer Lane Select Sensor DARK Paper is detected.
! Order Classification Section (common to all specifications)

No. Display Status
1 DARK/LIGHT Sorter Home Sensor DARK Home position: Print receiving position
2 DARK/LIGHT Print Full Sensor DARK Paper is detected.
3 ON/OFF Manual Sorter Switch ON When the switch is pressed.
4 DARK/LIGHT Conveyor Unit Sensor DARK When the conveyor unit is set.
35220 2/9
35220
Maintenance
No. Display Status

*1
5 DARK/LIGHT Paper Guide Open Sensor DARK Home position (upper)
6 DARK/LIGHT Paper Guide Close Sensor*1 DARK When the paper guide closes (when the paper
width below 152 mm is processed)
*1. Shown only if the print sorter unit (10-inch type) is supported.
! Colorimeter Unit (common to all specifications)

No. Display Status
1 DARK/LIGHT Paper Sensor 1 DARK Paper is detected.
2 DARK/LIGHT Paper Sensor 2 DARK
2 ON/OFF Colorimeter detection ON When Colorimeter Unit is detected
3. Mode
35220 3/9
35220
Maintenance
Input Check (Processor) [N]

Reference
☞ Input Check (Processor) [SM] ☞ Input Check (Processor) [J] ☞ Input Check (Processor) [F]
! Explanation
A buzzer will sound if the sensor, limit switch or any other device that is currently selected detects DARK or ON.
IMPORTANT
3. Mode
• The momentary operation cannot be shown on the Input Check display because there is a time lag of approx. 0.5
seconds.
! 1 [N]
No. Display Status
1 ON/OFF Processing Solution Level OFF When the solution level is too low.
2 ON/OFF CD Replenishment Solution Level Sensor OFF When the replenishment solution is run out.
3 ON/OFF BF Replenishment Solution Level Sensor OFF When the replenishment solution is run out.
4 ON/OFF STB Replenishment Solution Level Sensor OFF When the replenishment solution is run out.
5 ON/OFF CD Refilling Water Level OFF When the solution level is too low.
6 ON/OFF BF Refilling Water Level OFF When the solution level is too low.
7 ON/OFF STB 1 Refilling Water Level OFF When the solution level is too low.
11 ON/OFF Refilling Water Tank Level Sensor OFF When the solution level is too low.
12 ON/OFF Processing Solution Safety Thermostat ON When the solution safety thermostat operates
normally
! 2 [N]
No. Display Status
1 ON/OFF CD Effluent Float Switch ON When the effluent is full.
2 ON/OFF BF Effluent Float Switch ON When the effluent is full.
3 ON/OFF STB Effluent Float Switch ON When the effluent is full.
4 CLOSE/OPEN Starter Jumper Setting CLOSE When the jumper of power PCB 2 is connected.
*3
5 ON/OFF Control strip holder detection switch ON When the control strip holder is detected
9 #.## CD Flow Amount Displays the CD circulation amount.*2

When an error occurs, displays the circulation pump at which an error is occurring. (CD, BF, STB1, STB2, STB3, STB4)
If the errors occur at two or more pumps simultaneously, the error is displayed in the order from CD.
35220 4/9
35220
Maintenance
3. Mode
35220 5/9
35220
Maintenance
Input Check (Processor) [SM]

Reference
☞ Input Check (Processor) [N] ☞ Input Check (Processor) [J] ☞ Input Check (Processor) [F]
! 1 [SM]
No. Display Status
3. Mode
2 ON/OFF CD Refilling Water Level OFF When the solution level is too low.
3 ON/OFF BF Refilling Water Level OFF When the solution level is too low.
! 2 [SM]
No. Display Status
*3
6 ON/OFF Control strip processing complete. • ON: Advancing the control strip is completed.

! 3 [SM]
No. Display Status
1 ON/OFF CD-A Replenisher Pump Sensor ON Home position
2 ON/OFF CD-B Replenisher Pump Sensor ON Home position
3 ON/OFF CD-C Replenisher Pump Sensor ON Home position
4 ON/OFF CD-W Water Supply Pump Sensor ON Home position
5 ON/OFF BF-A Replenisher Pump Sensor ON Home position
6 ON/OFF BF-B Replenisher Pump Sensor ON Home position
7 ON/OFF STB Replenisher Pump Sensor ON Home position
35220 6/9
35220
Maintenance
No. Display Status

8 DARK/LIGHT CD-A Replenishment Solution Sensor LIGHT When the replenishment solution level is
normal.
9 DARK/LIGHT CD-B Replenishment Solution Sensor LIGHT When the replenishment solution level is
normal.
10 DARK/LIGHT CD-C Replenishment Solution Sensor LIGHT When the replenishment solution level is
normal.
11 DARK/LIGHT BF-A Replenishment Solution Sensor LIGHT When the replenishment solution level is
normal.
12 DARK/LIGHT BF-B Replenishment Solution Sensor LIGHT When the replenishment solution level is
normal.
13 DARK/LIGHT STB Replenishment Solution Sensor LIGHT When the replenishment solution level is
normal.
3. Mode
! 4 [SM]
No. Display Status
1 ON/OFF Replenishment Package Sensor P-1 ON When the replenishment package is set.
2 ON/OFF Replenishment Package Sensor P-2 ON When the replenishment package is set.
3 ON/OFF Water Supply Tank Level Sensor OFF When the solution level is too low.
35220 7/9
35220
Maintenance
Input Check (Processor) [J]

Reference
☞ Input Check (Processor) [N] ☞ Input Check (Processor) [SM] ☞ Input Check (Processor) [F]
! 1 [J]
No. Display Status
3. Mode
2 ON/OFF SW Tank Level Sensor OFF When the solution level is too low.
3 ON/OFF SW/DW Tank Level Sensor OFF When the solution level is too low.
! 2 [J]
No. Display Status

! Tablet Replenishment Section [J]

No. Display Status
1 DARK/LIGHT CD Tablet Sensor 1 DARK When the tablet is detected
2 DARK/LIGHT CD Tablet Sensor 2 DARK When the tablet is detected
3 DARK/LIGHT BF Tablet Sensor 1 DARK When the tablet is detected
4 DARK/LIGHT BF Tablet Sensor 2 DARK When the tablet is detected
5 DARK/LIGHT STB Tablet Sensor 1 DARK When the tablet is detected
6 DARK/LIGHT STB Tablet Sensor 2 DARK When the tablet is detected
7 DARK/LIGHT CD Cartridge Sensor LIGHT When the cartridge is detected
8 DARK/LIGHT BF Cartridge Sensor LIGHT When the cartridge is detected
9 DARK/LIGHT STB Cartridge Sensor LIGHT When the cartridge is detected
10 DARK/LIGHT Elevator Upper Sensor DARK When the elevator is detected
35220 8/9
35220
Maintenance
No. Display Status

11 DARK/LIGHT Elevator Middle Sensor DARK When the elevator is detected
12 DARK/LIGHT Elevator Lower Sensor DARK When the elevator is detected
13 ON/OFF Tablet Replenishment Unit Interlock Switch ON When the tablet unit is attached
3. Mode
35220 9/9
35310
Maintenance
Output Check (Printer)

Maintenance → Extension → Maintenance → Output Check → Printer
! Output Check
Item Reference
Paper Supply Unit ☞ Paper Supply Unit 1 ☞ Paper Supply Unit 2
☞ Magazine Unit (Magazine A) ☞ Magazine Unit (Magazine A2)
Exposure Advance Unit ☞ Exposure Advance Unit
Exposure Engine Section ☞ Exposure Engine Section 1 ☞ Exposure Engine Section 2
☞ Exposure Engine Section (Details)
Paper Advance Section ☞ Paper Advance Section 1 ☞ Paper Advance Section 2
3. Mode
! Explanation
Check the operation of the motor, buzzer or LED that is currently selected.
! Paper Supply Unit 1

No. Display Status
1 Paper Advance Motor 1 Press Execute to operate for the set time.
2 Paper Supply Motor B/C
3 Cut Motor Press Execute to operate once.
4 Paper Magazine Motor B Press Execute to operate for the set time.
5 Paper Magazine Motor C
6 Paper Magazine Lamp B/C Press Execute to turn on, and Cancel to turn off.
7 Paper Supply Pressure Change Motor Clicking Execute repeats compressing and releasing operations.
! Paper Supply Unit 2

No. Display Status
1 Ribbon Advance Motor Press Execute to start, and Cancel to stop.
2 Dot Head (1st Line) Press Execute to operate once.
3 Dot Head (2nd Line)
4 Paper Hold Motor Clicking Execute repeats compressing and releasing operations.
5 Paper Supply Arm Motor (Left / Right) Clicking Execute moves upward and downward.
6 Buzzer Press Execute to sound buzzer.
Press Cancel to turn off the buzzer.
! Magazine Unit (Magazine A)

No. Display Status
1 Paper Magazine Motor A Press Execute to operate for the set time.
2 Paper Supply Motor A
3 Paper Magazine Lamp A Press Execute to turn on, and Cancel to turn off.
! Magazine Unit (Magazine A2)

No. Display Status
1 Paper Magazine Motor A2 Press Execute to operate for the set time.
2 Paper Supply Motor A2
3 Pressure Release Motor A2 Press Execute to operate once.
35310 1/3
35310
Maintenance
No. Display Status

4 Width Change Motor A2 Press Execute to operate once.
5 Paper Magazine Lamp A Press Execute to turn on, and Cancel to turn off.
! Exposure Advance Unit

No. Display Status
1 Exposure Advance Motor 1 Press Execute to operate for the set time.
2 Exposure Advance Pressure Change Motor 1 Clicking Execute repeats compressing and releasing operations.
3 Exposure Advance Motor 2 Press Execute to operate for the set time.
4 Exposure Advance Pressure Change Motor 2 Clicking Execute repeats compressing and releasing operations.
5 Exposure Advance Pressure Change Motor 3
3. Mode
! Exposure Engine Section 1
No. Display Status
1 Polygon Mirror OFF Press Execute to stop the polygon mirror.
Press Cancel to start the polygon mirror.
2 Laser Unit Cooling Fan 1,2 ON Press Execute to start, and Cancel to stop.
3 Laser Unit Heater ON Press Execute to turn on the laser unit heater.
Press Cancel to turn off the laser unit heater.
! Exposure Engine Section 2

No. Display Status
1 R Laser Output ON Press Execute to turn on the R laser output.
Press Cancel to turn off the R laser output.
2 G Laser Output ON*1 Press Execute to turn on the G laser output.
Press Cancel to turn off the G laser output.
3 B Laser Output ON Press Execute to turn on the B laser output.
Press Cancel to turn off the B laser output.
*1. Even though the laser unit is in normal condition, it may take five minutes or more for the G Laser Output ON to turn from Asynchronous to
Synchronous after performing G Laser Output ON.
! Exposure Engine Section (Details)

Display Status
Synchronous/Asyn Polygon Mirror Synchronous Synchro When the polygon mirror rotates properly and is stable
chronous nous • When entering the output check
• When turning ON the polygon mirror
Asynchr The polygon mirror does not normally rotate.
onous • When turning OFF the polygon mirror
Synchronous/Asyn Laser Synchronous Sensor Synchro When either of R/G/B laser is emitting
chronous nous • When the polygon mirror is synchronous and either
of R/G/B laser output is turned ON
Asynchr When all the R/G/B lasers are not emitting
onous • When entering the output check
• When the polygon mirror is asynchronous
• When the R/G/B laser output are all OFF
This part checks the output condition of each R/G/B laser.
Since the Synchronous Check cannot be carried out in the same condition as the usual printing operation even if all
the R/G/B lasers light, a problem may occur in the usual operation with no trouble at the Output Check.
35310 2/3
35310
Maintenance
Display Status
OK/No Good G Laser Light Source Status OK The laser and G laser driver are normal.
No The laser unit is deteriorated.
Good The G laser driver is not connected correctly, or is
damaged.
##.#C Laser Unit Thermosensor Displays the temperature of the laser unit.
For the controlled temperature of the laser unit, see ☞ No. 06177.
##.#C R Laser Thermosensor Displays the R laser temperature.
For the controlled temperature of R laser, see ☞ No. 06107.
##.#C B laser temperature sensor The temperature of the B laser is shown.
For the controlled temperature of B laser, see ☞ No. 06220.
##### Polygon Mirror Frequency 2043±7 When Laser Synchronous Sensor of Output Check is
Synchronous
- When Laser Synchronous Sensor of Output Check is
3. Mode
Synchronous
ON/OFF G Laser Judgment Signal 1 OFF The combination of ON/OFF identifies the laser unit
ON/OFF G Laser Judgment Signal 2 OFF type.
See the list below for details.
Laser unit (Type # # #) G laser differentiation signal

1 2
HhB type OFF OFF
Type IiB ON OFF

No. Display Status
1 Paper Advance Arm Motor (Left) Clicking Execute repeats moving forward and backward.
2 Paper Advance Arm Motor (Right)
3 Lane Select Motor (Left) Clicking Execute repeats moving to the left and right.
4 Lane Select Motor (Right)
5 Paper Advance Motor 3 Press Execute to operate for specified time.

No. Display Status
1 Paper Advance Motor 2 Press Execute to operate for specified time.
2 Pressure Guide Motor Press Execute to repeat pressure/release.
3 Paper Advance Pressure Change Motor (Left) Press Execute to repeat pressure/release.
4 Paper Advance Pressure Change Motor (Right)
35310 3/3
35320
Maintenance
Output Check (Processor) [F]

Reference
☞ Output Check (Processor) [N] ☞ Output Check (Processor) [SM] ☞ Output Check (Processor) [J]
! Output Check
Item Specification Reference
Processor Section F ☞ 1 (for each ☞ 2 (for each ☞ 3 (for each specification)*6
*2
specification) specification)
3. Mode
N ☞ 1 [N] ☞ 2 [N]
SM ☞ 1 [SM] ☞ 2 [SM] ☞ 3 [SM]
J ☞ Processor Section ☞ Processor Section 2[J] ☞ Tablet ☞ Tablet
1[J] Replenishment Replenishment
Section 1[J] Section 2[J]
Dryer Section Common ☞ Dryer Section (common to all specifications)
Order ☞ Order Classification Section (common to all specifications)
Classification
Section
Colorimeter Unit ☞ Colorimeter Unit (common to all specifications)

No. Display Status
1 Drive Motor + Drive Cooling Fan Press Execute to start, and Cancel to stop.
2 P1 Heater
3 P2 Heater
4 PS Heater
5 P1 Cooling Water Solenoid Valve
6 P2 Cooling Water Solenoid Valve
7 PS Cooling Water Solenoid Valve
8 Tank Cooling Fan
9 Exhaust Fan
10 Processor Condition Lamp (Green) Press Execute to turn on, and Cancel to turn off.
11 Processor Condition Lamp (Red)
12 Signal Lamp Press Execute to turn on, and Cancel to turn off.
13 Control Strip Advance Motor • Execute: Control Strip Advance Motor starts.
• Cancel: Control Strip Advance Motor does not stop.
! 2 (for each specification)*2

No. Display Status
1 Replenisher Cartridge Open Motor See ☞ Replenisher Cartridge Open Motor operation.
2 P1R Replenisher Pump Press Execute moves each replenishment pump one stroke
3 P2RA Replenisher Pump (maximum). *1
4 P2RB Replenisher Pump IMPORTANT
5 PSR Replenisher Pump • If each replenishment pump is operated, the initial value
is used for the next opening.
*1. If one of the waste solution float switches is ON, the replenishment pump does not work.
*2. SP1: The menus marked with (SP1) in the table below are only shown when the service personnel password (2260) has been entered.
35320 1/7
35320
Maintenance
Replenisher Cartridge Open Motor operation

Count Replenisher Cartridge Open Motor operation
First Press Execute to move the motor from the upper position to the lower position. *1
Second Press Execute to move the motor from the lower position to the upper position. *2
*1. Replenisher Cartridge Open Motor rotates to right.

*2. Replenisher Cartridge Open Motor rotates to left.
! 3 (for each specification)*6

No. Display Status
1 P1R Cartridge Cleaning Valve + Replenisher Press Execute to operate each cartridge flushing valve and auto
Cartridge Cleaning Pump cleaning pump. *1*2*5
2 P2RA Cartridge Cleaning Valve + Replenisher • Follow the steps 1-4 below.
Cartridge Cleaning Pump
3. Mode
• 1. Turn ON the auto cleaning pump.
3 P2RB Cartridge Cleaning Valve + Replenisher • 2. Wait for water pressure to be adjusted for one second.
Cartridge Cleaning Pump
• 3. Open each cartridge flushing valve (maximum 10 seconds).
• 4. Close each cartridge cleaning valve. → Turn OFF the
cleaning pump.
IMPORTANT
• The output amount of the replenisher cartridge
cleaning pump is about 194 ml per 10 seconds.
4 P1R agitation solenoid valve + Replenisher Cartridge Press Execute to operate P1R agitation solenoid valve +
Cleaning Pump Replenisher Cartridge Cleaning Pump. *1*3
• Follow the steps 1-4 below.
• 1. Turn ON the auto cleaning pump.
• 2. Wait for water pressure to be adjusted for one second.
• 3. Open P1R agitation solenoid valve (maximum three
seconds).
• 4. Close P1R agitation solenoid valve. → Turn OFF the
cleaning pump.
IMPORTANT
• If P1R agitation solenoid valve + Replenisher Cartridge
Cleaning Pump is operated, the initial value is used for
the next opening.
• The output amount of P1R agitation solenoid valve +
Replenisher Cartridge Cleaning Pump is about 227 ml
per 3 seconds.
5 P1 Auto Cleaning Valve + Replenisher Cartridge Press Execute to operate each automated flushing valve and auto
Cleaning Pump cleaning pump. *1*4
6 P2 Auto Cleaning Valve + Replenisher Cartridge • Follow the steps 1-4 below.
Cleaning Pump • 1. Turn ON the auto cleaning pump.
7 PS Auto Cleaning Valve + Replenisher Cartridge • 2. Wait for water pressure to be adjusted for one second.
Cleaning Pump
• 3. Open each automated flushing valve (maximum three
seconds).
• 4. Close each automated flushing valve. → Turn OFF the
cleaning pump.
*1. If one of the waste solution float switches is ON, each automated flushing valve does not work.
However, auto cleaning pump works regardless of the waste solution float switch. If the operation continues when either of waste solution float
switches is ON, the auto cleaning pump may be damaged.
*2. When Execute is clicked, the message Confirm whether to complete the air pulling out of the Cleaning Pump system piping. Operate the
Replenisher Cartridge Open Motor, prepare the cleaning water does not run into the replenishment tank from the nozzle to check. For
details, see the manual. Would you like to operate the Replenisher Cartridge Cleaning Pump? is shown.
*3. When pressing Execute, Confirm whether to complete the air pulling out of the Cleaning Pump system piping. Cleaning water will be run
into the replenishing tank. Please refrain from draining for a long time. For details, refer to the manual. Would you like to operate the
Replenisher Cartridge Cleaning Pump? is shown.
35320 2/7
35320
Maintenance
*4. When pressing Execute, Confirm whether to complete the air pulling out of the Cleaning Pump system piping. Cleaning water will be run
into the replenishing tank. Please refrain from draining for a long time. For details, refer to the manual. Would you like to operate the
Replenisher Cartridge Cleaning Pump? is shown.
*5. If the cleaning water gets into a tank, the amount of replenishment solution changes. Insert a hose into a cleaning nozzle and execute Output
Check without allowing any water to get in the tank.
When you insert a hose into the cleaning nozzle, we recommend you to operate Replenisher Cartridge Open Motor and move the replenishment
cartridge installation section to the lower position.
*6. SP1: The menus marked with (SP1) in the table below are only shown when the service personnel password (2260) has been entered.
! Dryer Section (common to all specifications)

No. Display Status
1 Dryer Fan Press Execute to start, and Cancel to stop.
2 Dryer Heater 1 Press Execute to start, and Cancel to stop.
3. Mode
5 Dryer selection solenoid 1 Press Execute to operate once.
6 Dryer selection solenoid 2 Press Execute to operate once.
! Order Classification Section (common to all specifications)

No. Display Status
1 Sorter Motor Press Execute to operate once.
2 Conveyor Motor
3 Manual Sorter Switch Lamp Press Execute to turn on, and Cancel to turn off.
4 Paper guide motor*1 Press Execute to operate once.
5 Order Identification LED (Orange) Press Execute to turn on Order Identification LED (Orange).
6 Order Identification LED (Cyan) Press Execute to turn on Order Identification LED (Cyan).
*1. Shown only if the print sorter unit (10-inch type) is supported.
! Colorimeter Unit (common to all specifications)

No. Display Status
1 Paper Advance Motor Press Execute to start, and Cancel to stop.
2 Calibration Plate Advance Motor
3 Pressure Change Solenoid
4 Colorimeter Cooling Fan
35320 3/7
35320
Maintenance
Output Check (Processor) [N]

For the specifications other than [N] specification, this section only gives description that differs from that for [N] specification. See below
Reference
☞ Output Check (Processor) [SM] ☞ Output Check (Processor) [J] ☞ Output Check (Processor) [F]
! Explanation
Check the operation of the motor, buzzer or LED that is currently selected.
! 1 [N]
3. Mode
No. Display Status
2 CD Heater
3 BF Heater
4 STB Heater
5 CD Cooling Water Solenoid Valve
6 BF Cooling Water Solenoid Valve
7 STB Cooling Water Solenoid Valve
8 CD Replenisher Pump
9 BF Replenisher Pump
10 STB Replenisher Pump
11 Tank Cooling Fan
12 Exhaust Fan
14 Processor Condition Lamp (Red)
15 Signal Lamp
! 2 [N]
No. Display Status
1 CD Replenisher Pump Press Execute to start, and Cancel to stop.
2 BF Replenisher Pump
3 STB Replenisher Pump
4 CD-W Refilling Water Pump
5 BF-W Refilling Water Pump
6 STB 1-W Refilling Water Pump
10 Cleaning Pump
35320 4/7
35320
Maintenance
Output Check (Processor) [SM]

Reference
☞ Output Check (Processor) [N] ☞ Output Check (Processor) [J] ☞ Output Check (Processor) [F]
! 1 [SM]
No. Display Status
3. Mode
2 CD Heater Press Execute to start, and Cancel to stop.
3 BF Heater Press Execute to start, and Cancel to stop.
4 STB Heater Press Execute to start, and Cancel to stop.
5 CD Cooling Water Solenoid Valve Press Execute to start, and Cancel to stop.
6 BF Cooling Water Solenoid Valve Press Execute to start, and Cancel to stop.
7 STB Cooling Water Solenoid Valve Press Execute to start, and Cancel to stop.
8 Tank Cooling Fan Press Execute to start, and Cancel to stop.
9 Exhaust Fan Press Execute to start, and Cancel to stop.
11 Processor Condition Lamp (Red) Press Execute to turn on, and Cancel to turn off.
12 Signal Lamp Press Execute to turn on, and Cancel to turn off.
! 2 [SM]
No. Display Status
1 CD-A Replenisher Pump Press Execute to operate once.
2 CD-B Replenisher Pump Press Execute to operate once.
3 CD-C Replenisher Pump Press Execute to operate once.
4 CD-W Water Supply Pump Press Execute to operate once.
5 BF-A Replenisher Pump Press Execute to operate once.
6 BF-B Replenisher Pump Press Execute to operate once.
7 BF-W Water Supply Pump Press Execute to start, and Cancel to stop.
! 3 [SM]
No. Display Status
1 STB Replenisher Pump Press Execute to operate once.
2 STB 1-W Refilling Water Pump Press Execute to start, and Cancel to stop.
5 STB 4-W Water Supply Pump
6 Cleaning Pump
7 Circulation Pump Stand-by Press Execute to start, and Cancel to stop.
35320 5/7
35320
Maintenance
Output Check (Processor) [J]

Reference
☞ Output Check (Processor) [N] ☞ Output Check (Processor) [SM] ☞ Output Check (Processor) [F]
! Processor Section 1[J]

No. Display Status
3. Mode
2 CD Heater Press Execute to start, and Cancel to stop.
3 BF Heater Press Execute to start, and Cancel to stop.
4 STB Heater Press Execute to start, and Cancel to stop.
5 CD Cooling Water Solenoid Valve Press Execute to start, and Cancel to stop.
6 BF Cooling Water Solenoid Valve Press Execute to start, and Cancel to stop.
7 STB Cooling Water Solenoid Valve Press Execute to start, and Cancel to stop.
8 Tank Cooling Fan Press Execute to start, and Cancel to stop.
9 Exhaust Fan Press Execute to start, and Cancel to stop.
10 Processor Condition Lamp (Green) Press Execute to turn ON, and Cancel to turn OFF.
11 Processor Condition Lamp (Red) Press Execute to turn ON, and Cancel to turn OFF.
12 Signal Lamp Press Execute to turn ON, and Cancel to turn OFF.
13 Control Strip Advance Motor • Execute:Control Strip Advance Motor starts.
• Cancel:Control Strip Advance Motor does not stop.
! Processor Section 2[J]

No. Display Status
1 CD Water Supply Pump Press Execute to start, and Cancel to stop.
2 S -> B Replenishment Pump Press Execute to start, and Cancel to stop.
3 STB Water Supply Pump Press Execute to start, and Cancel to stop.
4 Cleaning Pump Press Execute to start, and Cancel to stop.
! Tablet Replenishment Section 1[J]

No. Display Status
1 CD Operation Lamp Press Execute to start, and Cancel to stop.
2 BF Operation Lamp Press Execute to start, and Cancel to stop.
3 STB Operation Lamp Press Execute to start, and Cancel to stop.
4 Elevator Motor (Up) Press Execute to start, and Cancel to stop. Temporarily stops if
detected by the elevator middle sensor. When two seconds passes,
starts again. When detected by the elevator upper sensor, stops.
5 Elevator Motor (Down) Press Execute to start, and Cancel to stop. Stops when detected by
the elevator lower sensor.
6 STB Tablet Conveyor Motor Press Execute to operate once.
! Tablet Replenishment Section 2[J]

No. Display Status
1 CD Drum Motor (Forward) Press Execute to operate once.
2 CD Drum Motor (Reverse) Press Execute to operate once.
35320 6/7
35320
Maintenance
No. Display Status

3 BF Drum Motor (Forward) Press Execute to operate once.
4 BF Drum Motor (Reverse) Press Execute to operate once.
5 STB Drum Motor (Forward) Press Execute to operate once.
6 STB Drum Motor (Reverse) Press Execute to operate once.
3. Mode
35320 7/7
35400
Maintenance
Reading and Writing Data

Maintenance: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Reading and Writing Data
Reading Data (Media -> CPU) Writing Data (CPU -> Media)
3. Mode
! Explanation
! Path Setting
When reading and writing data, carry out the path setting to save to the media.
! Read all data., Write all data. (ALL)

The data to backup is as follows.
! Read INITIAL DATA 2./Write INITIAL DATA 2. (DATA2)

! Read INITIAL DATA 3./Write INITIAL DATA 3. (DATA3)

! Read individual data./Write individual data.

The backup data can be read or written separately.
Backup data File name Remarks A D D

Item L A A
L T T
A A
2 3
Main PrinterIF.Izh Printer I/F Main PCB data # # -
• Machine Specification information, Option Setting information,
Setup Data
Printer Printer.lzh Printer control PCB data # # -
• Mechanical Adjustment, Function and Option Registration (Printer-
related), Operator Selections (Printer-related), Setup Data
Processor Proc.lzh Processor control PCB data # - #
• Processor Adjustment data, Function and Option Registration
(Processor-related), Operator Selections (Processor-related), Timer
Setting data
Colorimeter unit Color.lzh Colorimeter unit adjustment data # - #
35400 1/2
35400
Maintenance
Backup data File name Remarks A D D

Item L A A
L T T
A A
2 3
LASER Laser.lzh Laser control PCB data # # -
Correction Data for Brightness LsrSHD_X.Izh Correction data for brightness of the edge of image field of the laser # # -
of the Edge of Image Field engine
• ALL: Data that is saved or loaded in Writing All Data and Reading All Data
• DATA2: Service data that is saved or loaded in INITIAL DATA2
• DATA3: Service data that is saved or loaded in INITIAL DATA3
! Data that will not be replaced by backup data

Basically, all data are replaced by backup data.
3. Mode
Data below are not replaced.
Data that are not replaced

Data of total counter, daily totals counter, daily sales totals, remaining amount of paper, order number, archive number, total counter 2,
laser operation record*1, exposure adjustment, and serial number of colorimeter calibration plate
Machine Type Registration, Language, IP Address, Subnet mask, Default gateway, Serial Number (Printer/Processor), Date of
shipment, and Communication Speed Setting of Machine Specification
*1. Laser operation record data are maintained in the laser unit body. Performing Write/Reading all data will not write/read data of laser operation
record.
! Data that cannot be saved

The following data cannot be saved in Reading and Writing Data. When replacing the HDD or PC main unit, be sure to save the
following data beforehand.
Data name
Output Device Name in Output Device Registration
! Restrictions of usable storage media

" Use the storage media of removable disks.
" CD-R/RW
Not available.
35400 2/2
35500
Maintenance
System Version Check

Maintenance: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → System Version Check
Accessories Profile Data
3. Mode
! Explanation
! Accessories
No. Display Explanation
1 2 3 4
5
*2
1 CPU Shows each control PCB (CPU) separately.
2 Version (CPU) The system program version saved in each control PCB is shown.
3 Version (PC)*1 Shows the system program version saved in HDD.
4 BOOT*1 The CPU version of each control PCB is shown.
5 F The connecting conditions of the capacity booster is shown.
• #.# # # F: When the Capacity booster PCB is installed
• #.# # # FG: When the Capacity booster PCB is installed
• #.# # # H: When the Capacity booster PCB is installed
• #.# # # I: When the Capacity booster PCB is installed
• #.# # # : When the Capacity booster PCB is not installed
*1. (SP1) is shown when entering the service personnel password (2260).
*2. Main shows the version of the maintenance application on PC.
35500 1/2
35500
Maintenance
$ Version (LASER)
You can check the type of the laser unit by checking the version name of LASER.
1 2 3 4
LASER 1.009 X1 HhB1 N OK

Hh B
B
I i
1 1.089 Shows the software version of the laser control PCB.

2 H Shows the G laser driver type.
• H: G laser driver (J391231)
3. Mode
• I: G laser driver (J391160)
3 h Shows the laser unit type.
• h: laser unit (Type HhB)
• i: Laser unit (Type IiB)
• #: Laser codes on the laser operation record PCB (inside the laser unit) are not entered. ☞ 35700
4 B Shows that the R-AOM and B-AOM driver functions are installed in the laser unit.
• Example:
B: Laser unit (Type HhB) or Laser unit (Type IiB)
• #: Laser codes on the laser operation record PCB (inside the laser unit) are not entered. ☞ 35700
$ Communication
If the communication status of each control PCB is not normal, the versions of Version (CPU) and BOOT are not
displayed normally.
• Depending on the ARCNET communication feature, Version (CPU) and BOOT on the System Version Check display may not be
able to decide if the ARCNET communication is working or not.
• In that case, the ARCNET communication status can be checked more correctly by using ARCNET Self-Diagnosis.
Enter the System Version Check mode again to update the versions of Version (CPU) and BOOT.
! Profile Data (SP1)

The profile data version is displayed.
35500 2/2
35600
Maintenance
System upgrade for each control PCB (CPU)

Maintenance: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Software Upgrade
3. Mode
M5330-00
IMPORTANT
• This section explains the procedure for updating the system of each control PCBs.
• When the external PC compatible with the CT-1 or printer driver has been connected, do not receive the order or make
prints before or during software upgrading. Upgrading may not be performed normally.
! Explanation
! Software Upgrade
• Upgrade each control PCB (CPU) using system program data saved in the directory for software upgrade.
• The software upgrade is carried out separately for each control PCB (CPU).
1 2 3 4 5
1 Normal Termination Shows this when the upgrading is completed correctly.

Abnormal Termination Shows this when the upgrading is not completed correctly.
2 & Select this to upgrade.
% Deselect this not to upgrade.
3 Printer I/F Main Shows each control PCB (CPU) separately.
4 1.00*1 Shows the system program version saved in each control PCB.
5 2.00*1 Shows the system program version saved in HDD.
*1. The whole name of system version may not be shown here.
Confirm the system version on the System Version Check.
35600 1/2
35600
Maintenance
! Data
! Control PCB (CPU), system file name, and software to be upgraded

When replacing each control PCB, select the check box of the software to be upgraded, then upgrade.
Control PCB Software to be upgraded System file name Remarks

Processor control PCB Processor proc0_1.sys proc1_1.sys
Printer control PCB Printer supply0.sys supply1.sys
Laser control PCB LASER laser0.sys laser1.sys
Printer I/F main PCB Printer I/F main PCB printerif0.sys printerif1.sys
! The location of the system program

Software Upgrade (HD)
3. Mode
C:\Noritsukoki\QSS-32_33\Data\Sys
! Procedures for installing the system program
1. Exit the system program.
2. Insert the system program CD into the DVD drive and start Setup.exe in the CD-ROM.
3. When the InstallShield Wizard display is shown, click Next.
4. Installation starts.
5. Operations after installing the system program

LP7400, LP7500, LP7600
1. Select Select All on the Software Upgrade display and upgrade each control PCB.
2. Perform the Daily Setup from the Maintenance Application.
QSS-37
NOTE
• Because upgrading the printer is automatically performed, it is not necessary to upgrade on the Software Upgrade
display.
• If upgrading profile, perform the Daily Setup from the Maintenance Application. Otherwise, the message
☞ No. 01756 Printer profile versions are inconsistent. is shown.
35600 2/2
35700
Maintenance
Operation Information

Maintenance: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Operation Information
Operation Information Laser Operation Record
3. Mode
! Explanation
Operation Information
Item Explanation
Error Record For error record, see the EZ Controller Service Manual.
Daily Setup History The daily setup history from the latest setup is displayed.
Data of the past seven setups are shown. If the number of data exceeds seven, the oldest one will be
deleted.
Laser Operation Record

Item Explanation
Laser Operation Record You can check operation records of laser-related parts.
IMPORTANT
• The laser operation record PCB maintains the data of the Serial Number, Laser
Generation Accumulated Time, Laser Generation Count, Polygon Mirror Total
Operation Time and Polygon Mirror Operation Count.
The data listed above is not changed if loading all the data into the system with the
Reading and Writing Data.
• The data listed above can be maintained up to five.
Laser Unit Serial Number Displays the serial No. of the laser unit.
Laser component information Displays the laser code described in the laser operation record PCB (in the laser unit).
Do not change the laser code, or an error may occur.
Serial Number Displays the serial No. of the system that installed the laser unit.
NOTE
• Serial Number displays the serial No. detected in Machine Specification.
The Serial Number data is maintained in the laser unit.
Laser Generation Accumulated Displays the total lighting time of the R, G and B lasers.
Time
Laser Generation Count Displays the operation counts of the R, G and B lasers.
Polygon Mirror Total Operation Displays the polygon mirror operation time.
Time
Polygon Mirror Operation Count Displays the polygon mirror operation count.
35700 1/1
35800
Maintenance
Machine Specification
! Display
Maintenance: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Machine Specification
Machine Specification (1) Machine Specification (2)
3. Mode
! Explanation
Item Explanation
Software information Displays the Software information obtained from the output device.
Machine Type Registration Displays the Machine Type Registration name of the printer.
IP Address Displays the IP Address of the printer.
Subnet mask Displays the Subnet mask of the printer (printer I/F main PCB).
Default gateway Displays the Default gateway obtained from the output device.
Serial Number (Printer Section) The Serial Number of the printer can be registered or checked.
At the installation, enter the production number.
Serial Number (Paper Processor Section) The Serial Number of the processor can be registered or checked.
At the installation, enter the production number.
Process Specification (Input range: 0 to Use this mode to set the process specification for the system.
80)
Processing Solution Display Set the display of the chemical solution names by process specification.
Installation Date The installation date of the system can be checked and set.
Date of operation The Date of operation of the system obtained from the output device is shown. Also the
settings can be configured.
Power Supply Specification The power supply specification of the system can be checked.
Language Language for the system program can be selected.
Unit Language Language other than Japanese and English can be selected for the display module.
Cannot be shown if the message file is not installed on PC.
• Save the language file to the following folder.
QSS-37
• C:\NoritsuKoki\Printer\QSS-Printer\data
LP7500/LP7600/LP7700/LP7900
• D:\Noritsukoki\Printer\FRONTIER-Printer\data
35800 1/2
35800
Maintenance
Item Explanation
Type Displays the display module type.
QSS-37
• TYPE1
LP7500/LP7600/LP7700/LP7900
• TYPE2
Date of shipment Displays the Date of shipment of the output device obtained from the output device.
Communication Speed Setting Communication speed can be selected from the following.
Usually, select AUTO.
1. AUTO
2. Fixed to 100 Mbps HALF
3. Fixed to 100 Mbps FULL
*1
Current communication speed Displays the current communication speed.
3. Mode
Circulation Pump Stand-by Function (only Circulation Pump Stand-by function can be set in this mode.
for SM)
SM Replenishment Setting (only for SM) Forced replenishment ON/OFF can be set.
*1. If the current communication speed does not apply to any of the following, nothing is shown.
• 100 Mbps HALF
• 100 Mbps FULL
• 100 Mbps FULL (Auto negotiation failed)
• 100 Mbps HALF (AutoNego)
• 100 Mbps FULL (AutoNego)
• 10 Mbps HALF (AutoNego)
• 10 Mbps FULL (AutoNego)
! Functions
! Program Timer Setting

The mode can be moved to the program timer setting.
At the installation, set the date/time and program timer.
35800 2/2
35920
Self-diagnostic
Self-diagnostic
Image Path Check

Maintenance: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Self-diagnostic → Image Path Check
Display Display
3. Mode
Failed portion display
! Explanation
Item Explanation
Image Path Check Transfers the data in each data path to judge the failure part by the CRC check or data comparison.
NOTE
• For Film Series Image Path, see Scanner Service Manual.
Test Print Allows you to select Test Print for checking the test print, if an abnormal print is made from the
scanned image though the scanned image saved to the storage media was normal.
NOTE
• Also perform the checks in the following conditions.
• Lines and noises are seen on the print.
• The color on the print is not good. (Black and white are not good.)
• The color on the print gets worse by performing the setup.
• The color on the print does not become better by performing the setup.
Test Print Image selection Select the image to transfer from the images for checking the laser or the files.
NOTE
• Available files are 24-bit BMP and 32-bit BMP files only.
Paper Magazine for Test Print Allows you to set the magazine to make a test print.
Test Print Advance Length Allows you to set the paper advance length to make a test print.
Execution Time Displays the expected time for the diagnostics.
Start Test The dialog for the Image Path Check appears by clicking Start Test. Click YES to start the
diagnostics.
Test Print Check Result Displays the result of the diagnostics by selecting Good or No Good of Test Print Check Result
after checking the test print.
35920 1/2
35920
Self-diagnostic
Item Explanation
Save Result Allows you to save the result of Image Path Check in a file.
IMPORTANT
• The test result is saved in C:\NoritsuKoki\QSS-##\LogData\DiagLogImgPass.Log.
QSS-37
• C:\NoritsuKoki\Printer\QSS-Printer\ [Serial number folder of the output system] \Log
LP7500/LP7600/LP7700/LP7900
• D:\NoritsuKoki\Printer\FRONTIER-Printer\ [Serial number folder of the output system]
\Log
• Only one file is available to save the result.
Clear Result Deletes the result of Image Path Check.
Result Displays the result of the test after Image Path Check is completed.
3. Mode
! Checking procedure
1. Select a Test Item.

NOTE
• When selecting Test Print, select a test print image.
2. The dialog for the Image Path Check appears by clicking Start Test. Click YES to start the test.
3. Assumable failed parts are displayed on the Diagnostic Contents column.
NOTE
• ← indicates it is same as on the left.
• − stands for unused.
Diagnostic Contents
Printer I/F main PCB
Laser control PCB
35920 2/2
35930
Self-diagnostic
Printer I/F Main PCB Self-Diagnostic

Maintenance: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Self-diagnostic → Printer I/F Main PCB Self-Diagnostic
Display Display
3. Mode
NOTE
• Printer I/F Main PCB Self-Diagnostic is supported by FRONTIER-Printer Ver. 2.0 or later, and QSS-Printer Ver. 3.0 or later.
! Explanation
Printer I/F Main PCB Self-Diagnostic is a function that the system self-diagnoses each IC mounted on the Printer I/F Main PCB and
checks whether Printer I/F Main PCB has problems.
• Printer I/F Main PCB Self-Diagnostic does not function normally in the conditions below.
1. The PC and Printer I/F Main PCB do not communicate with LAN normally.
2. +5 V is not supplied to the Printer I/F Main PCB. (The Printer I/F Main PCB does not operate normally.)
NOTE
• If the Printer I/F Main PCB is normal, and connection failure occurs in the LVPECL connectors of the Printer I/F Main PCB and
laser control PCB, OK is shown.
1. Click Execute.
2. The system diagnoses the Printer I/F Main PCB condition, and the result is shown a few minutes later.
If the Printer I/F Main PCB is normal If the Printer I/F Main PCB has problems
(1) (1) (2)
3. Diagnosis result is shown.

Diagnosis 1
• If the Printer I/F Main PCB is normal, OK is shown.
• If the Printer I/F Main PCB has problems, NG is shown.
If NG is shown, replace the Printer I/F Main PCB.
Diagnosis 2
35930 1/2
35930
Self-diagnostic
• If the Printer I/F Main PCB has problems, 1 or a number from 3 to 255 is shown in the right of NG.
IMPORTANT
• Regardless of the number shown in the right of NG, replace the Printer I/F Main PCB.
3. Mode
35930 2/2
35940
Self-diagnostic
ARCNET Self-Diagnostic (details of modes)
Also see the following references to utilize for diagnosis.
Model Reference Model Reference

ARCNET Self-Diagnostic (diagnosis) ☞ 35941 ARCNET Self-Diagnostic (results) ☞ 35942
Maintenance: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Self-diagnostic → ARCNET Self-Diagnostic
Display
3. Mode
NOTE
• ARCNET Self-Diagnostic is supported by FRONTIER-Printer Ver. 2.0 or later, and QSS-Printer Ver. 3.0 or later.
! Explanation
" Confirming connection of each ARCNET PCB
The self-diagnosis program checks the communication state of each ARCNET PCB, displays the diagnosis on the ARCNET Self-
Diagnostic screen after it detects the ARCNET PCB that may have a communication error.
• ARCNET Self-Diagnostic may not function normally in the conditions below.
1. The PC and Printer I/F Main PCB do not communicate with LAN normally.
2. The communication error occurred on a PCB equipped with the HUB function.
! Screen explanation 1
G085407
Explanation
Execute Press this to start ARCNET Self-Diagnostic.
Cancel Press this to stop ARCNET Self-Diagnostic.
NOTE
• While the system is performing ARCNET Self-Diagnostic, Execute turns Cancel.
Cancel Press this to complete ARCNET Self-Diagnostic.
35940 1/3
35940
Self-diagnostic
Explanation
Dev. Name Displays name of the ARCNET PCB.
NID Displays node ID of the ARCNET PCB.
• Node ID: Node means an ARCNET PCB. A Node ID is an ID assigned to each PCB.
Connect Indicates the state of connection.
• ∗( 0): communication status of the ARCNET PCB is normal
• Blank, ∗ ( not 0): communication status of the ARCNET PCB is abnormal
NOTE
• Single detection of a node ID by ARCNET Self-Diagnostic will display ∗.
• The number within the parentheses () indicates the number of times that the detected node ID later turned
undetected.
TX Err Displays the number of transmission error that occurred during communication with the ARCNET PCB by ARCNET
Self-Diagnostic.
3. Mode
• 0: communication status of the ARCNET PCB is normal
• not 0: communication status of the ARCNET PCB is abnormal
• N/A: communication status of the ARCNET PCB is abnormal (has never succeeded in communicating with other
PCBs)
NOTE
• For Printer I/F Main PCB only, N/A is displayed regardless of the communication status of the ARCNET
PCB (whether it is normal or abnormal).
Error/Count Displays the number of error detections/total checkings by ARCNET Self-Diagnostic
1 3
1. OK: communication status of the ARCNET PCB is normal

2. −: communication status of the ARCNET PCB is normal
3. When ARCNET communication is normal: the value of the number increases by 10.
When ARCNET communication is normal: the value of the number decreases by 10.
IMPORTANT
• Due to the attribute of ARCNET, if − is displayed which means abnormal, it does not always mean
that the ARCNET PCB itself is abnormal.
• Confirms ARCNET cable connection, cable cutting, and cleaning of inside the connector.
See ☞ 68100.
RCN Displays the number of reconfig detections by ARCNET Self-Diagnostic.
PCBs)
NOTE
• reconfig: other ARCNET PCB is connected/disconnected
MYRCN Displays the number of myreconfig detections by ARCNET Self-Diagnostic.
PCBs)
NOTE
• myreconfig: the target ARCNET PCB is connected/disconnected
35940 2/3
35940
Self-diagnostic
Explanation
Exist Displays state of the ARCNET PCB detection.
• ∗: communication status of the ARCNET PCB is normal
• Blank: communication status of the ARCNET PCB is normal
! Screen explanation 2
Item Explanation
Unknown Background color that indicates detection of a nonexistent ARCNET PCB.
3. Mode
Node*1
Node Change Background color that indicates a change in the state of connection of the ARCNET PCB.
NOTE
• The background color turns yellow when the ARCNET PCB communication state that is detected at Exist
changes.
Error Dev. Indicates the ARCNET PCB that is causing the errors in each ARCNET PCB.
Error Cause Indicates cause of error occured in each ARCNET PCB.
Endless Selecting this will continue performing ARCNET Self-Diagnostic without time restliction.
Minute Specifies time of diagnosis. (indicating by minute)
• If Endless is selected, this setting cannot be configured.
*1. Unknown Node is supported by FRONTIER-Printer with Ver. 3.0 or later, and QSS-Printer with Ver. 5.0 or later.
35940 3/3
35941
Self-diagnostic
ARCNET Self-Diagnostic (diagnosis)

ARCNET Self-Diagnostic (details of modes) ☞ 35940 ARCNET Self-Diagnostic (results) ☞ 35942
Display
3. Mode
1. Select the ARCNET Self-Diagnostic mode.

Maintenance: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Self-diagnostic → ARCNET Self-Diagnostic
IMPORTANT
• When selecting the ARCNET Self-Diagnostic mode while communication status of the ARCNET PCB is not
normal or during an occurrence of ☞ No. 06901ARCNET communication error., the following phenomenon
may occur.
1. When clicking each mode, nothing may be shown as in ☞ Screen 1 until approximately ten seconds passes, so just
wait till then.
2. When clicking a mode, the selected mode button may remain gray for approximately ten seconds as in ☞ Screen 2
until the screen switches to the next, so just wait till then.
Screen 1 Screen 2
35941 1/5
35941
Self-diagnostic
2. Click Execute on the ARCNET Self-Diagnostic display.

NOTE
• Set Minute to the default value of 1 on the ARCNET Self-Diagnostic program then click Execute to confirm the system's
communication status.
3. The ARCNET Self-Diagnostic program diagnoses failed part then shows the result.
Confirm the displayed message and the ARCNET Self-Diagnostic display to diagnose the following.
Diagnosis
☞ If the number of PCB in which an error occurred is one ☞ If the number of PCB in which an error occurred is more than
one (1)
☞ If the number of PCB in which an error occurred is more than ☞ Narrowing down the failure location if the failure location
one (2) cannot be determined
If the number of PCB in which an error occurred is one
3. Mode
Display
Confirm the connections.
Processor Printer control PCB Laser control

control PCB J/P222 PCB
J/P224 J/P221
J/P219
J/P223 J/P220 J/P1516 J/P1517
J/P518 J/P517
ARCNET ARCNET
J/P1208 J/P1207

Cables connecting Processor control PCB ⇔ Printer control PCB
Diagnosis example
1. It can be assumed that the cause of the error lies between the PCB in which an error has occurred (Processor control PCB) and the
PCB that transmits signal to that PCB (Printer control PCB).
2. Confirm the state of connection of cables connecting the printer control PCB to the processor control PCB.
IMPORTANT
• Confirm ARCNET cable connection, cable cutting and cleaning of inside the connector on both the printer control
PCB and the processor control PCB sides.
• For details about ARCNET cable cutting and cleaning of inside the ARCNET connector, see ☞ 68100.
3. Perform ARCNET Self-Diagnostic again.

4. Confirm the connection status of the connector between the printer control PCB and the processor control PCB, then, if no
problem is found, replace the processor control PCB.
35941 2/5
35941
Self-diagnostic
If the number of PCB in which an error occurred is more than one (1)
Display

J/P224 J/P221
J/P219
J/P223 J/P220 J/P1516 J/P1517
J/P518 J/P517
ARCNET ARCNET
J/P1208 J/P1207
3. Mode
Disconnect two cables that are connecting Processor control PCB ⇔
Printer control PCB
Diagnosis example (when the number of PCB in which an error occurred is more than one (1))
1. Disconnect two cables that are connecting between the processor control PCB and the printer control PCB.

If an error only occurs in the processor control PCB but not in others
1. It can be assumed that the cause lies in the connection status of the cables between the processor control PCB and the printer
control PCB.
2. Confirm the connection status of cables connecting the printer control PCB to the processor control PCB. ☞ 68100
3. Confirm the connection status of the connector between the printer control PCB and the processor control PCB, then, if no
problem is found, replace the processor control PCB.
If an error occurs not only in the processor control PCB but also in others
1. Disconnect two cables that are connecting between the printer control PCB and the laser control PCB.
3. If an error occurs only in the printer control PCB and the laser control PCB, it can be assumed that the cause lies in the
connection status of the cables between the printer control PCB and the laser control PCB.
4. Confirm the connection status of the connector between the printer control PCB and the laser control PCB, then, if no
problem is found, replace the laser control PCB. ☞ 68100
If an error occurs not only in the processor control PCB or laser control PCB but also in others
1. It can be assumed that the cause lies in the connection status of the cables between the printer control PCB and the Printer I/F
Main PCB.
2. Confirm the connection status of the connector between the printer control PCB and the Printer I/F Main PCB, then, if no
problem is found, replace the printer control PCB or the Printer I/F Main PCB.
IMPORTANT
35941 3/5
35941
Self-diagnostic
If the number of PCB in which an error occurred is more than one (2)
The communication errors occur. Additionally prepared ARCNET cables are connected.
3. Mode
Connection of normal ARCNET cables Connection of additionally prepared ARCNET cables
Connect additionally prepared cables.
Processor Printer control PCB Laser control Processor Printer control PCB Laser control
control PCB J/P222 PCB control PCB J/P222
J/P224 J/P221 J/P224 J/P221 PCB
J/P219 J/P219
J/P223 J/P220 J/P1516 J/P1517 J/P223
J/P518 J/P517 J/P518 J/P517 J/P220 J/P1516 J/P1517
ARCNET ARCNET ARCNET Disconnect the

J/P1208 J/P1207 J/P1208 J/P1207
Disconnect the cable.
Disconnect the cables. cable.
Printer I/F main PCB Printer I/F main PCB
Diagnosis example: (Determining the failure location using the ARCNET cable)
1. Connect an additional ARCNET cable to the Printer I/F Main PCB to connect it directly to the processor control PCB, then
execute the ARCNET Self-Diagnostic program again.
If an error does not occur either in the processor control PCB or Printer I/F Main PCB
It can be judged that both the processor control PCB and the Printer I/F Main PCB are normal.
NOTE
• An error occurs in the laser control PCB and in the printer control PCB.
• Confirm the same with the laser control PCB or the printer control PCB to narrow down the failure location.
If an error occurs in the processor control PCB and Printer I/F Main PCB
It can be judged that the cause of failure lies in the processor control PCB or in the Printer I/F Main PCB.
1. Connect an additional ARCNET cable to the Printer I/F Main PCB to connect it directly to the printer control PCB, then
execute the ARCNET Self-Diagnostic program again.
If an error does not occur either in the printer control PCB or in the Printer I/F Main PCB
It can be judged that the cause of failure lies in the printer control PCB.
Confirm the connection status of the connector of the printer control PCB, then, if no problem is found, replace the printer
control PCB. ☞ 68100
If an error occurs in the printer control PCB and the Printer I/F Main PCB
It can be judged that the cause of failure lies in the Printer I/F Main PCB.
Confirm the connection status of the connector of the Printer I/F Main PCB, then, if no problem is found, replace the Printer
I/F Main PCB.
IMPORTANT
35941 4/5
35941
Self-diagnostic
Narrowing down the failure location if the failure location cannot be determined
The communication errors occur. Processor control PCB cables are disconnected.
3. Mode
J/P224 J/P221
J/P219
J/P223 J/P220 J/P1516 J/P1517
J/P518 J/P517
ARCNET ARCNET
J/P1208 J/P1207

Disconnect two cables that are connecting Processor control PCB ⇔ Printer control PCB
Diagnosis example (values of RCN and MYRCN on the Printer I/F Main PCB increase)
1. Disconnect two cables that are connecting between the processor control PCB and the printer control PCB.
2. Perform ARCNET Self-Diagnostic again to confirm that the values of RCN and MYRCN increase.
If the values of RCN and MYRCN do not increase
1. It can be assumed that the cause lies in the connection status of the cables between the processor control PCB and the printer
control PCB.
2. Confirm the connection status of the connector between the processor control PCB and the printer control PCB, then, if no
problem is found, replace the processor control PCB. ☞ 68100
If the values of RCN and MYRCN increase
1. With the two cables between the processor control PCB and the printer control PCB disconnected, disconnect also the two
cables between the laser control PCB and the printer control PCB.
If the values of RCN and MYRCN do not increase
1. It can be assumed that the cause lies in the connection status of the cables between the printer control PCB and the laser
control PCB.
2. Confirm the connection status of the connector between the printer control PCB and the laser control PCB, then, if no
problem is found, replace the laser control PCB. ☞ 68100
If the values of RCN and MYRCN increase
1. It can be assumed that the cause lies in the connection status of the cables between the printer control PCB and the Printer I/F
Main PCB.
2. Confirm the connection status of the connector between the printer control PCB and the Printer I/F Main PCB, then, if no
problem is found, replace the printer control PCB or the Printer I/F Main PCB.
IMPORTANT
35941 5/5
35942
Self-diagnostic
ARCNET Self-Diagnostic (results)

ARCNET Self-Diagnostic (diagnosis) ☞ 35941 ARCNET Self-Diagnostic (details of modes) ☞ 35940
Diagnosis list shows results of ARCNET Self-Diagnostic that was performed on each ARCNET cable by each time disconnecting a target
cable to perform it for 1 minute.
After ARCNET Self-Diagnostic is performed, find a ARCNET Self-Diagnostic display of the same pattern then determine a diagnosis
part.
IMPORTANT
• The state of the ARCNET Self-Diagnostic display shown in the manual may vary depending on the system's
communication state.
3. Mode
! ARCNET cable connection
Order of the ARCNET communication

1 Processor control PCB ARCNET (Connector emission side)
2 Printer control PCB ARCNET (Connector detection side)
3 Laser control PCB
Processor control PCB Printer control PCB Laser control PCB
J/P224 J/P221 J/P222

J/P219
J/P223 J/P220 J/P1516 J/P1517
J/P518 J/P517
ARCNET
J/P1208 J/P1207
ARCNET

ATX MOTHER
LAN BORD
G085411
ARCNET Self-Diagnostic result list

• ☞ Printer control PCB - Printer I/F main PCB
• ☞ Printer control PCB - Processor control PCB
• ☞ Printer control PCB - Laser control PCB
! Printer control PCB - Printer I/F main PCB

Printer control PCB (black) ⇔ Printer I/F main PCB (white) Printer control PCB (white) ⇔ Printer I/F main PCB (black)
35942 1/2
35942
Self-diagnostic
! Printer control PCB - Processor control PCB

Printer control PCB (black) ⇔ Processor control PCB (white) Printer control PCB (white) ⇔ Processor control PCB (black)
3. Mode
! Printer control PCB - Laser control PCB
Printer control PCB (black) ⇔ Laser control PCB (white) Printer control PCB (white) ⇔ Laser control PCB (black)
35942 2/2
35950
Self-diagnostic
Laser Self-Diagnostic (details of modes)

Laser Self-Diagnostic (diagnosis: AUTO) ☞ 35951 Laser Self-Diagnostic (diagnosis: MANUAL) ☞ 35952
Laser Self-Diagnostic (starting/exiting) ☞ 35953
Maintenance: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Self-diagnostic → Laser Self-Diagnostic
! FRONTIER-Printer: Ver. 2.01 or earlier, QSS-Printer: Ver. 4.02 or earlier

Laser Self-Diagnostic (AUTO) Laser Self-Diagnostic (MANUAL)*1
3. Mode
! FRONTIER-Printer: Ver. 3.0 or later, QSS-Printer: Ver. 5.0 or later
Laser Self-Diagnostic (AUTO) Laser Self-Diagnostic (MANUAL)*1
*1. The Laser Self-Diagnostic (MANUAL) display is the same for all versions.
NOTE
• Laser Self-Diagnostic is supported by FRONTIER-Printer Ver. 2.0 or later, and QSS-Printer Ver. 3.0 or later.
• The Laser Self-Diagnostic of FRONTIER-Printer: Ver. 2.01 or earlier, and QSS-Printer: Ver. 4.02 or earlier has the problems
shown below.
The problems have been resolved in FRONTIER-Printer Ver. 3.0 or later, and QSS-Printer Ver. 5.0 or later.
• If Laser Self-Diagnostic is performed while the lasers are asynchronous, the message, Failed. is shown.
35950 1/4
35950
Self-diagnostic
• The diagnosis result is not shown normally.
! Explanation (Laser Self-Diagnostic)

" Although various symptoms appear with the troubles related to the laser, Laser Self-Diagnostic is not effective for all
of those symptoms.
The following are the symptoms for which Laser Self-Diagnostic is and is not effective.
Symptoms for which Laser Self-Diagnostic is effective
• ☞ No. 06073: Synchronous Sensor error. occurs.
• ☞ No. 06076: Polygon Mirror control error. occurs.
• ☞ No. 06106: G Laser light source status error. occurs.
Symptoms for which Laser Self-Diagnostic is ineffective
• If the print color fluctuates (light intensity fluctuation)
3. Mode
• If abnormal prints with noise are made
• For errors at the laser temperature adjustment
IMPORTANT
• The Laser Self-Diagnostic has the function to perform voluntarily the synchronous detection which is same as print
operation.
To use this function, it is necessary to make the laser unit under the same condition as that to print. For this reason, it
is required to finish the temperature adjustment in the laser unit.
If replacing the laser unit and checking it with Laser Self-Diagnostic, a certain waiting time is necessary until the laser
temperature adjustment is finished.
! AUTO
Explanation
Light Source Status (R) The R laser light source status and the B laser light source status are checked and the results OK or No Good
Light Source Status (B) (failed) are shown.
• OK: laser is operating normally
• No Good: laser is not operating normally
Graph (R) Displays in a graph the measured values of PD voltage and LD current for the R and the B lasers
Graph (B) • For details, see ☞ Direct modulation of the R and B lasers 35950.
Synchronization The Laser Self-Diagnostic program automatically calculates and shows a value for stable detection of laser
detection value (power) lights R, G and B.
Asynchronous point When lasers R, G and B are output with the maximum light intensity but the synchronous sensor does not
Synchronous Detection detect lasers, No Good is shown.
Setting Value
35950 2/4
35950
Self-diagnostic
Explanation
Synchronization Shows the synchronization frequency of 20 seconds after the polygon mirror is turned on.
frequency If the value of the Synchronization frequency is out the following range because the synchronous sensor
could not detect laser lights R, G or B, the value of the frequency is judged to be abnormal.
• QSS-37 series/LP7500/LP7600/LP7700/LP7900: 2043±7
• QSS-35 PLUS series/LP7100/LP7200/LP7000: 1380±7
NOTE
• If ☞ No. 06076-00002 Polygon Mirror control error. occurs, that means the light intensity value is
decreased.
• If B and R lasers have any problem, Synchronous Detection Setting Value (R), Synchronous
Detection Setting Value (B), Light Source Status (R) and Light Source Status (B) also turn No Good.
Polygon mirror (Locked) Confirms if the polygon mirror LOCK signal is detected within 20 seconds after the polygon mirror is turned
on.
When the rotation of the polygon mirror is stabilized but the signal transmitted from the polygon mirror driver
3. Mode
PCB (LOCK signal) does not reach the laser control PCB, No Good is shown at Polygon mirror (Locked).
NOTE
• If ☞ No. 06076-00001 Polygon Mirror control error. occurs, rotation of the polygon mirror is unstable
or is stopped.
• If rotation of the polygon mirror is stopped, NG is shown also for the followings: Synchronous
Detection Setting Value (R), Synchronous Detection Setting Value (G), Synchronous Detection
Setting Value (B), Light Source Status (R) and Light Source Status (B).
• OK: polygon mirror rotation is stable.
• No Good: polygon mirror rotation is unstable.
! MANUAL
Explanation
Number of synchronous Configure how many times synchronous detection observation is performed for each of R, G and B.
detection supervisory • Input range: 1000 to 60000 (initial value: 1000)
• Time required: 60 seconds to 60 minutes
IMPORTANT
• Inputting larger value increases the number of synchronous detection. Therefore, the
observation time becomes longer.
For example, for cases with low occurrence frequency, change the value if you want to observe
for longer time.
When the symptom is occurring currently, 1000 times is sufficient for observation.
Synchronous detection The laser power (light intensity) at synchronous detection can be arbitrarily specified for each of R, G and B.
power • Input range: from 100 to 1 (initial value: 100)
• Start diagnosing with 100.
• If no abnormal condition is detected with the laser power of 100, gradually reduce the R, G and B values
to detect abnormal condition.
IMPORTANT
• With the usual synchronous detection such as that when printing, the detection is performed
with the power of 100%. Decreasing this value reduces the light intensity, and no laser light is
output with the lowest value, 1%.
Thus, the point at which the synchronous detection cannot be performed (asynchronous point)
must exist somewhere in the range from 100 to 1%. Asynchronous point tends to become larger
with less light intensity and smaller with more light intensity.
For example, asynchronous point is at 100% for system with little laser light output and with high
occurrence frequency of No. 6073: Synchronous Sensor error., 70% for system with lower
laser light and with low occurrence frequency of No. 6073: Synchronous Sensor error., 20%
for system with correct laser light intensity.
Number of failed Shows the number of failed synchronous detection for each R, G and B.
synchronous detection The number of failed synchronous detection will be updated when completing the synchronous detection.
35950 3/4
35950
Self-diagnostic
! AUTO and MANUAL

Explanation
Diagnosis Click this to execute Laser Self-Diagnostic (AUTO)/(MANUAL).
Cancel Click this to exit Laser Self-Diagnostic.
$ Light Source Status (G)
Number of light source Searches for ☞ No. 06106 G Laser light source status error. in the error record then shows the number of
error times it occurred.
Error record ☞ No. 06106 The error record of ☞ No. 06106 G Laser light source status error. is shown.
$ Temperature sensor
Laser Thermosensor Displays the R and B lasers temperatures.
Laser Unit Thermosensor Displays the temperature of the laser unit.
! Direct modulation of the R and B lasers
3. Mode
LD control PCB
LD current
Half mirror
LD Input signal
PD
PD PCB PD voltage
G085178
$ LD stands for a laser diode, a device that is used to output laser.

The LD control PCB adjusts the magnitude of current to supply to the LD according to the input signal size (from 0
V to 1 V), then the LD changes the laser intensity according to the magnitude of the current.
The LD control PCB changes the laser intensity according to the magnitude of LD current of the input signal (0 V to
1 V).
$ PD stands for a photo diode, a device that converts light intensity to an electrical signal.
A part of laser emitted by the LD is reflected by the half mirror to the PD, then the LD control PCB detects the
output signal of the PD PCB, thus the light intensity is supervised.
The output signal of the PD PCB is called PD voltage.
$ The graph shows values of the PD voltage and the LD current which were measured while an input signal
from the LD control PCB is increased by 0.1 V from 0.1 V to 1.0 V.
In general, increasing the LD current increases laser intensity then also the PD voltage. Therefore, if both graphs are
almost proportional, there is no problem.
Graphs of the LD current may change even though there is no problem.
This is because the characteristics of the LD slightly changes with temperature and time.
Changes in characteristics of the LD fluctuate laser intensity. Such fluctuations are controlled so they are corrected,
which changes the value of LD current.
For the above reason, normal LD current graphs may be different in proportion or may be slightly distorted, the lines
may not be straight.
• For normal graphs, see ☞ AUTO in 35950 or Step 3 in 35951.
• For graphs with problems, see Step 4 in 35951.
35950 4/4
35951
Self-diagnostic
Laser Self-Diagnostic (diagnosis AUTO)

Laser Self-Diagnostic (details of modes) ☞ 35950 Laser Self-Diagnostic (diagnosis: MANUAL) ☞ 35952
• For the symptoms for which Laser Self-Diagnostic is and is not effective, see ☞ Explanation (Laser Self-Diagnostic) 35950.
! Diagnosis (AUTO)
1. Click Diagnosis on the Laser Self-Diagnostic display.
3. Mode
NOTE
• It takes approximately 2 minutes to complete Laser Self-Diagnostic.
2. The Laser Self-Diagnostic program diagnoses Light Source Status (R), Light Source Status (B),
Synchronous Detection Setting Value, Synchronization frequency and Polygon mirror (Locked)
of the laser unit.
NOTE
• At the same time the above diagnosis is performed, error records of ☞ No. 06106 G Laser light source status error.
are searched and the number of occurrence is counted.
3. The diagnosis result of Laser Self-Diagnostic program is shown.

NOTE
• It takes ten minutes at a maximum until the diagnosis result is shown.
Example: If the diagnosis result is normal (FRONTIER-Printer: Ver. 2.01 or earlier, QSS-Printer: Ver.
4.02 or earlier)
Laser Self-Diagnostic Laser Self-Diagnostic (graph (R))
35951 1/3
35951
Self-diagnostic
Example: If the diagnosis result is normal (FRONTIER-Printer: Ver. 3.0 or later, QSS-Printer: Ver. 5.0
or later)
Laser Self-Diagnostic Laser Self-Diagnostic (graph (R))
3. Mode
4. Right Source Status (R) and Right Source Status (B) are abnormal
Confirm graph (R) and graph (B).
LD current graph (normal) LD current graph (abnormal)

Graph (1) Graph (2) Graph (3)
Diagnosis example
• ☞ Graph (1), ☞ Graph (2)
If the graph of the LD current is not showing a straight line but a polygonal line that touches the upper bound or keeps touching it, it
is assumed that the laser unit LD is deteriorated.
Countermeasure: replace the laser unit.
• ☞ Graph (3)
If the graph of the LD current is showing a horizontal line that lies near 0 mV level, connection failure in the laser control PCB
connector (coaxial cable (R)) or failure in the laser control PCB can be suspected.
Diagnosis example (when problem lies in G laser)
5. Synchronous Detection Setting Value G is abnormal

• Confirm that there is no connection failure in wiring between the laser control PCB and the laser unit.
• Confirm that there is no connection failure in wiring between the laser control PCB and the G-AOM driver.
6. Perform Laser Self-Diagnostic (AUTO) again, and if it still recurs, replace the G-AOM driver.
1. Perform Laser Self-Diagnostic (AUTO) again.
Synchronous Detection Setting Value G is abnormal
• There is a possibility of failure in the laser unit.
1. Countermeasure 1: reattach the G-AOM driver then replace the laser unit.
2. Countermeasure 2: diagnose again by Laser Self-Diagnostic (AUTO) .
35951 2/3
35951
Self-diagnostic
Synchronous Detection Setting Value G turns normal

• Failure in the G-AOM driver
NOTE
• When Synchronous Detection Setting Value R or B is abnormal and confirming no connection failure in wiring
between the laser control PCB and the laser unit does not improve the symptom, there is a possibility of failure in the
laser unit or in the laser control PCB.
7. Synchronization frequency is abnormal

• Failure in the G-AOM driver
• Failure in the laser control PCB
3. Mode
• Failure in the laser unit
8. Result of Polygon mirror (Locked) is abnormal

• Confirm that power (24 V) is supplied to the laser control PCB.
• Confirm that there is no connection failure in wiring between the laser control PCB (J/P1515) and the laser unit.
• Failure in the laser unit
! Connection failure in wiring

Displayed are major errors that occur between the laser control PCB and the laser unit when connection failure in each PCB connector
occurs.
Utilize this in addition to the above diagnosis for better diagnosing.
J/P1501
(BNC)
No.6073
G-AOM DRIVER
J/P1502 J/P1636
(BNC)
No.6073
LASER CONTROL PCB
J/P1508 J/P1639
(MiniCT-18P)
6 1
LASER UNIT
No.6073
10 5
J/P1543 J/P1638
(VH-7P) J/P1637
1 1 (BNC)
2 2
3 3
No.6073
No.6073 4 4
6 6
7 7
J/P1503
(BNC)
No.6073
J/P1515
1
No.6073
10
J/P1663
J/P1519
No.6073 1
J/P1664
10
1 1
No.6075 (1T)
12 12 P1666
1
J/P1665 NOT USED
No.6106 1
10
2
G LASER DRIVER
Power supply PCB (+5 V)
G085179
35951 3/3
35952
Self-diagnostic
Laser Self-Diagnostic (diagnosis MANUAL)

Laser Self-Diagnostic (details of modes) ☞ 35950 Laser Self-Diagnostic (diagnosis: AUTO) ☞ 35951
• For the symptoms for which Laser Self-Diagnostic is and is not effective, see ☞ Explanation (Laser Self-Diagnostic) 35950.
• Use Laser Self-Diagnostic (diagnosis MANUAL) only for diagnosing G laser.
To diagnose R laser and B laser, Right Source Status (R)and Right Source Status (B) of Laser Self-Diagnostic (AUTO) can give
more precise judgment.
! Diagnosis (MANUAL)
3. Mode
M5414-05
1. Enter 1000 in the Number of synchronous detection supervisory field on Laser Self-Diagnostic
(MANUAL).
2. Configure the Synchronous detection power settings on Laser Self-Diagnostic (MANUAL) then
perform diagnosis.
Narrowing down the asynchronous point

To find the asynchronous point in a short time, narrow down the point by narrowing the range of value as shown below.
1. If failed synchronous detection is not detected with value 100, reduce the value by 1/2, and check the synchronous
detection again.(100%→50%)
2. If failed synchronous detection is not detected with value 50, increase the value by 1/4, and check the synchronous
3. If failed synchronous detection is not detected with value 50, increase the value by 1/4, and check the synchronous
4. If failed synchronous detection is not detected with value 50, reduce the value by 1/4, and check the synchronous
IMPORTANT
• As the standards of judgment with regard to the laser unit or the G-AOM driver, use the following values.
G Judgment
30% or less Light intensity has not deteriorate (adequate light intensity).
From 31 to 60% Light intensity tends to deteriorate (even though the urgency is not high, enough attention should be paid).
From 61 to 100% Light intensity has deteriorated (the closer to 100%, the greater urgency).
35952 1/2
35952
Self-diagnostic
• The laser intensity is maximum when synchronous detection power is set to 100. Reducing the amount of this
value decreases laser intensity, and with 1 which is the smallest, the laser intensity is zero.
Therefore, the point at which the synchronous detection cannot be performed (asynchronous point) must
exist between 100 to 1%. Asynchronous point tends to become larger with less light intensity and smaller with
more light intensity.
For example, asynchronous point is at 100% for a system with little laser light and high occurrence frequency
of asynchronous detection, 70% for a system with low laser light and low occurrence frequency of
asynchronous detection, 20% for a system with appropriate laser light intensity.
3. Number of failed synchronous detection is detected with G laser synchronous detection power set to a
value between 61 and 100 before replacing parts
3. Mode
4. Perform Laser Self-Diagnostic (Manual) again, and if there are no changes, replace the G-AOM driver.
5. If replacing the G-AOM drive changed nothing, replace the laser unit.
35952 2/2
35953
Self-diagnostic
Laser Self-Diagnostic (starting/exiting)

Laser Self-Diagnostic (details of modes) ☞ 35950 Laser Self-Diagnostic (diagnosis: AUTO) ☞ 35951
Laser Self-Diagnostic (diagnosis: MANUAL) ☞ 35952
! Start procedure
1. On the Self-diagnostic mode, click Laser Self-Diagnostic.
2. Clicking execute performs Upgrade then Laser Self-Diagnostic is shown.
3. Mode
Click Laser Self-Diagnostic Click Execute
3. If the EZ Conrtoller has been started, ☞ No. 01804 The printer version is incorrect. Upgrade the
printer software. is shown. Click YES.
For the FRONTIER-Printer, if Laser Self-Diagnostic is performed while the printer's application is running, the same
message as above is shown.
35953 1/2
35953
Self-diagnostic
4. The Laser Self-Diagnostic display is shown.
FRONTIER-Printer: Ver. 2.01 or earlier, QSS-Printer: Ver. FRONTIER-Printer: Ver. 3.0 or later, QSS-Printer: Ver. 5.0 or
4.02 or earlier later
3. Mode
! End procedure
1. Click Cancel on Laser Self-Diagnostic.
2. Clicking execute performs Upgrade then returns to the Self-diagnostic mode.
Click Cancel Click Execute
3. End
35953 2/2
35955
Self-diagnostic
Network Self-Diagnostic

Maintenance: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Self-diagnostic → Network Self-Diagnostic
Ping Data path check
3. Mode
NOTE
• Network Self-Diagnostic is supported by FRONTIER-Printer Ver. 3.0 or later, and QSS-Printer Ver. 5.0 or later.
! Explanation (Network Self-Diagnostic)

• Network Self-Diagnostic has the functions below.
1. Checks the connection of the LAN cable connecting the PC and printer I/F main PCB using Ping.
2. Tests the image data transmission between the HDD and printer I/F main PCB using data path check.
! Ping
The connection of the LAN cable connecting the PC and printer I/F main PCB can be checked.
Explanation
Number of transmission Specify the number of Ping transmission. (default: 4) (input range: 1 to 300)
Transmission size Specify the data size to transmit using Ping. (default: 32 bytes) (input range: 1 to 65500 bytes)
Ping Click Ping, then the specified size of data is send to and received from the selected output device for the
specified times using Ping.
Transmission Shows the number of Ping transmission.
Receipt Shows the number of Ping reception.
Failed Shows the number that Ping transmission and reception failed.
(0% loss): The failure rate is shown on the right side of Failed.
Minimum time Shows the shortest response time of Ping.
Maximum time Shows the longest response time of Ping.
Average time Shows the average response time of Ping.
No. Shows the number of the diagnosis result.
Result The diagnosis result of Ping is shown.
1. If the data transmission and reception was normally performed, Reply from 192.168.1.11 is
shown.*2
2. If no replay was received for one second, Request timed out is shown.
3. If data transmission failed, No Good(Transmission) is shown.
4. If data reception failed, No Good(Receipt) is shown.
5. If data transmission and reception failed due to a cause other than those above, No Good is shown.
Size*1 Shows the transmitted data size by the byte.
35955 1/3
35955
Self-diagnostic
Explanation
*1
Time Shows the time needed for the data transmission and reception by the msec.
TTL*1 Shows the number of packets that passed the router.
*1. If no reply was received for one second, Size, Time and TTL are not shown.
*2. 192.168.1.11 is an IP address, and it varies depending on the IP Address setting on the Machine Specification display.
! Data path check

Image data transmission between the HDD and printer I/F main PCB can be tested.
3. Mode
M5350-01
Explanation
Number of checks Specify the number to perform Data path check.
(default: 1) (Input range: 1 to 99999)
CRC check*1 Select whether to perform CRC check in addition to Data path check.
Number of checks so far Shows the number of Data path check and CRC check that are currently performed.
Communication speed Shows the communication speed calculated from the time needed for the data transmission and its size.
Diagnostic Result Shows the diagnosis result of CRC check.
• If data transmission and reception were performed normally: Good
• If data transmission and reception failed: No good
Execute Performs Data path checkCRC check.
• If only Data path check is performed, about seven seconds are required for each check.
• If Data path check and CRC check are performed at the same time, about 15 seconds are required
for each check.
*1. CRC check performs the following checks on the PC and printer I/F main PCB.
1. The PC calculates the image data to use for the CRC check by the bit.
2. The same data as the calculated one is transmitted to the printer I/F main PCB, and the PCB performs the same calculation.
3. The calculation results of the PC and printer I/F main PCB are compared, and image data damage is checked.
! Setting
Specify the IP address and language to use.
M5350-02
35955 2/3
35955
Self-diagnostic
NOTE
• If Network Self-Diagnostic is accessed from Extension→Maintenance, the IP Address and Language settings configured on
the Machine Specification display are applied. Therefore, they need not to be reconfigured.
! Checking procedure of Network Self-Diagnostic
1. Select Ping or Data path check, configure each setting.

2. Click Ping or Execute.
3. Check the diagnosis result, and specify the failure part.
NOTE
• If communication failure of the LAN cable occur while Data path check is performed, the following display is shown and
Data path check may be terminated abnormally.
3. Mode
G085492
! Startup procedure of Network Self-Diagnostic and destination of the log data

Network Self-Diagnostic can be started from Maintenance, and also from the C drive directly.
Destination of the log data
Execution file of Network Self-Diagnostic
Destination of the log data
G085490
NOTE
• If Network Self-Diagnostic is accessed from the C drive directly, the settings configured on the Machine Specification display
are not applied. Therefore, the IP Address and Language settings may need to be reconfigured.
35955 3/3
36000
Printer Mechanical Adjustment
Paper sensor adjustment

Maintenance: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Paper Sensor Adjustment
3. Mode
M5374-00
NOTE
• The LED light intensity value of each sensor can be checked and set by entering the service personnel password (2260).
! Explanation
! Paper Sensor Adjustment (standard value: 5) (input range: 0 to 255)

It is the standard value to be used for adjusting the LED light intensity of each sensor.
NOTE
• The normal range of the LED light intensity value of each sensor is from 1 to 169.
• When the paper sensor LED light intensity adjustment was finished abnormally, the numeric value input section becomes 0 and
the status section becomes -.
! Functions
! Paper Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment

Adjust the LED light intensity of each sensor.
NOTE
• With this Paper Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment function, the sensors below are adjusted.
Sensors for Sensor LED Light Intensity Value Adjustment

Paper end sensors A, A2, B, and C
Paper loading sensor
Zigzag correction sensors (left and right)
Exposure start sensor
Paper sensor 1
Paper sensors 2 (left, center, and right)
• Paper end sensor A is shown when the triple magazine unit or the quad magazine unit has been attached.
• Paper end sensor A2 is shown when the quad magazine unit has been attached.
36000 1/2
36000
! Paper Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment
1. Check that each printer cover of the printer section and printer doors are closed.
2. Perform Paper Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment.
NOTE
• The LED light intensity value of each sensor is not shown if the service personnel password has not been entered.
• After Paper Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment is completed normally, OK is shown.
OK: When the LED light intensity of each sensor is from 1 to 169
• After Paper Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment is not completed normally, − is shown.
−: When the LED light intensity of each sensor is 0 or 170 or more
3. Mode
36000 2/2
36005
Paper Guide Width Correction

Maintenance: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Paper Guide Width
Correction
3. Mode
M5397-00
NOTE
• Enter the service personnel password (2260) to access this display.
• This display is shown if you register the Quad Magazine Unit in Option Registration.
! Explanation
Adjust the paper guide width of paper supply unit A2 so that the width is the same as the loading paper width.
This adjustment is required when replacing paper supply unit A2 or the guide width sensor.
! Paper Guide Width Measurement Value (initial value: 130.0) (input range: 127.0 to 133.0 mm)
Carry out Move to 130.0 mm Width via Functions and input measured value.
! Functions
! Move to 130.0 mm Width

The paper guide is moved to the home position. Then the correction value is canceled and it moves to the standard position (width
130.0 mm).
! 130.0 mm Width Operation Confirmation

The paper guide is moved to the home position. Then the correction value is activated and it moves to the standard position (width
130.0 mm).
! Paper Guide Width Correction
1. Perform Move to 130.0 mm Width via Functions.

2. Open the printer door to pull out the pre-exposure advance unit.
36005 1/2
36005
3. Measure the dimension between outsides of the paper guides.

Paper guides Outside of paper guide
3. Mode
Outside of paper guide
Measured
value
G086490
4. Enter the measured value into Paper Guide Width Measurement Value.
5. Perform 130.0 mm Width Operation Confirmation via Functions and confirm that the dimension
between outsides of the paper guides is 130.0 mm.
NOTE
• The acceptable value of the dimension between the paper guides is from 129.8 mm to 130.0 mm.
36005 2/2
36010
Paper Advance Unit Correction

Maintenance: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Paper Advance Unit
Correction
3. Mode
M5375-00
NOTE
! Explanation
Correct the receive/release stop position of the paper advance unit.
IMPORTANT
• Perform Paper Advance Unit Correction with any of paper magazine A, A2, B or C.
! Arm Unit 2 (Left) Receive Stop Position Correction (Initial value: 0.0) (Input range: from −2.0 to +2.0)
The paper receive position of arm unit 2 (left) is corrected.
! Arm Unit 2 (Right) Receive Stop Position Correction (Initial value: 0.0) (Input range: from −2.0 to +2.0)
The paper receive position of arm unit 2 (right) is corrected.
! Paper Stop Position Correction (Initial value: 0.0) (Input range: from −5.0 to +5.0)
The stop position of paper which is advanced to arm unit 2 is corrected.
! Functions
! Arm Unit 2 (Left) Receive Stop Position Correction Test Operation

The input correction value is invalidated and the arm unit 2 is moved to the arm unit 2 (left) receive stop position.
! Arm Unit 2 (Left) Receive Stop Position Correction Test Operation Confirmation
The input correction value is validated and the arm unit 2 is moved to the arm unit 2 (left) receive stop position.
! Arm Unit 2 (Right) Receive Stop Position Correction Test Operation

The input correction value is invalidated and the arm unit 2 is moved to the arm unit 2 (right) receive stop position.
! Arm Unit 2 (Right) Receive Stop Position Correction Test Operation Confirmation
The input correction value is validated and the arm unit 2 is moved to the arm unit 2 (right) receive stop position.
36010 1/3
36010
! Test Operation for the Paper Stop Position Correction

The input correction value is invalidated and the paper is advanced to the arm unit 2.
! Paper Stop Position Correction Test Operation Confirmation

The input correction value is validated and the paper is advanced to the arm unit 2.
1. Execute Arm Unit 2 (Left) Receive Stop Position Correction Test Operation via F: Functions.
2. Open the printer top cover and check the condition of arm unit 2.
3. Input the correction value so that the distance between the upper end of paper guide in paper advance
unit 1 and front end of arm unit 2 becomes 55.3±0.5 mm.
3. Mode
55.3±0.5 mm
Arm unit 2 (upper)
Upper paper guide
G068451
NOTE
• Positive correction makes the arm unit move away from paper advance unit 1 and negative correction makes it move close.
4. After inputting the correction value, execute Arm Unit 2 (Left) Receive Stop Position Correction Test
Operation via F: Functions, then check that the value is 55.3±0.5 mm.
5. Correct the arm unit 2 (right) receive stop position in the same way.
6. Execute Test Operation for the Paper Stop Position Correction via F: Functions.
7. Open the printer top cover and check the condition of arm unit 2 and paper.
36010 2/3
36010
8. Input the correction value so that the dimension between the front ends of arm unit 2 and paper
becomes 3.0±0.5 mm.
Paper
3. Mode
Arm unit 2
3.0±0.5 mm
G068452
NOTE
• Positive correction moves the paper arm unit 2 away from the front end of paper and negative correction moves to close.
9. After inputting the correction value, execute Paper Stop Position Correction Test Operation
Confirmation via F: Functions, then check that the value is 3.0±0.5 mm.
36010 3/3
36020
Exposure Magnification Correction

Maintenance: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Exposure Magnification
Correction
A B
3. Mode
M5376-00
NOTE
! Explanation
The image to be exposed can be expanded or reduced in the paper width direction.
IMPORTANT
• Perform Exposure Magnification Correction with any of paper magazine A, A2, B or C.
• When you do not have the paper of 178 mm width or more, make a test print with the maximum paper size which you
used, then measure the length between most outside lines of it.
! Cyan Line Exposure Size (Initial value: 160.0 mm) (Input range: 65.0 to 295.0 mm)
The length of the test print image is measured, and then the actual measurement value can be entered.
! Functions
! Test Print (Paper Magazine A/A2/B/C)

A test print is made without any correction.
NOTE
• A piece of paper with the advance length 100 mm is printed.
• The paper width, [A ####(#)] is printed as the CVP imprinting.
! Test print confirmation (Paper Magazine A/A2/B/C)

A test print is made using correction values.
NOTE
• A magenta arrow is shown on the Test Print Confirmation print.
Test print Test Print (Confirmation)
G066121
• The print pattern of the test print made with Test Print (Confirmation) is as same as that made with Test Print but of which
color of the center line on the test prints differ. (Red)
36020 1/2
36020
• The paper width, 〈A ####(#)〉 is printed as the CVP imprinting.
1. Carry out Test Print of F: Functions.

IMPORTANT
• Make a test print with the maximum paper size which you use.
2. Measure length A on the test print.
3. Mode
G068453
3. Select the line from part A and enter the measured value in part B.
IMPORTANT
• Measure the length of 160 line usually.
• When you do not have the paper of 178 mm width or more, measure the length between most outside lines of it.
4. Perform Test Print Confirmation of Functions.
5. Confirm that Part A on the test print is within ±0.1 mm of the specified length.
6. Perform exposure center correction.
☞ 36070
7. Perform Exposure Position Adjustment.
☞ 36030
36020 2/2
36030
Exposure Position Adjustment

Maintenance: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Exposure Position
Adjustment
3. Mode
M5377-00
NOTE
! Explanation
Carry out correction so that the exposure position in the laser unit is positioned at the center of the test print. Correct the positions of
the R, G, B laser main and sub scanning.
IMPORTANT
• Perform Exposure Position Adjustment with any of paper magazine A, A2, B or C.
used, then measure the dimension of the most outside line of it.
! BLOCK-B Check Image Selection 1 for Main Scan Cyan Line = Magenta Line
Enter the number and letter of the image where the cyan line aligns with the magenta line on the test print BLOCK-B.
! BLOCK-B Check Image Selection 2 for Main Scan Cyan Line = Yellow Line
Enter the number and letter of the image where the cyan line aligns with the yellow line on the test print BLOCK-B.
! BLOCK-B Magenta Offset Value of Main Scanning

Measure the dimension between the cyan and magenta lines on BLOCK-C 0i and enter the measured value if there is no image where
the cyan line aligns with the magenta line on the test print BLOCK-B.
! BLOCK-B Yellow Offset Value of Main Scanning

Measure the dimension between the cyan and yellow lines on BLOCK-C 0i and enter the measured value if there is no image where
the cyan line aligns with the yellow line on the test print BLOCK-B.
! BLOCK-D1 Check Image Selection 1 for Sub Scan Cyan Line = Magenta Line
Enter the number of the image where the cyan line aligns with the magenta line on the test print BLOCK-D1.
! BLOCK-D2 Check Image Selection 2 for Sub Scan Cyan Line = Magenta Line
Enter the number of the image where the cyan line aligns with the magenta line on the test print BLOCK-D2.
36030 1/5
36030
! Functions

NOTE
• A piece of paper with the advance length 355.6 mm is printed.

NOTE
3. Mode
G066121
1. Confirm that Exposure Magnification Correction has been completed.

☞ 36020
IMPORTANT
3. On the test print BLOCK-B, check the numbers of the image where the cyan line aligns with the
magenta line, and where it aligns with the yellow line.
Magenta line
Cyan line Yellow line
G068454
IMPORTANT
• Check the line using the loupe.
• Loupe is a service personnel tool. See Service personnel tool list.
☞ 80310
36030 2/5
36030
4. If there is no part where the cyan line aligns with the magenta/ yellow line on the test print BLOCK-B,
check BLOCK-C 0i and enter the offset value of main scanning and make a Test Print again.
Minus correction
Positive correction
3. Mode
G068455
5. Enter each checked number.

6. Check the number of the image where the cyan line aligns with the magenta line on the test print
BLOCK-D1, and where it aligns with the yellow line on the test print BLOCK-D2.
Magenta line
Yellow line
Cyan lines
G068456
7. Enter each checked number.

36030 3/5
36030
9. Confirm that the lines (cyan, magenta and yellow) of the column 0a to 0h in BLOCK-B are straighter
than any of the other columns.
Check area
3. Mode
G068457
10. Confirm that the lines (cyan, magenta and yellow) of rows 0 and -1 in BLOCK-D1 and D2 are straighter
than any of the other rows.
IMPORTANT
• On prints made via Test Print Confirmation, rows 0 and -1 of BLOCK-D1 and D2 are exposed in the same
position.
Check area
G068458
11. Confirm that the lines (cyan, magenta and yellow) make a straight line in BLOCK-E. If it is not the
straight line, perform Exposure Magnification Fine Adjustment.
☞ 36040
IMPORTANT
• Check line 160 usually.
• If you do not have paper of 178 mm or wider, make a test print with the widest paper you have, then measure
the length of the most outside line.
36030 4/5
36030
Y
G068459
3. Mode
36030 5/5
36040
Exposure Magnification Fine Adjustment

Maintenance: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Exposure Magnification
Fine Adjustment
3. Mode
M5378-00
NOTE
! Explanation
This mode is used to correct dot displacement for each laser of B, G and R on the both sides of a print.
IMPORTANT
• Perform Exposure Position Adjustment with any of paper magazine A, A2, B or C.
used, then measure the dimension of the most outside line of it.
! Magenta Line (Main Scanning) (Initial value: 0.0 dot) (Input range: from −9.9 to +9.9 dot)
G laser expansion and contraction can be corrected against the paper width direction.
! Yellow Line (Main Scanning) (Initial value: 0.0 dot) (Input range: from −9.9 to +9.9 dot)
B laser expansion and contraction can be corrected against the paper width direction.
! Functions

NOTE

36040 1/3
36040
NOTE
G066121
1. Confirm that Exposure Magnification Correction and Exposure Position Adjustment have been
completed.
3. Mode
☞ 36020
☞ 36030
IMPORTANT
1 dot
+correction −correction
G068460
IMPORTANT
• Check the line using the loupe.
• Loupe is a service personnel tool. See Service personnel tool list.
☞ 80310
36040 2/3
36040
3. Carry out the correction so that the magenta and yellow lines make a straight line with cyan line in the
vertical direction at 0 on the test print.
IMPORTANT
• If there is no image where magenta and cyan lines make one line, carry out the fine adjustment by 0.1 dot.
• Check the line with the most outside chart of the test print.
NOTE
• When correcting the magenta line to the right, input minus correction value.
• When correcting the magenta line to the left, input + correction value.
4. Enter the correction value.
3. Mode
6. Check the magenta and yellow lines make a straight line with cyan line in the vertical direction at 0 on
the test print again.
7. Carry out the Exposure Position Adjustment again.
☞ 36030
36040 3/3
36050
Paper Advance Length Correction

Maintenance: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Paper Advance Length
Correction
3. Mode
M5379-00
NOTE
! Explanation
Correct the paper advance length and the advance roller feed error.
IMPORTANT
• It is necessary to carry out paper advance length correction for each paper magazine A, A2, B, and C.
! Test Paper Measurement Value (1st) (Initial value: 150.0 mm) (Input range: from 145.0 to 155.0 mm)
The first paper is for the correction of the paper which has just been fed out from the paper magazine (distance between the paper
loading sensor and the paper cutter) and the advance feed error.
! Test Paper Measurement Value (2nd) (Initial value: 200.0 mm) (Input range: from 180.0 to 220.0 mm)
The second test paper is for the correction of the advance roller feed error.
! Functions
! Test Paper Advance

Two test prints of 150.0 mm and 200.0 mm are made without any correction.
IMPORTANT
• Be sure to enter the measurement dimensions of the first and second test papers at the same time.
NOTE
! Test Paper Advance Confirmation

Two test prints of 150.0 mm and 200.0 mm are made using correction values.
NOTE
! Loading (Paper Magazine A/A2/B/C)

The paper is loaded.
36050 1/2
36050
! Rewind
The paper is rewound.
1. Attach the paper magazine to carry out the paper advance length correction on the magazine mount
A/A2/B/C.
2. Select paper magazine A/A2/B/C.
3. Carry out Test Paper Advance via Functions.
4. Open the printer top cover and remove the paper from paper advance unit 1 and 2.
3. Mode
Paper Paper advance unit 2
G068461
5. Measure each test paper length of the first and second paper which are removed.
6. Enter each measurement dimension.
7. After correcting, carry out Test Paper Advance Confirmation via F: Functions and be sure to make a
print and check if the advance length is correct.
8. If the advance length is not correct, adjust it in the following procedure.
If the advance length of the first print after loading is not correct
If the advance length is longer Increase the correction value of Test Paper Measurement Value (1st).
If the advance length is shorter Decrease the correction value of Test Paper Measurement Value (1st).
If the advance length of the second or later print after loading is not correct
Reset the measurement lengths of Test Paper Measurement Valued (1st, 2nd) to the initial values and adjust them again.
36050 2/2
36060
Arm Unit 1 Zigzagging Correction

Maintenance → Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Arm Unit 1 Zigzagging
Correction
3. Mode
S5380-00-UM01
! Explanation
Correct if the image is exposed diagonally toward the paper because of the paper zigzagging.
IMPORTANT
• Perform arm unit 1 zigzagging correction for each paper magazine A, A2, B, and C.
• Perform the adjustments of all magazines to use for magazine mounts A, A2, B and C.
! A − C (Initial value: 0.0 mm) (Input range: −2.0 to +2.0 mm)

The correction for each magazine (paper width and surface) is necessary.
! Magazine A, Magazine A2, Magazine B, Magazine C

Paper magazine A/A2/B/C can be selected.
! Functions
Functions Explanation
*2
F Test Print 1 (Paper Magazine A/A2/B/C) The correction is invalid and two prints are output.
F Test Print Confirmation 1 (Paper Magazine A/A2/B/C)*1*2 The correction is valid and two prints are output.
F Test Print 2 (Paper Magazine A/A2/B/C)*3 The correction is invalid and two prints are output.
F Test Print Confirmation 2 (Paper Magazine A/A2/B/C)*1*3 The correction is valid and two prints are output.
F Loading (Paper Magazine A/A2/B/C) The paper is loaded.
F Rewind (Paper Magazine A/A2/B/C) The paper which has been loaded is rewound.
*1. A magenta arrow is shown on the Test Print Confirmation print.

The paper width, 〈A ###(#)〉 is printed in the CVP imprinting.
G066121
*2. The advance length of the test print is 457.0 mm.
*3. If the paper width is between 82.5 mm and 120 mm, two test prints whose advance length is 457.0 mm are output.
If the paper width is between 127 mm and 305 mm, two test prints whose advance length is 914.0 mm are output.
36060 1/3
36060
1. Check that the zigzagging adjustment of the exposure advance unit has been completed.
☞ 36080
2. Check that the zigzagging adjustment of the magazine mount has been completed.
☞ 22100
3. Check that the right angle adjustment of the cutter unit has been finished.
See ☞ The right angle adjustment of the cutter unit in 25620.
4. Clean pressure pins of arm unit 1 with cotton swab. (two places)
Insert cotton swab into the space of arm unit 1 to clean the pins.
Arm unit 1
3. Mode
Clean the space.
Pressure pins
G089218
5. Attach the paper magazine to be carry out arm unit 1 zigzagging correction to magazine mount
A/A2/B/C.
7. Execute Test Print 1 or Test Print 2 of F: Functions.
8. Measure the difference of lines A and C on the second test print. And input the value to (A−C).
IMPORTANT
• Input the correction value in millimeter (mm).
• Use a scale to measure the dimensions of lines A and C on the test print.
NOTE
• When the measured values of the test print are line A: 121 mm and C: 120 mm, for example, see the below.
• Line A (121 mm) − Line C (120 mm) = Correction value A − C (1 mm)
Line A
A
B
C
Line C
G085491
36060 2/3
36060
9. After the correction, make test prints in Test Print (Confirmation) of Functions. And then check that
the difference of dimensions of lines A and C (on the second test print) is within the allowable range in
the following table.
IMPORTANT
• If the difference of dimensions of lines A and C (on the second test print) is out of the tolerance level, input the
correction value to A−C.
A is longer than C Positive correction

C is longer than A Negative correction
3. Mode
NOTE
• When correcting 1.0 mm in (A-C), the zigzagging of approx. 1.0 mm can be corrected on the test print.
10. Make test prints in Test Print (Confirmation) of Functions. And then check that the difference of
dimensions of lines A and C (on the second test print) and the difference of dimensions of lines A and C
(on the first test print) are within the allowable range in the following table.
IMPORTANT
• If the difference between lines A and C is not within the allowable range, check the zigzagging adjustment of
the magazine mount. ☞ 22100
• If the differences of lines A and C both on the first and second test prints are out of the allowable range
specified in the following table, confirm the exposure center correction. ☞ 36070

Test print 1 (457.0 mm) A and C are within 1/2±0.5 mm of the actual paper width
Test print 2 (914.0 mm) A and C are within 1/2±1.0 mm of the actual paper width
36060 3/3
36065
Paper Guide Width Correction (for each Paper Width)

Maintenance → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Paper Guide Width Correction (for each Paper
Width)
3. Mode
M5398-00
! Explanation
When the paper width or paper surface of paper magazine A2 is changed, adjust the paper guide width of paper supply unit A2 to the
paper width to be used.
See Adjusting the paper guide width [Paper Guide Width Adjustment (for each Paper Width)] in the Operator's Manual.
36065 1/1
36070
Exposure Center Correction

Maintenance → Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Exposure Center Correction
3. Mode
M5381-00
! Explanation
The exposure center correction can be carried out for each paper width and surface.
IMPORTANT
• Carry out the Master (Exposure Center Correction Value) and Exposure Center Correction (for each Paper Magazine)
for each paper magazine A/A2/B/C.
! Exposure Center Correction (for each Paper Magazine) (Initial value: 0.0 mm) (Input range: from −2.0
to +2.0 mm)
The reference line is corrected to be in the center on the test paper for each paper magazine (for each paper width and surface).
! Master (Exposure Center Correction 1) Paper Left End − Center (Initial value: 127.0 mm) (Input range:
from 31.3 mm to 162.4 mm)
Enter the length from the left end to the center line on the leading end of the test print.
! Master (Exposure Center Correction 2) Center − Paper Right End (Initial value: 0.0 mm) (Input range:
from 31.3 mm to 162.4 mm)
Enter the length from the center line to the right end on the leading end of the test print.
! Master (Exposure Center Correction Value)

The exposure center correction value which is calculated from the entered values of master (Exposure Center Correction Value 1) and
(Exposure Center Correction Value 2) is displayed.
NOTE
• When the correction value is over ±9.9 mm, the correction value display part turns red and it cannot be registered.
! Functions
! Test print (Paper Magazine A/A2/B/C) without Correction Value

Invalidate the correction values of Master (Exposure Center Correction Value) and Exposure Center Correction (for each Paper
Magazine) to make a test print.
! Test print confirmation (Paper Magazine A/A2/B/C) with Master Value

Validate Master (Exposure Center Correction Value) and make a test print.
36070 1/4
36070
! Test Print Confirmation (Paper Magazine A/A2/B/C) with Master and Paper Magazine Values
Validate the correction values of Master (Exposure Center Correction Value) and Exposure Center Correction (for each Paper
Magazine) to make a test print.
NOTE
G066121
• When making test prints in Functions, a print with the advance length of 100 mm is made and the paper width 〈A ####(#)〉 is
printed as the CVP imprinting.
3. Mode
! Rewind
The paper which is being loaded is rewound.
Exposure Center Correction (Master)

☞ 36080
☞ 22100
3. Check that Arm Unit 1 Zigzagging Correction has been completed.
☞ 36060
4. Check that Exposure Magnification Correction has been completed.
☞ 36020
5. Attach the paper magazine to carry out Master (Exposure Center Correction Value) to magazine mount
A/A2/B/C.
7. Carry out Test Print without Correction Value of F: Functions.
IMPORTANT
36070 2/4
36070
8. Measure the length from the left end to the center line and the length from the center line to the right end
on the leading end of the test print.
Center line
3. Mode
G068463
9. Enter each measurement dimension.

10. After correcting carry out Test Print Confirmation with Master Value of F: Functions and be sure to
make a print and check if the exposure center is correct.
Exposure Center Correction (for each Paper Magazine)

☞ 36080
☞ 22100
3. Attach the paper magazine for Exposure Center Correction to the magazine mount A/A2/B/C.
5. Carry out Test Print Confirmation with Master value of F: Functions.
36070 3/4
36070
6. Measure dimension B from the left end to the center line on the test print.
IMPORTANT
• When measuring the test print, use the front end of the test print.
Center line
Front end of the test print
3. Mode
G068464
7. Carry out correction so that dimension B is half of the paper width.

B is longer than a half of the Negative correction
paper width
A half of the paper width is Positive correction
longer than B
8. After correcting, carry out Test Print Confirmation with Master and Paper Magazine Values of F:
Functions and be sure to make a print to check if the exposure center is correct.
36070 4/4
36080
Exposure Advance Adjustment

Maintenance: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Exposure Advance
Adjustment
3. Mode
M5382-00
NOTE
• Enter the service personnel password (2260) to access this display.
! Explanation
Exposure Start Position Correction and Exposure Advance Motor Speed Correction are carried out.
Zigzagging due to the pressure of the inlet roller and exit roller of exposure advance unit is corrected.
IMPORTANT
• If the exposure advance adjustment is performed for any one of magazine A, A2, B, or C, the correction is complete.
! Paper Front End - 0 mm-line Test Paper Measurement Value (Initial value: 25.4 mm) (Input range: 22.4
to 28.4 mm)
The Exposure Start Position is corrected.
Measure the length between the test paper front end and 0 mm-line, then input measured value.
! 0 mm-line - 254 mm-line Test Paper Measurement Value (Initial value: 254.0 mm) (Input range: 244.4 to
264.4 mm)
The Exposure Advance Motor Speed is corrected.
Measure the length between 0 mm-line and 254 mm-line of the test paper and input measured value.
! Functions

Invalidate the correction value that is entered for Exposure Start Position Correction and Exposure Advance Motor Speed Correction
and then make a test print.
A piece of paper with the advance length of 305 mm is printed.
NOTE

Validate the correction value that is entered for Exposure Start Position Correction and Exposure Advance Motor Speed Correction
and then make a test print.
A piece of paper with the advance length of 305 mm is printed.
36080 1/9
36080
NOTE
G066121
! Exposure Advance Pressure Inlet Roller Test Print (Paper Magazine A/A2/B/C)
Paper is advanced by the exposure advance unit inlet roller, and then a test print is made.
NOTE
3. Mode
! Exposure Advance Pressure Exit Roller Test Print (Paper Magazine A/A2/B/C)
Paper is advanced by the exposure advance unit exit roller, and then a test print is made.
NOTE

! Rewind
The paper which is being loaded is rewound.
Exposure Advance Adjustment

1. Make a test print by selecting Test Print (Paper Magazine A, A2, B or C) in F:Functions.
2. Measure the length between the paper front end and 0 mm-line of the test print, then input the
measured value in Paper Front End - 0 mm-line Test Paper Measurement Value.
3. Measure the length between 0 mm-line and 254 mm line of the test print, then input the value in 0 mm-
line - 254 mm-line Test Paper Measurement Value.
Paper Front End - 0 mm-line Test Paper Measurement Value
A
0 mm-line - 254 mm-line Test Paper Measurement Value
G068465
36080 2/9
36080
4. Make a test print by selecting Test Print (Paper Magazine A, A2, B or C) in F:Functions.
5. For confirmation of the test print results, see each value shown below.
Length between the paper front end and 0 mm-line 25.4 mm
Length between 0 mm-line and 254 mm-line 254.0 mm

A
3. Mode
Rear end
G068466
Adjusting the paper zigzagging in the exposure advance unit

1. Make a test by selecting Exposure Advance Pressure Inlet Roller Test Print (Paper Magazine A,
A2, B or C) in F:Functions.
IMPORTANT
• Print the test print with the maximum paper width which has been used.
2. Measure the lengths between 0 mm-line and 254 mm-line of right and left edges of the test print and
check that the difference is within 0.2 mm.
A
Left Right
Rear end G068467
IMPORTANT
• If the difference between the right and left measured values is ±0.2 mm or more, carry out the following
adjustment.
NOTE
• There is another method to check the difference. Cut the paper at the center and put them together to check the difference
between lines A and B.
36080 3/9
36080
3. Lift up paper advance units 1 and 2.

4. Remove the pressure guide. (two locks)
Locks
3. Mode
Pressure guide Paper advance unit 2
G068468
5. Check that the dimension of inlet roller adjusting screw of exposure advance unit is between 2.0 and 2.5
mm. If an adjustment is necessary, loosen the nut of the inlet roller and adjust the screw. (Loosen one
nut, adjust one screw.)
Exit roller nut
2.0 to 2.5 mm
Scales
Inlet roller nut
Inlet roller adjusting screw

2.0 to 2.5 mm
G072395
IMPORTANT
• Make a test print again. Measure the lengths between 0 mm-line and 254 mm-line on right and left edges of the
test print. If the difference is not within 0.2 mm, carry out the following adjustment.
• Adjust the zigzagging by turning the adjusting screw between 2.0 and 2.5 mm. If adjustment is performed out of
the range between 2.0 and 2.5 mm, the banding appears on the area 32 mm from the paper front end.
6. Loosen the fixing screw of the exposure advance unit inlet roller. (Loosen one fixing screw.)
7. Loosen the nut of the exposure advance unit inlet roller. (Loosen one nut.)
36080 4/9
36080
8. Adjust the adjusting screw of the exposure advance unit inlet roller. (one adjusting screw)
Exit roller nut
Exit roller fixing

screw
Pressure guide Inlet roller

fixing screw
3. Mode
Inlet roller Inlet roller nut
adjusting screw
G072393
Carry out adjustment for the advance error that is measured in ☞ 2 of Exposure Advance Unit Zigzagging Adjustment
referring to the following table.
When the measurement value on the LEFT is longer
Paper advance Rotation direction of the Rotation amount
error screw of the screw
(mm)
0.2 to 0.3 Counterclockwise Approximately 45°
0.4 Counterclockwise Approximately 60°
When the measurement value on the RIGHT is longer

Paper advance Rotation direction of the Rotation amount of the
error screw screw
(mm)
0.1 to 0.2 Clockwise Approximately 45°
0.3 Clockwise Approximately 60°
IMPORTANT
• Tighten the fixing screw of the exposure advance roller while the angle bracket of the pressure roller unit is
pressed in the direction indicated by the arrow.
Screwdriver
Pressure guide
G072394
36080 5/9
36080
9. Attach the pressure guide to the exposure advance unit.

10. Check the pressure of the pressure rollers at the exit and inlet sides in the exposure advance unit.
See ☞ Checking (pressure roller at the exit side).
See ☞ Checking (pressure roller at the inlet side).
11. Make a test print again by selecting Exposure Advance Pressure Inlet Roller Test Print (Paper
Magazine A, A2, B or C) in F:Functions.
12. Measure the lengths between 0 mm-line and 254 mm-line of right and left edges of the test print and
check that the difference is within 0.2 mm.
A
3. Mode
Left Right
Rear end G068467
IMPORTANT
• If the difference between the right and left measured values is ±0.2 mm or more, readjust from ☞ 6 of
Exposure Advance Unit Zigzagging Adjustment.
13. Adjust the exposure advance unit exit roller following the same procedure.
14. Check the Arm Unit 1 Zigzagging Correction.
☞ 36060
Checking (pressure roller at the exit side)
IMPORTANT
• When adjusting the pressure roller at the exit side in the exposure advance unit, check the followings since the
banding may be found at the area 32 mm from the paper leading end.
1. Turn the cam in the exposure advance unit to release the pressure of the pressure roller at the exit side
and set the paper.
36080 6/9
36080
2. Make fine adjustments of the cam in the exposure advance unit so that the pressure release amount of
the pressure roller at the exit side is the thickness of about one sheet of paper. Use the paper to check
that the pressure of the pressure roller at the exit side is equable at the right and left.
3. Mode
Cam
G072398
IMPORTANT
• If the pressure adjustment is required, perform ☞ 6 to ☞ 8 of Exposure Advance Unit Zigzagging
Adjustment.
3. Make some gray prints in the Print mode to see if the banding occurs at the area 32 mm from the paper
leading end.
32 mm
Leading
Rear end
end
G074601
NOTE
Checking (pressure roller at the inlet side)

IMPORTANT
• When adjusting the pressure roller at the inlet side in the exposure advance unit, check the followings since the
banding may be occurred at the area 24 to 27 mm from the paper rear end.
36080 7/9
36080
1. Turn the cam on the exposure advance unit to release the pressure of the pressure roller at the exit
side.
3. Mode
Cam
G072399
2. Release the pressure of the pressure roller at the exit side and set the paper. Make fine adjustments of
the cam in the exposure advance unit so that the pressure release amount of the pressure roller at the
inlet side is the thickness of about one sheet of paper.
36080 8/9
36080
3. Use the paper to check that the pressure of the pressure roller at the inlet side is equable at the right
and left.
3. Mode
Pressure roller at the inlet side
Cam
G072397
IMPORTANT
• If the pressure adjustment is required, perform ☞ 6 to ☞ 8 of Exposure Advance Unit Zigzagging
Adjustment.
4. Make some gray prints in the Print mode to see if the banding occurs at the area 24 to 27 mm from the
paper rear end.
Leading
end Rear end
24 to 27 mm
G074602
NOTE
36080 9/9
36090
Paper pressure operation correction

Maintenance → Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Paper Pressure Operation
Correction
3. Mode
M5384-00
! Explanation
The banding for each magazine type can be carried out by adjusting the space between the pressure roller of the exposure advance unit
and the paper.
IMPORTANT
• Carry out paper pressure operation correction for each paper type.
• Copy the paper width correction value that the correction is finished to the same paper type paper magazine.
! Paper Pressure Operation Correction (Initial value: 1) (input range: from 1 to 13)
Correct the pressure release of the pressure roller.
! Functions

Prints the gray test prints (13 patterns).
Test prints with the advance length of 152 mm to 164 mm is printed.
NOTE

Validate the Paper Pressure Operation Correction to make a test print.
A test print which number is registered to the paper pressure operation correction is made.
NOTE
G066121

36090 1/2
36090
! Rewind
The paper which has been loaded is rewound.
1. Select and execute Test Print via F:Functions.

NOTE
• 13 patterns of the test prints are made as shown in the list below.
• When the CVP (optional) has been installed, the print No. and the revolution pulse count are printed on the back print.
Print No. Revolution pulse count Test print advance
(pps) length (mm)
1 1733 152
2 1600 153
3. Mode
3 1545 154
4 1502 155
5 1466 156
6 1434 157
7 1405 158
8 1378 159
9 1353 160
10 1329 161
11 1307 162
12 1285 163
13 1265 164
2. Banding appears around 17 mm or 26 mm from the rear end on the test print. Check the table below
and enter the correction pattern No. as the correction value.
Banding position Correction Banding position Correction
Around 26 mm from the paper rear +2 Around 17 mm from the paper rear −2
edge edge
Example: Around 26 mm at the rear end Example: Around 17 mm at the rear end
Banding (26 mm at the rear end) −2 Banding (17 mm at the rear end)
+2
10 11 12 13
Test print with no
banding
Test print with no Print No.

banding
Print No.
Paper advance direction Paper advance direction
3. Carry out the procedure 1 and 2 for each paper magazine type.
36090 2/2
36100
White Border Width Correction

Maintenance → Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Printer Mechanical Adjustment → White Border Width Correction
3. Mode
M5385-00
! Explanation
The margin can be corrected for each paper width and surface.
IMPORTANT
• Perform the correction with any of paper magazine A, A2, B or C.
• This correction affects the exposure position both of prints with border and without border, because the image
exposure position is corrected.
! Paper Magazine (Input range: from 82.5 to 305 mm)

Specify the paper magazine to be corrected.
! Left Margin Correction (Initial value: 5.0 mm) (Input range: from 0.0 to 10.0 mm)
Correct the left margin of the test print so that it becomes 5.0 mm.
! Right Margin Correction (Initial value: 5.0 mm) (Input range: from 0.0 to 10.0 mm)
Correct the left margin of the test print so that it becomes 5.0 mm.
! Functions

Invalidate the correction value to make a test print.
NOTE
• A piece of paper with the advance length of 216 mm and the margin of 5.0 mm is printed.

Validate the correction value to make a test print.
36100 1/2
36100
NOTE
G066121
• A piece of paper with the advance length of 216 mm and the margin of 5.0 mm is printed.
! White Border Width Correction
IMPORTANT
• If the margin on the test print is 0.5 mm, the correction is not necessary.
3. Mode
☞ 22100
2. Check that the exposure center correction has been completed.
☞ 36070
4. Measure the right and left margins on the test print.
G068472
5. Enter the measured value in each item.

6. Carry out Test Print Confirmation of F: Functions and make sure that the margin is 5.0 mm.
36100 2/2
38000
Software
Software
Installing the system program
1. Insert the supplied system program CD into the CD drive and start Setup.exe in the CD-ROM.
Follow the instructions on the display to install it.
2. When the InstallShield Wizard display is shown, click Next.
3. If the Operation Selection display is shown, confirm that Update is selected. Then, click Next.
The Operation Selection display is shown only when the upgrade had been performed before.
Item Details
If Update is selected The system program will be upgraded to the version of the inserted CD.
3. Mode
If Go back to the previous version is selected The system program will be downgraded to the previous version.
• Example: If the version of the inserted CD is 4.0, the currently-used version is
3.0 and the previous version is 2.0, the system program will be downgraded to
Ver. 2.0.
4. If the Log Option display is shown, confirm that Create log files with this PC is selected. Then, click
Next.
This display is shown only when the maintenance application is installed to the PC for the first time.
IMPORTANT
• If two or more PCs on which the maintenance application is installed are connected to a single printer, configure
this setting as shown below.
• Select Create log files with this PC on a PC.
• Select Not create log files with this PC for other PC.
• In the case above, the detailed log data is saved only to the PC whose checkbox of Create log files with this PC
is selected.
5. When the Windows Installer start confirmation display is shown, click Next. (only for
LP7500/LP7600/LP7700/LP7900)
This display is shown only when the maintenance application is installed to the PC for the first time.
1. If License Agreement is shown, select I Agree ( ). Then, click Next.
2. If the message Completing Windows Installer 3.1 (KB893803) Installation Wizard is shown, select Do not restart now
( ), then click Finish.
3. If the Microsoft Visual C++ 2005 Redistributable Package display is shown, click Yes.
6. Installation starts.
7. When the InstallShield Wizard Complete display is shown, select Yes, I want to restart my computer
now., and click Finish.
8. The computer restarts automatically.
38000 1/2
38000
Software
3. Mode
38000 2/2
4000
4. Troubleshooting
Error and attention message regulation ................................................................................ 4001

Classification of errors and attention messages ...................................................................................................4001
Suffix number ......................................................................................................................................................4002
Diagnosis appendix for the failures: Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring .......... 4202
Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring (printer section) ....................................................................4202
Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring (processor) ............................................................................4203
Diagnosis appendix: Symptoms result from blowout of fuse ................................................. 4252
Symptoms result from blowout of fuse (printer section/processor section) ........................................................4252
Diagnosis appendix: Check the connection of the PC and printer ........................................ 4260
Checking the connection between the PC and printer .........................................................................................4260
Diagnosis appendix: Diagnosis flowchart .............................................................................. 4302
Laser temperature control status of Status Display does not change from Temperature control started to
Temperature control completed. [LASER] .........................................................................................................4302
4 Troubleshooting
Diagnosis appendix: [F] ......................................................................................................... 4600
Replenishment cartridge installation section troubleshooting flow ....................................................................4600
Recovery procedure 1 from the replenishment error ...........................................................................................4610
Taking countermeasures after the errors No.05916 to No.05921 occurs ............................................................4630
Attention message: Processor ............................................................................................. 40500
No. 00500[N] Add water to the Refilling Water Tank. ...................................................................................40500
No. 00501[N] The replenisher switch is turned on. ........................................................................................40500
No. 00502[N] Add replenishment solution to the replenishment tank. ...........................................................40500
No. 00503[N] [SM] Empty the Effluent Tank. ...............................................................................................40500
No. 00505 Remove the prints from the Print Sorter Unit. ...............................................................................40500
No. 00506 Close the Dryer Cover. ..................................................................................................................40500
No. 00507 Close the Processor Top Cover. .....................................................................................................40500
No. 00508 Paper remains in the processor. Are you sure you want to turn the drive off? ..............................40500
No. 00510 Attach the Print Conveyor Unit. ....................................................................................................40500
No. 00515 Set the Rack Stopper. .....................................................................................................................40500
No. 00520 Sensors may be dirty. .....................................................................................................................40500
No. 00521 Remove the prints from the sorter tray (large) ..............................................................................40500
Attention message: Tablet Replenishment .......................................................................... 40600
No. 00600[J] The Tablet Cartridge is empty. CD ...........................................................................................40600
No. 00601[J] The Tablet Cartridge is empty.BF .............................................................................................40600
No. 00602[J] The Tablet Cartridge is empty. STB ..........................................................................................40600
No. 00603[J] Add water to the Water Supply Tank. .......................................................................................40600
No. 00604[J] Add water to the SW/DW Tank. ...............................................................................................40600
No. 00605[J] Attach the Tablet Cartridge. CD ................................................................................................40600
No. 00606[J] Attach the Tablet Cartridge.BF .................................................................................................40600
No. 00607[J] Attach the Tablet Cartridge. STB ..............................................................................................40600
No. 00608[J] Attach the Tablet Replenishment Unit. .....................................................................................40600
No. 00609[J] The Tablet kit is empty. .............................................................................................................40600
No. 00610[J] Empty the Effluent Tank.### ....................................................................................................40600
4000 1/8
4000
Attention message: SM replenishment ................................................................................ 40700

No. 00700[SM] Replace the Replenishment Package with a new one.P-# .....................................................40700
No. 00701[SM] Attach the Replenishment Package.P-# ................................................................................40700
No. 00702[SM] Add water to the Water Supply Tank. ...................................................................................40700
No. 00703[SM] Would you like to initialize the remaining amount of the Replenishment Package? ...........40700
No. 00704[SM] Press the [YES: Execute] to initialize the remaining amount of the Replenishment Package. .......
40700
No. 00705[SM] Replace the Replenishment Package with a new one.P-# .....................................................40700
Attention message: F replenishment ................................................................................... 40900
No. 00902[F] Install the replenisher cartridge. ................................................................................................40900
No. 00903[F] Close the replenisher section door. ...........................................................................................40900
No. 00905[F] Install the new replenisher cartridge. ........................................................................................40900
No. 00906[F] It is ready to replace the replenisher cartridge. .........................................................................40900
No. 00907[F] Collect the waste solution. ........................................................................................................40900
No. 00908[F] Open operation was not completed correctly. Replenishment solution preparation will resume. ....
40900
4 Troubleshooting
No. 00909[F] Replenishment tank is empty. Cannot start the operation. ......................................................40900
No. 00910[F] Preparing the replenishment solution. One moment please . . . ..............................................40900
No. 00912[F] Replenishment solution was created. Initialize replenishment data and restart replenishment. ........
40900
No. 00913[F] Mixing Replenisher cannot be started. .....................................................................................40900
No. 00914[F] PSR is running out. ...................................................................................................................40900
No. 00916[F] PSR is empty. ............................................................................................................................40900
No. 00918[F] Replenish PSR. .........................................................................................................................40900
Attention message: Printer .................................................................................................. 41000
No. 01026 Close the Printer Top Cover. .........................................................................................................41000
No. 01029 The measurement failed. Measure it again. ...................................................................................41000
No. 01047 Close printer door. .........................................................................................................................41000
No. 01074 Sensors may be dirty. .....................................................................................................................41000
No. 01000-01132 Attention messages not explained in the Service Manual ..................................................41000
Attention message: Scanner/ Film Carrier ........................................................................... 41300
Attention message: Disk/Media ........................................................................................... 41500
No. 01501-01549 See the EZ Controller Troubleshooting Manual for Corrective action of Attention message. ....
41500
Attention message: Colorimeter .......................................................................................... 41550
No. 01552 The paper in the Colorimeter is too short. It cannot be measured. ................................................41550
No. 01555 The calibration plate data is out of range. ......................................................................................41550
No. 01556 The Colorimeter Unit is not set. ....................................................................................................41550
4000 2/8
4000
Attention message: NMC/Printers in common ..................................................................... 41620

No. 01750 Communication with the printer failed. The printer may not be active, or the LAN cable may not be
connected. ..........................................................................................................................................................41620
No. 01751 There was a time difference of more than 2 minutes between the clocks of printer and PC. The printer
clock was adjusted to match the PC clock. ........................................................................................................41620
No. 01753 Printer is not ready. Start the printer. ...........................................................................................41620
No. 01754 Profile data registered to the printer is not compatible with that of the application. .....................41620
No. 01756 Printer profile versions are inconsistent. .......................................................................................41620
No. 01757 Execute the startup checks. ............................................................................................................41620
No. 01758 Maintenance is proceeding. Close the Maintenance screen. .......................................................41620
No. 01759 Adjusting the temperature. One moment please. .........................................................................41620
No. 01760 Installation is proceeding. One moment please. ..........................................................................41620
No. 01761 Printer is offline. Confirm that the circuit breaker of the printer is ON and that the printer is
connected correctly. ...........................................................................................................................................41620
41620
Attention message: Software upgrade ................................................................................ 41800
4 Troubleshooting
No. 01801 Execute software upgrade. .............................................................................................................41800
No. 01804 The printer version is incorrect. Upgrade the printer software. ....................................................41800
No. 01805 The printer program is corrupted. Run the recovery software. ....................................................41800
Attention message: External system ................................................................................... 41821
No. 1821 For corrective action of the attention message, see the d-Storage/ CD-R external writing system Service
Manual. ..............................................................................................................................................................41821
Attention message: Main ..................................................................................................... 41900
No. 01920 Capacity Booster Key was not detected. Confirm the connection status. ....................................41900
Attention message: Edit ....................................................................................................... 43370
43370
Attention message: External system ................................................................................... 44200
No. 4200-4231 For corrective action of the attention message, see the d-Storage/ CD-R external writing system
Service Manual. .................................................................................................................................................44200
Attention message: Bravo II ................................................................................................ 44350
No. 4350-4358 See the Bravo II Service Manual for Corrective action of Attention message. .....................44350
4000 3/8
4000
Error message: Processor 1 ................................................................................................ 45500

No. 05500 The processing solution temperature is above the safety range. P1 ..............................................45500
No. 05501 The processing solution temperature is above the safety range. P2 ..............................................45500
No. 05502 The processing solution temperature is above the safety range. PS ..............................................45500
No. 05503 The dryer temperature is above the safety range. ..........................................................................45500
No. 05504 The processing solution temperature is below the processing range. P1 ......................................45500
No. 05507 The dryer temperature is below the processing range. ..................................................................45500
No. 05508 The processing solution level is too low. .......................................................................................45500
No. 05509 The circulation amount has decreased. ..........................................................................................45500
No. 05510 Processor A/D conversion error. ....................................................................................................45500
No. 05511 The circulation pump has stopped. CD ..........................................................................................45500
No. 05512 The circulation pump has stopped. CD2 ........................................................................................45500
No. 05513 The circulation pump has stopped. BF ..........................................................................................45500
No. 05514 The circulation pump has stopped. BF2 ........................................................................................45500
4 Troubleshooting
No. 05515 The circulation pump has stopped. STB1 ......................................................................................45500
No. 05519 Thermosensor error. P1 .................................................................................................................45500
No. 05522 Dryer Thermosensor error. ............................................................................................................45500
No. 05524 Refilling water operation error. CD-W ..........................................................................................45500
No. 05525 Refilling water operation error. BF-W ..........................................................................................45500
No. 05526 Refilling water operation error. STB1-W ......................................................................................45500
Error: Processor 2 ............................................................................................................... 45530
No. 05530 The Processor Top Cover is open. .................................................................................................45530
No. 05531 The dryer cover is open. ................................................................................................................45530
No. 05532 The Processing Solution Safety Thermostat has activated. ...........................................................45530
No. 05533 The Dryer Safety Thermostat has activated. ..................................................................................45530
No. 05534 Print Sorter Unit operation error. ...................................................................................................45530
No. 05535 Paper has jammed in the processor section. ..................................................................................45530
No. 05537 The Rack Stopper is not set. ..........................................................................................................45530
No. 05538 Backup data error. Processor ........................................................................................................45530
No. 05539 Print Conveyor Unit was removed. ...............................................................................................45530
No. 05545 Print Sensor (Left) error. ................................................................................................................45530
No. 05547 Print Sensor (Right) error. .............................................................................................................45530
No. 05548 Dryer Lane Select Sensor error. .....................................................................................................45530
No. 05553 Print sensor (center) error ..............................................................................................................45530
No. 05549 Drive Motor Revolution Count Auto Adjustment error. ...............................................................45530
No. 05550 Drive Motor has stopped. ..............................................................................................................45530
No. 05551 Paper Guide operation error. ..........................................................................................................45530
No. 05552 Dryer Lane Select Guide operation error. ......................................................................................45530
4000 4/8
4000
Error message: Tablet replenishment ................................................................................. 45600

No. 05600[J] Tablet Drum operation error. CD ..............................................................................................45600
No. 05601[J] Tablet Drum operation error. BF ...............................................................................................45600
No. 05602[J] Tablet Drum operation error. STB ............................................................................................45600
No. 05603[J] A tablet has jammed. .................................................................................................................45600
No. 05604[J] A tablet has jammed. BF ...........................................................................................................45600
No. 05605[J] A tablet has jammed. .................................................................................................................45600
No. 05609[J] Printing cannot continue without replenishment. CD ...............................................................45600
No. 05610[J] Printing cannot continue without replenishment. BF ................................................................45600
No. 05611[J] Printing cannot continue without replenishment. STB ..............................................................45600
No. 05612[J] Tablet Replenishment Elevator operation error. .......................................................................45600
No. 05613[J] The processing solution level is too low. STB1 ......................................................................45600
Error message: SM replenishment ...................................................................................... 45700
No. 05700[SM] Replenishment pump operation error. CD-A ........................................................................45700
No. 05701[SM] Replenishment pump operation error. CD-B ........................................................................45700
No. 05702[SM] Replenishment pump operation error. CD-C ........................................................................45700
4 Troubleshooting
No. 05703[SM] Replenishment pump operation error. CD-W .......................................................................45700
No. 05704[SM] Replenishment pump operation error. BF-A .........................................................................45700
No. 05705[SM] Replenishment pump operation error. BF-B .........................................................................45700
No. 05706[SM] Replenishment pump operation error. STB ...........................................................................45700
No. 05708[SM] Replenishment Package solution remaining error. ................................................................45700
No. 05709[SM] Replenishment Package solution remaining error. ................................................................45700
No. 05710[SM] Refilling water operation error. CD-W .................................................................................45700
No. 05711[SM] Refilling water operation error. BF-W ..................................................................................45700
No. 05712[SM] Refilling water operation error. STB1-W .............................................................................45700
4000 5/8
4000
Error message: F replenishment ......................................................................................... 45900

No. 05900[F] Replenisher cartridge open motor operation error. ...................................................................45900
No. 05901[F] Replenishment solution level sensor error. P1R .......................................................................45900
No. 05902[F] Replenishment solution level sensor error. P2RA ....................................................................45900
No. 05903[F] Replenishment solution level sensor error. P2RB ....................................................................45900
No. 05904[F] Replenishment solution level sensor error. PSR .......................................................................45900
No. 05905[F] P1R replenishment solution output amount/replenishment solution level management is abnormal.
45900
45900
45900
No. 05908[F] Failed to open the replenisher cartridge. ...................................................................................45900
No. 05909[F] Cartridge cleaning valve/Agitation solenoid valve is abnormal. P1R ......................................45900
No. 05910[F] Cartridge cleaning valve cleaning valve is abnormal. P2RA ...................................................45900
No. 05911[F] Cartridge cleaning valve cleaning valve is abnormal. P2RB ....................................................45900
No. 05912[F] Predetermined process amount was exceeded. .........................................................................45900
4 Troubleshooting
No. 05913[F] An error occurred in the replenisher section. ............................................................................45900
No. 05914[F] Temperature and humidity sensor error. ...................................................................................45900
No. 05916[F] Solution level of the processing tank goes below the processable level. P1 ............................45900
No. 05917[F] Solution level of the processing tank goes below the processable level. P2 ............................45900
No. 05918[F] Solution level of the processing tank goes below the processable level. PS1 ..........................45900
No. 05922[F] Replenisher section door is open. .............................................................................................45900
No. 05923[F] Solution remains in the replenishment tank. .............................................................................45900
Error message: Printer 1 ..................................................................................................... 46000
No. 06012 Paper did not load. Paper Magazine A .........................................................................................46000
No. 06013 Paper did not load. Paper Magazine B ..........................................................................................46000
No. 06014 Paper did not rewind. Paper Magazine A .....................................................................................46000
No. 06015 Paper did not rewind. Paper Magazine B .....................................................................................46000
No. 06016 Paper Cutter operation error. .........................................................................................................46000
No. 06049 Pressure Guide operation error. .....................................................................................................46000
No. 06069 The printer top cover is open. ........................................................................................................46000
No. 06073 Synchronous Sensor error. .............................................................................................................46000
No. 06075 G Laser control error. ....................................................................................................................46000
No. 06076 Polygon Mirror control error. ........................................................................................................46000
No. 06077 Interlock error. ...............................................................................................................................46000
No. 06081 Backup data error. Printer .............................................................................................................46000
No. 06082 Setup error. ....................................................................................................................................46000
No. 06087 Laser Control PCB system error. ...................................................................................................46000
4000 6/8
4000

No. 06101 Paper Hold Motor operation error. ................................................................................................46100
No. 06104 Printer Door is open. ......................................................................................................................46100
No. 06106 G Laser light source status error. ...................................................................................................46100
No. 06107 R Laser temperature is out of range. ..............................................................................................46100
No. 06112 Could not load the paper. Paper Magazine C ...............................................................................46100
No. 06113 Paper did not rewind. Paper Magazine C .....................................................................................46100
No. 06134 Paper Supply Pressure Change Motor operation error. .................................................................46100
No. 06135 Arm Unit 1 operation error. ...........................................................................................................46100
No. 06136 Exposure Advance Pressure Change Motor 1 operation error. .....................................................46100
No. 06138 Paper Advance Arm Motor (Left) operation error. .......................................................................46100
No. 06139 Paper Advance Arm Motor (Right) operation error. .....................................................................46100
No. 06140 Lane Select Motor (Left) operation error. .....................................................................................46100
No. 06141 Lane Select Motor (Right) operation error. ...................................................................................46100
No. 06142 Paper Advance Pressure Change Motor (Left) operation error. ....................................................46100
4 Troubleshooting
No. 06143 Paper Advance Pressure Change Motor (Right) operation error. ..................................................46100
No. 06148 Paper End Sensor A error. .............................................................................................................46100
No. 06149 Paper End Sensor B error. .............................................................................................................46100
No. 06150 Paper End Sensor C error. .............................................................................................................46100
No. 06151 Paper Loading Sensor error. ..........................................................................................................46100
No. 06152 Zigzagging Correction Sensor (Left) error. ...................................................................................46100
No. 06153 Zigzagging Correction Sensor (Right) error. .................................................................................46100
No. 06155 Exposure Start Sensor error. ..........................................................................................................46100
No. 06157 Paper Sensor 1 error. ......................................................................................................................46100
No. 06158 Paper Sensor 2 (Left) error. ...........................................................................................................46100
No. 06159 Paper Sensor 2 (Center) error. .......................................................................................................46100
No. 06160 Paper Sensor 2 (Right) error. .........................................................................................................46100
No. 06173 Printer Door 3 is open. It may be adversely affect print quality. ..................................................46100
No. 06177 Laser Unit temperature is out of range. .........................................................................................46100
No. 06179 B/G Laser Output Unit error. .........................................................................................................46100
No. 06187 Setup calculation error. ..................................................................................................................46100
No. 06194 Laser Control PCB control error. ...................................................................................................46100
No. 06195 Paper did not load. Paper Magazine A2 .......................................................................................46100
No. 06196 Paper did not rewind. Paper Magazine A2 ...................................................................................46100
No. 06197 Paper End Sensor A2 error. ...........................................................................................................46100
No. 06198 Laser Unit EE-PROM control error. ..............................................................................................46100
No. 06199 Pressure Release Motor A2 operation error. ..................................................................................46100
No. 06200 Width Change Motor A2 operation error. .....................................................................................46100
No. 06202 Paper did not rewind. Paper Magazine A .....................................................................................46100
4000 7/8
4000

No. 06203 Setup error. ....................................................................................................................................46200
No. 06204 Setup error. ....................................................................................................................................46200
No. 06205 Setup error. ....................................................................................................................................46200
No. 06208 Paper has jammed in the Paper Supply Unit. ................................................................................46200
No. 06209 Paper has jammed in the Exposure Advance Unit. ........................................................................46200
No. 06210 Paper remains in the Paper Supply Unit. .......................................................................................46200
No. 06211 Paper remains in the Exposure Advance Unit. ..............................................................................46200
No. 06220 B Laser temperature is out of range. ..............................................................................................46200
No. 06221 Paper has jammed in the Paper Advance Unit. ..............................................................................46200
No. 06222 Paper has jammed in the Processor loading unit. ..........................................................................46200
No. 06223 Paper remains in the Paper Advance Unit. ....................................................................................46200
No. 06224 Paper remains in the Processor loading unit. .................................................................................46200
No. 06228 Paper did not load. Paper Magazine B ..........................................................................................46200
No. 06229 Could not load the paper. Paper Magazine C ...............................................................................46200
4 Troubleshooting
No. 06230 Paper did not load. Paper Magazine A2 .......................................................................................46200
No. 06234 Paper Loading Sensor error. ..........................................................................................................46200
No. 06235 Exposure Start Sensor error. ..........................................................................................................46200
Error message: Scanner/ Film Carrier ................................................................................. 46300
Error message: Colorimeter ................................................................................................ 46550
No. 06551 Paper has jammed in the Colorimeter Unit. ...................................................................................46550
No. 06554 Calibration Plate advance error. ....................................................................................................46550
No. 06555 Set the Colorimeter Unit. ...............................................................................................................46550
Error message: NMC/Software upgrade/Image Processing ................................................ 46620
No. 06621-06833 For corrective actions, see EZ Controller Service Manual ................................................46620
No. 06680 Network communication error. ......................................................................................................46620
No. 06681 Network communication error. ......................................................................................................46620
Error message: Main ........................................................................................................... 46900
No. 06901 ARCNET communication error. ....................................................................................................46900
No. 06903 Serial communication error. ..........................................................................................................46900
No. 06909 CPU was reset. Abort the process. ................................................................................................46900
No. 06921 PCB error. ......................................................................................................................................46900
No. 06931 Backup data error. Printer I/F Main PCB .....................................................................................46900
Error message: Edit ............................................................................................................. 49000
Error message: Bravo I/CD-R external writing system (directly connecting to Rimage) ...... 49350
No. 9350-9381 For corrective action of the error message, see the Bravo II Service Manual and the d-Storage/
CD-R external writing system Service Manual. ................................................................................................49350
Attention message: Main controller/ Setting module ........................................................... 49450
No. 10000-15302 Refer to the Troubleshooting Manual for Corrective action of Attention message. ..........49450
4000 8/8
4001
Error and attention message regulation
Classification of errors and attention messages
! Attention message
Messages shown to provide information in normal processing are attention messages.
• If replacing consumable parts is necessary
• If the judgment of operator is necessary
• If a simple operation mistake has been made
! Error
Messages shown in abnormal conditions are error messages.
• If there is something wrong with the system
• If a serious operation mistake has been made, performing the operation not allowed to be performed
! Error/Attention message number

Error/Attention message number consists of main and suffix numbers. For 01234-00001, 01234 is the main number and 00001 is the
suffix number.
4. Troubleshooting
Main number
It identifies the content of Error/Attention message.
Operator takes a corrective action judging with the content and the countermeasure represented by the main number.
Suffix number
It identifies error occurring place and condition.
Service personnel figures out the error occurring condition judging with the content of the suffix number and performs the diagnosis.
IMPORTANT
• The digit number of suffix number for the Error/Attention message varies depending on the model. However, the suffix
number in five digits are described in the Service Manual.
• Example: Service Manual (suffix number)

• No.05900 Replenisher cartridge open motor operation error.
Suffix Condition
number
00001 When the replenisher cartridge setting part is moved to the lower position for opening the replenisher cartridge, the
Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Upper) does not turn to LIGHT even after a specified time has passed.
Model Display
LP7500/LP7600/LP7700/LP7900 No.05900-1 Replenisher cartridge open motor operation error.
QSS-37 No.05900-00001 Replenisher cartridge open motor operation error.
NOTE
• For the content of suffix number, see Suffix number.
☞ 4002
4001 1/1
4002
Suffix number
! Types of suffix number

Suffix numbers can be classified to the following three types.
• No suffix numbers
• Displays the condition
• Displays the total of bit operation
! No suffix numbers
If the occurring condition is single
Example 1
Suffix number Condition
00000 The cover is opened.
! Displays the condition

If the occurring condition is multiple and only one of them is the object of the occurring cause, its suffix number appears in five digits.
4. Troubleshooting
Example 2
00001 The sensor does not detect DARK.
00002 The sensor does not detect LIGHT.
! Displays the total of bit operation

If the occurring condition is multiple and some of them are possible to be the objects of the occurring cause at the same time, the total
of the target suffix numbers (bit) appears.
NOTE
• The bit operation value appears by decimal digit.
Example 3
Suffix number (bit) Condition
00001 Sensor 1 does not detect.
NOTE
• If the sensors 1 and 3 of example 3 are the objects, 00005 is shown. If all the sensors are the objects, 00031 is shown.
4002 1/1
4202
Diagnosis appendix for the failures: Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring
Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring (printer section)
Reference
☞ Printer I/F main PCB ☞ Capacity booster PCB*1 ☞ Printer control PCB
☞ Laser control PCB ☞ G laser driver ☞ G-AOM driver
☞ Printer I/O PCB 1 ☞ Printer I/O PCB 2 ☞ Printer I/O PCB 3
☞ Triple magazine PCB ☞ Quad magazine PCB ☞ CVP PCB
☞ Printer power supply 1 (PS1) ☞ Printer power supply 2 (PS2) ☞ Printer power supply 3 (PS3)
☞ Printer power supply 4 (PS6) ☞ Printer power supply 5 (PS4) ☞ Laser power supply (PS5)
☞ Checking condition of wiring connection
failure
! Printer I/F main PCB

Connector No. Symptom
J/P1206 Connects to the control The processor drive starts but the printer program does not start
power supply (+5 V) The message Output device is not available. One moment please. . . appears when the
Maintenance Application is started
4. Troubleshooting
J/P1207 Connects to the laser control No.06901-00521 ARCNET communication error. Printer Processor LASER occurs.
J/P1208 PCB (ARCNET)
J/P1211 Connects to the capacity No.01920-# # # # # Capacity Booster Key was not detected. Confirm the connection
booster*1 status. occurs.
J/P1213 Connects to the display Nothing is shown on the display module.
J/P1214 module (keyboard PCB) No key on the display module responds.
J/P455 Connects to the laser control No.06194-00008 Laser Control PCB control error. occurs.
PCB (LVPECL)
J/P254 Connects to the ATX No.01750-00000 Communication with the printer failed. The printer may not be
motherboard (LAN) active, or the LAN cable may not be connected. occurs.
*1. Used only for LP7500/LP7600/LP7700/LP7900, 3702/3703/3704/3705

The suffix number of error message varies depending on the capacity booster PCB installed.
! Capacity booster PCB*1

J/P860 Connects to the printer I/F No.01920-# # # # # Capacity Booster Key was not detected. Confirm the connection
main PCB. status. occurs.
J/P861 Connects capacity booster No.01920-00064 Capacity Booster Key was not detected. Confirm the connection
J/P862 PCBs F and G. status. occurs.
CN1 Unused -
! Printer control PCB

J/P200 Connects to printer I/O PCB Printing is not started.
1. On the Input Check display, Interlock Switch 1 (Printer Top Cover)Interlock Switch
(Printer Door 1, 2) shows OFF.
J/P201 Connects to printer I/O PCB Printing is not started.
2.
J/P202 Connects to printer I/O PCB No.06224-00003 Paper remains in the Processor loading unit. occurs.
3.
3.
4202 1/9
4202

J/P204 Connects to the quad When the status of Magazine Unit A/Magazine Unit A2-1 is confirmed in Input Checks, all
magazine PCB. the paper magazine code sensors are DARK.
Connects to the triple No.01047-00002 Close printer door. occurs when printing is started.
magazine PCB.
J/P206 Connects to printer I/O PCB No.06210-00005 Paper remains in the Paper Supply Unit. occurs.
2.
J/P207 Connects to printer I/O PCB No.06211-00001 Paper remains in the Exposure Advance Unit. occurs.
3.
J/P208 Connects to the triple No.06227-00001 Paper did not load. Paper Magazine A occurs when printing is started.
magazine PCB.
3.
J/P210 Connects to the CVP PCB. Correction value is not printed.
J/P211 Connects to paper magazine The magazine is not detected. (All magazine code sensors B/C are DARK.)
code sensor B/C.
J/P212 Connects to the laser control No.06087-00022 Laser Control PCB system error. occurs when printing is started.
PCB.
4. Troubleshooting
J/P213 Connects to the quad No.06196-00002 Paper did not rewind. Paper Magazine A2 or No.06210-00004 Paper
magazine PCB. remains in the Paper Supply Unit. occurs.
J/P214 Connects to printer I/O PCB No.06137-00001 Exposure Advance Pressure Change Motor 2 operation error. occurs.
1. No.06186-00001 Exposure Advance Pressure Change Motor 3 operation error. occurs.
J/P215 Unused −
J/P218 Connects to printer power No.06901-00512 ARCNET communication error. Printer Processor LASER occurs.
supply 5 (5 V-2)
J/P219 Connecting to the laser No.06901-00521 ARCNET communication error. Printer ProcessorLASER occurs.
J/P220 control PCB
(LASER)
J/P221 Connects to the printer I/F No.06901-00009 ARCNET communication error. Printer Processor occurs.
J/P222 main PCB (ARCNET) No.06901-00008 ARCNET communication error. Processor occurs.
J/P223 Connects to the processor No.06901-00513 ARCNET communication error. Printer LASER occurs.
J/P224 control PCB (ARCNET) No.06901-00512 ARCNET communication error. LASER occurs.
J/P225 Inputs the power supply No.06136-00001 Exposure Advance Pressure Change Motor 1 operation error. occurs.
(+24 V, GND) from laser
power supply 3.
J/P226 Connects to the buzzer. The buzzer does not sound.
! Laser control PCB

J/P1501 Connects to the laser unit. No.06073-00003 Synchronous Sensor error. occurs when printing is started.
J/P1502 Connects to the G-AOM No.06073-00002 Synchronous Sensor error. occurs when printing is started.
driver.
J/P1504 Connects to the laser unit. • In Printer Information on Status Display, Laser temperature control status does not
change from Temperature control started for five minutes or more.
J/P1506 Inputs the power supply (+5 The following symptom appears when printing is started.
V) from printer power • No.06901-00512 ARCNET communication error. LASER occurs.
supply 5.
J/P1508 Connects to the G-AOM The following symptom appears when printing is started.
driver. • No.06073-00002 Synchronous Sensor error. occurs.
• Unexposured prints are output.
J/P1509 Connects to the laser unit. No malfunctions in the operations will occur on this condition.
J/P1510 Unused −
4202 2/9
4202

J/P1513 Connects to the printer I/F No.06194-00008 Laser Control PCB control error. occurs.
main PCB (LVPECL)
J/P1515 Connects to the laser unit. The following symptom appears when printing is started.
• No.06076-00001 Polygon Mirror control error. occurs.
J/P1516 Connects the printer control No.06901-00521 ARCNET communication error. Printer ProcessorLASER occurs.
J/P1517 PCB (ARCNET).
J/P1519 Connects to the G laser No.06075-00007 G Laser control error. occurs.
driver.
J/P1520 Connects to the printer No.06087-00022 Laser Control PCB system error. occurs when printing is started.
control PCB.
J/P1521 Connects to the printer Printing is not started.
control PCB.
J/P1522 Connects to the laser unit The message Temperature control started is shown and the display does not change.
and connects the inner Via input check, Laser Unit Thermosensor and Inner Temperature is 0.0.
thermosensor.
J/P1532 Connects to the laser unit. • In Printer Information on Status Display, Laser temperature control status does not
4. Troubleshooting
change from Temperature control started for five minutes or more.
J/P1533 Interlock switch (printer top • When confirmed by input check, the interlock switch of the printer supply section turns
cover) on (printer doors 1 and 2) but the interlock switch of the engine section turns off (printer
doors 1 and 2).
J/P1534 Unused −
J/P1535 Connects to printer I/O PCB • When confirmed by input check, the interlock switch (for printer doors 1 and 2) and
1 (24 V-3). interlock switch (printer top cover) turns off.
J/P1541 Inputs the power supply • In Printer Information on Status Display, Laser temperature control status does not
(+24 V) from laser power change from Temperature control started for five minutes or more.
supply.
J/P1543 Connects to the G-AOM No.06073-00002 Synchronous Sensor error. occurs when printing is started.
driver.
J/P1551 Connects laser unit cooling Laser unit cooling fans 1 and 2, laser control box cooling fan, and the laser unit heater do not
fans 1 and 2, laser control operate.
box cooling fan 1 and the No malfunctions in the operations will occur on this condition.
laser unit heater.
! G laser driver
J/P1664 Connects to the laser control No.06075-00007 G Laser control error. occurs.
PCB.
J/P1665 Inputs the power supply (+5 No.06106-00001 G Laser light source status error. occurs.
V) from printer power
supply 5.
! G-AOM driver
J/P1636 Connects to the laser control No.06073-00002 Synchronous Sensor error. occurs when printing is started.
PCB.
J/P1637 Connects to the laser unit.
J/P1638 Connects to the laser control No.06073-00002 Synchronous Sensor error. occurs when printing is started.
J/P1639 PCB. The following symptom appears when printing is started.
• No.06073-00002 Synchronous Sensor error. occurs.
4202 3/9
4202
! Printer I/O PCB 1

J/P232 Connects to the counter. The counter stops operation.
J/P233 Connects to paper advance No malfunctions in the operations will occur on this condition.
section cooling fan 1 and the
quad magazine PCB
(option).
J/P234 Connects to printer I/O PCB Control box cooling fan 2 does not rotate.
3.
J/P235 Power supply (+24V) from No malfunctions in the operations will occur on this condition.
printer power supply 3
(without the optional
magazine)
Power supply (+24V) from
printer power supply 3 (with
the triple magazine installed)
Power supply (+24V) from No.06200-00001 Width Change Motor A2 operation error. occurs when printing is started
printer power supply 3 (with using magazine A2.
the quad magazine installed)
4. Troubleshooting
J/P237 Printer power supply 1, No.06136-00001 Exposure Advance Pressure Change Motor 1 operation error. occurs.
printer power supply 2,
printer power supply 3,
printer power supply 4
(when the quad magazine is
installed)
J/P238 Inputs the AC power supply No.06136-00001 Exposure Advance Pressure Change Motor 1 operation error. occurs.
from the Processor relay
PCB.
J/P239 Connects to the interlock • When confirmed by input check, the interlock switch (printer door 2) turns off.
switch (printer door 2).
J/P240 Connects to the interlock • When confirmed by input check, the interlock switch (printer door 1) and interlock
switch (printer door 1), switch (printer door 1 and 4) turn off.
interlock switch (printer
doors 1 and 4) (when the
quad magazine is installed).
J/P241 Connects to the laser control • When confirmed by input check, the interlock switch (for printer doors 1 and 2) and
PCB. interlock switch (printer top cover) turns off.
J/P242 Connects to the printer I/O No.06016-00004 Paper Cutter operation error. occurs.
PCB 2 and paper end sensor
B.
J/P243 Printer control PCB No.06137-00001 Exposure Advance Pressure Change Motor 2 operation error. or
No.06186-00001 Exposure Advance Pressure Change Motor 3 operation error. is
shown.
J/P244 Exposure advance pressure No.06186-00001 Exposure Advance Pressure Change Motor 3 operation error. occurs.
change motor 3
J/P245 Connects to the printer Printing is not started.
control PCB. On the Input Check display, Interlock Switch 1 (Printer Top Cover)Interlock Switch
(Printer Door 1, 2) shows OFF.
J/P246 Connects to the triple No.06210-00001 Paper remains in the Paper Supply Unit. occurs.
magazine PCB (option).
Connects to the quad No.06210-00001 Paper remains in the Paper Supply Unit. occurs.
from printer power supply 5
(+5V)
J/P248 Connects to exposure No.06137-00001 Exposure Advance Pressure Change Motor 2 operation error. occurs.
advance pressure change
motors 1 and 2.
4202 4/9
4202

J/P249 Connects to exposure No.06208-00001 Paper has jammed in the Paper Supply Unit. occurs.
advance motors 1 and 2.
J/P250 Connects to paper magazine No.06112-00001 Could not load the paper. Paper Magazine C or No.06112-00001 Could
motors B and C. not load the paper. Paper Magazine C occurs when printing is started.
(IL24 V-2) from printer
power supply 1.
J/P252 Connects to printer I/O PCB No.06101-00001 Paper Hold Motor operation error. occurs.
2.
J/P253 Connects to the triple No.06012-00001 Paper did not load. Paper Magazine A occurs when printing is started.
magazine unit PCB (option).
Connects to the quad No malfunctions in the operations will occur on this condition.
J/P254 Inputs the power supply No.06013-00001 Paper did not load. Paper Magazine B occurs when printing is started
from printer power supply 2 using magazine B.
(+36V)
J/P255 Connects to the CVP PCB. The CVP unit does not operate.
J/P256 Connects to paper advance No.06049-00001 Pressure Guide operation error. occurs.
4. Troubleshooting
motor 2.
J/P257 Connects to control box Control box cooling fan 1 does not rotate.
cooling fan 1.
! Printer I/O PCB 2

J/P258 Connects to the paper cut No.06016-00004 Paper Cutter operation error. occurs when printing is started.
motor.
J/P259 Connects to the paper hold No.06101-00002 Paper Hold Motor operation error. occurs.
motor and paper hold sensor.
J/P260 Connects to the paper supply No.06134-00002 Paper Supply Pressure Change Motor operation error. occurs.
pressure change sensor and
paper supply pressure
change motor.
J/P261 Connects to the cut home No.06016-00004 Paper Cutter operation error. occurs.
sensor and cut end sensor
J/P262 Connects to the printer No.06016-00004 Paper Cutter operation error. occurs.
control PCB.
J/P263 Power supply (IL5V) from No.06016-00004 Paper Cutter operation error. occurs.
the printer I/O PCB 1
J/P264 Power supply (IL36 V, No.06012-00001 Paper did not load. Paper Magazine A occurs when printing is started.
IL24V) from printer I/O
PCB 1
J/P265 Connects to paper advance No.06135-00001 Arm Unit 1 operation error. occurs when printing is started.
motor 1.
J/P266 Connects to the paper supply No.06135-00001 Arm Unit 1 operation error. occurs.
motor B/C and paper supply
arm motor (right).
J/P267 Paper supply motor A (when No.06012-00002 Paper did not load. Paper Magazine A occurs when printing is started.
the triple magazine/quad
magazine is connected)
J/P268 Paper supply motor (left) No.06135-00001 Arm Unit 1 operation error. occurs.
4202 5/9
4202
! Printer I/O PCB 3

J/P271 Connects to the lane select No.06140-00002 Lane Select Motor (Left) operation error. occurs.
motor (left).
J/P272 Connects to the lane select No.06141-00002 Lane Select Motor (Right) operation error. occurs.
motor (right).
J/P273 Connects to the paper The following error message is shown.?
advance arm motor (left) and • No.06138-00002 Paper Advance Arm Motor (Left) operation error. occurs.
paper advance arm motor
• No.06139-00002 Paper Advance Arm Motor (Right) operation error. occurs.
(right).
J/P274 Connects the paper advance No.06221-00003 Paper has jammed in the Paper Advance Unit. occurs.
motor 3.
J/P275 Input from printer power No.06141-00002 Lane Select Motor (Right) operation error. occurs.
supply 1 (LI24 V-3, LI24 V-
4)
J/P276 Control box cooling fan 2, Control box cooling fan 2 and inner cooling fan stop operations.
inner cooling fan
J/P277 Power supply (+24V) from Control box cooling fan 2 does not rotate.
4. Troubleshooting
the printer I/O PCB 1
J/P278 Connects to the paper Paper magazine lamp B/C does not turn on.
magazine lamp B/C.
J/P279 Connects to the printer No.06224-00003 Paper remains in the Processor loading unit. occurs.
control PCB.
J/P280 Connects to the printer No.06224-00003 Paper remains in the Processor loading unit. occurs.
control PCB.
J/P281 Connects to the paper end • No.06015-00002 Paper did not rewind. Paper Magazine B occurs.
sensors B and C. • No.06210-00003 Paper remains in the Paper Supply Unit. occurs.
J/P282 Connects to paper sensor 2 No.06224-00003 Paper remains in the Processor loading unit. occurs.
(left), paper sensor 2 (center)
and paper sensor 2 (right).
J/P283 Connects to the paper sensor No.06223-00001 Paper remains in the Paper Advance Unit. occurs.
1 and pressure guide sensor.
J/P284 Connects to zigzagging No.06211-00001 Paper remains in the Exposure Advance Unit. occurs.
correction sensor (left),
zigzagging correction sensor
(right), and exposure start
sensor, and exposure
advance pressure change
sensor 1.
J/P285 Inputs the power supply No.06224-00003 Paper remains in the Processor loading unit. occurs.
from printer power supply 5
(Vcc5)
J/P286 Connects to arm sensor (left) No.06138-00002 Paper Advance Arm Motor (Left) operation error. occurs.
and arm sensor (right). No.06139-00002 Paper Advance Arm Motor (Right) operation error. occurs.
J/P287 Lane select sensor (left) and No.06140-00002 Lane Select Motor (Left) operation error. occurs.
paper advance pressure
change sensor (left)
J/P288 Lane select sensor (right) No.06141-00002 Lane Select Motor (Right) operation error. occurs.
and paper advance pressure
change sensor (right)
! Triple magazine PCB

J/P295 Connects to the paper No.06012-00001 Paper did not load. Paper Magazine A occurs while printing.
magazine motor A.
4202 6/9
4202

J/P296 Connects to the paper Paper magazine lamp A does not turn on.
magazine lamp A.
J/P297 Connects to the printer door No.01047-00002 Close printer door. occurs when printing is started.
3 sensor.
J/P298 Connects to the paper All the magazine code sensors A turn dark.
magazine code sensor A.
J/P299 Connects to the paper end No.06210-00001 Paper remains in the printer section. occurs.
sensor A.
J/P300 Power supply from the No.06210-00001 Paper remains in the printer section. occurs.
printer I/O PCB 1
(VCC5, IL36 V-1)
J/P301 Connects to the printer No.01047-00002 Close printer door. occurs when printing is started.
control PCB.
J/P302 Unused -
! Quad magazine PCB

4. Troubleshooting
J/P295 Connects to the paper No.06201-00001 Paper did not load. Paper Magazine A occurs while printing.
magazine motor A.
J/P296 Connects to the paper Paper magazine lamp A does not turn on.
magazine lamp A.
J/P297 Connects to the printer door No.01047-00002 Close printer door. occurs when printing is started.
3 sensor.
J/P298 Connects to the paper All the magazine code sensors A turn dark.
magazine code sensor A.
J/P299 Connects to the paper end No.06210-00001 Paper remains in the printer section. occurs.
sensor A.
J/P300 Power supply (VCC5V) No.06210-00001 Paper remains in the printer section. occurs.
from the printer I/O PCB 1
J/P301 Connects to the printer No.01047-00002 Close printer door. occurs when printing is started.
control PCB.
J/P1700 Connects to the printer • No.06196-00002 Paper did not rewind. Paper Magazine A2 occurs.
control PCB. • No.06210-00004 Paper remains in the Paper Supply Unit. occurs.
J/P1701 Connects to the paper end • No.06196-00002 Paper did not rewind. Paper Magazine A2 occurs.
sensor A2. • No.06210-00004 Paper remains in the Paper Supply Unit. occurs.
J/P1702 Connects to the paper All the magazine code sensors A2 turn DARK.
magazine code sensor A2.
J/P1703 Connects to the paper No.06195-00001 Paper did not load. Paper Magazine A2 occurs when printing is started
magazine motor A2. using magazine A2.
J/P1704 Connects to the paper supply • No error message is shown even if printing with magazine A2.
motor A2. • When confirmed by input check, paper supply motor A2 does not operate.
J/P1705 Connects to the width No.06199-00002 Pressure Release Motor A2 operation error. occurs.
change motor A2 and
pressure release motor A2.
J/P1707 Connects to the pressure No.06199-00002 Pressure Release Motor A2 operation error. occurs.
change sensor A2 and width
change sensor A2.
J/P1708 Inputs the power supply • No.06196-00002 Paper did not rewind. Paper Magazine A2 occurs.
from printer power supply 1 • No.06210-00004 Paper remains in the Paper Supply Unit. occurs.
(+IL24V)
J/P1709 Supplies the power (+24V) No malfunctions in the operations will occur on this condition.
to printer I/O PCB 1.
J/P1710 Unused -
4202 7/9
4202
! CVP PCB
J/P500 Connects to the printer The CVP unit does not operate.
control PCB.
J/P501 Inputs power supply (+24 V) The CVP unit does not operate.
from printer power supply 3.
J/P502 Connects the dot head and The CVP unit does not operate.
ribbon advance motor.
! Printer power supply 1 (PS1)

J/P428 Power supply (AC200-240 No.06136-00001 Exposure Advance Pressure Change Motor 1 operation error. occurs.
V) from printer I/O PCB 1.
J/P422 Supplies the power to the
printer I/O PCBs 1 and 3
(+24 V).
4. Troubleshooting
J/P420 Supplies power (IL 36 V) to No.06013-00001 Paper did not load. Paper Magazine B occurs when printing is started
J/P421 printer I/O PCB 1. using magazine B.
J/P430 Power supply (AC200-240

J/P424 Supplies the power (+24V) Without the optional No malfunctions in the operations will occur on this condition.
to printer I/O PCB 1. magazine
J/P431 Power supply (AC200-240 When the triple magazine is
V) from printer I/O PCB 1. connected
When the quad magazine is No.06200-00001 Width Change Motor A2 operation error.
connected occurs when printing is started using magazine A2.

J/P1711 Power supply (AC200-240 No malfunctions in the operations will occur on this condition.
J/P1712 Supplies the power to the
quad magazine PCB (IL36
V-3)

J/P432 Inputs the AC power supply • When Printer Information of Status Display is confirmed, the messages such as
from the Processor relay Printer Operation Status and Laser Temperature Status are shown in gray.
PCB.
J/P418 Printer IF main PCB, printer
I/O PCB 1, printer I/O PCB
3, G laser driver, laser
control PCB and printer
control PCB
4202 8/9
4202
! Laser power supply (PS5)

J/P433 Inputs the AC power supply • In Printer Information on Status Display, Laser temperature control status does not
from the Processor relay change from Temperature control started for five minutes or more.
PCB. • Via input check, Interlock Switch (Printer Door 1, 2)/Interlock switch (printer top
J/P1615 Supplies power to the laser cover) is OFF.
control PCB and G laser • Via input check, Inner Temperature and Laser temperature unit sensor is 0.0.
driver PCB (GND)
J/P1614 Supplies power to the laser
control PCB and G laser
driver PCB (+24 V)
! Checking condition of wiring connection failure

This section explains the errors and symptoms seen when the power supply of this system is turned on with the connector of each PCB
unplugged (for example, the monitor is not turned on, the lamp does not light, the fan does not rotate).
IMPORTANT
• Symptoms that appear when the connectors of each PCB are disconnected are explained.
4. Troubleshooting
• For the optional PCBs, some of them are explained.
• If the system condition does not change even if the power supply is turned on with each connector removed from each
PCB, No malfunctions in the operations will occur on this condition. is shown in the tables.
• Several errors may occur at the same time with a single connector.
• The suffix number (description of PCB) of No. 6901 ARCNET communication error. may be different from the
following explanation depending on the ARCNET communication feature.
4202 9/9
4203
Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring (processor)
Reference
☞ Processor control PCB ☞ Processor I/O PCB 1 ☞ Processor I/O PCB 2
☞ Processor relay PCB ☞ Processor power supply 1 (PS1) ☞ Processor power supply 2 (PS2)
☞ Drive motor driver PCB*1 ☞ Circuit breaker (NFB1) ☞ Earth leakage circuit breaker (NFB2)
☞ Earth leakage circuit breaker (NFB3) ☞ Earth leakage circuit breaker (NFB4) ☞ Checking condition of wiring connection
failure
! Processor control PCB

J/P510 Connects to the processor I/O The following attention message is shown.
PCB 1. • No.00500-00000 Add water to the Refilling Water Tank. occurs.
• No.00502-00000 Add replenishment solution to the replenishment tank. occurs.
• No.00503-00000 Empty the Effluent Tank. occurs.
• No.00515-00000 Set the Rack Stopper. occurs.
The following error message is shown.
4. Troubleshooting
• No.05508-00000 The processing solution level is too low. occurs.
• No.05532-00000 The Processing Solution Safety Thermostat has activated. occurs.
• No.05533-00000 The Dryer Safety Thermostat has activated. occurs.
J/P511 Connects to the processor The following attention message is shown.
relay PCB. • No.00506-00000 Close the Dryer Cover. occurs.
• No.00507-00000 Close the Processor Top Cover. occurs.
J/P512 Unused -
J/P513 Connects to the print sensors When prints are processed, No.05535-00000 Paper has jammed in the processor section. is
(left, center, and right) and shown.
dryer lane select sensor
J/P514 Power supply input from No.06901-00008 ARCNET communication error. Processor occurs.
processor power supply 1
(VCC5V) and processor
power supply 2 (+24V)
J/P515 Connects to the drive motor. No.05550-00000 Drive Motor has stopped. occurs.
(QSS-
3701/3702/3703/LP7500/LP
7600)
Connects to the drive motor No.05550-00000 Drive Motor has stopped. occurs.
driver PCB.
(QSS-
3704/3705/LP7700/LP7900)
J/P516 Connects to the temperature The following error message is shown.
sensor (CD, BF, STB) and • No.05519-00000 Thermosensor error. CD occurs.
dryer thermosensor
• No.05520-00000 Thermosensor error. BF occurs.
• No.05521-00000 Thermosensor error.STB occurs.
• No.05522-00000 Dryer Thermosensor error. occurs.
J/P517 Connects to the printer No.06901-00521 ARCNET communication error. Printer Processor LASER occurs.
control PCB (ARCNET)
J/P518 Connects to the printer No.06901-00008 ARCNET communication error. Processor occurs.
control PCB (ARCNET)
4203 1/7
4203

J/P519 Connects to the control strip When connecting the control strip auto loading unit, the control strip feed motor does not
connection PCB (option). operate.
J/P520 Unused -
J/P521 Unused -
J/P522 Connects to the processor I/O No malfunctions in the operations will occur on this condition.
PCB 2.
J/P523 Connects to the colorimeter When processing the setup prints, No.01556-00000 The Colorimeter Unit is not set. occurs.
Then, No.06555-00000 Set the Colorimeter Unit. is shown. Setup prints are output to the
print receiving tray (large).
J/P524 Connects to the order LED does not blink.
specifying LED PCB.
J/P525 Connects to paper sensor 1 Abnormal sound occurs in the colorimeter when the printer is started. When processing the
and paper sensor 2. setup prints, No.06554-00003 Calibration Plate advance error. occurs. Setup prints are
output to the print receiving tray (large).
J/P526 Unused -
J/P527 Unused -
J/P528 Unused -
4. Troubleshooting
J/P529 Unused -
J/P530 Unused -
J/P531 Unused -
JP1 Unused -
JP2 Unused -
! Processor I/O PCB 1

J/P670 Connects to the rack stopper No.00515-00000 Set the Rack Stopper. occurs.
sensor.
J/P671 Unused -
J/P672 Unused -
J/P673 Connects to the minute meter The minute meter does not operate.
(option).
J/P674 Connects to the processor The following error message is shown.
relay PCB and processor I/O • No.05508-00000 The processing solution level is too low. occurs.
PCB 2.
J/P675 Unused -
J/P676 Unused -
J/P677 Connects to the CD No.05511-00000 The circulation pump has stopped. CD occurs.
circulation pump (F, N and J
specifications only)
J/P678 BF circulation pump No.05513-00000 The circulation pump has stopped. BF occurs.
J/P679 STB1 circulation pump No.05515-00000 The circulation pump has stopped. STB1 occurs.
J/P683 Replenisher pump CD, BF, The replenisher pumps CD, BF and STB do not operate.
STB (N and J specifications
only)
J/P684 Unused -
4203 2/7
4203

J/P685 Connects to the refilling The refilling water pumps (CD-W, BF-W, STB1-W, STB2-W, STB3-W, STB4-W) and
water pump (CD-W, BF-W, cleaning pump 1 do not operate.
STB1-W, STB2-W, STB3-
W, STB4-W) and cleaning
pump 1 (N specification)
J/P686 Drive motor cooling fan, The drive motor cooling fan, exhaust fan, tank cooling fan 1, tank cooling fan 2, and tank
exhaust fan, tank cooling fan cooling fan 3 do not operate.
1, tank cooling fan 2, and
tank cooling fan 3
J/P687 Connects to the effluent float No.00503-00000 Empty the Effluent Tank. occurs.
switch.
J/P688 Replenishment level sensor The following attention message is shown.
(CD, BF, STB), Refilling • No.00500-00000 Add water to the Refilling Water Tank. occurs.
water tank level sensor
J/P689 Power supply from the The replenisher pump does not operate.
processor relay PCB
(AC24V)
J/P690 Power supply from processor The following attention message is shown.
4. Troubleshooting
power supply 2 (+24V) • No.00500-00000 Add water to the Refilling Water Tank. occurs.
J/P691 Unused -
J/P692 Unused -
J/P694 Connects to the processor The processor status lamp does not light.
status lamp.
J/P695 Connects to the conveyer The conveyor unit does not operate.
unit.
J/P696 Connects to dryer lane The following symptom appears when printing is started.
selection solenoid 1. • No.05535-00000 Paper has jammed in the processor section. occurs when normal
printing is performed. (If Paper Leading Edge Advance is valid)
• When performing the dairy setup, No.05552-00004 Dryer Lane Select Guide operation
error. occurs.
J/P697 Connects to the sorter motor, The following symptom appears when normal printing is started.
sorter home sensor, print full • The conveyer motor does not operate even though prints are output on the conveyer unit.
sensor, manual sorter switch,
• No.05534-00001 Print Sorter Unit operation error. occurs when prints are output on the
and manual sorter switch
conveyer unit.
lamp.
J/P698 Power supply from processor The following attention message is shown.
power supply 1 (VCC5V) • No.00500-00000 Add water to the Refilling Water Tank. occurs.
J/P699 Connects to the processor The following attention message is shown.
control PCB. • No.00500-00000 Add water to the Refilling Water Tank. occurs.
• No.00515-00000 Set the Rack Stopper. occurs.
4203 3/7
4203

J/P700 Unused -
J/P701 Connects to the signal lamp. The signal lamp does not light even if an error occurs.
J/P702 Unused -
J/P703 Unused -
J/P704 Connects to the paper guide No.05551-00005 Paper Guide operation error. occurs.
motor, paper guide open
sensor and paper guide close
sensor.

J/P903 Connects to the processor I/O • When performing the dairy setup, No.06554-00001 Calibration Plate advance error.
PCB 1 and processor relay occurs.
PCB. • When performing the output checks, the calibration plate advance motor, paper advance
J/P904 Connects to the calibration motor, pressure solenoid, and colorimeter cooling fan do not operate.
plate advance motor, paper
advance motor, pressure
4. Troubleshooting
solenoid, and colorimeter
cooling fan.
J/P905 Connects to dryer lane • When performing the dairy setup, No.05552-00005 Dryer Lane Select Guide operation
selection solenoid 2. error. occurs.
• When performing Output Check, dryer selection solenoid 2 does not operate.
J/P906 Connects to the processor • When performing the dairy setup, No.06554-00001 Calibration Plate advance error.
control PCB. occurs.
• When performing the output checks, the calibration plate advance motor, paper advance
motor, pressure solenoid, and colorimeter cooling fan do not operate.
! Processor relay PCB

J/P641 Power supply to the processor The replenisher pump does not operate.
relay PCB → TR1 →
processor I/O PCB 1.
J/P642 Input power supply jumper. Unconfirmed
J/P643 Connects to processor power All the systems do not start.
supply 1.
J/P644 Connects to the dryer fan. No.05533-00000 The Dryer Safety Thermostat has activated. occurs.
J/P645 AC power supply jumper Unconfirmed
(dryer fan)
J/P646 Printer I/O PCB 1, printer • No error occurs. The processor drive turns on, but the printer does not start.
power supply 5, laser power • Output device is not available. occurs when accessing Output device is not available..
supply and AC outlet.
J/P647 Unused Starter jumper
J/P648 Connects to the processor The following error message is shown.
control PCB. • No.05508-00000 The processing solution level is too low. occurs.
The following attention message is shown.
• No.00506-00000 Close the Dryer Cover. occurs.
• No.00507-00000 Close the Processor Top Cover. occurs.
J/P649 Connects to power supply Power supply cooling fans 1 and 2 do not rotate.
cooling fans 1 and 2.
4203 4/7
4203

J/P650 Connects to the processing The following error message is shown.
solution float switches CD, • No.05508-00000 The processing solution level is too low. occurs.
BF, STB1, STB2, STB3, and
STB4
J/P651 Connects to the interlock No.00506-00000 Close the Dryer Cover. occurs.
switch (dryer cover).
J/P652 Connects to the interlock No.00507-00000 Close the Processor Top Cover. occurs.
switch (processor top cover).
J/P653 Connects to the dryer safety No.05533-00000 The Dryer Safety Thermostat has activated. occurs.
thermostat.
J/P654 Connects to processor I/O The following error message is shown.
PCB 1 and processor I/O • No.05508-00000 The processing solution level is too low. occurs.
PCB 2.
J/P655 Connects to the drive motor. No.05550-00000 Drive Motor has stopped. occurs.
(QSS-
3701/3702/3703/LP7500/LP7
600)
4. Troubleshooting
Connects to the drive motor No.05550-00000 Drive Motor has stopped. occurs.
driver PCB.
(QSS-
3704/3705/LP7700/LP7900)
J/P656 Connects to processor power Power supply cooling fan 1 rotates, but both the printer and processor do not start.
supply 1.
J/P657 Connects to the dryer heater. The dryer heater does not turn on.
J/P658 AC power supply jumper
(dryer heater)
J/P659 Connects to the dryer heater.
J/P660 Connects to the dryer heater.
J/P661 AC power supply jumper
(dryer heater)
J/P662 Connects to the processing The processing solution heaters CD, BF and STB do not turn on.
solution heaters CD, BF and
STB
J/P663 Connects to the ground wire Unconfirmed
! Processor power supply 1 (PS1)

J/P791 Power supply from the Power supply cooling fan 1 rotates, but both the printer and processor do not start.
processor relay PCB
J/P792 Power supply (+5 V) to the
processor control PCB and
the processor I/O PCB 1.
Supplies the power to the
processor relay PCB (+24 V).
4203 5/7
4203
! Processor power supply 2 (PS2)

J/P793 Power supply from the The following error message is shown.
processor relay PCB • No.05508-00000 The processing solution level is too low. occurs.
• No.05510-00000 Processor A/D conversion error. occurs.
• No.05519-00000 Thermosensor error. CD occurs.
• No.05520-00000 Thermosensor error. BF occurs.
• No.05521-00000 Thermosensor error. STB occurs.
• No.05522-00000 Dryer Thermosensor error. occurs.
J/P794 Power supply (+24 V) to the The following error message is shown.
processor control PCB and • No.06903-00002 Serial communication error. occurs.
• No.05510-00000 Processor A/D conversion error. occurs.
4. Troubleshooting
processor relay PCB (+24 V). • No.05508-00000 The processing solution level is too low. occurs.
• No.00500-00000 Add water to the Refilling Water Tank. occurs.
J/P795 Power supply (GND) to the The following error message is shown.
processor control PCB and • No.06903-00002 Serial communication error. occurs.
processor relay PCB (GND) • No.00503-00000 Empty the Effluent Tank. occurs.
! Drive motor driver PCB*1

CN1 Power supply from the No.05550-00000 Drive Motor has stopped. occurs.
(J/P770) processor relay PCB
CN2 Power supply from the
(J/P771) processor control PCB.
CN3 Power supply to the drive The following symptom occurs.
(J/P780) motor. • No.05550-00000 Drive Motor has stopped. occurs.
CN4 • LED1 of the drive motor driver PCB blinks three times.
(J/P767)
*1. The drive motor driver PCB is installed only in the QSS-3704, QSS-3705, LP7700 and LP7900.
! Circuit breaker (NFB1)

Power supply from TA2 to TA3 All the systems do not start.
! Earth leakage circuit breaker (NFB2)

Power supply from TA2 to TA3 No error occurs under this condition. (The power supply to the dry heater turns to off.)
4203 6/7
4203

Power supply from TA2 to TA3 No error occurs under this condition. (The power supply to the dry heater turns to off.)

Power supply from TA2 to TA3 All the systems do not start.
! Checking condition of wiring connection failure

This section explains the errors and symptoms seen when the power supply of this system is turned on with the connector of each PCB
unplugged (for example, the monitor is not turned on, the lamp does not light, the fan does not rotate).
IMPORTANT
• Symptoms that appear when the connectors of each PCB are disconnected are explained.
• For the PCBs of the processor, the PCBs only for normal specifications are mentioned.
4. Troubleshooting
• If the system condition does not change even if the power supply is turned on with each connector removed from each
PCB, No problem occurs in this condition. is shown in the tables.
• Several errors may occur at the same time with a single connector.
• The suffix number (description of PCB) of No. 6901 ARCNET communication error. may be different from the
following explanation depending on the equipped options, cable connecting position and/or ARCNET communication
feature.
4203 7/7
4252
Diagnosis appendix: Symptoms result from blowout of fuse
Symptoms result from blowout of fuse (printer section/processor section)
Reference
☞ Laser control PCB ☞ Printer I/O PCB 1 ☞ Printer I/O PCB 3
☞ Quad magazine PCB ☞ CVP PCB ☞ Processor I/O PCB 1
☞ Processor I/O PCB 2 ☞ Processor relay PCB ☞ Power supply
☞ Condition of checking for the blowout of
fuse
! Laser control PCB

Fuse No. Symptom
F1 T3.15 A/125 V (protection of • No.06076-00001 Polygon Mirror control error. occurs when starting printing.
+24 V-1 input power supply • By input check, it is observed that Polygon Mirror Synchronous is Asynchronous in the
from laser power supply) exposure engine section. In addition, Polygon Mirror Frequency turns 0.
F2 T3.15 A/125 V (protection of • In Printer Information on Status Display, Laser temperature control status does not
+24 V-3 input power supply change from Temperature control started for five minutes or more.
from laser power supply) • The laser control box cooling fan, laser unit cooling fans 1 and 2 are not rotating.
4. Troubleshooting
• By output check, turning the laser unit heater on in the exposure engine section does not
raise the temperature.
F3 T3.15 A/125 V (protection of • In Printer Information on Status Display, Laser temperature control status does not
+24 V-2 input power supply change from Temperature control started for five minutes or more.
from laser power supply) • By input check, the following are confirmed.
The display of Polygon Mirror Synchronous is Asynchronous in the exposure engine
section.
The display of Polygon Mirror Frequency is 0 in the exposure engine section.
The display of Laser Unit Thermosensor is 0 degree in the exposure engine section.
! Printer I/O PCB 1

Fuse No. Symptom
F32 T6.3 A/125 V (protection of • No.06136-00001 Exposure Advance Pressure Change Motor 1 operation error.
IL24 V-1 input power supply occurs.
from printer power supply 1)
F33 T6.3 A/125 V (protection of The following symptom appears when the power supply is turned on.
IL24 V-1 input power supply • No.06137-00001 Exposure Advance Pressure Change Motor 2 operation error.
from printer power supply 1) occurs.
• No.06186-00001 Exposure Advance Pressure Change Motor 3 operation error.
occurs.
• No.06049-00001 Pressure Guide operation error. occurs.
F34 T3.15 A/125 V (protection of No malfunctions in the operations will occur on this condition.
+24 V input power supply
F35 T6.3 A/125 V (protection of No.06013-00001 Paper did not load. Paper Magazine B occurs when printing is started
IL36 V input power supply using magazine B.
! Printer I/O PCB 3

Fuse No. Symptom
F37 T6.3 A/125 V (protection of No.06138-00001 Paper Advance Arm Motor (Left) operation error. occurs.
IL24 V-3 input power supply
F38 T6.3 A/125 V (protection of No.06141-00002 Lane Select Motor (Right) operation error. occurs.
4252 1/3
4252
! Quad magazine PCB

Fuse No. Symptom
F1 T6.3 A/125 V (protection of No.06195-00001 Paper did not load. Paper Magazine A2 occurs when printing is started
IL36 V-3 input power supply using magazine A2.
F2 T2.0 A/125 V (protection of No.06199-00002 Pressure Release Motor A2 operation error. occurs.
! CVP PCB
Fuse No. Symptom
F25 T3.15 A/125 V (protection of The CVP unit does not operate.
+36 V input power supply

Fuse No. Symptom
4. Troubleshooting
F14 T6.3 A/125 V (protection of The following error message is shown.
24 V-2 input power supply • No.05532-00000 The Processing Solution Safety Thermostat has activated. occurs.
from processor power supply
2)
• No.00500-00000 Add water to the Refilling Water Tank. occurs.
F15 T6.3 A/125 V (protection of The following error message is shown.
24 V-3 input power supply • No.05508-00000 The processing solution level is too low. occurs.
2)
F16 T3.15 A/125 V (protection of The replenisher pumps CD, BF and STB do not operate.
24 V-4 input power supply
2)

Fuse No. Symptom
F70 T5 A/127 V (protection of • When performing the dairy setup, No.06552-00005 Dryer Lane Select Guide operation
+24 V input power supply error. occurs.
from processor relay PCB 2) • When performing Output Check, dryer selection solenoid 2 does not operate.
! Processor relay PCB

Fuse No. Symptom
FL1, FL2, FL3, FL4 (T15A/250 V: This fuse has not been checked because it cannot remove.
power supply surge protecting circuit)
F1 T15 A/250 V (protection of The dryer heater does not operate.
power supply for dryer
heater)
F2 T15 A/250 V (protection of All the processing solution heater do not operate.
power supply for processing
solution heater)
power supply for BF heater)
4252 2/3
4252
Fuse No. Symptom

power supply for STB heater)
F5 T5 A/250 V (protection of The CD heater does not operate.
power supply for CD heater)
F6 T5 A/250 V (protection of The BF heater does not operate.
power supply for BF heater)
F7 T6.3 A/250 V (protection of The STB heater does not operate.
F8 T8 A/250 V (dryer heater) The dryer heater does not operate.
F12 T6.3 A/250 V (dryer fan) The dryer fan does not operate.
F13 T6.3 A/125 V (DC +24 V The following error message is shown.
power supply protection) • No.05511 -00000 The circulation pump has stopped. CD occurs.
• No.05513-00000 The circulation pump has stopped. BF occurs.
4. Troubleshooting
• No.05515-00000 The circulation pump has stopped. STB2 occurs.
F14 T6.3 A/125 V (DC +24 V All the systems do not start.
power supply protection) The processor condition light blinks red.
The processor control box cooling fan rotates.
F15 T8 A/250 V (protection of The dryer fan does not operate.
! Power supply
For each power supply PCB, the fuse has not been confirmed because it is irremovable.
! Condition of checking for the blowout of fuse

This section explains the errors and symptoms seen when the power supply of this system is turned on with the fuse of each PCB
removed (for example, the monitor does not turn on, the light does not turn on, the fun does not rotate).
IMPORTANT
• Symptoms that appear only when the fuse of each PCB is blow out are explained.
• If the system condition does not change even if the power supply is turned on with each fuse is removed from each
PCB, No problem occurs in this condition. is shown in the above table.
• Several errors may occur at the same time with a single fuse.
4252 3/3
4260
Diagnosis appendix: Check the connection of the PC and printer
Checking the connection between the PC and printer
Check the connection from the PC side.
1. Access the Command Prompt of Windows.

Start → Programs or All Programs → Accessories → Click Command Prompt in this order.
Example: The desktop display
4. Troubleshooting
G085185
The Command Prompt display is shown.
2. Enter ping command and the configured IP address.

Enter the printer IP address on the PC.
Enter ping + en quad + IP address.
Example: ping 192.168.100.200
Example: Command Prompt display
S063776
3. Press the Enter key on the keyboard.

Confirm that the printer of which IP address has been configured exists on the network.
4. Check the information on the display.

If the communication is normal, the display as below appears.
NOTE
• The value displayed on the screen varies depending on the environment.
4260 1/2
4260
Example: Command Prompt display
S063777
4. Troubleshooting
Example: If "Destination host unreachable." is displayed
The communication is not normal. Check the following items.
(1) Confirm that the Ethernet interface cable has been correctly connected.
(2) Confirm that the settings of the IP address and the Subnet Mask are correct.
(3) If the HUB (line concentrator) is used, confirm that the power supply of the HUB is turned on.
After checking these items, go to Step 1 to repeat the procedure.
4260 2/2
4302
Diagnosis appendix: Diagnosis flowchart
Laser temperature control status of Status Display does not change from
Temperature control started to Temperature control completed. [LASER]
• For details about Laser temperature control status of Status Display, see ☞ 31100.
1. Confirm that the system is used in the environment of room temperature 15°C to 30°C.
2. Restart the system.
3. Check if the displayed temperature on Laser Unit Thermosensor goes up when turning on the laser
unit heater via Output Check.
Check if laser unit cooling fan 1/2 operate when turning on laser unit cooling fan 1/2 via Output Check.
☞ 35310
4. Check if the displayed temperatures of the B laser temperature sensor, R laser temperature sensor
and laser unit temperature sensor change via Output Check.
☞ 35210
NOTE
4. Troubleshooting
• Temperature of the laser unit heater, B laser heater and R laser heater is adjusted at the same time.
5. If there is a change in the displayed temperature, wait for a while. If the temperature does not change,
check the unit for faults.
Symptom Cause
☞ If temperature of the laser unit thermosensor is not within the range from The temperatures are not within the processable range of
15.0°C to 42.0°C the laser unit (15.0°C to 42.0°C).
☞ If the temperature of B laser thermosensor is not within the range from Temperature is not in the processable range of B laser
46.7°C to 47.3°C. (46.7°C to 47.3°C).
☞ If the temperature of R laser thermosensor is not within the range from Temperature is not in the processable range of R laser
46.7°C to 47.3°C. (46.7°C to 47.3°C).
! If temperature of the laser unit thermosensor is not within the range from 15.0°C to
42.0°C
1. Check if there is a wiring connection failure.

Wiring connection failure
Laser control PCB (J/P1522) ↔ laser unit Laser control PCB (J/P1541) ↔ laser power supply (+24 V)
2. Make a diagnosis via the displayed temperature on the laser unit temperature sensor.
Checking point Checking content How to check Failure part
Laser unit heater Laser unit heater resistance value Remove P1525 (connecting) and measure Laser unit (laser unit heater)
the resistance value between Pin 1 and 2. It
is normal if the resistance value is 15 ± 1.5
Ω.
Laser Unit Laser unit thermosensor resistance Remove P1526 (connecting) and measure Laser unit (laser unit
Thermosensor *1 value the resistance value between Pin 1 and 3. It thermosensor)
is normal if the resistance value is the same
as that in the list below.*1
Laser control PCB Laser unit thermosensor standard It is normal if the voltage between Pin 3 (+) Laser control PCB
voltage of P1522 and the ground is 1.0 V.
Power supply to the laser unit It is normal if the voltage between Pin 7 (+)
heater*2 and Pin 8 of P1551 is the following.
• When the heater is turned on: 24 V
• When the heater is turned off: 0 V
4302 1/3
4302
*1. The list below shows laser unit thermosensor resistance values by temperature.
TEMPER Resistance TEMPER Resistance TEMPER Resistance TEMPER Resistance

ATURE ATURE ATURE ATURE
5 23 kΩ to 25 kΩ 10 18 kΩ to 20 kΩ 15 14 kΩ to 16 kΩ 20 11 kΩ to 12 kΩ
25 9.2 kΩ to 9.8 kΩ 30 7.4 kΩ to 7.9 kΩ 35 6.0 kΩ to 6.4 kΩ
*2. Check the status by turning on the Laser unit heater on Output Check.
☞ 35310
! If the temperature of B laser thermosensor is not within the range from 46.7°C to
47.3°C.

Laser control PCB (J/P1504) ↔ laser unit Laser control PCB (J/P1532) ↔ laser unit
2. Make a diagnosis referring the displayed temperature on the B laser unit temperature sensor.
4. Troubleshooting
B laser temperature Peltier control voltage • If the voltage between pin 6 of J1532 Laser unit (B laser
control section and laser control PCB (GND) is less temperature control section)
than 24 V
• If the voltage between pin 5 of J1532
and laser control PCB (GND) is 0 V or
more and less than 0.8 V
• When heated: 0 V or more and
less than 0.8 V
• When it is off: 0 V
B Laser B laser thermosensor resistance Remove J1504 and measure the resistance Laser unit (B laser unit
Thermosensor*1 value value between Pin 8 (+) and 9(−). It is thermosensor)
normal if the resistance value is the same as
the value in the list below.*1
Laser control PCB B laser thermosensor standard It is normal if the standard voltage between Laser control PCB
voltage Pin 8 (+) and 10 (−) of J1504 is 1 V.
B laser thermosensor measuring It is normal if the voltage between Pin 9 (+)
voltage and 10 (−) of J1504 is around 350 mV
under 28°C temperature.
*1. The list below shows B laser thermosensor resistance values by temperature.
TEMPE Resistance TEMPE Resistance TEMPE Resistance TEMPER Resistance

RATUR RATUR RATUR ATURE
E E E
5 11.4 kΩ to 12.7 kΩ 10 9.2 kΩ to 10.3 kΩ 15 7.4 kΩ to 8.5 kΩ 20 6.0 kΩ to 7.0 kΩ
! If the temperature of R laser thermosensor is not within the range from 46.7°C to
47.3°C.

Laser control PCB (J/P1504) ↔ laser unit Laser control PCB (J/P1532) ↔ laser unit
4302 2/3
4302
2. Make a diagnosis via the displayed temperature on the R laser unit temperature sensor.
R laser temperature Peltier control voltage • If the voltage between Pin 3 of J1532 Laser unit (R laser
control section and laser control PCB (GND) is less temperature control section)
than 24 V
• If the voltage between Pin 2 of J1532
and laser control PCB (GND) is 0 V or
more and less than 0.8 V
• When heated: 0 V or more and
less than 0.8 V
• When it is off: 0 V
R Laser R laser thermosensor resistance Remove J1504 and measure the resistance Laser unit (R laser unit
Thermosensor*1 value value between Pin 1 (+) and 2(−). It is thermosensor)
normal if the resistance value is the same as
the value in the list below.*1
Laser control PCB R laser unit thermosensor standard It is normal if the standard voltage between Laser control PCB
voltage Pin 1 (+) and 3 (−) of J1504 is 1 V.
R laser thermosensor measuring It is normal if the voltage between Pin 2 (+)
voltage and 3 (−) of J1504 is around 350 mV under
4. Troubleshooting
28°C temperature.
*1. The list below shows R laser thermosensor resistance values by temperature.
TEMPE Resistance TEMPE Resistance TEMPE Resistance TEMPER Resistance

RATUR RATUR RATUR ATURE
E E E
5 11.4 kΩ to 12.7 kΩ 10 9.2 kΩ to 10.3 kΩ 15 7.4 kΩ to 8.5 kΩ 20 6.0 kΩ to 7.0 kΩ
4302 3/3
4600
Diagnosis appendix: [F]
Replenishment cartridge installation section troubleshooting flow
The replenisher section door is open. Check the setting of the Interlock Switch (Replenisher Section
Door).
YES
NO
Remove the processor rear cover or open the replenisher section door.
NOTE
• If the replenisher section door does not open, unlock the door inserting the driver through the door space.
See ☞ How to open/close the replenisher section door.
4. Troubleshooting
Remove the replenisher cartridge.
If the replenishment cartridge is in the lower position, move the replenishment cartridge setting section to the upper position in the Output Check, and
remove the replenishment cartridge.
Confirm that there is no objects in the replenishment cartridge setting section.
See ☞ Replenishment cartridge setting section.
Confirm that the Light Lock Door Motor operates

normally in the Output Check.
Confirm that the replenishment cartridge position sensor is
normal.
Operating
Not operating
The operation sound of opening motor is heard. Confirm that the drive systems such as gear operate normally.
Yes
No
The replenishment cartridge opening motor or F replenishment I/O PCB is failed.
Perform recovery procedure 1 from the replenishment error.

☞ 4610
4600 1/2
4600
! How to open/close the replenisher section door

If the replenishment cartridge setting section is lowered and the replenisher section door is locked, insert the flathead driver into the
slits beside the replenisher section door, lift the lever, unlock it, then open/close the replenisher section door.
QSS-3701/3702/3703/LP7500/LP7600 QSS-3704/3705/LP7700/LP7900
Slit Slit
Lever
4. Troubleshooting

G085386
! Replenishment cartridge setting section

Confirm that there is no objects in the replenishment cartridge setting section.
Replenishment cartridge setting section
P2RB
P2RA
P1R
G085933
4600 2/2
4610
Recovery procedure 1 from the replenishment error
YES Replenishment solution is left in the replenisher cartridge.

The replenisher cartridge is open.
Replenishment solution leaks in the solution tank.
NO
YES NO
1. Discharge all replenishment solution in the replenishment tank.

If the replenish cartridge is not open, perform Mixing ☞ 27550
Replenisher in F: Functions of Pump Output Amount Setting.
2. Attach new replenish cartridge. After the problems are solved,
☞ 33003 perform Mixing Replenisher in F: Functions of Pump Output
Amount Setting.
☞ 33003
P1R (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor, P2RA
4. Troubleshooting
(Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor and P2RB
(Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor are all ON.
NO YES
• Add water until all the replenishment solution level sensors turn ON while checking the status of P1R (Upper) Replenishment Solution
Level Sensor, P2RA (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor and P2RB (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor at Input
Check.
The maximum additional water (ml)

P1R P2RA P2RB
3695 642.5 642.5
• Add water from the replenisher cartridge setting part when you add water to each replenishment tank.
See 4600 ☞ Replenishment cartridge setting section.
IMPORTANT
• When the replenishment solution level sensor turns ON, immediately stop adding water.
Adding too much water may cause the following errors.
• <☞ No. 05905[F]−0001P1R replenishment solution output amount/replenishment solution level management is abnormal.
• ☞ No. 05906[F]−0001P2RA replenishment solution output amount/replenishment solution level management is abnormal.
• ☞ No. 05907[F]−0001P2RA replenishment solution output amount/replenishment solution level management is abnormal.
After the problems are solved, perform Mixing Replenisher in F: Functions of Pump Output Amount Setting and initialize the
replenishment data.
☞ 33003
The printing process can be continued.
4610 1/1
4620
The solution levels (P1R/P2RA/P2RB) are even at the ### YES P1R (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor, P2RA
(upper) replenishment solution level sensor. (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor and P2RB
(Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor are all ON.
NO YES
NO
Add a small amount of water to turn ON all of the P1R (Upper)

Perform recovery procedure 3 from the replenishment error. Replenishment Solution Level Sensor, P2RA (Upper)
☞ 4621 Replenishment Solution Level Sensor and P2RB (Upper)
Replenishment Solution Level Sensor.
4. Troubleshooting
After the problems are solved, perform Mixing Replenisher in F: Functions of Pump Output Amount Setting.
☞ 33003
4620 1/1
4621
• To close errors such as ☞ No. 05912[F]Predetermined process amount was exceeded., drain all replenishment solutions using the
procedure below, then perform Mixing Replenisher. Otherwise, the error cannot be closed.
Procedure
1. Access the Input Check mode, and confirm that all replenishment solution level sensors detect OFF.
Maintenance → Extension → Maintenance → Input Check → Processor
All replenishment solution level sensors detect OFF.
4. Troubleshooting
M5476-00
2. If any of the P1R/P2RA/P2RB replenishment solution level sensors detects ON, drain all the
replenishment solutions from the P1R/P2RA/P2RB replenisher tanks.
QSS-3701/3702/3703/LP7500/LP7600 QSS-3704/3705/LP7700/LP7900
Hoses to drain replenishment solutions Hoses to drain replenishment solutions
To each hose, a sticker P1R/P2RA/P2RB or PSR is attached. To each hose, a sticker P1R/P2RA/P2RB or PSR is attached.
Hoses to drain working solutions Hoses to drain working solutions
3. Attach new replenisher cartridge.
4. Perform Mixing Replenisher with all replenisher tanks empty.
• Although error messages such as ☞ No. 05912[F]Predetermined process amount was exceeded. are shown, ignore them.

Maintenance → Extension → Processor Settings → Pump Output Amount Setting → F: Functions → Mixing Replenisher
4621 1/2
4621
M5467-00
5. End
4. Troubleshooting
4621 2/2
4630
Taking countermeasures after the errors No.05916 to No.05921 occurs
1. Error No. 05916 to No. 05921 occurs.
2. Remove the filter pipe of each processing tank, then push and sink the float of the processing solution float
switch with a stick to confirm the processing solution float switch moves smoothly.
Floats
4. Troubleshooting
Sticks
G069042
If the processing solution float switch does not move smoothly

• Check that each processing solution float switch is not soiled.
3. If the processing solution in a tank is found to be below the cutout of the sub-tank or the solution level
indicator, add the processing solution from the sub-tank.
Solution level check positions
Cutout Solution level indicator
G085934
4. Error recurs?
Error recurs Manual No. No error Manual No.

Processing solution float switch ☞ 63280 Check each replenishment pump output ☞ 33003
amount again.
Processor relay PCB ☞ 66220 Check the output amounts of auto cleaning ☞ 33004
pump + each automated cleaning valve again.
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200 Replenisher pump ☞ 63280
Processor I/O PCB ☞ 66210 P1, P2 and PS automated cleaning valve
Processor power supply 2 ☞ 67400 Replenisher cartridge cleaning pump
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
4630 1/1
40500
Attention message: Processor
No. 00500[N]
Add water to the Refilling Water Tank.
Attention message release

YES
Condition
00000 The refilling water tank level sensor turns off.
Diagnosis
Failed part Manual No.
Refilling water tank level sensor ☞ 63290
Processor I/O PCB 1 ☞ 66210
Processor power supply 2 ☞ 67400
4. Troubleshooting
$ Symptoms due to connection failure of wiring/symptoms resulted from blowout of fuse
Symptoms due to the wiring connection failure Symptoms of fuse blowout
− ☞ 4203 ☞ 4252
NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.
40500 1/12
40500
No. 00501[N]
The replenisher switch is turned on.

YES or automatic release
• The replenisher switch turns on by pressing the YES key.
Condition
00000 After the replenisher switch was turned off, a specified number of seconds of replenishment lack time has passed.
After the replenisher switch was turned off, a specified time has passed with the replenishment solution sensor
ON.
After the replenisher switch was turned off, manual replenishment or output amount measurement is carried out.
4. Troubleshooting
40500 2/12
40500
No. 00502[N]
Add replenishment solution to the replenishment tank.

YES
Condition
00001 CD replenishment solution level sensor turns off.
00002 BF replenishment solution level sensor turns off.
00004 STB replenishment solution level sensor turns off.
Diagnosis
Replenishment solution level sensor ☞ 63290
☞ 66210
4. Troubleshooting
Processor I/O PCB 1

− ☞ 4203 ☞ 4252
NOTE
40500 3/12
40500
No. 00503[N] [SM]

Empty the Effluent Tank.

• This attention message will be automatically closed when the effluent tank is emptied.
Condition
00001 The CD effluent float switch turns on.
00002 The BF effluent float switch turns on.
00004 The STB effluent float switch turns on.
00008 P2 + PS Effluent Float Switch turns on.
Check Point
1 Check the solution level of the effluent tank.
4. Troubleshooting
2 Check if the float of the effluent float switch moves up and down smoothly.
Diagnosis
Effluent float switch ☞ 63290

− ☞ 4203 −
NOTE
40500 4/12
40500
No. 00505
Remove the prints from the Print Sorter Unit.

• This attention message will be automatically closed when prints are removed.
NOTE
• While this message appears, the sorter is not activated.
Condition
00000 The print full sensor of the print sorter unit turns DARK.
Check Point
1 Check that the print receiving tray and the print full sensor are not soiled.
Diagnosis
4. Troubleshooting
Print full sensor ☞ 63271
NOTE
40500 5/12
40500
No. 00506
Close the Dryer Cover.

• This message will be automatically closed when the dryer cover is closed.
Condition
00000 While prints are not being made, the interlock switch (dryer cover) turns off.
NOTE
• When the interlock switch (dryer cover) turns off, the drive motor, the dryer heater and the dryer fan will stop.
Check Point
1 Check if the dryer top cover and the dryer door are securely closed.
4. Troubleshooting
Diagnosis
Adjustment failure point Manual No.
Interlock switch (dryer cover) ☞ 63260

Processor relay PCB ☞ 66220

− ☞ 4203 −
NOTE
40500 6/12
40500
No. 00507
Close the Processor Top Cover.

• The attention message will be automatically closed when the processor top cover is closed.
Condition
00000 While prints are not being made, the interlock switch (processor top cover) turns off.
When auto cleaning is to be carried out, the interlock switch (processor top cover) turns off.
When refilling with water is to be carried out, the interlock switch (processor top cover) turns off.
NOTE
• The drive motor, the refilling water pump, the cleaning pump, and the exhaust fan will stop when the interlock switch (processor top
cover) turns off.
Check Point
4. Troubleshooting
1 Check that the processor top cover is securely closed.
Diagnosis
Interlock switch (Processor top cover) ☞ 63290


− ☞ 4203 −
NOTE
40500 7/12
40500
No. 00508
Paper remains in the processor. Are you sure you want to turn the drive off?

YES or NO
• Select YES to turn off the drive.
• Select NO to finish the print mode with the drive being on.
Condition
00000 Although paper still remains in the processing rack or dryer rack, an attempt is made to turn off the drive.
NOTE
• Processing time of the processor varies depending on the specification.
Check Point
1 Check if all pieces of paper come out.
4. Troubleshooting
40500 8/12
40500
No. 00510
Attach the Print Conveyor Unit.

• This attention message will be automatically closed when the print conveyor unit is set.
Condition
00000 The conveyor unit sensor turns LIGHT in the standby status after the drive has stopped.
Check Point
1 Check if the conveyor unit sensor is soiled.
Diagnosis
4. Troubleshooting
Conveyor unit sensor ☞ 63271
NOTE
40500 9/12
40500
No. 00515
Set the Rack Stopper.

• This attention message will be automatically closed when the rack stopper is fixed.
Condition
00000 While prints are not being made, the rack stopper sensor turns off.
Check Point
1 Check that the rack stopper is securely placed.
Diagnosis
4. Troubleshooting
Failure in the attaching position adjustment of the rack stopper sensor ☞ 63290

Rack stopper sensor ☞ 63290

− ☞ 4203 −
NOTE
40500 10/12
40500
No. 00520
Sensors may be dirty.

YES
Condition
- The light source level is 255 when the sensor status changes from dark to light during Print Sensor LED Light
Intensity Adjustment.

00001 Print Sensor (Left)
00002 Print Sensor (Right)
00008 Print Sensor (Center)
00016 Dryer Lane Select Sensor
4. Troubleshooting
Check Point
1 Clean each sensor using a blower brush.
2 Carry out Print Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment in Functions of Print Sensor Adjustment.
See ☞ 33001.
Diagnosis
Print Sensor (Left) Print Sensor (Center) Print Sensor (Right) ☞ 63260
NOTE
40500 11/12
40500
No. 00521
Remove the prints from the sorter tray (large)

YES
Condition
00000 A print whose advance length is from 457.3 mm to 914.4 mm is output to the print receiving tray (large).*1
*1. This message is not shown if Long Length Print Ejection (36inch) is set to OFF in the Processor 1 tab on the Operator Selections display.
4. Troubleshooting
40500 12/12
40600
Attention message: Tablet Replenishment
No. 00600[J]
The Tablet Cartridge is empty. CD
No. 00601[J]
The Tablet Cartridge is empty.BF
No. 00602[J]
The Tablet Cartridge is empty. STB

• The message will be automatically closed when the cartridge is replaced.
Condition
Error message No. Condition
No. 00600-00000 CD Tablet Sensor 1 or 2 did not detect tablet even though the CD Drum motor was started.
No. 00601-00000 BF Tablet Sensor 1 or 2 did not detect tablet even though the BF Drum motor was started.
No. 00602-00000 STB Tablet Sensor 1 or 2 did not detect tablet even though the STB Drum motor was started.
4. Troubleshooting
NOTE
• Printing can be performed until the Reservoir Count reaches Drop Limit if Order Display→Processor Status→Change→Tablet
Drop Reservoir is set to ON. (Tablet Drop is not to be carried out but water supply.)
Diagnosis
Tablet Sensor ☞ 63310
Tablet replenishment driver PCB ☞ 66500
NOTE
40600 1/7
40600
No. 00603[J]
Add water to the Water Supply Tank.

YES
Condition
00000 The SW tank level sensor turns off.
Diagnosis
SW Tank Level Sensor ☞ 63310
NOTE
4. Troubleshooting
40600 2/7
40600
No. 00604[J]
Add water to the SW/DW Tank.

YES
Condition
00000 The SW/DW tank level sensor turns off.
Diagnosis
SW/DW Tank Level Sensor ☞ 63310
4. Troubleshooting
NOTE
40600 3/7
40600
No. 00605[J]
Attach the Tablet Cartridge. CD
No. 00606[J]
Attach the Tablet Cartridge.BF
No. 00607[J]
Attach the Tablet Cartridge. STB

• This attention message will be automatically closed when you attach the tablet cartridge.
Condition
No. 00605-00000 The CD Cartridge Sensor turned LIGHT when you attempted to operate a drum or elevator.
No. 00606-00000 The BF Cartridge Sensor turned LIGHT when you attempted to operate a drum or elevator.
No. 00607-00000 The STB Cartridge Sensor turned LIGHT when you attempted to operate a drum or elevator.
4. Troubleshooting
NOTE
• Printing can be performed until the Reservoir Count reaches Drop Limit if Order Display→Processor Status→Change→Tablet
Drop Reservoir is set to ON. (Tablet Drop is not to be carried out but water supply.)
Diagnosis
Cartridge Sensor ☞ 63310
NOTE
40600 4/7
40600
No. 00608[J]
Attach the Tablet Replenishment Unit.

• This attention message will be automatically closed when the tablet replenishment unit is set.
Condition
00000 Tablet replenishment unit interlock switch turns off.
Diagnosis
Blown fuses Manual No.
F25 Tablet replenishment driver PCB ☞ 66500

Tablet replenishment unit interlock switch ☞ 63310
4. Troubleshooting
NOTE
40600 5/7
40600
No. 00609[J]
The Tablet kit is empty.

YES
Condition
00000 All tablets of CD in a kit are dropped.
NOTE
• If all tablets of CD in a kit are dropped, Tablet Operation is to be carried out and tablets of BF and STB are to be dropped up to Drop
Limit/without Replenishment Limit.
4. Troubleshooting
40600 6/7
40600
No. 00610[J]
Empty the Effluent Tank.###

NOTE
• CD, BF or STB
The name of processing solution causing this attention message will be displayed in the second line of the message.
NOTE
• If the Effluent Float Switch turns on, all water supply pumps and cleaning pumps stops physically.
Condition
00001 The CD effluent float switch turns on.
00002 The BF effluent float switch turns on.
4. Troubleshooting
00004 The STB effluent float switch turns on.
Check Point
1 Check if the float of the effluent float switch moves up and down smoothly.
Diagnosis
Effluent float switch ☞ 63310
NOTE
40600 7/7
40700
Attention message: SM replenishment
No. 00700[SM]
Replace the Replenishment Package with a new one.P-#

YES
This attention message will be closed only when the replenishment package is removed. (You have to turn off the replenishment package
sensor once.)
Condition
00001 While replenishment solution sensor CD-A turns DARK, the remaining replenishment tanks are not refilled
forcibly.
00002 While replenishment solution sensor CD-B turns DARK, the remaining replenishment tanks are not refilled
forcibly.
00004 While replenishment solution sensor CD-C turns DARK, the remaining replenishment tanks are not refilled
forcibly.
00008 While replenishment solution sensor STB turns DARK, the remaining replenishment tanks are not refilled
forcibly.
4. Troubleshooting
00016 While replenishment solution sensor BF-A turns DARK, the remaining replenishment tanks are not refilled
forcibly.
00032 While replenishment solution sensor BF-B turns DARK, the remaining replenishment tanks are not refilled
forcibly.
NOTE
• When the tank is not refilled forcibly whether or not to set SM Replenishment Setting via Machine Specification, these messages
appear. When the following conditions, the tanks are not refilled forcibly.
SM Replenishment Setting Detecting condition of the replenishment solution sensor
ON The replenishment solution is not detected when the power is on.
The replenishment solution is not detected when the replenishment package is replaced.
The replenishment solution is not detected during output checks.
The replenishment solution is not detected while measuring the output amount.
The replenishment solution is not detected while initial replenishing.
Each replenishment solution in the replenishment package is not detected at the same time.
OFF Forced replenishment is not carried out.
• A suffix number is indicated by the decimal number.
Check Point
1 Check that the replenishment solution sensor is not soiled.
Diagnosis
Sensitivity of the replenishment solution sensor ☞ 27830

Replenishment solution sensor ☞ 63300
SM I/O PCB ☞ 66600
NOTE
40700 1/6
40700
No. 00701[SM]
Attach the Replenishment Package.P-#

• When the replenishment package is set, this attention message will be automatically closed and attention message No. 703 Would you
like to initialize the remaining amount of the Replenishment Package? appears.
Condition
00001 Replenishment package sensor P-1 turns off.
00002 Replenishment package sensor P-2 turns off.
Diagnosis
Failure in the attaching position adjustment of the replenishment package sensor ☞ 63300
4. Troubleshooting
Replenishment package sensor ☞ 63300
SM I/O PCB ☞ 66600
NOTE
40700 2/6
40700
No. 00702[SM]
Add water to the Water Supply Tank.

YES
Condition
00000 The water supply tank level sensor turns off.
Diagnosis
Water supply tank level sensor ☞ 63300
SM I/O PCB ☞ 66600
NOTE
4. Troubleshooting
40700 3/6
40700
No. 00703[SM]
Would you like to initialize the remaining amount of the Replenishment Package?

YES or NO
• Select YES to bring up the message No. 0704: Press the [YES: Execute] to initialize the remaining amount of the Replenishment
Package.
• Select NO to return to the regular print display.
IMPORTANT
• If the replenishment package is replaced before it becomes completely empty, be sure to initialize the remaining amount
of the replenishment package.
• If the replenishment package is not replaced but attached again, the process will be continued without initializing the
remaining amount of the replenishment package.
Condition
00000 Before the replenishment package is completely empty, replenishment package sensor 1 or 2 turns off.
4. Troubleshooting
Diagnosis

SM I/O PCB ☞ 66600
NOTE
40700 4/6
40700
No. 00704[SM]
Press the [YES: Execute] to initialize the remaining amount of the Replenishment
Package.

YES or NO
• Select YES to initialize the remaining amount of the replenishment package.
• Select NO to return to the regular print display.
IMPORTANT
• If the replenishment package is replaced before it becomes completely empty, be sure to initialize the remaining amount
of the replenishment package.
• If the replenishment package is not replaced but attached again, the process will be continued without initializing the
remaining amount of the replenishment package.
Condition
00000 Before the replenishment package is completely empty, replenishment package sensor 1 or 2 turns off.
4. Troubleshooting
Diagnosis

SM I/O PCB ☞ 66600
NOTE
40700 5/6
40700
No. 00705[SM]
Replace the Replenishment Package with a new one.P-#

YES
This attention message will be closed only when the replenishment package is removed. (You have to turn off the replenishment package
sensor once.)
Condition
00001 While replenishment solution sensor CD-A turns DARK, the remaining replenishment tanks are refilled forcibly.
00002 While replenishment solution sensor CD-B turns DARK, the remaining replenishment tanks are refilled forcibly.
00004 While replenishment solution sensor CD-C turns DARK, the remaining replenishment tanks are refilled forcibly.
00008 While replenishment solution sensor STB turns DARK, the remaining replenishment tanks are refilled forcibly.
00016 While replenishment solution sensor BF-A turns DARK, the remaining replenishment tanks are refilled forcibly.
00032 While replenishment solution sensor BF-B turns DARK, the remaining replenishment tanks are refilled forcibly.
4. Troubleshooting
NOTE
• If the tank is refilled forcibly after SM replenishment has been set via Machine Specification, these messages appear.
• A suffix number is indicated by the decimal number.
Check Point
1 Check that the replenishment solution sensor is not soiled.
Diagnosis
Sensitivity of the replenishment solution sensor ☞ 63300

Replenishment solution sensor ☞ 63300
SM I/O PCB ☞ 66600
NOTE
40700 6/6
40900
Attention message: F replenishment
No. 00902[F]
Install the replenisher cartridge.

YES
IMPORTANT
• If the above attention message is shown, do not click YES to close it and continue the printing process without performing
the diagnosis below.
After a set number of prints are output, ☞ No. 05912[F] Predetermined process amount was exceeded. will be shown,
and then printing cannot be performed.
Condition
00000 When performing the cartridge opening process, the Replenisher Cartridge Set Sensor is off.
For details of operation specification, see ☞ 57010.
Check Point
4. Troubleshooting
Check that replenisher cartridge is correctly set. -
Check the Replenisher Cartridge Set Sensor status via Input Check. ☞ 35220
Diagnosis
Replenisher Cartridge Set Sensor ☞ 63280
F replenishment I/O PCB ☞ 66800
NOTE
40900 1/13
40900
No. 00903[F]
Close the replenisher section door.

This attention message will be closed when the replenisher section door is close.
Condition
00000 When performing the cartridge opening process, the replenisher section cover is opened.
Check Point
Check if the replenisher section door is closed securely. -
Check the Interlock Switch (Replenisher Section Door) status via Input Check. ☞ 35220
Diagnosis
4. Troubleshooting
Interlock Switch (Replenisher Section Door) ☞ 63280
NOTE
40900 2/13
40900
No. 00905[F]
Install the new replenisher cartridge.

YES
IMPORTANT
• If the above attention message is shown, do not click YES to close it and continue the printing process without performing
the diagnosis below.
Condition
00000 If all the sensors below detect OFF although 40 seconds has passed after the replenishment cartridge opened.
• P1R (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor
• P2RA (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor
• P2RB (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor
4. Troubleshooting
NOTE
• The cartridge installation section is raised, and the attention message appears.
Check Point
Check that an empty replenisher cartridge is not set. -
Check the Replenisher Cartridge Set Sensor status via Input Check. ☞ 35220
Diagnosis
• P1R (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor ☞ 63280
NOTE
40900 3/13
40900
No. 00906[F]
It is ready to replace the replenisher cartridge.

YES
Condition
00000 If this system is closed down and started while mixing Replenisher has been completed by a cartridge open
NOTE
• If creating the replenishment solution is completed, this attention message is shown only once when the system starts up.
• When creating replenishment solution on the previous day, this message appears while Start Up Checks are performed.
Replace an empty replenishment cartridge with a new cartridge in advance. When the solution runs out, replenishment solution will be
automatically created which will save you from stopping printing.
It is recommended that cartridges be replaced at the start up of the day.
Check Point
4. Troubleshooting
1 Set a new cartridge.
40900 4/13
40900
No. 00907[F]
Collect the waste solution.

Condition
00001 P1 Effluent Float Switch turns on.
Check Point
Check the solution level of the effluent tank. -
Check the effluent float switch status via Input Check. ☞ 35220
Diagnosis
4. Troubleshooting
• P1 Effluent Float Switch ☞ 63280
• P2 + PS Effluent Float Switch
NOTE
40900 5/13
40900
No. 00908[F]
Open operation was not completed correctly. Replenishment solution preparation will
resume.

YES
Condition
00000 The system is shut down with opening operation remaining incomplete and the system is started.
Check Point
1 Wait until the replenishment solution is created (opening operation) completely.
4. Troubleshooting
40900 6/13
40900
No. 00909[F]
Replenishment tank is empty. Cannot start the operation.

YES
Condition
Condition
When trying to measure the output amount or perform the initial replenishment when the replenishment solution level sensor for
replenishment tank is under the conditions below.

00001 P1R (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor: OFF
00002 P2RA (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor: OFF
00004 P2RB (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor: OFF
00008 PSR (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor: OFF
4. Troubleshooting
Check Point
Create the replenishment solution. -
Check each replenishment solution level sensors status via Input Check. ☞ 35220
Diagnosis
• P1R (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor ☞ 63280
• PSR (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor
NOTE
40900 7/13
40900
No. 00910[F]
Preparing the replenishment solution. One moment please . . .

YES
Condition
Model Condition
QSS-3701/3702/3703/LP7500/LP7600 While preparing the replenishment solution, the system has printed up to the maximum
number of printed sheets (approx. 507 sheets for 127 mm × 89 mm).
QSS-3704/3705/LP7700/LP7900 While preparing the replenishment solution, the system has printed up to the maximum
number of printed sheets (approx. 545 sheets for 127 mm × 89 mm).
Check Point
1 Wait until the replenishment solution is created (opening operation) completely.
4. Troubleshooting
40900 8/13
40900
No. 00912[F]
Replenishment solution was created. Initialize replenishment data and restart
replenishment.

YES or NO
• Select YES to initialize the replenishment data.
• When Mixing Replenisher is performed by mistake while the replenishment solution is created normally, select NO.
Maintain the status without initializing the replenishment data.
Condition
Condition
If all the (upper and lower) replenishment solution level sensors of P1R, P2RA and P2RB are turned on when starting the Mixing
Replenisher operation.
• When restarting the process without draining the replenishment solution from P1R/P2RA/P2RB after taking countermeasures against
replenisher section errors, attention No. 912 is shown if adding water to the replenishment tank and performing Mixing Replenisher
with turning on all the (upper) and (lower) replenishment solution level sensors (ON: the state of solution filled).
4. Troubleshooting
40900 9/13
40900
No. 00913[F]
Mixing Replenisher cannot be started.

YES
Condition
Condition
If the (lower) replenishment solution level sensors of P1R/P2RA/P2RB are on after the Mixing Replenisher is clicked

00001 P1R
00002 P2RA
00004 P2RB
4. Troubleshooting
NOTE
• If any one of the (lower) replenishment solution level sensors of P1R/P2RA/P2RB is on after clicking Mixing Replenisher and a
specified time has passed, ☞ No. 05923[F] occurs.
Countermeasure
1. Drain replenishment solution completely from the replenishment tanks of P1R, P2RA and P2RB. ☞ 27550
2. Perform Mixing Replenisher with each replenishment tank empty.☞ 33003
Check Point
Check the status of # # # (lower) replenishment solution level sensors of each processing solution with ☞ 35220
Input Check.
Diagnosis
P1R (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor ☞ 63280
P2RA (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor
P2RB (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor
NOTE
40900 10/13
40900
No. 00914[F]
PSR is running out.
Countermeasure message
Add 12 liters PSR to the PSR replenishment tank.
YES
• You can select from two methods to make solution from PSR tablets. Although the ratio of water to tablets is slightly different
between these methods, it does not affect solution quality.
1. Dissolve three tablets in 12 liters of water, then replenish this solution into the replenishment tank.
2. Dissolve three tablets in 15 liters of water, then replenish 8 liters of this solution into the replenishment tank.
NOTE
• Even if the above attention message is shown, printing can be continued until the message ☞ No. 00916[F] PSR is empty. is shown.
• The above attention message starts condition check after Start Up Check is performed.
Condition
4. Troubleshooting
00000 • PSR (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor turns off.
• The power supply is turned on when PSR (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor is off.
NOTE
• Attention message No. 00914 is not shown while the automatic Daily Setup is performed.
Check Point
Add PSR. -
Check the PSR (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor status via Input Check. ☞ 35220
Diagnosis
PSR (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor ☞ 63280
NOTE
40900 11/13
40900
No. 00916[F]
PSR is empty.
YES
• You can select from two methods to make solution from PSR tablets. Although the ratio of water to tablets is slightly different
between these methods, it does not affect solution quality.
1. Dissolve five tablets in 20 liters of water, then replenish this solution into the replenishment tank.
2. Dissolve five tablets in 25 liters of water, then replenish 20 liters of this solution into the replenishment tank.
NOTE
• When the above attention message appears, printing process stops.
Condition
4. Troubleshooting
00000 • PSR (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor turns off.
• The power supply is turned on when PSR (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor is off.
NOTE
• Attention message No. 00916 is not shown while the automatic Daily Setup is performed.
Check Point
Add PSR. -
Check the PSR (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor status via Input Check. ☞ 35220
Diagnosis
PSR (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor ☞ 63280
NOTE
40900 12/13
40900
No. 00918[F]
Replenish PSR.
YES
Condition
00000 When performing the cartridge opening process, the PSR (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor is off.
Check Point
Add PSR. -
Check the PSR (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor status via Input Check. ☞ 35220
4. Troubleshooting
Diagnosis
PSR (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor ☞ 63280
NOTE
40900 13/13
41000
Attention message: Printer
No. 01026
Close the Printer Top Cover.

YES or automatic release.
• The message will be automatically closed when the printer top cover is closed.
Condition
00000 Interlock switch (printer top cover) turns off.
Check Point
1 Check that the printer top cover is securely closed.
Diagnosis
Interlock switch (printer top cover) ☞ 63050
4. Troubleshooting
Printer I/O PCB 1 ☞ 66020
Laser control PCB ☞ 66010
Printer control PCB ☞ 66000
NOTE
41000 1/7
41000
No. 01029
The measurement failed. Measure it again.

YES or NO
• Select YES to measure the print again.
• Select NO to stop the operation.
Condition
− The test print paper type for measurement was not correct.
When measuring the daily setup test print, the density between steps did not rise consecutively.
− The Dmax of the measured daily setup print was below 0.9, and the daily setup Dmax data for 15 days were not
ready.
− The Dmax of the measured daily setup print was below 0.9, and the daily setup Dmax data for 15 days did not
change consecutively day by day and changed suddenly.
− Even though the range of the Dmax is within 0.9 and 3.8, the correction value density was over 10 times as high
4. Troubleshooting
as the previous value when calculating the daily setup correction value,
− When calculating the daily setup correction value, the correction value density was 3 key or more. And minus
correction (print density has been risen) has been carried out.
− When calculating the daily setup correction value, the total correction value (density), which started as soon as
the initial setup or paper specification registration setup was completed, is beyond the limit value. And minus
correction (print density has been risen) has been carried out.
NOTE
• See the setup print judgment flow at the daily setup. ☞ 56620
Check Point
1 Check that the test print is correctly placed in the colorimeter.
2 Check that the test print is correctly made.
3 Wipe the measurement area using a firmly squeezed damp soft cloth with a neutral detergent diluted with water. Then, wipe
and dry it up using a dry soft cloth.
Measurement part
4 Check that the calibration plate is correctly inserted.
Between steps
G083195
Diagnosis
The countermeasure action and the failed part would differ depending on the suffix number.
If the test print color density is normal
Countermeasure and failed part Manual No.
Adjust the height of the colorimeter unit. ☞ 27470
41000 2/7
41000

Clean the advance rollers of the colorimeter with a cleaning sheet.
Adjust the colorimeter unit. ☞ 35100
Clean the calibration plate.
Replace the calibration plate if it is scratched on. ☞ 27470
Colorimeter unit ☞ 27470
Problems may occur if the process of performing morning daily setup, then performing Emulsion Number
Change on the main paper when the air temperature has risen, is repeated for several days.
In that case, perform the paper specification registration setup, then perform the paper magazine registration setup
of other magazines.
If the test print color density is abnormal

Laser unit ☞ 63080
Problems may occur when the processing solution (CD) has been replaced.
4. Troubleshooting
In that case, perform the paper specification registration setup, then perform the paper magazine registration
setup of other magazines.
NOTE
41000 3/7
41000
No. 01047
Close printer door.

• This attention message will be automatically closed when the printer door is closed.
Condition
00001 The interlock switch (printer door 1, 2 or 4) turns off.
00002 Printer door 3 sensor turns off.
NOTE
• If the interlock switch (printer door 1, 2 or 4) turns off, power is not supplied to some electrical parts.
Check Point
1 Check that printer doors 1, 2, 3, and 4 are securely closed.
4. Troubleshooting
Diagnosis
Interlock switch (printer door 1, 2, 4) ☞ 63050
Printer door 3 sensor ☞ 63050
Triple magazine PCB ☞ 66050
Quad magazine PCB ☞ 66055
Printer power supply 5 ☞ 66100

☞ 4202 − −
NOTE
41000 4/7
41000
No. 01074
Sensors may be dirty.

YES
Condition
Condition
The light source level when the sensor status changes from DARK to LIGHT is 170 or more, when carrying out Paper Sensor LED
Light Intensity Adjustment via Functions in Paper Sensor Adjustment.

00001 Paper end sensor A (SE6)
00002 Paper end sensor B (SE4)
00004 Paper end sensor C (SE5)
00064 Exposure start sensor (SE14)
00128 Paper sensor 1 (SE18)
4. Troubleshooting
00256 Paper sensor 2 (left) (SE25)
00512 Paper sensor 2 (center) (SE26)
01024 Paper sensor 2 (right) (SE27)
02048 Paper end sensor A2 (SE29)
Check Point
2 Carry out Paper Sensor Adjustment. ☞ 36000
NOTE
• In the service mode, LED light intensity value is displayed in the Paper Sensor Adjust.
• After cleaning each sensor, carry out Paper Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment again and check that the sensor LED light
intensity changes.
Diagnosis
Paper end sensor A (SE6) ☞ 63051
Paper end sensor B (SE4)
Paper end sensor C (SE5)
Paper end sensor A2 (SE29)
Exposure start sensor (SE14) ☞ 63070
Paper sensor 1 (SE18) ☞ 63090
Paper sensor 2 (left) (SE25) ☞ 63110
Paper sensor 2 (center) (SE26)
Paper sensor 2 (right) (SE27)
NOTE
41000 5/7
41000
No. 01000−01132
Attention messages not explained in the Service Manual
Condition
IMPORTANT
• Attention messages not explained in this Service Manual are listed in the table.
For corrective actions, see the Troubleshooting Manual, EZ Controller Troubleshooting Manual and EZ Controller
Service Manual.
See the EZ Controller Troubleshooting Manual.
Attention message table
No. 01012 The print channel is not set. Confirm the print channel.
No. 01018 Would you like to stop processing?
No. 01032 One moment please. . .
No. 01040 Press the [ORDER] key.
No. 01048 Press the [ORDER] key. Wait until output has completed.
4. Troubleshooting
No. 01050 Additional Picture CD's cannot be made in this order. Press the [ORDER] key.
No. 01079 If you would like to make a Picture CD, using the current data, press the [ORDER] key.
No. 01080 Unable to accept additional processing at this time. Press the [ORDER] key.
No. 01095 Unable to accept additional processing at this time.
For details, see the Troubleshooting Manual.

No. 01000 The Paper Magazine is out of paper. Paper Magazine A
No. 01001 The Paper Magazine is out of paper. Paper Magazine B
No. 01002 Would you like to feed the leading edge of paper? Paper Magazine A
No. 01003 Would you like to feed the leading edge of paper? Paper Magazine B
No. 01004 Attach the Paper Magazine. Paper Magazine A
No. 01005 Attach the Paper Magazine. Paper Magazine B
No. 01047 Close printer door.
No. 01052 The Paper Magazine is out of paper. Paper Magazine C
No. 01053 Would you like to feed the leading edge of paper? Paper Magazine C
No. 01067 Attach the Paper Magazine. Paper Magazine C
No. 01083 The Paper Magazine is out of paper. Paper Magazine A2
No. 01084 Would you like to feed the leading edge of paper? Paper Magazine A2
No. 01086 Would you like to feed the leading edge of paper? Paper Magazine A
No. 01088 Attach the Paper Magazine. Paper Magazine A2
No. 01096 Change the Paper Magazine.
No. 01104 The Paper Magazine is out of paper. Paper Magazine B
No. 01105 The Paper Magazine is out of paper. Paper Magazine C
No. 01106 The Paper Magazine is out of paper. Paper Magazine A2
No. 01110 The Paper Magazine is out of paper.
No. 01112 Attach the Paper Magazine. Paper Magazine B
No. 01113 Attach the Paper Magazine. Paper Magazine C
41000 6/7
41000

No. 01114 Attach the Paper Magazine. Paper Magazine A2
No. 01118 Change the Paper Magazine.
No. 01121 Which paper magazine would you like to print with?
No. 01124 Would you like to execute the Emulsion Number Change Setup? Paper Magazine A
No. 01125 Would you like to execute the Emulsion Number Change Setup? Paper Magazine B
No. 01126 Would you like to execute the Emulsion Number Change Setup? Paper Magazine C
No. 01127 Would you like to execute the Emulsion Number Change Setup? Paper Magazine A2
No. 01128 Would you like to execute the Emulsion Number Change Setup? Paper Magazine A
No. 01131 Printing is paused to switch the paper developing time.
No. 01132 The Paper Magazine is out of paper.
NOTE
• In the Attention message table, attention message numbers that are not used currently may be listed.
4. Troubleshooting
41000 7/7
41300
Attention message: Scanner/ Film Carrier
No. 01302−01454
Condition
IMPORTANT
For corrective actions, see the EZ Controller Service Manual, Scanner Service Manual, Connection Unit Service
Manual and Troubleshooting Manual (scanner).
See the EZ Controller Service Manual.
No. 01302 Would you like to stop scanning?
No. 01456 Could not start the scanner.
No. 01457 The scanner has canceled processing. Processing will quit.
See the Scanner Service Manual.
4. Troubleshooting
No. 01305 Photometry Section may be dirty.
No. 01306 Update the light source. If film remains in the Film Carrier, remove it.
No. 01313 The Focus Adjustment was not completed yet.
No. 01314 Light source evenness is out of allowable range.
No. 01315 LED Light Source temperature is being adjusted. process cannot be continued.
No. 01316 Focus Adjustment failed.
No. 01317 Failed to perform the Scan Position Auto Correction.
No. 01318 Close the Scanner Unit Cover.
No. 01319 Scanner type was changed. The system will be restarted.
No. 01320 There may be dust on the AFC opening.
NOTE
No. 01400 Lock the Film Carrier.
No. 01401 Attach the Film Carrier.
No. 01402 Attach the 135/240 AFC.
No. 01303 Undeveloped cartridge. Cannot process.
No. 01404 The IX frame data is incomplete.
No. 01405 Remove the 135 film from the Film Carrier.
No. 01409 Set the lane for the Film Carrier.
No. 01410 Confirm the film stop position in the Film Carrier.
No. 01412 The film is upside down. Would you like to continue processing?
No. 01413 Input the frame number
No. 01414 The FID number was not detected.
No. 01416 Select the 240 lane.
No. 01417 Close the Mount Insertion Cover.
No. 01421 Confirm the stop position of all the frames to be processed.
41300 1/2
41300

No. 01422 Select the 135 lane.
No. 01423 Execute Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment. Remove the film from the Film Carrier.
No. 01424 Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment is being executed.
No. 01425 Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment is complete.
No. 01426 Attach the 110 AFC.
No. 01427 Execute Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment. If film remains in the Film Carrier, remove it.
No. 01428 Remove the mount from the Film Carrier.
No. 01429 Make sure that the mount is placed correctly.
No. 01433 Attach the AMC.
No. 01435 Insertion direction of film is different. Insert the film from the rear end (end with largest frame number).
No. 01438 Set the attachment.
No. 01439 Light Source was not updated. Would you like to scan?
NOTE
See the Connection Unit Service Manual.
4. Troubleshooting
No. 01450 Attach the Connecting Unit.
No. 01451 Remove the film from the Connecting Unit.
No. 01452 Film Processor was not detected.
No. 01454 Close Film Advance Guides 1 and 2.
No. 01455 Remove the film from the Negative Stocker.
NOTE
No. 01458 Attach the MFC.
No. 01459 Set the Adjustment Attachment.
No. 01460 The film advance section may be soiled. At the end of the daily operation (on the Close Down Checks display),clean the
film advance section using the cleaning leader.
For details, see the Troubleshooting Manual (scanner).
NOTE
41300 2/2
41500
Attention message: Disk/Media
Attention message: Disk/Media
No. 01501−01549
See the EZ Controller Troubleshooting Manual for Corrective action of Attention
message.
Condition
IMPORTANT
See the EZ Controller Troubleshooting Manual for Corrective action of Attention message.
Attention message (Storage Media)
No. 01501 The media is write protected.
No. 01502 Replace the media.
No. 01503 The appropriate file was not found.
No. 01508 There are some files that could not get written to the media. Would you like to stop processing?
No. 01510 Read the data. Set the media.
4. Troubleshooting
No. 01511 Write the data. Set the media.
No. 01512 Data was not read from the media.
No. 01513 Data was not written to the media. Format the media?
No. 01515 Data is too large to write.
No. 01516 Data is too large to read.
No. 01517 Invalid image format. Failed to read.
No. 01519 Data has been written to this media. Would you like to delete all the written files?
No. 01520 Select the template.
No. 01521 Template information does not match to make the Album Print.
No. 01522 Are you sure to print the previous frame except selected one?
No. 01523 It was not registered as an option.
No. 01528 Registered Print Type of Print Channel is not for normal printing.
No. 01529 Failed to read the bar code.
No. 01530 The data was not written to the Network Folder. Make sure a Network Folder exists.
No. 01531 The data was not written to the Network Folder. Make sure the Network is connected.
No. 01533 Data was saved to the storage media.
No. 01534 Data was not written to the Hard Disk. Would you like to delete the image file(s)?
No. 01536 The data has already been written to this media. Format this media?
No. 01539 The data has already been written to this media. Set a new media.
No. 01540 Data could not be written to the media. Confirm the media drive setting.
No. 01542 The same order number data already exists. Would you like to overwrite?
No. 01543 This file is CMYK data. Color cannot be converted correctly. Would you like to read the data?
No. 01545 The image size aspect ratio is not correct. Data was not written.
No. 01546 Data could not be written to the media. Confirm that the media capacity matches the Media Capacity Setting.
No. 01547 Data was saved to the storage media. Remove the media.
No. 01548 Hard disk is full. Would you like to delete the image file(s)?
No. 01549 Data is too small to read.
NOTE
41500 1/1
41550
Attention message: Colorimeter
No. 01552
The paper in the Colorimeter is too short. It cannot be measured.

YES
Condition
00001 While feeding test print in the colorimeter unit, paper sensor 1 turned DARK. After that, paper sensor 1 turned
LIGHT before advancing a specified amount of paper.
00002 While feeding test print in the colorimeter unit, paper sensors 1 and 2 turned DARK. After that, paper sensor 1
turned LIGHT before advancing a specified amount of paper.
NOTE
• See the setup print color measuring operation flow. ☞ 56610
Check Point
1 Check that a short test print has not been inserted.
4. Troubleshooting
2 Carry out each correction via Colorimeter Unit Adjustment.
Diagnosis
Paper sensor 1 or 2 ☞ 63318
Paper advance motor
NOTE
41550 1/3
41550
No. 01555
The calibration plate data is out of range.

YES
Condition
00000 When calibrating the colorimeter, the difference between the two photometry values obtained by the calibration
plate measurements at the 9 mm point (black position) and 18 mm point (white position) from the leading end is
100 or less.
NOTE
• See the setup print judgment operation flow. ☞ 56620
Check Point
1 Wipe the measurement area using a firmly squeezed damp soft cloth with a neutral detergent diluted with water. Then, wipe
and dry it up using a dry soft cloth.
4. Troubleshooting
Measurement part
2 Check that the calibration plate is correctly inserted.

IMPORTANT
• Check if there is no dirt on the calibration plate, and inserted it properly, then calibrate the colorimeter unit again.
If the same attention message appears again, perform Updating the Calibration Plate Data.
☞ 27460
• If the same attention message appears after Updating the Calibration Plate Data, follow the diagnosis below.
Diagnosis
Adjustment failure
Adjust the height of the colorimeter unit. ☞ 27470
For defective parts
Replace the colorimeter unit in the case of the colorimeter unit failure.

NOTE
41550 2/3
41550
No. 01556
The Colorimeter Unit is not set.

YES
Condition
00000 The colorimeter unit is not detected while it does not operate or communicate.
Check Point
1 Confirm that the colorimeter unit is correctly attached.
Diagnosis
4. Troubleshooting

− ☞ 4203 −
NOTE
41550 3/3
41620
Attention message: NMC/Printers in common
No. 01750
Communication with the printer failed. The printer may not be active, or the LAN cable
may not be connected.

Retry or Continue
• If Retry is selected, the system starts connecting maintenance application and printer I/F main PCB again.
If the communication fails, the same attention is displayed.
• Select Continue to stop the process.
Condition
00000 The communication between the printer maintenance application and printer I/F main PCB failed.
Check Point
1 Restart the computer and printer. -
2 Confirm the connection of the LAN cable. ☞ 4260
4. Troubleshooting
Diagnosis
Countermeasure Manual No.
• Confirm the connection of the LAN cable. -
☞ 4260
• Confirm that the settings of the IP address and the Subnet Mask are correct.
☞ 66005
• This error may occur if the ARCNET communication status is abnormal.
• Check the ARCNET communication status on the Version Check display.
☞ 35500
• Check the ARCNET communication path.
☞ 50520
• For details about the diagnosis of ARCNET communication error, see ☞ 35940.

Printer I/F main PCB ☞ 66005
PC -

☞ 4202 − −
NOTE
41620 1/12
41620
No. 01751
There was a time difference of more than 2 minutes between the clocks of printer and
PC. The printer clock was adjusted to match the PC clock.

YES
The attention message is closed.
Condition
00000 If time difference between the printer timer and operation computer was two minutes or more, and the timer
setting of the printer was changed to that of the operation computer.
NOTE
• The error above appears for the FRONTIER-Printer only.
4. Troubleshooting
41620 2/12
41620
No. 01753
Printer is not ready. Start the printer.

• While the close down checks is performed
1. Click YES.
2. The close down checks is canceled.
• After the close down checks is performed
1. Click YES.
2. Start this system.
Condition
00000 This attention is displayed when the operation computer inquires whether the printer is ready to process or not
while the close down checks is performed or after it is finished.
4. Troubleshooting
41620 3/12
41620
No. 01754
Profile data registered to the printer is not compatible with that of the application.

YES
Condition
00000 If the profile data has no compatibility when connecting the NKC maintenance application to the OEM printer.
Check Point
1 Check the profile data. -
4. Troubleshooting
41620 4/12
41620
No. 01756
Printer profile versions are inconsistent.

YES
Condition
00000 When the power supply is turned on, the profile version is different between the printer I/F main PCB and
operation computer.
Check Point
Countermeasure
• Condition 1
If the latest profile CD was installed, and the profile version is different between the operation PC and printer:
Upgrade the profile version of the printer processor to Ver. 2.
Pattern 1
4. Troubleshooting
Example 1 Operation PC Printer
(Ver. 2) (Ver. 1.5)
Corrective action for condition 1 and pattern 1

1. Perform the Daily Setup from the Maintenance Application.
• Condition 2
If the profile version of newly added printer 2 is higher than those of the operation PC and already connected printer 1:
Upgrade to the later Ver. 2.
Pattern 2
Example 2 Operation PC Printer 1
(Ver. 1.5) (Ver. 1.5)
Printer 2
Newly added printer
(Ver. 2)

1. Install the profile CD of Ver. 2 to the operation PC.*1
2. Perform the Daily Setup of printer 1 from the Maintenance Application.
• Condition 3
If the profile version of newly added printer 2 is lower than those of the operation PC and already connected printer 1:
Upgrade to the Ver. 1.5.
Pattern 3
(Ver. 1.5) (Ver. 1.5)
Printer 2
Newly added printer
Ver. 1

1. Perform the Daily Setup of printer 2 from the Maintenance Application.
*1. For the LP7500/LP7600/LP7700/LP7900, install the CD (SYSTEM PROGRAM KIT) supplied with each printer.
Diagnosis
41620 5/12
41620
NOTE
4. Troubleshooting
41620 6/12
41620
No. 01757
Execute the startup checks.

1. Click YES.
2. Perform the start up checks.
Condition
00000 This message is shown when the operation computer inquiries something even though the start up checks has not
been finished.
4. Troubleshooting
41620 7/12
41620
No. 01758
Maintenance is proceeding. Close the Maintenance screen.

1. Click YES.
Condition
00000 This message is shown when the operation PC inquires whether the printer is ready to process while the
maintenance display is used.
IMPORTANT
• The attention is shown only for the FRONTIER-Printer.
4. Troubleshooting
41620 8/12
41620
No. 01759
Adjusting the temperature. One moment please.

1. Click YES.
Condition
00000 This message is shown when the operation PC inquires whether the printer is ready to process while the
temperature of the laser or processor is adjusted.
IMPORTANT
4. Troubleshooting
41620 9/12
41620
No. 01760
Installation is proceeding. One moment please.

1. Click YES.
Condition
00000 This message is shown when the operation PC inquires whether the printer is ready to process or not while the
printer is upgraded.
IMPORTANT
4. Troubleshooting
41620 10/12
41620
No. 01761
Printer is offline. Confirm that the circuit breaker of the printer is ON and that the
printer is connected correctly.

1. Click YES.
Condition
00000 This message is shown when the operation PC inquires whether the printer is ready to process or not in the
condition that the operation PC and printer cannot communicate.
IMPORTANT
Check Point
4. Troubleshooting
1 Restart the computer and printer.
Diagnosis
☞ 4260

Hard disk -
NOTE
41620 11/12
41620
No. 01621−01722
message.
Condition
IMPORTANT
Attention message (NMC)
No. 01637 Print Channel was not set. The order was not accepted.
No. 01638 Print Type in the Print Channel Setting is not Normal Print. The order was not accepted.
No. 01639 Failed to read the DPOF file. The order was not accepted.
4. Troubleshooting
No. 01644 Exif Information was not read.
No. 01645 Data is too large to read.
No. 01646 Invalid image format. Failed to read.
No. 01649 The Aspect Ratio of image size is incorrect. Failed to write.
No. 01650 Data is too small to read.
No. 01658 The Picture CD could not be created because there are more frames than can be saved.
No. 01702 Meida is being written. One moment please. . .
No. 01719 New software has been received. Would you like to upgrade the software?
No. 01720 E-mail has received.
No. 01723 Uploading the setting data. One moment please. . .
No. 01724 %s is running.
No. 01725 Failed to download the backup data.
NOTE
41620 12/12
41800
Attention message: Software upgrade
No. 01801
Execute software upgrade.

YES
Condition
- Although the version of each control PCB is checked when the power supply is turned on, it is not correct.
Suffix number PCB

(bit)
00001 Printer control PCB
00008 Processor control PCB
00512 Laser control PCB
NOTE
• The name of PCB for which the attention occurred is displayed in the second line of the message.
4. Troubleshooting
• Perform diagnosis following the reference of each PCB below.
Check Point
1 Upgrade the software. ☞ 35600
Diagnosis
NOTE
41800 1/5
41800
No. 01804
The printer version is incorrect. Upgrade the printer software.

YES
Condition
00000 When the power supply is turned on, the versions of the printer control PCB, processor control PCB and laser
control PCB are different from those saved on the computer.
Check Point
Countermeasure
• Condition 1
The printer processor version is lower than the printer version data on the operation PC:
Upgrade the printer processor version to Ver. 2.
Pattern 1
4. Troubleshooting
Example 1 Operation PC Printer
(Ver. 2) (Ver. 1.5)

1. Upgrade the printer processor.☞ 35600*2
• Condition 2
If the version of newly added printer 2 is higher than those of the operation PC and already connected printer 1:
Upgrade to the later Ver. 2.
Pattern 2
(Ver. 1.5) (Ver. 1.5)
Printer 2
Newly added printer
(Ver. 2)

1. Install the CD of Ver. 2 to the operation PC.*1
2. Upgrade the printer processor of printer 1.☞ 35600*2
• Condition 3
If the version of newly added printer 2 is lower than those of the operation PC and already connected printer 1:
Upgrade to the Ver. 1.5.
Pattern 3
(Ver. 1.5) (Ver. 1.5)
Printer 2
Newly added printer
Ver. 1

1. Upgrade the printer processor of printer 2.☞ 35600*2
*1. For the LP7500/LP7600/LP7700/LP7900, install the CD (SYSTEM PROGRAM KIT) supplied with each printer.
*2. If the EZ Controller is installed, the printer processor is automatically performed. (QSS-37)
Diagnosis
41800 2/5
41800

NOTE
4. Troubleshooting
41800 3/5
41800
No. 01805
The printer program is corrupted. Run the recovery software.

YES
Condition
00000 When the power supply is turned on, the software of the printer I/F main PCB corrupts and cannot function.
IMPORTANT
• The attention message above is shown if the power supply is reset during upgrading the printer.
Check Point
2 Start the recovery software to recover it.
IMPORTANT
4. Troubleshooting
• If starting the recovery software, set the address of the printer I/F main PCB to 192.168.1.11.
If the same address is used for other printer, connect the PC and the printer I/F main PCB directly.
• The recovery software does not operate correctly when starting the recovery software while the error above is not
shown.
Procedure
1. Click Start of Windows → Programs or All Programs → NPIPLVUP.
2. The DOS display is shown for a moment and the recovery software starts, then upgrading is performed.
IMPORTANT
• It will take about one minute to upgrade. Do not turn off the power supply during upgrading.
3. Restart the printer/processor section.
41800 4/5
41800
3 Procedure (If the recovery software does not start normally)

Start the recovery software in the following conditions.
If changing the settings, be sure to write down the current settings, and restore the settings after the operation.
1. Directly connecting the operation PC and printer
• If connecting them with a LAN cable (cross cable), set Link Speed & Duplex of the operation PC to Auto Detect.
Right-click the My Computer icon. → Manage (G) → Device Manager → Double-click Network adapter. → Right-
click the adapter to use. → Click Properties. → Click the Advanced tab.
• If connecting them with a LAN cable (straight cable), use a HUB to connect them.
2. Set the IP address of the operation PC to 192.168.1.12, and subnet mask to 255. 255. 255. 224.
Start → Control Panel → Network Connections → Right-click Local Area Connection. → Click Properties.
3. If the OS of the operation PC is Windows XP, set Firewall to OFF.
Start → Control Panel → Security Center → Firewall
4. Press the Windows key on the keyboard.
5. Run the recovery software, NPIPLVUP.
4. Troubleshooting
Start → Programs → NPIPLVUP
The recovery software display is shown, and recovery process automatically starts.
When the recovery process finishes, the display is closed.
IMPORTANT
• It takes about one minute to complete the recovery process. Do not turn off the PC power supply during the
process.
6. If you changed the IP address, subnet mask and firewall settings, restore them.
7. Restart the printer/processor section.
Diagnosis
NOTE
41800 5/5
41821
Attention message: External system
No. 1821
For corrective action of the attention message, see the d-Storage/ CD-R external writing
system Service Manual.
Condition
IMPORTANT
For corrective action of the attention message, see the d-Storage/ CD-R external writing system Service Manual.
Attention message (External system)
No. 1821 The data cannot be output to the External System. Confirm the power supply of External System.
NOTE
4. Troubleshooting
41821 1/1
41900
Attention message: Main
No. 01920
Capacity Booster Key was not detected. Confirm the connection status.

YES
• Select YES to operate as the low capability type input section.
Condition
00032 When the system starts up, it cannot detect capacity booster F.
00064 When the system starts up, it cannot detect capacity booster G.
00096 When the system starts up, it cannot detect capacity booster PCB F and capacity booster PCB G.
00128 When the system starts up, it cannot detect capacity booster PCB H.
00256 When the system starts up, it cannot detect capacity booster PCB I.
01024 If the option CD for capacity booster F is not installed
02048 If the option CD for capacity booster G is not installed
03072 If the option CD for capacity booster F and G is not installed
4. Troubleshooting
04096 If the option CD for capacity booster H is not installed
08192 If the option CD for capacity booster I is not installed
Check Point
1 Confirm that the capacity booster PCB is recognized correctly.
☞ 35500
2 Confirm that the booster hard key is attached correctly.
3 Confirm that Capacity Booster Software has been installed normally.
• After installing the Capacity Booster Software, click OK on the Machine Specification display.
4 Confirm the connection between the printer I/F main PCB (J/P1211) and capacity booster PCB (J/P860).
Diagnosis
Capacity booster PCB ☞ 66008

☞ 4202 − −
NOTE
41900 1/3
41900
No. 01860−01997
Condition
IMPORTANT
See the EZ Controller Troubleshooting Manual and Connecting Unit Service Manual for Corrective action of Attention
message.
Attention message (Software)
No. 01850 The data was not written to the Network Folder. Would you like to output the data to a local folder?
No. 01851 This Order ID data already exists. Would you like to output the data to a local folder?
No. 01852 The data was not written to the Network Folder. Stop the process.
No. 01853 This Order ID data already exists. Stop the process.
No. 01854 Scanning data does not exist in the Controller database. Data in the EZLab database will be used instead.
4. Troubleshooting
No. 01861 Accessing the media. The writing will be canceled.
No. 01862 The size specified in the DPOF information is not correct. Would you like to read the file?
No. 01863 Auto Correction was not processed.

No. 01957 Reserve the order.
(See the T15/LS Connecting Unit Operator's Manual.)
No. 01982 Reserved orders remain. Delete all the reserved orders.
Attention message (Main)

No. 01901 Selected optional function is not available. If you need to use, Install it.
No. 01903 Proceeding. One moment please. . .
No. 01908 A Picture CD could not be made. Confirm the settings.
No. 01922 Viewer Software was not found. Confirm the settings.
No. 01926 Set the Media Print Paper Fitting in Frame Print to "Cut", "Overall" or "Real Size".
No. 01939 The String is too long to register.
No. 01940 Invalid format. Failed to read.
No. 01941 Would you like to delete the selected Print Menu?
No. 01943 The setting has changed. Would you like to register?
No. 01944 Appropriate Print Menu was not found. Stop the process.
No. 01945 A tab where the Print Menu has not been set exists. Would you like to continue?
No. 01947 The selected Print Channel is used as a Print Menu Icon. Would you like to delete?
No. 01967 Input the Order ID.
No. 01973 EZLab is not set.
No. 01974 EZLab was not found.
No. 01975 The order was not found.
No. 01976 Failed to read the database.
No. 01977 There is insufficient space left on the disk. Stop the process.
No. 01980 Failed to import the file. Confirm the file is correctly selected.
No. 01981 Short Cut Key is selected overlapped.
No. 01995 Processing an order. Cannot change this setting.
41900 2/3
41900

No. 01996 Processing the order. . . The setting data was not updated.
No. 01997 Setting data will be updated.
NOTE
4. Troubleshooting
41900 3/3
43370
Attention message: Edit
No. 04001−04054
message.
Condition
IMPORTANT
Attention message (Edit)
No. 04001 Are you sure about deleting?
No. 04002 Red Eye Correction cannot be executed no more.
No. 04003 Image cannot be inserted into the specified position.
No. 04004 Graphics are too large to insert.
No. 04006 Prints cannot be made with this Print Channel. Select a Print Channel using a larger paper width.
4. Troubleshooting
No. 04010 Specify the image area.
No. 04015 Selected file already exists.
No. 04017 The head and jaw position is opposite, or the selected area is too small.
No. 04018 Would you like to quit the Edit Mode?
No. 04019 If you Import, all customer information will be deleted. Are you sure you want to Import?
No. 04020 Failed to write the file.
No. 04021 Failed to read the file.
No. 04023 Image magnification ratio or reduction ratio is out of range.
No. 04024 Select the layer.
No. 04025 This template has more than 16 layers. This template cannot be used.
No. 04026 The image size is too large to insert.
No. 04027 The same data already exists. Would you like to overwrite?
No. 04028 Failed to export the Image Save File.
No. 04029 The drive is empty.
No. 04030 Failed to delete the Exported Image Save Data.
No. 04031 There is insufficient space left on the disk.
No. 04032 Template size is too large to read.
No. 04033 Vertical templates cannot be used to make frame prints. Select a horizontal template.
No. 04034 A pupil could not be detected in the specified area.
No. 04035 Additional phrases could not be saved.
No. 04036 The image size is too small to insert.
No. 04037 The same file name already exists. Would you like to overwrite?
No. 04040 The database was not changed. Confirm the property of each field.
No. 04041 A form larger than the print size cannot be used.
No. 04042 Single Form is not positioned.
No. 04043 A Single Form protrudes from the Print Area.
No. 04044 Single Form is overlapped.
No. 04045 No more than three Single Form types can be positioned.
No. 04046 When the Paper Setting is changed, the current position information is canceled.
No. 04047 The selected font was not found.
No. 04048 The image size is too small to make a Test Print.
No. 04049 No more items can be added.
43370 1/2
43370

No. 04053 Image Save Data was not found.
No. 04054 Image Save Data was not found.
NOTE
4. Troubleshooting
43370 2/2
44200
No. 4200−4231
For corrective action of the attention message, see the d-Storage/ CD-R external writing
system Service Manual.
Condition
IMPORTANT
Attention message (External PCs)
No.4200 The ink comes to an end.
No.4201 The CD is filled to capacity when writing the Viewer Software. This order will be canceled.
No.4202 The background data was not found.
No.4203 The logo data was not found.
No.4204 There is insufficient space left on the hard disk.
4. Troubleshooting
No.4205 An error has occurred in the Rimage.
No.4206 The Viewer Software folder was not found.
No.4207 The Shop Data folder was not found.
Attention message (External system)

No.4208 Image size is too large.
No.4210 Confirm the CD-R external writing system.
No.4211 The data cannot be output to the CD-R external writing system. Confirm the power supply of CD-R external writing
system.
No.4213 The output media size is too large. The data cannot be output to the External System.
No.4215 Confirm the d-Storage.
No.4216 The data cannot be output to the d-Storage. Confirm the power supply of d-Storage.
No.4217 Confirm the LAN connection with the d-Storage.
No.4230 Previous order information remains. Would you like to continue?
No.4231 Too many files. Could not read.
NOTE
44200 1/1
44350
Attention message: Bravo II
Attention message: Bravo II
No. 4350−4358
See the Bravo II Service Manual for Corrective action of Attention message.
Condition
IMPORTANT
See the Bravo II Service Manual for Corrective action of Attention message.
Attention message (Bravo II)
No.4350 The input bin is empty. Set the media and press the Ink Cartridge button on the Bravo.
No.4351 The quantity of ink in the color ink cartridge ran short. Open the cover of the Bravo and press the Ink
Cartridge button, then install the new cartridge. When continuing processing without replacing the cartridge,
press the Ink Cartridge button.
No.4352 The quantity of ink in the black ink cartridge ran short. Open the cover of the Bravo and press the Ink
Cartridge button, then install the new cartridge. When continuing processing without replacing the cartridge,
press the Ink Cartridge button.
4. Troubleshooting
No.4353 The quantity of ink in both ink cartridges ran short. Open the cover of the Bravo and press the Ink Cartridge
button, then install the new cartridges. When continuing processing without replacing the cartridges, press
the Ink Cartridge button.
No.4354 The Bravo Top Cover is open. Close the cover.
No.4355 The shared folder of PTBurn is full. Wait until the writing of CD is completed.
No.4356 The power supply of Bravo is not ON. Turn ON the Bravo.
No.4357 The data has already been written to this media. Set a new media.
No.4358 Write the data. Set the media.
IMPORTANT
CD-R external writing system
No. 4360 The shared folder of Rimage CD/DVD Publishing Systems is full. Wait until the writing of CD is completed.
44350 1/1
45500
Error message: Processor 1
No. 05500
The processing solution temperature is above the safety range. P1
No. 05501
The processing solution temperature is above the safety range. P2
No. 05502
The processing solution temperature is above the safety range. PS
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
YES
Condition
No. 05500-00000 The P1 processing solution temperature exceeds the safety range (setting temperature + 1°C) after the
temperature adjustment is finished. (P1 thermosensor)
No. 05501-00000 The P2 processing solution temperature exceeds the safety range (setting temperature + 3°C) after the
4. Troubleshooting
temperature adjustment is finished. (P2 thermosensor)
No. 05502-00000 The PS processing solution temperature exceeds the safety range (setting temperature + 3°C) after the
temperature adjustment is finished. (PS thermosensor)
NOTE
• There is a specific process specification whose safe range of PS is the setting temperature + 7°.
Check Point
1 Confirm that the value measured via Thermosensor Calibration is correctly entered.
2 Check whether the tank cooling fans (FAN 1 to 3) operate normally.
Diagnosis
For cooling failure Manual No.
Cooling fan ☞ 63290
When temperature is incorrectly detected Manual No.

Thermosensor ☞ 63290
NOTE
45500 1/14
45500
No. 05503
The dryer temperature is above the safety range.
Alarm release
NO
NO
Condition
00000 The dryer temperature exceeds the safety range (setting temperature + 10°C) after the temperature adjustment is
completed. (dryer thermosensor)
Diagnosis
When temperature is incorrectly adjusted Manual No.
4. Troubleshooting
Dryer thermosensor ☞ 63290
NOTE
45500 2/14
45500
No. 05504
The processing solution temperature is below the processing range. P1
No. 05505
No. 05506
Alarm release
NO
NO
NOTE
• The processing solution temperature will be adjusted when the error display is closed.
Condition
4. Troubleshooting
No. 05504-0000 The P1 processing solution temperature falls below the processing range (setting temperature − 1°C) after
the temperature adjustment is finished. (P1 temperature sensor)
No. 05505-00000 The P2 processing solution temperature falls below the processing range (setting temperature − 3°C) after
the temperature adjustment is finished. (P2 temperature sensor)
No. 05506-00000 The PS processing solution temperature falls below the processing range (setting temperature − 5°C) after
the temperature adjustment is finished. (PS temperature sensor)
Check Point
1 Confirm that the value measured via Thermosensor Calibration is correctly entered.
Diagnosis
Processing solution heater ☞ 63290

NOTE
45500 3/14
45500
No. 05507
The dryer temperature is below the processing range.
Alarm release
NO
NO
The dryer temperature will be adjusted when the error display is closed.
Condition
00000 The dryer temperature falls below the processing range (setting temperature − 10°C) during paper processing.
(dryer thermosensor)
Diagnosis
Dryer heater ☞ 63290
4. Troubleshooting

NOTE
45500 4/14
45500
No. 05508
The processing solution level is too low.
Alarm release
NO
YES
Condition
00000 The processing solution level detectors of the processing solution float switches (P1, P2 and PS) turned off.
NOTE
• If the processing solution level detector of the processing solution float switch turns off, all the processing solution heaters and
circulation pumps turn off.
Check Point
Common to all specifications
4. Troubleshooting
1 Check if the processing solution is leaking from the tank.
2 Clean the replenishment pump, strainer units of water supply pump or a hose. Check the output amounts.
3 Check if the float of the processing solution float switch moves up and down smoothly.
Diagnosis
Common
When the level is incorrectly detected Manual No.
Processing solution float switch ☞ 63290
[F]
When the solution is insufficiently added Manual No.
P1R Replenisher Pump ☞ 63290
P2RA Replenisher Pump
P2RB Replenisher Pump
[N]
Replenisher pump ☞ 63290
Refilling water pump ☞ 63290
[SM]
Water Supply Pump ☞ 63290
45500 5/14
45500

SM I/O PCB ☞ 66600
[J]

− ☞ 4203 ☞ 4252
NOTE
4. Troubleshooting
45500 6/14
45500
No. 05509
The circulation amount has decreased.
Alarm release
NO
YES
NOTE
• This error message will be shown only when the system is equipped with the optional digital flowmeter.
Condition
00000 The circulation amount of the P1 processing solution measured by the digital flowmeter falls below 3L/min.
Although the system is not equipped with a digital flowmeter, the digital flowmeter is set to ON via Option
Registration.
NOTE
• This error will not be displayed when the digital flowmeter is set to OFF via Option Registration.
4. Troubleshooting
Check Point
1 Check that the filter cartridge is not soiled.
2 Check if the circulation pump and the hose connected to the pump are clogged.
Diagnosis
Digital flowmeter ☞ 63290
NOTE
45500 7/14
45500
No. 05510
Processor A/D conversion error.
Alarm release
NO
NO
Condition
00000 The analog data detected by each thermosensor cannot be converted to digital data.
IMPORTANT
• The A/D conversion is a process to convert analog data of the temperature measured by the processing solution
thermosensor, the dryer thermosensor and the inner thermosensor into digital data via the processor control PCB.
Diagnosis
4. Troubleshooting

− ☞ 4203 −
NOTE
45500 8/14
45500
No. 05511
The circulation pump has stopped. CD
No. 05512
The circulation pump has stopped. CD2
No. 05513
The circulation pump has stopped. BF
No. 05514
The circulation pump has stopped. BF2
No. 05515
The circulation pump has stopped. STB1
No. 05516
No. 05517
4. Troubleshooting
No. 05518
Alarm release
NO
YES
Condition
No. 05511-00000 The rotation detector built in the P1 circulation pump detects that the pump has stopped rotating.
No. 05512-00000 The rotation detector built in the P1-2 circulation pump detects that the pump has stopped rotating.
No. 05513-00000 The rotation detector built in the P2 circulation pump detects that the pump has stopped rotating.
No. 05514-00000 The rotation detector built in the P2-2 circulation pump detects that the pump has stopped rotating.
No. 05515-00000 The rotation detector built in the PS1 circulation pump detects that the pump has stopped rotating.
Check Point
Diagnosis
Circulation pump ☞ 63290

− ☞ 4203 ☞ 4252
45500 9/14
45500
NOTE
4. Troubleshooting
45500 10/14
45500
No. 05519
Thermosensor error. P1
No. 05520
No. 05521
Alarm release
NO
NO
Condition
No. 05519-00000 The temperature detected by the P1 thermosensor is not within a specified range.
No. 05520-00000 The temperature detected by the P2 thermosensor is not within a specified range.
4. Troubleshooting
No. 05521-00000 The temperature detected by the PS thermosensor is not within a specified range.
Diagnosis

− ☞ 4203 −
NOTE
45500 11/14
45500
No. 05522
Dryer Thermosensor error.
Alarm release
NO
NO
Condition
00000 The temperature detected by the dryer thermosensor is not within a specified range.
Diagnosis
4. Troubleshooting
− ☞ 4203 −
NOTE
45500 12/14
45500
No. 05524
Refilling water operation error. CD-W
No. 05525
Refilling water operation error. BF-W
No. 05526
Refilling water operation error. STB1-W
No. 05527
No. 05528
No. 05529
Alarm release
4. Troubleshooting
NO
YES
Condition
No. 05524-00000 The refilling water level detector of the CD processing solution float switch does not turn on even though a
specified time has passed since refilling water operation started.
No. 05525-00000 The refilling water level detector of the BF processing solution float switch does not turn on even though a
No. 05526-00000 The refilling water level detector of the STB1 processing solution float switch does not turn on even though a
NOTE
• The CD, BF and STB4 processing solution float switches have a processing solution level detector, a refilling water level detector and
a safety thermostat for each.
The STB3, 5 and 6 processing solution float switches have a refilling water level detector for each.
Check Point
3 Check that the hoses from the refilling water pumps CD-W, BF-W, STB1-W, STB2-W, STB3-W, and STB4-W
to the sub-tank are not clogged.
Diagnosis
When water is incorrectly added Manual No.
45500 13/14
45500
When refilling water is incorrectly detected Manual No.

NOTE
4. Troubleshooting
45500 14/14
45530
Error: Processor 2
Error: Processor 2
No. 05530
The Processor Top Cover is open.
No. 05531
The dryer cover is open.

YES
Condition
No. 5530-00000 While prints are being made, the interlock switch (processor top cover) turns off.
No. 5531-00000 While prints are being made, the interlock switch (dryer cover) turns off.
NOTE
• The drive motor, the refilling water pump, the cleaning pump, and the exhaust fan will stop when the interlock switch (processor top
cover) turns off.
• When the interlock switch (dryer cover) turns off, the drive motor, the dryer heater and the dryer fan will stop.
4. Troubleshooting
Check Point
1 Check that the processor top cover is securely closed.
2 Check that the dryer top cover and the dryer front cover are securely closed.
Diagnosis
NOTE
45530 1/14
45530
Error: Processor 2
No. 05532
The Processing Solution Safety Thermostat has activated.

YES
Condition
00000 The safety thermostat of the processing solution float switches CD, BF or STB turns off.
NOTE
• The processing solution safety thermostat is activated at the following temperatures.
Standard processing Time reduction processing

Status Temperature (°C) Status Temperature (°C)
OFF 46±3 OFF 51±3
ON 36±3 ON 41±3
4. Troubleshooting
• If the safety thermostat of the processing solution float switch turns OFF, all the processing solution heaters and circulation pumps will
stop.
Check Point
2 Check if the hose connected to the circulation pump are clogged.
Diagnosis
When the safety thermostat is defective Manual No.


Circulation failure Manual No.

Circulation pump ☞ 63290

− ☞ 4203 ☞ 4252
NOTE
45530 2/14
45530
Error: Processor 2
No. 05533
The Dryer Safety Thermostat has activated.

YES
Condition
00000 The dryer safety thermostat turns off.
NOTE
• The dryer safety thermostat is activated at the following temperatures.
Status Temperature (°C)

OPEN(OFF) 90±2.8
CLOSE(ON) 70±4.4
• When the dryer safety thermostat goes OFF, the dryer heater and dryer fan go OFF.
4. Troubleshooting
Check Point
1 Check if the dryer fan is rotating.
Diagnosis
When the dryer fan rotates incorrectly Manual No.
Dryer fan ☞ 63260

When the safety thermostat is defective Manual No.

Dryer safety thermostat ☞ 63260


− ☞ 4203 ☞ 4252
NOTE
45530 3/14
45530
Error: Processor 2
No. 05534
Print Sorter Unit operation error.

NO
Condition
00001 Although a specified time has passed since the print sorter unit started operating, the sorter home sensor does not
turn LIGHT.
00002 Although a specified time has passed since the sorter home sensor turned LIGHT, it does not turn DARK.
Check Point
1 Clean the sorter home sensor using a blower brush.
Diagnosis
4. Troubleshooting
Operation failure Manual No.
Sorter motor ☞ 63271
Detection failure Manual No.

Sorter home sensor ☞ 63271

− ☞ 4203 −
NOTE
45530 4/14
45530
Error: Processor 2
No. 05535
Paper has jammed in the processor section.

YES
Condition
Suffix number Status Condition
00000 Normal • After the printer feeds out the paper to the processor, Print Sensor (Left), Print Sensor
process*1 (Center) or Print Sensor (Right) in the dryer section do not turn DARK within a specified
time.
• For details, see ☞ 56100 Paper advance operation of the processor (normal prints).
Normal • After the printer feeds out the paper to the processor, Dryer Lane Select Sensor in the dryer
process*2 section do not turn DARK within a specified time.
• For details, see ☞ 56100 Paper advance operation of the processor (normal prints).
Automatic color • When the colorimeter unit paper sensor 1 does not turn DARK within a specified time in
measurement*3 performing the automated color measurement of setup print
• For details, see ☞ 56110 Paper advance operation of the processor (setup prints).
4. Troubleshooting
• After a setup print is fed to the processor, the Dryer Lane Select Sensor does not detect
DARK within a specified time.
• For details, see ☞ 56610Automatic color measurement operation for setup prints.
*1. If prints are output to the print conveyor unit

*2. If prints are output to the print receiving tray (large)
*3. If prints are fed to the colorimeter unit
IMPORTANT
• The error above may occur when the ARCNET communication status is not normal.
If the error occurs, check the following items.
☞ 35500
☞ 50520
Check Point
1 Confirm that the upper guides and the squeegee unit are securely attached.
2 Confirm that the gears and the rollers rotate smoothly after removing the paper processing rack from the processing solution
tank.
3 Confirm that the lower turn belt of the paper processing rack is damaged.
4 Confirm that paper remains on each sensor.☞ 35220
5 Confirm that the paper guide of the dryer rack is correctly attached.
6 Confirm that the print sensor is soiled.
Diagnosis
Adjustment failure Manual No.
If paper jam occurs during automatic colorimetry ☞ 33505
Check the setting of Dryer Section Setting (Auto Setup).
If paper jam occurs during normal process ☞ 33001
Perform paper sensor adjustment.
45530 5/14
45530
Error: Processor 2
If paper jam occurs during normal process

Print Sensor (Left)/Print Sensor (Center)/Print Sensor (Right) ☞ 63260
If paper jam occurs during automatic colorimetry

Paper Sensor 1 ☞ 63318

Dryer selection solenoid 1/Dryer selection solenoid 2 ☞ 63260
Drive motor ☞ 63290
Dryer fan ☞ 63260
☞ 66200
4. Troubleshooting
Processor control PCB

☞ 4202 ☞ 4203 −
NOTE
45530 6/14
45530
Error: Processor 2
No. 05537
The Rack Stopper is not set.

YES
Condition
00000 While prints are being made, the rack stopper sensor turns off.
Check Point
1 Check that the rack stopper is securely placed.
Diagnosis
4. Troubleshooting
NOTE
45530 7/14
45530
Error: Processor 2
No. 05538
Backup data error. Processor

NO
Condition
0### The backup data of the processor control PCB is abnormal.
1### The backup data of the printer I/F main PCB and processor control PCB.
NOTE
• The value informed from CPU is displayed in the last three digits of the suffix number.
• If approximately 5 days have passed with the power supply being off or if the processor control PCB has been replaced with a new
one, this error message is shown.
IMPORTANT
• If the error message above is shown, the backup data for the processor control PCB saved in the printer I/F main PCB is
4. Troubleshooting
sent to the processor control PCB within approx. 5 to 10 minutes while the error cannot be canceled.
If the backup data is sent normally, the error above can be closed.
However, the backup data saved in the printer I/F main PCB may have a problem. If the error above occurs, we
recommend you to read the backup data on the media saved at the close down check.
Diagnosis
If the data was deleted Manual No.
Carry out Reading data. ☞ 35400
Only for F specification, the error message ☞ No. 05905[F], ☞ No. 05906[F], or ☞ No. 05907[F] may appear in ☞ 57020
specific condition.

NOTE
45530 8/14
45530
Error: Processor 2
No. 05539
Print Conveyor Unit was removed.

YES
Condition
00000 The conveyor unit sensor turns LIGHT while the drive motor is operating.
Check Point
1 Check if the conveyor unit sensor is soiled.
Diagnosis
Conveyor unit sensor ☞ 63271
4. Troubleshooting
NOTE
45530 9/14
45530
Error: Processor 2
No. 05545
Print Sensor (Left) error.
No. 05547
Print Sensor (Right) error.
No. 05548
Dryer Lane Select Sensor error.
No. 05553
Print sensor (center) error

YES
Condition
- When Print Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment was performed, the system could not adjust it normally.
4. Troubleshooting
00001 When the standard voltage was set to 7.5 V and the light source level was set to 0, the print sensor did not change to
LIGHT.
00002 If the standard voltage was set to 7.5 V and the light source level was set to 255, the print sensor did not detect LIGHT.
In addition, although the standard voltage was set to 4.0 V, the print sensor did not detect light.
00003 Even if the standard voltage was changed from 7.5 V to 4.0 V for the light source level, the print sensor did not detect
LIGHT.
Check Point
2 Perform Print Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment of Functions via Print Sensor Adjustment.
See ☞ 33001.
NOTE
• In the service mode, LED light intensity value is displayed in the Print Sensor Adjustment Display.
• After cleaning each sensor, carry out Print Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment again and check that the sensor LED light
intensity changes.
Diagnosis
Print sensor (Right) (Center) (Left) ☞ 63260
Dryer lane select sensor
NOTE
45530 10/14
45530
Error: Processor 2
No. 05549
Drive Motor Revolution Count Auto Adjustment error.

YES
Condition
- When Drive Motor Revolution Count Auto Adjustment was performed in Functions of Drive Motor
Revolution Count Setting, the system could not adjust it normally.
NOTE
• The suffix number differs depending on the operation which is currently processed.

00001 Even though the drive motor revolution count is set to 255, it was smaller than the required count.
00002 Even though the drive motor revolution count is set to 0, it was more than the required count.
4. Troubleshooting
Diagnosis
NOTE
45530 11/14
45530
Error: Processor 2
No. 05550
Drive Motor has stopped.

YES
Condition
00000 The drive motor has stopped due to the protected operation.
Diagnosis
Drive motor driver PCB (QSS-3704, QSS-3705, LP7700 and LP7900 only) ☞ 66870
4. Troubleshooting
− ☞ 4203 −
NOTE
45530 12/14
45530
Error: Processor 2
No. 05551
Paper Guide operation error.

NO
Condition
1 Although the paper guide motor was operated in the direction which closes the paper guide, even after a specified
time has passed, the paper guide open sensor does not turn LIGHT.
2 After the paper guide open sensor turns LIGHT, the paper guide close sensor does not turn DARK even though a
specified time has passed.
3 Although the paper guide motor was operated in the direction which raises the paper guide, even after a specified
time has passed, the paper guide close sensor does not turn LIGHT.
4 After the paper guide close sensor turns LIGHT, the paper guide open sensor does not turn DARK even though a
specified time has passed.
5 Both the paper guide close sensor and paper guide open sensor turns DARK.
4. Troubleshooting
Check Point
1 Clean the paper guide open sensor and paper guide close sensor using a blower brush.
Diagnosis
Paper guide open sensor ☞ 63271
Paper guide close sensor
Paper guide motor
NOTE
45530 13/14
45530
Error: Processor 2
No. 05552
Dryer Lane Select Guide operation error.

NO
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
00004 When Dryer selection solenoid 1 is moved to the colorimeter side for automatic colorimetry, the test print is not fed to the
colorimeter but output to the print conveyor unit (Print Sensor (Left), Print Sensor (Center) and Print Sensor (Right) of
the dryer rack detect DARK.)
00005 When Dryer selection solenoid 1 is moved to the colorimeter side for automatic colorimetry, the test print is not fed to the
colorimeter but output to the print receiving tray (large).
Check Point
1 Check whether Dryer selection solenoid 1 and Dryer selection solenoid 2 normally operate.☞ 35320
4. Troubleshooting
2 Confirm that the paper guide of the dryer rack is correctly attached.
3 Clean the dryer lane select sensor with the blower brush, etc.
4 Carry out Print Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment in Functions of Print Sensor Adjustment.
See ☞ 33001.
Diagnosis
Dryer lane select sensor ☞ 63260
Dryer selection solenoid 1/Dryer selection solenoid 2 ☞ 63260

− ☞ 4203 ☞ 4252
NOTE
45530 14/14
45600
Error message: Tablet replenishment
No. 05600[J]
Tablet Drum operation error. CD
No. 05601[J]
Tablet Drum operation error. BF
No. 05602[J]
Tablet Drum operation error. STB

YES
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
00000 Even though the drum was moved for a specified time to return it to the home position, the home position was not detected.
Even though the system attempted to move the drum for a specified time to exit the home position, the drum remained at that
position.
4. Troubleshooting
Even though the drum is reversed, tablet sensor 1 does not turn DARK after a specified time.
Even though a specified time has passed since tablet sensor 1 passed the home position and turned DARK, tablet sensor 1
does not turn LIGHT.
NOTE
• The home position is the position when tablet sensors 1 and 2 are LIGHT.
Check Point
1 Check if the chute is not dirty.
2 Check if the bucket platform is not dirty.
3 Check if the tablet is not stuck between the cartridge and drum.
Diagnosis
Uncleaned places Manual No.
The module drum is cleaned. ☞ 27690

Upper, middle and lower elevator sensors attaching position adjustment failure ☞ 63310

Check if the elevator does not tilt. -
Confirm that tablet sensor is not dirty. ☞ 63310
Tablet sensors 1 and 2 ☞ 63310
Drum Motor CD, BF, STB ☞ 63310
• If the drum motor is not activated when 24 V DC is output between PINs 15 and 16 of the drum motor connectors, the motor is
defective.
NOTE
45600 1/5
45600
No. 05603[J]
A tablet has jammed.
No. 05604[J]
A tablet has jammed. BF
No. 05605[J]
A tablet has jammed.

YES
Condition
00000 Even though a specified time has passed since the drum was moved from the home position and tablet sensor 1 turned
DARK, tablet sensor 1 does not turn LIGHT.
Even though the drum was moved from the home position, tablet sensor 1 does not turn DARK after a specified time.
Even though a specified time has passed since tablet sensor 1 passed the home position, it does not turn DARK.
4. Troubleshooting
Even though the drum is reversed, the home position is not detected after a specified time.
NOTE
• The home position is the position when tablet sensors 1 and 2 are LIGHT.
Check Point
1 Check if the chute is not dirty.
2 Check if the bucket platform is not dirty.
3 Check if the elevator does not tilt.
4 Check if the tablet is not stuck between the cartridge and drum.
Diagnosis
Uncleaned places Manual No.
The module drum is cleaned. ☞ 27690

Upper, middle and lower elevator sensors attaching position adjustment failure ☞ 63310

Check if the elevator does not tilt. -
Confirm that tablet sensor is not dirty. ☞ 63310
Tablet sensors 1 and 2 ☞ 63310
Drum Motor CD, BF, STB ☞ 63310
NOTE
45600 2/5
45600
No. 05609[J]
Printing cannot continue without replenishment. CD
No. 05610[J]
Printing cannot continue without replenishment. BF
No. 05611[J]
Printing cannot continue without replenishment. STB

YES
Condition
No. 05609-00000 The Reservoir Count exceeds the drop limit in Basic Kit Setting when Order Display→Processor
No. 05610-00000 Status→Change→Tablet Drop Reservoir is set to ON.
No. 05611-00000
4. Troubleshooting
NOTE
• To reset the reservoir count, set the reservoir count of Counter to 0. See ☞ 33070.
• To reset the Water Supply Reservoir Amount, reset it via Functions in Counter.
See ☞ 33070.
45600 3/5
45600
No. 05612[J]
Tablet Replenishment Elevator operation error.

NO
Condition
00001 Even though a specified time has passed after the elevator moves up, the elevator lower sensor does not turn
LIGHT.
00002 When the elevator was raised, the elevator middle sensor did not turn DARK even though the elevator lower
sensor turned LIGHT and a specified time passed.
00003 When the elevator was raised, the elevator upper sensor did not turn DARK even though the elevator middle
sensor turned DARK and a specified time passed.
00004 Even though the elevator was lowered for a specified time, the elevator upper sensor did not turn LIGHT.
00005 When the elevator was lowered, the elevator middle sensor did not turn LIGHT even though it turned dark and a
specified time passed.
4. Troubleshooting
00006 When the elevator was lowered, the elevator lower sensor did not turn DARK even though the elevator middle
sensor turned LIGHT and a specified time passed.
Diagnosis
Elevator sensor attached to inappropriate position ☞ 63310
Position adjustment failure of elevator lower sensor ☞ 27680
Position adjustment failure of elevator middle sensor ☞ 27670
Position adjustment failure of elevator upper sensor ☞ 27660

Confirm that the upper sensor for elevator is dirty. ☞ 63310
Upper sensor for elevator ☞ 63310
Elevator motor ☞ 63310
NOTE
45600 4/5
45600
No. 05613[J]
The processing solution level is too low. STB1

YES
Condition
00000 When the processing solution level detector of the STB1 processing solution float switch turns off and water
supply is carried out for a given amount of time, the processing solution level detector keeps off.
Check Point
2 Check that the valve of the strainer unit is not closed.
3 Clean the strainer.
4 Check if the replenisher hose are not clogged.
5 Check the output amount.
4. Troubleshooting
Diagnosis
STB1 processing solution float switch ☞ 63310
STB water supply pump ☞ 63310
NOTE
45600 5/5
45700
Error message: SM replenishment
No. 05700[SM]
Replenishment pump operation error. CD-A
No. 05701[SM]
Replenishment pump operation error. CD-B
No. 05702[SM]
Replenishment pump operation error. CD-C
No. 05703[SM]
Replenishment pump operation error. CD-W
No. 05704[SM]
Replenishment pump operation error. BF-A
No. 05705[SM]
Replenishment pump operation error. BF-B
No. 05706[SM]
Replenishment pump operation error. STB
4. Troubleshooting
NO
Condition
00001 The replenisher pump sensor or water supply pump sensor stays DARK even though a specified time has passed
since the replenisher pump or the water supply pump started operating.
00002 The replenisher pump sensor or water supply pump sensor stays LIGHT even though a specified time has passed
since the replenisher pump or the water supply pump started operating.
Check Point
3 Check that the replenisher hose and water supply hose are not clogged.
Diagnosis
Replenisher pump and water supply pump ☞ 63300
Replenisher pump sensor and water supply pump sensor ☞ 63300
SM I/O PCB ☞ 66600
NOTE
45700 1/4
45700
No. 05708[SM]
Replenishment Package solution remaining error.
No. 05709[SM]
Replenishment Package solution remaining error.

YES
Condition
The message No. 0700 Replace the Replenishment Package with a new one. is shown when the replenishment alarm value is set to -5%
(initial value) in Package Capacity Setting and either replenishment package becomes empty. In this case, the message Nos. 5708 and
5709 Replenishment Package solution remaining error. is not shown.
00000 The percentage of the replenishment remaining amount (internal calculated value) to the replenishment package
capacity became smaller than the replenishment alarm value. (Replenishment remaining amount < Package
capacity × Replenishment remaining amount / 100) But the replenishment solution sensor does not turn DARK.
4. Troubleshooting
Check Point
1 Check if the actual package capacity is same as the one set in the Package Capacity Setting.
2 Check if the replenishment alarm value is sufficient.
5 Check that the replenisher hose and water supply hose are not clogged.
Diagnosis
Sensitivity adjustment failure of the replenishment solution sensor ☞ 27830

Replenishment solution sensor CD-A, CD-B, CD-C, BF-A, BF-B, or STB ☞ 63300
SM I/O PCB ☞ 66600
NOTE
45700 2/4
45700
No. 05710[SM]
Refilling water operation error. CD-W
No. 05711[SM]
Refilling water operation error. BF-W
No. 05712[SM]
No. 05713[SM]
No. 05714[SM]
No. 05715[SM]
4. Troubleshooting
YES
Condition
No. 05710-00000 The refilling water level detector of the CD processing solution float switch does not turn ON even
though a specified time has passed since refilling water operation started.
No. 05711-00000 The refilling water level detector of the BF processing solution float switch does not turn ON even
No. 05712-00000 The refilling water level detector of the STB1 processing solution float switch does not turn ON even
Check Point
2 Check that the hoses from the water supply pump and refilling water pump are not clogged.
3 Check that the processing float switch moves smoothly.
Diagnosis
When water is incorrectly added Manual No.
SM I/O PCB ☞ 66600
When refilling water is incorrectly detected Manual No.

45700 3/4
45700
NOTE
4. Troubleshooting
45700 4/4
45900
Error message: F replenishment
No. 05900[F]
Replenisher cartridge open motor operation error.

NO
IMPORTANT
• If the above error message is shown, do not click YES to close it and continue the printing process without performing the
diagnosis below.
NOTE
• If printing process is continued after the above error is shown, the time is counted as Replenishment Lack Time and the P1R, P2RA
and P2RB replenishers will not be replenished.
Condition
00001 When the replenisher cartridge setting part is moved to the lower position for opening the replenisher cartridge, the
Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Upper) does not turn to LIGHT even after a specified time has passed.
4. Troubleshooting
00002 When the replenisher cartridge setting part is moved to the lower position for opening the replenishment cartridge, the
Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Lower) does not turn to DARK even after a specified time has passed.
00003 When the replenisher cartridge setting part is moved to lower position to open the replenishment cartridge, Replenisher
Cartridge Position Sensor (Lower) detects the error.
Although the replenisher cartridge setting part has been moved upwards then, Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor
(Lower) does not turn to LIGHT even after a specified time has passed.
(When restarting after operation stop such as instant-off)
00004 When the replenisher cartridge setting part is moved to the upper position after the replenishment cartridge was failed
to be opened, the Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Lower) does not turn to LIGHT even after a specified time
has passed.
00005 When the replenisher cartridge setting part is moved to the upper position after the replenishment cartridge was failed
to be opened, the Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Upper) does not turn to DARK even after a specified time has
passed.
00006 When the replenisher cartridge setting part is moved to upper position due to the failure in opening the replenishment
cartridge, Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Upper) detects the error.
Although the replenisher cartridge setting part has been moved downwards then, Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor
(Upper) does not turn to LIGHT even after a specified time has passed.
00007 When the replenisher cartridge setting part is moved to the cap cleaning position for cleaning the cap, the Replenisher
Cartridge Position Sensor (Lower) does not turn to LIGHT even after a specified time has passed.
00008 When the replenisher cartridge setting part is moved to the cap cleaning position for cleaning the cap, the Replenisher
Cartridge Position Sensor (Upper) does not turn to DARK even after a specified time has passed.
00009 When the replenisher cartridge setting part is moved to the cap cleaning position to clean the cap, Replenisher Cartridge
Position Sensor (Upper) detects the error.
00010 When the replenisher cartridge setting part is moved to the lower position for draining the water after cleaning the cap,
the Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Upper) does not turn to LIGHT even after a specified time has passed.
the Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Lower) does not turn to DARK even after a specified time has passed.
Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Lower) detects the error.
Although the replenisher cartridge setting part has been moved upwards then, Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor
(Lower) does not turn to LIGHT even after a specified time has passed.
00013 When the replenisher cartridge setting part is moved to the upper position after the replenishment cartridge is opened or
cap is cleaned, the Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Lower) does not turn to LIGHT even after a specified time
has passed.
45900 1/16
45900

00014 When the replenisher cartridge setting part is moved to the upper position after the replenishment cartridge is opened or
cap is cleaned, the Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Upper) does not turn to DARK even after a specified time
has passed.
00015 Opening or cleaning the replenisher cartridge is completed and Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Upper) detects
it.
• For the QSS-3701/3702/3703/LP7500/LP7600, about 507 prints whose size is 127 mm × 89 mm can be processed after the error
whose suffix number is from 00001 to 00006 occurs.
• For the QSS-3704/3705/LP7700/LP7900, about 545 prints whose size is 127 mm × 89 mm can be processed after the error whose
suffix number is from 00001 to 00006 occurs.
• Regarding the suffix numbers 00007 to 00015, print proceeds if an error message is cleared by pressing YES.
Countermeasure
4. Troubleshooting
1. Check whether the replenisher cartridge setting part malfunctions or not.
☞ 4600
2. Perform recovery procedure 1 from the replenishment error.
☞ 4610
Check Point
Check that the replenisher cartridge setting part operates normally. ☞ 35320
Diagnosis
Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Upper) ☞ 63280
Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Lower)
Replenisher Cartridge Open Motor
Interlock Switch (Replenisher Section Door)
NOTE
45900 2/16
45900
No. 05901[F]
Replenishment solution level sensor error. P1R
No. 05902[F]
Replenishment solution level sensor error. P2RA
No. 05903[F]
Replenishment solution level sensor error. P2RB
No. 05904[F]
Replenishment solution level sensor error. PSR

YES
Condition
00000 When # # # (upper) replenishment solution level sensors of each processing solution are ON and when # # #
4. Troubleshooting
(lower) replenishment solution level sensors are OFF
Countermeasure
1. Check the status of the replenishment solution level sensors of each processing solution with Input Check.
☞ 35220
2. Perform recovery procedure 2 from the replenishment error.☞ 4620
Diagnosis
NOTE
45900 3/16
45900
No. 05905[F]
P1R replenishment solution output amount/replenishment solution level management
is abnormal.
No. 05906[F]
P2RA replenishment solution output amount/replenishment solution level management
is abnormal.
No. 05907[F]
P2RA replenishment solution output amount/replenishment solution level management
is abnormal.

YES
IMPORTANT
diagnosis below.
4. Troubleshooting
NOTE
Condition
00001 When opening process is complete, # # # (upper) replenishment solution level sensors of each processing
solution do not turn off even a specified amount of processing solution is added.
00002 When # # # (upper) replenishment solution level sensors of each processing solution turned off, the processing
solution less than the specified amount was added and # # # (lower) replenishment solution level sensors of each
processing solution also turned off.
00003 After # # # (upper) replenishment solution level sensors turned off, # # # (lower) replenishment solution level
sensors of each processing solution do not turn off even though the processing solution exceeding the specified
amount has been added.
occurs.
• For the QSS-3704/3705/LP7700/LP7900, about 545 prints whose size is 127 mm × 89 mm can be processed after the error occurs.
• If Pump Output Amount Measurement of Pump Output Amount Setting is not performed at system installation, the above
errors may occur.
• The causes are shown below.
1. Even if each replenishment pump operates for a specified time, lower amounts of solution than the specified range is
replenished, and # # # (lower) replenishment solution level sensor of each solution is off.
2. If each replenishment pump operates for a specified time, larger amount of solution than the specified range is replenished,
and # # # (lower) replenishment solution level sensor of each solution does not turn off.
• If the processor control PCB is replaced, data (all data, or only the processor data) is initialized
or ☞ No. 05538 Backup data error. Processor occurs, suffix number 00002 of the error shown above may occur. ☞ 57020
Countermeasure
1. Check the status of the replenishment solution level sensors of each processing solution with Input Check.☞ 35220
2. Perform recovery procedure 2 from the replenishment error.☞ 4620
45900 4/16
45900
Check Point
Confirm that the hoses from each replenishment pump are not jammed. -
Check each replenishment pump output amount again. ☞ 33003
Diagnosis
P1R Replenisher Pump P2RA Replenisher Pump P2RB Replenisher Pump
NOTE
4. Troubleshooting
45900 5/16
45900
No. 05908[F]
Failed to open the replenisher cartridge.

YES
IMPORTANT
diagnosis below.
NOTE
Condition
- Even though 40 seconds has passed after the replenishment cartridge opened, # # # (lower) replenishment
4. Troubleshooting
solution level sensor of each processing solution does not detect ON.

00001 P1R
00002 P2RA
00004 P2RB
occurs.
Countermeasure
☞ 4610
Check Point
Check the status of the replenishment solution level sensors of each processing solution with Input Check. ☞ 35220
Diagnosis
P1R (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor ☞ 63280
P2RA (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor
P2RB (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor
NOTE
45900 6/16
45900
No. 05909[F]
Cartridge cleaning valve/Agitation solenoid valve is abnormal. P1R
No. 05910[F]
Cartridge cleaning valve cleaning valve is abnormal. P2RA
No. 05911[F]
Cartridge cleaning valve cleaning valve is abnormal. P2RB

YES
IMPORTANT
diagnosis below.
NOTE
4. Troubleshooting
Condition
ERROR No. Condition
05909-00000 When the replenisher cartridge is cleaned, P1R cartridge flushing valve and P1R agitation solenoid valve are
opened and the auto cleaning pump is turned on for a specified time. However, P1R (Upper) Replenishment
Solution Level Sensor does not turn on.
05910-00000 When the replenisher cartridge is cleaned, P2RA cartridge flushing valve is opened and the auto cleaning pump
is turned on for a specified time. However, P2RA (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor does not turn
on.
05911-00000 When the replenisher cartridge is cleaned, P2RB cartridge flushing valve is opened and the auto cleaning pump is
turned on for a specified time. However, P2RB (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor does not turn on.
occurs.
• If Initial Replenisher Operation (Auto Cleaning Pump)→Mixing Replenisher→Initial Replenisher Operation (Replenisher
Pump) in Processor Set Up Mode are not performed in order at system installation, the above errors may occur.
• If normal opening operation is performed at system installation, replenishment solution is created with the replenishment
tank empty. Then, the replenishment solution does not reach the position where P2RA (Upper) Replenishment Solution
Level Sensor and P2RB (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor turn on, and the above errors occur.
• If opening operation is performed in the Processor Set Up Mode at system installation, the above errors do not occur even
if P2RA (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor and P2RB (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor are off.
Countermeasure
☞ 4610
Check Point
Check the hoses for bends (Hoses connected to each of the cartridge cleaning valves and the auto cleaning pump).
Check the output amounts of auto cleaning pump + each automated cleaning valve again. ☞ 33004
Check the status of the replenishment solution level sensors of each processing solution with Input Check. ☞ 35220
45900 7/16
45900
Confirm by Output Check that each cartridge valve and the auto cleaning pump work. ☞ 35320
• P1R Cartridge Cleaning Valve + Replenisher Cartridge Cleaning Pump
• P2RA Cartridge Cleaning Valve + Replenisher Cartridge Cleaning Pump
• P2RB Cartridge Cleaning Valve + Replenisher Cartridge Cleaning Pump
• P1R agitation solenoid valve + Replenisher Cartridge Cleaning Pump
Diagnosis
P1R (Upper) Replenishment P2RA (Upper) Replenishment P2RB (Upper) Replenishment ☞ 63280
Solution Level Sensor Solution Level Sensor Solution Level Sensor
Auto cleaning pump Automated cleaning valve
NOTE
4. Troubleshooting
45900 8/16
45900
No. 05912[F]
Predetermined process amount was exceeded.

YES
Condition
Condition
When an error in the following error list occurred and printing was performed before the error was cleared, the integrated value of P1R
replenishment amount exceeded the specified amount.
• Specified amount for the QSS-3701/3702/3703/LP7500/LP7600: about 507 prints (127 mm × 89 mm size)
• Specified amount for the QSS-3704/3705/LP7700/LP7900: about 545 prints (127 mm × 89 mm size)
Take the corrective action in the error list.
Error list Countermeasure

• ☞ No. 00902[F] • Install the replenisher cartridge. Perform recovery procedure 3 from
• ☞ No. 00905[F] • Install the new replenisher cartridge. the replenishment error. ☞ 4621
4. Troubleshooting
• ☞ No. 05900[F] • Replenisher cartridge open motor operation error. Recovery procedure from the
error(s) shown in the left
• ☞ No. 05905[F] • P1R replenishment solution output amount/replenishment solution Recovery procedure from the
• ☞ No. 05906[F] level management is abnormal. error(s) shown in the left
• ☞ No. 05907[F] • P2RA replenishment solution output amount/replenishment
solution level management is abnormal.
• P2RA replenishment solution output amount/replenishment
solution level management is abnormal.
• ☞ No. 05908[F] • Failed to open the replenisher cartridge. Recovery procedure from the
• ☞ No. 05909[F] • Cartridge cleaning valve/Agitation solenoid valve is abnormal. Recovery procedure from the
• ☞ No. 05910[F] P1R error(s) shown in the left
• ☞ No. 05911[F] • Cartridge cleaning valve cleaning valve is abnormal. P2RA
• Cartridge cleaning valve cleaning valve is abnormal. P2RB
• ☞ No. 05913[F] • An error occurred in the replenisher section. Recovery procedure from the
• ☞ No. 05923[F] • Solution remains in the replenishment tank. Perform recovery procedure 3 from
the replenishment error. ☞ 4621
• Even if an error is cleared, it reoccurs until the replenisher cartridge is opened (replenishment solution is created).
Countermeasure
1. See the Error Record, and check which error occurred.
NOTE
• Attentions such as ☞ No. 00902[F] or ☞ No. 00905[F] are not shown on the Error Record.
If the EZ Controller is used
Controller Main Display: 2260 → Click F. → Management Tool → System management → Error Record
2. Perform the recovery procedure from the error.
45900 9/16
45900
No. 05913[F]
An error occurred in the replenisher section.

YES
IMPORTANT
diagnosis below.
NOTE
Condition
Condition
When an error in the following error list occurred, the system was restarted or started before the error was cleared.
4. Troubleshooting
Error list Countermeasure
• ☞ No. 05900[F] • Replenisher cartridge open motor operation error. Recovery procedure from the
• ☞ No. 05905[F] • P1R replenishment solution output amount/replenishment solution level Recovery procedure from the
• ☞ No. 05906[F] management is abnormal. error(s) shown in the left
• ☞ No. 05907[F] • P2RA replenishment solution output amount/replenishment solution
level management is abnormal.
• P2RA replenishment solution output amount/replenishment solution
level management is abnormal.
• ☞ No. 05908[F] • Failed to open the replenisher cartridge. Recovery procedure from the
• ☞ No. 05909[F] • Cartridge cleaning valve/Agitation solenoid valve is abnormal. P1R Recovery procedure from the
• ☞ No. 05910[F] • Cartridge cleaning valve cleaning valve is abnormal. P2RA error(s) shown in the left
• ☞ No. 05911[F] • Cartridge cleaning valve cleaning valve is abnormal. P2RB
• ☞ No. 05913[F] • An error occurred in the replenisher section.
occurs.
Countermeasure
1. See the Error Record, and check which error occurred.
If the EZ Controller is used
Controller Main Display: 2260 → Click F. → Management Tool → System management → Error Record
2. Perform the recovery procedure from the error.
45900 10/16
45900
No. 05914[F]
Temperature and humidity sensor error.

YES
Condition
ERROR No. Condition
00001 The measured environmental temperature is not within the range between −10°C and +60°C.
00002 The measured environmental humidity is not within the range between 0 % and 100 %.
• An error occurs when Automatic is selected at Operator Selections → Processor → Humidity.

• If errors occur frequently, water is not refilled when evaporated.
In such cases, select one of the Standard , Low or High, except Automatic, in Operator Selections → Processor → Humidity.
Then, water is refilled and the system can be used again.
Check Point
4. Troubleshooting
Check the status of the temperature and humidity sensor via Input Check. ☞ 35220
Check that there is no dust on the temperature and humidity sensor. ☞ 63280
Check that there is no connection failure in the wiring between the temperature and humidity sensor and -
processor control PCB.
Diagnosis
Temperature and humidity sensor ☞ 63280
NOTE
45900 11/16
45900
No. 05916[F]
Solution level of the processing tank goes below the processable level. P1
No. 05917[F]
Solution level of the processing tank goes below the processable level. P2
No. 05918[F]
Solution level of the processing tank goes below the processable level. PS1
No. 05919[F]
No. 05920[F]
No. 05921[F]
4. Troubleshooting
YES
Condition
00000 • # # #When the processable level decreases and addition of specific amount water is carried, # # #the
processable level detector keeps off.
• When the product starts up with program timer and filling up the moisture which evaporated is carried out,
# # # the processable level detector keeps off.
• If Pump Output Amount Measurement of Pump Output Amount Setting and Measure Auto Cleaning Water Output
Amount of Auto Cleaning Water Output Amount Setting are not performed at system installation, the above errors may occur.
1. Even if specified amount of water is supplied, # # # processable level does not turn on.
2. Even if each replenishment pump operates for a specified time, specified amount of solution is not replenished.
NOTE
• If the processing solution level detector of the processing solution float switch turns off, all the processing solution heaters and
circulation pumps turn off.
Countermeasure
1. Perform ☞ Taking countermeasures after the errors No.05916 to No.05921 occurs.
☞ 4630
Check Point
Check if the processing solution is leaking from the tank. -
Check if the float of the processing solution float switch moves up and down smoothly. -
Check the status of the float switches of each processing solution via Input Check. ☞ 35220
Check each replenishment pump output amount again. ☞ 33003
Check the output amounts of auto cleaning pump + each automated cleaning valve again. ☞ 33004
Select Operator Selections→Processor, and change the Evaporation Correction setting from OFF to -
ON.*1
*1. If Evaporation Correction is set to OFF, water is not replenished automatically although # # # processable level decreases.
Diagnosis
45900 12/16
45900


P1, P2 and PS automated cleaning valve
Replenisher cartridge cleaning pump
NOTE
4. Troubleshooting
45900 13/16
45900
No. 05922[F]
Replenisher section door is open.

YES
IMPORTANT
diagnosis below.
NOTE
Condition
Condition
When the replenisher section door is opened while the replenisher cartridge is open (replenishment solution is being created).
4. Troubleshooting
00001 When the replenisher section door is opened before the cap is cleaned.
00002 When the replenisher section door is opened while the cap is being cleaned.
whose suffix number is 00001 occurs.
• For the QSS-3704/3705/LP7700/LP7900, about 545 prints whose size is 127 mm × 89 mm can be processed after the error whose
suffix number is 00001 occurs.
• For the suffix number 00002, print proceeds if an error message is cleared by pressing YES.
Countermeasures for the suffix number 00001

1. Close the replenisher section door.
☞ 4620
Check Point
Check if the replenisher section door is closed securely. -
Check the Interlock Switch (Replenisher Section Door) status via Input Check. ☞ 35220
Diagnosis
Interlock Switch (Replenisher Section Door) ☞ 63280
NOTE
45900 14/16
45900
No. 05923[F]
Solution remains in the replenishment tank.

YES
IMPORTANT
diagnosis below.
NOTE
Condition
Condition
4. Troubleshooting
1. The replenishment solution cannot be detected by P1R (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor/P2RA (Lower)
Replenishment Solution Level Sensor/P2RB (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor, because the amount of the
replenishment solution decreases.
2. Mixing replenisher is in standby status when starting the mixing replenisher automatically, because the Interlock Switch
(Replenisher Section Door) is opened.
3. When # # # (lower) replenishment solution level sensor detects the replenishment solution while the mixing replenisher is in
standby status.

00001 P1R
00002 P2RA
00004 P2RB
occurs.
NOTE
• When Mixing Replenisher is clicked and the (lower) replenishment solution level sensors of P1R, P2RA or P2RB is on, the following
attention message is displayed.
☞ No. 00913[F] Mixing Replenisher cannot be started.
The above-mentioned error can be canceled when one of the following conditions are fulfilled.
• Mixing Replenisher is performed without solution in each replenishment tank.
• All the (lower) and (upper) replenishment solution level sensors of each replenishment tank are on.
Countermeasure
1. Perform recovery procedure 3 from the replenishment error. ☞ 4621
Check Point
Check the status of # # # (lower) replenishment solution level sensors of each processing solution with ☞ 35220
Input Check.
45900 15/16
45900
Diagnosis
P1R (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor ☞ 63280
P2RA (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor
P2RB (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor
NOTE
4. Troubleshooting
45900 16/16
46000
Error message: Printer 1
No. 06012
Paper did not load. Paper Magazine A
No. 06013
Paper did not load. Paper Magazine B

YES
Condition
No. 06012 Paper cannot be loaded from paper magazine A.
No. 06013 Paper cannot be loaded from paper magazine B.

00001 Even though a specified length of paper is advanced after the paper loading has started, paper end sensor A and
B do not turn DARK during setup or printing of the mechanical adjustment.
00002 Even when a specified length of paper is advanced after the paper end sensors A and B have turned dark, the
4. Troubleshooting
loading sensor does not turn DARK.
00003 When magazine initial operation is performed, paper is rewound until the paper end sensor stops detection and it
is advanced to the paper loading sensor position. However, the loading sensor does not detect DARK.
NOTE
• For details about magazine initial operation, see 55100 ☞ Performs magazine initial operation.
Check Point
1 Check that the paper is correctly inserted into the paper magazine.
2 Clean the advance roller.
Diagnosis
Advance failure Manual No.
Paper magazine motor A or B ☞ 63051
Paper supply motor A, B or C ☞ 63060
Detection failure (paper end sensor) Manual No.

Paper end sensor A or B ☞ 63051
Detection failure (paper loading sensor) Manual No.

Paper loading sensor ☞ 66030

☞ 4202 − ☞ 4252
46000 1/15
46000
NOTE
4. Troubleshooting
46000 2/15
46000
No. 06014
Paper did not rewind. Paper Magazine A
No. 06015
Paper did not rewind. Paper Magazine B

YES
Condition
No. 06014 Paper cannot be rewound into paper magazine A.
No. 06015 Paper cannot be rewound into paper magazine B.

00001 Even when a specified length of paper is rewound after the paper rewinding has started, the paper loading sensor
does not turn light.
4. Troubleshooting
00002 Even when a specified length of paper is rewound after the paper loading sensor has turned light, paper end
sensors A and B do not turn LIGHT.
Check Point
3 Check that the paper loading sensor and the paper end sensor are not soiled.
Diagnosis
Paper magazine motor A or B ☞ 63051
Paper supply motor A, B or C ☞ 63060

Paper end sensor A or B ☞ 63051


☞ 4202 − −
NOTE
46000 3/15
46000
No. 06016
Paper Cutter operation error.

NO
Condition
00001 The cut home sensor does not detect LIGHT even though a specified time has passed after the cut operation
started.
00002 The cut end sensor does not turn DARK even though a specified time has passed after the cut operation started
and the cut home sensor turned light.
00003 Even when a specified time has passed after the cut operation was completed, the cut end sensor does not turn
LIGHT.
00004 Even when a specified time has passed after the cut operation was completed and the cut end sensor turned
LIGHT, the cut home sensor does not turn DARK.
00005 The cut home sensor and cut end sensor are DARK in the initial operation.
4. Troubleshooting
IMPORTANT
• If the paper supply unit is not set correctly, this error may occur.
NOTE
• The cutter blade may be locked or seized.
Check Point
1 Confirm that the paper supply unit is installed correctly.
Diagnosis
Blown fuses Manual No.
F32 Printer I/O PCB 1 ☞ 66020

Cutter unit ☞ 25620
Cut motor ☞ 63060

Cut home sensor ☞ 63060
Cut end sensor

☞ 4202 − −
NOTE
46000 4/15
46000
No. 06049
Pressure Guide operation error.

NO
Condition
00000 The home position is not detected even though the pressure guide motor operated for a specified time.
Check Point
1 Check that the pressure guide sensor is not soiled.
Diagnosis
Pressure guide motor ☞ 63090
4. Troubleshooting

Pressure guide sensor ☞ 63090

☞ 4202 − ☞ 4252
NOTE
46000 5/15
46000
No. 06069
The printer top cover is open.

YES
Condition
00000 Interlock switch 1 (printer top cover) turns off.
NOTE
• Some electrical parts stop operations when the interlock switch (printer top cover) turns off.
Check Point
1 Check that the printer top cover is securely closed.
Diagnosis
4. Troubleshooting
Adjustment failure in the attaching position of the interlock switch (printer top cover) -

Interlock switch (printer top cover) ☞ 63050
NOTE
46000 6/15
46000
No. 06073
Synchronous Sensor error.

NO
Condition
00001 The R laser synchronous signal does not enter within the specified period to the synchronous sensor PCB.
00002 The G laser synchronous signal does not enter within the specified period to the synchronous sensor PCB.
00003 The B laser synchronous signal does not enter within the specified period to the synchronous sensor PCB.
Diagnosis
IMPORTANT
• The output lines of R, G and B from the laser control PCB to laser unit are separate.
• Carry out R Laser Output ON, G Laser Output ON and G Laser Output ON of Output Check → Printer → Exposure
4. Troubleshooting
Engine Section. If the results are as same as shown below, each laser is normal.
☞ 35310
• Laser Synchronous Sensor:Synchronous
• Polygon Mirror Frequency:2043±7
• If all lasers are abnormal, the synchronous sensors (in the laser unit) may be defective.
• For the diagnosis of the laser unit, perform Laser Self-Diagnostic. See ☞ 35950.

Adjustment failure in the attaching position of the interlock switch (printer top cover) -

G-AOM driver ☞ 66080
G laser driver ☞ 66070

☞ 4202 − −
NOTE
46000 7/15
46000
No. 06075
G Laser control error.

NO
Condition
00006 to 00011 A communication or control error occurred between the laser control PCB and the laser unit.
Diagnosis
4. Troubleshooting
☞ 4202 − −
NOTE
46000 8/15
46000
No. 06076
Polygon Mirror control error.

NO
Condition
00001 The polygon mirror does not rotate properly.
00002 Any of R/G/B Laser turns to asynchronous 7 times or more per 1 second while the system is printing or
initializing after the power supply is turned on.
NOTE
• The processable range of polygon mirror frequency is from 2043 ±7 Hz.
Countermeasure
1. The status is normal if Polygon Mirror Synchronous and Polygon Mirror Frequency are the following values when performing
Exposure Engine Section of Output Check.
4. Troubleshooting
Display Status
Polygon Mirror Synchronous Synchronous
2. Carry out G Laser Output ON, B Laser Output ON and R Laser Output ON in Output Check and confirm in each case if the
value of Polygon Mirror Frequency is the following value.
Display Status
Polygon Mirror Frequency 2043±7
3. Carry out the following diagnostics.
Diagnosis
AOM driver (In case of suffix number 00002) ☞ 66080
IMPORTANT
• Replacement and adjustment of the parts in the laser unit are impossible.
Replace the unit.

☞ 4202 ☞ 4252
NOTE
46000 9/15
46000
No. 06077
Interlock error.

NO
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
00000 When printing is started, the laser control PCB detects the interlock switch (printer doors 1 and 2) off while the printer
control PCB detects the interlock switch (printer doors 1 and 2) on.
Diagnosis
4. Troubleshooting
NOTE
46000 10/15
46000
No. 06081
Backup data error. Printer
IMPORTANT
• If the error message above appears, it cannot be closed for approx. 5 to 10 minutes until the Maintenance Display is
shown.
NO
Condition
0###H • The backup data of the printer control PCB is abnormal.
• The new printer control PCB is attached.
• The RAM of printer control PCB is broken.
• The power supply of backup for printer control PCB is shut off.
1###H • The backup data of the printer control PCB is abnormal.
4. Troubleshooting
• Backup data of the printer I/F main PCB does not exist.
NOTE
• The value informed from CPU is displayed in the last three digits of the suffix number.
• If about 5 days has passed with the power supply off or if the printer control PCB is replaced with a new one, this error message will
be shown.
IMPORTANT
• If the error message above appears, the backup data for the printer control PCB saved in printer I/F main PCB is sent to
the printer control PCB within approx. 5 to 10 minutes while the error cannot be canceled.
If the backup data is sent normally, the error above can be closed.
However, the backup data saved in the printer I/F main PCB may have a problem. If the error above occurs, we
recommend you to read the backup data on the media saved at the close down check.
Diagnosis
If the data was deleted Manual No.
Read the backup data saved in media at the close down check. ☞ 35400

NOTE
46000 11/15
46000
No. 06082
Setup error.

YES
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
#0004 The center correction is out of allowable range when carrying out the gamma setup in the initial setup. (R)
#0005 The center correction is out of allowable range when carrying out the gamma setup in the initial setup. (G)
#0006 The center correction is out of allowable range when carrying out the gamma setup in the initial setup. (B)
#0007 The tone correction is out of allowable range when carrying out the gamma setup in the initial setup. (R)
#0008 The tone correction is out of allowable range when carrying out the gamma setup in the initial setup. (G)
#0009 The tone correction is out of allowable range when carrying out the gamma setup in the initial setup. (B)
#0101 The center correction is out of allowable range when carrying out the system exposure light intensity setup in the paper
specification registration setup. (R)
4. Troubleshooting
specification registration setup. (G)
specification registration setup. (B)
#0104 The center correction is out of allowable range when carrying out the gamma setup in the paper specification registration
setup. (R)
setup. (G)
setup. (B)
#0107 The tone correction is out of allowable range when carrying out the gamma setup in the paper specification registration
setup. (R)
setup. (G)
setup. (B)
#0301 The center correction is out of allowable range when carrying out the paper magazine registration setup. (R)
#0302 The center correction is out of allowable range when carrying out the paper magazine registration setup. (G)
#0303 The center correction is out of allowable range when carrying out the paper magazine registration setup. (B)
#0304 The tone correction is out of allowable range when carrying out the paper magazine registration setup. (R)
#0305 The tone correction is out of allowable range when carrying out the paper magazine registration setup. (G)
#0306 The tone correction is out of allowable range when carrying out the paper magazine registration setup. (B)
#0401 The center correction is out of allowable range when carrying out Emulsion Number Change. (R)
#0402 The center correction is out of allowable range when carrying out Emulsion Number Change. (G)
#0403 The center correction is out of allowable range when carrying out Emulsion Number Change. (B)
#0404 The tone correction is out of allowable range when carrying out Emulsion Number Change. (R)
#0405 The tone correction is out of allowable range when carrying out Emulsion Number Change. (G)
#0406 The tone correction is out of allowable range when carrying out Emulsion Number Change. (B)
#0501 The AOM bias setting value is out of allowable range when carrying out each setup. (R)
#0502 The AOM bias setting value is out of allowable range when carrying out each setup. (G)
#0503 The AOM bias setting value is out of allowable range when carrying out each setup. (B)
#0504 The Dmax setting value is out of allowable range when carrying out each setup. (R)
#0505 The Dmax setting value is out of allowable range when carrying out each setup. (G)
#0506 The Dmax setting value is out of allowable range when carrying out each setup. (B)
#0507 The target density setting value is out of allowable range when carrying out each setup. (R)
46000 12/15
46000
Suffix Condition
number
#0508 The target density setting value is out of allowable range when carrying out each setup. (G)
#0509 The target density setting value is out of allowable range when carrying out each setup. (B)
IMPORTANT
• Setup error. is shown on the display module.
On the maintenance application display, messages are shown.
Check Point
1 Calibrate the colorimeter.
2 Check that the calibration plate is not soiled.
Diagnosis
Adjustment failure Manual No.
4. Troubleshooting
Colorimeter failure Manual No.
Colorimeter unit failure ☞ 27460
Calibration plate failure

G-AOM driver ☞ 66080
NOTE
46000 13/15
46000
No. 06087
Laser Control PCB system error.

YES
Condition
Condition
An error occurs on the laser control PCB.

00001 (Unused)
00002 SD-RAM mounted on the laser control PCB is abnormal.
00003 The image data sent from the printer I/F main PCB to the laser control PCB via LVPECL and the image
information sent via ARCNET communication do not match.
00004 Pixel value of the main scanning direction of the image data is small or large.
00005 (Unused)
4. Troubleshooting
00006 Exposure does not complete even though a specified time has elapsed after starting the exposure.
00007 Pixel value of the main scanning direction of the image data is small or large.
00008 Lookup table data and shading table sent from the main PC cannot be transferred to the laser control PCB
successfully.
Communication between the printer I/F main PCB and laser control PCB via ARCNET line ended abnormally at
turning on the power supply.
• LUT data from the printer I/F main PCB is identified as abnormal.
• Shading data from the printer I/F main PCB is identified as abnormal.
00009 Received LUT magazine code and exposure-specified magazine code do not match at starting the printing
operation.
00019 There are two communication: Printer I/F main PCB → laser and printer I/F main PCB → printer → laser.
When exposing, these two communications have the same receipt number.
This message is shown if the receipt number is different between two communications.
00022 Cable connection error between the printer control PCB and laser control PCB occurs.
00024 The laser control PCB transferred the signal that image data transfer was completed, but the printer I/F main
PCB could not receive the signal.
Diagnosis
The countermeasure action and the failed part would differ depending on the suffix number (bit).
Suffix number (bit) Countermeasure

00002 Laser control PCB may be defective.
00006 ☞ 66010
00003 Check the cable connection between printer I/F main PCB and laser control PCB. (LVPECL)
• Perform Printer I/F Main PCB Self-Diagnostic.
☞ 35930
☞ 66010
• Failure in the Printer I/F Main PCB
☞ 66005
This error may occur if the ARCNET communication status is abnormal.
0004 It does not occur normally.
0007
46000 14/15
46000
Suffix number (bit) Countermeasure

00008 This error may occur if the ARCNET communication status is abnormal.
00009 • Check the ARCNET communication status on the Version Check display.
00019 ☞ 35500
☞ 50520
00022 Confirm the wire connection between the printer control PCB (J/P212) ↔ and the laser control PCB (J/P1520).
☞ 66010
• Failure in the printer control PCB
☞ 66000
00024 • The above errors may occur if problems occur with the software.
If this error still appears after performing the following countermeasure, get the log data.
☞ 31110
☞ 35500
4. Troubleshooting
☞ 50520

☞ 4202 − −
NOTE
46000 15/15
46100
No. 06101
Paper Hold Motor operation error.

NO
Condition
00001 The paper hold sensor does not turn DARK from LIGHT even though a specified time has elapsed after starting
the paper hold motor operation.
00002 The paper hold sensor does not turn LIGHT from DARK even though a specified time has elapsed after starting
the paper hold motor operation.
IMPORTANT
• If the paper supply unit is not set correctly, this error may occur.
Check Point
4. Troubleshooting
Diagnosis
Paper hold sensor ☞ 63060

Paper hold motor ☞ 63060

☞ 4202 − −
NOTE
46100 1/33
46100
No. 06104
Printer Door is open.

YES
Condition
00001 While prints are being made, the interlock switch (printer door 1, 2 or 4) turns off.
00002 While prints are being made, the printer door 3 sensor turns off.
NOTE
• Some electrical parts stop operations when the interlock switch (printer door 1, 2 or 4) or printer door 3 sensor turns off.
Check Point
1 Check that printer doors 1, 2, 3, and 4 are securely closed.
4. Troubleshooting
Diagnosis
Adjustment failure of attaching position of the interlock switch (printer door 1, 2, 4) -
Adjustment failure in the attaching position of the printer door 3 sensor -

Interlock switch (printer door 1, 2, 4) ☞ 63050
NOTE
46100 2/33
46100
No. 06106
G Laser light source status error.

NO
Condition
00000 An error occurs in the light source state of G laser.
NOTE
• The error No.06106 G Laser light source status error. shows that the LDs (laser diodes) built in the G laser head are deteriorated.
If this error No.06106 G Laser light source status error. occurs, past experience has shown that there is a high probability that the
laser unit is the cause.
If the error occurs every day although it used to occur at a few days intervals at first and comes to occur with more increased frequency
so that it cannot be released, the laser unit must be replaced urgently.
• When the error is closed once, the error does not recur until the power supply is reset or the system is started by the program timer.
4. Troubleshooting
IMPORTANT
• Check G Laser Light Source Status of Input Check → Printer → Exposure Engine Section, and if it is OK, it is highly
possible that each part at the Failed parts is normal.
☞ 35210
• Follow the diagnostic procedure shown below if G Laser Light Source Status is No Good.
Diagnosis
Point
The errors described above occur at the system startup if a connection failure exists between the G laser driver (J/P1665) ↔ laser power
supply (J/P418).


☞ 4202 − −
NOTE
46100 3/33
46100
No. 06107
R Laser temperature is out of range.

NO
Condition
00001 R laser temperature is controlled between 46.7°C and 47.3°C for 6 seconds or more (standby status) and then the
temperature exceeds 50.0°C (upper limit temperature) again.
00002 R laser temperature is controlled between 46.7°C and 47.3°C for 6 seconds or more (standby status) and then the
temperature falls under 44.0°C (lower limit temperature) again.
NOTE
• The R laser thermosensor is built into the R laser.
• You can check the temperatures of R laser in Input Check.
☞ 35210
4. Troubleshooting
Check Point
1 See 4302 ☞ If the temperature of R laser thermosensor is not within the range from 46.7°C to 47.3°C.
Diagnosis
Laser unit heater ☞ 63080
Laser unit cooling fans 1 or 2 (Suffix number 00001) ☞ 63050
NOTE
46100 4/33
46100
No. 06112
Could not load the paper. Paper Magazine C

YES
Condition
00001 Even though a specified length of paper is advanced after paper loading started, paper end sensor C does not
detect DARK during setup or printing for mechanical adjustments.
00002 Even when a specified length of paper is advanced after the paper end sensor C has turned DARK, the loading
sensor does not turn DARK.
NOTE
• For details about magazine initial operation, see 55100 ☞ Performs magazine initial operation.
Check Point
4. Troubleshooting
Diagnosis
Paper magazine motor C ☞ 63051
Paper supply motor B/C ☞ 63060

Paper end sensor C ☞ 63051


☞ 4202 − −
NOTE
46100 5/33
46100
No. 06113
Paper did not rewind. Paper Magazine C

YES
Condition
sensor C does not turn LIGHT.
Check Point
4. Troubleshooting
Diagnosis
Paper magazine motor C ☞ 63051
Paper supply motor B/C ☞ 63060

Paper end sensor C ☞ 63051

NOTE
46100 6/33
46100
No. 06134
Paper Supply Pressure Change Motor operation error.

NO
Condition
00001 The paper supply pressure change sensor does not turn DARK even though a specified time elapsed after starting
the paper supply pressure change motor operation.
00002 The paper supply pressure change sensor does not turn LIGHT even though a specified time elapsed after starting
the paper supply pressure change motor operation.
Diagnosis
Paper supply pressure change motor ☞ 63060
4. Troubleshooting

Paper supply pressure change sensor ☞ 63060

☞ 4202 − −
NOTE
46100 7/33
46100
No. 06135
Arm Unit 1 operation error.

NO
Condition
00001 The zigzagging correction sensor does not turn DARK even though the paper supply arm motor moved arm unit
1 for the specified length in the direction of paper advance.
00002 The zigzagging correction sensor does not turn LIGHT even though the paper supply arm motor moved arm unit
1 for the specified length in the reverse direction of paper advance when zigzag correction sensor is DARK.
Check Point
4. Troubleshooting
Diagnosis
Paper supply arm motor (right or left) ☞ 63060

Zigzagging correction sensor (right or left) ☞ 63070

☞ 4202 − −
NOTE
46100 8/33
46100
No. 06136
Exposure Advance Pressure Change Motor 1 operation error.

NO
Condition
00001 Exposure advance pressure change sensor 1 does not turn DARK from LIGHT even though the exposure
advance pressure change motor 1 has moved for the specified length.
00002 Exposure advance pressure change sensor 1 does not turn LIGHT from DARK even though the exposure
Diagnosis
Exposure advance pressure change motor 1 ☞ 63070
4. Troubleshooting

Exposure advance pressure change sensor 1 ☞ 63070

☞ 4202 − ☞ 4252
NOTE
46100 9/33
46100
No. 06137

NO
Condition
00001 Exposure advance pressure change sensor 2 does not turn DARK from LIGHT even though the exposure
00002 Exposure advance pressure change sensor 2 does not turn LIGHT from DARK even though the exposure
Diagnosis
4. Troubleshooting


☞ 4202 − ☞ 4252
NOTE
46100 10/33
46100
No. 06138
Paper Advance Arm Motor (Left) operation error.
No. 06139
Paper Advance Arm Motor (Right) operation error.

NO
Condition
00001 The arm sensor (left) or (right) does not turn DARK even though the paper advance arm motor (left) or (right)
has operated for a specified pulse.
00002 The arm sensor (left) or (right) does not turn LIGHT even though the paper advance arm motor (left) or (right)
has operated for a specified pulse.
Check Point
4. Troubleshooting
1 Clean the arm sensor (right or left). ☞ 63100
Diagnosis
Paper advance arm motor (right or left) ☞ 63100

Arm sensor (right or left) ☞ 63100

☞ 4202 − ☞ 4252
NOTE
46100 11/33
46100
No. 06140
Lane Select Motor (Left) operation error.
No. 06141
Lane Select Motor (Right) operation error.

NO
Condition
00001 The lane select sensor (left) or (right) does not turn DARK even though the lane select motor (left) or (right) has
operated for a specified pulse.
00002 The lane select sensor (left) or (right) does not turn LIGHT even though the lane select motor (left) or (right) has
operated for a specified pulse.
Diagnosis
4. Troubleshooting
Lane select motor (right, left) ☞ 63100

Lane select sensor (right or left) ☞ 63100

☞ 4202 − ☞ 4252
NOTE
46100 12/33
46100
No. 06142
Paper Advance Pressure Change Motor (Left) operation error.
No. 06143
Paper Advance Pressure Change Motor (Right) operation error.

NO
Condition
00001 The paper advance pressure change sensor (left) or (right) does not turn DARK even though the paper advance
pressure change motor (left) or (right) operated and the pressure roller increased the pressure.
00002 The paper advance pressure release sensor (left) or (right) does not turn LIGHT even though the paper advance
pressure change motor (left) or (right) operated and the pressure roller released the pressure.
Diagnosis
4. Troubleshooting
Paper advance pressure change motor (right or left) ☞ 63100

Paper advance pressure change sensor (right or left) ☞ 63100
NOTE
46100 13/33
46100
No. 06148
Paper End Sensor A error.
No. 06149
Paper End Sensor B error.
No. 06150
Paper End Sensor C error.

YES
Condition
Condition
- Each print sensor was not adjusted properly when Paper Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment was
performed in Functions of Paper Sensor Adjustment.
NOTE
4. Troubleshooting
• Paper magazine A is an option. (Triple magazine specification or quad magazine specification)
00001 When the light source level of the emission sensor is set to 0, the detection sensor does not turn DARK.
00002 When the light source level of the emission sensor is set to 255, the detection sensor does not turn LIGHT.
00003 When the light source level of the emission sensor is set to 1/9 of setting value, the detection sensor does not turn
DARK.
00004 When the light source level of the emission sensor is set to the setting value, the detection sensor does not turn
LIGHT.
Check Point
1 Clean the paper end sensor using a blower brush.
2 Confirm the sensor status on the Paper Sensor Adjustment display. ☞ 36000
NOTE
• After cleaning the sensor, carry out Paper Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment again and check that the sensor LED light
intensity changes.
Diagnosis
Failure Manual No.
Paper end sensor A, B or C ☞ 63051
NOTE
46100 14/33
46100
No. 06151
Paper Loading Sensor error.

YES
NOTE
• ☞ No. 06151 Paper Loading Sensor error. is shown in the versions earlier than 5.0 for the QSS-Printer, versions earlier than 3.0 for
the FRONTIER-Printer.
Condition
Condition
NOTE
4. Troubleshooting
DARK.
LIGHT.
Check Point
1 Clean the paper loading sensor using a blower brush.
NOTE
intensity changes.
Diagnosis
Failure Manual No.
NOTE
46100 15/33
46100
No. 06152
Zigzagging Correction Sensor (Left) error.
No. 06153
Zigzagging Correction Sensor (Right) error.

YES
Condition
Condition
NOTE
4. Troubleshooting
DARK.
LIGHT.
Check Point
1 Clean the zigzagging correction sensor (right or left). ☞ 63070
Diagnosis
Failure Manual No.
Zigzagging correction sensor (right or left) ☞ 63070
NOTE
46100 16/33
46100
No. 06155
Exposure Start Sensor error.

YES
NOTE
• ☞ No. 06155 Exposure Start Sensor error. is shown in the versions earlier than 5.0 for the QSS-Printer, versions earlier than 3.0 for
the FRONTIER-Printer.
Condition
Condition
NOTE
4. Troubleshooting
DARK.
LIGHT.
Check Point
1 Clean the exposure start sensor using a blower brush.
NOTE
intensity changes.
Diagnosis
Failure Manual No.
Exposure start sensor ☞ 63070
NOTE
46100 17/33
46100
No. 06157
Paper Sensor 1 error.

YES
Condition
Condition
NOTE

4. Troubleshooting
DARK.
LIGHT.
Check Point
1 Clean paper sensor 1 using a blower brush.
NOTE
intensity changes.
Diagnosis
Failure Manual No.
Paper sensor 1 ☞ 63090
NOTE
46100 18/33
46100
No. 06158
Paper Sensor 2 (Left) error.
No. 06159
Paper Sensor 2 (Center) error.
No. 06160
Paper Sensor 2 (Right) error.

YES
Condition
Condition
NOTE
4. Troubleshooting
DARK.
LIGHT.
Check Point
1 Clean paper sensor 2 with a blower brush.
NOTE
intensity changes.
Diagnosis
Failure Manual No.
Paper sensor 2 (left, center or right) ☞ 63110
NOTE
46100 19/33
46100
No. 06173
Printer Door 3 is open. It may be adversely affect print quality.

YES
Condition
Condition
00000 The print door 3 sensor turns off while printing from paper magazine B or C.
NOTE
• This error appears to let the operator know that opening printer door 3 during printing is a wrong operation and that adversely affects
the print quality.
Check Point
1 Check that printer door 3 is securely closed.
Diagnosis
4. Troubleshooting
Adjustment failure in the attaching position of the printer door 3 sensor -

NOTE
46100 20/33
46100
No. 06177
Laser Unit temperature is out of range.

NO
Condition
00001 Laser temperature is controlled once between 15.0°C and 42.0°C for ten seconds or more (standby status) and
then the temperature exceeds 45.0°C (upper limit temperature) again.
00002 Laser temperature is controlled once between 15.0°C and 42.0°C for ten seconds or more (standby status) and
then the temperature falls under 15.0°C (lower limit temperature) again.
NOTE
• The laser thermosensor is built into the laser unit.
• You can check the temperature of laser unit in Input Check.
☞ 35210
4. Troubleshooting
Check Point
1 See 4302 ☞ If temperature of the laser unit thermosensor is not within the range from 15.0°C to 42.0°C
Diagnosis
Laser unit cooling fan 1 or 2 ☞ 63050
NOTE
46100 21/33
46100
No. 06179
B/G Laser Output Unit error.

NO
Condition
00003 • When the type detection of the laser unit is abnormal between G laser driver and laser unit
Check Point
1 Check that the wiring of laser driver G and laser unit have been securely connected.
Diagnosis
4. Troubleshooting
NOTE
46100 22/33
46100
No. 06186

NO
Condition
00001 Exposure advance pressure change sensor 3 does not turn DARK from LIGHT even though pressure change cam
2 is moved for a specified length by operating exposure advance pressure change motor 3.
00002 Exposure advance pressure change sensor 3 does not turn DARK from LIGHT even though pressure change cam
2 is moved for a specified length by operating exposure advance pressure change motor 3.
Diagnosis
4. Troubleshooting


☞ 4202 − ☞ 4252
NOTE
46100 23/33
46100
No. 06187
Setup calculation error.

NO
Condition
00001 Problematic setup calculation result detected.
00002
NOTE
• Perform initial setup again if the error shown above occurs.
Diagnosis
Carry out initial setup. -
4. Troubleshooting
46100 24/33
46100
No. 06194
Laser Control PCB control error.

NO
Condition
Condition
A communication failure has occurred between the printer I/F main PCB and laser control PCB.

00008 LVPECL does not communicate.
00009 When the connection is disconnected while receiving valid frame data
00010 When the valid frame data differs between the sending terminal and receiving terminal (e.g. data loss)
00011 When having received unspecified data
00012 When having received unspecified codes
4. Troubleshooting
IMPORTANT
• The error above may occur when the ARCNET communication status is not normal.
If the error occurs, check the following items.
☞ 35500
☞ 50520
• Perform Printer I/F Main PCB Self-Diagnostic.
☞ 35930
Diagnosis

☞ 4202 − −
NOTE
46100 25/33
46100
No. 06195
Paper did not load. Paper Magazine A2

YES
Condition
00001 Even though a specified length of paper is advanced after paper loading started, paper end sensor A2 does not
turn DARK during setup or printing for mechanical adjustments.
00002 Even though a specified length of paper is advanced after paper end sensor A2 turns LIGHT, the loading sensor
does not turn DARK.
Check Point
4. Troubleshooting
Diagnosis
Paper magazine motor A2 ☞ 63051
Paper supply motor A2 ☞ 63055
Paper supply motor A ☞ 63060

Paper end sensor A2 ☞ 63051

Printer I/O PCB 2

☞ 4202 − ☞ 4252
NOTE
46100 26/33
46100
No. 06196
Paper did not rewind. Paper Magazine A2

YES
Condition
sensor A2 does not turn LIGHT.
Check Point
4. Troubleshooting
Diagnosis
Paper magazine motor A2 ☞ 63051
Paper supply motor A2 ☞ 63055



☞ 4202 − −
NOTE
46100 27/33
46100
No. 06197
Paper End Sensor A2 error.

YES
Condition
Condition
NOTE

4. Troubleshooting
DARK.
LIGHT.
Check Point
1 Clean the paper end sensor using a blower brush.
NOTE
intensity changes.
Diagnosis
Failure Manual No.
NOTE
46100 28/33
46100
No. 06198
Laser Unit EE-PROM control error.
Condition
00001 When a failure occurs in EE-PROM write
00002 When a failure occurs in EE-PROM read
LP7500/LP7600/LP7700/LP7900
• Error display does not appear for this error
• In addition, this error is not recorded in Error Record.
QSS-37
• Error display does not appear for this error
• This error will be recorded in the Error Record of EZ Controller.
IMPORTANT
4. Troubleshooting
• The occurrence of this error does not interrupt the normal process.
46100 29/33
46100
No. 06199
Pressure Release Motor A2 operation error.

NO
Condition
00001 The pressure change sensor A2 does not turn DARK even though a specified time elapsed after activating the
00002 The pressure change sensor A2 does not turn LIGHT even though a specified time elapsed after activating the
Check Point
1 Check that the paper supply unit A2 is installed correctly.
Diagnosis
4. Troubleshooting
Pressure release motor A2 ☞ 63051

Pressure change sensor A2 ☞ 63051

☞ 4202 − ☞ 4252
NOTE
46100 30/33
46100
No. 06200
Width Change Motor A2 operation error.

NO
Condition
00001 The width change sensor A2 does not turn DARK even though the paper guide in the paper supply unit A2
started initial operation.
00002 The width change sensor A2 does not turn LIGHT even though the paper guide in the paper supply unit A2
moved to a specified position.
Check Point
1 Check that the paper supply unit A2 is installed correctly.
Diagnosis
4. Troubleshooting
Width change motor A2 ☞ 63051

Width change sensor A2 ☞ 63051

☞ 4202 − −
NOTE
46100 31/33
46100
No. 06201

YES
Condition
00001 Even though a specified length of paper is advanced after paper loading started, paper end sensor A does not turn
DARK during setup or printing for mechanical adjustments.
00002 Even when a specified length of paper is advanced after the paper end sensor A has turned DARK, the loading
sensor does not turn dark.
NOTE
• When the quad magazine unit is installed, this message appears.
Check Point
4. Troubleshooting
Diagnosis
Paper magazine motor A ☞ 63051

Paper end sensor A ☞ 63051


☞ 4202 − −
NOTE
46100 32/33
46100
No. 06202

YES
Condition
sensor A does not turn LIGHT.
NOTE
• When the quad magazine unit is installed, this message appears.
Check Point
4. Troubleshooting
Diagnosis
Paper magazine motor A ☞ 63051


NOTE
46100 33/33
46200
No. 06203
Setup error.

YES
Condition
#2001 When measuring the daily setup test print, the density for specific colors between steps did not rise
consecutively.
#2002 The Dmax of the measured daily setup print was 3.8 or more, and the daily setup Dmax data for 15 days were not
ready.
#2003 The Dmax of the measured daily setup print was 3.8 or more, and the daily setup Dmax data for 15 days did not
change consecutively day by day and changed suddenly.
#2004 The Dmax is within the range of 0.9 and 3.8, but when calculating the daily setup correction value, the correction
value for specific colors was over 10 times as high as the previous value.
#2005 When calculating the daily setup correction value, the correction value for specific colors was 3 key or more.
#2006 When calculating the daily setup correction value, the total amount of the correction value (specified color) after
4. Troubleshooting
completing the initial setup or paper specification registration setup exceeded the limit value.
Between steps
G083195
IMPORTANT
• It occurs when an abnormal correction value is calculated. Confirm that the color density state of the test print have not
changed too much in comparison with the previous print.
NOTE
Diagnosis
Suffix
number
#2002 Clean the calibration plate. −
#2003 Replace the calibration plate if it is scratched on. ☞ 27460
#2004
#2005
#2006
#2001 Colorimeter unit ☞ 27460
#2002 Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
#2002
#2004
#2005
#2006
46200 1/21
46200
Suffix
number
#2006 Problems may occur if the process of performing morning daily setup, then performing −
Emulsion Number Change on the main paper when the air temperature has risen, is repeated for
several days.
In that case, perform the paper specification registration setup, then perform the paper
magazine registration setup of other magazines.
Process the control strip and check the condition of the processing solution. −

Suffix
number
#2001 G-AOM driver ☞ 66080
#2004 Laser control PCB ☞ 66010
#2005
#2006
#2004 It may occur when the contamination has occurred. −
Process the control strip and check the condition of the processing solution.
#2005 Problems may occur when the processing solution (P1) has been replaced. −
4. Troubleshooting
NOTE
46200 2/21
46200
No. 06204
Setup error.

YES
Condition
#3001 The Dmax of the measured daily setup print was below 0.9, and the daily setup Dmax data for 15 days did not
change consecutively (the Dmax is decreasing day by day)
#3002 When calculating the daily setup correction value, the correction value density was 3 key or more. And plus
correction (print density has been decreased) has been carried out.
#3003 When calculating the daily setup correction value, the total correction value (density), which started as soon as
the initial setup or paper specification registration setup was completed, is beyond the limit value. And plus
correction (print density has been decreased) has been carried out.
4. Troubleshooting
Between steps
G083195
IMPORTANT
• It may occur when the processing solution is deteriorated. Confirm that the color density state of the test print have not
changed too much in comparison with the previous print.
NOTE
Diagnosis
Suffix number Countermeasure and failed part Manual No.
#3002 Clean the calibration plate. −
#3003 Replace the calibration plate if it is scratched on. ☞ 27460
#3003 Problems may occur if the process of performing morning daily setup, then performing −
Emulsion Number Change on the main paper when the air temperature has risen, is repeated for
several days.
Even though the color density state of the test print have not changed too much in comparison −
with the previous print, the correction value may have become high due to the gradual
deterioration of the processing solution.
In that case, process the control strip and check the condition of the processing solution.

#3001 Process the control strip and check the condition of the processing solution. −
#3002 Clean the strainer units of the replenisher pumps and the hoses. Check the output amounts. −
#3003
46200 3/21
46200
NOTE
4. Troubleshooting
46200 4/21
46200
No. 06205
Setup error.

YES
Condition
#4001 When the test print was measured, the Dmax was 3.8 or more, and the daily setup Dmax data for 15 days did not
change consecutively (the Dmax is increasing day by day)
Between steps
4. Troubleshooting
G083195
NOTE
Diagnosis
00001 Clean the calibration plate.
NOTE
46200 5/21
46200
No. 06208
Paper has jammed in the Paper Supply Unit.

NO
Condition
00001 The exposure start sensor does not turn DARK even though the paper was fed to the exposure standby position.
Check Point
1 Check that the exposure start sensor is not soiled.
2 Carry out Paper Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment in Functions of Paper Sensor Adjustment.
☞ 36000
Diagnosis
4. Troubleshooting
Exposure advance motor 1 ☞ 63090


☞ 4202 − −
NOTE
46200 6/21
46200
No. 06209
Paper has jammed in the Exposure Advance Unit.

NO
Condition
00001 The exposure start sensor does not turn LIGHT even though the paper was exposed and fed for a specified time.
00002 The paper sensor 1 does not turn DARK even though the paper was fed to the paper advance unit 1.
Check Point
2 Check that the paper sensor 1 is not soiled.
3 Confirm that the pressure guide of the exposure advance unit is correctly attached.
☞ 36000
4. Troubleshooting
Diagnosis
Paper advance motor 2 ☞ 63090

NOTE
46200 7/21
46200
No. 06210
Paper remains in the Paper Supply Unit.

YES
Condition
Condition
- After the initial operation, after turning on the system, after releasing the error of paper jam, or after opening or closing the
printer door, the status of each sensor was DARK.
NOTE

00001 Paper end sensor A
00002 Paper end sensor B
00003 Paper end sensor C
4. Troubleshooting
00004 Paper end sensor A2
00005 Loading sensor
Check Point
1 Confirm whether the paper remains at each sensor in the printer.
2 Confirm that each sensor is not dirty.
3 Confirm that paper magazine is correctly placed.
☞ 36000
NOTE
• If suffix number 00001, 00002, 00003 or 00004 is shown, the printer door may have been shut in the state where the paper magazine is
not correctly placed.
• The above mentioned is occurred by having blocked the paper end sensor with a normal magazine code has not been detected by the
paper magazine code sensor.
Adjustment failure or part failure Manual No.

Confirm whether the paper magazine positioning hole smoothly enters the positioning pin. -
Adjustment failure of the paper magazine code sensor -
Confirm whether the paper magazine pressure spring of printer door is functioning correctly. -
Diagnosis
Paper end sensor B Paper end sensor C ☞ 63051

46200 8/21
46200
Detection failure (triple magazine) Manual No.

Detection failure (quad magazine) Manual No.

Paper end sensor A Paper end sensor A2 ☞ 63051

☞ 4202 − −
NOTE
4. Troubleshooting
46200 9/21
46200
No. 06211
Paper remains in the Exposure Advance Unit.

YES
Condition
00001 After the initial operation, after turning on the system, after releasing the error of paper jam, or after opening or
closing the printer door, the status of exposure start sensor was DARK.
Check Point
1 Confirm whether the paper remains at exposure start sensor in the printer.
☞ 36000
4. Troubleshooting
Diagnosis

☞ 4202 − −
NOTE
46200 10/21
46200
No. 06220
B Laser temperature is out of range.

NO
Condition
00001 B laser temperature is controlled between 46.7°C and 47.3°C for 6 seconds or more (standby status) and then the
temperature exceeds 50.0°C (upper limit temperature) again.
00002 B laser temperature is controlled between 46.7°C and 47.3°C for 6 seconds or more (standby status) and then the
temperature falls under 44.0°C (lower limit temperature) again.
NOTE
• The B laser thermosensor is built into the B laser.
• You can check the temperature of laser unit in Input Check.
☞ 35210
4. Troubleshooting
Check Point
1 See 4302 ☞ If the temperature of B laser thermosensor is not within the range from 46.7°C to 47.3°C.
Diagnosis
Laser unit cooling fan 1 or 2 ☞ 63050
NOTE
46200 11/21
46200
No. 06221
Paper has jammed in the Paper Advance Unit.

YES
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
00001 The paper sensor 1 does not turn LIGHT even though the paper was fed to the paper advance unit 1.
00002 The paper sensor 2 (left) does not turn DARK even though the paper was fed to the processor loading unit.
00003 The paper sensor 2 (center) does not turn DARK even though the paper was fed to the processor loading unit.
00004 The paper sensor 2 (right) does not turn DARK even though the paper was fed to the processor loading unit.
Check Point
2 Confirm that the pressure guide of the paper advance unit 2 is correctly attached.
4. Troubleshooting
☞ 36000
IMPORTANT
• If the error of the suffix number 00002, 00003 or 00004 is shown, confirm that the rollers of the paper advance unit 2 and
the processor loading unit are not dirty.
Paper advance unit 2 Processor loading unit
Rollers
Rollers
46200 12/21
46200
• If the suffix numbers 00002, 00003 or 00004 is shown, confirm that the spring 2 of paper advance unit 1 is not broken.
Spring 2
4. Troubleshooting
G078460
Diagnosis

☞ 4202 − −
NOTE
46200 13/21
46200
No. 06222
Paper has jammed in the Processor loading unit.

YES
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
00001 The paper sensor 2 (left) does not turn LIGHT even though the paper was fed to the processor loading unit.
00002 The paper sensor 2 (center) does not turn LIGHT even though the paper was fed to the processor loading unit.
00003 The paper sensor 2 (right) does not turn LIGHT even though the paper was fed to the processor loading unit.
Check Point
4. Troubleshooting
☞ 36000
IMPORTANT
• If the error of the suffix number 00001, 00002 or 00003 is shown, confirm that the rollers of the paper advance unit 2 and
the processor loading unit are not dirty.
Paper advance unit 2 Processor loading unit
Rollers
Rollers
46200 14/21
46200
• If the suffix numbers 00001, 00002 or 00003 is shown, confirm that the spring 2 of paper advance unit 1 is not broken.
Spring 2
4. Troubleshooting
G078460
Diagnosis
NOTE
46200 15/21
46200
No. 06223
Paper remains in the Paper Advance Unit.

YES
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
00001 After the initial operation, after turning on the system, after releasing the error of paper jam, or after opening or closing
the printer door, the status of paper sensor 1 was DARK.
Check Point
1 Check that the paper sensor 1 is not soiled.
☞ 36000
4. Troubleshooting
Diagnosis

☞ 4202 − −
NOTE
46200 16/21
46200
No. 06224
Paper remains in the Processor loading unit.

YES
Condition
Condition
- After the initial operation, after turning on the system, after releasing the error of paper jam, or after opening or closing the
printer door, the status of each sensor was DARK.
NOTE

00001 Paper sensor 2 (left)
00002 Paper sensor 2 (center)
00003 Paper sensor 2 (right)
4. Troubleshooting
Check Point
☞ 36000
Diagnosis

☞ 4202 − −
NOTE
46200 17/21
46200
No. 06227
No. 06228
No. 06229
No. 06230
No. 06231

YES or Forced Output
• YES
1. Click YES.
4. Troubleshooting
The error display is closed and paper loading starts.
• Forced Output
1. Click Forced Output.
For the double magazine specification, No.01121 Which paper magazine would you like to print with? is shown.
For the triple magazine specification, No.01122 Which paper magazine would you like to print with? is shown.
For the quad magazine specification, No.01123 Which paper magazine would you like to print with? is shown.
2. Check the print.
If white margin is on the print, cut the margin.
NOTE
• This error occurs only when processing normal prints.
Condition
No. 06227-00001 The paper end sensor A does not turn DARK when the paper from paper magazine A of the triple
magazine is loaded.
No. 06228-00001 The paper end sensor B does not turn DARK when the paper from paper magazine B is loaded.
No. 06229-00001 The paper end sensor C does not turn DARK when the paper from paper magazine C is loaded.
No. 06230-00001 The paper end sensor A2 does not turn DARK when the paper from paper magazine A2 is loaded.
No. 06231-00001 The paper end sensor A does not turn DARK when the paper from paper magazine A of the quad
magazine is loaded.
Check Point
Diagnosis
Detection failure (double magazine) Manual No.
Paper end sensor B Paper end sensor C ☞ 63051

46200 18/21
46200

Detection failure (quad magazine) Manual No.

Paper end sensor A Paper end sensor A2 ☞ 63051

Paper magazine motor A Paper magazine motor A2 ☞ 63051
Paper magazine motor B Paper magazine motor C
Paper supply motor A Paper supply motor B/C ☞ 63060
4. Troubleshooting

☞ 4202 − −
NOTE
46200 19/21
46200
No. 06234
Paper Loading Sensor error.

YES
NOTE
• ☞ No. 06234 Paper Loading Sensor error. is shown in Ver. 5.0 or later for the QSS-Printer, Ver. 3.0 or later for the FRONTIER-
Printer.
Condition
Condition
NOTE
4. Troubleshooting
DARK.
LIGHT.
Check Point
1 Clean the paper loading sensor using a blower brush.
NOTE
intensity changes.
Diagnosis
Failure Manual No.
NOTE
46200 20/21
46200
No. 06235
Exposure Start Sensor error.

YES
NOTE
• ☞ No. 06235 Exposure Start Sensor error. is shown in Ver. 5.0 or later for the QSS-Printer, Ver. 3.0 or later for the FRONTIER-
Printer.
Condition
Condition
NOTE
4. Troubleshooting
DARK.
LIGHT.
Check Point
1 Clean the exposure start sensor using a blower brush.
NOTE
intensity changes.
Diagnosis
Failure Manual No.
NOTE
46200 21/21
46300
Error message: Scanner/ Film Carrier
No. 06305−06463
Condition
IMPORTANT
• Error messages not explained in the Service Manual are listed in the table below.
For corrective actions, see the Scanner Service Manual, EZ Controller Service Manual and Connection Unit Service
Manual.
Error message table
No. 06305 Scanner Focus operation error.
No. 06306 Scanner IRIS operation error.
No. 06309 Scanner change of light error.
No. 06321 Focus auto adjustment error.
No. 06322 Scanner input balance error.
4. Troubleshooting
No. 06324 F stop value range error.
No. 06327 Scanner Light Source Section temperature adjustment error.
No. 06332 Light Source adjustment error.
No. 06333 The Line Data is out of the Standard Range Error.
No. 06334 Lane change operation error.
No. 06335 The Scanner Unit Cover is open.
No. 06336 Scanner Zoom operation error.
No. 06340 Analog offset adjustment error
No. 06341 Scanner image path error.
No. 06342 Scanner unit was disconnected. Check the power supply and the connection.
NOTE
• In the Error message table, error message numbers that are not used currently may be listed.
Error message table
No. 06400 Perforation Sensor error.
No. 06401 Loading Sensor error.
No. 06402 Ready Sensor error.
No. 06403 135 film has stopped at the Film Carrier.
No. 06407 Spool Key operation error.
No. 06408 The Film Carrier is unlocked.
No. 06409 The 240 Cleaning Leader has stopped.
No. 06410 Film Sensor error.
No. 06411 Film Carrier Sensor Sensitivity Adjustment was not executed.
No. 06412 135 DX Sensor 1 error.
No. 06423 Auto focus error.
46300 1/2
46300
Error message table

No. 06424 Mount Unit operation error.
No. 06425 Mount detection error.
No. 06426 The lane is out of position.
No. 06429 System error. (AFC / Scanner control PCB)
No. 06431 Auto focus error.
No. 06432 Mount insertion operation error.
No. 06433 Mount detection error.
No. 06434 Mount detection (inlet) error.
No. 06435 Mount insertion operation error.
No. 06436 Mount elevator operation error.
No. 06437 Mount eject operation error.
No. 06438 135 Cleaning Leader has stopped.
No. 06439 The film strip is too short for processing.
No. 06441 The 120 Cleaning Leader has stopped.
No. 06442 The perforation of the film may be broken.
No. 06443 Move Table operation error.
4. Troubleshooting
No. 06444 Cartridge is out of position.
No. 06445 End Perforation Sensor error.
No. 06446 Film was set to the incorrect lane.

No. 06463 Scanner data receive error
NOTE
No. 06447 I/O extension PCB could not be detected.
No. 06448 The Connecting Unit was unlocked.
No. 06449 Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment was not executed.
No. 06450 Film Sensor 1 error.
No. 06451 Film Sensor 2 error.
No. 06453 Film has stopped in the Connecting Unit.
No. 06455 Film cut operation error.
No. 06456 Arm operation error.
No. 06457 Interlock error.
No. 06458 Film Processor error. Film will be ejected to the Negative Stocker.
No. 06459 Manual insertion was detected. Film auto loading cannot continue to the Scanner. Quit the process.
No. 06460 Advance Motor control error.
No. 06461 Film Advance Guide 1 has opened. The process was stopped.
No. 06462 The Cleaning Leader has stopped in the Connecting Unit.
NOTE
46300 2/2
46550
Error message: Colorimeter
No. 06551
Paper has jammed in the Colorimeter Unit.

YES
Condition
00001 Although a specified length of paper is fed in paper advance operation, paper sensor 2 does not detect DARK.
00002 While paper is fed in paper advance operation, paper sensor 2 turns LIGHT.
00003 When ejecting paper, paper sensor 2 does not turn LIGHT although a specified length of paper is fed to lead the
front end of the paper.
NOTE
• Refer to the setup print color measuring operation flow. ☞ 56610
Check Point
1 Check that a short test print has not been inserted.
4. Troubleshooting
2 Clean the advance rollers of the colorimeter with a cleaning sheet.
4 If the error of suffix number 00003 occurs without a paper in the colorimeter unit, clean the paper sensor 2.
Diagnosis
Paper advance motor

− ☞ 4203 −
NOTE
46550 1/3
46550
No. 06554
Calibration Plate advance error.

YES
Condition
00001 Although the calibration plate has been fed for a specified length, paper sensor 2 dose not turn dark.
00002 When the calibration plate is being fed, paper sensor 1 turns LIGHT from DARK.
00003 In initial operation, although a specified length of moving to the home position was attempted to the calibration
plate, paper sensors 1 does not turn light.
00004 When the calibration plate is being fed, paper sensor 1 turns LIGHT.
00005 Not occur
00006 Although the calibration plate has been fed for a specified length, paper sensor 1 does not turn DARK.
NOTE
4. Troubleshooting
• Refer to the colorimeter calibration operation flow. ☞ 56600
Check Point
1 If the errors of suffix number 00003 or 00006 occur with the calibration plate placed on the standby position, clean paper
sensor 1.
Diagnosis
Paper sensor 1 or 2 ☞ 63318
Calibration plate advance motor

− ☞ 4203 ☞ 4252
NOTE
46550 2/3
46550
No. 06555
Set the Colorimeter Unit.

YES
Condition
00000 The colorimeter unit is not detected during working or communicating.
Check Point
1 Confirm that the colorimeter unit is correctly attached.
Diagnosis
4. Troubleshooting

− ☞ 4203 −
NOTE
46550 3/3
46620
Error message: NMC/Software upgrade/Image Processing
No. 06621-06833
For corrective actions, see EZ Controller Service Manual
Condition
IMPORTANT
For corrective actions, see the EZ Controller Service Manual.
Error (NMC)
Error message table
No. 06621 Could not connect to the server.
No. 06622 There is no backup data in the server.
No. 06623 Noritsu-eNET Mail was not started.
No. 06624 Failed to download the backup data.
Error message (Software upgrade)
4. Troubleshooting
Error message table
No. 06803 Language version of message data is incorrect. Message display in English.
Error message(Image processing)

Error message table
No. 06831 Image correction error
No. 06832 Image composition error
No. 06833 Image process log output error
NOTE
46620 1/3
46620
No. 06680
Network communication error.

NO
Condition
00000 The communication between the input side and printer I/F main PCB failed in printing process.
IMPORTANT
• The error above appears for the FRONTIER-Printer only.
• The above errors may occur if problems occur with the software.
☞ 31110
Check Point
4. Troubleshooting
Diagnosis
☞ 4260
☞ 35500
☞ 50520

Hard disk -
NOTE
46620 2/3
46620
No. 06681
Network communication error.

NO
Condition
00001 The printer I/F main PCB failed to get the print information when the information was transferred from the input
side to the printer I/F main PCB during the print process.
00002 The PC for input failed to read images during the print process.
00003 The printer I/F main PCB failed to receive the images when they were transferred from the input side to the
printer I/F main PCB during the print process.
00004 The PC at the input side failed to process images before sending them to the printer I/F main PCB during the
print process.
00005 The communication between the input side and printer I/F main PCB failed in printing process.
4. Troubleshooting
IMPORTANT
• The error above appears for the QSS-Printer only.
• The above errors may occur if problems occur with the software.
☞ 31110
Diagnosis
The countermeasure action and the failed part would differ depending on the suffix number (bit).
Suffix number (bit) Countermeasure Manual No.

00001 • Restart the computer and printer. -
00003 • Confirm the connection of the LAN cable.
00005 ☞ 4260
☞ 35500
☞ 50520
00002 Restart the computer. -
00004
Suffix number (bit) Failed part Manual No.

00001 Printer I/F main PCB ☞ 66005
00003
00005
00002 Hard disk PC Service Manual
00004
NOTE
46620 3/3
46900
Error message: Main
Error message: Main
No. 06901
ARCNET communication error.

NO
Condition
Condition
When the power supply is turned on, the version is checked, or software is upgraded, an ARCNET communication error occurs.
The communication error occurs temporarily because of the instant power failure.
Suffix number (bit) PCB

IMPORTANT
4. Troubleshooting
• When this error occurs, the operation may not be continued. It is necessary to reset the power supply of the system.
• The PCB without reference to the error may be displayed in the second line depending on the equipped options, cable
connecting position and/or ARCNET communication feature.
Check the ARCNET communication path other than the displayed PCB.
☞ 50520
☞ 35500
Check Point
1 Reset the power supply.
Diagnosis
Others
Failed part
• Check the conditions of ARCNET cables and connectors explained in 68100 ☞ The Factor List of the ARCNET Communication
Errors.
• Remove the ARCNET cable of the emission side connected to the white connector,
and check whether the red light is weaker than any of the other connectors.
• If the red light is weaker than the other connectors or the the connector does not
emit any light, check whether there are chips of shaved ARCNET cable sheath
inside the connector.
• See 68100☞ Removing chips of shaved cable sheath in the ARCNET
connector.
Normal Problem
• See 68100☞ How to use the aspirator.
• If no chips of the shaved cable sheath is found, check whether +5 V is normally
supplied to the printer control PCB, processor control PCB, laser control
PCB and printer I/F main PCB.
• If ☞ No. 06909 or ☞ No. 06901 occurs after replacing the printer I/F main PCB, Machine Type Registration of Machine
Specification may not be configured normally.
• For the QSS-Printer, see ☞ 66006.
• For the FRONTIER-Printer, see ☞ 66007.

ARCNET cable -
46900 1/7
46900
Error message: Main

☞ 4202 ☞ 4203 −
NOTE
4. Troubleshooting
46900 2/7
46900
Error message: Main
No. 06903
Serial communication error.

YES or NO
• Select YES to continue the communication.
• Select NO to abort the communication.
Condition
00002 There was a communication error between the colorimeter and processor control PCB.
The serial communication between the colorimeter and processor control PCB is performed in the following timings.
1. When the printer/processor starts
2. When the system entered the setup mode
3. When the the automatic calibration of the colorimeter is performed and test print is measured
4. When the colorimeter unit is attached/removed
4. Troubleshooting
For details about the operation specification, see ☞ 50500 and ☞ 56110.
Diagnosis

− ☞ 4203 −
NOTE
46900 3/7
46900
Error message: Main
No. 06909
CPU was reset. Abort the process.

NO
Condition
Condition
The CPU of the printer control PCB is reset due to power failure.

Check Point
Diagnosis
4. Troubleshooting
Others
Failed part
• If ☞ No. 06909 or ☞ No. 06901 occurs after replacing the printer I/F main PCB, Machine Type Registration of Machine
Specification may not be configured normally.
NOTE
46900 4/7
46900
Error message: Main
No. 06921
PCB error.

NO
Condition
Condition
When turning on the power supply or upgrading the program version, each CPU judged that the PCB was abnormal.

Check Point
4. Troubleshooting
Diagnosis
ARCNET cable
☞ 35500
☞ 50520
NOTE
46900 5/7
46900
Error message: Main
No. 06931
Backup data error. Printer I/F Main PCB

NO
Condition
Condition
When the power supply is reset during saving a data in the printer I/F main PCB.

00001 Printer control PCB data
00002 Processor control PCB data
00004 Laser control PCB data
00008 Printer I/F Main PCB data or Printer Maintenance Application data
00010 Colorimeter data
00020 Setup 1 data
4. Troubleshooting
00040 Setup 2 data
00080, 00100, 00200, 00400, 00800, Shading data
01000, 02000
Check Point
Manual No.
1 Reset the power supply again. −
2 If the error reoccurs, read the backup data saved in media at the close down check. ☞ 35400
3 Perform Printer I/F Main PCB Self-Diagnostic. ☞ 35930
Diagnosis
NOTE
46900 6/7
46900
Error message: Main
No. 06900-06932
Condition
IMPORTANT
Error (Main)
Error message table
No. 06900 Main control system error.
No. 06907 The file was not found.
No. 06913 System was shut down forcibly. Restart the system.
No. 06930 Failed to register the order.
No. 06932 Template data is abnormal.
4. Troubleshooting
NOTE
46900 7/7
49000
Error message: Edit
Error message: Edit
No. 09000-09002
Condition
IMPORTANT
Error (Edit)
Error message table
No. 09000 Edit mode System error.
No. 09002 Edit mode Image data error.
No. 09003 Edit mode Image read error.
NOTE
4. Troubleshooting
49000 1/1
49350
Error message: Bravo I/CD-R external writing system (directly connecting to Rimage)
Error message: Bravo I/CD-R external writing system (directly connecting to Rimage)
No. 9350−9381
For corrective action of the error message, see the Bravo II Service Manual and the d-
Storage/ CD-R external writing system Service Manual.
Condition
NOTE
IMPORTANT
See the Bravo II Service Manual for corrective actions of the messages.
Error (Bravo II)
Error message table
No.9350 The setting file could not be read. Start by default setting.
No.9351 DLL version is incorrect.
No.9354 PTIF.DLL process response error.
4. Troubleshooting
No.9356 The selected order was not deleted.
No.9357 Failed to write to the CD.
No.9358 PTBurn system error.
No.9359 Tray Operation error. Press the Ink Cartridge button on the Bravo.
No.9360 The ink cartridges were not found. Open the cover of the Bravo and press the Ink Cartridge button. Make sure the
cartridges are installed.
No.9361 Bravo Internal Printer communication error. Press the Ink Cartridge button of the Bravo.
No.9362 The media was not picked. Press the Ink Cartridge button of the Bravo.
No.9363 Arm operation error. Press the Ink Cartridge button of the Bravo.
No.9364 Arm Picker error. Press the Ink Cartridge button of the Bravo.
No.9365 There are no user authorizations on the personal computer. Login as Administrator, and restart the software.
No.9366 PTBurn Internal Software error. Restart the software.
No.9367 CD-R drive for Bravo was not found. Disconnect all the cables from the Bravo (including power supply). Then reconnect
all the cables to the Bravo and restart the computer.
No.9369 The Bravo Utility was not started.
No.9370 The PTBurn was not started.
No.9371 The shared folder of PTBurn could not be accessed.
No.9373 Job history information file error.
No.9374 An error has occurred when data writing was executed on the Bravo.
No.9375 The media was not picked. Remove the media and turn ON the power supply of the Bravo.
No.9376 An error has occurred when data writing was executed on the Bravo.
IMPORTANT
For corrective action of the error message, see the d-Storage/ CD-R external writing system Service Manual.
CD-R external writing system (Directly connecting Rimage)
Error message table
No.9350 The setting file could not be read. Start by default setting.
No.9351 DLL version is incorrect.
No.9356 The selected order was not deleted.
No.9357 Failed to write to the CD.
No.9380 Rimage CD/DVD Publishing Systems was not started.
No.9381 Failed to access the shared folder of Rimage CD/DVD Publishing Systems.
49350 1/1
49450
Attention message: Main controller/ Setting module
No. 10000−15302
Refer to the Troubleshooting Manual for Corrective action of Attention message.
Condition
IMPORTANT
For corrective actions for the messages, see the EZ Controller Troubleshooting Manual, EZ Controller Service
Manual and T15/LS Connecting Unit Operator's Manual.
*1. Attention messages in the 10500s are for the Multi Purpose Format Creation Software.
For details about each attention message, see the Multi Purpose Format Creation Software Operator's Manual.
T15/LS Connecting Unit Operator's Manual

No. 10100 Order Reservation cannot be executed.
No. 10101 A reserved order remains. Would you like to insert film manually?
No. 10102 Cannot start film processing as scanner is not available.
4. Troubleshooting
Attention: Main controller/ Setting module
No. 10000 Are you sure you want to quit the application?
No. 10001 Are you sure you want to delete the order?
No. 10003 Select the Same Service Name.
No. 10004 Processing of the print has been started. Failed to interrupt.
No. 10005 Invalid setting data is included. Check the print channel setting.
No. 10006 Could not start printing as the printer is not powered on.
No. 10007 An order is in process. Would you like to stop processing?
No. 10008 There are some devices for which closedown checks are not completed. Are you sure you want to quit the
application?
No. 10200 Additional scanning is not allowed as order number has been incremented.
No. 10201 Unable to hold the correction values as image size has been changed.
No. 10300 There is no data in the specified path. Specify the correct path.
No. 10302 Would you like to restart the EZ Controller to read the data?
No. 10304 Could not cancel as the end processing has started.
No. 10305 If you change the setting, you will have to set up the registered print channel again. Are you sure you want
to change the setting?
No. 10306 Cannot register the printer.
No. 10307 Set up the scanner.
No. 10308 The scanner you have selected is not installed. Select another scanner.
No. 10309 Cannot register with the paper size selected.
No. 10310 Cannot manipulate as order is being processed.
No. 10311 Printer registration has been changed. EZ Controller will restart.
No. 10312 The main printer has been designated for this group. Would you like to change the main printer?
No. 10313 Cannot delete the printer. Change the main printer.
No. 10400 The file was not found for showing the error/attention message for the printer.
No. 10401 The Paper Setup was not executed.
*1
No. 10500 Would you like to stop editing the information?
No. 10501*1 Would you like to delete the selected template?
*1
No. 10502 Registration was completed.
No. 10503*1 There is insufficient space left on the disk. Increase the free space of disk then retry.
No. 10504*1 This template has more than 16 layers. This template cannot be used.
49450 1/2
49450

*1
No. 10505 Template size is too large to read.
No. 10506*1 Template size is too small to read.
*1
No. 10507 Select the Use Layer.
No. 10508*1 Image area is not specified. Specify at least one image area in order to register.
No. 10509*1 The specified area is too small. It will be deleted.
No. 10510*1 Would you like to delete the selected package?
*1
No. 10511 Would you like to delete all the packages?
No. 10512*1 Woyld you like to delete the selected index?
*1
No. 10513 Would you like to delete all the indexes?
No. 10514*1 Image dimension is not correct. Select the image of 3632x549 pixel.
No. 10515*1 The image file format is not supported.
No. 10516*1 The maximum allowable number of registration will be exceeded. No more template can be read.
No. 10517*1 An index with the same name already exists. Change the title name.
No. 10518*1 A package with the same name already exists. Change the title name.
*1
No. 10519 Template of the same name already exists. Change the name.
No. 10520*1 Multi print of the same name already exists. Change the name.
4. Troubleshooting
No. 10521*1 The maximum allowable number of registration will be exceeded. No more multi print can be read.
No. 10522*1 Are you sure you want to delete all the multi prints?
No. 10523*1 Are you sure you want to delete the selected multi prints?
No. 10524*1 The maximum allowable number of registration will be exceeded. No more index can be read.
*1
No. 10525 Failed to create new title name. Enter another title name.
No. 10526*1 The maximum allowable number of registration will be exceeded. No more package can be read.
No. 10527*1 An index with the same name already exists. Change the title name.
No. 10528*1 The maximum allowable number of registration will be exceeded. No more price sheet can be read.
No. 10529*1 Are you sure you want to delete all the price sheets?
No. 10530*1 Are you sure you want to delete the selected price sheets?
*1
No. 10531 Template of the same name already exists. Would you like to overwrite?
No. 10532*1 Multi print of the same name already exists. Would you like to overwrite?

No. 15000 System error.
No. 15001 USB hardware key was not detected. Confirm that the hardware key is connected.
No. 15002 There is insufficient space on the hard disk. Delete the unnecessary file(s).
No. 15003 The drive specified for image storage is not available. Confirm the drive setting.
No. 15300 Failed to initialize the data.
No. 15301 Failed to read the data.
No. 15302 Failed to write the data.
NOTE
49450 2/2
5000
Starting up/Closing down Operation .................................................................................... 50500

Startup sequence ................................................................................................................................................50500
ARCNET communication ..................................................................................................... 50520
ARCNET communication flow .........................................................................................................................50520
Data flow .............................................................................................................................. 50700
Data flow in printing ..........................................................................................................................................50700
Data flow ...........................................................................................................................................................50710
Paper path diagram ............................................................................................................. 55000
Paper path diagram ............................................................................................................................................55000
Paper advance operation .................................................................................................... 55100
Paper loading operation (the paper advance length is 113.5 mm or less) .........................................................55100
Paper loading operation (the paper advance length is between 113.6 mm and 165.5 mm) ..............................55110
Paper loading operation (the paper advance length is 165.6 mm or more) .......................................................55120
Paper supply unit operation (the paper advance length is 165.5 mm or less) ...................................................55200
Paper supply unit operation (the paper advance length is between 165.6 mm and 392.5 mm) ........................55210
Paper supply unit operation (the paper advance length is between 395.6 mm and 466.5 mm) ........................55220
Paper supply unit operation (the paper advance length is 466.6 mm or more) .................................................55230
5 Operation sequence
Exposure advance operation ..............................................................................................................................55300
Paper advance unit 1 operation (the paper width is 254.0 mm or less) .............................................................55400
Paper advance unit 1 operation (the paper width is between 254.1 mm and 457.0 mm) ..................................55410
Paper advance unit 1 operation (the paper width is between 457.1 mm and 528.0 mm) ..................................55420
Paper advance unit 1 operation (the paper advance length is 528.1 mm or more) ............................................55430
Paper advance unit 2 operation (the paper width of 152.0 mm or less and the advance length of 178.0 mm or less)
55500
Paper advance unit 2 operation (the paper with the width is 152.0 or less and the advance length between 178.1 to
305.0 mm) ..........................................................................................................................................................55510
Paper advance unit 2 operation (the paper with the width is 152.0 or less and the advance length of 305.1 mm or
more) ..................................................................................................................................................................55520
Paper advance unit 2 operation (the paper width is 165.0 mm or more) ...........................................................55530
Paper rewind operation ......................................................................................................................................55600
Paper splice detection operation ........................................................................................................................55700
Paper end operation ...........................................................................................................................................55800
Fogged paper operation .....................................................................................................................................55900
Processor paper advance operation .................................................................................... 56100
Paper advance operation of the processor (normal prints) ................................................................................56100
Paper advance operation of the processor (setup prints) ...................................................................................56110
Print conveyor unit operation ............................................................................................... 56200
Print conveyor unit operation ............................................................................................................................56200
Print sorter unit operation .................................................................................................... 56300
Print sorter unit operation [print sorter unit (6-inch type, 17/14 orders)] ..........................................................56300
Print sorter unit operation [print sorter unit (10-inch type)] .......................................................................... 56300-5
Colorimeter unit operation ................................................................................................... 56600
The calibration operation of the colorimeter .....................................................................................................56600
Automatic color measurement operation for setup prints .................................................................................56610
Judgment operation of setup print .....................................................................................................................56620
5000 1/2
5000
Replenishment operation sequence [F] ............................................................................... 57010

Replenishment operation sequence [F] ..............................................................................................................57010
Replenishment operation sequence [F] ..............................................................................................................57020
5 Operation sequence
5000 2/2
50500
Starting up/Closing down Operation
Startup sequence
• This section explains the starting sequence.
1. The program timer goes off or you press the manual sorter switch.
2. The power supply relay of 200 V turns on.

• The processor control PCB turns on the relay (X10) of the processor relay PCB.
• See the Wiring diagram.
3. The control PCBs turn on.
4. The system starts adjusting the processing solution temperature.

• Relays of the processor relay PCB (X1, X6 and X7) turn on.
• See the Wiring diagram.
5. The system starts adjusting the laser unit temperature.
6. The following error occurs if each control PCB is not turned on properly after checking the communication
status between the printer I/F main PCB and each control PCB.
Control PCB Error

Processor control PCB Printer control PCB • ☞ No. 06901 ARCNET
Laser control PCB communication error.
7. Checks the conditions of all the control PCBs.
If the conditions of all the control PCBs were abnormal

• ☞ No. 06921 PCB error.
8. Checks the backup data of all the control PCBs.

NOTE
• Applicable models are indicated with # and inapplicable models are indicated with −.
Symptom Error
• If the backup data of the processor control PCB is abnormal • ☞ No. 05538 Backup data error. Processor
• If the backup data of the printer control PCB is abnormal • ☞ No. 06081 Backup data error. Printer
• If the backup data cannot be read to the laser control PCB from the • ☞ No. 06194 Laser Control PCB control error.
printer I/F main PCB
• If data on the printer I/F main PCB has problems • ☞ No. 06931 Backup data error. Printer I/F Main
PCB
NOTE
• If the backup data of each control PCB is abnormal, backup data is written to each control PCB from the printer I/F main PCB
after Backup data error is displayed.
• Since the laser control does not maintain the backup data, they are written from the printer I/F main PCB everytime the power
supply is turned on.
• After writing the backup data, the exposure engine will be controlled.
50500 1/2
50500
9. If the colorimeter is attached, confirm the connection status between the processor control PCB and
colorimeter.
If there was a communication error between the processor control PCB and colorimeter.
• ☞ No. 06903-00002
10. The laser control PCB checks conditions of the G laser driver and laser unit.
If the condition of G laser driver was abnormal

• ☞ No. 06075 G Laser control error.
If the condition of the laser unit was abnormal
• ☞ No. 06073 Synchronous Sensor error.
• ☞ No. 06076 Polygon Mirror control error.
11. Controls the exposure engine.

The system starts adjusting the laser unit temperature.
• Temperature control started → Temperature control completed is displayed for Laser temperature control status of
Status Display.
12. When Laser temperature control status of Status Display turns Temperature control started →
Temperature control completed, the laser control PCB checks the light source state of the laser unit.
If the light source state of the laser unit was abnormal

• ☞ No. 06106 G Laser light source status error.
13. The process for starting the Printer/Processor software completes.
14. The temperature adjustment of the processing solutions is completed.
15. Temperature adjustment of the laser unit is completed.
16. The system displays an attention/error message if any.
50500 2/2
50520
ARCNET communication
ARCNET communication
ARCNET communication flow
Order of the ARCNET communication

3 Laser control PCB
ARCNET (Connector emission side)
ARCNET (Connector detection side)
Printer control PCB
Processor control PCB Laser control PCB
J/P224 J/P221 J/P222

J/P219
J/P223 J/P220 J/P1516 J/P1517
J/P518 J/P517
ARCNET ARCNET
LVPECL
J/P232
J/P233
LAN
J/P32
USB
ATX MOTHER
AFC/scanner control PCB BORD
G085220
IMPORTANT
• ARCNET communication figure appears above. You can connect the ARCNET cable to any port if IN/OUT is correct.
The actual connecting position of the ARCNET cable may be different from the above ARCNET communication figure.
! Order of the ARCNET communication

No. Order of the ARCNET communication No. Order of the ARCNET communication
1 Processor control PCB 3 Laser control PCB
50520 1/1
50700
Data flow
Data flow
Data flow in printing
Print data AFC/scanner control PCB
Actual scanning data
Prescanning data
Data coming from the media drive

USB
Media drive
Laser unit
ATX MOTHER
BORD
R laser
Bl
ase
HDD
r G-AOM
driver
G
la
se
r
LAN
Laser control PCB
LVPECL
G085221
! Input of this system operation is film scanning operation and output is printing
operation.
1. When input is film, scan the film in the scanner unit.

NOTE
• The scanner unit corrects the gap in the sub-scanning direction (pixel gap of CCD of RGB).
2. The image is processed with the EZ Controller.
IMPORTANT
• Scratch erasing is performed by DIGITAL ICE Technology Correction.
NOTE
• Image correction of actual scanning data such as color and density correction, DSA, and image rotation are performed on
with the EZ Controller.
• Image data editing such as frame combination, front print combination and paper fitting is performed with the EZ
Controller.
• The pre-scanned data of the scanner is transferred to the EZ Controller and displayed on the PJP monitor and printed on
index prints.
• The data sent from a media drive as well as the processing method of data of coming from a film is printed via the HDD.
3. The image data is output to the laser engine through the printer I/F main PCB → laser control PCB.
4. The laser engine exposes the paper.
50700 1/1
50710
Data flow
Data flow
Laser unit
R laser
Bl
ase
r G-AOM Note
driver
G
la
se • LUT and Correction Data for Brightness of the
r
Edge of Image Field are loaded to the laser
control PCB when the power supply is on.
A/D converter
Laser control PCB

Buffer (up to 192 MB)
LVPECL (Transfers the RAW file.)
Buffer Flash memory
• Up to 4 MB • LUT
• Correction Data for Brightness of the Edge of
Image Field
LAN (8 bit) [Transfers the RAW file.]
PC Printer profile
Scanner (PIC) or (EZ Controller) FRONTIER-Printer

• Scanning data • CMS process • CMS process
• Cropping process • Rotation
• Enlarging/reducing images • Cropping process
• Combining images
QSS-Printer software
Input Media
• Image data
Note
• On the FRONTIER-Printer, CMS process, rotation of images, and cropping process are performed
only when instructed by PIC.
G085222
50710 1/1
55000
Paper path diagram
Paper path diagram
Paper path diagram
The following diagram shows the paper advance path in the printer by dotted lines.
Exposure advance unit Paper advance unit 1 Arm unit 2 Paper advance unit 2
Paper magazine A2

Laser unit
CVP unit
Paper cutter unit
Arm unit 1
Paper magazine B
Paper magazine C
Paper magazine A Paper supply unit A Paper supply unit
G068369
The following diagram shows the paper advance path in the processor by dotted lines.
Print conveyor unit
No. 1 upper guide
Dryer rack
Processing tanks and processing

racks
G085225
55000 1/1
55100
Paper advance operation
Paper loading operation (the paper advance length is 113.5 mm or less)
• This section explains how the paper is advanced to the exposure advance unit by arm unit 1 since the paper is loaded.
• The advance operation (paper loading operation) varies depending on the paper advance length.
Reference
• When the paper advance length is 113.5 mm ☞ 55100 • When the paper advance length is 165.6 mm ☞ 55120
or less or more
• When the paper advance length is between ☞ 55110
113.6 mm and 165.5 mm
! When the paper advance length is 113.5 mm or less

Pressure release motor A2 Paper supply motor A2
Paper end sensor A2
Paper advance motor 1

Paper magazine motor A2
Paper magazine B
Paper end sensor B
Paper magazine A2 Paper magazine motor B
Width change motor
A2 Paper supply motor B/C
Paper end sensor C
Paper magazine A

Paper magazine motor A
Paper supply motor A

Paper magazine motor C
Paper end sensor A
Paper magazine C
Note: The thick solid line indicates the paper.
G068487
1. Paper loading starts.
Paper magazines A, B and C

Goes to Step 8.
Paper magazine A2
Goes to Step 2.
2. The paper guide in the paper supply unit A2 moves.

• Width change motor A2: ON/OFF
55100 1/4
55100
When the paper guide is on the home position

• It moves to the paper width of paper to be processed.
When the paper guide is at the different position from the paper width of paper to be processed
• The paper guide returns to the home position, and then it moves to the paper width of paper to be loaded.
When the paper width of paper to be loaded and that of paper processed just before it are same
• Goes to Step 3.
When the paper guide does not operate
• ☞ No. 06200-00001
3. Advance roller A2 is pressured.

• Pressure release motor A2: ON
When the pressure release motor does not operate
• ☞ No. 06199-00001
4. The paper is advanced.

• Paper magazine motor A2: ON
• Paper supply motor A/A2: ON
5. The paper passes through the paper end sensor.
When the paper end sensor A2 cannot detect any paper

• ☞ No. 06195-00001
• ☞ No. 06230-00001
6. Specified length of paper is advanced until the paper edge reaches just before the advance roller A.
• Paper magazine motor A2: OFF
• Paper supply motor A/A2: OFF
7. The advance roller A2 repeats the pressure release/pressure twice.

• ☞ No. 06199-00001

• Paper magazine motor A/A2/B/C: ON
• Paper supply motor A/A2/B/C: ON
Goes to Step 9.
Paper magazine A2
Goes to Step 10.
55100 2/4
55100
When paper end sensors A/B/C cannot detect the paper

Paper end sensor A Paper end sensor B
• ☞ No. 06012-00001 • ☞ No. 06013-00001
Paper did not load. Paper Magazine A Paper did not load. Paper Magazine B
• ☞ No. 06201-00001 • ☞ No. 06228-00001
• ☞ No. 06227-00001
• ☞ No. 06231-00001
• ☞ No. 06013-00001
• ☞ No. 06112-00001
Paper end sensor C

• ☞ No. 06112-00001 • ☞ No. 06229-00001
Could not load the paper. Paper Magazine C Could not load the paper. Paper Magazine C
10. The paper passes through the paper loading sensor.
When paper loading sensors A/A2/B/C cannot detect the paper

• ☞ No. 06012-00002
• ☞ No. 06201-00002
• ☞ No. 06195-00002
• ☞ No. 06013-00002
• ☞ No. 06012-00002
Goes to Step 12.
Paper magazine A2
Goes to Step 11.
11. The pressure of the advance roller A2 is released.

• ☞ No. 06199-00002
12. Condition is confirmed.
Loading for the first time after turning on the power supply or open/close the printer door
Goes to Step 13.
55100 3/4
55100
Conditions other than above

Goes to Step 14.
13. Performs magazine initial operation.

Magazine initial operation is the operation that rewind the paper until the paper end sensor is not detected, and next advance
the paper to the position where it passed through the paper loading sensor again.
• Paper magazine motor A/B/C: ON/OFF
• Paper supply motor A/B/C: ON/OFF
If paper end sensor A/A2/B/C cannot detect the papers in rewinding paper and in re-advancing, and if
paper loading sensor cannot detect the papers in re-advancing
• ☞ No. 06012-00002
• ☞ No. 06201-00002
• ☞ No. 06013-00002
• ☞ No. 06012-00002
14. The paper is advanced for the paper length.

• Paper magazine motor A/A2/B/C: ON/OFF
• Paper supply motor A/A2/B/C: ON/OFF
• Paper advance motor 1: ON/OFF
IMPORTANT
• Arm unit 1 advances the paper at the same speed of loading.
☞ 55200
15. The paper is cut.

• Cut motor: ON/OFF
When cutting is not completed:
• ☞ No. 06016-00001
16. Paper is advanced to Arm unit 1 receiving position.

When arm unit 1 is not on standby in receiving position
• The paper stays at the paper standby position until arm unit 1 comes down to its receiving position.
17. Loading and cutting are completed.
55100 4/4
55110
Paper loading operation (the paper advance length is between 113.6 mm

and 165.5 mm)
Reference
or less or more
113.6 mm and 165.5 mm
! When the paper advance length is between 113.6 mm and 165.5 mm

Pressure release motor Paper supply motor A2
Paper end sensor A2 A2

Paper magazine B
Paper end sensor B
Width change motor

Paper supply motor B/C
A2
Paper end sensor C
Paper magazine A


Paper end sensor A
Paper magazine C
G068488
IMPORTANT
• Step 1 to Step 13 is common regardless of the paper advance length.

Goes to Step 8.
Paper magazine A2
Goes to Step 2.
55110 1/4
55110

• Goes to Step 3.
• ☞ No. 06200-00001

• ☞ No. 06199-00001

• ☞ No. 06195-00001
• ☞ No. 06230-00001

• ☞ No. 06199-00001

Goes to Step 9.
55110 2/4
55110
Paper magazine A2
Goes to Step 10.

• ☞ No. 06012-00001 • ☞ No. 06013-00001
• ☞ No. 06201-00001 • ☞ No. 06228-00001
• ☞ No. 06227-00001
• ☞ No. 06231-00001
• ☞ No. 06013-00001
• ☞ No. 06112-00001
Paper end sensor C

• ☞ No. 06112-00001 • ☞ No. 06229-00001

• ☞ No. 06012-00002
• ☞ No. 06201-00002
• ☞ No. 06195-00002
• ☞ No. 06013-00002
• ☞ No. 06012-00002
Goes to Step 12.
Paper magazine A2
Goes to Step 11.

• ☞ No. 06199-00002
Goes to Step 13.
55110 3/4
55110

Goes to Step 14.

• ☞ No. 06012-00002
• ☞ No. 06201-00002
• ☞ No. 06013-00002
• ☞ No. 06012-00002

• Paper advance motor 1: ON

IMPORTANT
☞ 55200

• ☞ No. 06016-00001
17. Loading and cutting are completed.
55110 4/4
55120
Paper loading operation (the paper advance length is 165.6 mm or more)
Reference
or less or more
113.6 mm and 165.5 mm
! When the paper advance length is 165.6 mm or more
Pressure release motor Paper supply motor A2

Paper end sensor A2
A2

Paper magazine B
Paper end sensor B
Paper magazine motor B

Paper magazine A2
Width change motor Paper supply motor B/C
A2
Paper end sensor C
Paper magazine A


Paper end sensor A
Paper magazine C
G068489
IMPORTANT
• Step 1 to Step 13 is common regardless of the paper advance length.

Goes to Step 8.
Paper magazine A2
Goes to Step 2.
55120 1/4
55120

• Goes to Step 3.
• ☞ No. 06200-00001

• ☞ No. 06199-00001

• ☞ No. 06195-00001
• ☞ No. 06230-00001

• ☞ No. 06199-00001

Goes to Step 9.
55120 2/4
55120
Paper magazine A2
Goes to Step 10.

• ☞ No. 06012-00001 • ☞ No. 06013-00001
• ☞ No. 06201-00001 • ☞ No. 06228-00001
• ☞ No. 06227-00001
• ☞ No. 06231-00001
• ☞ No. 06013-00001
• ☞ No. 06112-00001
Paper end sensor C

• ☞ No. 06112-00001 • ☞ No. 06229-00001

• ☞ No. 06012-00002
• ☞ No. 06201-00002
• ☞ No. 06195-00002
• ☞ No. 06013-00002
• ☞ No. 06012-00002
Goes to Step 12.
Paper magazine A2
Goes to Step 11.

• ☞ No. 06199-00002
Goes to Step 13.
55120 3/4
55120

Goes to Step 14.

• ☞ No. 06012-00002
• ☞ No. 06201-00002
• ☞ No. 06013-00002
• ☞ No. 06012-00002

15. The loading is completed.
IMPORTANT
• If the paper advance length is 165.6 mm and more, paper cut operation is performed in paper supply
operation (arm unit 1 operation).
☞ 55200
55120 4/4
55200
Paper supply unit operation (the paper advance length is 165.5 mm or less)
• This section explains how arm unit 1 of the paper supply unit advances the loaded paper to the exposure advance unit.
• The advance operation (paper supply unit operation) varies depending on the paper advance length.
Reference
• When the paper advance length is 165.5 mm ☞ 55200 • When the paper advance length is between ☞ 55220
or less 395.6 mm and 466.5 mm
• When the paper advance length is between ☞ 55210 • When the paper advance length is 466.6 mm ☞ 55230
165.6 mm and 392.5 mm or more
1. Arm unit 1 pressures the loaded paper.

• Paper hold motor: ON (pressured)/OFF
When the paper hold sensor does not turn dark:
• ☞ No. 06101-00001

Paper hold sensor
Paper hold motor
G068490
2. Arm unit 1 advances paper to the exposure advance unit.

• Paper supply arm motors (right and left): ON (forward)/OFF
• Paper magazine motor A/A2/B/C: OFF
• Paper supply motor A/A2/B/C: OFF
When zigzagging correction sensors (right and left) do not turn dark:
• ☞ No. 06135-00001
IMPORTANT
• Arm unit 1 advances the paper at the same speed of loading until the paper passes through the paper
advance rollers.
55200 1/3
55200
Paper supply arm motor (right or left)

Paper supply motor A2
Paper magazine motor A2 Zigzagging correction sensor (right or left)
Paper magazine B

Paper magazine A2
Paper magazine A

Note: The thick solid line indicates the paper. Paper magazine C
G068491
3. The zigzag correction is performed.

• Paper supply arm motors (right and left): ON/OFF
NOTE
• The zigzag correction is performed after paper advance operation stops.
4. The paper is transferred to the exposure advance unit, and then arm unit 1 releases pressure.
• Paper hold motor: ON (released)/OFF
When the paper hold sensor does not turn light:
• ☞ No. 06101-00002
55200 2/3
55200
Paper hold sensor
Paper hold motor
G068492
5. Arm unit 1 moves to the paper receiving standby position.

• Paper supply arm motors (right and left): ON (reverse)/OFF
When zigzagging correction sensors (right and left) do not turn light:
• ☞ No. 06135-00002
Zigzagging correction sensor (right or left)

G068493
55200 3/3
55210
Paper supply unit operation (the paper advance length is between 165.6
mm and 392.5 mm)
Reference

• ☞ No. 06101-00001
Paper hold sensor
Paper hold motor
G068494
2. Arm unit 1 and the paper are advanced for the paper length.
IMPORTANT
55210 1/5
55210

Paper magazine B
Paper magazine A

G068495

• ☞ No. 06016-00001
Cut motor
Cut end sensor
Cut home sensor

G068496
55210 2/5
55210

• ☞ No. 06135-00001
IMPORTANT
• Arm unit 1 carries the paper at the same speed of the paper advance rollers until the paper passes through
the paper advance rollers.
Paper supply motor A2 Paper supply arm motor (right or left)

Paper magazine B
Paper magazine A

G068497

NOTE
6. When the paper advance length is 300 mm or more, paper supply pressure is released.
• Paper supply pressure change motor: ON (released)/OFF
When the paper supply pressure change sensor does not turn dark:
• ☞ No. 06134-00002
55210 3/5
55210
Paper supply pressure change motor
G068498
7. The paper is transferred to the exposure advance unit, and then arm unit 1 releases pressure.
• ☞ No. 06101-00002
Paper hold sensor
Paper hold motor
G068499
55210 4/5
55210
8. Arm unit 1 moves to the paper receiving standby position.

• ☞ No. 06135-00002
G068500
55210 5/5
55220
Paper supply unit operation (the paper advance length is between 395.6
mm and 466.5 mm)
Reference

• ☞ No. 06101-00001
Paper hold sensor
Paper hold motor
G068494

• ☞ No. 06135-00001
55220 1/6
55220
IMPORTANT

Paper magazine motor

A2 Zigzagging correction sensor (right or left)
Paper magazine B
Paper magazine A2
Paper magazine A

G069826

NOTE

IMPORTANT
• The machine makes a loop in the paper supply unit to adjust advance speeds of exposure advance operation
and paper supply operation.
55220 2/6
55220

Paper magazine motor Zigzagging correction sensor (right or left)

A2
Paper magazine B
Paper magazine A2
Paper magazine A
G069827

• ☞ No. 06016-00001
55220 3/6
55220
Cut motor
Cut end sensor
Cut home sensor

G069828
6. The paper is transferred to the exposure advance unit, and then paper supply pressure is released.
• ☞ No. 06134-00002
G069829
55220 4/6
55220
7. Arm unit 1 releases pressure.

• ☞ No. 06101-00002
Paper hold sensor
Paper hold motor
G069830
8. When the exposure start sensor turned light from dark, arm unit 1 moves to the paper receiving
standby position.

• ☞ No. 06135-00002
When the exposure start sensor does not turn light:
• ☞ No. 06209-00001
55220 5/6
55220
G068500
55220 6/6
55230
Paper supply unit operation (the paper advance length is 466.6 mm or

more)
Reference

• ☞ No. 06101-00001
Paper hold sensor
Paper hold motor
G068494

• ☞ No. 06135-00001
IMPORTANT
55230 1/5
55230


A2
Paper magazine B
Paper magazine A2
Paper magazine A
G069826

NOTE
4. The paper is transferred to the exposure advance unit, and then arm unit 1 releases pressure. The
system starts loop control and advances the paper for the paper length.

IMPORTANT
• The machine makes a loop in the paper supply unit to adjust advance speeds of exposure advance operation
and paper supply operation.
• ☞ No. 06101-00002
55230 2/5
55230


A2 Paper hold sensor
Paper hold motor
Paper magazine B
Paper magazine A2
Paper magazine A
G069965

• ☞ No. 06016-00001
55230 3/5
55230
Cut motor
Cut end sensor
Cut home sensor

G069966
6. Paper supply pressure is released.

• ☞ No. 06134-00001
G069967
55230 4/5
55230
7. When the exposure start sensor turned light from dark, arm unit 1 moves to the paper receiving
standby position.

• ☞ No. 06135-00002
When the exposure start sensor does not turn light:
• ☞ No. 06209-00001
G068500
55230 5/5
55300
Exposure advance operation
This section explains the paper advance operation via the exposure advance unit during exposure.
! Flowchart
1. The paper is transferred from arm unit 1.
The status of the exposure advance unit is as follows.

• Exposure advance pressure change motor 1: ON (released)/OFF
• Exposure advance pressure change motor 2: ON (inlet pressure released)/OFF
• Exposure advance pressure change motor 3: ON (exit pressured)/OFF
2. The paper is exposed and advanced.

• Exposure advance pressure change motor 1: ON (pressure)/OFF
• Exposure advance motors 1 and 2: ON
Exposure advance motor 2
Exposure advance pressure change motor 1
G077211
3. The paper leading end is advanced for the specific length from the exposure advance inlet roller.
• Exposure advance pressure change motor 2: ON (inlet pressure)/OFF
• Exposure advance pressure change motor 3: ON (exit pressure released)/OFF
If exposure advance pressure does not change
• ☞ No. 06137-00001
• ☞ No. 06186-00001
55300 1/4
55300
Exposure advance inlet roller
G077212
4. The paper leading end is advanced for the another specific length from the exposure advance inlet
roller.
• Exposure advance pressure change motor 1: ON (released)/OFF
• Exposure advance motor 1: OFF
If exposure advance pressure does not change
• ☞ No. 06136-00001
Exposure starting
position
Exposure advance pressure change

motor 1
G077212
5. The paper is advanced to the exposure position.

• The laser emission is started.
6. The paper leading end is advanced for the specific length from the exposure advance exit roller.
• Exposure advance pressure change motor 3: ON (exit pressured)/OFF
If exposure advance pressure cannot be changed
• ☞ No. 06186-00002
55300 2/4
55300

Exposure advance exit roller

motor 3
G077213
7. The paper rear end is advanced to the position a specified distance away from the front of the
exposure advance inlet roller.
• Exposure advance pressure change motor 2: ON (inlet pressure slightly released)/OFF

☞ No. 06137-00002
•

motor 2
G077214
8. The paper rear end is advanced to the position another specified distance away from the front of the
exposure advance inlet roller.
• Exposure advance pressure change motor 2: ON (inlet pressure released)/OFF

• ☞ No. 06137-00002
55300 3/4
55300
Exposure advance inlet roller

motor 2
G077215
55300 4/4
55400
Paper advance unit 1 operation (the paper width is 254.0 mm or less)
• This section explains how the paper goes through the paper advance unit 1.
• Paper advance operation (paper advance unit 1 operation) varies depending on the paper advance length.
Reference
1. Paper is advanced to paper advance unit 1.
2. The paper leading end passes 15 mm before the advance inlet roller.
3. Paper advance unit 1 releases the pressure.

• Pressure guide motor: ON (released)/OFF
Pressure guide motor
G069836
4. The paper rear end passed the exposure center by 2 mm.
5. When paper advance unit 1 pressures the paper, the paper advance motor 2 starts working to
advance the paper.
• Pressure guide motor: ON (pressured)/OFF

55400 1/2
55400

G069837
6. Paper advance motor 2 changes its speed to high speed.
7. After paper advance motor 2 stops, paper advance unit 1 releases pressure.
• Paper advance motor 2: OFF
G069838
55400 2/2
55410
Paper advance unit 1 operation (the paper width is between 254.1 mm and
457.0 mm)
Reference

G069836
advance the paper at the exposure speed.

55410 1/4
55410
G069837
6. Paper advance motor 2 stops.


G069838

55410 2/4
55410
G069836

G069836

55410 3/4
55410

G069837
6. The paper rear end passed 130 mm from the exposure advance exit roller.

G069838
8. After pressure of paper advance unit 1 is released completely, paper advance motor 2 stops.
55410 4/4
55420
Paper advance unit 1 operation (the paper width is between 457.1 mm and
528.0 mm)
Reference

G069836
55420 1/1
55430
Paper advance unit 1 operation (the paper advance length is 528.1 mm or

more)
Reference

G069836

55430 1/2
55430

G069837
6. The paper rear end passed 130 mm from the exposure advance exit roller.

G069838
8. After pressure of paper advance unit 1 is released completely, paper advance motor 2 stops.
55430 2/2
55500
Paper advance unit 2 operation (the paper width of 152.0 mm or less and
the advance length of 178.0 mm or less)
• Paper advance operation (paper advance unit 2 operation) varies depending on the paper width and the paper advance length.
Reference
• Paper with the width of 152.0 mm or less and ☞ 55500 • Paper with the width of 152.0 mm or less and ☞ 55520
the advance length of 178.0 mm or less the advance length of 305.1 mm or more
• Paper with the width of 152.0 mm or less and ☞ 55510 • The paper width is 165.0 mm or more. ☞ 55530
the advance length between 178.1 and 305.0
mm
Paper advance pressure change sensor (left)
Lane select motor (left)
Lane select sensor (left)
Arm sensor (right)

Paper advance arm motor (left)

Paper advance pressure change motor (right)
Arm sensor (right)

Paper advance arm motor (right)
Lane select sensor (right)
Lane select motor (right)
Paper advance pressure change sensor (right)
G069962
! Paper with the width of 152.0 mm or less and the advance length of 178.0 mm or less
1. Paper is advanced from paper advance unit 1.
55500 1/6
55500
2. Arm units 2 (right) (left) moves to paper advance unit 1. Arm unit 2 (left) moves to its standby position
and arm unit 2 (right) moves to its paper receiving position.
• Lane select motors (right) (left): ON/OFF

• Paper advance arm motors (right) (left): ON/OFF
If the arm sensors (right) (left) do not turn DARK
• ☞ No. 06138-00001
• ☞ No. 06139-00001
If the lane select sensor (left) does not turn DARK
• ☞ No. 06140-00001
If the lane select sensor (right) does not turn LIGHT
• ☞ No. 06141-00002
G069839
3. Paper is advanced to arm unit 2 (right).
4. Arm unit 2 (right) pressures the paper.

• Paper advance pressure change motor (right): ON (pressured)/OFF
If the paper advance pressure change sensor (right) does not turn DARK
• ☞ No. 06143-00001
55500 2/6
55500
G069841
5. Arm unit 2 (right) moves to the processor loading unit.

• Lane select motor (right): ON/OFF
• Paper advance arm motor (right): ON/OFF
If the arm sensor (right) does not turn LIGHT
• ☞ No. 06139-00002
G069842
6. Arm unit 2 (right) releases pressure.

• Paper advance pressure change motor (right) :ON (released)/OFF
If the paper advance pressure change sensor (right) does not turn LIGHT
• ☞ No. 06143-00002
55500 3/6
55500
G069843
7. Arm unit 2 (left) moves to paper receiving position of paper advance unit 1.
• Lane select motor (left): ON/OFF
If land select sensor (left) does not turn LIGHT
• ☞ No. 06140-00002
G069844
8. Paper is advanced to arm unit 2 (left).
9. Arm unit 2 (left) pressures the paper.

• Paper advance pressure change motor (left): ON (pressured)/OFF
If the paper advance pressure change sensor (left) does not turn DARK
• ☞ No. 06142-00001
55500 4/6
55500
G069845
10. Arm unit 2 (left) moves to the processor loading unit and arm unit 2 (right) moves to the paper
receiving position of the paper advance unit 1.

If the arm sensor (left) does not turn LIGHT
• ☞ No. 06138-00002
If the arm sensor (right) does not turn DARK
• ☞ No. 06139-00001
G069944
11. Arm unit 2 (left) releases pressure.

• Paper advance pressure change motor (left) :ON (released)/OFF
If the paper advance pressure change sensor (left) does not turn LIGHT
• ☞ No. 06142-00002
55500 5/6
55500
G069945
55500 6/6
55510
Paper advance unit 2 operation (the paper with the width is 152.0 or less
and the advance length between 178.1 to 305.0 mm)
Reference
mm
Arm sensor (right)


Arm sensor (right)

G069962
! Paper with the width of 152.0 mm or less and the advance length between 178.1 and
305.0 mm
55510 1/6
55510
2. Arm units 2 (right) (left) moves to paper advance unit 1. Arm unit 2 (left) moves to its standby position
and arm unit 2 (right) moves to its paper receiving position.

• ☞ No. 06138-00001
• ☞ No. 06139-00001
• ☞ No. 06140-00001
• ☞ No. 06141-00002
G069839

• ☞ No. 06143-00001
55510 2/6
55510
G069841
5. Arm unit 2 (right) moves to the paper advance standby position.

• Lane select motor (right): ON/OFF
• ☞ No. 06139-00002
If the lane select sensor (right) does not turn DARK
• ☞ No. 06141-00001
G069946
6. Arm unit 2 (left) moves to paper receiving position of paper advance unit 1.
• Lane select motor (left): ON/OFF
• Paper advance arm motor (left): ON/OFF
If land select sensor (left) does not turn LIGHT
• ☞ No. 06140-00002
55510 3/6
55510
G069947
7. Paper is advanced to arm unit 2 (left).
8. Arm unit 2 (left) pressures the paper.
• Paper advance pressure change motor (left): ON (pressured)/OFF
If the paper advance pressure change sensor (left) does not turn DARK
• ☞ No. 06142-00001
G069949
9. Arm unit 2 (left) moves to the paper advance standby position.

• Paper advance arm motor (left): ON/OFF
If the arm sensor (left) does not turn LIGHT
• ☞ No. 06138-00002
55510 4/6
55510
G069950
10. Arm units 2 (right) (left) move to the processor loading unit.
• ☞ No. 06141-00002
G069951
11. Arm units 2 (right, left) release the pressure.

• Paper advance pressure change motors (right) (left): ON (released)/OFF
If the paper advance pressure change sensors (right) (left) do not turn LIGHT
• ☞ No. 06142-00002
• ☞ No. 06143-00002
55510 5/6
55510
G069952
12. Arm units 2 (right) (left) move to paper advance unit 1. Arm unit 2 (right) moves to its paper receiving
position.
• ☞ No. 06138-00001
• ☞ No. 06139-00001
• ☞ No. 06140-00001
• ☞ No. 06141-00002
G069970
55510 6/6
55520
Paper advance unit 2 operation (the paper with the width is 152.0 or less
and the advance length of 305.1 mm or more)
Reference
mm
Arm sensor (right)


Arm sensor (right)

G069962
! Paper with the width of 152.0 mm or less and the advance length of 305.1 mm or
more
55520 1/4
55520
2. Arm units 2 (right) (left) move to paper advance unit 1. Arm unit 2 (right) moves to its paper receiving
position.

• ☞ No. 06138-00001
• ☞ No. 06139-00001
• ☞ No. 06140-00001
• ☞ No. 06141-00002
G069839

IMPORTANT
• Arm unit 2 advances the paper at the same speed of exposure speed without pressuring the paper.
• It pressures the paper after exposure.
• ☞ No. 06143-00001
55520 2/4
55520
G069971
5. Arm unit 2 (right) moves to the processor loading unit.

• ☞ No. 06139-00002
G069953
6. Arm unit 2 (right) releases pressure.

• Paper advance pressure change motor (right) :ON (released)/OFF
If the paper advance pressure change sensor (right) does not turn LIGHT
• ☞ No. 06143-00002
55520 3/4
55520
G069954
7. Arm unit 2 (right) moves to the paper receiving position.

If the arm sensor (right) does not turn DARK
• ☞ No. 06139-00001
G069955
55520 4/4
55530
Paper advance unit 2 operation (the paper width is 165.0 mm or more)
Reference
mm
Arm sensor (right)


Arm sensor (right)

G069962
! The paper width is 165.0 mm or more.
2. Arm units 2 (right) (left) move to the paper receiving position.

55530 1/4
55530

• ☞ No. 06138-00001
• ☞ No. 06139-00001
G069956
3. The paper is advanced to arm units 2 (right) (left).
4. Arm units 2 (right) (left) pressure the paper.

• Paper advance pressure change motors (right) (left): ON (pressured)/OFF
If the paper advance pressure change sensors (right) (left) do not turn DARK
• ☞ No. 06142-00001
• ☞ No. 06143-00001
G069958
55530 2/4
55530
5. Arm units 2 (right) (left) move to the processor loading unit.

If the arm sensors (right) (left) do not turn light
• ☞ No. 06138-00002
• ☞ No. 06139-00002
G069959
6. Arm units 2 (right, left) release the pressure.

• Paper advance pressure change motors (right) (left): ON (released)/OFF
If the paper advance pressure change sensors (right) (left) do not turn LIGHT
• ☞ No. 06142-00002
• ☞ No. 06143-00002
55530 3/4
55530
G069960
7. Arm units 2 (right) (left) move to the paper receiving position.

• ☞ No. 06138-00001
• ☞ No. 06139-00001
G069961
55530 4/4
55600
Paper rewind operation
This section explains how the paper is rewound.

Paper rewind conditions
• The paper is changed to the paper in another paper magazine from the paper which is being loaded from the paper magazine.
• No operation is made for a specified time with the paper loaded.
• Rewind Paper is selected.
• The paper end sensor is detecting the paper when the power supply is turned on.
• When an error occurs
• After paper magazine replacement, the interlock switch (printer door) is detected.
! Flowchart
1. Paper rewind operation starts.

• Paper magazine motor A/A2/B/C: ON (reverse)
• Paper supply motor A/A2/B/C: ON (reverse)
2. The paper leading end passed through the paper loading sensor.
When the paper loading sensor does not detect the paper leading end
• ☞ No. 06014-00001
• ☞ No. 06202-00001
• ☞ No. 06015-00001
• ☞ No. 06113-00001
• ☞ No. 06196-00001
3. The paper leading end passed through the paper end sensor.
When the paper end sensor does not detect the paper leading end
• ☞ No. 06014-00002
• ☞ No. 06202-00002
• ☞ No. 06015-00002
• ☞ No. 06113-00002
• ☞ No. 06196-00002
4. Stop the paper in the magazine.

• Paper magazine motor A/A2/B/C: OFF
5. Paper rewind operation is completed.
55600 1/1
55700
Paper splice detection operation
This section explains operations performed when the loading sensor detects a paper splice during printing process.
Splice (hole) detection condition
Splice hole
Paper loading sensor (SE7)
Splice
Paper cutters
Y X
Cut prohibited area (228.1 mm) Exposable area
G074573
• X = Paper length out the paper cutter
• Y = Paper length between the leading end of the cut prohibited area and the cutters
! Operation outline:
! Condition 1: When the loading sensor detects a splice (hole) and the length of the exposable area is
the print advance length or longer (X + Y = Print advance length, or X + Y is longer than the print advance
length)
1. Loads the paper so that X is the same as the print advance length and cuts it, then performs printing
operation.
2. Loads the splice and cuts it, then feeds the paper to the processor.
(Splice length = Cut prohibited area + Y mm)
! Condition 2: When detecting a splice section (hole) with the loading sensor and the dimension of the
exposure capable area is less than the print advance length (Print advance length is longer than X + Y)
1. Loads the splice and cuts it, then feeds the paper to the processor.
(Splice length = Cut prohibited area + X + Y mm)
55700 1/1
55800
Paper end operation
This section explains the operation of paper end.
! Flowchart
1. Paper is being processed.
2. The paper rear end passed through the paper end sensor.
When printable area is longer than the print setting advance length at the detection of the paper end.
• Proceed the operation.
When the length of printable + exposable area is shorter than the rest of print length at the detection of
paper end.
• The paper is not cut and the machine performs Step 5.
When the paper is in exposure and the length of printable + exposable area is equal to or longer than
the rest of the print length at the detection of paper end.
• Proceed the operation.
When the paper is in exposure and the length of printable + exposable area is shorter than the rest of
print length at the detection of paper end.
• The operation goes on but the print need to be made again.
Paper end sensor Paper cut position
Exposable area Printable area
30 mm
Cut-forbidden area
Lane A: 198 mm
Lane A2: 198 mm
Lane B: 174.9 mm
Lane C: 174.9 mm
G058720
3. The paper is advanced to the cut position.
4. Paper cut ☞ 55100☞ 55200
5. Advance all the paper to the exposure section.
6. The paper end processing is complete.
Error
• No. 01000, No. 01085, No. 01103, No. 01107 • No. 01001
The Paper Magazine is out of paper. Paper Magazine A The Paper Magazine is out of paper. Paper Magazine B
55800 1/2
55800
Error
• No. 01083, No. 01106 • No. 01052, No. 01105
The Paper Magazine is out of paper. Paper Magazine A2 The Paper Magazine is out of paper. Paper Magazine C
55800 2/2
55900
Fogged paper operation
This section explains the fogged paper processing operation.

Condition of fogged paper processing operation
• The printer door is opened while the printer or paper is being loaded.
• The printer top cover is opened with printer door closes.
! Flow chart (when the printer door is opened)
1. Close printer doors 1, 2, 3, and 4.
2. The paper end sensor checks if there is any paper.
If the paper end sensor detects paper

• The system rewinds the paper and perform Step 4.
If the paper end sensor does not detect any paper
• No. 01002, No. 01086: Would you like to feed the leading edge of paper? Paper Magazine A
• No. 01003: Would you like to feed the leading edge of paper? Paper Magazine B
• No. 01053: Would you like to feed the leading edge of paper? Paper Magazine C
• No. 01084: Would you like to feed the leading edge of paper? Paper Magazine A2
• Selecting Yes advances the paper by 100 mm.
• If No is selected, fogged paper operation is ended.
3. The paper loading operation starts.
4. The paper is advanced to the cut position.
For the triple magazine unit For the quad magazine unit
• For magazine B or C, the paper is advanced by 100 mm. • For magazine A, A2, B or C, the paper is advanced by 100
• For magazine A, the paper is advanced by 120 mm. mm.
A2
B B
A A
C C
• If neither the triple magazine unit nor quad magazine unit is installed, the paper of magazine B or C is advanced by 100
mm.
5. Paper cut ☞ 55100☞ 55200
55900 1/2
55900
6. The paper is advanced to the exposure section.
7. The fogged paper processing is complete.
55900 2/2
56100
Processor paper advance operation
Paper advance operation of the processor (normal prints)
This section explains the process that begins with the normal print paper entering the processor and ends with it being output to either the
print conveyor unit or the print receiving tray (large). It is a precondition that the temperature adjustment of the processing solution is
completed.
Paper advance operation of setup print varies normal print operation.
1. The processor enters the following states when the paper is loaded. ☞ 55100
• Processor drive motor: ON
• Dryer fan: ON
• Dryer heater: ON
2. The back edge of the paper passes through paper sensor 2 (left, center, right), which is located in the
processor loading unit.
Print conveyor unit

Print receiving tray (large)

Paper sensors 2 (left, center and right)
Position A
Normal Print
Setup print
G085226
3. When the paper leading edge passes position A in the above figure, the process signal is transmitted to
the processor by the printer.
• The following data are transmitted to the processor by the printer.
Transmission data list

1 Information of paper advance length 5 Information of print counts
2 Information of paper width 6 Information of paper advance position
3 Information of paper surface 7 Information of paper lane
4 Order information 8 Information of splice
4. Paper arrives at the dryer rack.

• The paper advance procedures listed below vary depending on print paper width and advance length.
Paper width Advance length Paper advance procedure references

• Between 82.5 and 152 mm • Between 82.5 and 305 mm ☞ Paper output to the print conveyor unit
56100 1/4
56100
Paper width Advance length Paper advance procedure references

• Between 82.5 and 305 mm • Between 305.1 and 457.2 mm ☞ Paper sent to the print receiving tray (large)/long
• Between 152.1 and 305 mm • Between 82.5 and 305 mm length print tray:
• Between 27.1 and 305 mm • Between 457.3 and 914 mm
NOTE
• The printer examines print size to determine whether prints should be sent to the print conveyor unit or the print
receiving tray (large)/long length print tray, and then issues appropriate instructions to the processor.
! Paper sent to the print receiving tray (large)/long length print tray:
1. The paper leading edge passes through the dryer lane select sensor.
• If the dryer lane select sensor fails to detect paper sent to the print receiving tray (large)/long length print tray within a
specified amount of time, the message ☞ No. 05535-00000: Paper has jammed in the processor section. is shown
onscreen.
Dryer lane select sensor: SE45
Long Length Print Tray

G085227
• The leading edge of the paper being sent to the print receiving tray (large)/long length print tray passes through the dryer
lane select sensor, activating the Dryer selection solenoid 1 and causing the select guide to move into the print receiving
tray (large) position after a specified amount of time elapses.
• The trailing edge of the paper being sent to the print receiving tray (large)/long length print tray passes through the dryer
lane select sensor, activating the dryer lane select solenoid and causing the select guide to move into the print conveyor
position after a specified amount of time elapses.
NOTE
• Paper other than standard prints also sent to the print receiving tray (large)
Types of paper sent to the print receiving tray (large)

Leading-edge feed paper Trailing-edge feed paper
Fogged paper Splice
Control strips
56100 2/4
56100
Dryer rack
A specified time A specified time
Dryer lane select sensor
Dryer lane select solenoid: OFF Dryer lane select solenoid: ON Dryer lane select solenoid: ON
Lane select guide: print conveyor Lane select guide: print receiving tray (large)
G082005
2. Paper is output to the print receiving tray (large)/long length print tray.
NOTE
• The long length print tray must be installed to accommodate prints with an advance length of 457.3 mm or over.
• Maximum capacity of print receiving tray (large)/long length print tray
Receiving tray Maximum capacity
Print receiving tray (large) 50 prints
Long Length Print Tray 10 prints
• Component status a specified amount of time after the dryer lane select sensor detects the trailing edge of the last sheet
of paper.
Processor drive motor: OFF
Dryer fan: OFF
Dryer heater: OFF
56100 3/4
56100
! Paper output to the print conveyor unit
1. The paper leading edge passes through the print sensor in the dryer rack.
• The message ☞ No. 05535-00000: Paper has jammed in the processor section. is shown if any of Print Sensor
(Left), Print Sensor (Center) or Print Sensor (Right) of the dryer rack does not turn dark when paper is output to the
print conveyor unit.
Print sensor (right): SE28

Print sensor (center): SE29
Print sensor (left): SE30
Print conveyor unit
Dryer lane select sensor: SE45
Long Length Print Tray
G085228
• The print sensor (left, center, right) detects paper sent to the print conveyor unit.
Dryer rack
Print sensor (left)
2 4 6
1 3 5
Print sensor (center)
Print sensor (right)
G082007
2. The prints are output to the print conveyor unit.

• For movement of the print conveyor unit, see ☞ 56200.
NOTE
• A specified length of time after the print sensor detects the trailing edge of the final sheet of paper
Processor drive motor: OFF
Dryer fan: OFF
Dryer heater: OFF
56100 4/4
56110
Paper advance operation of the processor (setup prints)
This section explains the operation from entering of setup print paper into the processor to ejecting of the setup print paper from the
colorimeter unit. It is a precondition that the temperature adjustment of the processing solution is completed.
Normal print paper advance operation is different from the setup operation.
1. Transmit the paper advance signal from the printer to the processor before loading paper, the processor is
in the conditions below.
• Processor drive motor: ON

• Dryer fan: ON
• Dryer heater: ON
• For•the setup print, start the paper loading after the Dryer Temperature or Dryer Section Setting (Auto Setup) reached Waiting
Time.
☞ 33505
2. Load paper, and start exposure advance operation.
3. The back edge of the paper passes through paper sensor 2 (left, center, right), which is located in the
processor loading unit.
Print conveyor unit

Paper sensors 2 (left, center and right)
Position A
Normal Print
Setup print
G085226
4. When the paper leading edge passes position A in the above figure, the process signal is transmitted to
the processor by the printer.
• The following data are transmitted to the processor by the printer.
Transmission data list

1 Information of paper advance length 5 Information of print counts
2 Information of paper width 6 Information of paper advance position
3 Information of paper surface 7 Information of paper lane
4 Order information 8 Information of splice
56110 1/2
56110
5. Calibrate the colorimeter automatically.

• For the details of colorimeter unit operation, see the following.
☞ 56600
If the automatic calibration of the colorimeter does not normally complete within a specified time
• ☞ No. 06903-00002
Dryer lane select

sensor: SE45
Normal Print
Setup print
G085229
6. The paper leading end passed through the Dryer Lane Select Sensor.
When the Dryer Lane Select Sensor does not turn dark within a specified time:
• ☞ No. 05535-00000
• Dryer selection solenoid 1: ON/OFF after a specified time has passe.

If the paper is detected by the Print Sensor (Left), Print Sensor (Center) and Print Sensor (Right) of
the dryer rack before print was detected by Paper Sensor 1:
• ☞ No. 05552-00004
• Dryer selection solenoid 2: ON/OFF after a specified time has passe.

When the colorimeter unit Paper Sensor 1 does not turn dark within a specified time:
• ☞ No. 05552-00005
If there are something like fogged parts in the previous process, the selection guide is switched to the colorimeter unit after they are
output from the processor.
7. The prints are advanced to the colorimeter unit, and the prints are output after measured.
• For the details of setup print color measuring operation, see the following.
☞ 56610
If colors of the test print cannot be measured normally within a specified time
• ☞ No. 06903-00002
NOTE
• After the fixed time has passed since the last print was inputted to the colorimeter unit.
• Dryer selection solenoid 1: OFF
• Processor drive motor: OFF
• Dryer fan: OFF
• Dryer heater: OFF
56110 2/2
56200
Print conveyor unit operation
This section explains the process that begins with paper passing through the dryer rack print sensor and ends with it being output to the
print sorter unit.
NOTE
• Print conveyor operation varies depending on differences in paper advance methods brought about by a variety of paper widths and
advance lengths.
• ☞ Paper with the width of 152.0 mm or less and the advance length of 178.0 mm or less
• ☞ Paper with the width of 152.0 mm or less and the advance length between 178.1 and 305.0 mm
! Paper with the width of 152.0 mm or less and the advance length of 178.0 mm or less
NOTE
• For details of paper advance inside the printer, see ☞ 55500.
1. The paper passes through the print sensor.

• For details of the operation from entering of paper into the processor to the ejection to the print conveyor unit, see
☞ 56100.
2. The print sensor detects the paper rear end.
4. Conveyor belt starts to move.
• Conveyor motor: ON
Condition: When a specific time passes after ☞ 2 The print sensor detects the paper rear end.
NOTE
• If the print sensor (right) detects the paper rear end when the print sensor (left) detects the paper during dividing
the paper path into right and left lanes to feed paper, the conveyor unit works after the paper detected by the print
sensor (left) is output to the conveyor unit.
Dryer rack
Print sensor (left)
A specified time
Conveyor motor: OFF Conveyor motor: ON

G085316
5. Paper is output into the print sorter unit's print receiving tray.
56200 1/3
56200
6. Conveyor belt stops moving.

• Conveyor motor: OFF (Stop)
Condition: When a specific time passes after conveyor motor ON.
7. The print receiving tray moves.

• For details about operation of the print receiving tray of the print sorter unit, see ☞ 56300.
! Paper with the width of 152.0 mm or less and the advance length between 178.1 and
305.0 mm
NOTE
• For details of paper advance inside the printer, see ☞ 55500.
1. The paper passes through the print sensor.

• For details of the operation from entering of paper into the processor to the ejection to the print conveyor unit, see
☞ 56100.
4. Conveyor belt starts to move.

• Conveyor motor: ON (rotation)
Condition: When a specific time passes after ☞ 2 The print sensor detects the paper rear end.
Dryer rack
Print sensor (left)

A specified time
Conveyor motor: OFF Conveyor motor: ON

G071653
5. Paper is output into the print sorter unit's print receiving tray.
6. Conveyor belt stops moving.

• Conveyor motor: OFF (Stop)
Condition: When a specific time passes after conveyor motor ON.
56200 2/3
56200

• For details about operation of the print receiving tray of the print sorter unit, see ☞ 56300.
56200 3/3
56300
Print sorter unit operation
Print sorter unit operation [print sorter unit (6-inch type, 17/14 orders)]
This section explains the operation until the print receiving tray starts to move after paper is output to the print sorter unit.
1. The last piece of paper of an order is output to the print receiving tray of the print sorter unit.

• Sorter motor: ON
When the following two conditions are fulfilled, the print receiving tray moves.
• Condition 1: The print sensor detects the paper leading edge of the next order.
• Condition 2: A fixed time has passed after the sensor detects the rear edge of the paper of the previous order.
NOTE
• If condition 2 is not applied (inadequate interval between customer orders), the print receiving tray will not start until a
specified length of time elapses.
Sorter motor: DM4
Sorter home sensor: SE26
G082009
Dryer rack
Print sensor (left) A specified time

A specified time
Order Order Order

Sorter motor: ON Sorter motor: ON
Longer than the Shorter than the specified

Sorter motor: OFF
specified time time
G082010
56300 1/2
56300
NOTE
• Print size and quantity sorted by the print sorter unit vary depending on the type of size-specific sorting being performed.
Paper width Advance length Maximum capacity

Type 1 Type 2
Between 82.5 and 102 mm Between 82.5 and 305 mm 50 prints 82 prints
Between 102.1 and 152 mm. Between 82.5 and 254 mm 50 prints 82 prints
Between 254.1 and 305 mm. 50 prints 50 prints
3. Print receiving tray operation stops.

• Sorter motor: OFF
Condition: The sorter home sensor turns DARK.
4. The print full sensor of the print sorter unit turns DARK.
• When the print full sensor turns DARK in a specified time, the message ☞ No. 00505Remove the prints from the Print
Sorter Unit. is shown.
• The print sorter unit is not activated until attention message No. 0505 is closed.
Print full sensor: SE27
G082011
56300 2/2
56300-5
Print sorter unit operation [print sorter unit (10-inch type)]
This section explains the operation until the print receiving tray starts to move after paper is output to the print sorter unit.
! Basic operation of the print receiving tray
1. The last piece of paper of an order is output to the print receiving tray of the print sorter unit.

• Sorter motor: ON
When the following three conditions are fulfilled, the print receiving tray moves.
• Condition 1: The print sensor detects the paper leading edge of the next order.
• Condition 2: A fixed time has passed after the sensor detects the rear edge of the paper of the previous order.
• Condition 3: The paper guide is in open position (raised). See ☞ When the paper guide moves to open position
(raised).
NOTE
• If condition 2 is not applied (inadequate interval between customer orders), the print receiving tray will not start
until a specified length of time elapses.
Sorter motor: DM4 Sorter home sensor: SE26
G082019
56300-5 1/4
56300-5
Dryer rack
Print sensor (left) A specified time

A specified time
Order Order Order

Sorter motor: ON Sorter motor: ON
Longer than the Shorter than the specified

Sorter motor: OFF
specified time time
G082010
NOTE
• Print size and quantity sorted by the print sorter unit vary depending on the type of size-specific sorting being performed.
For the details of the type of size-specific sorting, see Operator's Manual - Additional Operations - Classification
Processing Sorted by Print Size.
3. Print receiving tray operation stops.

• Sorter motor: OFF
Condition: The sorter home sensor turns DARK.
4. The print full sensor of the print sorter unit turns DARK.
• When the print full sensor turns DARK in a specified time, the message ☞ No. 00505Remove the prints from the
Print Sorter Unit. is shown.
• The print sorter unit is not activated until attention message No. 0505 is closed.
Print full sensor: SE27
G082020
56300-5 2/4
56300-5
! Basic operation of paper guide
! When the paper guide moves to open position (raised)
1. Turn on the power supply.

• The paper guide motor: ON (reverse)
The paper guide moves with following condition.
• Condition: The paper guide is in closed position (lower).
NOTE
• Stored paper may be output from the system because of initial-activated operation.
Paper guide motor: DM5

Position that the paper guide is opened.
Reverse
Forward
Position that the paper guide is closed.
G082021
2. The first sheet of paper in the order reaches to the dryer section.
When the following two conditions are fulfilled, the paper guide moves.
• Condition 1: The paper guide is in closed position (lower).
• Condition 2: The paper guide should be open if the first order is following chart size.
NOTE
• If orders are these size, the paper guide should be open.
Paper width Advance length
Between 152.1 and 254 mm Between 82.5 and 254 mm
• For the details of condition of print receiving tray operation, see ☞ The print receiving tray moves.

• Condition 1: The paper guide is in closed position (lower).
• Condition 2: The size of next order of the detected order applies to the size which need to open the paper guide.
56300-5 3/4
56300-5
Dryer rack Paper advance direction
A specified A specified
Order time Order time
The paper guide motor: ON (reverse)
Paper guide motor: OFF
A specified Position that the paper guide is

Position that the paper guide is time closed.
opened. A specified
The paper guide motor: ON (forward)
time
G082022
! When the paper guide moves to closed position (lower)
1. The print sensor detects the paper leading end.

• The paper guide motor: ON (forward)
When the following three conditions are fulfilled, the paper guide moves.
• Condition 1: The paper guide is open (raised).
• Condition 2: The detected paper is in the following size.
NOTE
• If the detected paper has this size, the paper guide should be close.
Paper width Advance length

Between 82.5 and 152 mm Between 82.5 and 305 mm
• Condition 3: The print receiving tray is not moving.
2. There is no proceeding order in the processor.

• The paper guide motor: ON (forward)
• Condition 1: The paper guide is open (raised).
• Condition 2: After all proceeding order is output, move the print receiving tray by pressing the manual sorter
switch.
56300-5 4/4
56600
Colorimeter unit operation
The calibration operation of the colorimeter
This section explains the paper advance operation of colorimeter.

NOTE
• The calibrate operation of the colorimeter starts a minute before the setup print paper reaches to the colorimeter unit.
• To measure again, the calibration operation starts when YES is selected after the attention message ☞ No. 01029The measurement
failed. Measure it again. is shown.
Measuring position Calibration plate advance motor
Colorimeter
Calibration plate
Paper sensor 2 Paper sensor 1
Pressure solenoid
G085216
1. Releases the pressure of the measuring position, start to move Black of the calibration plate to the
measuring position.
• Pressure solenoid: ON
• Calibration plate advance motor: ON (forward)
2. After the calibration plate detects the paper sensor 2, it moves for a specified length and stops at the
measuring position of Black.
• Paper sensor 1: LIGHT to DARK

• Calibration plate advance motor: ON (forward)/OFF
If paper sensor 2 does not turn DARK
• ☞ No. 06554-00001
If paper sensor 1 turns LIGHT
• ☞ No. 06554-00002
3. Applies pressure to the Black of the calibration plate, and measure the density.
• Pressure solenoid: OFF/ON
56600 1/3
56600
Measuring position Calibration plate advance motor
Colorimeter
Calibration plate
Pressure solenoid
G085217
4. Shifts the calibration plate for a specified length and stop it at the measuring position White of the
calibration plate.
• Calibration plate advance motor: ON (forward)/OFF
• ☞ No. 06554-00004
5. Applies pressure to the White of the calibration plate, and measure the density.
6. The calibration plate starts to move to the standby position.

• Calibration plate advance motor: ON (reverse)
Measuring position Standby position
Colorimeter Calibration plate advance motor
Paper sensor 2 Paper sensor 1 Calibration plate
Pressure solenoid
G085218
56600 2/3
56600
7. After the paper sensor 1 detects that the calibration plate passed, moves for a specified length, the
calibration plate stops at the standby position.
• Paper sensor 1: DARK to LIGHT

• Calibration plate advance motor: ON (reverse)/OFF
If paper sensor 1 does not turn LIGHT
• ☞ No. 06554-00006
8. Apply pressure to the measuring position without the calibration plate.

• Pressure solenoid: OFF
9. Judge and register the result of the calibration plate, calibrate the colorimeter.
For details of the judgment, refer to ☞ Judgment operation of setup print.
56600 3/3
56610
Automatic color measurement operation for setup prints
This section explains the automatic color measurement operation for setup prints.
NOTE
• When attention messages or error messages is shown after failed to measure the setup print, the setup print is output without
registering the result.
• When the measurement would be failed and the attention message ☞ No. 01029The measurement failed. Measure it again. is
shown, you can measure the setup print again if inserting the print to the colorimeter unit manually.
1. The print was inserted to the colorimeter unit.
Remeasurement inlet
Paper
Colorimeter
Paper advance motor Pressure solenoid
Measuring
G085219
2. Detects the paper leading end by paper sensor 1, and releases the pressure of the measurement position.
• ☞ No. 05535
3. Starts to advance the paper after detected the paper leading end by paper sensor 1.
• Paper sensor 1: DARK
• Paper advance motor: ON (forward)
• ☞ No. 01552-00001
56610 1/3
56610
Remeasurement inlet
Paper
Colorimeter

Measuring
G085219
4. After detected the paper leading end by paper sensor 2, advances a specified length of paper and stops.
• Paper advance motor: ON (forward)/OFF
• ☞ No. 06551-00001
5. Applies pressure to the paper at the measuring position, and measures the density.
If colors of the test print cannot be measured normally within a specified time
• ☞ No. 06903-00002
6. Moves the paper for a specified pitch of each measuring format.

• ☞ No. 01552-00002
• ☞ No. 06551-00002
7. Repeats from Step 5 to Step 6 for reaching to the final measurement position, and measures the density
of each step.
• For details of the judgment, refer to ☞ 56620.
56610 2/3
56610
8. When the density measurement of each step is completed, releases the pressure of the measurement
position and ejects the paper.
• Paper advance motor: ON (forward)
Remeasurement inlet
Colorimeter
Paper
Measuring
G085219
9. After detected the paper rear end by paper sensor 2, advances a specified length of paper and stop.
• Paper sensor 1: DARK to LIGHT to DARK
• Paper sensor 2: DARK to LIGHT
• ☞ No. 06551-00003
10. Applies pressure at the measuring position without paper.

• Pressure solenoid: OFF
11. After judged the result, registers the correction value.
56610 3/3
56620
Judgment operation of setup print
This section explains the judgment operation to measure the setup print at the daily setup.
NOTE
• When the daily setup is automatically performed after the startup of the program timer, the measurement is stopped to output the paper
when attention messages or error messages is shown.
• When the daily setup is performed from the Menu or Start Up Checks, all the papers are output after the measurement even though
attention messages or error messages is shown.
Performing a setup print

After attention message ☞ No. 01029The measurement failed.
Measure it again. is shown, select YES to measure again.
(Input the print failed to measure or the print with the correct paper
type to the colorimeter unit.)
Performing a colorimeter calibration
NO
Measurement value difference of between Black and White Attention message ☞ No. 01555
of the calibration plate is above the specified value. The calibration plate data is out of range.
YES YES
A
Measurement of print density
NO Attention message ☞ No. 01029The measurement

Paper type is correct.
failed. Measure it again.
YES
Density between each step is consecutively increasing. NO
YES NO
All three colors of C, M and Y have the similar tendency. Error ☞ No. 06203-#2001
Setup error.
YES
Attention message ☞ No. 01029The measurement failed.

Measure it again.
56620 1/3
56620
NO A
Dmax is 0.9 is more.
YES NO
Stores Dmax data for 15 days. Attention message ☞ No. 01029The measurement failed.
Measure it again.
YES
NO
Dmax data is sequentially changing daily. Attention message ☞ No. 01029The measurement failed.
Measure it again.
YES
Error ☞ No. 06204-#3001 A

Setup error.
NO
Dmax is below 3.8.
NO
YES
Stores Dmax data for 15 days. Error ☞ No. 06203-#2002
Setup error.
YES
Dmax data is sequentially changing daily. Error ☞ No. 06203-#2003

Setup error.
YES NO
Error ☞ No. 06205-#4001

Setup error.
Calculation of the correction value.
The correction value is within 10 fold of the previous NO

value.
YES NO
Setup error.
YES

Measure it again. A
56620 2/3
56620
NO
The correction value is below 3 key of the previous value.
NO
YES
Error ☞ No. 06203-#2005
All three colors of C, M and Y have the similar tendency. Setup error.
YES
NO Attention message ☞ No. 01029The measurement failed.

Requires plus correction. (Print density has been Measure it again.
decreased.)
YES
Error ☞ No. 06204-#3002 A

Setup error.
The correction value is within 2 times of the value at Initial

NO
Setup or paper specification registration setup.
YES NO
Setup error.
YES
NO
Requires plus correction. (Print density has been Measure it again.
decreased.)
YES
Error ☞ No. 06204-#3003 A

Setup error.
Correction value registration
56620 3/3
57010
Replenishment operation sequence [F]
Piping diagram
Replenishment SE60
cartridge
SE61 P1R P2RA P2RB

MV7 MV8
MV6 MV9
SE62
MV5 MV10
MV4
P17
SE63 SE65 SE67
Replenisher tank LSE7
P1R P2RA P2RB PSR
SE64 SE66 SE68 LSE8
RP1 RP2 RP3 RP4
Processing tank P1 P2 PS-1 PS-2 PS-3 PS-4
G085080
Symbol Name Symbol Name

SE60 Cartridge sensor MV4 P1R cartridge flushing valve
SE61 Cartridge position sensor (upper) MV5 P2RA cartridge flushing valve
SE62 Cartridge position sensor (lower) MV6 P2RB cartridge flushing valve
SE63 P1R (upper) replenishment solution level sensor MV7 P1R agitation solenoid valve
SE64 P1R (lower) replenishment solution level sensor MV8 P1 automated cleaning valve
SE65 P2RA (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level MV9 P2 automated cleaning valve
Sensor
SE66 P2RA (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level MV10 PS automated cleaning valve
Sensor
SE67 P2RB (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level P17 Replenisher cartridge cleaning pump
Sensor
SE68 P2RB (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level RP1 P1R Replenisher Pump
Sensor
LSE7 PSR (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor RP2 P2RA Replenisher Pump
LSE8 PSR (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level RP3 P2RB Replenisher Pump
Sensor
- - RP4 PSR Replenisher Pump
• This section explains the replenishment operation flow.
57010 1/8
57010
1. Mixing Replenisher is performed.
2. PSR (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor is on.

• PSR (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor: ON
If PSR (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor is off
• ☞ No. 00918[F] Replenish PSR.
3. P1R/P2RA/P2RB (lower) replenishment solution level sensors are off.

P17
SE63 SE65 SE67
LSE7
Replenisher tank P1R P2RA P2RB PSR
SE64 SE66 SE68 LSE8
RP1 RP2 RP3 RP4

G085081
• P1R (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor: OFF
• P2RA (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor: OFF
• P2RB (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor: OFF
If P1R/P2RA/P2RB (lower) replenishment solution level sensors are on
• ☞ No. 00913[F] Mixing Replenisher cannot be started.
4. The replenishment cartridge is set.

• Replenisher cartridge set sensor: on
If the replenishment cartridge is set
• Automatically goes to Step 5.
If the replenishment cartridge is not set
• ☞ No. 00902[F] Install the replenisher cartridge.
5. The replenisher section door is closed.

• Interlock Switch (Replenisher Section Door): ON
If the replenisher section door is closed
• Automatically goes to Step 7.
If the replenisher section door is not closed
• ☞ No. 00903[F] Close the replenisher section door.
57010 2/8
57010
6. P1R/P2RA/P2RB (lower) replenishment solution level sensors are off.

P17
SE63 SE65 SE67
LSE7
P1R P2RA P2RB PSR

Replenisher tank
SE64 SE66 SE68 LSE8
RP1 RP2 RP3 RP4

G085081
• P1R (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor: OFF
• P2RA (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor: OFF
• P2RB (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor: OFF
If P1R/P2RA/P2RB (lower) replenishment solution level sensors are on
• ☞ No. 05923[F] Solution remains in the replenishment tank.
7. The replenishment cartridge is moved to lower position.

• Replenisher Cartridge Open Motor: ON
• Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Upper): DARK → LIGHT
If Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Upper) does not turn LIGHT
• ☞ No. 05900[F]−0001Replenisher cartridge open motor operation error.
8. The replenishment cartridge is stopped at lower position.

• Replenisher Cartridge Open Motor: OFF
• Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Lower): LIGHT → DARK
If Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Lower) does not turn DARK
9. The system waits until the replenishment solution falls.
57010 3/8
57010
10. The replenishment solution level sensor (lower) detects the replenishment solution.
P17
SE63 SE65 SE67 LSE7
Replenishment P1R P2RA P2RB PSR

cartridge
SE64 SE66 SE68 LSE8
RP1 RP2 RP3 RP4
P1 P2 PS-1 PS-2 PS-3 PS-4
Replenisher tank
G085082
• P1R (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor: OFF→ON
• P2RA (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor: OFF→ON
• P2RB (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor: OFF→ON
If any of replenishment solution level sensors (lower) does not turn on although 40 seconds has passed
after the replenishment cartridge opened
• ☞ No. 05908[F] Failed to open the replenisher cartridge.
If no replenishment solution level sensors (lower) turn on although 40 seconds has passed after the
replenishment cartridge opened
• ☞ No. 05905[F] Install the new replenisher cartridge.
11. The system operates the replenishment cartridge cleaning pump.

• Replenishment cartridge cleaning pump: OFF → ON
57010 4/8
57010
12. The system opens the P1R cartridge flushing valve for a certain period of time to clean the cartridge, then
closes the P1R cartridge flushing valve.
SE60
SE61
MV7 MV8
P1R P2RA P2RB MV9

Replenishment MV6
cartridge SE62
MV5 MV10
MV4
P17
SE63 SE65 SE67 LSE7
Replenisher tank
P1R P2RA P2RB PSR
SE64 SE66 SE68 LSE8

G085083
• P1R cartridge flushing valve: ON/OFF
13. The system opens and cleans the P2RA cartridge flushing valve for a certain period of time, then closes it.
• P2RA cartridge flushing valve: ON/OFF
• P2RA (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor: OFF→ON
If P2RA (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor does not turn on
• ☞ No. 05910[F]Cartridge cleaning valve cleaning valve is abnormal. P2RA
NOTE
• No error message appears when the replenishment solution is created in the Processor Standard Setting→Processor
Set Up Mode→Mixing Replenisher mode.
• No error message appears when the replenishment solution is created in the Processor Setting→Pump Output
Amount Setting→Mixing Replenisher mode.
14. The system opens the P2RB cartridge flushing valve for a certain period of time to clean the cartridge,
then closes the valve.
• P2RB cartridge flushing valve: ON/OFF

• P2RB (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor: OFF→ON
If P2RB (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor does not turn on
• ☞ No. 05911[F]Cartridge cleaning valve cleaning valve is abnormal. P2RB
NOTE
• No error message appears when the replenishment solution is created in the Processor Standard Setting→Processor
Set Up Mode→Mixing Replenisher mode.
• No error message appears when the replenishment solution is created in the Processor Setting→Pump Output
Amount Setting→Mixing Replenisher mode.
57010 5/8
57010
15. The system opens the P1R agitation solenoid valve, agitates P1R replenishment solution for a certain
period of time, and closes the valve.
SE60
SE61 MV7 MV8

Replenishment P1R P2RA P2RB MV9
MV6
cartridge
SE62 MV5 MV10
MV4
P17
SE63 SE65 SE67 LSE7
Replenisher tank P1R P2RA P2RB PSR
SE64 SE66 SE68 LSE8
RP1 RP2 RP3 RP4
G085084
• P1R (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor: OFF→ON
If P1R (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor does not turn on
• ☞ No. 05909[F]Cartridge cleaning valve/Agitation solenoid valve is abnormal. P1R
16. Stops the Replenishment cartridge cleaning pump.

• Replenishment cartridge cleaning pump: ON → OFF
17. P1R/P2RA/P2RB (upper) replenishment solution level sensors detect all replenishment solution.
• If creating the replenishment solution with the replenishment tank completely empty, the replenishment solution is not filled
up until P2RA (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor and P2RB (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor turn
on.
Therefore, no error message appears if P2RA (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor/P2RB (Upper) Replenishment
Solution Level Sensor does not turn on the condition that the replenishment solution is created in the Processor Standard
Setting → Processor Set Up Mode → Mixing Replenisher or Processor Setting → Pump Output Amount Setting →
Mixing Replenisher mode.
57010 6/8
57010
18. The replenish cartridge moves to the cap cleaning position (upper position).
SE61
P1R P2RA P2RB MV7 MV8
MV6 MV9
SE62
MV5 MV10
Replenishment
cartridge
MV4
P17
SE63 SE65 SE67 LSE7
P1R P2RA P2RB PSR

Replenisher tank
SE64 SE66 SE68 LSE8
RP1 RP2 RP3 RP4 G085134

• Replenisher Cartridge Open Motor: ON → OFF
• Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Lower): DARK → LIGHT
• Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Upper): LIGHT → DARK
If Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Lower) does not turn LIGHT
If Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Upper) does not turn DARK
19. The system operates the replenishment cartridge cleaning pump.

• Replenishment cartridge cleaning pump: ON
20. The system opens the P1R cartridge flushing valve for a certain period of time to clean the cartridge, then
closes the P1R cartridge flushing valve.
21. The system opens and cleans the P2RA cartridge flushing valve for a certain period of time, then closes it.
• P2RA cartridge flushing valve: ON/OFF
22. The system opens the P2RB cartridge flushing valve for a certain period of time to clean the cartridge,
then closes the valve.
• P2RB cartridge flushing valve: ON/OFF
23. Stops the Replenishment cartridge cleaning pump.

• Replenishment cartridge cleaning pump: OFF
24. The replenishment cartridge moves from the cap cleaning position (upper position) to the lower position to
discharge washing water.

• Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Upper): DARK → LIGHT
57010 7/8
57010
• Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Lower): LIGHT → DARK

If Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Upper) does not turn LIGHT
If Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Lower) does not turn DARK
25. The replenisher cartridge is moved from the lower position to the upper position.
• Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Lower): DARK → LIGHT
• Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Upper): LIGHT → DARK
If Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Lower) does not turn LIGHT
If Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Upper) does not turn DARK
26. End
57010 8/8
57020
• Only for F specification, the error message may be shown when both condition 1 and 2 are fulfilled.
Condition 1 Condition 2
• When the remaining amount of P1R replenishment solution is 1. The processor control PCB is replaced.
3034.8 or less, or the remaining amount of P2RA/P2RB 2. A data is initialized.
replenishment solutions are 1168.8 or less.
3. ☞ No. 05538 Backup data error. Processor occurs.
NOTE
• The error occurs if both condition 1 and 2 are fulfilled, because the number of replenishment pump revolution is stored in the
processor control PCB.
• When initializing a data or replacing the processor control PCB, the number of pump revolution stored in the processor control PCB is
initialized.
• The number of pump revolution is not backed up in Reading and Writing Data. Therefore, the error may occur only when both
condition 1 and 2 are fulfilled.
Countermeasure
1. Drain all replenishment solution in the replenishment tank (P1R/P2RA/P2RB). ☞ 27550
2. Carry out Mixing Replenisher in F: Functions of Pump Output Amount Setting.
Example:
• When the remaining amount of P1R replenishment solution is • When the remaining amount of P1R replenishment solution is
3034.9 ml to 3756 ml or more, or the remaining amount of 3034.8 or less, or the remaining amount of P2RA/P2RB
P2RA/P2RB replenishment solution is 1168.9 ml to 1461 ml replenishment solutions are 1168.8 or less.
or more.
• The mixing replenisher is correctly completed. Error
• ☞ No. 05905[F]−00002 P1R replenishment solution output
amount/replenishment solution level management is abnormal.
• ☞ No. 05906[F]−00002 P2RA replenishment solution output
• ☞ No. 05907[F]−00002 P2RA replenishment solution output
Example 1: If the mixing replenisher is correctly completed Example 2: If the mixing replenisher is not correctly completed
The replenisher tank when the condition 2 occurs. The replenisher tank when the condition 1 or 2 occurs.
P1R P2RA P2RB P1R P2RA P2RB

12mm
18.7mm
12mm
18.7mm
22.4mm
22.4mm
SE63 SE63
SE67 SE67
SE65 SE65
65.9mm
77.2mm
65.9mm
77.2mm
65.9mm
65.9mm
SE64 SE68 SE64 SE66 SE68

SE66
3756ml 1461ml 1461ml 3000ml 1000ml 1000ml
P1R P2RA P2RB P1R P2RA P2RB

12mm
18.7mm
12mm
18.7mm
22.4mm
22.4mm
SE63 SE63
SE67 SE67
SE65 SE65
65.9mm
77.2mm
65.9mm
77.2mm
65.9mm
65.9mm
SE64 SE66 SE68 SE64 SE66 SE68
The replenisher tank when the replenishment solution runs out The replenisher tank when the replenishment solution runs out
57020 1/2
57020
SE63 P1R (upper) replenishment solution level sensor SE64 P1R (lower) replenishment solution level sensor
SE65 P2RA (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level SE66 P2RA (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level
Sensor Sensor
SE67 P2RB (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level SE68 P2RB (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level
Sensor Sensor
57020 2/2
6000
6. Electrical parts
Compatibility of PCBs and electrical parts ........................................................................... 60100

Compatibility of PCBs and electrical parts .......................................................................................................60100
Position of electrical parts (printer section) .......................................................................... 63000
Printer section (positions of PCBs) ...................................................................................................................63000
Printer section (positions of electrical parts) .....................................................................................................63050
Paper magazine mounts A, A2, B, and C (positions of electrical parts) ...........................................................63051
Paper supply unit A2 (positions of electrical parts) ..........................................................................................63055
Paper supply unit (positions of electrical parts) ................................................................................................63060
Exposure advance unit (positions of electrical parts) ........................................................................................63070
Laser unit (position and description of electrical parts) ....................................................................................63080
Paper advance unit 1 (positions of electrical parts) ...........................................................................................63090
Paper advance unit 2 (positions of electrical parts) ...........................................................................................63100
Processor loading unit (positions of electrical parts) .........................................................................................63110
Position of PCBs (processor section) .................................................................................. 63200
Processor section (PCB positions) (QSS-3701/3702/3703/LP7500/LP7600) [F][N][SM][J] ..........................63200
Processor section (PCB positions) (QSS-3701/3702/3703) [SM] ..............................................................63200
Processor section (PCB positions) (QSS-3701/3702/3703) [J] ...................................................................63200
Position of PCBs (processor section) ............................................................................... 63201-5
Processor section (PCB positions) (QSS-3704/3705/LP7700/LP7900) [F][N][SM] .................................... 63201-5
Processor section (PCB positions) (QSS-3704) [SM] ............................................................................. 63201-5
Positions of PCBs and electrical parts (dryer section, conveyor and order classification section)
6 Electrical parts
63260
Dryer section (positions of electrical parts) (QSS-3701/3702/3703/LP7500/LP7600) .....................................63260
Dryer section (positions of electrical parts) (QSS-3704/3705/LP7700/LP7900) .......................................... 63270-5
Conveyor and order classification section (positions of PCBs and electrical parts) .........................................63271
Condition check of the processor condition light and Manual Sorter Switch ...................................................63275
Positions of electrical parts (Processor section) .................................................................. 63280
Processor section (positions of electrical parts) (QSS-3701/3702/3703/LP7500/LP7600) [F] ........................63280
Processor section (positions of electrical parts) (QSS-3701/3702/3703) [N] ...................................................63290
Processor section (positions of electrical parts) (QSS-3701/3702/3703) [SM] ................................................63300
Processor section (positions of electrical parts) (QSS-3701/3702/3703) [J] .....................................................63310
Processor section (positions of electrical parts) (QSS-3704/3705/LP7700/LP7900) [F] ..................................63311
Processor section (positions of electrical parts) (QSS-3704/3705) [N] ........................................................ 63311-5
Processor section (positions of electrical parts) (QSS-3704) [SM] ............................................................... 63311-5
Processor section (List of adjustment after electrical parts replacement) [F] ...................................................63312
Control strip auto loading unit (positions of PCBs and electrical parts) ...........................................................63315
Communication unit (positions of PCBs) ..........................................................................................................63316
Colorimeter unit (positions of electrical parts) ..................................................................... 63318
Colorimeter unit (positions of electrical parts) ..................................................................................................63318
Processor section (fan operation specification) ................................................................... 63321
Processor section (fan operation specification) .................................................................................................63321
6000 1/2
6000
Description of PCB (printer section) .................................................................................... 66000

Printer control PCB (J391423) ..........................................................................................................................66000
Printer I/F main PCB (J391391, J391489) ........................................................................................................66005
Replacing the printer I/F main PCB (QSS-3701/3702/3703/3704/3705) .........................................................66006
Replacing the printer I/F main PCB (LP7500/7600/7700/7900) .......................................................................66007
Capacity booster PCB ........................................................................................................................................66008
Laser control PCB (J391465) ............................................................................................................................66010
Printer I/O PCB 1 (J391483) .............................................................................................................................66020
Printer I/O PCB 2 (J391256) .............................................................................................................................66030
Printer I/O PCB 3 (J391253) .............................................................................................................................66040
Triple magazine PCB (J391257) .......................................................................................................................66050
Quad magazine PCB (J391177) ........................................................................................................................66055
G laser driver .....................................................................................................................................................66070
G-AOM driver (Z025645) .................................................................................................................................66080
CVP PCB (J391258) ..........................................................................................................................................66090
Operation key PCB (J391400) ...........................................................................................................................66095
Power supply (printer section) ...........................................................................................................................66100
Explanation of PCBs (Processor section) ............................................................................ 66200
Processor control PCB (J391467) ......................................................................................................................66200
Processor I/O PCB 1 (J391468) .........................................................................................................................66210
Processor I/O PCB 2 (J391490) .........................................................................................................................66211
Processor relay PCB (J391466) .........................................................................................................................66220
Tablet replenishment driver PCB (J391351) [J] ................................................................................................66500
SM I/O PCB (J391191, J391378) [SM] ............................................................................................................66600
6 Electrical parts
F replenishment I/O PCB (J391322) [F] ...........................................................................................................66800
Control strip driver PCB (J391422) ...................................................................................................................66810
Control strip communication PCB (J391404) ...................................................................................................66820
Infrared communication unit .............................................................................................................................66830
Order specifying LED PCB 1 (J490423) ...........................................................................................................66840
Drive motor driver PCB (I123279) ...................................................................................................................66870
Power supply (processor) ..................................................................................................................................67400
Cables ................................................................................................................................. 68100
Precautions in handling the cables .....................................................................................................................68100
Power ON/OFF .................................................................................................................... 68550
When the power is not supplied (How to use the starter jumper) .....................................................................68550
6000 2/2
60100
Compatibility of PCBs and electrical parts
Reference
☞ Control PCB ☞ PCB (other parts) ☞ Power supply PCB ☞ Exposure engine
! Explanation
• The PCB and the parts No. used in the PCB installed on the system varies depending on the machine type.
• The corrective actions after replacing the PCBs may differ depending on system model though the parts No. of PCB is the same in
the list. Be sure to confirm the explanation of each PCB when replacing the parts.
! Control PCB
Name Part No. Manual No. Remarks
Printer control PCB J391423 ☞ 66000
Laser control PCB J391465 ☞ 66010
Processor control PCB J391467 ☞ 66200
Printer I/F main PCB J391489 ☞ 66005
J391391*1
Capacity booster PCB F J391452 ☞ 66008
Capacity booster PCB G J391453
Capacity booster PCB H J391454
Capacity booster PCB I J391455
*1. No longer available
! PCB (other parts)
6. Electrical parts
G-AOM driver Z025645 ☞ 66080
G laser driver J391231 ☞ 66070
J391160
Operation key PCB J391400 ☞ 66095
Printer I/O PCB 1 J391483 ☞ 66020
Printer I/O PCB 2 J391256 ☞ 66030
Printer I/O PCB 3 J391253 ☞ 66040
Processor I/O PCB 1 J391468 ☞ 66210
Processor I/O PCB 2 J391490 ☞ 66211
CVP PCB J391258 ☞ 66090
Triple magazine PCB J391257 ☞ 66050
Quad magazine PCB J391177 ☞ 66055
Processor relay PCB J391466 ☞ 66220
SM I/O PCB J391378 ☞ 66600 Only for [SM]
Tablet replenishment driver PCB J391351 ☞ 66500 Only for [J]
F replenishment I/O PCB J391322 ☞ 66800 Only for [F]
Temperature and humidity sensor I096003 ☞ 63280
Control strip driver PCB J391422 ☞ 66810 Option
Control strip communication PCB J391404 ☞ 66820
Infrared communication unit W413078 ☞ 66830
W413080
Order specifying LED PCB 1 J490423 ☞ 66840
Drive motor driver PCB I123279 ☞ 66870
60100 1/2
60100
! Power supply PCB

Printer power supply 1 I038361 ☞ 66100
Printer power supply 2 I038430
I038406*1
I038421*1
Laser power supply I038402
I038405*1
Processor power supply 1 I038401 ☞ 67400
Processor power supply 2 I038402
I038405*1
! Exposure engine
Laser unit (Type hB) Z020259 ☞ 63080
Laser unit (Type iB) Z026681
6. Electrical parts
60100 2/2
63000
Position of electrical parts (printer section)
Printer section (positions of PCBs)
! Position 1
10, 11 5
7 4
6. Electrical parts
6
G085213
Printer section 1
No. Name Symbol Manual No. Remarks
1 Laser control PCB ☞ 66010
2 G laser driver ☞ 66070
3 G-AOM driver ☞ 66080
4 Printer control PCB ☞ 66000
5 Laser power supply PS5 ☞ 66100
6 Printer power supply 5 PS4
7 Printer I/O PCB 3 ☞ 66040
10 Operation key PCB ☞ 66005 Option
In the display module unit
63000 1/3
63000

11 Display module ☞ 66008
10
11
! Position 2
6. Electrical parts
7
5
8
9, 10
4
3
G085243
Printer section 2
2 CVP PCB ☞ 66090 Option
3 Printer power supply 3 PS3 ☞ 66100
63000 2/3
63000

7 Triple magazine PCB ☞ 66050
8 Printer I/F main PCB ☞ 66005
9 • Capacity booster PCB G ☞ 66008
10 • Capacity booster PCB F 9
• Capacity booster PCB H
• Capacity booster PCB I
10
F H I
! Position 3
6. Electrical parts
9
G086492
Printer section 3
8 Quad magazine PCB ☞ 66055
9 Printer power supply 4 ☞ 66100
63000 3/3
63050
Printer section (positions of electrical parts)
! Position (front face)
For the triple magazine unit
6
10
5
13
6. Electrical parts
9
3 14 1 12
2
G085244
For the quad magazine unit
10
11
G086493
Printer main body (front face)

No. Name Symbol Remarks
1 Interlock Switch (Printer Door 1)*2 LS2 *1
2 Interlock Switch (Printer Door 2)*2 LS3

3 Printer Door 3 Sensor*2 LS4
4 Control box cooling fan 2 FAN3 Intake (The fan is always on.)
63050 1/2
63050

*2 *1
5 Interlock Switch (Printer Top Cover) LS1
6 Laser control box cooling fan 1 FAN7 Blowing (the fan is always ON.)
7 Inner thermosensor TH1
8 Paper magazine lamp B/C L1
9 Paper magazine lamp A L2
10 Counter CO Option
*1
11 Interlock switch (printer door 4) LS5
12 Buzzer BZ1
13 Control box cooling fan 4 FAN6 Intake (The fan is always on.)
14 Fuse (3.15 A/ 200 V) F5 • 200 V power supply protection
• See the illustration.
• The external AC power supply
protected with fuse F5 can be used up to
1.5A.
*1. When LS1, 2, 3, and 5 are turned off, all the motors in the printer stop.
In addition, the control signals of laser is cut off and laser light is not output from the laser unit.
*2. For the operation status of each interlock switch, see ☞ Operation of the interlock switches (3521).
! Position (back face)
1
4
6. Electrical parts
3
G085245
Printer main body (back face)

1 Laser unit cooling fan 1 FAN8 • When the laser unit temperature sensor exceeds 30°C,
2 Laser unit cooling fan 2 FAN9 the laser unit cooling fans 1 and 2 turn on.
• When the laser unit temperature sensor is 27°C or
lower, the laser unit cooling fans 1 and 2 turn off.
3 Control box cooling fan 1 FAN2 Exhaust (The fan is always on.)
4 Paper advance section cooling fan 1 FAN5 Intake (The fan is always on.)
63050 2/2
63051
Paper magazine mounts A, A2, B, and C (positions of electrical parts)
! Layout diagram (triple magazine unit)
Paper magazine mount B 3 1
8
Paper magazine mount A
6. Electrical parts
7 9
Paper magazine mount C
6
4
5
G068427
Paper magazine mount B

1 Paper Magazine Motor B PM1
2 Paper magazine code sensor B SE1
3 Paper End Sensor B SE4
Paper magazine mount C

4 Paper Magazine Motor C PM2
5 Paper magazine code sensor C SE2
6 Paper End Sensor C SE5

7 Paper Magazine Motor A PM3
8 Paper magazine code sensor A SE3
9 Paper End Sensor A SE6
63051 1/2
63051
! Layout diagram (quad magazine unit)
11
Paper magazine mount A2

10
12

7
G086494

7 Paper Magazine Motor A PM3
8 Paper magazine code sensor A SE3
6. Electrical parts
9 Paper End Sensor A SE6
Paper magazine mount A2

10 Paper Magazine Motor A2 PM22
11 paper magazine code sensor A2 SE28
12 Paper End Sensor A2 SE29
63051 2/2
63055
Paper supply unit A2 (positions of electrical parts)
! Layout diagram
6. Electrical parts
5
G086495

1 Width Change Motor A2 PM24
2 Paper Supply Motor A2 PM25
3 Pressure Release Motor A2 DM7
4 Pressure Change Sensor A2 SE30
5 Width Change Sensor A2 SE31
63055 1/1
63060
Paper supply unit (positions of electrical parts)
! Layout diagram
2 1
11 7
13
14
12 8 9 10
3
6. Electrical parts
4
G068425
Paper supply unit

1 Paper supply arm motor (left) PM7
2 Paper supply arm motor (right) PM8
3 Paper Hold Motor DM3
4 Paper Hold Sensor SE11
5 Paper Supply Pressure Change Motor DM2
6 Paper Supply Pressure Change Sensor SE10
7 Paper Loading Sensor SE7
8 Cut Home Sensor SE8
9 Cut End Sensor SE9
10 Cut Motor DM1
11 Ribbon Advance Motor DM6
12 Paper Supply Motor A PM5
13 Paper Advance Motor 1 PM6
14 Paper Supply Motor B/C PM4
63060 1/1
63070
Exposure advance unit (positions of electrical parts)
! Layout diagram
9
10
7
Front
4
5
Front
1
3
2
G085236
6. Electrical parts
1 Zigzagging correction sensor (left) SE12
2 Zigzagging correction sensor (right) SE13
3 Exposure start sensor SE14
4 Exposure advance pressure change sensor 1 SE15
5 Exposure advance pressure change sensor 2 SE16
6 Exposure advance motor 1 PM9
7 Exposure advance motor 2 PM11
8 Exposure advance pressure change motor 1 PM10
63070 1/1
63080
Laser unit (position and description of electrical parts)
! Type of the laser unit and identifying its type

There are the following types of laser units. There is no difference in functions and quality.
Laser unit (Type # # #)

Z026679: Laser unit (Type HhB) Z026680: Laser unit (Type IiB)
Z020259: Laser unit (Type hB) Z026681: Laser unit (Type iB)
Label: first five digits No. 03700 Label: first five digits No. 03730
J391231: G laser driver J391160: G laser driver
• For replacing and adjusting the position of the laser unit, see ☞ 26710.
• There are two ways to identify the type of the laser unit which is equipped as described below.
1. It can be identified by the version of the LASER on the System Version Check display.
☞ 35500
2. It can be identified by the label placed on the laser unit.
Laser unit
6. Electrical parts
Label: first five digits
03700####### 03730#######
Type hB Type iB
G085240
! Layout diagram
G068440
63080 1/2
63080
Laser unit
1 Laser unit heater H5 • When the laser unit temperature sensor is 19°C or lower, the laser
unit heater turns on.
• When the laser unit temperature sensor exceeds 20°C, the laser unit
heater turns off.
6. Electrical parts
63080 2/2
63090
Paper advance unit 1 (positions of electrical parts)
! Layout diagram
4
1 G068422

1 Paper advance motor 2 PM13
2 Pressure guide motor PM14
3 Pressure guide sensor SE17
6. Electrical parts
4 Paper sensor 1 SE18
63090 1/1
63100
Paper advance unit 2 (positions of electrical parts)
! Layout diagram
12 5 3 10 7
11 6 13
6. Electrical parts
1 8
2 4
G068424

1 Arm Sensor (Left) SE19
2 Arm Sensor (Right) SE20
3 Lane Select Sensor (Left) PM17
4 Lane Select Sensor (Right) PM18
5 Paper Advance Pressure Change Motor (Left) DM4
6 Paper Advance Pressure Change Motor (Right) DM5
7 Paper Advance Arm Motor (Left) PM15
8 Paper Advance Arm Motor (Right) PM16
9 Paper Advance Motor 3 PM19
10 Lane Select Sensor (Left) SE21
11 Lane Select Sensor (Right) SE22
12 Paper Advance Pressure Change Sensor (Left) SE23
13 Paper Advance Pressure Change Sensor (Right) SE24
63100 1/1
63110
Processor loading unit (positions of electrical parts)
! Layout diagram
G068423

1 Paper sensor 2 (left) SE25
2 Paper sensor 2 (center) SE26
3 Paper sensor 2 (right) SE27
6. Electrical parts
63110 1/1
63200
Position of PCBs (processor section)
Processor section (PCB positions) (QSS-3701/3702/3703/LP7500/LP7600)

[F][N][SM][J]
This item varies depending on the specification and model. See the references below.
Model Reference
QSS-3701/3702/3703 [SM] ☞ Processor section (PCB positions) (QSS-3701/3702/3703) [SM]
QSS-3701/3702/3703 [J] ☞ Processor section (PCB positions) (QSS-3701/3702/3703) [J]
QSS-3704/3705/LP7700/LP7900 [F][N][SM] ☞ 63201-5
! Layout diagram
QSS-3701/3702/3703 [N][SM][J] 1
3
2
6. Electrical parts
4
G085263
QSS-3701/3702/3703/LP7500/LP7600 [F]
7 2
1
3
← Remove the PCB

plate (four screws)
6 7
G085262
Processor section
1 Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
2 Processor I/O PCB 1 ☞ 66210
63200 1/2
63200

*1
4 Processor relay PCB ☞ 66220
5 Processor power supply 1 PS1 ☞ 67400
6 Processor power supply 2 PS2
7 F replenishment I/O PCB ☞ 66800 only for F specification
*1. For F specification, it is necessary to remove all connectors of processor power supply 1 and 2, then remove the PCB plate (four screws) to
remove the processor relay PCB.
Processor section (PCB positions) (QSS-3701/3702/3703) [SM]
! Layout diagram
1
G070039
SM replenishment unit
1 SM I/O PCB ☞ 66600
6. Electrical parts
Processor section (PCB positions) (QSS-3701/3702/3703) [J]
! Layout diagram
1 G051059

1 Tablet replenishment driver PCB ☞ 66500
63200 2/2
63201-5
Processor section (PCB positions) (QSS-3704/3705/LP7700/LP7900)

[F][N][SM]
Model Reference
QSS-3704 [SM] ☞ Processor section (PCB positions) (QSS-3704) [SM]
QSS-3701/3702/3703/LP7500/LP7600 [F][N][SM][J] ☞ 63200
! Layout diagram
QSS-3704/3705 [N]/QSS-3704 [SM] 1 8
2 3
4 5
6. Electrical parts
G085373
QSS-3704/3705/LP7700/LP7900 [F]
2
1 8
7
4 Back: 5 Front: 6
G085375
Processor section
1 Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
4 Processor relay PCB ☞ 66220
63201-5 1/2
63201-5

5 Processor power supply 1 PS1 ☞ 67400
6 Processor power supply 2 PS2
7 F replenishment I/O PCB ☞ 66800 only for F specification
8 Drive motor driver PCB ☞ 66870
Processor section (PCB positions) (QSS-3704) [SM]
! Layout diagram
1
G070039
1 SM I/O PCB ☞ 66600
6. Electrical parts
63201-5 2/2
63260
Dryer section (positions of electrical parts) (QSS-

3701/3702/3703/LP7500/LP7600)
Model Reference
QSS-3704/3705/LP7700/LP7900 ☞ 63270-5
! Layout diagram (dryer section)

QSS-3701/3702/3703/LP7500/LP7600
1 2 3
13 11
12 7
4
5
6. Electrical parts
8
6
10
G085269
Dryer section (electrical parts)

1 Print sensor (right) SE28
2 Print sensor (center) SE29
3 Print sensor (left) SE30
4 Dryer selection solenoid 1 SOL16
6 Dryer lane select sensor SE45
7 Dryer safety thermostat STH3
8 Dryer thermosensor TH4
9 Interlock switch (dryer cover) LS5
10 Dryer fan FAN15
63260 1/2
63260

11 Dryer heater H4
12 Processor condition light*1
13 Signal lamp Option
*1. For the operations of the processor condition light and manual sorter switch, see ☞ 63275.
6. Electrical parts
63260 2/2
63270-5
Dryer section (positions of electrical parts) (QSS-

3704/3705/LP7700/LP7900)
Model Reference
QSS-3701/3702/3703/LP7500/LP7600 ☞ 63260
! Layout diagram (dryer section)

QSS-3704/3705/LP7700/LP7900
1 2 3
13 14 11 7
12
6. Electrical parts
8
10
G085376
Dryer section (electrical parts)

1 Print sensor (right) SE28
2 Print sensor (center) SE29
3 Print sensor (left) SE30
6 Dryer lane select sensor SE45
8 Dryer thermosensor TH4
9 Interlock switch (dryer cover) LS5
10 Dryer fan FAN15
63270-5 1/2
63270-5

11 Dryer heater H4
13 Signal lamp Option
6. Electrical parts
63270-5 2/2
63271
Conveyor and order classification section (positions of PCBs and electrical

parts)
! Layout diagram [Print sorter unit (6-inch type, 17/14 orders)]
5
6
8, 9 7
1
2
6. Electrical parts
3
G085265
Conveyor, order classification section (electrical parts)

1 Sorter motor DM4
2 Sorter home sensor SE26
3 Print full sensor SE27
4 Manual sorter switch (manual replenishment switch)*1 SW1
5 Conveyor unit sensor SE25
6 Conveyor motor DM3
Order classification section (PCBs)

No. Name Manual No. Remarks
7 Order specifying LED PCB 1 ☞ 66840
8 Order specifying LED PCB 2 ☞ 66850 Print sorter unit (6-inch type/14 orders)
9 Order specifying LED PCB 3 ☞ 66860 Print sorter unit (6-inch type/17 orders)
63271 1/2
63271
! Layout diagram [Print sorter unit (10-inch type)]
11 2 7 8 9
10
5 6
6. Electrical parts
G085377
Conveyor, order classification section (electrical parts)

1 Manual sorter switch (manual replenishment switch)*1 SW1
3 Sorter motor DM4
4 Sorter home sensor SE26
5 Print full sensor 1 SE27
6 Print full sensor 2 SE49
8 Paper guide close sensor SE99
7 Paper guide open sensor SE100
9 Paper guide motor DM20
10 Conveyor unit sensor SE25
11 Conveyor motor DM3
63271 2/2
63275
Condition check of the processor condition light and Manual Sorter Switch
This section explains operations of the processor condition light and Manual Sorter Switch in various conditions.
! Conditions of the processor condition light and Manual Sorter Switch

Light Condition Light Condition Light Condition Light Condition
Lights in green Blinks in green Blinks in red Off
Lights in green Blinks in green - - Off
Condition Condition of the printer Condition of the Condition Processor Manual

I/F Main PCB processor of the condition Sorter Switch
X10*1 light
Both printer and processor started ON It is raising the ON
up normally. processing solution
temperatures.
It is standing ready to
adjust the processing
solution temperatures.
An error that cannot be
resolved occurs.
After the Close Down Checks ON→OFF It has stopped adjusting
were performed, and until the the processing solution
program timer activates. temperatures.
The error, Cannot
control temperature
6. Electrical parts
occurs.
The 200 V power supply is not OFF It has stopped adjusting OFF
supplied. the processing solution
temperatures.
The error, Cannot
control temperature
occurs.
The printer I/F PCB starts up OFF→ON It is raising the ON
while the program timer activates. processing solution
temperatures.
The error, Cannot
control temperature
occurs.
The printer I/F PCB finishes the ON The solution temperature ON
startup operation while the adjustment is complete.
program timer activates. The error, Cannot
control temperature
occurs.
" If the Manual Sorter Switch was pressed to start up the printer and processor forcibly while the program
timer activates
X10*1 light
The printer I/F main PCB starts up. OFF→ON It is raising the ON
processing solution
temperatures.
resolved occurs.
63275 1/2
63275

X10*1 light
The printer I/F main PCB finishes ON The solution temperature
the startup operation. adjustment is complete.
resolved occurs.
*1. X10 is a relay that is installed on the processor relay PCB.

When the X10 on the processor relay PCB turns on, power is supplied to all control PCBs and they start up.
6. Electrical parts
63275 2/2
63280
Positions of electrical parts (Processor section)
Processor section (positions of electrical parts) (QSS-

3701/3702/3703/LP7500/LP7600) [F]
Model Reference
QSS-3701/3702/3703[N] ☞ 63290
QSS-3701/3702/3703 [SM] ☞ 63300
QSS-3701/3702/3703 [J] ☞ 63310
QSS-3704/3705/LP7700/LP7900 [F] ☞ 63311
! Layout diagram
QSS-3701/3702/3703/LP7500/LP7600 [F]
From 1 to 12 32
13
From 15 to 20
22
6. Electrical parts
21 27
28
29
30
23 24 25 14 33
26
31
G085339
Processor section (front face)

1 P1 processing solution float switch FS1
P1 processable level
P1 processing solution level
P1 safety thermostat
3 PS1 processing solution float switch FS3
PS1 processable level
63280 1/4
63280

7 CD thermosensor TH1
8 BF thermosensor TH2
9 STB thermosensor TH3
10 P1 Heater H1
11 P2 Heater H2
12 PS Heater H3
13 Minute Meter CO Option
14 Power supply cooling fan 1 FAN14 Exhaust*1
15 CD circulation pump P1
16 BF circulation pump P3
17 STB1 circulation pump P5
21 Tank cooling fan 1 FAN4 Intake *1
22 CD digital flowmeter FLS1 Option
*2
23 P1R Replenisher Pump RP1
24 P2RA Replenisher Pump RP2
25 P2RB Replenisher Pump RP3
26 PSR Replenisher Pump RP4
6. Electrical parts
27 Earth leakage circuit breaker 1 NFB2 See ☞ 4203.
28 Earth leakage circuit breaker 2 NFB3
30 Terminal strip 1 TA1
32 Interlock switch (Processor top cover) LS4
33 Transformer TR1
*1. For details about processor section fan operation specification, see ☞ 63321.
*2. After replacing each electrical part, see Processor section (List of adjustment after electrical parts replacement) ☞ 63312.
63280 2/4
63280
! Layout diagram
QSS-3701/3702/3703/LP7500/LP7600 [F]
3 2 1 4 5 27 28 26
22 24
21
23
20
25
15 16
14 • Rear • Rear: 17
13, 12, 11, 10
• Middle: 18
• Front
6, 7, 8, 9 • Front: 19
6. Electrical parts
G085330
Processor section (back face)

1 Replenisher Cartridge Set Sensor SE60
*3
2 Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Upper) SE61
3 Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Lower) SE62
*3
4 Replenishment cartridge opening motor DM5
5 Interlock Switch (Replenisher Section Door) LS8
*3
6 P1R cartridge flushing valve MV4
7 P2RA cartridge flushing valve MV5
8 P2RB cartridge flushing valve MV6
9 P1R agitation solenoid valve MV7
10 P1 automated cleaning valve MV8
12 PS automated cleaning valve MV10
13 Automated cleaning valve - Unused
*3
14 Replenisher cartridge cleaning pump P17
15 PSR (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor LSE7
16 PSR (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor LSE8
63280 3/4
63280

*2*3
17 P1R (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor SE63
P1R (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor SE64
18 P2RA (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor SE65
P2RA (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor SE66
19 P2RB (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor SE67
P2RB (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor SE68
20 Temperature and humidity sensor SE69
21 Drive motor M11 If replaced, perform Drive Motor
Revolution Count Setting.
☞ 33502
22 Exhaust fan FAN13 Exhaust*1
23 Drive motor cooling fan FAN16 Blowing*1
24 Tank cooling fan 3 FAN12 Exhaust*1
26 CD effluent float switch FS7
27 STB effluent float switch FS9
28 Rack stopper sensor LS14
*2. For details about # # # replenishment solution level sensors, see the following image.
For replacing the replenishment solution level sensor, see ☞ 27530.
# # #(Upper) replenishment solution level sensor # # #(Lower) replenishment solution level sensor
6. Electrical parts
G085370
63280 4/4
63290
Processor section (positions of electrical parts) (QSS-3701/3702/3703) [N]
Model Reference
QSS-3701/3702/3703/LP7500/LP7600 [F] ☞ 63280
QSS-3701/3702/3703 [SM] ☞ 63300
QSS-3701/3702/3703 [J] ☞ 63310
QSS-3704/3705/LP7700/LP7900 [F] ☞ 63311
! Layout diagram
QSS-3701/3702/3703 [N] 20 9 8 7
10, 42, 1, 11, 43, 2, 3, 4, 5, 17, 12, 44, 6
18
21
25
23 24
From 26 to 31
53
46
6. Electrical parts
22
19
50
39, 40, 41
45
13, 14, 15
51 52
47
48
49
38, 37, 36, 35, 34, 33, 32, 16

G085334
Processor section
1 CD processing solution float switch FS1
CD refilling water level
CD processing solution level
CD safety thermostat
63290 1/3
63290

2 BF processing solution float switch FS2
BF refilling water level
BF processing solution level
BF safety thermostat
3 STB1 processing solution float switch FS3
STB1 refilling water level
STB4 processing solution level
STB4 safety thermostat
8 BF effluent float switch FS8 Option
13 CD replenishment solution level sensor LSE1
14 BF replenishment solution level sensor LSE2
15 STB replenishment solution level sensor LSE3
16 Refilling water tank level sensor LSE4
6. Electrical parts
19 Power supply cooling fan 1 FAN14 Circulation *1
☞ 33502
32 CD-W refilling water pump P9
33 BF-W refilling water pump P10
34 STB1-W refilling water pump P11
38 Cleaning pump 1 P15
39 CD replenisher pump RP1
40 BF replenisher pump RP2
63290 2/3
63290

41 STB replenisher pump RP3
42 CD heater H1
43 BF heater H2
44 STB heater H3
45 Hour meter HM1 Option
53 Transformer TR1
6. Electrical parts
63290 3/3
63300
Processor section (positions of electrical parts) (QSS-3701/3702/3703) [SM]
Model Reference
QSS-3701/3702/3703/LP7500/LP7600 [F] ☞ 63280
QSS-3701/3702/3703[N] ☞ 63290
QSS-3701/3702/3703 [J] ☞ 63310
QSS-3704/3705/LP7700/LP7900 [SM] ☞ Processor section (positions of electrical parts) (QSS-3704) [SM]
! Layout diagram
QSS-3701/3702/3703 [SM] 16
9 8 7
21
17
10,28,1,11,12,29,2,3,4,5,6,13,30,6
19
20
14
From 22 to 27
6. Electrical parts
39
15
18
36
37 38
31
32 33
34
35
G085333
Processing tank section

63300 1/4
63300

8 BF effluent float switch FS8
6. Electrical parts
☞ 33502
28 CD heater H1
29 BF heater H2
30 STB heater H3
39 Transformer TR1
63300 2/4
63300
! Layout diagram
QSS-3701/3702/3703 [SM]
26 3 21 13 22
2
23
25
29
24 6
4 28
27
19
12
18
10
17
6. Electrical parts
20
9 16
14
15 11
8
7 G070041
1 CD-A replenisher pump sensor SE32
2 CD-B replenisher pump sensor SE33
3 CD-C replenisher pump sensor SE34
4 BF-A replenisher pump sensor SE35
5 BF-B replenisher pump sensor SE36
6 STB replenisher pump sensor SE37
7 CD-A replenishment solution sensor SE38
8 CD-B replenishment solution sensor SE39
9 CD-C replenishment solution sensor SE40
10 STB replenishment solution sensor SE41
11 BF-A replenishment solution sensor SE42
12 BF-B replenishment solution sensor SE43
13 CD-W water supply pump sensor SE44
14 Water supply tank level sensor LSE5
15 Replenishment package sensor P-1 LS6
63300 3/4
63300

21 CD-W water supply pump RP1
22 BF-W water supply pump RP2
23 STB4-W water supply pump RP3
24 CD-A replenisher pump RP5
25 CD-B replenisher pump RP6
26 CD-C replenisher pump RP7
27 BF-A replenisher pump RP8
28 BF-B replenisher pump RP9
6. Electrical parts
63300 4/4
63310
Processor section (positions of electrical parts) (QSS-3701/3702/3703) [J]
Model Reference
QSS-3701/3702/3703/LP7500/LP7600 [F] ☞ 63280
QSS-3701/3702/3703[N] ☞ 63290
QSS-3701/3702/3703 [SM] ☞ 63300
! Layout diagram
QSS-3701/3702/3703 [J]
10, 32, 1, 11, 33, 2, 3, 4,13, 12, 34, 6
37
7 6 5
16
21
17
14
20
19
From 22 to 27
44
6. Electrical parts
18
15
41
29, 30, 31 35
36 42 43
38
39
8
28 40
G085332

63310 1/4
63310

8 SW/DW Tank Level Sensor LSE3
9 SW Tank Level Sensor LSE4
6. Electrical parts
☞ 33502
29 CD water supply pump RP1
30 BF water supply pump RP2
31 STB water supply pump RP3
32 CD heater H1
33 BF heater H2
34 STB heater H3
37 STB tablet conveyor motor DM5
63310 2/4
63310

44 Transformer TR1
! Layout diagram
QSS-3701/3702/3703 [J]
11 10
7
8
9
18 19
3 20
1
5
2
6
14
6. Electrical parts
13
12
15 4 16
G051047
Tablet replenishment unit section

1 CD Tablet Sensor 1 SE48
2 CD Tablet Sensor 2 SE49
3 BF Tablet Sensor 1 SE50
4 BF Tablet Sensor 2 SE51
5 STB Tablet Sensor 1 SE52
6 STB Tablet Sensor 2 SE53
7 CD Cartridge Sensor SE54
8 BF Cartridge Sensor SE55
9 STB Cartridge Sensor SE56
10 Upper sensor for elevator SE57
11 Middle sensor for elevator SE58
12 Lower sensor for elevator SE59
13 Tablet replenishment unit interlock switch LS9
14 CD Drum motor M4
15 BF Drum motor M5
16 STB Drum motor M6
17 Elevator motor M7
18 CD Operation Lamp L5
63310 3/4
63310

19 BF Operation Lamp L6
20 STB Operation Lamp L7
6. Electrical parts
63310 4/4
63311
Processor section (positions of electrical parts) (QSS-

3704/3705/LP7700/LP7900) [F]
Model Reference
QSS-3704/3705 [N] ☞ 63311-5
QSS-3704 [SM] ☞ Processor section (positions of electrical parts) (QSS-3704) [SM]
QSS-3701/3702/3703/LP7500/LP7600)[F] ☞ 63280
! Layout diagram
QSS-3704/3705/LP7700/LP7900 [F]
From 1 to 12 21 32
14
22
From 15 to 20
33
48
49
13
6. Electrical parts
47
23 24 25 26
30 31
34
27
45 28
29
46
• Left: 50 • Rear
44
43, 42, 41, 40
• Middle: 51
• Front
• Right: 52
36, 37, 38, 39
G085379
Processor section (front face)

63311 1/4
63311

10 P1 Heater H1
11 P2 Heater H2
12 PS Heater H3
13 Minute Meter CO Option
6. Electrical parts
*2
21 Replenishment cartridge opening motor DM5
22 Replenisher Cartridge Set Sensor SE60
*2
23 P1R Replenisher Pump RP1
24 P2RA Replenisher Pump RP2
25 P2RB Replenisher Pump RP3
26 PSR Replenisher Pump RP4
33 Transformer TR1
*2
36 P1R cartridge flushing valve MV4
37 P2RA cartridge flushing valve MV5
38 P2RB cartridge flushing valve MV6
39 P1R agitation solenoid valve MV7
42 PS automated cleaning valve MV10
43 Automated cleaning valve - Unused
63311 2/4
63311

44 Replenisher cartridge cleaning pump P17
45 PSR (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor LSE7
46 PSR (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor LSE8
*2
48 Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Upper) SE61
49 Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Lower) SE62
*2*3
50 P1R (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor SE63
P1R (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor SE64
51 P2RA (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor SE65
P2RA (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor SE66
52 P2RB (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor SE67
P2RB (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor SE68
*3. For details about # # # replenishment solution level sensors, see the following image.
For replacing the replenishment solution level sensor, see ☞ 27530.
# # #(Upper) replenishment solution level sensor # # #(Lower) replenishment solution level sensor
G085370
6. Electrical parts
! Layout diagram
QSS-3704/3705/LP7700/LP7900 [F] 8 7
9
3
2 5 6
G085380
Processor section (back face)

3 Temperature and humidity sensor SE69
63311 3/4
63311

*1
4 Exhaust fan FAN13 Exhaust
6. Electrical parts
63311 4/4
63311-5
Processor section (positions of electrical parts) (QSS-3704/3705) [N]
Model Reference
QSS-3704/3705/LP7700/LP7900 [F] ☞ 63311
QSS-3704 [SM] ☞ Processor section (positions of electrical parts) (QSS-3704) [SM]
QSS-3701/3702/3703[N] ☞ 63290
! Layout diagram
QSS-3704/3705 [N]
21 9 8 7
10, 47, 1, 11, 48, 2, 3, 4, 5, 17, 12, 49, 6
18
27
From 28 to 35 23
25
24
57
26
22
6. Electrical parts
51
19
20
55 56
44, 45, 46 50
13, 14, 15
52
53
54
43, 42, 41, 40, 39, 38, 37, 36, 16

G085383
Processor section
63311-5 1/7
63311-5

13 CD replenishment solution level sensor LSE1
14 BF replenishment solution level sensor LSE2
15 STB replenishment solution level sensor LSE3
16 Refilling water tank level sensor LSE4
6. Electrical parts
19 Power supply cooling fan 1 FAN14 Intake *1
27 Drive motor M3
28 CD1 circulation pump P1
30 BF1 circulation pump P3
36 CD-W refilling water pump P9
37 BF-W refilling water pump P10
63311-5 2/7
63311-5

44 CD replenisher pump RP1
45 BF replenisher pump RP2
47 CD heater H1
48 BF heater H2
49 STB heater H3
50 Hour meter HM1
57 Transformer TR1
6. Electrical parts
63311-5 3/7
63311-5
Processor section (positions of electrical parts) (QSS-3704) [SM]
Model Reference
QSS-3704/3705/LP7700/LP7900 [F] ☞ 63311
QSS-3704/3705 [N] ☞ Processor section (positions of electrical parts) (QSS-3704/3705) [N]
QSS-3701/3702/3703 [SM] ☞ 63300
! Layout diagram
QSS-3704 [SM]
18 9 8 7
11,30,1,12,31,2,3,4,5,14,13,32,6
15
From 24 to 29
23
21 20
16
19
22
40
6. Electrical parts
33
17
34 38 39
35
36
37
G085384

63311-5 4/7
63311-5

16 Power supply cooling fan 1 FAN14 Blowing*1
23 Drive motor M3
6. Electrical parts
30 CD heater H1
31 BF heater H2
32 STB heater H3
33 Hour meter HM1
40 Transformer TR1
63311-5 5/7
63311-5
! Layout diagram
QSS-3704 [SM]
27 28 29 30
2 24
23 3 4 5 6
13
22
25
19
1
26
18
10
17
21
9
20
15
12
8 16
11
7
14
G051045
6. Electrical parts
1 CD-A replenisher pump sensor SE32
2 CD-B replenisher pump sensor SE33
3 CD-C replenisher pump sensor SE34
4 BF-A replenisher pump sensor SE35
5 BF-B replenisher pump sensor SE36
6 STB replenisher pump sensor SE37
7 CD-A replenishment solution sensor SE38
8 CD-B replenishment solution sensor SE39
9 CD-C replenishment solution sensor SE40
10 STB replenishment solution sensor SE41
11 BF-A replenishment solution sensor SE42
12 BF-B replenishment solution sensor SE43
13 CD-W water supply pump sensor SE44
14 Water supply tank level sensor LSE5
17 STB1-W refilling water pump RP11
20 Cleaning pump 1 RP15
21 Cleaning pump 2 RP16
22 CD-W water supply pump RP1
23 BF-W water supply pump RP2
63311-5 6/7
63311-5

24 STB-W water supply pump RP3
25 CD-A replenisher pump RP5
26 CD-B replenisher pump RP6
27 CD-C replenisher pump RP7
28 BF-A replenisher pump RP8
29 BF-B replenisher pump RP9
6. Electrical parts
63311-5 7/7
63312
Processor section (List of adjustment after electrical parts replacement) [F]
Item Adjustment option after replacement Reference

P1R Replenisher Pump Replacing • Perform Pump Output Amount Measurement. ☞ 33003
P2RA Replenisher Pump
P2RB Replenisher Pump
PSR Replenisher Pump
P1R cartridge flushing valve*1 Replacing • Perform Measure Auto Cleaning Water Output ☞ 33004
P2RA cartridge flushing valve *1 Amount of Auto Cleaning Water Output Amount
Setting.
P2RB cartridge flushing valve*1
P1R agitation solenoid valve*1 • If necessary, perform Output Check for the ☞ 27540
P1 automated cleaning valve*2 cartridge flushing valve and replenishment
cartridge cleaning pump.
P2 automated cleaning valve*2
PS automated cleaning valve*2
Replenisher cartridge cleaning pump Replacing • Perform Initial Replenishment Operation of Auto ☞ 33004
Cleaning Water Output Amount Setting.
• Perform Measure Auto Cleaning Water Output
Amount of Auto Cleaning Water Output Amount
Setting.
P1R (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Replacing • Replacing the replenishment solution level sensor ☞ 27530
Sensor*3 • If necessary, perform Recovery procedure from the ☞ 4610
P1R (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level replenishment error 1 or Recovery procedure ☞ 4620
Sensor*3 from the replenishment error 2.
P2RA (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level
Sensor*3
P2RA (Lower) Replenishment Solution
Level Sensor*3
6. Electrical parts
P2RB (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level
Sensor*3
P2RB (Lower) Replenishment Solution
Level Sensor*3
Replenishment cartridge opening motor Replacing • If necessary, perform Replenishment cartridge ☞ 4600
Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor installation section troubleshooting flow.
(Upper)
Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor
(Lower)
*1. P1R, P2RA, P2RB and P1R cartridge flushing valves are to be replaced as a set.
*2. P1, P2 and P3 cartridge flushing valves are to be replaced as a set.
*3. # # #(upper) replenishment solution level sensor and # # #(lower) replenishment solution level sensor are to be replaced as a set.
63312 1/1
63315
Control strip auto loading unit (positions of PCBs and electrical parts)
! Layout diagram
1 2 3
G085189
(Position of PCBs)
6. Electrical parts
1 Control strip driver PCB ☞ 66810
2 Infrared communication unit ☞ 66830
(Position of electrical parts)

3 Control strip feed motor M1
4 Control strip holder detection switch LM1
5 Status lamp LED1
! (Checking of the status lamp)

When the auto loading unit is inserted, the green and red lights, as show in the figure, turn on from off.
When inserted In ten seconds after
Green: lighting Green: lighting Green: not

Red: lighting Red: not lighting lighting
Red: not lighting
G088042
If the light blinked

If an error occurs, the light blinks for about 60 seconds.
• If the red light blinked
Not communicating normally.
Start over the process following the procedure below.
63315 1/2
63315
1. Confirm that nothing is placed between the auto loading holder unit and the communication unit.
2. Remove the auto loading holder unit from the processor.
3. After five seconds or later, attach the auto loading holder unit to the processor again.
Communication starts again.
• If the green light blinked
Remaining battery level is low.
Though you can continue the process, replace batteries (four AA batteries) as soon as possible.
G087963
NOTE
• When automatic control strip processing starts, the red light turns on.
6. Electrical parts
63315 2/2
63316
Communication unit (positions of PCBs)
! Layout diagram
Front side Communication unit
Backside
G085338
(Position of PCBs)
6. Electrical parts
1 Control strip communication PCB ☞ 66820
2 Infrared communication unit ☞ 66830
63316 1/1
63318
Colorimeter unit (positions of electrical parts)
! Layout diagram
2 5
6. Electrical parts
3 4
G085255
Colorimeter unit (electrical parts)

*2
1 Colorimeter cooling fan FAN2
2 Colorimeter - Colorimeter unit
*1
3 Paper sensor 1 SE75
4 Paper sensor 2 *1 SE76
*1
5 Paper advance motor PM27
6 Pressure change solenoid *1 SOL1
7 Calibration plate advance motor*1 PM26
*1. To check these electrical parts, the colorimeter unit needs to be removed.
☞ 27460
*2. Operation of the colorimeter cooling fan
• On when the drive motor and dryer fan turn on.
• Off when the drive motor and dryer fan turn off.
63318 1/1
63321
Processor section (fan operation specification)
! Fan operation specification (QSS-3701/3702/3703/LP7500/LP7600)

Name Symbol Operation condition
Tank cooling fan 1 FAN10 When the CD or BF processing solution temperature is more than the setting temperature
Tank cooling fan 2 FAN11 for 30 seconds, the fan is on. When the CD or BF processing solution temperature is less
than the setting temperature for 30 seconds, the fan is off.
Tank cooling fan 3 FAN12
Exhaust fan FAN13 When the top cover is closed, the fan is always on.
When the top cover is opened, the fan is off.
Power supply cooling fan 1 FAN14 The fan is always on.
Drive motor cooling fan FAN16 When the drive motor operates, the fan is on. When the drive motor stops, the fan is off.
NOTE
• All the fans above except the exhaust fan are off while the program timer activates.
! Fan operation specification (QSS-3704/3705/LP7700/LP7900)

Name Symbol Operation condition
Tank cooling fan 1 FAN10 When the CD or BF processing solution temperature is more than the setting temperature
Tank cooling fan 2 FAN11 for 30 seconds, the fan is on. When the CD or BF processing solution temperature is less
than the setting temperature for 30 seconds, the fan is off.
Tank cooling fan 4*1 FAN17
Exhaust fan FAN13 When the top cover is closed, the fan is always on.
When the top cover is opened, the fan is off.
6. Electrical parts
*1. Tan cooling fan 4 is installed only for [N] systems.
NOTE
• All the fans above except the exhaust fan are off while the program timer activates.
63321 1/1
66000
Description of PCB (printer section)
Printer control PCB (J391423)
J219
J220
J221
J222
J223
J224
P225 P226
G085260
6. Electrical parts
! Function
• Controls the printer I/O PCB.
• Communicates with the laser control PCB.
• Performs the optical ARCNET communications.
! Reference
Layout diagram Symptom due to the poor connection of Symptoms of fuse blowout
wiring
☞ 63000 ☞ 4202 -
! Adjustments and precautions for PCB replacement

• When replacing a PCB, save the Memory data and Logdata of when a problem (error) occurs.
Press the Alt key and the Y key on the keyboard when the problem occurs. ☞ 31110
• Return the failed PCB with the Memory data and Logdata.
Explanation Reference
• Backup the system data. ☞ 35400
• Check the setting of the DIP switch. Refer to explanations in each
table.
• Read the system program. ☞ 35600
• Load the system data. ☞ 35400
• Perform paper sensor adjustment. ☞ 36000
IMPORTANT
• You can connect the optical fiber cable to any connector below only if you do not mistake IN and OUT.
66000 1/3
66000
• This PCB has connectors J219 (OUT), J220 (IN), J221 (OUT), J222 (IN), J223 (OUT) and J224 (IN) which are
connected to optical fiber cables. Be sure to read the Precautions in handling the cable before operation.
☞ 68100
! Unused connector
Connector No. Purpose Remarks
P210 Corresponds to the CVP. Option
P204 Quad magazine PCB, triple magazine PCB Option
P213 Quad magazine PCB Option
! Component parts table

LED No. Purpose Status
LED1 DC+5 V input check On when the power supply is
turned on.
LED2 DC+3.3 V input check On when the power supply is
turned on.
TP Purpose When the normal value (# V) is not detected Symptom

TP1 DC+5 V voltage measurement • Failure in the cable connection between the • ☞ No. 06901
• Power supply for digital circuits such printer power supply 5 and printer control ARCNET
as ARCNET, FPGA, memory, and PCB. communication
CPU • Failure in the printer power supply 5 and error. occurs.
• TP1: not installed printer control PCB.
TP2 to TP6 Ground − −
• TP2: installed
• TP3 TP6: not installed
6. Electrical parts
TP7 DC+3.3 V voltage measurement • Failure in the printer control PCB • ☞ No. 06901
• TP7: not installed ARCNET
communication
error. occurs.
TP8 to Unused − −
TP15*1 • Power supply for digital circuits such
as ARCNET, FPGA, memory, and
CPU
• TP8 to TP15: not installed
*1. Cannot use the voltmeter.
Switch No. Bit No. Settings Purpose Remarks

DS1 1 OFF Unused Be sure to turn off.
2 OFF Unused
3 OFF Unused
4 OFF Unused
2 OFF Unused
3 OFF Unused
4 OFF Unused
2 OFF Unused
3 OFF Unused
4 OFF Unused
66000 2/3
66000

2 OFF Unused
3 OFF Unused
4 OFF Unused
6. Electrical parts
66000 3/3
66005
Printer I/F main PCB (J391391, J391489)
J391391 J391489
P1204 P1205 P1204 P1205
P1206 P1206
P1202 P1203
TP30 TP29 TP30 TP29
CN6 CN6
TP25
TP22 TP21 TP21
P455 P455
TP31 DS1 TP24 TP24
TP18 TP18
TP6 TP1 P1207 P1207
TP7 TP2 TP9 TP10 TP7 TP2 TP9 TP10
TP4 TP8 TP11 P1208 TP1 TP8 TP11 P1208
TP13 TP14 TP4 TP13 TP14
TP5 TP12 TP15 TP17 TP31 TP12 TP15 TP17
LED3 LED5 LED3 LED5
TP16 TP16
TP20 LED4 LED6 LED4 LED6
TP3 TP19 TP3 TP19 TP39 TP35 TP36
TP22
LED2 + TP23 TP26 LED2 TP40 TP34 + TP23 TP26
TP28 TP28
LED1 LED1 TP27 TP37 TP38
TP27 P1212
P1200 P1211 P1210 P1200 P1211
P1214 P1213 P1214 P1213
P1212
G084988
! Function
• LAN interface
• Enlarges received JPEG images.
• Transfers images to the Exposure Engine Section.
• Controls LCD displays and optional keyboard unit.
• ARCNET communication
• The printer I/F main PCB retains all data that is read/written by Writing All Data or Reading All Data. ☞ 35400
6. Electrical parts
• Write down the information of Machine Type Registration, Language, IP Address, Subnet mask, Default gateway, Serial
Number (Printer/Processor), Date of shipment, and Communication Speed Setting of Machine Specification before replacing
the printer I/F main PCB. These items are not backed up.
• Compared to the printer I/F main PCB (J391391), some electrical parts and unused connectors are not included in the printer I/F
main PCB (J391489). However, these PCBs are compatible.
! Reference
wiring
☞ 63000 ☞ 4202 -

Explanation
• The printer I/F main PCB settings are configured as below when shipping this product.
• Machine Type Registration of the QSS-Printer: One of the QSS-3501/3502/3501i/3701/3702/3703/3704/3705
• Machine Type Registration of the FRONTIER-Printer: One of the LP7000/LP7100/LP7200/LP7500/LP7600/LP7700/LP7900
• IP Address: 192 . 168 . 1 . 11
• Subnet mask: 255. 255. 255. 224
• Replace the printer I/F main PCB.
• For the FRONTIER-Printer, see ☞ 66007.
• If you do not know IP Address, Subnet mask or Communication Speed Setting of the printer I/F main PCB to be replaced,
configure the IP Address, Subnet mask and Communication Speed Setting settings using the display module.
See the display module mode list.
66005 1/3
66005
IMPORTANT
• If you use the subnet mask 255. 255. 255. 224, specify an IP Address from those between 192 . 168 . 1 . 1 and 192 .
168 . 1 . 30. If an IP Address 192 . 168 . 1 .31 or higher is entered, the network is not connected normally.
• You can check the condition of the Printer I/F Main PCB with Image Path Check in ☞ 35920 or Printer I/F Main PCB
Self-Diagnostic in ☞ 35930 before replacing it.
• For precautions when handling optical fiber cables and LVPECL cables, see ☞ 68100.
! Unused connector
P1204, P1205, P1212 Unused
P1202, P1203, P1210 Unused Not mounted on J391489
CN6 Unused
P1211 Capacity booster Used only for
LP7500/LP7600/LP7700/LP7900,
3702/3703/3704/3705
P1213, P1214 Connects to the display module (keyboard Option
PCB)

LED1 For checking the • OFF: The PC and the printer I/F main PCB does not communicate.
(Red LED) connection • ON: The PC and the printer I/F main PCB normally communicates.
6. Electrical parts
LED2 For checking data • OFF: The PC and the printer I/F main PCB does not communicate.
(Red LED) transfer • Blinking: The PC and the printer I/F main PCB normally communicates.
• Quickly blinking: The data is being transferred from the PC to the printer I/F
main PCB.
LED3, LED4, LED5, Unused
LED6
Test point No. Purpose Measurement with voltmeter

TP27, TP28, TP29, TP30, TP31 Ground Possible
TP21 DC+5 V voltage measurement Possible
NOTE
• There are other types of TP for the printer I/F main PCB than described above, but they are not used for service.
• DS1 is not mounted on J391489.

2 OFF Unused
3 OFF Unused
4 OFF Unused
! Removing the Printer I/F Main PCB
1. Remove the paper supply unit.

☞ 25610
66005 2/3
66005
2. Remove printer control box 2 cover. (Loosen two screws out of seven screws.)
Printer control box 2 cover

G089688
3. Remove all the connectors connected to the Printer I/F Main PCB.
4. Remove the Printer I/F Main PCB with the PCB attaching plate. (Loosen two screws.)
6. Electrical parts
PCB attaching plate
Printer I/F Main PCB
G085430
66005 3/3
66006
Replacing the printer I/F main PCB (QSS-3701/3702/3703/3704/3705)
IMPORTANT
• If you use the subnet mask 255. 255. 255. 224, specify an IP Address from those between 192 . 168 . 1 . 1 and 192 . 168
. 1 . 30. If an IP Address 192 . 168 . 1 .31 or higher is entered, the network is not connected normally.
• If the following error occurs after the printer I/F main PCB is replaced and the power supply of the printer is turned on with the EZ
Controller started, quit the EZ Controller and turn off the power supply of the PC and the printer for about 30 seconds, then follow
the procedure for replacing the printer I/F main PCB.
• ☞ No. 06909 CPU was reset. Abort the process.
• ☞ No. 06901 ARCNET communication error.
! Explanation
When replacing the printer I/F main PCB, the setting is required in the following procedure.
1. Before replacing the PCB, write down Machine Type Registration, Language, IP Address, Subnet
mask, Default gateway, Serial Number (Printer/Processor), Date of shipment and
Communication Speed Setting on the Machine Specification display.

6. Electrical parts
• ☞ 35800
2. Before replacing the I/F main PCB, get the printer backup data.
☞ 35400
• Get all of the printer backup data.
3. Quit the printer maintenance application, and turn off the PC power supply and printer power supply.
4. Replace the printer I/F main PCB.
66006 1/7
66006
5. Turn on the power supply of the PC while the power supply of the printer is off.
IMPORTANT
• This prevents the following error from being occurred when the printer power supply is turned on after the
printer I/F main PCB is replaced.
• ☞ No. 06909 CPU was reset. Abort the process.
• ☞ No. 06901 ARCNET communication error.
6. Start the PC, and quit the EZ Controller or the Noritsu Quick Access if it is installed.
This prevents automatic upgrade of the printer maintenance application if the EZ Controller is installed.
7. If several printers are connected, temporarily prepare the environment so that the operation PC can
connect the printer I/F main PCB one on one.
• See ☞ How to change settings if several printers are connected in 66006.
8. Turn on the power supply of the printer.

NOTE
• Do not start the EZ Controller or the Noritsu Quick Access.
9. Confirm the network setting of the operation PC.
• If the settings of IP Address: 192 . 168 . 1 . 11, Subnet mask: 255 . 255 . 255 . 224 and Default gateway: 0 . 0 . 0 . 0 (default settings
of the printer I/F main PCB when shipping) of Machine Specification noted in Step 1 before replacing the printer I/R main PCB are
not changed, go to Step 11.
6. Electrical parts
Start → Right-click My Network Place. → Click Properties. → Right-click Local Area Connection. → Click Properties.
→ Local Area Connection Properties
Start→My Network Place Protocol of the Local Area Protocol of the Internet Protocol
Connection (TCP/IP)
(1) Select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP).

(2) Click Properties.
(3) Write down IP Address, Subnet mask and Default gateway.
66006 2/7
66006
(4) Change IP Address, Subnet mask , and Default gateway of the operation PC to connect IP Address : 192 .
168 . 1 . 11, Subnet mask : 255 . 255 . 255 . 224 and Default gateway : No setting of the printer I/F main
PCB.
Example
Operation PC IP Address : 192 . 168 . 1 . 12, Subnet mask : 255 . 255 . 255 . 224
Default gateway : No setting
(5) Click OK.
10. Perform Output Device Registration.

Start → All Programs → Select QSS-Printer. → Click Output Device Registration.
3 1, 2
6. Electrical parts
5 7 6
(1) Write down the Output Device Name shown in Output Device List.
(2) Delete the Output Device shown in Output Device List.
Select Output Device and click Delete.
(3) Click the Find button.
(4) Select this printer from the Connected device list then click >.
NOTE
• Any of the printers is shown at Machine Type Registration. However, you do not have to change the setting
because this will be changed in Step 11.
(5) Select this printer from the Output Device List, and register the name noted in Step (1).
(6) Click Enter.
(7) Click Cancel.
66006 3/7
66006
11. Configure the Machine Type Registration, Language, Date of shipment and Communication
Speed Setting settings on the Machine Specification display that were noted before replacing the
printer I/F main PCB in Step 1.

IMPORTANT
• Do not change the settings of IP Address, Subnet mask and Default gateway on the Machine Specification
display.
6. Electrical parts
The Software Upgrade of the printer I/F main PCB may not complete normally.
NOTE
• It may take about several tens of seconds to complete the registration of Machine Specification.
12. Perform Software Upgrade of the printer I/F main PCB.

☞ 35600
M5330-02

NOTE
• It may take about two minutes to complete the upgrade of the printer I/F main PCB.
66006 4/7
66006
13. Read the printer backup data that has been obtained before replacing the printer I/F main PCB in
Step 2.
☞ 35400
IMPORTANT
• If the printer backup data could not be obtained before replacing the printer I/F main PCB in Step 2, load the
data to the printer using one of the following methods.
• Load the EZ Controller backup data, that was automatically saved on the HDD right before the system enters the
program timer mode at the Close Down Checks, in Step 18.
• Destination: C:\Noritsukoki\DailyBkData\BkData_YYYYMMDD\BkData (information file for the saved
data), BkData_YYYYMMDD.LZH (saved data)
Click F on the Controller Main Display. → Management Tool → System management → Data management
→ Reading and Writing Data
• Load the latest printer backup data obtained before replacing the printer I/F main PCB.
14. Configure the IP Address, Subnet mask, Default gateway and Serial Number (Printer/Processor)
settings on the Machine Specification display that were noted before replacing the printer I/F main
PCB in Step 1.
Machine Specification (1)
6. Electrical parts
• If the settings of IP Address : 192 . 168 . 1 . 11, Subnet mask : 255 . 255 . 255 . 224, Default gateway : 0 . 0 . 0 . 0 are
not changed:
1. Set the Serial Number (Printer/Processor) on the Machine Specification display.
changed:
1. Configure the IP Address, Subnet mask, Default gateway and Serial Number (Printer/Processor) on the
Machine Specification display.
NOTE
• It may take about one minute to complete the registration of Machine Specification.
66006 5/7
66006
15. Configure the Time setting in Machine Specification→Functions→Program Timer Setting.
16. Quit the printer maintenance application.

NOTE
• If the IP Address of the PC and the printer differ, the message Communication line was disconnected. Close the
maintenance screen. may be shown. However, the system will normally returns if Step 17 is performed.
• It may take about one minute to quit the printer maintenance application.
17. If IP Address, subnet mask and Default gateway have been changed to replace the printer I/F main
PCB, return the settings as below.
(1) If the environment for connecting the operation PC and printer I/F main PCB have been temporarily changed in
Step 1 of How to change settings if several printers are connected, return the settings as they were.
(2) Return the settings of IP Address, Subnet mask and Default gateway noted in Step (3) of Step 9.
(3) Check if the printer maintenance application starts normally.
18. Confirm if prints are normally made from the EZ Controller or the Noritsu Quick Access.
19. End
! How to change settings if several printers are connected
6. Electrical parts
Printer Replacing the printer I/F main PCB Disconnect the cable.
Straight cable Cross cable
Printer
PC
HUB
Printer
Example 1 Example 2
Printer Printer
PC PC
HUB HUB
Printer Printer
G085196
2. If the operation PC and the printer I/F main PCB are directly connected when the network is being
established as an example 2, confirm the Advanced setting in the Computer Management.

Start → Right-Click My Computer. → Manage (G) → Click Device Manager. → Double-click Network adapters. →
Right-click Ineel# # #. → Click Properties. → Click Advanced.
66006 6/7
66006
Computer Management Advanced
NOTE
• The Auto Detect display of the Link Speed & Duplex may vary depending on the the PC.
(1) If the Link Speed & Duplex is not set to Auto Detect, set it to Auto Detect.
NOTE
• Write down the Link Speed & Duplex setting as needed.
(2) Click OK.
6. Electrical parts
3. If the operation PC and printer I/F main PCB are connected via HUB as an example 1, match the HUB
setting with Link Speed & Duplex.
4. Turn on the power supply of the printer.

See Step 8 in 66006.
66006 7/7
66007
Replacing the printer I/F main PCB (LP7500/7600/7700/7900)
IMPORTANT
• If you use the subnet mask 255. 255. 255. 224, specify an IP Address from those between 192 . 168 . 1 . 1 and 192 . 168
. 1 . 30. If an IP Address 192 . 168 . 1 .31 or higher is entered, the network is not connected normally.
! Explanation
When replacing the printer I/F main PCB, the setting is required in the following procedure.
1. Before replacing the PCB, write down Machine Type Registration, Language, IP Address, Subnet
mask, Default gateway, Serial Number (Printer/Processor), Date of shipment and
Communication Speed Setting on the Machine Specification display.

6. Electrical parts
• ☞ 35800
2. Before replacing the I/F main PCB, get the printer backup data.
☞ 35400
• Get all of the printer backup data.
3. Quit the printer maintenance application, and turn off the PC power supply and printer power supply.
4. Replace the printer I/F main PCB.
5. Turn on the power supply of the printer and the PC.
• See ☞ How to change settings if several printers are connected in 66007.
66007 1/7
66007
• If the settings of IP Address: 192 . 168 . 1 . 11, Subnet mask: 255 . 255 . 255 . 224 and Default gateway: 0 . 0 . 0 . 0 (default settings
of the printer I/F main PCB when shipping) of Machine Specification noted in Step 1 before replacing the printer I/R main PCB are
not changed, go to Step 9.

Start → Right-click My Network Place. → Click Properties. → Right-click Local Area Connection. → Click Properties. →
Local Area Connection Properties
Start→My Network Place Protocol of the Local Area Protocol of the Internet Protocol
Connection (TCP/IP)
6. Electrical parts
(1) Select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP).
(2) Click Properties.
(3) Write down IP Address, Subnet mask and Default gateway.
(4) Change IP Address, Subnet mask , and Default gateway of the operation PC to connect IP Address : 192 .
168 . 1 . 11, Subnet mask : 255 . 255 . 255 . 224 and Default gateway : No setting of the printer I/F main
PCB.
Example
Operation PC IP Address : 192 . 168 . 1 . 12, Subnet mask : 255 . 255 . 255 . 224
Default gateway : No setting
(5) Click OK.
8. Perform Output Device Registration.

Start → All Programs → Select FRONTIER-Printer. → Click Output Device Registration.
66007 2/7
66007
3 1, 2
5 7 6
(1) Write down the Output Device Name shown in Output Device List.
(2) Delete the Output Device shown in Output Device List.
Select Output Device and click Delete.
(3) Click the Find button.
(4) Select this printer from the Connected device list then click >.
NOTE
• Any of the printers is shown at Machine Type Registration. However, you do not have to change the setting
because this will be changed in Step 9.
(5) Select this printer from the Output Device List, and register the name noted in Step (1).
6. Electrical parts
(6) Click Enter.
(7) Click Cancel.
9. Configure the Machine Type Registration, Language, Date of shipment and Communication
Speed Setting settings on the Machine Specification display that were noted before replacing the
printer I/F main PCB in Step 1.

66007 3/7
66007
IMPORTANT
• Do not change the settings of IP Address, Subnet mask and Default gateway on the Machine Specification
display.
The Software Upgrade of the printer I/F main PCB may not complete normally.
NOTE
• It may take about several tens of seconds to complete the registration of Machine Specification.
10. Perform Software Upgrade of the printer I/F main PCB.

☞ 35600
M5330-03
6. Electrical parts
NOTE
• It may take about two minutes to complete the upgrade of the printer I/F main PCB.
11. Read the printer backup data that has been obtained before replacing the printer I/F main PCB in
Step 2.
☞ 35400
IMPORTANT
• If the printer backup data could not be obtained before replacing the printer I/F main PCB in Step 2, load the
latest printer backup data that was saved before replacing the printer I/F main PCB.
66007 4/7
66007
12. Configure the IP Address, Subnet mask, Default gateway and Serial Number (Printer/Processor)
settings on the Machine Specification display that were noted before replacing the printer I/F main
PCB in Step 1.
Machine Specification (1)
not changed:
1. Set the Serial Number (Printer/Processor) on the Machine Specification display.
changed:
6. Electrical parts
1. Configure the IP Address, Subnet mask, Default gateway and Serial Number (Printer/Processor) on the
Machine Specification display.
NOTE
• It may take about one minute to complete the registration of Machine Specification.
13. Configure the Time setting in Machine Specification→Functions→Program Timer Setting.
14. Quit the printer maintenance application.

NOTE
• If the IP Address of the PC and the printer differ, the message Communication line was disconnected. Close the
maintenance screen. may be shown. However, the system will normally returns if Step 15 is performed.
• It may take about one minute to quit the printer maintenance application.
15. If IP Address, subnet mask and Default gateway have been changed to replace the printer I/F main
PCB, return the settings as below.
(1) If the environment for connecting the operation PC and printer I/F main PCB have been temporarily changed in
Step 1 of How to change settings if several printers are connected, return the settings as they were.
(2) Return the IP Address, Subnet mask and Default gateway settings in Step (3) of Step 7.
(3) Check if the printer maintenance application starts normally.
16. Check that print can be made properly.
66007 5/7
66007
17. End
! How to change settings if several printers are connected
Printer Replacing the printer I/F main PCB Disconnect the cable.
Straight cable Cross cable
Printer
PC
HUB
Printer
Example 1 Example 2
Printer Printer
PC PC
HUB HUB
Printer Printer
G085196
2. If the operation PC and the printer I/F main PCB are directly connected when the network is being
6. Electrical parts
established as an example 2, confirm the Advanced setting in the Computer Management.

Start → Right-Click My Computer. → Manage (G) → Click Device Manager. → Double-click Network adapters. →
Right-click Ineel# # #. → Click Properties. → Click Advanced.
Computer Management Advanced
NOTE
• The Auto Detect display of the Link Speed & Duplex may vary depending on the the PC.
66007 6/7
66007
(1) If the Link Speed & Duplex is not set to Auto Detect, set it to Auto Detect.
NOTE
• Write down the Link Speed & Duplex setting as needed.
(2) Click OK.
3. If the operation PC and printer I/F main PCB are connected via HUB as an example 1, match the HUB
setting with Link Speed & Duplex.

See Step 7 in 66007.
6. Electrical parts
66007 7/7
66008
Capacity booster PCB
Name Part No. Status from LED1 to LED4*1 Illustration

LED1 LED2 LED3 LED4
Capacity booster PCB F J391452 Off On Off Off
J39145#
Capacity booster PCB G J391453 On On Off Off TP1 LED5
Capacity booster PCB H J391454 Off Off On Off J861 CN1
Capacity booster PCB I J391455 On Off On Off J860
LED1
LED2
LED3
LED4
J862
Booster
*1. The status of capacity booster PCBs F, G, H and I shows.
! Function
• The processing capacity of the system can be changed by installing capacity booster PCB and Capacity Booster Software.
NOTE
• The Capacity Booster Software and capacity booster PCB cannot be ordered separately.
! Reference
wiring
☞ 63000 ☞ 4202 -
6. Electrical parts
Explanation
• Install Capacity Booster Software.
• After installing the Capacity Booster Software, click OK on the Machine Specification display.
! Unused connector
• Connector No. Purpose Remarks
P861 Used for connecting to other capacity booster PCB Used only for capacity booster PCB F
P862 Used for connecting to other capacity booster PCB Used only for capacity booster PCB G
CN1 Unused

LED1 For checking the detection status of the capacity OFF*1
LED2 booster On when the power supply is turned on.*1
LED3 OFF*1
LED4 OFF*1
LED5 DC+5 V input check On when the power supply is turned on.
*1. When the capacity booster PCB F is normally detected
Test point No. Purpose Measurement with voltmeter Remarks

TP1 Ground Possible Not mounted
66008 1/1
66010
Laser control PCB (J391465)
TP7
TP6 P1515
P1508 B G R
P1513
P1517 P1516 P1501 P1502 P1503
P1551
TP17
TP2 F1
TP22 TP23 F2
CN1
TP16 P1541
TP3 F3
P1533
P1535
P1534
TP12
TP9
P1521
CN5 TP10 TP11 TP8
P1543
P1520
TP 15 TP13
TP21
TP 14 TP20
TP19 P1505
P1519
TP 4 TP 1 TP18
TP5 P1509 P1510 P1506 P1532 P1522 P1504
6. Electrical parts
G085258
! Function
• Controls the laser unit.
• Receives image data from the printer I/F main PCB.
• Controls correction of image data.
• Communicates with the printer control PCB.
• Performs the optical ARCNET communications.
• Controls the interlock of the G-AOM driver.
• Controls laser unit heater, laser unit cooling fans 1 and 2 and laser control box cooling fans 1 and 2.
• Relays the control signal of the polygon mirror driver, R laser and B laser.
! Reference
wiring
☞ 63000 ☞ 4202 ☞ 4252

66010 1/3
66010
IMPORTANT
• For precautions when handling optical fiber cables and LVPECL cables, see ☞ 68100.
! Unused connector
CN1, CN5, P1510, P1534 Unused

• Although test pins except T5 and T7 are unmounted, the test points can be used for the measurement.

TP1 DC+5 V voltage measurement • Failure in the cable connection between the • ☞ No. 06901 ARCNET
• Power supply for digital circuits such printer power supply 5 and laser control communication error.
as ARCNET, FPGA, memory, and PCB. occurs.
CPU • Failure in the printer power supply 5 and
laser control PCB.
• It shorted out between the laser control PCB
and the laser. (J/P1509, J/P1515, J/P1519)
TP2 DC+24 V−1 voltage measurement • Failure in the laser power supply, failure in The polygon mirror does not
• Power supply for the polygon mirror the cable connection between the laser power operate.
driver supply and laser control PCB
• Failure in the laser power supply and laser
control PCB.
and the laser. (J/P1515)
TP3 DC+24 V−2 voltage measurement • Failure in the laser power supply and laser • The temperature of the B
6. Electrical parts
• Power supply for the B laser heater control PCB. laser heater and R laser
and R laser heater • Failure in the laser power supply, failure in heater cannot be adjusted.
• Power supply for the laser unit the cable connection between the laser power • The laser does not emit
supply and laser control PCB light.
and the AOM driver. (J/P1543)
TP4 Ground − −
TP5 Ground − −
TP6 Ground − −
TP7 Ground − −
TP8 Ground − −
TP9 DC+24 V-IL voltage measurement • Failure in the cable connection between the The laser does not emit light.
• Power supply for the laser unit laser control PCB and the F-AOM driver
• Failure in the interlock switch (printer top
cover)
TP10 DC-12 V voltage measurement • Failure in the laser control PCB
• Power supply for the laser unit
66010 2/3
66010

TP11 DC+-12 V-IL voltage measurement • Failure in the cable connection between the The laser does not emit light.
• Power supply for the laser unit laser control PCB and the F-AOM driver
• Failure in the interlock switch (printer top
cover)
TP12 DC+12 V-IL voltage measurement • Failure in the laser control PCB
• Power supply for the laser unit
TP13 DC A5 V voltage measurement • The temperature of the laser
• Power supply for analog circuits unit heater, B laser heater,
(temperature adjustment) and R laser heater cannot be
adjusted.
TP14 DC A3.3 V voltage measurement
• Power supply for analog circuits
(temperature adjustment)
TP15 DC+3.3 V voltage measurement • ☞ No. 06901 ARCNET
• Power supply for digital circuits such communication error.
as FPGA, memory and CPU occurs.
TP16 DC+1.2 V voltage measurement The laser control PCB does not
• FPGA power supply operate.
TP17 DC+2.5 V voltage measurement Cannot receive image data from
• LVPECL power supply the printer I/F main PCB.
TP18 DC LD9 V-IL voltage measurement • Failure in the cable connection between the The B laser does not emit light.
• Power supply for B laser laser control PCB and laser unit PCB
TP19 DC LD5 V-IL voltage measurement • Failure in the laser control PCB The R laser does not emit light.
• Power supply for R laser • It shorted out between the laser control PCB
TP20 DC LAS5 V-IL voltage measurement The B and R lasers do not emit
6. Electrical parts
• Control power for B and R lasers light.
TP21 DC LAS-5 V-IL voltage measurement
• Control power for B and R lasers
TP22 DC A5 V2 voltage measurement • Failure in the laser control PCB The laser does not emit light.
• Power supply for image analog
circuits
TP23 DC+24 V−3 voltage measurement • Failure in the laser power supply • The temperature of the laser
• Power supply for laser unit cooling • Failure in the cable connection between the unit heater cannot be
fans 1 and 2, and laser control box laser control PCB and laser power supply adjusted.
cooling fan 1 • It shorted out between the laser control PCB • Laser unit cooling fans 1
• Power supply for the laser unit heater and the laser. (J/P1551) and 2, and laser control box
cooling fan 1 do not
operate.
Fuse No. Rating Purpose

F1 T3.15 A/125 V DC+24 V-1 power supply protection
66010 3/3
66020
Printer I/O PCB 1 (J391483)
P244
Unused depending on the conditions

G085397
! Function
• Controls paper magazine motors B and C, exposure advance motors 1 and 2, exposure advance pressure change motors 1 and 2,
6. Electrical parts
paper advance motor 2, pressure guide motor, paper advance section cooling fan 1, inner cooling fan, control box cooling fan 1,
and counter. Switches on/off by interlock switches (printer doors 1 and 2).
• Relays the power supply to PCBs.
! Reference
wiring
☞ 63000 ☞ 4202 ☞ 4252

• None
! Unused connector
P232 Counter Option
P243 Unused
P244 Unused
P246 Triple magazine PCB Option
P253 Quad magazine PCB
P255 CVP unit Option

LED1 DC+24 V-1 input check ON when power is supplied, OFF when the interlock
switch is off.
66020 1/2
66020

LED2 DC+24 V-2 input check ON when power is supplied, OFF when the interlock
switch is off.
LED4 DC+36 V input check ON when power is supplied, OFF when the interlock
switch is off.
LED6 For checking the interlock OFF when the interlock switch is off.

TP1 DC+24 V−1 voltage Possible 0 V when interlock switch is off.
measurement
measurement
TP4 DC+36 V voltage measurement Possible 0 V when interlock switch is off.
TP6 DC+5 V interlock check Possible 0 V when interlock switch is off.
TP7 Ground Possible
TP8 Ground Possible
Fuse No. Rating Purpose Remarks

F32 T6.3 A/125 V DC+24 V−1 power supply protection
F33 T6.3 A/125 V DC+24 V−2 power supply protection
F34 T3.15 A/125 V DC+24 V power supply protection
6. Electrical parts
66020 2/2
66030
Unused depending on the conditions

G068358
! Function
6. Electrical parts
• Controls the electrical parts of paper supply unit.
! Reference
wiring
☞ 63000 ☞ 4202 -

• None
! Unused connector
P267 Triple magazine Option
Quad magazine

Test point No. Purpose Measurement with Remarks
voltmeter
TP1 DC+5 V voltage measurement Possible 0 V when interlock switch is off.
TP2 DC+36 V voltage Possible 0 V when interlock switch is off.
measurement
measurement
TP4 Ground Possible
TP5 Ground Possible
66030 1/1
66040
G068359
! Function
• Relays the control signals and input signals of paper magazine mounts B and C, exposure advance unit, paper advance unit 1,
paper advance unit 2, and processor loading unit.
• Drive function of motors of paper advance unit 2.
• Drive function of control box cooling fans 2, 3, and 4.
• Relays the control signals of paper magazine lamp B/C.
! Reference
6. Electrical parts
wiring
☞ 63000 ☞ 4202 ☞ 4252

• None
! Unused connector
• None

LED2 DC+24 V-3 input check ON when power is supplied, OFF when the interlock switch is
off.
LED3 DC+24 V-4 input check ON when power is supplied, OFF when the interlock switch is
off.

voltmeter
measurement
TP3 DC+24 V-4 voltage Possible 0 V when interlock switch is off.
measurement
TP4 Ground Possible
66040 1/2
66040

voltmeter
TP5 Ground Possible

F37 T6.3 A/125 V DC+24 V−3 power supply
protection
F38 T6.3 A/125 V DC+24 V−4 power supply
protection
6. Electrical parts
66040 2/2
66050
Triple magazine PCB (J391257)
Unused
G068360
! Function
• Controls the electrical parts of the triple magazine unit.
! Reference
wiring
6. Electrical parts
☞ 63000 ☞ 4202 -

• None
! Unused connector
P302 Unused

voltmeter
measurement
TP3 Unused Impossible
TP4 Ground Possible
TP5 Ground Possible
66050 1/1
66055
Quad magazine PCB (J391177)
Unused
G086483
! Function
• Controls the electrical parts of the quad magazine unit.
6. Electrical parts
! Reference
wiring
☞ 63000 ☞ 4202 ☞ 4252

• None
! Unused connector
P1710 Unused

LED2 IL+36 V input check Lights when the interlock switch is on.
LED3 IL+36 V input check Lights when the interlock switch is on.

TP1 DC+5 V voltage measurement Possible Not mounted
TP2 Ground Possible
66055 1/2
66055

TP4 IL+36 V voltage measurement Possible Not mounted
TP5 IL+24 V voltage measurement Possible Not mounted

F55 T3.15 A/125 V Protection of IL+36 V
F56 T2.0 A/125 V Protection of IL+24 V
6. Electrical parts
66055 2/2
66070
G laser driver
G laser driver (J391160) G laser driver (J391231)
CN3(P1664)
CN2(P1663)
CN1(P1665)
CN4(P1666)
Unused
G085489
! Function
• Controls the G laser
! Reference
wiring
6. Electrical parts
☞ 63000 ☞ 4202 -

• Install the G laser driver according to the laser unit type.
! Unused connector
PCB Name Connector No. Purpose
G laser driver (J391160) P1666 Unused
G laser driver (J391231) P1666 Unused

• None
66070 1/1
66080
G-AOM driver (Z025645)
J1639
J1636
J1638
J1637
G085042
! Function
• Converts the image data to the signal that controls the AOM (optoacoustic modulation) element.
• Controls AOM (optoacoustic modulation) element.
! Reference
wiring
☞ 63000 ☞ 4202 -
6. Electrical parts
• Perform the daily setup for each paper type.
• If the daily setup is completed normally, the work has finished.

• If the daily setup is not completed normally, perform the initial setup.
! Unused connector
• None

• None
! Removing the AOM driver

☞ 26550
3. Remove the processor loading unit.
☞ 26610
66080 1/2
66080
4. Replace the G-AOM driver.

G-AOM driver
G085234
6. Electrical parts
66080 2/2
66090
CVP PCB (J391258)
Not mounted depending on conditions
G066110
! Function
• Controls the correction value printing unit.
! Reference
6. Electrical parts
wiring
☞ 63000 ☞ 4202 ☞ 4252

• None
! Unused connector
• None
IMPORTANT
• Although sometimes the test pins are unmounted, the test points can be used for the measurement.

voltmeter
TP2 Ground Possible

F25 T3.15 A/125 V DC+36 V power supply 0 V when interlock switch is off.
protection
66090 1/1
66095
Operation key PCB (J391400)
SW8
SW2
SW5
P850 SW6 P851

SW3
SW4
SW1 SW7
G085073
! Function
• Operation keyboard of the display module unit
• Relays the signal to the display module from the printer I/F main PCB
! Reference
wiring
☞ 63000 - -
6. Electrical parts
• None
! Unused connector
• None

• None
66095 1/1
66100
Power supply (printer section)
CN52
CN1
(P432) CN51
(P418)
6. Electrical parts
Unused
G085242
! Function
Symbol Name Part No. Function
PS1 Printer power supply 1 I038361 Supplies the power to the printer I/O PCBs 1 and 3 DC+24 V
and quad magazine PCB.
PS2 Printer power supply 2 I038430 Supplies the power to printer I/O PCB 1. DC+36 V
I038406*1
PS3 Printer power supply 3 I038364 Supplies the power to printer I/O PCB 1. DC+24 V
I038421*1
PS5 Laser power supply I038402 Supplies power to the printer control PCB and laser DC+24 V
I038405*1 control PCB.
PS6 Printer power supply 4 I038409 Supplies the power to the quad paper magazine DC+36 V
PCB.
PS4 Printer power supply 5 I038427 Supplies the power to printer control PCB, printer DC+5 V
I/O PCBs 1 and 3, laser control PCB, printer I/F
expansion PCB, printer I/F main PCB and G laser
driver.
IMPORTANT
• Each power supply is equipped with the overvoltage and overheat protection functions. If the functions operate, turn
off the circuit breaker of the system and wait for a while, then turn it on again. If the overheat protection function is
operated, check if each cooling fan is in operation.
66100 1/2
66100
! Reference
wiring
☞ 63000 ☞ 4202 -

• Do not change each volume that has already been adjusted by the manufacturer before shipment.
! Unused connector
Power supply Connector No. Purpose Remarks
Printer power supply 1 CN2, CN52 Unused
Printer power supply 2 None
Laser power supply None
Printer power supply 5 CN2, CN52 Unused

Fuse
Power supply Fuse No. Purpose Remarks
Printer power supply 1 F1 AC 200 V power Cannot be replaced.
supply protection
Printer power supply 2 F1 AC 200 V power
6. Electrical parts
supply protection
supply protection
Laser power supply F1 AC 200 V power
supply protection
supply protection
supply protection
66100 2/2
66200
Explanation of PCBs (Processor section)
Processor control PCB (J391467)
TP4 P522 P520 P519 P527 P512 P523
P525
P526
P510
P524
P530 P515
TP3
TP2
TP11
TP10
P511 LED4 LED5 P513
TP13
JP2 TP9
TP8 TP6
TP7 LED3
TP1
P518 TP12 P514
TP5 LED2
P517
P531 P528 P529 P516 P521
LED1
G085261
6. Electrical parts
! Function
• Controls each electrical part of the processor section.
• Controls the Paper Sensor 1 and Paper Sensor 2 of the colorimeter unit.
• Communicates between the colorimeter and processor control PCB
! Reference
wiring
☞ 63200 ☞ 4203 -

• Backup the system data. ☞ 35400
• Check the setting of the DIP switch. -
• Check the jumper connector. -
• Load the system data. ☞ 35400
IMPORTANT
• Only for F specification, the following error messages may appear in a specific condition after initializing the data.
☞ No. 05905[F], ☞ No. 05906[F] , ☞ No. 05907[F]
66200 1/3
66200
• On this PCB, the optical fiber cables are connected to the connectors J517 (IN) and J518 (OUT). Be sure to read the
Precautions for handling the optical fiber cable and LVDS cable, then work properly. ☞ 68100
! Unused connector
P512 Digital flowmeter Option
P520 • [N] specification: unused
• [SM] specification: connecting to SM I/O PCB
• [J] specification: connecting to tablet replenishment driver PCB
• [F] specification: connecting to F replenishment I/O PCB
P521 • [N][SM] [J] specifications: unused
• [F] specification: connecting to the temperature and humidity
sensor
P526, P527, P528, P529, P530 • [F][N][SM][J] specifications: unused
P531, JP2 • [F][N][SM][J] specifications: unused
IMPORTANT

turned on.
turned on.
6. Electrical parts
turned on.
turned on.
LED5 DC12 V input check On when the power supply is
turned on.

TP1 Ground − −
TP2*1 Unused − −
*1
TP3 Unused − −
TP4 Ground − −
TP5 DC24 V voltage measurement • Connection failure between processor power • The order distinguish LED
• Order distinguish LED PCB, sensor supply 1 and processor control PCB PCB does not emit light.
power supply, analog power supply • Failure in processor power supply 1 and • The colorimeter does not
(DC12 V), colorimeter power supply processor control PCB work.
(DC12-1 V) and thermosensor analog • It shorted out between the processor control • The order distinguish LED
power supply (DC12 V) PCB and order distinguish LED PCB PCB does not emit light.
• The temperatures of the
processing solution
temperature sensor and
dryer tthermosensor cannot
be adjusted.
TP6 DC5 V voltage measurement • Connection failure between processor power • ☞ No. 06901 ARCNET
• Power supply for digital circuits such supply 1 and processor control PCB communication error.
as FPGA, memory and CPU • Failure in processor power supply 1 and occurs.
processor control PCB
• It shorted out between the processor control
PCB and each sensor.
66200 2/3
66200

TP7 DC+12 V voltage measurement • Processor control PCB failure • The temperatures of the
• Paper sensor (right, center, left), dryer • It shorted out between the processor control processing solution
select sensor, processing solution PCB and paper sensor (right, center, left), temperature sensor and
thermosensor, dryer thermosensor dryer select sensor. dryer tthermosensor cannot
power supply be adjusted.
• Analog power supply
TP8 Ground − −
TP9 DC + 5 V analog voltage measurement • Processor control PCB failure • The temperatures of the
(analog) processing solution
• Power supply of the processing temperature sensor and
solution temperature sensor, dryer dryer tthermosensor cannot
thermosensor be adjusted.
• Analog power supply
*
TP10 Thermosensor input voltage measurement − −
1
TP11 DC 2.5 V voltage measurement • Processor control PCB failure • The temperatures of the
• Thermosensor standard voltage processing solution
measurement temperature sensor and
be adjusted.
TP12 DC 1.0 V voltage measurement • Processor control PCB failure • The temperatures of the
• Thermosensor standard voltage • It shorted out between the processor control processing solution
measurement PCB and processing solution thermosensor. temperature sensor and
• It shorted out between the processor control
be adjusted.
PCB and dryer thermosensor.
TP13 DC12 V voltage measurement • Processor control PCB failure • The colorimeter does not
• Colorimeter power supply • It shorted out between the processor control work.
6. Electrical parts
PCB and colorimeter.
*1. Cannot use the voltmeter.

2 OFF
3 OFF
4 OFF
Jumper No. Settings Open Short Remarks

JP2 Open When operated Unused Be sure to set to open.
66200 3/3
66210
Processor I/O PCB 1 (J391468)
TP6
LED6 LED7
LED18
LED4
TP3 TP5
X12
X13
LED16 LED17 LED13 LED20
TP4
LED14
LED15 IC303
LED19
LED5
LED8 LED9 LED10

LED11 LED1 LED2 LED3
TP1 TP2
G085259
! Function
• Controls each electrical part of the processor section.
! Reference
wiring
6. Electrical parts
☞ 63200 ☞ 4203 ☞ 4252

• None
! Unused connector
P671 Separated replenishment tank Option
P672 [N] [SM] [F] specifications: unused
• [J] specification: connecting to the STB tablet conveyor motor and the tablet
replenishment driver PCB
P673 Hour meter Option
P675 [N] [SM] [J] [F] specifications: unused
P676 [N] [J] [F] specifications: unused
• [SM] specification: connecting to CD circulation pump
P677 • [SM]: unused
• [N] [J] [F] specifications: connecting to CD circulation pump
P683 • [SM] [F] specifications: unused
• [N] specification: connecting to replenishment pump
• [J] specification: connecting to water supply pump
P684 [N][J] specifications: unused
• [SM]: connecting to SM I/O PCB
• [F] specification: connecting to F replenishment I/O PCB
66210 1/3
66210

P685 • [SM][F] specifications: unused
• [N] specification: connecting to refilling water pump
• [J] specification: connecting to cleaning pump 1
P688 • [SM] [F] specifications: unused
• [N] specification: connecting to # # # replenishment solution level sensor and
refilling water tank level sensor
• [J] specification: connecting to SW/DW tank level sensor and SW tank level
sensor
P691, P692, P700 [N] [SM] [J] [F] specifications: unused
P701 Signal lamp Option
IMPORTANT

LED1 • [N] [SM] specifications: unused • [N] [SM] specifications: unused
• [J] specification: SSR18 operation check (CD water supply • [J] [F] specifications: ON during
pump) operation
• [F] specification: SSR18 operation check (P1R replenisher
pump)
• [J] specification: SSR19 operation check (CD water supply • [J] [F] specifications: ON during
pump) operation
• [F] specification: SSR19 operation check (P2RA replenisher
6. Electrical parts
pump)
• [J] specification: SSR20 operation check (STB water supply • [J] [F] specifications: ON during
pump) operation
• [F] specification: SSR20 operation check (P2RB replenisher
pump)
LED4 Signal lamp (Optional) • [ON] when the switch is on
LED5 • [SM] specification: CD circulation amount check • [SM] specification: ON when CD
• [N] [J] [F] specifications: unused circulation amount has decreased
• [N] [J] [F] specifications: unused
LED6 Relay X13 operation check OFF when the effluent float switch is turned
on
Relay X13 [ON] when the switch is on
LED7 Relay X12 operation check (program timer) OFF when the program timer operates.
LED8 Exhaust fan operation check ON during operation
LED9 Drive motor cooling fan operation check ON during operation
LED10 Tank cooling fan operation check ON during operation
LED11 Unused
LED13 Conveyor motor reverse operation check ON during operation
LED14 Conveyor motor forward operation check ON during operation
LED15 Sorter motor operation check ON during operation
LED16 • [N] specification: refilling water pump and cleaning pump The LED status during operation is shown
LED17 operation check in the table.*1
LED18 • [J] specification: cleaning pump operation check
• [SM][F] specifications: unused
LED19 DC+24 V power supply check On when the power supply is turned on.
66210 2/3
66210

LED20 DC+5 V power supply check On when the power supply is turned on.
*1. Table (You can check whether the pump is working by ON/OFF of LED16, 17 and 18.)
CD−W BF−W STB1−W STB2−W STB3−W STB4−W

Refilling water Refilling water Refilling water Refilling water Refilling water Refilling water
pump pump pump pump pump pump
LED16 On Off On Off On Off
LED17 Off On On Off Off On
LED18 Off Off Off On On On
Cleaning pump
LED16 On
LED17 On
LED18 On

TP1 AC+24 V voltage measurement Possible
TP2 AC+24 V voltage measurement Possible
TP3 DC+5 V power supply measurement Possible
TP5 Ground Possible
TP6 Ground Possible

F14 T6.3 A/125 V DC+24 V power voltage protection
6. Electrical parts
F15 T6.3 A/125 V DC+24 V power voltage protection
F16 T3.15 A/125 V AC+24 V power supply protection
66210 3/3
66211
Processor I/O PCB 2 (J391490)
LED2
TP1 LED1
TP4
F70 P905
LED3
TP2
P903 P904 P906 TP3
G085224
! Function
• Controls the Paper Advance Motor, Calibration Plate Advance Motor, Pressure Change Solenoid and Colorimeter Cooling
Fan of the colorimeter unit.
• Controls the Dryer selection solenoid 2 of the dryer rack.
! Reference
wiring
☞ 63200 ☞ 4203 ☞ 4252

• None
6. Electrical parts
! Unused connector
Not in use
IMPORTANT

LED1 Checks the set attaching condition of the • On when the colorimeter unit is attached.
colorimeter unit • Off when the colorimeter unit is removed.

TP1 Ground Possible
TP3 DC+5 V power supply Possible Not mounted
measurement

F70 T5A/127 V DC+24 V protection
66211 1/1
66220
Processor relay PCB (J391466)
X6 X5 X8
X7
SSR4 SSR8 SSR6 SSR7
X10
SSR5 SSR1 SSR2 SSR3
F15
X9
6. Electrical parts
X2 X11 X1 X3 X4
G085257
! Function
• Changes the power supply specifications.
• Supplies power to each unit.
Dryer heater, processing solution heater, dryer fan, and drive motor
• Protects the power surge.
• Supplies the power of AC 200 V line.
! Reference
wiring
☞ 63200 ☞ 4203 ☞ 4252
66220 1/3
66220
• Even if the circuit breaker of the machine is turned off, voltage is applied to terminal TA3 on processor relay PCB. If
processor relay PCB is to be replaced, be sure to turn off the circuit breaker of the main power supply.
• Wire the terminal strip TA3 according to the voltage specification of the main body.
• Check the voltages of P642, P645, P658, and P661.
IMPORTANT
• Replace the connector so that the voltage described on the connector lower part matches the applied one.
! Unused connector
P647 Unused The starter jumper is connected at forced startup.

LED1 SSR1 operation check (CD heater) ON during operation
LED2 SSR2 operation check (BF heater) ON during operation
LED3 SSR3 operation check (STB heater) ON during operation
LED4 SSR4 and 6 operation check (dryer heater 1) ON during operation
LED5 SSR5 and 7 operation check (dryer heater 2) ON during operation
LED6 SSR8 operation check (dryer heater 3) ON during operation
LED7 Relays X6 and X7 operation check (processing solution float switch) ON during operation
6. Electrical parts
LED8 Relay X1 operation check (processing solution float switch safety thermostat) ON during operation
LED9 Relay X10 operation check (printer main relay) ON during operation
LED10 Relay X8 operation check (dryer cover) ON during operation
LED11 Relay X5 operation check (processor top cover) ON during operation
LED12 Relays X2, 3 and 4 operation check (dryer safety thermostat) ON during operation
LED13 Relay X9 operation check (dryer fan) ON during operation
LED14 DC+24 V power supply check On when the power supply is
turned on.

TP2 Ground Possible
TP3 Ground Possible

FL1 T5 A/250 V Protection circuit for power surges Cannot be replaced.
F1 T10 A/250 V Dryer heater
F2 T10 A/250 V Processing solution heater
F4 T6.3 A/250 V Dryer heater
F5 T3.15 A/250 V CD heater
F6 T3.15 A/250 V BF heater
F7 T5 A/250 V STB heater
66220 2/3
66220

F9 T6.3 A/250 V Dryer heater
F12 T3.15 A/250 V Dryer fan
6. Electrical parts
66220 3/3
66500
Tablet replenishment driver PCB (J391351) [J]
G050714
! Function
• Supplies the power to each sensor of the tablet replenishment section and relays the input signal.
• Lights LEDs, drives motors and relays output signals on the tablet replenishment section
! Reference
wiring
☞ 63200 - -

• None
6. Electrical parts
! Unused connector
• None

LED3 Relay X22 operation check On when the power supply is turned on.

G Ground Possible

F25 T3.15 A/125 V DC+24 V power supply
protection
66500 1/1
66600
SM I/O PCB (J391191, J391378) [SM]
Unused
G070013
NOTE
• SM I/O PCB J390330 does not comply with the RoHS directive.
6. Electrical parts
! Function
• Supplies the power to each sensor of the SM replenishment section and relays the input signal.
• Drives each replenisher pump and water supply pump of the SM replenishment section and relays the output signal.
! Reference
wiring
☞ 63200 - -

• Adjust the sensitivity of the replenishment solution sensor, after replacing the PCB. ☞ 27830
NOTE
• Adjustment methods after replacement are different between SM I/O PCBs J391191, J390330 and J391378.
! Unused connector
P606 Unused

LED1 CD−A replenishment solution presence check ON when there is replenishment solution.
66600 1/2
66600

LED2 CD−B replenishment solution presence check ON when there is replenishment solution.
LED3 CD−C replenishment solution presence check ON when there is replenishment solution.
LED4 STB replenishment solution presence check ON when there is replenishment solution.
LED5 BF−A replenishment solution presence check ON when there is replenishment solution.
LED6 BF−B replenishment solution presence check ON when there is replenishment solution.
LED8 DC+24 V−A input check On when the power supply is turned on.
LED9 DC+24 V−B input check On when the power supply is turned on.
LED10 SSR12 operation check (CD−A replenisher ON during operation
pump)
LED11 SSR13 operation check (CD−B replenisher ON during operation
pump)
LED12 SSR14 operation check (CD−C replenisher ON during operation
pump)
LED13 SSR15 operation check (BF−A replenisher ON during operation
pump)
LED14 SSR16 operation check (BF−B replenisher pump) ON during operation
LED15 SSR17 operation check (STB replenisher pump) ON during operation

TP2 DC+24 V−A voltage Possible
measurement
TP3 DC+24 V−B voltage Possible
measurement
TPG1 Ground Possible
6. Electrical parts
TPG2 Ground Possible
VR No. Purpose Remarks

VR1 CD−A replenishment solution sensor sensitivity
adjustment
VR2 CD−B replenishment solution sensor sensitivity
adjustment
VR3 CD−C replenishment solution sensor sensitivity
adjustment
VR4 STB replenishment solution sensor sensitivity
adjustment
VR5 BF−A replenishment solution sensor sensitivity
adjustment
VR6 BF−B replenishment solution sensor sensitivity
adjustment
66600 2/2
66800
F replenishment I/O PCB (J391322) [F]
P601 P596 P604 P603

P609
P600
TP5 TP3
LED3
P599
LED2 LED7 P605

P606
TP4 LED6 LED5 LED4

TP2
LED1
TP1
F60 P607 P602 P608 P597 P598

Unused
G085943
! Function
6. Electrical parts
• Drives motor, each solenoid valve, replenisher pump and water supply pump of the F replenishment section, and relays the output
signal.
• Detects the solution level of the replenishment tank and controls the interlock switch (replenisher section door).
! Reference
wiring
☞ 63200 - -

• None
! Unused connector
P608, P609 Unused

LED1 DC+24 V−A input check On when the power supply is turned on.
LED2 DC+24 V−B input check On when the power supply is turned on.
LED3 DC5 V input check On when the power supply is turned on.
LED4 P2RA Replenisher Pump and P2RB Replenisher Pump ON
performance check OFF
66800 1/2
66800

LED5, LED6 Unused
LED7 Interlock Switch (Replenisher Section Door): ON/OFF ON
check OFF

voltmeter
TP1 DC+24 V−A voltage measurement Possible
TP2 DC+24 V−B voltage measurement Possible
TP4G Ground Possible
TP5G DC+5 V Ground Possible
Fuse No. Rating Purpose

F60 T5 A/250 V PCB protection
6. Electrical parts
66800 2/2
66810
Control strip driver PCB (J391422)
P3 CN1
P5
P1 P4 DS1
P2
G085070
! Function
• Communicates with the processor control PCB and processes control strips.
! Reference
wiring
☞ 63315 - -

• None
! Unused connector
6. Electrical parts
P4, CN1 Unused

2 OFF Unused
66810 1/1
66820
Control strip communication PCB (J391404)
P823
CN1
P824
DS1
P822
G085071
! Function
• Relays communication between the auto insertion holder unit and the processor control PCB
! Reference
Layout diagram Symptom due to the poor Symptoms of fuse blowout
connection of wiring
6. Electrical parts
• Control strip auto loading unit: ☞ 63315 - -
• Communication unit: ☞ 63316

• None
! Unused connector
P824, CN1 Unused

2 OFF Unused
66820 1/1
66830
Infrared communication unit
Control strip auto loading unit Communication unit
Infrared communication unit: W413078 Infrared communication unit: W413080
without sticker with sticker: J/P823
G085190
! Reference
Layout diagram Symptom due to the poor Symptoms of fuse blowout
connection of wiring
• Control strip auto loading unit: ☞ 63315 - -
• Communication unit: ☞ 63316

• Infrared communication unit can be used both for the control strip auto loading unit and communication unit.
NOTE
• The part number of the infrared communication unit depends on a sticker.
6. Electrical parts
• The infrared communication unit contains a infrared communication PCB and the cable as a set.
! Unused connector
None
! Function
• Communicate by the infrared rays with control strip auto loading unit and communication unit
66830 1/1
66840
Order specifying LED PCB 1 (J490423)
P870 LED1
G085074
! Function
• Indication of prioritized order on the top rack
! Reference
wiring
☞ 63271 - -
6. Electrical parts
• None

LED1 Indication of prioritized order on the top rack Prioritized order being output: blinks in orange
After prioritized order ejection: lights in orange
66840 1/1
66850
Front
LED12 LED72 LED24 LED84 LED36 LED96 LED48 LED108 LED60 LED120
Back
P869 P868
G085075
! Function
• Indication of prioritized order from the second rack through the eleventh rack
6. Electrical parts
• Indication of split order from the second rack through the eleventh rack
NOTE
• The order specifying LED PCB 2 is only for the print sorter unit (6-inch type/14 orders).
! Reference
wiring
☞ 63271 - -

• None
! Unused connector
• None

LED1 to 6 Indication of prioritized order on the second rack Prioritized order being output: blinks in orange
LED7 to 12 Indication of prioritized order on the third rack Prioritized order ejection complete: lights in orange
LED13 to 18 Indication of prioritized order on the fourth rack
LED19 to 24 Indication of prioritized order on the fifth rack
LED25 to 30 Indication of prioritized order on the sixth rack
LED31 to 36 Indication of prioritized order on the seventh rack
LED37 to 42 Indication of prioritized order on the eighth rack
66850 1/2
66850

LED43 to 48 Indication of prioritized order on the ninth rack
LED49 to 54 Indication of prioritized order on the tenth rack
LED55 to 60 Indication of prioritized order on the eleventh rack
LED61 to 66 Indication of prioritized order on the second rack Output of split order: lights in blue
LED67 to 72 Indication of prioritized order on the third rack
LED109 to 114 Indication of prioritized order on the tenth rack
LED115 to 120 Indication of prioritized order on the eleventh rack
6. Electrical parts
66850 2/2
66860
Front
LED12 LED60 LED24 LED72 LED36 LED84 LED48 LED96


Back
P869 P868
G085076
! Function
• Indication of prioritized order from the second rack through the ninth rack
6. Electrical parts
• Indication of split order from the second rack through the ninth rack
NOTE
• The order specifying LED PCB 3 is only for the print sorter unit (6-inch type/17 orders).
! Reference
wiring
☞ 63271 - -

• None
! Unused connector
• None
66860 1/2
66860

LED1 to 6 Indication of prioritized order on the second rack Prioritized order being output: blinks in orange
LED7 to 12 Indication of prioritized order on the third rack Prioritized order ejection complete: lights in orange
LED49 to 54 Indication of prioritized order on the second rack Output of split order: lights in blue
LED55 to 60 Indication of prioritized order on the third rack
6. Electrical parts
66860 2/2
66870
Drive motor driver PCB (I123279)
LED1 VR2 VR1
CN2(P771) CN3
CN1(P770) CN4
G085374
! Function
• Controls the drive motor.
NOTE
• The drive motor driver PCB is installed only in the QSS-3704, QSS-3705, LP7700 and LP7900.
! Reference
wiring
☞ 63201-5 ☞ 4203 -
6. Electrical parts
! Unused connector
• None

• If the drive motor has problems, LED1 blinks as shown below.
NOTE
• LED1 blinks for 0.3 seconds × the number of times shown in each parenthesis below at 1.5-minute intervals.
LED No. LED1 blinking

Status
status
LED1 On Normal
(2 ) Load exceeding the rated torque is applied on the drive motor for five seconds or more.
(3 ) Cables of the drive motor may be broken.
(4 ) Voltage applied on the drive motor driver PCB exceeds DC24 V by about 15%.
(5 ) Voltage applied on the drive motor driver PCB falls under DC24 V by about 25%.
(6 ) Abnormal rotation speed of the drive motor is detected.
66870 1/1
67400
Power supply (processor)
CN2(792)
PS1
VR
VR
CN1(791)
G085241
! Function
Symbol Name Part No. Function
PS1 Processor power supply 1 I038401 • Supplies power (DC+5 V) to the processor control PCB and processor
I/O PCB 1.
• Supplies power to the processor relay PCB (DC+24 V).
PS2 Processor power supply 2 I038402 • Supplies power (DC+24 V) to the processor control PCB, processor I/O
I038405*1 PCB 1 and processor I/O PCB 2.
• Supplies power to the F replenishment I/O PCB (DC+24 V).
6. Electrical parts
IMPORTANT
• Each power supply is equipped with the overvoltage and overheat protection functions. If the functions operate, turn
off the circuit breaker of the system and wait for a while, then turn it on again. If the overheat protection function is
operated, check if each cooling fan is in operation.
! Reference
wiring
☞ 63200 ☞ 4203 -

! Unused connector
• None

Fuse
Power supply Fuse No. Purpose Remarks
Processor power supply 1 F1 AC 200 V power supply Cannot be replaced.
protection
Processor power supply 2 F1 AC 200 V power supply Cannot be replaced.
protection
67400 1/1
68100
Cables
Cables
Precautions in handling the cables
! PCBs which connect to the LVPECL cable

PCB Name Manual No. Precautions when handling the LVPECL cable
Printer I/F main PCB ☞ 66005 Do not bend the LVPECL cable by R25.4 mm or less.
Laser control PCB ☞ 66010 Lay the cable with a bending radius of at least R50 mm.
LVPECL cable
R25.4mm
! PCBs which connect to the optical fiber cable

PCB Name Manual No. Precautions in handling the cable
Printer I/F main PCB ☞ 66005 • See ☞ The Factor List of the ARCNET Communication
Printer control PCB ☞ 66000 Errors.
Precautions when handling the optical fiber cable
6. Electrical parts
• To remove the optical fiber cable from the PCB, pull the cable straight out while pressing part A in the direction of the arrow. To
connect the cable, push it straight in as far as it will go.
Part A Optical fiber cable

Connector on the PCB
G051007
! The Factor List of the ARCNET Communication Errors

As examples, the following table shows the factors causing the ARCNET communication errors in the market.
The Factor List of the ARCNET Communication Errors

The shavings of the ARCNET cable are piled up in the
connector.
• Suck chips of shaved ARCNET cable sheath with the
aspirator.
• See ☞ Removing chips of shaved cable sheath in the
ARCNET connector.
• See ☞ How to use the aspirator.
The ARCNET cable crumbles or the ARCNET cable's surface

gets sticky.
• Cut the end of ARCNET cable using a fiber cutter.
See ☞ How to use the fiber cutter.
68100 1/7
68100
Cables
The Factor List of the ARCNET Communication Errors

The ARCNET cable is not connected.
The cable is not attached to light receiving or emitting element.
IMPORTANT
• ARCNET communication becomes unstable if the
distance between the ARCNET cable and the light
receiving or emitting element is 0.5 mm or more.
0.5 mm
The ARCNET cable is damaged.

• Replace the ARCNET cable or cut the broken part of the ARCNET cable
cable.
Damaged part
The optical fiber cable is bent by R25 mm or less. ARCNET cable

NOTE
• Lay the cable with a bending radius of at least R50 mm.
6. Electrical parts
68100 2/7
68100
Cables
! Removing chips of shaved cable sheath in the ARCNET connector

To remove chips of shaved cable sheath using the service tool (aspirator), see ☞ How to use the aspirator.
If the service tool is not used

•
ARCNET connector
Chips of shaved cable
If the service tool is not used

1. Remove the ARCNET cable from the connector.
Put the light from a flashlight on the front of connector, and check the inside of the connector.
NOTE
• If the inside of connector cannot be checked with the PCB attached on the system, remove the PCB to check the connector.
There are no chips. There are chips.
6. Electrical parts
2. Remove the chips in the ARCNET connector using the air spray which is for removing dust on films.
IMPORTANT
• Some types of air spray may spout liquid if it is used upside down. Be sure to confirm the usage.
Connectors
3. If chips are not removed in step 2 above, remove the PCB, and make a fillip on the PCB with the connector section facing down.
Connectors
68100 3/7
68100
Cables
! To safely remove the optical fiber cable
IMPORTANT
• Evenly pressing the link section of the connector will slightly release the stopper that holds ARCNET cable inside.
If the stopper is released, the ARCNET cable can be safely removed.
Link section
Stoppers
G082810
• Removing the ARCNET cable while the stopper inside the connector is tightened may shave the cable sheath or
damage the stopper.
In removing the optical fiber cable, understand the structure of the optical fiber connector, and remove the cable while
using the optical fiber cable pushing bar so that the cable and the connector will not get damaged.
ARCNET cable
6. Electrical parts
Chips of shaved ARCNET cable sheath Chips of shaved ARCNET cable sheath
G082809
! How to use the optical fiber cable pushing bar
For precautions for disconnecting the optical fiber cable, see ☞ To safely remove the optical fiber cable.
68100 4/7
68100
Cables
1. Remove the ARCNET cable.

Check point
(1) Press the retainer in the ARCNET Connecter with the optical fiber cable pushing bar.
Retainers
Optical fiber cable pushing bars

G083085
(2) slightly push in the ARCNET cable in the arrow direction.

ARCNET cables
6. Electrical parts
Optical fiber cable pushing bars
G082811
(3) Pull slightly the ARCNET cable to confirm it can be removed, then Remove the ARCNET cable.
IMPORTANT
• If the retainer in the connecter is pressed evenly but still the cable cannot be removed smoothly, keep shifting
the optical fiber cable pushing angle to find the best angle to push cable by the bar so that the cable can be
removed smoothly.
2. Clean inside of the ARCNET connector if necessary.
See ☞ How to use the aspirator.
3. Connect the ARCNET cable.

! How to use the fiber cutter

2. Cut the ARCNET cable.
IMPORTANT
• Cut the ARCNET cable at 15 mm from the end.
68100 5/7
68100
Cables
• To keep the quality of cutting surface, cut the ARCNET cable only once with each hole of the fiber cutter.
Cutting holes
Before cutting (abnormal)

After cutting (normal)
G081991
IMPORTANT
• If the end of ARCNET cable is in the following condition, cut it.
List of ARCNET tools
No. Condition of ARCNET cable Illustration
1 The cable surface is sticky. -
2 The cable surface is thick and soft.
NOTE
• If the cable surface is thick and soft, it may not be inserted into the hole of fiber
cutter.
In this case, cut the ARCNET cable using a nipper or the like, and then cut the
6. Electrical parts
end of the cable with the fiber cutter.
3 The cable surface is shaved.
3. Check the condition of the end of ARCNET cable and that no dust is attached on it.
4. Clean inside of the ARCNET connector if necessary.
See ☞ How to use the aspirator.

! How to use the aspirator
68100 6/7
68100
Cables
2. Attach the front end of aspirator to the connector on ARCNET PCB to suck out the dust.
Dust
Front end of aspirator
Aspirator
G081992

List of ARCNET tools
6. Electrical parts
Tool Part No. Explanation
Optical fiber cable A073143-01 Used to pull out the optical fiber cable.
pushing bar For details about how to use the optical fiber cable pushing bar, see ☞ How to
use the optical fiber cable pushing bar.
Fiber cutter L003100-00 Used to cut the end of ARCNET cable when it is abnormal.
For details about how to use the fiber cutter, see ☞ How to use the fiber cutter.
Aspirator H103007-00 To suck out the dust in the connector on the PCB connected to the ARCNET
cable.
For details about how to use the aspirator, see ☞ How to use the aspirator.
Cable unit*1 W406859-01 To use the ARCNET cable to diagnose the ARCNET PCB (cable length: four
meters)
*1. The ARCNET cable used here is the ARCNET cable that is included in the External PC connecting kit.
68100 7/7
68550
Power ON/OFF
Power ON/OFF
When the power is not supplied (How to use the starter jumper)
! Function
• You can supply power forcibly using the starter jumper when 200 V to 240 V is not supplied during operation.
! Status
• Power supply (200 V to 240 V) is not supplied during operation.
• When the program timer is activated or temperature is being increased, pressing the manual sorter switch for two seconds or
longer does not supply the power (from 200 V to 240 V ).
! Position of the starter jumper

QSS-3701/3702/3703/QSS-3704/3705/LP7500/LP7600/LP7700/LP7900 [N][SM][J] Starter jumper
6. Electrical parts
Processor relay PCB
G077192
QSS-3701/3702/3703/LP7500/LP7600 [F] QSS-3704/3705/LP7700/LP7900 [F]
Starter jumper Starter jumper
Processor relay PCB

↑ Remove the PCB plate
Processor relay PCB
(four screws)
G085264
68550 1/2
68550
Power ON/OFF
! Diagnosis
Does each unit operate?
Not operating Operating
No problem.
Is LED9 on the processor relay PCB on?
On Off
Repair or
replace Check if the connector is connected correctly, or cables are not disconnected.
J/P646 (processor relay PCB) ↔ J/P355 (connecting) ↔ J/P238 (printer I/O PCB 1)
J/P646 (processor relay PCB) ↔ J/P355 (connecting) ↔ J/P433 (laser power supply), J/P432
(printer power supply 5)
There is a
problem.
Check the Processor relay PCB.
No problem.
Check if the connector is connected correctly, or cables are not disconnected.

J/P690 (processor relay PCB) ↔ J/P794 (processor power supply 2)
There is a Check whether there is blown fuse.

problem. F14, F15 (125 V/6.3 A) (processor relay PCB)
Check the Processor relay PCB.
6. Electrical parts
No problem.
Turn off the power supply and attach the starter jumper on the connector (P647) of processor relay PCB. Make
the main relay between 200 V and 240 V turn ON forcibly.
Check the version of processor via System Version Check.
Version cannot be checked. Version can be checked.
Upgrade the software.

Turn off the power and remove the starter jumper. Turn on the power
again, and then check that LED9 of the processor relay PCB is ON.
On
Off
Processor control PCB failure
68550 2/2
7000
Setup for service personnel ................................................................................................. 70010

Setup during installation ....................................................................................................................................70010
7 Setup for service personnel
7000 1/1
70010
Setup for service personnel
Setup for service personnel
Setup during installation
! Procedures
For confirmation and adjustment procedures during installation, see ☞ Installation Manual.
70010 1/1
8000
8. Appendix
Periodically replaced parts .................................................................................................. 80110

List of maintenance/periodically replaced parts/consumable parts ...................................................................80110
Service personnel tool list .................................................................................................... 80310
Service personnel tool list ..................................................................................................................................80310
Table of wiring diagrams ..................................................................................................... 89000
Table of wiring diagrams ...................................................................................................................................89000
8 Appendix
8000 1/1
80110
Periodically replaced parts
List of maintenance/periodically replaced parts/consumable parts
The list below shows maintenance items and parts required to be performed or replaced by user or service personnel to keep the system
quality.
Check the actual processing hours and number of prints using the hour meter and the print counter.
IMPORTANT
• For the maintenance parts, regularly check them and replace them if necessary.
Some parts need to be replaced according to the processing time or the number of processed prints. The replacement
timing varies depending on the operating condition of the system.
Since the replacement timing is the rough standard, you need not necessarily replace the parts at the specified timing.
• For the periodically replaced parts, replace them when the processing time or the number of prints processed reaches the
specified value regardless of the condition of the parts.
• The numerical values below do not show any warranty period.
NOTE
• The hour meter and the print counter are optional on the systems which are to be shipped outside Japan.
! List of maintenance
For the procedure of maintenance by users, refer to Maintenance Manual.
Printer section (common)
Parts or checking items Description for maintenance Part No. Timing/Standard Quantity
replacement
timing
Paper supply unit Check whether it cuts well and replace it - As needed 1
Manual cutter if dull.
Paper supply unit Check whether it cuts well and replace it H076033 1,500,000 prints 1
Paper cutter unit if dull.
Maintenance parts
Replace it approx. every 1,500,000 prints
by the print counter.
CVP unit Check the printing condition and replace I086167 2,700,000 prints 1
Dot head unit it if any dots are missing. (This is a
maintenance part. Replace it when the
print counter reaches approximately
2700000.)
Processor section (PP7500/PP7600/QSS-3701/3702[N[ [SM] [J[ [F], PP-7900/QSS-3703 [N[ [SM] [J[ [F])
8. Appendix
replacement
timing
Upper guide Check its damage or wear. If it is A087423 Three years • [F]: 1
Turn roller (EPDM) (No. 2 damaged or worn, replace it with a new • [N]: 3
upper guide) one.
• [SM][J]: 3
Check it every six months after three
years has passed. If necessary, replace it B023926 • [F]: 1
with a new one. • [N]: 0
• [SM][J]: 0
B024363 • [F]: 1
• [N]: 0
• [SM][J]: 0
B024364 • [F]: 1
• [N]: 0
• [SM][J]: 0
80110 1/6
80110
replacement
timing
Upper guide Check its damage or wear. If it is A032741 Three years 4
Bearing (upper guide No.2) damaged or worn, replace it with a new A032742 4
one.
Upper guide A050698 1
Gear (upper guide No. 2)
years has passed. If necessary, replace it
with a new one.
Upper guide Check its damage or wear. If it is A032741 Three years 4 each
Bearing (upper guides No.3 to 6) damaged or worn, replace it with a new A032742 4 each
one.
Upper guide A050698 1 each
Gear (upper guides No. 3 to 6)
with a new one.
Turn roller (squeegee roller) damaged or worn, replace it with a new [N]: 1
one. [SM][J]: 1
Check it every six months after three A087421 • [F]: 0
years has passed. If necessary, replace it [N]: 1
with a new one. [SM][J]: 1
A087419 • [F]: 1
[N]: 0
[SM][J]: 0
Bearing (squeezee roller) damaged or worn, replace it with a new A032742 4
one.
Gear (squeegee roller)
with a new one.
Processing rack section Check its damage or wear. If it is A050696 Three years 6
Gear damaged or worn, replace it with a new A050695 6
one.
Processing rack section A051198 • [F]: 3
(PP7500/PP7600/QSS- [[F][N][SM][J]: 6
3701/3702) A084428 • [F]: 3
with a new one.
Roller holder [[F][N][SM][J]: 0
Processing rack section (PP- A051198 • [F]: 4
7900/QSS-3703) [[F][N][SM][J]: 6
Roller holder
8. Appendix
A084428 • [F]: 2
[[F][N][SM][J]: 0
Replenisher pump Check its damage. If it is damaged, I091040 Three years • [F]: 2
Poppet valve (fluoro rubber) replace it with a new one. • [SM]: 8
• CP-47L, VPII, QLII,
ACPII: 2
with a new one.
Poppet valve (EPDM) replace it with a new one. • [N]: 6
• [SM]: 2
with a new one. • [J]:6
ACPII: 4
80110 2/6
80110
Processor section (common to the PP7700/QSS-3704[N] [SM] [F])

replacement
timing
Poppet valve (fluoro rubber) replace it with a new one. • [SM]: 8
ACPII: 2
with a new one.
• ACPII: 4
Poppet valve (EPDM) replace it with a new one. • [N]: 6
• [SM]: 2
with a new one. • [J]:6
ACPII: 4
Processor section (QSS-3701/3702[N])

replacement
timing
Turn roller (EPDM) (No. 3 damaged or worn, replace it with a new
upper guide) one.
with a new one.
one.
with a new one.
one.
8. Appendix
with a new one.
Turn roller (squeegee roller) damaged or worn, replace it with a new A087421 1
one.
with a new one.
one.
with a new one.
one.
Processing rack section A051198 8
Roller holder
with a new one.
80110 3/6
80110
Processor section (PP7700/QSS-3704[F] [SM])

replacement
timing
Turn roller (EPDM) (No. 2 damaged or worn, replace it with a new • [SM]: 3
upper guide) one.
B024363 • [F]: 1
years has passed. If necessary, replace it • [SM]: 0
with a new one.
one.
with a new one.
one.
with a new one.
Upper guide Check its damage or wear. If it is A083186 Three years • [SM]: 1
Turn roller (squeegee roller) damaged or worn, replace it with a new A087421 • [SM]: 1
one.
A087419 • [F]: 2
with a new one.
one.
with a new one.
one.
Roller holder
with a new one.
Processor section (common to PP7900/QSS-3705 [F] [EC]) 8. Appendix

replacement
timing
Replenisher pump Check its damage. If it is damaged, I091003 Two years 6
Poppet valve (EPDM) replace it with a new one.
with a new one.
80110 4/6
80110
Processor section (QSS-3705 [EC])

replacement
timing
Turn roller (EPDM) (No. 3 damaged or worn, replace it with a new
upper guide) one.
with a new one.
Upper guide Check its damage or wear. If it is A032741 Two years 4
one.
with a new one.
Upper guide Check its damage or wear. If it is A032741 Two years 4 each
one.
with a new one.
Turn roller (squeegee roller) damaged or worn, replace it with a new A087421 1
one.
with a new one.
one.
with a new one.
Processing rack section Check its damage or wear. If it is A050696 Two years 8
one.
Roller holder
with a new one.
Processor section (PP7900/QSS-3705 [F]) 8. Appendix

replacement
timing
Turn roller (EPDM) (No. 2 damaged or worn, replace it with a new B024363 1
upper guide) one.
with a new one.
one.
with a new one.
80110 5/6
80110
replacement
timing
Upper guide Check its damage or wear. If it is A032741 Two years 4 each
one.
with a new one.
Turn roller (squeegee roller) damaged or worn, replace it with a new
one.
with a new one.
one.
with a new one.
Processing rack section Check its damage or wear. If it is A050696 Two years 6
one.
Roller holder
with a new one.
! List of periodically replaced parts

Part name Part No. Quantit Recommended timing of replacement
y
Calibration plate unit B Z026559 1 2 years (When the performance of calibration plate
falls due to the storage status, it is necessary to
replace the plate even if it is before from the
recommended timing of replacement)
Cleaning sheet H089041 1 If the surface of cleaning sheet becomes dirty and
adhesive power is lost, change it with a new sheet.
Replenisher section [SM] A054659 1 One year
8. Appendix
Probe (2) assembly (CD-C only)
Replenisher section [SM] A054658 5 One year
Probe (1) assembly (Except CD-C)
Replenishment pump [SM] I091040 2 One year
Poppet valve (STB only)
! List of consumable parts
! CVP unit (option)

Part name Part No. Quantity Reference Reason for maintenance/replacement
value of
consumption
Ink ribbon cassette H086044 1 100000 prints If it runs out of ink, back print may not be
printed normally.
80110 6/6
80310
Service personnel tool list
NOTE
• For details about service personnel tools related to film carrier like scanner adjustment chart, refer to the Scanner Service Manual.
(Printer section)
Head adjusting jig A050486-01 Used to adjust the CVP printing pressure.
Optical fiber cable pushing bar A073143-01 Used to pull out the optical fiber cable.
For details about how to use the optical fiber cable pushing bar, see
☞ How to use the optical fiber cable pushing bar in 68100
Loupe H099047-00 Used to adjust the exposure position.
Fiber cutter L003100-00 Used to cut the end of ARCNET cable when it is abnormal.
For details about how to use the fiber cutter, refer to 68100 ☞ How
to use the fiber cutter.
Aspirator H103007-00 To suck out the dust in the connector on the PCB connected to the
ARCNET cable.
For details about how to use the aspirator, refer to ☞ How to use
the aspirator in 68100.
(Processor section)
Colorimeter height adjustment jig A076430-01 Used to adjust the height of measuring point of the colorimeter.
Grounding resistance measurement cable unit W407756-01 Used to check the grounding resistance between input section and
printer section or processor section.
Air exhaust tool (pipe type) assembly A050400-01 Used when installing the SM specification and replacing the
replenisher pump. (compatible with the conventional SM systems)
Probe replacing jig A053235-01 Used when replacing the probe. (compatible with the conventional
SM systems)
Hose H121232 Use this to operate each automated flushing valve and auto cleaning
pump in Output Check. (only F)
8. Appendix
80310 1/1
89000
Table of wiring diagrams
To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.
Block No. Item Diagram No.

- System connection diagram J310593
! Printer section
LP 1-1 AC power supply circuit diagram J310374
LP 1-2 DC power supply circuit diagram (1) J310375
LP 1-3 DC power supply circuit diagram (2) J310376
LP 2-1 AC power supply connecting J310377

LP 2-2 DC power supply connecting J310378
LP 2-3 Around printer control PCB J310380
LP 2-4 Around printer I/O PCB 1 J310381
LP 2-7 Around triple magazine PCB J310384
LP 2-8 Correction value printing unit J310385
LP 2-9 Around laser unit (type HhB) J310386
LP 2-9 Around laser unit (type IiB) J310627
LP 2-10 Around quad magazine PCB J310387
LP 2-11 Around printer I/F PCB J310379
LP 3-1 Frame section SEQ0107

LP 3-2 Magazine mount unit SEQ0108
LP 3-3 Paper supply unit (1) SEQ0109
LP 3-4 Paper supply unit (2) SEQ0110
LP 3-5 Exposure advance unit (1) SEQ0111
LP 3-6 Exposure advance unit (2) SEQ0112
LP 3-7 Paper advance unit 1 SEQ0113
LP 3-8 Paper advance unit 2 (1) SEQ0114
8. Appendix
LP 3-11 Laser unit (1) SEQ0117
LP 3-12 Laser unit (2) SEQ0118
LP 3-13 Laser unit (3) (type HhB) SEQ0119
LP 3-13 Laser unit (3) (type IiB) SEQ0201
LP 3-14 Correction value printing unit SEQ0120
LP 3-15 Triple magazine unit SEQ0121
LP 3-16 Quad magazine unit (1) SEQ0122
! Processor section
PP 1-1 AC power source circuit diagram (outside Japan) (QSS-3701/3702/3703/LP7500/LP7600) J310555
PP 1-1 AC power source circuit diagram (outside Japan) (QSS-3704/3705/LP7700/LP7900) J310554
89000 1/4
89000

PP 1-1 AC power source circuit diagram (Japan) (QSS-3701/3702/3703/LP7500/LP7600) J310557
PP 1-1 AC power source circuit diagram (Japan) (QSS-3704/3705/LP7700/LP7900) J310556
PP 1-1 AC power source circuit diagram (Japan, 3P3W) (QSS-3701/3702/3703/LP7500/LP7600) J310594
PP 1-1 AC power source circuit diagram (Japan, 3P3W) (QSS-3704/3705/LP7700/LP7900) J310605
PP 1-2 DC power supply circuit diagram [N] (QSS-3701/3702/3703/3704/3705) J310558
PP 1-2 DC power supply circuit diagram [SM] (QSS-3701/3702/3703/3704/3705) J310559
PP 1-2 DC power supply circuit diagram [J] (QSS-3701/3702/3703) J310560
PP 1-2 DC power supply circuit diagram [F] (QSS- J310561
3701/3702/3703/3704/3705/LP7500/LP7600LP7700/LP7900)
PP 2-1 Around processor relay PCB (QSS-3701/3702/3703/LP7500/LP7600) J310563
PP 2-1 Around processor relay PCB [F][SM] (QSS-3704/3705/LP7700/LP7900) J310562
PP 2-1 Around processor relay PCB [N][EC] (QSS-3704/3705) J310606
PP 2-2 Around processor I/O PCB 1 [N][SM][EC][F] (QSS-3701/3702/3703/LP7500/LP7600) J310566
PP 2-2 Arounc processor I/O PCB 1 [N][SM][EC][F] (QSS-3704/3705/LP7700/LP7900) J310564
PP 2-2 Arounc processor I/O PCB 1 [N][SM][EC][F] (QSS-3704/3705/LP7700/LP7900) J310565
PP 2-3 Around processor I/O PCB, CPU PCB (1) [N] (QSS-3701/3702/3703) J310568
PP 2-3 Around processor I/O PCB, CPU PCB (1) [N] [EC] (QSS-3704/3705) J310607
PP 2-3 Around processor I/O PCB, CPU PCB (1) [SM] (QSS-3701/3702/3703) J310570
PP 2-3 Around processor I/O PCB, CPU PCB (1) [SM] (QSS-3704/3705) J310569
PP 2-3 Around processor I/O PCB, CPU PCB (1) [J] (QSS-3701/3702/3703) J310571
PP 2-3 Around processor I/O PCB, CPU PCB (1) [F] (QSS-3701/3702/3703/LP7500/LP7600) J310573
PP 2-3 Around processor I/O PCB, CPU PCB (1) [F] (QSS-3704/3705/LP7700/LP7900) J310572
PP 2-4 Around processor I/O PCB, CPU PCB (2) (QSS- J310574
3701/3702/3703/3704/3705/LP7500/LP7600LP7700/LP7900)
PP 2-5 Around SMI/O PCB [SM] (QSS-3701/3702/3703/3704/3705) J310575
PP 2-5 Around tablet replenishment unit [J] (QSS-3701/3702/3703) J310576
PP 2-5 Around F replenishment I/O PCB [F] (QSS- J310577
3701/3702/3703/3704/3705/LP7500/LP7600LP7700/LP7900)
PP 2-6 Control strip auto loading unit (QSS- J310578
3701/3702/3703/3704/3705/LP7500/LP7600LP7700/LP7900)
PP 3-1 Temperature control block (1) [N] [EC] (QSS-3701/3702/3703/3704/3705) SEQ0130

PP 3-1 Temperature control block (1) [SM] (QSS-3701/3702/3703/3704/3705) SEQ0131
8. Appendix
PP 3-1 Temperature control block (1) [J] (QSS-3701/3702/3703) SEQ0132
PP 3-1 Temperature control block (1) [F](QSS- SEQ0133
3701/3702/3703/3704/3705/LP7500/LP7600LP7700/LP7900)
PP 3-2 Temperature control block (2) [N][SM][J][EC][F] (QSS- SEQ0134
3701/3702/3703/3704/3705/LP7500/LP7600LP7700/LP7900)
PP 3-3 Processor section [N][SM][J][EC][F] (QSS- SEQ0135
3701/3702/3703/3704/3705/LP7500/LP7600LP7700/LP7900)
PP 3-4 Replenisher section (1) [N][SM][EC][F] (QSS- SEQ0136
3701/3702/3703/3704/3705/LP7500/LP7600LP7700/LP7900)
PP 3-4 Water supply section (1) [J] (QSS-3701/3702/3703) SEQ0137
PP 3-5 Replenisher section (2) [N][SM][EC][F] (QSS- SEQ0138
3701/3702/3703/3704/3705/LP7500/LP7600LP7700/LP7900)
PP 3-5 Water supply section (2) [J] (QSS-3701/3702/3703) SEQ0139
PP 3-6 Effluent block (2) [N][SM][J][EC][F] (QSS- SEQ0140
3701/3702/3703/3704/3705/LP7500/LP7600LP7700/LP7900)
PP 3-7 Drive section [N][SM][J][EC][F] (QSS-3701/3702/3703/LP7500/LP7600) SEQ0141
PP 3-7 Drive section [N][SM][J][EC][F] (QSS-3704/3705/LP7700/LP7900) SEQ0159
PP 3-8 Dryer section (1) [N][SM][J][EC][F] (QSS- SEQ0142
3701/3702/3703/3704/3705/LP7500/LP7600LP7700/LP7900)
89000 2/4
89000

3701/3702/3703/3704/3705/LP7500/LP7600LP7700/LP7900)
3701/3702/3703/3704/3705/LP7500/LP7600LP7700/LP7900)
PP 3-11 Print conveyor section/print sorter unit [N][SM][J][EC][F] (QSS- SEQ0145
3701/3702/3703/3704/3705/LP7500/LP7600LP7700/LP7900)
PP 3-11 Print conveyor section/print sorter unit [N][SM][F] (QSS- SEQ0146
3701/3702/3703/3704/3705/LP7500/LP7600LP7700/LP7900)
PP 3-12 SM replenisher section (1) [SM] (QSS-3701/3702/3703/3704/3705) SEQ0147
PP 3-16 Tablet replenishment section (1) [J] (QSS-3701/3702/3703) SEQ0151
PP 3-17 Tablet replenishment section (2) [J] (QSS-3701/3702/3703) SEQ0152
PP 3-18 F replenisher section (1) [F] (QSS-3701/3702/3703/3704/3705/LP7500/LP7600LP7700/LP7900) SEQ0153
PP 4-1 Around colorimeter unit [N][SM][J][EC][F] (QSS- SEQ0157
3701/3702/3703/3704/3705/LP7500/LP7600LP7700/LP7900)
PP 4-2 Control strip auto loading unit [N][SM][J][EC][F] (QSS- SEQ0158
3701/3702/3703/3704/3705/LP7500/LP7600LP7700/LP7900)
8. Appendix
89000 3/4
89000
8. Appendix
89000 4/4

QSS-37 Series LP7500/LP7600/LP7700/LP7900 Service Manual

Transféré par

Informations du document

Titre original

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

QSS-37 Series LP7500/LP7600/LP7700/LP7900 Service Manual

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Distributed by: minilablaser.

Issued in November, 2007

– for service personnel only –

1.Cautions for work

2.Replacement and adjustment of parts

7.Setup for service personnel

Notes to service personnel

Tapping truss head screw

Spike truss head screw (green)

Washer head screw (for ground)

About the chapters

" 1. Cautions for work

Symbols used in this manual

This is called the alert symbol.

The Note symbol indicates useful information on functions and instructions.

Abbreviations for processing solutions used in this manual

This page is intentionally blank.

1. Cautions for work

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

Exposure advance unit ........................................................................................................... 25810

Tablet replenishment section ................................................................................................. 27610

Processor Standard Setting ................................................................................................... 33500

Printer Mechanical Adjustment .............................................................................................. 36000

Attention message: Processor ............................................................................................... 40500

Attention message: Printer ..................................................................................................... 41000

Error message: Processor 1 .................................................................................................. 45500

Error message: Tablet replenishment .................................................................................... 45600

Error message: F replenishment ............................................................................................ 45900

Error message: Printer 2 ........................................................................................................ 46100

Error message: Printer 3 ........................................................................................................ 46200

Replenishment operation sequence [F] ................................................................................. 57010

Description of PCB (printer section) ....................................................................................... 66000

7. Setup for service personnel

Table of wiring diagrams ........................................................................................................ 89000

1. Cautions for work

Description of warnings (signal words) ................................................................................ 10010

1 Cautions for work

Description of warnings (signal words)

1. Cautions for work

Example of warning label

Symbol (warning indication)

Warning text (warning

Location of warning labels

1. Cautions for work

1. Cautions for work

When the print sorter unit is 8-order type

1. Cautions for work

Quad magazine unit (option)

1. Cautions for work

1. Cautions for work

For safe operation

1. Cautions for work

! Precautions for processing solutions

! Precautions against electric shock

1. Cautions for work

! Precautions for operating rotary section

! Precautions for operating heating section

! Precautions for movable units

1. Cautions for work

! Precautions around cutting parts

• There is a danger of cutting your hands on cutting parts.

Prevention of static electricity when replacing and maintaining the

1. Cautions for work